JP2020092838A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine in which a player can expect a draw back or repetition of a specific game such as an ART in a short period, while maintaining the fairness of games.SOLUTION: A shift to a first game state RT1 can be made due to a termination of an assist replay time ART that includes a specific game during an advantageous state enabling an increase in game media due to the operation of an instruction function. The first game state RT1 does not determine a performance of the specific game even if the advantageous state occurs but enables a shift to a 100G second game state RT2 that determines a performance of the specific game at a relatively high probability when the advantageous state occurs and enables a shift to a third game state RT3 that determines a performance of the specific game at a relatively low probability when the advantageous state occurs.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 125

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a game called a pachi-slot provided with a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of symbols on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") after the game value such as medals and coins has been input, and requests the start of rotation of all reels. To output the signal. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. In addition, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers on the program (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery process”) is performed, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). ") and the timing of the stop operation, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the symbol combination (display combination) relating to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. As an example of the privilege given to the player, a game value (medal etc.) is given, and a re-game (hereinafter also referred to as “replay”) in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game value The operation of a bonus game in which opportunities for giving a game value increase can be cited.

Further, in such a gaming machine, a function of notifying information of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player so as to increase the probability of establishment of a specific winning combination (for example, a winning combination relating to the granting of a gaming value), that is, an assist time (hereinafter , "AT"). Further, when a specific condition such as displaying a specific symbol combination is satisfied, the game state in which the winning probability of replay is higher than the normal time is activated, that is, the replay time (hereinafter referred to as “RT”) Some have functions. Further, there is also one having a function of assist replay time (hereinafter, referred to as “ART”) in which AT and RT are activated at the same time.

Conventionally, as described in Patent Document 1, one advantageous section or the number of games in which an advantageous state can be continued to the maximum, which enables an instruction function for informing the correct pushing order of a pushing order small winning combination, Set a predetermined limit value of 1500 G (G; game) and continue the long-run by adding the number of sets and the number of games to assist replay time ART etc. that activates the instruction function under the high replay probability state. However, if the advantageous section for the ongoing ART and the like exceeds 1500 G from the entry of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and the ART, etc. are also forcibly terminated, and all performances of the instruction function are affected. There is known a game machine that initializes a variable to return to a normal section or a normal state (paragraph 0009, etc.).

When ending one advantageous interval, it is necessary to initialize all variables that affect the performance of the instruction function, so when the number of games counted over multiple advantageous intervals reaches a predetermined number, It is impossible to improve the performance related to the instruction function, such as determining ART as the benefit of the so-called ceiling when the above is generated for a predetermined number of times.

JP, 2018-110808, A

However, making sure to determine the first ART and the second ART under the same conditions, it is possible to return to ART within a relatively short period such as 32 games or 100 games after the end of the first ART. If it is practically impossible to let the ART run together, the interest in the game will be reduced, and if one advantageous section ends with the end of the ART, the player will be notified when the game is stopped. There is a risk that it will reduce the desire to continue playing.

Here, the transition of the second advantageous zone is performed under the same conditions as the first one, but the game state at the end of the first ART, the game state at the end of the advantageous zone transitioned by the end of the first ART, etc. With reference to this, it is possible to make it easier to enter the ART after the second shift to the advantageous section.

However, in this way, "when the advantageous section ends in a specific game state, in that state, when transitioning to the next advantageous section, compared to when transitioning in other game states It is impossible to realize the performance that the performance related to the instruction function is obviously high because it is understood that the advantageous section is not initialized.”

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be expected to be used for pulling back a specific game such as ART or for a continuous holiday resort within a short period of time while maintaining the fairness of the game. It is an issue.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Equipped with an advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
The advantageous state is generated in the first game state (for example, RT1) that can be shifted by the end of the specific game (for example, assist replay time ART) during the advantageous state in which the game medium can be increased by the operation of the instruction function. Even though the execution of the specific game is not determined with a relatively high probability, a second game state (for example, RT2 of 100G, etc.) that determines the execution of the specific game with a relatively high probability when an advantageous state occurs. ), and a transition to a third game state (for example, RT3, etc.) that determines the execution of the specific game with a relatively low probability when an advantageous state is generated. A gaming machine to do.

As a result, after the end of the first specific game, in the first game state, if it is possible to shift to the second game state instead of shifting to the third game state, it is possible to identify the second time with a relatively high probability. The execution of the game is decided. Therefore, the execution of the second specific game can be decided within a short period of time from the end of the first specific game, and there can be an expectation for pulling back the specific game or for the continuous play. Since the first gaming state does not determine the execution of the specific game with a relatively high probability even if the advantageous state occurs, "When the advantageous section ends in the first gaming state, the next advantageous state in the first gaming state In the case of shifting to the section, the performance related to the instruction function in the advantageous section is clear as compared with the case of shifting to the second gaming state in which the execution of the specific game is determined with a relatively high probability in other gaming states. It does not correspond to "higher performance" and keeps the game fair.

In the above gaming machines,
A game machine characterized in that the second game state is allowed to stay for a predetermined finite number of times.
As a result, in the second game state, the execution of the specific game can be determined stably for a finite number of times, and it is possible to effectively bring back to the specific game and an expectation for the extended game.

In each of the above gaming machines,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to shift from a fourth gaming state (for example, RT4 or the like) that enables the specific game to the third gaming state in addition to the first gaming state.

As a result, rather than shifting from the fourth gaming state to the third gaming state, by shifting to the first gaming state, it is possible to determine the execution of the specific game with a relatively high probability when the advantageous state is generated. You can expect to shift to the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the game property that the fourth gaming state desires to shift to the first gaming state instead of the third gaming state.

In each of the above gaming machines,
In the fourth game state that enables the specific game, after the specific game is over, the first game state when a transition triggering role (for example, a falling role) that enables the transition to the first game state is won. The combination information of the transition trigger symbol (for example, the combination of the fall trigger symbol) is not notified, but the winning combination in which the number of acquired game media fluctuates depending on the mode of the stop operation (for example, the pushing order winning combination) Etc.) at the time of winning, the instruction information for increasing the number of game media acquired is notified,
A gaming machine characterized by ending the advantageous state after displaying the combination of the triggers for transition to the first gaming state.
As a result, even if the specific game ends in the fourth game state, the number of acquired game media can be increased until the transition to the first game state, which can enhance the interest of the game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be expected to be used for pulling back a specific game such as ART or for a continuous vacation resort within a short period of time while maintaining the fairness of the game.

It is a figure for explaining the functional flow of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing the appearance structure of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the internal structure of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the internal structure of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing structure of a selector with which a game machine of one embodiment of the present invention is provided. It is a block diagram showing the whole circuit composition with which the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the microprocessor in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram of various registers which the main CPU has in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the memory map of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the security mode of the main control circuit in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state between the bonus state and non-bonus state of the pachi-slot in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state in the non-advantageous section, the normal advantageous section, and the advantageous section of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a symbol arrangement table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an internal lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an internal lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an internal lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing a correspondence of an internal winning combination, a stop operation sequence (a batting order), a display combination, etc. in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a correspondence of an internal winning combination, a stop operation sequence (a batting order), a display combination, etc. in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing composition of a hit demand flag storage area and a winning operation flag storage area in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the internal carryover combination storing area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing composition of a game state flag storage area in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing composition of an operation stop button storage area in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the pressing order storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the symbol code storage area in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing a correspondence of an internal winning combination, a lottery number, and a winning combination number in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a correspondence of an internal winning combination, a lottery number, and a winning combination number in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining the flow of the game in the non-advantageous section in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining the flow of the game in the normal advantage section in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining the flow of the game in the line battle state in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the various tables referred in the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display apparatus in a line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display apparatus in a line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display apparatus in a line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display apparatus in a line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display apparatus in a line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for explaining the flow of the game in the right acquisition lottery state and the right acquisition state in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining the flow of the game in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining ending production performed in the ending 1 state and ending 2 state in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a correspondence of each game state, an internal winning combination, and navigation data in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power-on (reset interruption) performed by the main control circuit of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game return processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the setting change confirmation processing in one embodiment of the present invention. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change command generation/storage process according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of communication data storage processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of communication data pointer update processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power failure (external) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of checksum generation processing (out of regulation) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the sum check processing (out of regulation) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the sum check processing (out of regulation) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main processing (main operation processing) performed by a main control circuit of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of medal acceptance and start check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of medal acceptance and start check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of medal insertion processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of medal insertion check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of medal insertion check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of error processing according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of random number acquisition processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of internal lottery processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of design setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of compressed data storage processing according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a pull-in priority storage processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of design code acquisition processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the logical product operation processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the attraction-in priority acquisition process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the attraction-in priority acquisition process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of reel stop control processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of winning a prize search processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of illegal hit check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of winning check and medal payout processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of medal payout number check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BB check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of RT check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the example of the interruption processing which is executed by the main control circuit of the game machine in one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of communication data transmission processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of WDT setting processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of 7 segment LED drive processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of 7 segment display data generation processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer update processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart showing an example of an operation at the time of turning on the power of the gaming machine in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart showing an example of an operation at the time of inserting a medal of the gaming machine in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram for explaining a production example (No. 1) of the bonus winning combination notification production of the gaming machine in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram for explaining a production example (No. 1) of the bonus winning combination notification production of the gaming machine in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram for explaining a production example (No. 2) of the bonus winning combination notification production of the gaming machine in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram for explaining a production example (No. 2) of the bonus winning combination notification production of the gaming machine in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram for explaining a production example (No. 3) of the bonus winning combination notification production of the gaming machine in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 1) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 1) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 2) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 3) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 4) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 5) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 6) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining other examples (the 6) of game nature of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing another example of a limiter of an advantageous section of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the control method of the number limiter of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the adjustment strike method of the number limiter of the game machine in one embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram of the main CPU of the modified example of [withdrawing during the advantageous section is realized + point management] of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing of the bonus combination of the [Addition lottery system using BB with a setting difference and MB without a setting difference] modification of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the game state of the modified example of [switching the winning rate and the benefit of the advantageous section depending on the RT state at the normal time] of the present invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the game state of a modified example of [data reduction by a symbol combination management method] of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing of the stop control according to the range priority of the [prioritization which took in the new concept regarding symbol drawing] of this invention modification. It is a transition flow figure of the game state of the [RT fall navigation] modification of the present invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the game state of the [system for eliminating ART preparation] modification of the present invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the game state of [ART winning probability variation in the non-advantageous section] modification of the present invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the game state of the [advantageous zone installation machine with a setting difference in RT transition] modification of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing of the addition lottery table according to the number of games between JAC flags of the [addition lottery in the shift type bonus in an advantageous area] modification of this invention. It is an ART lottery table of a modified example of the [addition lottery system during bonus] of the present invention. It is the lottery table of the modified example of [the maximum number of advantageous section games when entering the advantageous section] of the present invention. It is a game explanatory view of a [gaming machine equipped with an advantageous section where it is easy to make a difference in the ratio] of the present invention. It is an internal lottery table during a general game of the [system which gives the difference in the output rate by the same process which does not depend on the result of lottery] of the present invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the game state of the [morning of the advantageous section mounting machine] modification of the present invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the game state of the [ceiling of the advantageous zone mounting machine] modification of the present invention. It is a transition flow figure of the game state of the [periodic chance zone which does not use an advantage section] modification of the present invention. It is the game explanation drawing of the [advantageous section difference acquisition zone] modification of this invention. It is a game lock lottery table of the [new game number management type] modification of the present invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the game state of the [base and advantageous section transition probability operation in each state] modification of the present invention. It is the transition flow diagram of the game state and the game explanatory diagram of a modified example of [AT activation during an advantageous section using a specified number] of the present invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the game state of the [chance zone advantageous section] modification of the present invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the game state of the [advantageous section RT chance zone] modification of the present invention. It is a game period explanatory drawing of the [ceiling function in No. 6 machine] modification of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the game state of the [ST type advantageous section continuation method] modification of the present invention.

A pachi-slot is taken as an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, a pachi-slot having a bonus operation function, an AT function, and an ART function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachi-slot will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachi-slot of the present embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing games. In addition to medals, for example, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as the game medium. The game medium may also be referred to as a "game value" or a "game value".

When a player inserts a medal into a pachi-slot and operates a start lever, one value (hereinafter, referred to as a random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. The internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. By the determination of the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that is allowed to be displayed along the activated line (winning determination line) described later is determined in advance. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning", in which benefits such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), and operation of bonus are given to the player, and other so-called "off" The related items are provided. In the following, the winning combination relating to the payout of medals is referred to as a "small winning combination", and the winning combination relating to the operation of the replay (replay) is referred to as a "replay winning combination". In addition, a winning combination (bonus game) is also referred to as a “bonus winning combination”. In addition, a winning combination that can be won internally (that is, a combination of symbols that are allowed to be established) is sometimes simply referred to as a “winning combination”, and an internal winning combination is a “winning winning combination”, a “predetermined result”, or It is sometimes called "derivation permission condition". Further, the internal lottery means may be referred to as a "winning combination determining means", a "winning winning combination determining means", a "preliminary determining means", or a "deriving permissible condition determining means".

Further, when the start lever is operated, the plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means controls the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop button is pressed. To do. The reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. The operation means for performing the start operation is not limited to the lever shape like the start lever, and any operation means may be used as long as the player can perform the start operation. .. Further, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to a button shape like a stop button, and any operation means may be used as long as the player can perform the stop operation. ..

In the pachi-slot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the “number of sliding pieces”. Then, in the present embodiment, when the prescribed period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum sliding piece number) is set to four symbols.

The reel stop control means, when the internal winning combination permitting the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the combination of the symbols is normally on the activated line within a prescribed time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). The rotation of the reel is stopped so as to be displayed as much as possible. Further, the reel stop control means uses the specified time to stop the rotation of the reel so that a combination of symbols which is not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the activated line. The symbol displayed when the rotation of the reel is stopped may be referred to as “stop display” or “display result”. Further, displaying a symbol on the activated line when the rotation of the reel is stopped may be expressed as “deriving a stop display” or “deriving a display result”.

Further, the reel stop control means automatically stops each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time elapses after the reel is rotated, even if the player does not perform a stop operation. Stop control may be performed. In this case, since the reels will be stopped without the player's stop operation, even if any internal winning combination is decided, any combination of symbols related to winning is effective. It is desirable to stop the rotation of the reel so that it is not displayed along the line.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines that the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line is related to the winning (or other predetermined one). It is determined whether there is any. That is, it is determined whether or not a winning symbol combination (or other predetermined symbol combination) has been established. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. Then, the combination of the symbols displayed is the one relating to the winning by the winning determination means (or other predetermined one) (that is, the combination of the symbols relating to the winning (or other predetermined combination of symbols). ) Is established), a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player, or various controls are performed in response to the privilege. In the pachi-slot, the above-described series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

The winning determination means is for determining whether or not the symbol combination displayed along the activated line corresponds to any symbol combination among a plurality of predetermined symbol combinations. It may be possible to determine whether or not it corresponds to the combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means. That is, in the former case, it may be determined whether or not it is a combination of symbols related to winning, separately from the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means appropriately controls the stop, the prevention of the false prize can be sufficiently ensured, so that the control load related to the false prize detection can be reduced. On the other hand, in the latter case, it is also possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols related to winning is a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. Can be detected, so that it is possible to improve security.

In addition, in the pachi-slot, in the sequence of the game operation described above, various effects are displayed by using the display of images by a display device, the output of light by various lamps, the output of sound by the speaker, or a combination of these. Is done.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random number value for effect is extracted in addition to the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random number value for effect is extracted, the effect content determination means randomly determines the effect to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect content associated with the internal winning combination. The effect content determination means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub-control circuit described later. When the main control circuit described later determines the effect content, the effect content determination means may be one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect executing means responds by interlocking with various triggers such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when a prize is determined. To execute. In this way, in the pachi-slot, for example, by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination, an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, a combination of symbols to be aimed) is a game. It is provided to the player and the interest of the player can be improved.

<Structure of pachi-slot>
Next, the structure of a pachi-slot according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an external structure of the pachi-slot 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot 1 includes an exterior body (game machine body) 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet (housing) 2a for accommodating reels, circuit boards, and the like, and a front door (front door) 2b attached to the opening of the cabinet 2a so as to be opened and closed.

Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display means, display row) are arranged side by side in a row. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (main reels) are also referred to as the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape, and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. Then, on the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 20) symbols are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction (the rotation direction of the reel). The reels 3L, 3C, 3R may be expressed as "symbol display means", "variable display means", "variable display", or the like. Moreover, there is a case where a symbol display area 4 described later is included as these constituent elements. Further, the “design” may be any information that can be visually identified by the player, and in that sense, it may be expressed as “identification information”.

The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, a waist panel 12, and a pedestal portion 13. The door body 9 is openably and closably attached to the cabinet 2a using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left side end of the door body 9 when viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachi-slot 1. The cabinet 2a may be simply referred to as a "box", and the front door 2b may be simply referred to as a "door" or a "front door". Further, since the cabinet 2a functions as a frame body that supports or fixes the front door 2b, it may be expressed as a "support body", a "support frame", or a "fixed frame". Further, the front door 2b may be composed of a plurality of door members. For example, it may be configured by an upper door member attached to the upper side of the opening of the cabinet 2a and a lower door member attached to the lower side of the opening of the cabinet 2a, or as seen from the front side of the gaming machine. It may be constituted by an inner door member attached to the opening side of the cabinet 2a and an outer door member attached to the front side of the gaming machine.

The front panel 10 is provided above the door body 9. The front panel 10 is composed of a frame-shaped member having an opening 10a. The opening 10a of the front panel 10 is closed by the display device cover 30, and the display device cover 30 is arranged so as to face a display device 11 (described later) arranged inside the cabinet 2a.

The display device cover 30 is made of black translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the video (image) displayed on the display device 11 described later through the display device cover 30. In addition, in the present embodiment, the display device cover 30 is made of a black translucent synthetic resin to suppress the entry of external light into the cabinet 2a, and the image (image) displayed by the display device 11 is suppressed. Is clearly visible.

A lamp group 21 is provided on the front panel 10. The lamp group 21 includes, for example, lamps 21a and 21b provided on the upper portion of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side. Each lamp constituting the lamp group 21 is composed of an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like (see an LED group 85 in FIG. 6 described later), and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the effect contents.

The waist panel 12 is provided at a substantially central portion of the door body 9. The waist panel 12 includes a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source (LED included in an LED group 85 described later) that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

The pedestal portion 13 is provided between the front panel 10 and the waist panel 12. In the pedestal portion 13, the symbol display area 4 and various devices to be operated by the player (medal slot 14, MAX bet button 15a, 1 bet button 15b, start lever 16, three stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, a settlement button (not shown), etc. are provided.

The symbol display area 4 is an area overlapping with the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R as viewed from the front, and is arranged at a position closer to the player than the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the three reels. A predetermined area in 3L, 3C, 3R is made visible. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration in which the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind it can be visually recognized. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

The reel display window 4 has three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind it, and when the rotations of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, among the plurality of symbols provided on the circumferential surface of each reel Two symbols are displayed in the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, in the frame of the reel display window 4, one symbol is provided in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions for each reel (a total of three symbols). ) Is displayed (in the frame of the reel display window 4, symbols are displayed in the form of 3 rows×3 columns).

In the present embodiment, in the frame of the reel display window 4, a line (center line) connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle region of the right reel 3R, and the left reel 3L. A line (top line) connecting the upper area, the upper area of the middle reel 3C, and the upper area of the right reel 3R, and the lower area of the left reel 3L, the lower area of the middle reel 3C, and the lower area of the right reel 3R. The line (bottom line) connecting the points is defined (defined) as an effective line for determining whether or not a prize is won. The effective line may also be referred to as a “winning line” or a “judgment line”.

In the present embodiment, other lines, for example, a line (cross-up line) connecting the lower region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R, and the left reel 3L. A line (crossdown line) connecting the upper region, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the lower region of the right reel 3R may be further defined as an effective line. Further, in the present embodiment, the effective lines are the above-mentioned three lines (or may be five lines as described here), but the number of lines can be appropriately increased or decreased. For example, only one line of the center line may be the effective line, or only two lines of the top line and the bottom line may be the effective line. Further, when defining the effective line, it is possible to define a line in which the symbols are not aligned, instead of each line in which the above-mentioned symbols are aligned, or as an effective line. That is, as long as it is a line that passes through any one of the symbols (region of each of the columns (the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, the right reel 3R)), one or a plurality of lines configured by connecting with straight lines or polygonal lines It can be set as an effective line.

For example, a line (irregular line) connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L, the lower region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R may be defined as an effective line. That is, in the present embodiment, since the symbols are displayed in the form of 3 rows×3 columns in the frame of the reel display window 4, 27 effective lines can be defined. At least one of the lines may be defined as an effective line.

The reel display window 4 is formed by the opening of the frame member 31 provided in the pedestal portion 13. Further, below the frame member 31 that defines the reel display window 4, a pedestal region of a substantially horizontal plane is provided. When viewed from the player side, the medal slot 14 is provided on the right side of the pedestal area, and the MAX bet button 15a and the 1 bet button 15b are provided on the left side.

The medal slot 14 is provided to receive medals that are dropped from the outside by the player onto the pachi-slot 1. The medals received from the medal insertion slot 14 are used in one game with a predetermined number (for example, 3) set in advance as an upper limit, and the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number is deposited inside the pachi-slot 1. It is possible (a so-called credit function (game medium storing means)).

The MAX bet button 15a and the 1 bet button 15b are provided to determine the number of coins to be used for one game from the medals stored inside the cabinet 2a. A bet button LED (not shown) that lights up when a medal can be inserted is provided inside the MAX bet button 15a. The payment button is provided for pulling out (discharging) the medals stored inside the pachi-slot 1 to the outside.

When the player presses the MAX bet button 15a, medals corresponding to the number of bets in the unit game (three) are inserted and the activated line is activated. On the other hand, each time the bet button 15b is pressed once, one medal is inserted. When the 1 bet button 15b is operated three times, the number of medals (three) for the unit game is inserted, and the activated line is activated.

In the following, the operation of the MAX bet button 15a, the operation of the 1 bet button 15b, and the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 14 (the operation of inserting a medal for playing a game) are all referred to as "insertion operation".

The start lever 16 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are also referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

Further, an information display 6 is provided at a substantially central portion of a pedestal area on a substantially horizontal plane below the reel display window 4. The information display 6 is covered with a transparent window cover (not shown).

The information display 6 is a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) the number of medals paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as "payout number") to the player. Information for digitally displaying (notifying) the player (hereinafter, referred to as "7-segment LED") and information such as the number of medals stored in the pachi-slot 1 (hereinafter referred to as "credit number"). A 2-digit 7-segment LED is provided. In the present embodiment, the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of paid-out medals is a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) the error occurrence and error type information to the player. Is also used. Therefore, when an error occurs, the display mode of the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the payout number of medals is switched from the display mode of the payout number to the display mode of the information on the error type.

Further, the information display 6 is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying the information of the stop operation necessary for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination along the activated line. ing. The instruction monitor (instruction display) is composed of, for example, a 2-digit 7-segment LED. Then, on the instruction monitor, the 2-digit 7-segment LED is turned on, blinking, or turned off in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information on the stop operation to be notified, thereby informing the player of the necessary stop operation information. To do.

Note that, here, the mode uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified means, for example, when the pressing order “1st (perform the first stop operation on the left reel 3L)” is notified. When the numerical value “1” is displayed on the instruction monitor and the pressing order “2nd (perform the first stop operation to the middle reel 3C)” is notified, the numerical value “2” is displayed on the instruction monitor and the pressing order In the case of notifying "3rd (perform the first stop operation on the right reel 3R)", a numerical value "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor. It should be noted that the notification mode of the stop operation information on the instruction monitor (navi data determined on the main side described later) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

In addition, the information display device 6 includes a status display device (not shown) for notifying that it is an advantageous interval (including a “normal advantageous interval” and a “advantageous interval” described later, see FIG. 14 described later) that is advantageous to the player. Is provided. The status indicator is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED. As a general rule, the status indicator lights up at a predetermined timing during the game when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section (for example, at any timing from the start of the game to the end of the game), and the advantageous section continues. While it is on, the lighting continues. Then, when the advantageous section ends, the lighting ends and the light is turned off. As a result, all players are notified that the advantageous section that is advantageous to the player starts, that the advantageous section is in progress, and that the advantageous section ends, so that the fairness of the game is ensured. ..

The information display 6 is electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the game operation display board 81 as shown in FIG. 6 described later, and the display operation of the information display 6 is mainly It is controlled by a main control circuit 90 described later in the control board 71. Further, the control method of the various 7-segment LEDs described above is dynamic lighting control.

In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, another configuration controlled by the sub-control board 72 is used to notify the stop operation information. Specifically, the information of the stop operation is notified by the display device 11 described later, which includes a projector mechanism 211 and a display unit 212 described later (see FIG. 3 and FIG. 6 described later).

When such a configuration is applied, the notification mode in the instruction monitor and the notification mode in other means controlled by the sub-control board 72 may be different modes. That is, in the instruction monitor, it is sufficient to notify in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, the numerical value “1” in the instruction monitor). Even if is displayed, some players may not be able to specify the content of the notification, and cannot be said to be a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification on the sub side (sub control board side) by other means such as the display device 11 described later, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order "1st" is notified, the numerical value "1" uniquely corresponding to the push order notified is displayed on the instruction monitor, but with other means (for example, the display device 11 or the like), the left reel 3L is displayed. Alternatively, the instruction information for performing the first stop operation may be directly notified.

In the pachi-slot 1 having such a configuration, not only the control of the sub control board 72 but also the control of the main control board 71 can notify the information of the required stop operation according to the internal winning combination. In addition, the presence or absence of notification of such stop operation information can be controlled according to the gaming state. For example, in a gaming state (normal state) in a later-described normal section, information about a stop operation is not notified, but in a gaming state in each of a later-described normal advantageous section and an advantageous section, information about a stop operation can be reported. it can.

A sub display device 18 is provided to the left of the reel display window 4 as viewed from the player side. As shown in FIG. 2, the sub display device 18 is provided so as to stand substantially vertically from a pedestal region of a substantially horizontal surface of the pedestal portion 13 on the front surface of the door body 9. The sub display device 18 is composed of a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and displays various kinds of information.

A touch sensor 19 is provided on the display surface of the sub display device 18 (see FIG. 6 described later). The touch sensor 19 operates according to a predetermined operation principle such as an electrostatic capacitance method, and when a player's operation is received, it outputs a signal according to the operation as touch input information. The pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment is capable of switching the display of the sub display device 18 in accordance with the player's operation (touch input information output from the touch sensor 19) received via the touch sensor 19. Have. The sub-display device 18 is controlled by a sub-control board 72 described later (see FIG. 6 described later) based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 19.

A medal payout opening 24, a medal receiving tray 25, two speaker holes 20L and 20R, etc. are provided in the lower portion of the door body 9. The medal payout port 24 guides the medals discharged by driving a hopper device 51 (medal payout device) described later to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores the medals discharged from the medal payout opening 24. In addition, sound effects and sound such as music corresponding to the effect contents are output from the two speaker holes 20L and 20R.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachi-slot 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the cabinet 2a, FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the back side of the front door 2b, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the selector 66.

As shown in FIG. 3, the cabinet 2a includes a top plate 27a, a bottom plate 27b, left and right side plates 27c and 27d, and a back plate 27e. The display device 11 is arranged in the upper part of the cabinet 2a.

The display device 11 includes a projector mechanism 211 and a box-shaped projection target member 212a onto which the image light projected from the projector mechanism 211 is projected, and performs image display by projection mapping. Specifically, in the display device 11, image light is generated based on the position (projection distance, angle, etc.) and shape of the projection target member 212a, which is a three-dimensional object, and the projection light is projected by the projector mechanism 211. It is projected on the surface of 212a. By providing such an effect function, an advanced and powerful effect can be performed. Although not shown in FIG. 3, another projected member having a curved display surface is provided on the back side of the box-shaped projected member 212a, and one of the projected members is provided depending on the game state. , Used as a screen on which video light is projected. Therefore, the cabinet 2a is also provided with a function (not shown) for switching the members to be projected according to the game state. Note that the display device 11 may be any other various display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) as long as it is a device capable of displaying an image for the player.

A medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device) 51, a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are arranged in the lower part of the cabinet 2a.

The hopper device 51 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 27b of the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of accommodating a large amount of medals and discharging them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when, for example, the number of stored medals exceeds 50, or when the settlement button is pressed to perform settlement of medals. Then, the medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 24 (see FIG. 2).

The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores the medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is arranged on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is detachably attached to the bottom plate 27b of the cabinet 2a.

The power supply device 53 has a power switch 53a and a power board 53b (power supply means) (see FIG. 6 described later). The power supply device 53 is arranged on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side face plate 27c. The power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V supplied from the sub power supply device (not shown) into the power of the DC voltage required by each unit, and supplies the converted power to each unit.

Further, above the power supply device 53 in the cabinet 2a, a sub-control board case 57 that accommodates a sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 6 described later) is arranged. The sub-control board 72 housed in the sub-control board case 57 is mounted with a sub-control circuit 200 described later (see FIG. 9 described later). The sub-control circuit 200 is a circuit that controls execution of effects such as display of images. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 200 will be described later.

A sub relay board 61 is arranged above the sub control board case 57 in the cabinet 2a. The sub relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub control board 72 and a main control board 71 described later is mounted. Further, the sub relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub control board 72 and the boards arranged around the sub control board 72 and various device parts (units) is mounted.

Although not shown in FIG. 3, a cabinet-side relay board 44 (see FIG. 6 described later) is provided in the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 6 described later), a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (see FIG. 6 described later), and a medal payout count switch (not shown). It is a relay board on which wiring for connecting to is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 4, a middle door 41 is provided at the center of the rear surface of the front door 2b, and the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the rear side of the front door 2b so as to be opened and closed. Although not shown in FIG. 4, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are attached to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41, and the main control is provided on the side opposite to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41. A main control board case 55 accommodating a board 71 (see FIG. 6 described later) is attached. A stepping motor (not shown) is connected to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio.

The main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 90 described later (see FIGS. 7 and 8 described later). The main control circuit 90 (main control means) is a circuit for controlling the main flow of the game in the pachi-slot 1, such as determining an internal winning combination, rotating and stopping each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and determining whether or not there is a prize. .. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 also controls, for example, processing related to AT or ART decisions, display processing of navigation information on the instruction monitor, and transmission processing of various test signals. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 90 will be described later.

Speakers 65L and 65R are disposed below the middle door 41 on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The speakers 65L and 65R are arranged at positions facing the speaker holes 20L and 20R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

Further, a selector 66 and a door opening/closing monitoring switch 67 are arranged above the speaker 65L. The selector 66 is a device for detecting the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 and a device for selecting whether or not the inserted medals are proper medals, and is selected as a proper medal. In this case, the medal is guided to the hopper device 51 side and is driven so as to be housed in the hopper device 51. When the medal is selected as not a proper medal, the medal is transferred to the medal payout outlet 24 side. Driven so as to be ejected from the medal payout opening 24. That is, the selector 66 is also a device for distributing the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 to the hopper device 51 side or the medal payout outlet 24 side.

As shown in FIG. 5, the selector 66 includes a base 803 having a medal rail (medal passage) 802 through which medals pass, and a select plate for guiding the inserted medals to the hopper device 51 side or the medal payout outlet 24 side. 804, a medal pusher 805 that pushes out the inserted medal to the medal payout outlet 24 side when the inserted medal is not a proper medal, and an upstream medal sensor (first part) that detects the inserted medal on the upstream side of the medal rail 802. A medal sensor) 806, and a downstream medal sensor (second medal sensor) 807 for detecting the inserted medal on the downstream side of the medal rail 802.

Although not shown in FIG. 5, the selector 66 has a medal guide (a medal guide that forms a flow path of medals from the selector 66 to the hopper device 51 when the medals are guided to the hopper device 51 side by the select plate 804). (Not shown) and a cancel chute (not shown) that forms a flow path of medals from the selector 66 to the medal payout opening 24 when the medals are directed to the medal payout opening 24 side by the select plate 804 are detachable. It is installed.

The select plate 804 is driven by a solenoid (not shown) included in the selector 66. The select plate 804 moves to a guide position for guiding passing medals to the hopper device 51 side when the solenoid is driven, but does not guide passing medals to the hopper device 51 side when the solenoid is not driven. (That is, it guides to the medal payout outlet 24 side) to the discharge position. Specifically, when the solenoid is driven, the select plate 804 moves in the rearward direction of the pachi-slot 1 and guides the medal above, while when the solenoid is not driven, the select plate 804 moves to the pachi-slot 1 position. It does not move to the front side and guide the upper side of the medal. The method of guiding medals by the select plate 804 is not limited to this. For example, a mechanism capable of moving the pachi-slot 1 in the vertical direction enables movement of the guide position and the discharge position. May be. That is, the select plate 804 moves on the medal rail 802 on the medal rail 802 at a guide position that does not prevent the passing medals from moving to the hopper device 51 side and the passing medals move to the hopper device 51 side. Any mechanism can be adopted as long as it is a mechanism that prevents the movement and moves to the discharge position where it is guided to the medal payout opening 24 side.

For example, when the select plate 804 is moving to the guide position, the medal pusher 805 operates so as not to project in the rearward direction of the pachi-slot 1, and the select plate 804 does not move to the guide position (the discharging position). When the pachi-slot 1 is moved to the rear side, the pachi-slot 1 operates so as to project in the rearward direction. That is, when the medal pusher 805 is in a position that does not project to the rear side of the pachi-slot 1, it becomes a guide position for guiding the passing medals to the hopper device 51 side, and when it is in a position that projects to the rear side of the pachi-slot 1, The passing position is a position where the passing medals are not guided to the hopper device 51 side (that is, the medal payout outlet 24 side is guided).

The upstream medal sensor 806 and the downstream medal sensor 807 constitute a game medium detecting means for detecting passage of a medal. Each medal sensor is composed of, for example, a reflective sensor composed of a pair or a plurality of pairs of light emitting elements and light receiving elements. The light receiving element receives the light to detect passage of the medal. The configuration of the sensor can be changed as appropriate, and for example, a transmissive sensor or the like can be adopted. Further, the passage of medals may be detected only by the downstream medal sensor 807 without providing the upstream medal sensor 806. Specific control based on the detection result of each medal sensor (medal sensor input state) will be described later.

The door open/close monitor switch 67 is disposed diagonally below and to the left of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. The door opening/closing monitor switch 67 outputs a security signal for informing the opening/closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachi-slot 1.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, a door relay terminal board 68 is disposed below the reel display window 4 in a region where the front door 2b is opened and closed by the middle door 41 on the back surface (see a later-described diagram). 6). The door relay terminal board 68 includes a main control board 71 in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub relay board 61, a selector 66, a game operation display board 81, a first interface board 301 for a test machine, and It is a relay board on which wiring for connecting to each of the second interface boards 302 for a tester is mounted. The various buttons and switches include, for example, a MAX bet button 15a, a bet button 15b, a door opening/closing monitor switch 67, a BET switch 77, a start switch 79, and the like, which will be described later.

<Control system of pachi-slot>
Next, the control system included in the pachi-slot 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachi-slot 1.

The pachi-slot 1 has a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub-control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. Further, the pachi-slot 1 has a reel relay terminal plate 74, a setting key type switch 54 (setting switch), and a cabinet side relay substrate 44, which are connected to the main control substrate 71. Further, the pachi-slot 1 includes an external centralized terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, a reset switch 76, and a power supply device 53, which are connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 44. Since the configuration of the hopper device 51 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The reel relay terminal plate 74 is arranged inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The setting key type switch 54 is provided on the main control board case 55. The setting key type switch 54 is used when changing the set value (setting 1 to setting 6) of the pachi-slot 1 or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot 1. The set value indicates the degree of advantage of the player with respect to the game, and normally, the lower the set value (for example, the closer to the setting 1), the lower the degree of advantage of the player. Therefore, the higher the set value (for example, the closer to the setting 6), the higher the degree of advantage of the player becomes. In the present embodiment, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of the bonus combination described later, so that the degree of advantage of the player can be changed. The higher the set value, the more the AT or ART described later is displayed. It is also possible to change the degree of advantage of the player by increasing the winning probability of the lottery.

The cabinet-side relay board 44 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the main control board 71, the external centralized terminal board 47, the hopper device 51, the medal auxiliary storage switch 75, the reset switch 76, and the power supply device 53 is mounted. Is. The external centralized terminal board 47 is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachi-slot 1. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52 and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals. The reset switch 76 is used, for example, when changing the setting of the pachi-slot 1.

The power supply device 53 has a power supply board 53b and a power switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot 1. The power supply board 53 b is connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet-side relay board 44 and is also connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61.

Further, the pachi-slot 1 includes a door relay terminal plate 68, and a selector 66, a door opening/closing monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, a settlement switch 78, which are connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68. It has a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, a sub-relay board 61, a test machine first interface board 301, and a test machine second interface board 302. The selector 66, the door open/close monitor switch 67, and the sub relay board 61 have been described above, and therefore their description is omitted here.

The BET switch 77 (insertion operation detecting means) detects that the player has pressed the MAX bet button 15a or the 1 bet button 15b. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button (not shown) is pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detection means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation).

The stop switch board 80 (stop operation detection means) includes a circuit for stopping the rotating main reel and a circuit for displaying the stoppable main reel with an LED or the like. A stop switch (not shown) is provided on the stop switch board 80. The stop switch detects that the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 81 is connected to the information display (7-segment display) 6 and the LED 82. The LED 82 has, for example, three LEDs for displaying the number of inserted medals (hereinafter, "first LED" to "LED", which are lit in correspondence with the number of medals inserted in this game (hereinafter, referred to as "inserted number"). LED for turning on a mark indicating that a medal can be inserted, a mark for indicating a game start, a mark for re-playing, etc. based on a signal input from the game operation display substrate 81. Etc. are included. In the first LED to the third LED (display means), when one medal is inserted, the first LED lights, when two medals are inserted, the first and second LEDs light, and three medals (game) When the number of sheets that can be started is input, the first to third LEDs are turned on. Since the information display 6 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Both the first interface board 301 for a test machine and the second interface board 302 for a test machine are relay boards used when outputting various signals relating to a game to the test machine in the verification test (testing test) of the pachi-slot 1 ( Since these relay boards are not mounted on the pachi-slot 1 as a release product for sale, the main control circuit 90 of the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 301 for test machine and the test machine. Also, various electronic components necessary for connecting to the second interface board 302 are not mounted). For example, a test signal for controlling main operations related to the game (for example, internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) is output via the first interface board 301 for a test machine, and is determined by the main control board 71, for example. A test signal or the like related to the pressed navigation that has been performed is output via the second interface board 302 for a tester.

The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub relay board 61. Further, the pachi-slot 1 has a speaker group 84, an LED group 85, a 24h door opening/closing monitoring unit 63, a touch sensor 19 and a display unit 212, which are connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61. Since the touch sensor 19 has been described above, its description is omitted here.

The speaker group 84 includes speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown). The LED group 85 includes a lamp group 21 provided on the front panel 10, a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel of the waist panel 12 from the back side, and the like. The 24h door opening/closing monitoring unit 63 stores the history information of opening/closing of the middle door 41. Further, the 24h door opening/closing monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error on the display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 200) when the middle door 41 is opened. The display unit 212 includes, for example, a projected member 212a that constitutes the display device 11, and another projected member that is provided on the back side of the projected member 212a and has a curved display surface.

The pachi-slot 1 further includes a ROM cartridge substrate 86 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 87 connected to the sub-control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge board 86 and the liquid crystal relay board 87 are housed in the sub control board case 57 together with the sub control board 72.

The ROM cartridge board 86 is a board for managing various control programs executed by the sub CPU 201, and images (video) for presentation, sounds (speaker group 84), light (LED group 85) and communication data. .. The liquid crystal relay board 87 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub control board 72, the projector mechanism 211 that constitutes the display device 11, and the sub display device 18. Since the projector mechanism 211 and the sub display device 18 have been described above, their explanations are omitted here.

<Main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a configuration of the main control circuit 90 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 90 of the pachi-slot 1.

The main control circuit 90 functions as a game control unit that controls a game operation, and includes a microprocessor 91, a clock pulse generation circuit 92, a power management circuit 93, a switching regulator 94 (power supply means), and a role ratio monitor ( (Not shown).

The microprocessor 91 is a microprocessor with a security function for gaming machines. The microprocessor 91 of the present embodiment is provided with various instruction codes (hereinafter, referred to as "main CPU 101 dedicated instruction code") peculiar to the microprocessor 91 that can be defined on the program. In the present embodiment, by using the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101, the efficiency of the processing and the reduction of the program capacity are realized. The internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 8 described later, and the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101 provided in the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail in various processes executed by a main control circuit described later. To do.

The clock pulse generation circuit 92 generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU, and outputs the generated clock pulse signal to the microprocessor 91. The microprocessor 91 executes the control program based on the input clock pulse signal.

The power management circuit 93 manages fluctuations in the DC 12V power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 53b (see FIG. 6). Then, the power management circuit 93 outputs a reset signal to the “XSRST” terminal of the microprocessor 91, for example, when the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage exceeds the starting voltage value (10V) from 0V). When the power failure occurs (when the power supply voltage falls from 12V to the power failure voltage value (10.5V)), the power failure detection signal is output to the “XINT” terminal of the microprocessor 91. That is, the power management circuit 93 outputs a reset signal (starting signal) to the microprocessor 91 when the power is turned on (starting means), and when the power is interrupted, the microprocessor 91 detects the power failure (power failure signal). Also serves as a means for outputting (power failure means).

The switching regulator 94 is a DC/DC conversion circuit, generates a DC drive voltage (power supply voltage of DC 5V) of the microprocessor 91, and outputs the generated DC drive voltage to the “VCC” terminal of the microprocessor 91.

The winning ratio monitor (not shown) is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and the arithmetic circuit 107, which will be described later, performs a predetermined ratio calculation on the result of totaling the game information, which is totaled by the main CPU 101, which will be described later. , The result of the ratio calculation is displayed as ratio information. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of ratio calculation are performed, and the role ratio monitor sequentially displays a plurality of types of ratio information based on the result.

In the upper two digits of the combination ratio monitor, "abbreviation", which is type information indicating the type of the ratio information, is displayed, and in the lower two digits, "ratio", which is the ratio information corresponding to the type information. It is supposed to be displayed. For example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (the position of the abbreviation 10) and "U" is displayed in the second digit (the position of the abbreviation 1) of the ratio monitor (that is, the abbreviation "7U"). Is displayed), the lower two digits of the winning ratio monitor, as ratio information, occupies a predetermined total number of games (175,000 times), and the ART function is activated (that is, a stop operation advantageous for the player). The ratio of the number of games (of the advantageous section for which the procedure was notified) (the advantageous section ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the effective section ratio is 10%, "1" is displayed in the third digit (the tenth place of the ratio) and "0" is displayed in the fourth digit (the ones place of the ratio). Is displayed. The advantageous section ratio may display the ratio of the number of games in which the AT function and the ART function are activated.

Further, for example, when "6" is displayed in the first digit (the place of the abbreviation 10) and "Y" is displayed in the second digit (the place of the abbreviation 1) of the ratio monitor (that is, the abbreviation " 6Y” is displayed), in the lower two digits of the winning ratio monitor, as the ratio information, the winning character continuous in the payout number of game media paid out within a specific total number of games (6000 times) The operating device (BB in the present embodiment. In addition, if the second type special accessory (CB) is equipped with a character continuous actuating device (MB) that continuously operates, it is included. The same applies hereinafter.) The ratio of the number of paid-out game media paid out (intermediate time combination ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the medium-duration combination ratio is 59%, "5" is displayed in the third digit (third digit of the ratio) and "9" is displayed in the fourth digit (third digit of the ratio). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (the position of the abbreviation 10) and "Y" is displayed in the second digit (the position of the abbreviation 1) of the winning ratio monitor (that is, the abbreviation " "7Y" is displayed), the lower two digits of the combination ratio monitor show, as ratio information, all combinations of the number of game media paid out within a specific total number of games (6000 times). (BB in the present embodiment. In addition, in addition to the above-mentioned MB, when the above-mentioned first-class special effects (RB) is mounted alone, the above-mentioned second-class special effects (CB) is alone. If it is installed, if normal accessory (SB) is installed, it includes all of them. The same applies hereinafter) Ratio of the number of paid-out game media (middle-time accessory ratio) ) Is displayed. Specifically, when the medium-time role product ratio is 59%, "5" is displayed in the third digit (the 10th place of the ratio) and "9" is displayed in the 4th digit (the 1st place of the ratio). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "6" is displayed in the first digit (the place of the abbreviation 10) and "A" is displayed in the second digit (the place of the abbreviation 1) of the winning ratio monitor (that is, the abbreviation " 6A" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the winning ratio monitor, as the ratio information, the winning character continuous in the payout number of game media paid out within a predetermined total number of games (175000 times) The ratio of the number of paid-out game media paid out by the actuation of the actuating device (total combination ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the total combination ratio is 25%, "2" is displayed in the third digit (the 10th digit of the ratio) and "5" is displayed in the 4th digit (the 1st digit of the ratio). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (the place of the abbreviation 10) and "A" is displayed in the second digit (the place of the abbreviation 1) of the ratio monitor (that is, the abbreviation " 7A” is displayed), the lower two digits of the combination ratio monitor show, as ratio information, all combinations of the number of game media paid out within a predetermined total number of games (175000 times). The ratio of the number of paid-out game media paid out by the operation of the object (total winning character ratio) is displayed. Specifically, if the total accessory ratio is 25%, "2" is displayed in the third digit (the 10th digit of the ratio) and "5" is displayed in the 4th digit (the 1st digit of the ratio). Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 is described as an example in which the main ratio circuit is directly provided with a role ratio monitor, but the display ratio of the role ratio monitor is controlled by the main control circuit 90. It is sufficient that the display contents can be recognized when necessary (for example, when the main control board case 55 is visually recognized), and a configuration which the main control circuit 90 does not have directly can be adopted. For example, the winning ratio monitor may be connected to the game operation display board 81, and the main control circuit 90 may control the display content via the game operation display board 81. In this case, the ratio monitor is also used as the information display 6, the LED 82, or the instruction monitor (instruction display), and one or more of them are used to display the predetermined ratio information. You may do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the predetermined ratio information displayed on the role ratio monitor, an advantageous section ratio, a medium time combination ratio, a medium time role ratio, a total combination ratio, and a total role ratio are taken as an example. Although explained, ratio information other than these may be displayed. For example, the ratio of the number of paid-out game media paid out by the ART function to the number of paid-out game media during the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) (total advantageous section acquisition ratio) , Ratio of the number of paid-out game media paid out by the ART function occupying in the number of paid-out game media during a specific total number of games (6000 times) (intermediate time advantage section acquisition ratio) , Ratio of the number of games that the accessory continuous operating device has operated (medium-time continuous combination section ratio), occupy in the specific total number of games (6000 times), occupy in the specific total number of games (6000 times), Ratio of the number of games in which all the character works operated (middle-time character part ratio), the ratio of the number of games in which the character continuous operation device operated among the predetermined total number of games (175000 times) (total combined role section) The ratio), the ratio of the number of games in which all the auctions occupy in the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) (total amusement section ratio), and the like can also be displayed by performing a predetermined ratio calculation.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the parameter (denominator) of the predetermined ratio information displayed on the winning ratio monitor, the predetermined total number of games is set to “175,000”, and the specific total number of games is set to “6000”. However, the predetermined total number of games and the specific total number of games are not limited to this. For example, as a parameter (denominator) for calculating a part or all of the above-mentioned various ratios, a predetermined total number of games may be “17500 times” and a specific total number of games may be “3000 times”. .. However, since various types of gaming machines are installed and operated in the game store, and the optimal number of games for the ratio calculation may differ, the number of games for calculating the various ratios described above is It is not limited to the above and can be changed appropriately. In this case, the number of games that can be a parameter (denominator) and a child number (numerator) for calculating a part or all of various ratios can be arbitrarily set on the game store side. Good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the operation of the ART function is not included in all the targeted effects in the medium-time character ratio and the total character ratio, but the operation of the ART function is not included. It is also possible to regard this as the operation of, and to perform the ratio calculation of the medium-time character ratio and the total character ratio. Moreover, it goes without saying that, other than the above-mentioned one, as long as it is useful information, it is possible to aggregate two values to calculate a ratio and display the result of the ratio calculation as ratio information. Absent. Further, in the description of the ratio monitor, the portion described as "the ART function operates" may include "the operation of the AT function" or may be excluded.

<Microprocessor>
Next, the internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the microprocessor 91.

The microprocessor 91 includes a main CPU 101 (arithmetic processing unit), a main ROM 102 (first storage unit), a main RAM 103 (second storage unit), an external bus interface 104, a clock circuit 105, a reset controller 106, It has an arithmetic circuit 107, a random number circuit 110, a parallel port 111, an interrupt controller 112, a timer circuit 113, a first serial communication circuit 114, and a second serial communication circuit 115. Then, each of these units constituting the microprocessor 91 are connected to each other via a signal bus 116.

The main CPU 101 executes various control programs on the basis of the clock pulse generated by the clock circuit 105, and controls the overall game operation. Here, reel stop control will be described as an example of the control operation of the main CPU 101.

After detecting the reel index, the main CPU 101 counts the number of times the pulse is output to the stepping motor of each reel 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel). Thereby, the main CPU 101 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has rotated once. The reel index includes, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position of each reel and interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by the rotation of each main reel. It is detected by a reel position detector (not shown) provided.

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 103. Then, each time the pulse counter counts the output of the predetermined number of pulses necessary for the rotation of one symbol, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 103 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detector (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbols are rotated after the reel index is detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 200, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program. The internal configuration (memory map) of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

The external bus interface 104 is for electrically connecting an external signal bus (not shown) to which various components (for example, each reel) provided outside the microprocessor 91 are connected to the microprocessor 91. It is an interface circuit. The clock circuit 105 is configured to include, for example, a frequency divider (not shown) and the like, and the clock pulse signal for CPU operation input from the clock pulse generation circuit 92 is supplied to other components (for example, the timer circuit 113). Convert to a clock pulse signal of the frequency used. The clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 is also output to the reset controller 106.

The reset controller 106 resets an IAT (Illegal Address Trap) or a WDT (watchdog timer) based on the reset signal input from the power management circuit 93. The arithmetic circuit 107 is configured to include a multiplication circuit and a division circuit. For example, when executing the “MUL (multiplication)” instruction on the program, the arithmetic circuit 107 executes the multiplication processing based on the “MUL” instruction.

The random number circuit 110 generates a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). Further, although not shown, the random number circuit 110 obtains a random number register 0 for obtaining a 2-byte hard latch random number, a random number register 1 for obtaining a 2-byte soft latch random number, and a 1-byte soft latch random number. And random number registers 2 to 7. The main CPU 101 extracts one value from the random numbers in the predetermined range generated by the random number circuit 110, for example, as a random number value for internal lottery. The parallel port 111 is a port (memory map I/O) for signals input/output between the microprocessor 91 and various circuits (for example, the power management circuit 93 and the like) provided outside the microprocessor 91. .. The parallel port 111 is also connected to the random number circuit 110 and the interrupt controller 112. The start switch 79 is also connected to one of the input ports PI0 to PI4 of the parallel port 111, and latches from the parallel port 111 to the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 at the timing (on edge) when the start switch 79 is turned on. The signal is output. Then, in the random number circuit 110, the random number register 0 is latched by inputting the latch signal, and a 2-byte hard latch random number is acquired.

The interrupt controller 112 performs an interrupt process by the main CPU 101 based on a power failure detection signal input from the power management circuit 93 via the parallel port 111 or a timeout signal input from the timer circuit 113 at a 1.1172 ms cycle. Control the execution timing of. When the power failure detection signal is input from the power management circuit 93 or the timeout signal is input from the timer circuit 113, the interrupt controller 112 outputs an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command. Output to. The main CPU 101, based on an interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 112 in response to a time-out signal from the timer circuit 113, input port check processing, reel control processing, communication data transmission processing, 7-segment LED drive processing, timer. Various kinds of interrupt processing such as update processing (see FIG. 79 described later) are performed.

The timer circuit 113 (PTC) operates with a clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 (a clock pulse signal having a frequency obtained by dividing the clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU by a frequency divider (not shown)) ( Count elapsed time). Then, the timer circuit 113 outputs a time-out signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 112 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec.

The first serial communication circuit 114 is a circuit that controls a serial transmission operation when transmitting data (various control commands (commands)) from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72. The second serial communication circuit 115 is a circuit that controls a serial transmission operation when transmitting data from the main control board 71 to the second interface for tester 302.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the sub control circuit 200 (sub control means) mounted on the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub control circuit 200 of the pachi-slot 1.

The sub control circuit 200 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 90, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The sub-control circuit 200 functions as an effect control unit that controls an effect operation, and basically includes a sub CPU 201, a sub RAM 202, a rendering processor 203, a drawing RAM 204, and a driver 205.

The sub CPU 201 is connected to the ROM cartridge board 86. The driver 205 is connected to the liquid crystal relay board 87. That is, the driver 205 is connected to the projector mechanism 211 and the sub display device 18 via the liquid crystal relay substrate 87.

The sub CPU 201 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

The control program executed by the sub CPU 201 is stored in the program storage area. For example, in the control program, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 90 and a random number value for performance are extracted, and performance registration for determining and registering performance content (effect data) is performed. It contains various programs to perform tasks. Further, the control program includes a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image on the display device 11 based on the decided effect contents, a lamp control task for controlling the light output from the light source such as the LED group 85, and a sound by the speaker group 84. Various programs for executing a voice control task or the like for controlling the output of are also included.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to image creation. The data storage area also includes a storage area for storing sound data regarding BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data regarding a pattern of turning on/off light.

The sub RAM 202 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as a sub flag (internal winning combination) transmitted from the main control circuit 90.

The sub CPU 201, the rendering processor 203, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 204, and the driver 205 create a video according to the animation data specified by the effect contents, and the created video is displayed on the display device 11 (projector mechanism 211) and/or. Alternatively, it is displayed on the sub display device 18. The display device 11 (projector mechanism 211) and the sub display device 18 are individually controlled by the sub control board 72.

Further, the sub CPU 201 causes the speaker group 84 to output a sound such as BGM in accordance with the sound data specified by the effect contents. In addition, the sub CPU 201 controls the turning on and off of the LED group 85 according to the lamp data designated by the effect contents.

<Various registers of main CPU>
Next, various registers included in the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 10 is a schematic configuration diagram of various registers included in the main CPU 101.

The main CPU 101 has, as main registers, an accumulator A (hereinafter referred to as “A register”), a flag register F (flag register), a general-purpose register B (hereinafter referred to as “B register”), and a general-purpose register C (hereinafter referred to as “ C register), general-purpose register D (hereinafter referred to as “D register”), general-purpose register E (hereinafter referred to as “E register”), general-purpose register H (hereinafter referred to as “H register”), and general-purpose register L (hereinafter referred to as “H register”) , "L register"). Further, the main CPU 101 serves as sub-registers such as an accumulator A′, a flag register F′, a general-purpose register B′, a general-purpose register C′, a general-purpose register D′, a general-purpose register E′, a general-purpose register H′, and a general-purpose register L′. As a general-purpose register. Each register is composed of a 1-byte register.

Further, in this embodiment, the B register and the C register are used as a pair register (hereinafter referred to as “BC register”), and the D register and the E register are used as a pair register (hereinafter referred to as “DE register”). Further, in this embodiment, the H register and the L register are used as a pair register (hereinafter, referred to as “HL register”).

As shown in FIG. 10, predetermined flag information indicating the result of arithmetic processing is set in each bit of the flag registers F and F'. For example, in bit 6 (D6), data (zero flag) indicating whether or not the operation result is “0” in the operation result determination process is set. Specifically, when the operation result is "0", the data "1" is set in the bit 6, and when the operation result is not "0", the data "0" is set in the bit 6. Then, in the determination process of the calculation result, the main CPU 101 refers to the data “0”/“1” of the bit 6 to make the determination (YES/NO).

Further, the main CPU 101 has an extension register Q (hereinafter referred to as “Q register”). The Q register is composed of a 1-byte register. In the present embodiment, various main CPU 101-dedicated instruction codes for addressing using the Q register are provided on the program as will be described later in various processing flows. By using it, the processing efficiency and the capacity of the main ROM 102 are reduced. Note that in various main CPU 101-dedicated instruction codes that specify addresses using the Q register, the Q register stores address data (address value) on the higher side of the address. Immediately after resetting the main CPU 101, "F0H" is set in the Q register as an initial value. Further, in the "LDQ,n (8-bit data)" instruction using the Q register, the value of the Q register can be changed by setting an arbitrary 1-byte data in "n" and executing the instruction. You can

Further, the main CPU 101 has an interrupt page address register I and a memory refresh register R formed of 1-byte registers, and an index register IX and an index register IY formed of 2-byte registers. , A stack pointer SP and a program counter PC are provided as dedicated registers.

<Internal configuration of main ROM and main RAM (memory map)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11A to FIG. 11C, the internal configuration of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103 included in the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91) (hereinafter referred to as “memory map”) will be described. 11A is a diagram showing a memory map of the entire memory, FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a memory map of the main ROM 102, and FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a memory map of the main RAM 103.

In the memory map of the entire memory included in the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91), as shown in FIG. 11A, from the head (0000H) side of the address, the memory area of the main ROM 102, the memory area of the main RAM 103, the internal register area, and The XCS decode areas are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order with an unused area in between.

In the memory map of the main ROM 102, as shown in FIG. 11B, from the head (0000H) side of the address of the main ROM 102, a program area, a data area, an unspecified area, a trademark recording area, a program management area, and a security setting area are In order, they are arranged at predetermined addresses.

The program area stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the game playability of the game performed by the player. In the data area, various data (for example, a data table such as an internal lottery table, various data for the sub-control circuit 200) used by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the playability of the game performed by the player. Data for transmitting control commands (commands) is stored. That is, the game ROM area (game storage area) including the program area and the data area is necessary for control processing (processing relating to game characteristics) related to the game characteristics of the game actually performed by the player at the game store. Various programs and various data are stored.

In the non-regulated area, control programs and data of various processes (processes that do not affect the game play) that are not directly related to the game play of the game performed by the player are stored. For example, the programs and data used in the pachi-slot 1 certification test (testing test), the control programs and data used in the checksum generation process at the time of power failure, the sum check process at the time of power restoration, and the countermeasure program And the data and the like necessary for it are stored in the non-regulated area.

In the program management area and the security setting area, various settings and management information regarding execution of the control program or security functions are stored. For example, setting and management information of the start address and end address (that is, data range) of the control program stored in the program area, setting and management information of the number of addresses in the readable RAM area, reset setting and management information of WDT, Interrupt setting and management information, read permission/non-permission setting and management information of the control program stored in the program area, setting and management information regarding activation and updating of the random number circuit 110, and security mode setting described later. And management information and the like are stored in the program management area and the security setting area. In this embodiment, the program management area stores other settings and management information not related to the security function, and the security setting area stores settings and management information related to the security function. However, the setting and management information may be stored as a single management area, for example.

In the memory map of the main RAM 103, as shown in FIG. 11C, from the head (F000H) side of the address of the main RAM 103, a game RAM area (predetermined storage area, game temporary storage area) and non-regular RAM area (non-regular temporary A storage area) is arranged at a predetermined address in this order.

The game RAM area is provided with a work area and a stack area for temporarily storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by the execution of a control program related to the playability of the game executed by the player. .. Then, each of the various data is stored in a work area at a predetermined address in the game RAM area.

Further, the non-regular RAM area is provided with an non-regular work area and a non-regular stack, which are work areas of various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player. In the present embodiment, by using this non-regular RAM area, various processes such as a sum check process that are not directly related to the game playability of the game performed by the player are executed.

As described above, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in the main ROM 102, various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game executed by the player are stored in the main ROM 102 for the game. The data is stored in a non-standard ROM area (non-standard storage area) located at an address different from the ROM area. In addition, various processes that are not directly related to the game playability of the game performed by such a player are performed in the main RAM 103 by using an unspecified RAM area arranged at an address different from the gaming RAM area. ..

With such a configuration of the main ROM 102, programs and data unnecessary for the actual game played by the player are arranged in the ROM area (non-regular ROM area) where the conventional rules prohibit the arrangement of programs and the like. can do. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid pressure on the capacity of the game ROM area.

<Security mode>
Next, the security mode, which is a part of the security function of the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91), will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the security mode.

The security mode is an operating state in which the microprocessor 91 operates when the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on and a reset signal is input from the power management circuit 93, for example. During this security mode, the activation of the main CPU 101 is delayed for a period corresponding to the setting stored in the security setting area (that is, the main CPU 101 starts execution of processing at power-on (see FIG. 46 described later)). Delay that). By starting the main CPU 101 through this security mode, the security of the microprocessor 91 is ensured, and the main CPU 101 is stably started by securing the time required for start-up control when the power is turned on.

In the present embodiment, for example, the reset controller 106 can delay the activation of the main CPU 101 by delaying the reset signal input when the power is turned on for a predetermined period, and the interrupt controller 112 can It is also possible to delay the activation of the main CPU 101 by delaying the interrupt permission of the reset interrupt process (see FIG. 46 described later) at power-on for a predetermined period. Further, the controllers may cooperate with each other to delay the activation of the main CPU 101. Further, for example, a delay circuit may be provided in the microprocessor 91 (or in the reset controller 106 or the interrupt controller 112), and the activation of the main CPU 101 may be delayed by this delay circuit. That is, the configuration (security unit) that executes the security function in the microprocessor 91 can be appropriately modified and applied according to the specifications.

As shown in FIG. 12, the delay period during the security mode can be set to a fixed extension time (fixed period) and a random extension time (variable period). In the present embodiment, for example, by selecting and setting one of the modes 1 to 8 in which different fixed extension times are associated, one fixed extension time is selected from a plurality of fixed extension times. The time can be set, and by selecting and setting any one of the modes 1 to 4 in which different random extension time ranges are associated, a plurality of random extension time ranges can be set. It is possible to set a range of random extension time from one to the middle.

For example, when “mode 4” is selected as the fixed extension time and “mode 4” is selected as the random extension time and these settings are stored in the security setting area, the microprocessor 91 turns on the power of the pachi-slot 1, When the reset signal is input from the power management circuit 93, the start of the main CPU 101 is delayed for about 4 seconds (4000 ms) as a fixed extension time, and then the random extension time is selected from the range of 0 to 500 ms. One extension time is randomly selected, and the activation of the main CPU 101 is delayed by the selected time.

The range of the fixed extension time and the random extension time can be set as appropriate, but in the present embodiment, the range of the random extension time is shortened from the viewpoint of shortening the time until the setting can be changed when the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on. It is desirable to set "mode 1" in which the random extension time is always "0".

<Game state transition flow>
Next, with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, various game states managed by the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) of the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment and transition flows thereof will be described. Note that FIG. 13 is a transition flow diagram of the basic game state of the pachi-slot 1, and FIG. 14 considers whether or not the notification (AT/ART) function is activated (that is, as the game section, a normal section It is a transition flow diagram of the game state (distinguishing from the advantageous section).

[Basic game state transition flow]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as “BB”) is provided as the type of bonus game. BB is an accessory continuous operation device related to a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as “RB”) called a first-class special accessory, and continuously operates the RB.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 manages the game state based on the presence/absence of winning/operating (winning) of the bonus combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the main control circuit 90 causes the winning/operation (winning) of a bonus combination (internal winning combination of names “F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3”, and “F_BB4” described later). ), the three types of game states called “non-winning bonus state”, “state between flags” and “bonus state” are managed.

The bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is non-winning, the bonus is not activated (winning), and the bonus state is a state in which the bonus is activated. Further, in the present embodiment, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a state occurs in which the bonus combination is carried over as the internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is won. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, that is, the bonus combination is won and the bonus is not activated.

Whether or not the bonus combination is won is managed based on data stored in a hit request flag storage area (see FIG. 25 described later) and a carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 26 described later) provided in the main RAM 103. To be done. Whether or not the bonus is activated (winning) is managed based on data stored in a game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later) provided in the main RAM 103.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, in the gaming state in which the bonus is not operated (non-winning bonus state and inter-flag state), the type of the internal winning combination relating to the replay and the winning probability thereof are different from each other. Six kinds of states (hereinafter referred to as "RT0 state" to "RT5 state"), RT0 gaming state to RT5 gaming state, are provided. The RT1 state and the RT4 state are gaming states in which the probability that a replay combination is determined as an internal winning combination is low, and the RT5 state is a medium probability that the replay combination is determined as an internal winning combination. The game state is as follows. Further, the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT3 state are gaming states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is high. In the present embodiment, the RT state of the bonus non-winning state is any one of the RT0 state to the RT4 state, and the RT state of the inter-flag state is the RT5 state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 is based on the type of the internal winning combination relating to the replay and the winning probability thereof in the gaming state in which the bonus is not operated (the bonus non-winning state and the state between flags). It also manages six types of states, RT0 state to RT5 state.

The RT0 state to the RT5 state are managed based on data stored in a game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later) provided in the main RAM 103, which will be described later. Specifically, the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment is provided with flags indicating six RT states, that is, an RT0 state flag to an RT5 state flag. By controlling the ON/OFF states of these flags by the main RAM 103, the RT state is set. Is managed. Then, the main control circuit 90 specifies the RT state corresponding to the RT state flag in the ON state as the current RT state. Note that the RT0 state flag may not be provided, and when all the RT state flags are in the off state, the main control circuit 90 may specify that the current RT state is the RT0 state.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the bonus non-winning state (RT0 to RT4 state), a bonus combination (internal winning combination of names “F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3”, and “F_BB4” described later) is determined as an internal winning combination. Then, (in FIG. 13, “bonus winning”), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the bonus non-winning state to the flag state (RT5 state). Further, when the bonus combination is won in the inter-flag state (“bonus established” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state.

Here, as the bonus state, a BB1 gaming state (BB1 state), a BB2 gaming state (BB2 state), a BB3 gaming state (BB3 state), and a BB4 gaming state (BB4 state) are provided. The main control circuit 90 turns on the BB1 state flag, the BB2 state flag, the BB3 state flag, and the BB4 state flag, which are stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later) described later, as in the RT state. / The bonus state is managed by the off state. Further, as will be described later, during the BB1 to BB4 states, it is always in the RB game state (RB state), so this is also similarly stored in the game state flag storage area described later (see FIG. 27 described later). It is managed by the on/off state of the state flag.

In the bonus non-winning state, the name “F_BB1” described later is determined as the internal winning combination, and in the inter-flag state, when the corresponding symbol combination “C_red same color BB” is displayed on the activated line, the main control circuit 90 Shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the BB1 state. In the BB1 state, it is always in the RB state, and when more than the specified number of "240" medals are paid out in the BB1 state, the BB1 state is ended ("Bonus end" in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the game state. Is shifted from the bonus state to the RT4 state.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state, the name “F_BB2” described later is determined as an internal winning combination, and in the flag state, the corresponding symbol combination “C_blue same color BB” is displayed on the activated line. The circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the BB2 state. In the BB2 state, it is always in the RB state, and when more than the specified number of "240" medals are paid out in the BB2 state, the BB2 state is ended ("Bonus end" in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the game state. Is shifted from the bonus state to the RT4 state.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state, the name “F_BB3” described later is determined as the internal winning combination, and in the flag state, the corresponding symbol combination “C_red different color BB” is displayed on the activated line. The circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the BB3 state. In the BB3 state, it is always in the RB state, and when more than the specified number of "165" medals are paid out in the BB3 state, the BB3 state is ended ("Bonus end" in FIG. 13) and the main control circuit 90 is in the game state. Is shifted from the bonus state to the RT4 state.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state, the below-described name “F_BB4” is determined as the internal winning combination, and in the inter-flag state, the corresponding symbol combination “C_blue different color BB” is displayed on the activated line. The circuit 90 shifts the game state from the inter-flag state to the BB4 state. In the BB4 state, it is always in the RB state, and when more than the specified number of medals “165” are paid out in the BB4 state, the BB4 state is ended (“Bonus end” in FIG. 13) and the main control circuit 90 is in the game state. Is shifted from the bonus state to the RT4 state.

In the RT4 state, when a later-described symbol combination "R_RT1 transition" is displayed on the activated line (in FIG. 13, "RT1 transition is established"), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state from the RT4 state to the RT1 state. Move to. Further, in the RT4 state, when the later-described symbol combination "S_RT3 transition eye" is displayed on the activated line (in FIG. 13, "RT3 transition eye establishment"), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state from the RT4 state. Move to RT3 state.

In the RT1 state, when a later-described symbol combination “S_RT3 transition eye” is displayed on the activated line (“RT3 transition eye is established” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state from the RT1 state to the RT3 state. Move to. Further, in the RT1 state, when the later-described symbol combination “S_RT0 transition lip” is displayed on the activated line (“RT0 transition lip established” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state from the RT1 state. Move to RT0 state.

In the RT0 state, when the later-described symbol combination “S_RT3 transition eye” is displayed on the activated line (“RT3 transition eye is established” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state from the RT0 state to the RT3 state. Move to. Further, in the RT0 state, when a later-described symbol combination “R_RT1 transition eye” is displayed on the activated line, or a later-described symbol combination “S_RT1 transition lip” is displayed on the activated line (in FIG. 13, "RT1 shift eye RT1 shift rip established"), the main control circuit 90 shifts the game state from the RT0 state to the RT1 state. Further, in the RT0 state, when the later-described symbol combination "S_RT2 transition rep" is displayed on the activated line (in FIG. 13, "RT2 transition rip established"), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state from the RT0 state. Change to RT2 state. In addition, when the setting value is changed, or when the initialization condition such as “RAM abnormality” described later is satisfied (“setting change/initialization condition satisfied” in FIG. 13), the initial state is the game state. Becomes the RT0 state.

In the RT2 state, when the later-described symbol combination “S_RT3 transition eye” is displayed on the activated line (in FIG. 13, “RT3 transition eye establishment”), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state from the RT2 state to the RT3 state. Move to. Further, in the RT2 state, when a later-described symbol combination “R_RT1 transition eye” is displayed on the activated line, or a later-described symbol combination “S_RT1 transition lip” is displayed on the activated line (in FIG. 13, "RT1 shift eye RT1 shift rip established"), the main control circuit 90 shifts the game state from the RT2 state to the RT1 state.

In the RT3 state, when a game is played for a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, "8" game, that is, for eight games) ("8 game digestion" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 shifts the game state from the RT3 state to the RT0 state. The period during which the RT3 state continues can be set appropriately. Further, the period during which the RT3 state continues may not be specified. In this case, in the RT3 state, the internal winning combination for which the later-described symbol combination “S_RT0 transition lip” can be displayed on the activated line may be determined with a predetermined probability.

[Game state transition flow considering whether the notification (AT/ART) function is activated]
In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) determines whether or not the function (AT/ART function) for notifying a stop operation advantageous to the player is activated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only the bonus non-winning state, the inter-flag state, and the bonus state described above, but also the operating/non-operating state of the AT/ART function is managed as a game state. In the present embodiment, the game section in which the AT function is operating is referred to as a "normal advantage section", and the game section in which the ART function is operating is referred to as an "advantageous section". A section of the game in which neither is operating is called a "non-advantageous section" or a "normal section".

Further, in the present embodiment, when the bonus state is set in the advantageous section (including the “normal advantageous section” and the “advantageous section”), the bonus state is advantageous as a series of advantageous game sections for the player. It is included in the section and becomes the period in which the above-mentioned status indicator continues to light up (the notification period during the advantageous section), and the number of games for forcibly ending the advantageous section (regulation of continuation) is counted. It is also a period (regulatory monitoring period) (in this embodiment, "1500" games). However, as will be described later, when the bonus state is set in the “non-advantageous section”, the bonus state may shift to the “normal advantageous section” or the “advantageous section”. The state shall be included in the above-mentioned period. If the player enters the bonus state in the non-advantageous section and does not move to the “normal advantage section” or the “advantageous section” after the bonus state ends (when the “non-advantageous section” continues), It is assumed that the bonus state is not included in the advantageous section and the bonus state is not included in the above-described period, as it is not a series of advantageous game sections. However, since the bonus state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player by itself, the bonus state is always an advantageous zone regardless of whether it is a "normal advantageous zone" or "advantageous zone" before and after that. It may be included and included in the period described above.

In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the main control circuit 90 has a "normal state" as a game state of a non-advantageous section (normal section) and a "high-precision 1 state" as a game state of a normal advantageous section. ~ "High-precision 4 state" and "Preliminary state", "Line battle preparation state", "Line battle state", "Right acquisition lottery preparation state", "Right acquisition lottery state", "Right" The acquisition state, the ending preparation state, the ending 1 state, and the ending 2 state are managed.

(Game state of non-advantageous section (normal section))
The normal state, which is the game state of the non-advantageous section (normal section), is a gaming state (non-AT/non-ART) in which the information of the stop operation advantageous for the player is not notified, and is a disadvantageous game state for the player. In the normal state, when it is determined to shift to the normal advantageous zone (“normal advantageous zone shift winning” in FIG. 14), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state from the normal advantageous zone to the decision timing. It shifts to one of the gaming states. The details of the game flow in the normal state will be described later with reference to FIG. 33 described later.

In the present embodiment, in a normal bonus non-winning state, when a specific winning combination other than the bonus winning combination (see FIG. 33 described later) is won, one of the normal advantageous sections is in a gaming state (other than the high-probability state 4). It is usually advantageous to win the internal winning combination (other than “F_BB3+F_Watermelon 2” and “F_BB4+F_Watermelon 2”) including the bonus winning combination in which the same winning probability is set among the set values. If it is decided to shift to the high accuracy 4 state of the section, and if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section after the bonus state based on the bonus combination is finished, the line battle state of the advantageous section is shifted to. When it is determined that the transition to the advantageous zone has not been determined, the four highly accurate states of the regular advantage zone normally continue for a predetermined period (32 games).

Further, in the normal non-bonus winning state, when the internal winning combination (“F_BB3+F_watermelon 2” and “F_BB4+F_watermelon 2”) including the bonus winning combination in which different winning probabilities are set between the setting values is won, it is normal. It is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and after the bonus state based on the bonus hand ends, the normal state of the non-advantageous section continues. Further, in the normal state between flags, no matter which combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the transition to the normal advantageous section is not determined.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the game state shifts from the normal state of the non-advantageous section to one of the gaming states of the normal advantageous section, the above-described advantageous section during notification period is started (that is, the lighting of the state indicator is started. Along with this, the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period is started (that is, counting of the number of times of “1500” games, which is the upper limit for continuing a series of advantageous games, is started).

(Normally advantageous section game state)
Each gaming state in the normal advantageous section is a gaming state (AT) in which information of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and is a gaming state advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state. In each game state of the normal advantage section, when it is decided to shift to the advantage section (including the case where it is already decided to shift to the advantage section in the normal state), the normal advantage section has ended In this case (in FIG. 14, “normal advantageous section end/advantageous section transition winning”), the main control circuit 90 shifts the game state to one of the advantageous section game states according to the decision trigger. Further, in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, when it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the normal advantageous section ends (in FIG. 14, "normal advantageous section end-advantageous section transition non-win") ), the main control circuit 90 shifts the game state to the normal state of the non-advantageous section. The details of the game flow in each game state of the normal advantage section will be described later with reference to FIG. 34 described later.

In each game state of the normal advantageous section, the main control circuit 90, push order small winning (“F_upper left bell 1”, “F_upper left bell 2”, “F_upper middle bell 1”, “F_upper middle” Bell 2”, “F_upper right/left bell 1”, “F_upper right/left bell 2”, “F_upper right middle bell 1”, “F_upper right middle bell 2”, “F_middle left bell 1”, “F_middle left 1” Bell 2”, “F_Middle Middle Bell 1”, “F_Middle Middle Bell 2”, “F_Middle Right Left Bell 1”, “F_Middle Right Left Bell 2”, “F_Middle Right Middle Bell 1”, “F_Middle Right Middle Bell” Bell 2”, “F_Lower Middle Bell 1”, “F_Lower Middle Bell 2”, “F_Lower Right Left Bell 1”, “F_Lower Right Left Bell 2”, “F_Lower Right Middle Bell 1”, “F_Lower Right Middle If any of the "Bell 2" internal winning combinations) is determined as the internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not to notify the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and it is determined to notify. , The information of the stop operation advantageous for the player (that is, the information of the stop operation by which the player can obtain the most medals) is notified (see FIG. 45 described later).

Further, in each game state of the normal advantageous section, the main control circuit 90, push order replay (“F_RT0 middle replay 1” to “F_RT0 middle replay 6”, “F_RT1 middle replay 1” to “F_RT1 middle replay 6” described later. , "F_RT2 middle replay 1" to "F_RT2 middle replay 3") is determined as the internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not to notify the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player. Information of stop operation advantageous to the player (that is, information of stop operation capable of shifting to the RT state advantageous to the player or maintaining the advantageous RT state) is not notified (described later). (See FIG. 45). In this sense, the RT function does not operate (except when the pressing order is accidentally correct), and only the AT function operates (AT gaming state).

Here, in the present embodiment, in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, when in the RT3 state or the RT5 state (i.e., during the eight games or the inter-flag state after the RT3 transition to be described later is displayed). ), the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed until the normal advantageous section ends. On the other hand, in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, when the RT state other than the RT3 state and the RT5 state is present, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed only once. Therefore, even in the game state of the same normal advantageous section, if the RT state is different, the number of times the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed also changes, so that the profit of the player based on it also changes. There is.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state in each of the normal advantageous sections is in the bonus state (more specifically, when the bonus combination is won during the normal advantageous section), the bonus state is in the normal state. Similar to the above (more specifically, when the bonus combination is won during the non-advantageous section), information on the stop operation advantageous to the player in the bonus state (that is, the player can obtain the most medals) Information of possible stop operation) is not notified (see FIG. 45 described later). Specifically, when any one of the push order small winning combinations in the bonus state (internal winning combinations of “F_JAC1_1” to “F_JAC1_6” described later) is determined as the internal winning combination, information on the stop operation advantageous to the player Is not determined.

In the present embodiment, in the bonus non-winning state of each game state of the normal advantage section, when a specific combination other than the bonus combination (see FIG. 34 described later) is won, the game is performed even between the game states of the normal advantage section. The state is changed, and the period (the number of games) during which the normal advantageous section continues is also changed. Also, when a bonus combination is won, if it is not already decided to shift to the advantageous zone, it is decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous zone, and it is advantageous if it is decided to shift to the advantageous zone. When it is decided to shift to the line battle state of the section and it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, the normal high-precision 4 state of the advantageous section continues.

Here, in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, the bonus combination is an internal winning combination (“F_BB3+F_watermelon 2” and “F_BB4+F_watermelon 2”) including a bonus combination in which the same winning probability is set between the set values. ) Is won not only based on the fact that the winning combination is won, but the internal winning combination (“F_BB3+F_Watermelon 2” and “F_BB4+F_Watermelon 2”) including the bonus winning combination in which different winning probabilities are set between the set values are won. Even if the player wins based on what is done, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is determined. That is, in the normal advantageous section, as a common process during the normal advantageous section, regardless of whether or not an internal winning combination including a bonus combination having a setting difference in the winning probability is determined, when the bonus combination is won, Whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is determined. In this sense as well, each gaming state of the normal advantageous section is a more advantageous gaming state than the gaming state of the non-advantageous section.

In addition, in the present embodiment, each game state of the normal advantageous section is in the advantageous section notification period described above (that is, the state indicator is lit), and also in the regulation monitoring period described above (that is, It is in the state of "1500" times of counting the number of games, which is the upper limit for continuing a series of advantageous games. However, when the normal advantageous section ends without shifting to the advantageous section, the above-described advantageous section notification period ends (that is, the state indicator is turned off and turned off), and The regulated monitoring period is ended (that is, the counting of the number of games "1500" times, which is the upper limit for continuing a series of advantageous games, is ended, and the counting result is initialized (cleared).

(Game state of advantageous section)
Each gaming state of the advantageous section is a gaming state (ART) in which information of a stop operation advantageous for the player can be notified, and a gaming advantageous for the player as compared with the normal state and each gaming state of the normal advantageous section. It is in a state. In each gaming state of the advantageous section, the main control circuit 90 basically performs a stop operation advantageous to the player when either the above-described push order small combination or push order replay is determined as the internal winning combination. Information (that is, information on a stop operation that allows the player to obtain the most medals and shift to an RT state advantageous to the player or to maintain the advantageous RT state) (described later) (See FIG. 45). In this sense, the ART function is in operation (ART game state). In each gaming state of the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends without extension (continuation) (including the case where the advantageous section described later is forcibly ended) (in FIG. 14, "end of advantageous section") , The main control circuit 90 shifts the game state to the normal state of the non-advantageous section.

Here, in each gaming state of the advantageous section, as a result of the push order notification of the push order small combination and the push order replay described above, the RT2 state corresponds (is maintained) as the basic RT state. ing. Further, except for the RT4 state after the bonus state ends, the RT3 state based on the display of the RT3 transition to be described later, and the RT0 state after the RT3 state ends, from the normal advantageous zone each game state to the advantageous zone each game state. When transitioning, in most cases, the RT state in each gaming state of the normal advantage section corresponds to the RT1 state. Therefore, the line battle preparation state, the right acquisition lottery preparation state, and the ending preparation state, which are the game states of the advantageous section, can be shifted to the line battle state, the right acquisition lottery state, and the ending 1 state or the ending 2 state, respectively. If it is determined and the RT state is not the RT2 state, it is positioned as a preparation state for raising the RT state to the RT2 state.

When the RT state shifts to the RT2 state in the line battle preparation state, the right acquisition lottery preparation state, and the ending preparation state, the main control circuit 90 changes the game state to the line battle state, the right acquisition lottery state, respectively. And the state is changed to the ending 1 state or the ending 2 state. The details of the game flow in each game state of the advantageous section will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a bonus state is set in each gaming state of the advantageous section (more specifically, when the bonus combination is won during the advantageous section), the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section are defined. Differently, in the bonus state, information of the stop operation advantageous to the player (that is, information of the stop operation by which the player can obtain the most medals) is notified (see FIG. 45 described later). Specifically, when any one of the push order small winning combinations in the bonus state (internal winning combinations of “F_JAC1_1” to “F_JAC1_6” described later) is determined as the internal winning combination, information on the stop operation advantageous to the player Will be informed. Therefore, when the bonus state is set in the advantageous section, more profits are given to the player than when the bonus state is set in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section. Also in this sense, each gaming state of the advantageous section is a gaming state more advantageous than each gaming state of the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section.

Further, in the present embodiment, each gaming state of the advantageous zone is in the advantageous zone notification period described above (that is, the state indicator is lit), and also in the regulation monitoring period described above (that is, a series). The state of "1500" is being counted, which is the upper limit for continuing the advantageous game section. In addition, when the advantageous period ends without reaching the upper limit of “1500” times of the number of games during the advantageous period (including the bonus state), the above-described advantageous period notification period ends (that is, The status indicator is turned off and then turned off, and the regulation monitoring period described above is ended (that is, the number of "1500" games is counted, which is the upper limit for continuing a series of advantageous games. The counting result is initialized (cleared). Also, when the number of games in the advantageous section (including the bonus state) reaches the upper limit of "1500", the advantageous section is forcibly ended (only in the bonus state when in the bonus state). Is continued), and in this case also, the above-described advantageous period notification period is ended (that is, the status indicator is turned off and then turned off), and the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period is ended (that is, , The count of the number of games "1500" times, which is the upper limit for continuing a series of advantageous games, is finished, and the count result is initialized (cleared).

In the present embodiment, when the advantageous section is forcibly ended based on the number of games in the advantageous section (including the bonus state) reaching the upper limit “1500” times, for example, the advantageous section Even if it is decided to continue each gaming state in (the right is given to continue) or the remaining number of games in each gaming state in the advantageous section remains, they are All are initialized (cleared), and then the normal state of the non-advantageous section is entered. Further, when the advantageous section is forcibly ended while the bonus section is in the advantageous section bonus state, the above-mentioned push order notification of the push order small winning combination in the bonus state is also immediately terminated. .. However, in this case, exceptionally, the push order notification of the push order small combination may be performed until the bonus state ends. Further, the number of games played corresponding to the regulation monitoring period is not limited to "1500", and its value can be changed appropriately.

In addition, in the present embodiment, basically, the number of games (the number of games) is defined as a period during which each gaming state corresponding to the above-described normal advantageous section and the advantageous section continues or a period during which each gaming state is extended (continuous period). ), but the method of managing the period of each game state is not limited to this. For example, among the above-mentioned normal advantageous section and each gaming state corresponding to the advantageous section, the period of one or a plurality of gaming states, the payout number of medals paid out during that period, and the number of inserted medals from that period. It may be managed by the subtracted number of coins (net increase) or by the number of times (the number of times of notification) the notification that affects the payout of medals (that is, the notification when the above-mentioned push order small win is won) has been performed. You may.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. It should be noted that various data tables used in various lottery performed in each game state relating to the game property described in FIG. 14 will be described later together with the description of each game property.

[Design placement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table, the position of each symbol in the respective rotation directions of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and data for identifying the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 15) Refer to the symbol code table)))).

In the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 is defined as "0" when the reel index is detected. Then, in each reel, in the order of proceeding in the rotation direction of the reel (the direction from the symbol position "19" to the symbol position "0" in FIG. 15) with reference to the symbol position "0", the value of the symbol counter corresponds to " "0" to "19" are assigned to each symbol as symbol positions.

That is, by referring to the value (“0” to “19”) of the symbol counter and the symbol arrangement table, the reels are displayed in the upper area, the middle area and the lower area of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4. It is possible to specify the type of pattern that is present. In addition, in this embodiment, as a design, "red 7", "blue 7", "BAR", "cherry 1", "cherry 2", "bell", "watermelon", "replay" and "blank" Nine kinds of designs are used.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the symbol "red 7" (symbol code 1), and the symbol "blue 7" (symbol code 2), “00000010” is assigned as data. The symbol "BAR" (symbol code 3) is assigned "00000011" as data, the symbol "cherry 1" (symbol code 4) is assigned "00000100" as data, and the symbol "cherry 2" (symbol) "00000101" is assigned as data to the code 5).

"0000110" is assigned as data to the symbol "bell" (symbol code 6). The symbol "watermelon" (symbol code 7) is assigned "00000111" as data, the symbol "Replay" (symbol code 8) is assigned "00001000" as data, and the symbol "blank" (symbol code 9) ) Is assigned "00001001" as data.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16 to FIG. 18, an internal lottery table that is referred to when determining an internal winning combination will be described. 16 and 17 are internal lottery tables referred to in each of the RT0 state to the RT5 state. 18 is an internal lottery table referred to in the bonus state.

The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state (see FIG. 13 ), and defines the correspondence relationship between various internal winning combinations and the lottery value when each internal winning combination is determined. The lottery value is defined for each preset value (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the preset expected value of the internal winnings such as a bonus combination and a small combination. This setting is changed using, for example, the reset switch 76 and the setting key type switch 54 (see FIG. 7).

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 assigns a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535) to each internal winning combination. The specified lottery value is added sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result (lottery value+random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether or not the lottery result overflows). Then, in the predetermined internal winning combination, if the lottery result exceeds 65535, it is determined that the internal winning combination has been won. In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, an example of performing lottery by adding the lottery value to the extracted random number value has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value. The winning/non-winning of the internal lottery may be determined by determining whether the subtraction result (lottery result) is less than “0” (whether the lottery result underflows).

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the probability of being determined is higher for the internal winning combination having a larger numerical value defined as the lottery value. In addition, the winning probability of each internal winning combination can be represented by “lottery value defined for each winning number/the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)”.

In the internal lottery table referred to in each of the RT0 state to the RT5 state, as shown in FIG. 16, basically, according to the type of the RT state, the type and the winning probability of the replay combination determined as the internal winning combination. Changes. For example, the replay combinations associated with the names “Replay 1 in F_RT0 (No. 40)” to “Replay 6 in F_RT0 (No. 45)” are not determined as internal winning combinations other than the RT0 state, and are internal in the RT0 state. It is decided as a winning combination.

16 and 17, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 1" to "No. 38" is an internal winning combination in which the bonus combination and the replay combination or the small combination overlap. For example, in "F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (No. 1)", the bonus combination "F_BB1" and the replay combination "F_confirmation rep" are won, and the symbol combination "BB01" corresponding to the bonus combination "F_BB1" is won. (See FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) and the combination of symbols “REP01” to “REP09” (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) corresponding to the replay combination “F_confirmed rep” (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) are allowed to be derived (winning) Is allowed) has become an internal winning combination.

16 and 17, the internal winning combinations indicated by "No. 39" to "No. 60" are the internal winning combinations that the replay winning combination wins. For example, "F_maintenance rep (No.40)" is won by the replay combination "F_maintenance rep", and the symbol combination "REP02" corresponding to the replay combination "F_maintenance rep" (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later). ) Is allowed to derive (winning is allowed) is an internal winning combination.

16 and 17, the internal winning combinations indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 98" are the internal winning combinations that are won by the small winning combination. For example, “F_chance eye A1 (No. 61)” is won by the small win “F_chance eye A1”, and the symbol combinations “NML14”, “NML22”, and “NML22” corresponding to the small win “F_chance eye A1”. It is an internal winning combination that allows derivation of “NML26” and “NML30” (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) (winning is permitted).

Although illustration is omitted, when “F_chance eye A1 (No. 61)” to “F_chance eye B4 (No. 68)” are determined as the internal winning combination, “NZR01” (later described) will be described. 19 to 22) is permitted (stop display is permitted). Here, "HZR01" is not a combination of symbols related to winning, but a part of a combination of deviating symbols, but as a combination of symbols for shifting the gaming state from another RT state to the RT3 state (RT3 transition eye) It is a combination of defined symbols, and basically, derivation is not permitted except when any of the internal winning combinations indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 68" is determined. Therefore, "NZR01" can be said to be a combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 68".

Similarly, when “F_upper left bell 1 (No. 77)” to “F_lower right middle bell 2 (No. 98)” are determined as the internal winning combination, “NZR02” (to be described later) 19 to FIG. 22) is also permitted (stop display is permitted). Here, "HZR02" is not a combination of symbols related to winning, but a part of a combination of outlying symbols, but as a combination of symbols for shifting the gaming state from another RT state to the RT1 state (RT1 transition eye) It is a combination of the defined symbols, and basically derivation is not permitted except when any of the internal winning combinations indicated by "No. 77" to "No. 98" is determined. Therefore, "NZR02" can be said to be a combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 77" to "No. 98".

In the present embodiment, the bonus combination is not further determined in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), that is, in the state where the bonus combination has already been determined as the internal winning combination (carried over). Therefore, in the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, “0” is set to the lottery value of the internal winning combination indicated by “No. 1” to “No. 38” in the inter-flag state (RT5 state). ing. However, "No. 2" to "No. 10" and "No. 12" are set so that the winning probability of the small winning combination does not change between the inter-flag state (RT5 state) and the bonus non-winning state (RT0 to RT4 state). The lottery values related to the small winning combination assigned in the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 38" to "No. 38" are "No. 61" to "No. 68" and "No. 68" in the inter-flag state (RT5 state). 72” and “No. 73” are added to the lottery value of the internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combinations indicated by “No. 61” to “No. 68”, “No. 72” and “No. 73” do not have a high winning probability in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), but a bonus. It has become the same probability among the game states other than the state.

Further, in FIGS. 16 and 17, “No. 0” indicates “out” in which derivation of any defined combination of symbols (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) is not allowed. The higher the allocation (lottery value) of “out”, the more disadvantageous to the player. It should be noted that in the RT0 state and the RT2 state, there is no case where “out” is determined. Further, in the RT5 state, the probability that the “out” is determined is described as “22289/65536”, but in reality, one of the bonus winning combinations has already been determined as the internal winning combination (carried over). Since it is in a state of being), “out” is not determined in that sense.

16 and 17, the internal lottery table when the setting value is “1” (setting 1) is described as an example, but “No. 21”, “No. 30”, and “No”. .39” and “No. 74”, internal lottery combinations other than the internal winning combinations are set to common lottery values among the set values. That is, they have the same winning probability. On the other hand, regarding the internal winning combinations shown in “No. 21,” “No. 30,” “No. 39,” and “No. 74,” between each set value (or between a predetermined set value and a specific set value). Different lottery values have been set. That is, the winning probabilities are different (see (*1), (*2) and (*3) in FIGS. 16 and 17).

Specifically, for example, in the case of the internal winning combination shown in “No. 21” and “No. 30”, when the setting value is “1”, the lottery value of “22” is set, respectively. When the set value is "6", a lottery value of "77" is set respectively (that is, as the set value becomes higher, the lottery in the internal winning combination shown in "No. 21" and "No. 30" is performed. The value is increasing by "11"). Although not shown, in the flag-to-flag state (RT5 state), as the lottery value set for the internal winning combination shown in “No. 21” and “No. 30” increases, “ The lottery value set for the internal winning combination shown in No. 72” also increases.

Further, for example, the internal winning combination shown in “No. 74” has setting values “2”, “4” and “6” more than the setting values “1”, “3” and “5”. In this case, the lottery value is set to be relatively high, and the lottery value is set to increase as the set value increases.

In addition, for example, the internal winning combination shown in “No. 39” has setting values “2”, “4” and “6” rather than setting values “1”, “3” and “5”. In this case, the lottery value is set to be relatively low, and the lottery value is set to decrease as the set value increases. This is to adjust the increase in the lottery value of the internal winning combination shown in “No. 21”, “No. 30” and “No. 74”. Therefore, for example, in the RT0 state and the RT2 state, “0” is maintained without changing the probability that “off” is determined. It should be noted that these are examples of making the winning probabilities of specific internal winning combinations different between the set values.

In FIG. 18, the internal winning combinations indicated by “No. 1” to “No. 7” are the internal winning combinations that the small winning combination wins, and when winning, the corresponding symbols shown in FIG. Derivation of combinations is allowed (winning is allowed). Note that, in the present embodiment, the replay combination is configured not to be determined as the internal winning combination in the RB state (that is, the BB1 to BB4 states), but one of the replay combinations shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. Alternatively, a plurality of replay combinations may be determined as internal winning combinations.

[Design combination table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 19 to FIG. 22, a symbol combination table that defines symbol combinations relating to winning and the like in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as the data that predefines a combination of a plurality of symbols, a symbol combination table is provided as an example for description, but the symbol combination displayed on the main control circuit 90 side is identified. If possible, the data can be defined by other methods. For example, a combination of symbol codes may be determined, and the symbol combination displayed thereby may be identified.

As shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the symbol combination table predefines a combination of a plurality of symbols, and defines data indicating the type of the combination of these symbols as a display combination (winning operation flag). There is. The symbol combination table is composed of 9-byte data so as to correspond to the hit request flag storage area, the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25 described later), and the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30 described later). In addition, data indicating different display combinations (winning operation flags) is defined in each bit of each storage area.

It should be noted that in FIGS. 19 to 22, there are places marked with "/" in the prescribed symbol combinations, but this constitutes a symbol combination in any of the symbols shown. Indicates that. For example, the combination of "HZR01" is a combination of symbols in which the symbol of the left reel is "cherry 1", the symbol of the middle reel is "cherry 1", and the symbol of the right reel is "cherry 1" (that is, "cherry 1- Cherry 1-cherry 1") and a symbol of the left reel is "cherry 2", a symbol of the middle reel is "cherry 1", and a symbol of the right reel is "cherry 1" (that is, "cherry 2-"). "Cherry 1-Cherry 1") is a combination of corresponding symbols.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "HZR01" is an outlying symbol combination, but when the symbol combination is displayed on the activated line, the RT state is shifted from another RT state to the RT3 state. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination (“RT3 transition”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "HZR02" is an outlying symbol combination, but when the symbol combination is displayed on the activated line, the RT state is shifted from another RT state to the RT1 state. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination (“RT1 transition”).

Display combinations (winning operation flags) "BB01", "BB02", "BB03" and "BB04" are combinations of symbols related to the bonus combination, and when each combination of symbols is displayed on the display effective line. , Activate the corresponding bonus state.

Display combination (winning operation flag) "REP01" to "REP06" is a combination of symbols relating to the replay combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the activated line, the replay is performed. Activate. The combination of symbols "REP01" can be called "parallel lip" or "straight line lip", the combination of symbols "REP02" can be called "normal lip", and the symbol "REP03". The combination of symbols can be referred to as a “bullied lip”, the symbol combination of “REP04” can be referred to as a “special lip”, and the symbol combination of “REP05” can be referred to as a “fake lip”. , The combination of symbols "REP06" can be referred to as "BAR matching lip".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP07" is a combination of symbols relating to the replay combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the activated line, the replay is activated and the RT state is set to another RT. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination of symbols (“RT0 transition lip”) to be shifted from the state (for example, RT1 state) to the RT0 state.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP08" is a combination of symbols relating to the replay combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the activated line, the replay is activated and the RT state is set to another RT. The state (for example, RT0 state and RT2 state) is a symbol combination defined as a symbol combination (“RT1 transition lip”) to be shifted to the RT1 state.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP09" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the activated line, the re-game is operated and the RT state is set to another RT. It is a combination of symbols defined as a symbol combination (“RT2 transition lip”) to be shifted from the state (for example, RT0 state) to the RT2 state.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML01" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the activated line, eight medals are paid out. The combination of symbols "NML01" can be referred to as the combination of symbols "bell".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML02" to "NML13" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when one of these symbols is displayed on the activated line, one of the symbols is displayed. Medals will be paid out. The symbol combinations of "NML02" to "NML13" can be collectively referred to as the symbol combinations of "bat order combination".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML14" to "NML30" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when one of these symbols is displayed on the activated line, one of the symbols is displayed. Medals will be paid out. The symbol combinations of "NML14" to "NML30" can be collectively referred to as the symbol combinations of "chance combination".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML31" to "NML33" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any one of these symbols is displayed on the activated line, five symbols are displayed. Medals will be paid out. The combination of symbols "NML31" to "NML33" can be collectively referred to as the combination of symbols "special combination".

The display combination (winning operation flag) “NML34” is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the activated line, eight medals are paid out. The symbol combination of "NML34" can be referred to as a symbol combination of "cross down bell".

The display combination (winning operation flag) “NML35” is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the activated line, five medals are paid out. The symbol combination of "NML35" can be referred to as the symbol combination of "watermelon".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML36" and "NML37" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any one of these combinations is displayed on the activated line, eight pieces are displayed. Medals will be paid out. The symbol combinations of "NML36" and "NML37" can be collectively referred to as the symbol combinations of "JACA".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML38" to "NML40" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any one of these symbols is displayed on the activated line, two symbols are displayed. Medals will be paid out. The symbol combinations of "NML38" to "NML40" can be collectively referred to as the symbol combinations of "JACB".

In the present embodiment, an example in which the data indicating one display combination (winning operation flag) includes a combination of a plurality of symbols (combination) is described, but one display combination (winning prize) The data indicating the operation flag may be configured such that only one symbol combination (combination) is assigned.

[Correspondence between internal winning combination, stop operation sequence (batting order), display combination, etc.]
Next, with reference to FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation sequence (batting order), the display combination and the like will be described.

In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a combination of symbols that are displayed differently depending on the stop operation order (push order) of the player, so-called "push order combination" (for example, "push order small combination" or "push order combination" described above Order replay”). Since the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided, there are a maximum of six stop operation sequences (pushing sequences).

In FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, the stop operation order (pushing order) is “left, middle, right” as “batting order 1”, and the stop operation order (pushing order) is “left, right, middle”. It is indicated as "Batting order 2", and that the stop operation order (pushing order) is "Middle, Left, Right" is shown as "Batting order 3", and the stopping operation order (pushing order) is The "middle, right, left" order is indicated as "batting order 4", and the stop operation order (push order) is "right, left, middle" order as "batting order 5", and the stopping operation is performed. The order (pushing order) is “right, middle, left” is shown as “batting order 6”.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the “F_confirmed lip” is won regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation when it is determined as the internal winning combination instead of the push order combination. "Special Lip" is established. Depending on the timing of the stop operation, one of the other winning replay combinations may be established.

Here, "regardless of the timing of the stop operation" means that when the effective line is three lines of "center line", "top line" and "bottom line" and the maximum number of sliding pieces is "4", It means that the corresponding symbols are arranged so that they can be stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, they are arranged within the range of 5 symbols). To do. Note that, for example, on the left reel 3L, the symbol "cherry 1" is not stopped and displayed within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, when the symbol positions "10" to "12" are in the middle stage, the stop operation is performed). However, when the stop operation is performed at that location, the symbol "cherry 2" is placed at the symbol position "13" so that the symbol "cherry 2" can be stopped and displayed. ing. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is determined, for example, the symbols "cherry 1" and "cherry 2" are allowed to be displayed in a stopped state as the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols corresponding thereto, for example. As a result, within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces as a whole, even when the corresponding symbol can be stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines, the combination of the symbols is "regardless of the timing of the stop operation". It can be said that it holds. The same applies to other display combinations (winning operation flag) and the like. However, in the push order combination, since the combination of symbols that are controlled to be stopped preferentially based on the stop operation sequence varies, even if the symbols are arranged as described above, the type of the stop operation sequence Depending on the case, the design may not be stopped and displayed on the activated line.

If "F_Maintain Lip" is determined as an internal winning combination instead of a push order combination, one of the winning "normal Lips" is established regardless of the stop operation sequence and the timing of the stop operation. To do.

"F_RT0 middle replay 1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 1", "RT2 transition" is performed regardless of the stop operation timing. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "batting order 1", the "RT1 shift rep" is satisfied and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

"F_RT0 middle replay 2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 2", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batt order 2", the "RT1 transition rep" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state is changed to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 3", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than “batting order 3”, the “RT1 transition rep” is established and the RT state is changed to the RT1 state regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

“F_RT0 middle replay 4” is a push order combination, and if the stop operation sequence is “batting order 4” when it is determined as the internal winning combination in the RT0 state, “RT2 transition” is performed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “batting order 4”, the “RT1 shift rep” is established and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

"F_RT0 middle replay 5" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 5", "RT2 transition" is performed regardless of the stop operation timing. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "Batting Order 5", the "RT1 transition rep" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 6" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 6", "RT2 transition" is performed regardless of the stop operation timing. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "batt order 6", the "RT1 transition rep" is satisfied and the RT state is changed to the RT1 state regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

"F_RT1 middle replay 1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation sequence is "bat order 1", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "Batting Order 1", regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition rep" is established, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The state is not changed and the RT1 state is maintained (maintenance lip). In addition, when the stop operation sequence is "Batting order 5" and "Batting order 6", the stop control is performed so that the "fake lip" is preferentially stopped over the other "maintenance lip". That is, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, the "fake lip" is established, and if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, another "maintenance lip" is established. The same applies to the “replay 2 during F_RT1” and the “replay 3 during F_RT1”.

"F_RT1 middle replay 2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state and the stop operation sequence is "bat order 2", "RT0 transition" is performed regardless of the stop operation timing. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “batting order 2”, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of the replay combinations other than the winning “RT0 transition rep” is established, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The state is not changed and the RT1 state is maintained (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 3", "RT0 transition" regardless of the stop operation timing. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “bat order 3”, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of the replay combinations other than the winning “RT0 transition rep” is established, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The state is not changed and the RT1 state is maintained (maintenance lip).

“F_RT1 middle replay 4” is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is “batting order 4” when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, “RT0 transition” is performed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "Batting Order 4", regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition rep" is established, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The state is not changed and the RT1 state is maintained (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 5" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state and the stop operation sequence is "batting order 5", "RT0 transition" is performed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "Batting Order 5", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition rep" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The state is not changed and the RT1 state is maintained (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 6" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 6", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “batting order 6”, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of the replay combinations other than the winning “RT0 transition rep” is established, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The state is not changed and the RT1 state is maintained (maintenance lip).

In the present embodiment, when the “RT0 transition lip” is established, the “RT1 transition lip” may be established at the same time, but in this case, the main control circuit 90 determines that the “RT0 transition lip” is established by “RT1 transition lip”. Judgment is given priority over the establishment of "Transition Lip". That is, when "RT0 transition lip" and "RT1 transition lip" are established at the same time, it is judged that "RT0 transition lip" is established and the RT state is shifted to the RT0 state, and "RT1 transition lip" is established. I do not judge.

"F_RT2 middle replay 1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT2 state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 1" and "batter order 2", the timing of the stop operation is irrelevant. Instead, a replay combination (for example, “normal lip”) other than the winning “RT1 transition lip” is established, the RT state does not transition to the RT1 state, and the RT2 state is maintained (maintenance lip). On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "bat order 1" and "bat order 2", the "RT1 transition rep" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state is shifted to the RT1 state.

"F_RT2 middle replay 2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT2 state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 3" and "batter order 4", the timing of the stop operation is irrelevant. Instead, a replay combination (for example, “normal lip”) other than the winning “RT1 transition lip” is established, the RT state does not transition to the RT1 state, and the RT2 state is maintained (maintenance lip). On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “bat order 3” and “bat order 4”, the “RT1 transition rep” is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state is shifted to the RT1 state.

"F_RT2 middle replay 3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT2 state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 5" and "batter order 6", the stop operation timing is irrelevant. Instead, a replay combination (for example, “normal lip”) other than the winning “RT1 transition lip” is established, the RT state does not transition to the RT1 state, and the RT2 state is maintained (maintenance lip). On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "Batting Order 5" and "Batting Order 6", the "RT1 transition rep" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state is shifted to the RT1 state.

When the "F_upper lip" is determined as the internal winning combination instead of the push order combination, the "parallel lip" is established on the top line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, " The "Replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel, which is "Upper Lip".)

When "F_Middle-stage Lip 1" is determined as an internal winning combination instead of a push order combination, a "parallel lip" is established at the center line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, The "replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line on the middle row of each reel, and becomes the "middle row lip".)

"F_Middle stage rip 2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination, if the stop operation sequence is "Batting order 1" to "Batting order 4", regardless of the timing of the stop operation, " If "middle-stage rip" is established, the stop operation sequence is other than "bat order 1" to "bat order 4", and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate timing, "fake lip" is established and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate timing. Otherwise, the "middle-stage rip" is established. It should be noted that, since no game state transition is made regardless of which replay combination is established, "F_Middle stage rip 2" is a push order combination, but the profit of the player does not change depending on the stop operation sequence. It is a role.

"F_Middle stage rip 3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination, if the stop operation sequence is "bat order 1" and "bat order 2", regardless of the timing of the stop operation, "Middle-stage rip" is established, the stop operation order is other than "bat order 1" and "bat order 2", and if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate timing, the "BAR complete rep" is established and the stop operation timing is appropriate. If it is not the right timing, the "middle stage rip" is established. In addition, since the game state is not changed regardless of which replay combination is established, "F_middle rep 3" is a push order combination, but the player's profit does not change depending on the stop operation sequence. It is a role.

When "F_lower lip" is determined as an internal winning combination rather than a push order combination, a "parallel lip" is established at the bottom line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, " The "Replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel, which is "Lower Lip".

When "F_Bulled Lip" is determined as the internal winning combination instead of the push order combination, the "Bullet Lip" is established at the center line regardless of the stop operation sequence and the stop operation timing (that is, " The symbol "replay" is displayed in a straight line in the middle row of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C, but is not displayed in the middle row of the right reel 3R).

"F_JAC1_1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 1", the "bell" and the winning combination are performed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. One of the existing “JACA” is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "Batting Order 1", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2", and "S_JACB3" respectively). Are simultaneously displayed on the activated line), and 6 medals are paid out.

Since “bell” and “JACA” are a combination of symbols in which eight medals are paid out, if they are simultaneously established as described above, “8+8=16 medals” are originally paid out. However, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of medals that can be paid out in one game is set to "15", and even if a prize for more than 15 coins is generated, 15 medals are paid out. I'm trying to put it out. The same applies to "F_JAC1_2" to "F_JAC1_6".

"F_JAC1_2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 2", the "bell" and the winning combination are executed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. One of the existing “JACA” is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “batt order 2”, all winning “JACB” are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, “S_JACB1”, “C_JACB2”, and “S_JACB3” respectively). Are simultaneously displayed on the activated line), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 3", regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" and the winning combination are won. One of the existing “JACA” is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than “batt order 3”, all winning “JACB” are established regardless of the stop operation timing (that is, “S_JACB1”, “C_JACB2”, and “S_JACB3” respectively). Are simultaneously displayed on the activated line), and 6 medals are paid out.

“F_JAC1_4” is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation sequence is “batter order 4”, the “bell” and the winning combination are performed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. One of the existing “JACA” is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "Batting order 4", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively). Are simultaneously displayed on the activated line), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_5" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state and the stop operation sequence is "batting order 5", the "bell" and the winning combination are performed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. One of the existing “JACA” is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "Batting order 5", all winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2", and "S_JACB3" respectively). Are simultaneously displayed on the activated line), and 6 medals are paid out.

“F_JAC1_6” is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation sequence is “batter order 6”, the “bell” and the winning combination are performed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. One of the existing “JACA” is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “batt order 6”, all the winning “JACB” are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, “S_JACB1”, “C_JACB2” and “S_JACB3” respectively). Are simultaneously displayed on the activated line), and 6 medals are paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the RB state, when the pressing order is correct (when the stop operation is performed in the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player), the “bell” and the “JACA” are overlapped and the prize is won. By doing so, 15 medals are paid out, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the payout number of “JACA” medals is set to “15” and the pushing order is correct, it is won. Fifteen medals may be paid out when any of the existing "JACA" is established.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the RB state, when the pressing order is not correct (when the stop operation is not performed by the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player), a plurality of “JACB” are duplicated. 6 medals are paid out by winning (2 x 3 lines), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the payout number of "JACB" medals is set to "6", and the pushing order is If the correct answer is not obtained, 6 of the medals may be paid out by establishing one of the winning "JACB".

If "F_JAC2" is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state instead of the pushing order combination, whichever of "bell" and winning "JACA" is awarded regardless of the stop operation sequence and the timing of the stop operation. Is established, and 15 medals are paid out. Note that, similarly, for example, the payout number of medals of "JACA" is set to "15", and if any of the winning "JACA" is established, 15 medals are paid out. You can

When the “F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and the “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4” are determined as the internal winning combination instead of the push winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is If the timing is appropriate, the "chance part" is missed and "RT3 transition" is displayed on the activated line. In this case, although there is no payout of medals, there is a possibility that the RT state will shift to the RT3 state. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to perform a stop operation in which the “chance hand” is dropped and the “RT3 shift eye” is displayed. Is likely to be. Here, in that sense, it is explained that it is the "appropriate" timing of the stop operation that the "missing opportunity" is missed. On the other hand, if the timing of the stop operation is not an appropriate timing, one of the winning "chance combinations" is established and one medal is paid out, but the RT state does not shift to the RT3 state. ..

Here, when any one of “F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4” is determined as the internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. Whether or not it is the right timing is determined based on, for example, the timing of the stop operation during the third stop operation. Specifically, 3/4 of the timings of all the stop operations at the time of the third stop operation is set as an appropriate timing, and when the stop operation is performed at the timing, the “RT3 transition” is given. When the condition is satisfied and the stop operation is performed at the remaining 1/4 timing, the "chance hand" is established because the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate. In addition, as a general rule, the timing of such a stop operation should be at least partially different among the “F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and the “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4”. Includes what has become. Therefore, it is possible to change the appropriate timing depending on which internal winning combination is won, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game regarding the stop operation.

In the present embodiment, when the “F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and the “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4” are determined as the internal winning combination, depending on the timing of the stop operation. Thus, the “RT3 transition point” or the “chance role” is established, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the "RT3 transition" is established when the stop operation is performed in the correct pushing order, and the "chance hand" is established when the stop operation is not performed in the correct pushing order. Good. Further, the "RT3 transition point" may be established regardless of the stop operation sequence and the stop operation timing. In this case, the "RT3 shift" may be defined as a combination of symbols having a payout of medals (for example, one medal is paid out).

"F_weak rare combination A" and "F_weak rare combination B" are won regardless of the stop operation sequence and the timing of the stop operation when it is determined as an internal winning combination instead of the push order combination. One of the "chance roles" is established and one medal is paid out. As in the case of “F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4”, the “chance role” may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation. You may do it. In this case, the "RT3 transition point" may not be displayed. In the present embodiment, the timing of the stop operation is appropriate when the winning of any of “F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4” is successful. There is a case where the "chance part" is displayed without any, or a case where the "F_weak rare part A" or "F_weak rare part B" is won and the "chance part" is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to change the expectation of the bonus winning combination winning combination and the expectation of the transition to RT3 depending on the internal winning combination and the stop operation mode, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

When “F_watermelon 1” and “F_watermelon 2” are determined as the internal winning combination instead of the push winning combination, the “watermelon” is established regardless of the stop operation sequence and the timing of the stop operation. One medal will be paid out. The “watermelon” may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation.

When the "F_determination winning combination" is determined as the internal winning combination instead of the push winning combination, all the winning "special winning combinations" are established regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation (that is, , "S_special combination 1", "C_special combination 2" and "S_special combination 3" are simultaneously displayed on the activated line), and 15 medals are paid out. Note that, for example, even if the number of medals for the "special combination" is set to "15" and one of the winning "special combinations" is established, 15 medals can be paid out. Good.

When the "F_special bell" is decided as the internal winning combination instead of the push order combination, the "cross down bell" is established regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing, and eight medals are won. Be paid out.

When the "F_upper common bell" is determined as the internal winning combination instead of the push order combination, the "bell" is established at the top line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, " The "Bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel, and becomes the "upper bell"), and 8 medals are paid out.

When the "F_middle-stage common bell" is determined as the internal winning combination instead of the push order combination, the "bell" is established at the center line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, " The "Bell" pattern is displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel), and the eight middle medals are paid out.

In the present embodiment, when the internal winning combination is determined, the "bell" is established on the bottom line regardless of the stop operation sequence and the timing of the stop operation (that is, the "bell" symbol is applied to each reel). It becomes a "lower bell" displayed in a straight line in the lower row), and 8 medals are paid out. For example, although there is no internal winning combination of "F_lower common bell", the inside of this "F_lower common bell" It is also possible to provide a winning combination and to win the game with a predetermined probability in a game state other than the bonus state.

"F_upper left bell 1" and "F_upper left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 1" and "batter order 2" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is displayed as a "top bell" in a straight line on the top of each reel), and 8 medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than “bat order 1” and “bat order 2” and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning “bat order combinations” is established, and If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not an appropriate timing, the “RT1 transition eye” is established (RT1 transition), and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

"F_upper middle bell 1" and "F_upper middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and when determined as an internal winning combination, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 3" and "batter order 4", Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is displayed as a "top bell" in a straight line on the top of each reel), and 8 medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “bat order 3” and “bat order 4” and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning “bat order combinations” is established, and If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not an appropriate timing, the “RT1 transition eye” is established (RT1 transition), and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

"F_upper right/left bell 1" and "F_upper right/left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation sequence is "batting order 5" when determined as the internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is determined. Regardless, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “Batting Order 5” and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning “Batting combination combinations” will be established and one medal will be paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition), and medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

"F_upper right middle bell 1" and "F_upper right middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing, the "bell" is established on the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and 8 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "bat order 6" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "bat order combinations" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition), and medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

In the present embodiment, "Batting order 1" and "Batting order 2" (that is, the first left stop) is the correct answer as the pressing order subcommittee that becomes the "upper bell" when the pressing order is correct. Left bell 1" and "F_upper left bell 2", and "F_upper middle bell 1" and "F_upper middle bell 2" in which "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" (that is, middle first stop) are correct answers And "F_upper right/left bell 1" and "F_upper right/left bell 2" where "batting order 5" is correct, and "F_upper right middle bell 1" and "F_upper right middle bell" where "batting order 6" is correct. 2” is provided. In other words, among the maximum of 6 push orders (6 choices), the correct push order is specified to be 4 (4 choices). This is an example of the order, and the push order pattern (selection number) that is the correct answer is not limited to this.

For example, the correct pressing order may be defined to be 6 ways (6 choices) or 3 ways (3 choices). In the case of three ways (three choices), the left first stop (“Batting order 1” and “Batting order 2”), the first middle stop (“Batting order 3” and “Batting order 4”), and the right first stop ( The internal winning combination relating to the “upper bell” may be configured such that one of the “batting order 5” and the “batting order 6”) is the correct pushing order. The same applies to the internal winning combinations related to the “RT0 transition lip” to the “RT2 transition lip”, the internal winning combinations relating to the “middle bell”, and the internal winning combinations relating to the “lower bell” described below. That is, in the push order combination, the push order pattern (selection number) that is the correct answer can be set as appropriate, and the pattern (selection number) is not limited to that described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24.

"F_middle-stage left bell 1" and "F_middle-stage left bell 2" are push order combinations, and when determined as an internal winning combination, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 1" and "batter order 2", Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established on the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is a "middle bell" displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel), and 8 medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than “bat order 1” and “bat order 2” and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning “bat order combinations” is established, and If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not an appropriate timing, the “RT1 transition eye” is established (RT1 transition), and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

"F_middle-stage middle bell 1" and "F_middle-stage middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and when determined to be an internal winning combination, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 3" and "batter order 4", Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established on the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is a "middle bell" displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel), and 8 medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “bat order 3” and “bat order 4” and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning “bat order combinations” is established, and If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not an appropriate timing, the “RT1 transition eye” is established (RT1 transition), and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

“F_middle row right/left bell 1” and “F_middle row right/left bell 2” are push order combinations, and if the stop operation sequence is “batter order 5” when determined as an internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is determined. Regardless, the "bell" is established on the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "middle bell" displayed in a straight line in the middle row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “Batting Order 5” and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning “Batting combination combinations” will be established and one medal will be paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition), and medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

"F_middle-stage right middle bell 1" and "F_middle-stage right middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation sequence is "bat order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing, the "bell" is established on the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "middle bell" displayed in a straight line in the middle row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "bat order 6" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "bat order combinations" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition), and medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

"F_Lower Middle Bell 1" and "F_Lower Middle Bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "Batting Order 3" and "Batting Order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is a "lower bell" displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and 8 medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “bat order 3” and “bat order 4” and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning “bat order combinations” is established, and If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not an appropriate timing, the “RT1 transition eye” is established (RT1 transition), and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

"F_lower row right/left bell 1" and "F_lower row right/left bell 2" are push order combinations, and when determined as an internal winning combination, if the stop operation sequence is "batter order 5", the timing of the stop operation is determined. Regardless, the "bell" is established on the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than “Batting Order 5” and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning “Batting combination combinations” will be established and one medal will be paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition), and medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

"F_lower-stage right middle bell 1" and "F_lower-stage right middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation sequence is "bat order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing, the "bell" is established on the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is other than "bat order 6" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "bat order combinations" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition), and medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the RT1 state is entered.

In addition, in this embodiment, when any one of the “F_upper left bell 1” to “F_lower right bell 2” is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed in the pushing order that is the correct answer. If not, whether or not the timing of the stop operation is appropriate timing is determined, for example, based on the timing of the stop operation during the third stop operation. Specifically, half the timing of all the stop operations at the time of the third stop operation is determined as an appropriate timing, and when the stop operation is performed at the timing, the winning is won. If one of the batting combinations” is established and the stop operation is performed at the remaining 1/2 timing, the “RT1 transition” is established because the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, when any of the “F_upper left bell 1” to the “F_upper right middle bell 2” is determined as the internal winning combination and the state is the inter-flag state (RT5 state), Regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is displayed as "upper bell" on the top of each reel) and 8 Will be paid out. In the case where any of “F_middle stage left bell 1” to “F_middle stage right bell 2” is determined as the internal winning combination and the state is between flags (RT5 state), the stop operation sequence, and Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established on the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is a "middle bell" displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel), and 8 medals are paid out. .. Further, in the case where any of “F_lower middle bell 1” to “F_lower right bell 2” is determined as the internal winning combination and the state is between flags (RT5 state), the stop operation sequence, and Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is a "lower bell" displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and 8 medals are paid out. ..

That is, in the flag-to-flag state (RT5 state), the push order small combination is no longer the push normal combination (the push normal combination does not matter). However, it is not always necessary to configure in this way, and even in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), as described above, if the pushing order is the correct answer, eight medals will be paid out. "Bell", "middle bell" or "lower bell") is displayed as a stop, and if it is not the correct push order, one medal is paid out if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate "Stop batting" is displayed However, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the omission may occur. In this case, since the gaming state does not shift to the RT1 state even if "RT1 shift eye" is displayed, "RT1 shift eye" may not be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the replay combination or the small combination and the bonus combination are overlapped and determined as the internal winning combination (including the case where the bonus combination is carried over), the replay combination or the small combination is more than the bonus combination. However, the stop control for preferentially establishing the bonus combination over the replay combination or the small combination may be performed.

Here, the reel stop control (stop symbol position determination method) in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. In this embodiment, after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, reel stop control is performed so that the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped within 190 msec. Specifically, the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected is added with one of the number of sliding symbols “0” to “4”, and the value is obtained. The symbol position is determined as a symbol position where the rotation of the reel stops (hereinafter, referred to as “scheduled stop position”). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position where the rotation of the reel starts to be stopped (hereinafter referred to as “stop start position”).

That is, the number of sliding pieces is the amount of rotation of the reel after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch until the rotation of the corresponding reel stops. In other words, it is the number of symbols passing through the middle region of the reel of the reel display window 4 in the period from when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch to when the rotation of the reel is stopped. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch.

With reference to a stop table (not shown), the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is tentative, and the obtained number of sliding pieces does not immediately determine the scheduled stop position of the reel. In the present embodiment, when there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces than the number of sliding pieces acquired based on the stop table (hereinafter referred to as “slip piece number determination data”), a pull-in priority table (not shown) is referred to. Change the number of sliding pieces. Then, the number-of-slip-pieces determination data is referred to in order to determine the search order when comparing the priorities of the respective symbols from the stop start position to the symbol position which is the maximum number of four slides ahead.

In the reel stop control of this embodiment, first, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on a stop table (not shown). However, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces other than this number of sliding pieces based on the priority, the number of sliding pieces is changed to the appropriate number. That is, in the present embodiment, a more appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined based on the priority of the symbol combination that allows the stop display by the internal winning combination, regardless of the number of sliding pieces acquired from the stop table.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configuration of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 103 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Hit request flag storage area and winning action flag storage area]
First, the configurations of the hit request flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area) and the winning operation flag storage area (display combination storage area) will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the hit request flag storage area (flag data storage area, winning flag data storage area) and the winning operation flag storage area (winning flag data storage area) have the same configuration.

In the present embodiment, the hit request flag storage areas are made up of hit request storage areas 1 to 9 each represented by 1-byte data, and the winning operation flag storage areas are each represented by 1-byte data. It is composed of storage areas 1-9. Note that the data stored in each of the hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area is only the 1-byte data in the “data” column in FIG. 25. A "combination" (in the drawing, a symbol of the left reel 3L, a symbol of the middle reel 3C, and a symbol of the right reel 3R, which are associated with the bits of the storage area and indicate a symbol combination of the reels), and its Contents (see FIGS. 19 to 22) are also described.

In each of the hit request flag storage areas 1 to 9, when "1" is stored in a predetermined bit, it indicates that the internal winning combination corresponding to the predetermined bit has been internally won. Further, in each of the winning operation storage areas 1 to 9, when "1" is stored in a predetermined bit, it indicates that the display combination (winning operation flag) corresponding to the predetermined bit has won. That is, when "1" is stored in the predetermined bit, it indicates that various symbol combinations of the internal winning combination corresponding to the predetermined bit are displayed on the activated line.

In the hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area, a combination (combination) of a plurality of symbols is assigned to one bit (flag) in each storage area, but as described above. Alternatively, one symbol (flag) in each storage area may be assigned with one symbol combination (combination).

[Carry-over combination storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the structure of the internal carryover combination storing area will be described. In this embodiment, the internal carryover combination storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area.

When an internal winning combination “F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3” or “F_BB4” is determined as a result of the internal lottery, the internal winning combination (BB combination) is stored in the carryover combination storing area as a carryover combination. .. The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storing area is held without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the activated line. Further, while the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storing area, the carryover combination is stored in the hit request storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described. The game state flag storage area is composed of a 2-byte data storage area. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the game state flag storage area.

When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in the game state flag storage area, it indicates that the bonus state or the RT state corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 1, it indicates that the game state is the BB1 state. Further, for example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 2, it indicates that the game state is the RT3 state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area and stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operating state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 17L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not been pressed yet, that is, a valid stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 101 discriminates the stop button pressed this time and the stop button not pressed yet based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Pressing order storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described. The pressing order storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area and stores a pressing order flag of 1 byte.

In the press order flag, the type of the stop button press order is assigned to each bit. For example, if the pressing order of the stop buttons is "left, middle, right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the symbol code storage area is composed of symbol code storage areas 1 to 9 each represented by 1-byte data. The symbol code storage area has the same structure as the hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25).

In the symbol code storage area, "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the symbol combination (combination) that can be stopped on the activated line. In addition, after all reels are stopped, the symbol codes corresponding to the display combination (winning operation flag) are stored in the symbol code storage areas 1 to 9.

[Relationship between internal winning combination, lottery number and winning combination number]
In the various game states relating to the game play described above, various data tables are referred to in various lottery by the main control circuit 90. In this embodiment, not only the internal winning combination but also the internal winning combination is used as a parameter used at this time. Each parameter with a different name (hereinafter referred to as “lottery number”) is also used. The lottery numbers are grouped by assigning the same lottery number by grouping internal lottery roles that play a similar role (whether the winning combination is a lottery target winning probability, etc.) in various lottery related to the game property by the main control circuit 90. Is information for making it possible to identify. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to provide various data tables for each internal winning combination (for example, for each of “No. 0” to “No. 98” shown in FIGS. 16 and 17,) and the lottery number Since it is only necessary to provide various data tables for each, it is possible to compress the amount of data and avoid pressure on the capacity of the game ROM area.

Further, in the present embodiment, for the internal winning combination, each parameter of another name (hereinafter, referred to as "winning combination number") for identifying the internal winning combination in the current unit game on the side of the sub control circuit 200 is also used. The winning combination number is obtained by grouping at least some internal winning combinations among the internal winning combinations according to the game state (more specifically, whether it is a non-advantageous section, or a normal advantageous section and an advantageous section). It is information for making the group recognizable by assigning the same winning combination number. Thereby, in the present embodiment, unique information for identifying each internal winning combination (for example, for each of “No. 0” to “No. 98” shown in FIGS. 16 and 17). Since it is not necessary to transmit the data to the sub-control circuit 200 side, it is possible to compress the data amount, reduce the control load, and transmit appropriate information according to the gaming state.

Here, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. 31 and 32 are diagrams showing an example of a basic correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination, a lottery number, and a winning combination number.

As shown in FIG. 31, an internal winning combination (including a bonus combination) in which a bonus combination and a replay combination or a small combination are simultaneously won (“No. 1” to “No. 38” shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are The lottery number “13” is assigned to the internal winning combination shown) except for “F_BB3+F_watermelon 2” and “F_BB4+F_watermelon 2”, which have different winning probabilities between the set values. A lottery number “0” is assigned to “F_BB3+F_watermelon 2” and “F_BB4+F_watermelon 2”.

In the present embodiment, a non-advantageous section (“normal” in FIGS. 31 and 32. The same applies hereinafter), a normal advantageous section and an advantageous section (“advantage” in FIGS. 31 and 32. The same applies hereinafter), Although the lottery numbers are not made different from each other, different lottery numbers can be assigned to “normal” and “advantageous”, for example, when different lottery or processing is performed for “normal” and “advantageous”. For example, in the non-advantageous section, when "F_BB3+F_Watermelon 2" and "F_BB4+F_Watermelon 2" are won, the ART lottery is not performed and it is not determined to shift to the normal advantageous section, but in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section. , "F_BB3+F_Watermelon 2" and "F_BB4+F_Watermelon 2" are also won, the lottery similar to the internal lottery combination including other bonus combinations is performed. Therefore, in the "normal", the lottery numbers are assigned as described above. A common lottery number “13” may be assigned to “advantageous”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31, in the internal winning combination including the bonus combination, the winning combination numbers “28” to “41” are assigned according to the type of the bonus combination and the type of the replay combination or the small combination that is won. One of the winning combination numbers is assigned. As a result, on the side of the sub-control circuit 200, it is possible to execute different effects depending on the type of the winning bonus combination and the type of the winning replay combination or small winning combination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the internal winning combination of the replay or the small winning combination (the internal winning combination shown by “No. 39” to “No. 98” shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17) and “No” shown in FIG. .1” to “No. 7” are assigned to the lottery numbers of “0” to “12”, respectively.

Here, for example, "Replay 1 during F_RT0" to "Replay 6 during F_RT0" and "F_RT2 during "F_RT2" that are won in the RT0 state and the RT2 state, which are gaming states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is high The same lottery number “1” is assigned to “replay 1” to “replay 3 in F_RT2”. Further, for example, in an RT state other than the RT5 state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT3 state and shifting from the non-advantageous section to the normal advantageous section "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye B4". The same lottery number “6” is assigned to each.

Further, for example, the same lottery number “10” is assigned to “F_upper common bell” and “F_upper left bell 1” to “F_upper right middle bell 2” where the same “upper bell” may be displayed. The same lottery number “11” is assigned to “F_middle common bell” and “F_middle left bell 1” to “F_middle right middle bell 2” that may be assigned and the same “middle bell” may be displayed. The same lottery number “12” is assigned to “F_lower middle bell 1” to “F_lower right middle bell 2” that may display the same “lower bell”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the internal winning combination of the replay or the small winning combination (the internal winning combination shown by “No. 39” to “No. 98” shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17) and “No” shown in FIG. .1” to “No. 7”), a winning combination number of “0” to “27” is assigned to “normal” or “advantageous”, respectively.

Here, focusing on the winning combination numbers assigned to “F_upper left bell 1” to “F_lower right bell 2”, the same winning combination number “22” is assigned to “normal”. On the other hand, in “advantage”, the winning combination number “23” is assigned to “F_upper left bell 1” to “F_upper right bell 2”, and “F_middle left bell 1” to “F_middle right bell 2” The winning combination number "24" is assigned to "2", and the winning combination number "25" is assigned to "F_lower middle bell 1" to "F_lower right bell 2".

That is, in the present embodiment, in the line battle state of the advantageous section (see FIG. 35 described later), when these internal winning combinations are won, when the symbols of “bell” are arranged in the middle of each reel (“middle bell”) Is established), when the "Bell" symbols are lined up on the upper row of each reel (when the "Upper bell" is established), and when the "Bell" symbols are lined up on the lower row of each reel ("Lower bell") However, since the payout number of medals is the same in both cases, the continuation degree of the line battle state may change, so as described above, in the case of the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section. , “F_upper left bell 1” to “F_upper right middle bell 2”, “F_middle left bell 1” to “F_middle right bell 2”, “F_lower middle bell 1” to “F_lower right middle” By assigning different winning numbers to "Bell 2", on the sub-control circuit 200 side, before the stop display of the symbol (before the stop operation), the symbols of "Bell" may be arranged on any of the activated lines. It is possible to recognize whether or not, and in the line battle state, it is possible to perform effects with different expectations based on the receipt of this winning combination number. An example of the effect in the line battle state will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41 described later.

From the same viewpoint, for example, the same winning combination number is assigned to each of “F_upper lip”, “F_middle lip 1” to “F_middle lip 3” and “F_lower lip” in “normal”. , "Advantageous", different winning combination numbers may be assigned.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 sets the winning combination number as the communication parameter of the start command as the information regarding the internal winning combination, and the main control circuit 90 transmits the winning combination number to the sub-control circuit 200, which will be described later. Information corresponding to navigation data (see FIG. 45 described later) is set in the communication parameter of the start command (or another command may be used) and transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200. However, the mode in which the sub-control circuit 200 transmits information that can recognize the internal winning combination or the navigation data is not limited to this.

For example, regarding “F_RT0 replay 1” to “F_RT0 replay 6”, the same winning combination number is assigned to the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers are assigned to the advantageous section. May be. In addition, regarding “F_RT1 replay 1” to “F_RT1 middle replay 6”, the same winning combination number is assigned in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers are assigned in the advantageous section. May be. Further, regarding “F_RT2 mid-replay 1” to “F_RT2 mid-replay 3”, the same winning combination number is assigned in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers are respectively assigned in the advantageous sections. May be. In other words, regarding the push-order replay, in each game state (advantageous section) in which the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, the winning combination number is transmitted as the information capable of identifying the internal winning combination, which is advantageous to the player. In each game state (non-advantageous section and normal advantageous section) in which information of a different stop operation cannot be reported, the winning symbol combination number may be transmitted as information that cannot identify the internal winning symbol combination.

This is the same for the push order small win. In this case, the same winning combination number may be assigned to the non-advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers may be assigned to the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section, respectively. And about the allocation of the winning combination number in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section, for example, on which effective line the symbol of “bell” may be displayed, and the type of the stop operation advantageous to the player, The winning combination number may be further subdivided and assigned so that both parties can be identified.

Thus, for example, in each gaming state in which the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified about the push order small combination and the push order replay, the winning combination number is transmitted as the information capable of identifying the internal winning combination, In each gaming state in which the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player cannot be notified, if the winning combination number is transmitted as the information in which the internal winning combination cannot be specified, the navigation data described later (see FIG. 45 described later). There is a possibility that it is not necessary to send the information corresponding to the reference) to the sub control circuit 200. In this case, the process of transmitting information corresponding to navigation data described later (see FIG. 45 described later) to the sub control circuit 200 can be omitted, and the control load can be reduced.

Note that, in FIG. 32, as an example of the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number, it is explained that the presence/absence of the winning (carrying over) of the bonus combination is not taken into consideration, but the bonus combination is carried over. Depending on whether or not the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number may be changed. For example, in the flag-to-flag state, various lottery related to the game property is basically not performed. Therefore, in the flag-to-flag state, all the lottery numbers may be assigned to “0”.

<Game play during non-advantageous section (normal state)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the flow of the game in the non-advantageous section (normal state) will be described. In addition, in FIG. 33, in the normal state, an outline of the game state to be transitioned to when each of the internal winning combinations shown in the figure is won is shown.

(At the time of winning a weak role)
In the non-advantageous section, when the bonus rare non-winning state is reached, when the weak rare combination (“F_weak rare combination A” and “F_weak rare combination B”) is won, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the highly accurate 1 While shifting to the state (normal advantageous section), the "9" game is set in the game period of the normal advantageous section. As a result, the high-accuracy 1 state is controlled from the next game for at least nine games from the next game.

(At the chance of winning the chance)
In the non-advantageous section and when the bonus is not won, the chance chance (“F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4”) is won. , The main CPU 101 shifts the game state to the highly accurate 2 state (normal advantageous section), and sets the game "9" in the game period of the normal advantageous section. As a result, the high-accuracy 2 state is controlled for at least 9 games from the next game.

At this time, as a result of the player's stop operation, "RT3 shift eye" is displayed and the RT state shifts to the RT3 state, and "RT3 shift eye" is not displayed and the RT state does not shift to the RT3 state ( That is, there is a case where RT states other than the RT3 state continue). Although there is no change in shifting to the highly accurate 2 state, it is more advantageous to the player that the RT state is the RT3 state. This point will be described in detail later.

It should be noted that the chance chance is an internal winning combination that can be won in combination with the bonus combination, but if the winning combination overlaps the bonus combination, the process related to that bonus combination (see "When winning bonus combination" below) ) Is given priority, so control for shifting to the high-precision 2 state is not performed.

(When one watermelon is won)
When the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1”) is won in the non-advantageous section and in the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 performs ART lottery. Specifically, for example, with a probability of 8/256, it is determined to shift to the ending 1 state of the advantageous zone via the normal precursory state of the normal advantage zone (that is, the ART winning is determined), 248/ With a probability of 256, it is decided to shift to the high-accuracy 3 state of the normal advantageous section, but not to shift to the advantageous section (that is, ART non-win). In this case, it may be possible to determine, with a predetermined probability, to shift to the line battle state of the advantageous section via the normal sign state of the normal advantageous section.

In either case when the ART winning is determined and when the ART non-winning is determined, the main CPU 101 determines the game period (precursor period) of the normal advantageous section to be transferred based on the watermelon 1 winning. Lottery. Specifically, for example, one of the precursor periods “9” to “16” in the precursor period is randomly determined. In this case, for example, when the precursor period "9" game is determined, the "9" game is set in the normal advantageous section game period, and when the precursor period "16" game is determined, the normal advantageous section game period "16" game is set. In this case, the number of games to be played may be determined with different probabilities depending on whether the transition destination is the present omen state or the highly accurate 3 state. For example, the lottery probability can be set so that a relatively long precursory period can be more easily determined when shifting to the present precursory state than when transitioning to the highly accurate three states.

In this way, when winning the watermelon 1, if the ART winning is determined, during the number of times of the number of times determined by lottery from the next game at least during the aura period, the normal asymptotic state of the normal advantageous section is controlled, and the aura state is After the above, the control is controlled to the ending preparatory state of the advantageous section (see FIG. 34 described later). Further, if ART non-winning is determined, during at least the number of games determined by lottery period from the next game, the normal advantageous section is controlled to three highly accurate states.

(When winning the bonus role)
When the bonus combination (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3”, and “F_BB4”) is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 performs the ART lottery. If “F_BB3+F_watermelon 2” or “F_BB4+F_watermelon 2” having different winning probabilities among the set values is determined as the internal winning combination, the ART lottery is not performed. That is, when "F_BB3+F_watermelon 2" or "F_BB4+F_watermelon 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, the state shifts to the non-advantageous section (normal state) between flags without shifting to each gaming state of the normal advantageous section. After that, the bonus state of the non-advantageous section (normal state) is entered, and when the bonus state ends, the bonus non-winning state of the non-advantageous section (normal state) is returned to.

In the ART lottery at the time of winning the bonus role, specifically, for example, with the probability of 64/256, it is possible to shift to the line battle state of the advantageous section via the line battle preparation state of the advantageous section after the bonus state ends. It is decided (that is, ART winning is decided), and with a probability of 192/256, it is decided to shift to the high accuracy 4 state of the normal advantageous zone, but not to shift to the advantageous zone (that is, ART non-winning is decided). To). In this case, it may be possible to determine, with a predetermined probability, to shift to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section via the ending preparation state of the advantageous section after the bonus state ends.

In either case when the ART winning is determined and when the ART non-winning is determined, the main CPU 101 first shifts the gaming state to the highly accurate 4 state (normal advantageous section). As a result, the next game is controlled to the highly accurate 4 states. The period during which the high-precision 4 state continues in the inter-flag state may be until the transition from the inter-flag state to the bonus state (until the carried-over bonus combination is established). It may be during the “9” game (that is, similar to the high-precision 1 state and the high-precision 2 state). In addition, when the ART winning is determined, the inter-flag state may be shifted to the present omen state (usually advantageous section) instead of the high accuracy 4 state. Further, in the flag-to-flag state, various lottery is not actually performed as the high-accuracy 4 state. Therefore, the flag-to-flag state is usually an advantageous section, but the high-precision 1 to high-precision 4 states and the main sign It may be defined as a state different from the state (for example, “normal inter-flag advantage state”), and during bonus winning, the normal inter-flag advantage state (normal advantage section) may be set.

When the bonus state ends after the bonus state, the main CPU 101 shifts to the line battle preparation state of the advantageous section if the ART winning is determined, and if the ART non-winning is determined. , The high-precision 4 state of the normal advantageous section is continued, and the "32" game is set in the game period of the normal advantageous section. As a result, the high-precision 4 state is controlled for at least 32 games after the bonus ends.

<Playability during normal advantage section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the flow of the game in the normal advantage section will be described. In addition, in FIG. 34, the outline of the flow of the game in the normal advantageous section is shown. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the normal state of the non-advantageous section, the high-probability 1 state is transferred based on winning the weak rare combination, and the high-probability transition is executed based on winning the chance. 2 states, high-precision 3 states that are transferred based on winning the watermelon 1, high-precision 4 states that are transferred based on winning the bonus combination, and transition to the advantageous section (ART) You have a warning sign.

First, the main CPU 101 is in the inter-flag state (RT5 state) or the bonus state, and in the bonus non-winning state and the omen state (that is, when it is already determined to shift to the advantageous section). ) Except, the ART transferable state lottery is performed for each unit game. In this ART transferable state lottery, it is determined whether or not it is a state (ART transferable state) in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when the bonus combination is won in the normal advantageous section. In this ART transferable state lottery, when it is determined to be in the ART transferable state (when the ART transferable state lottery is won), if the bonus combination is won, it is based on the bonus combination. When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state, and it is not decided to be in the ART transferable state (when the ART transferable state lottery is not won), when the bonus combination is won. Is determined not to shift to the advantageous section after the bonus state based on the bonus hand ends, and to continue the normal advantageous section (more specifically, the high-precision 4 state).

In the ART transferable state lottery, specifically, for example, in the case of the highly accurate 1 state and the highly accurate 2 state, the ART transferable state is set with a probability of 64/256 (the ART transferable state is won). , 192/256 with a probability of not setting the ART transferable state (not winning the ART transferable state). Also, for example, if there are 3 highly accurate states and 4 highly accurate states, the ART transferable state is set with a probability of 128/256 (the ART transferable state is won), and the ART transfer is performed with a probability of 128/256. Do not set the enabled state (not win the ART transferable state). The winning probability of the ART transferable state is not limited to the above-mentioned winning probability, and can be set appropriately. For example, it is possible to set the winning probability to increase sequentially in the order of high-accuracy 1 state, high-accuracy 2 state, high-accuracy 3 state, and high-accuracy 4 state, or the winning probability may be different in each gaming state. It can also be set to.

Also, the ART transferable state lottery is performed for each unit game, but when the ART transferable state is once set in the normal advantageous section, until the normal advantageous section ends, It is also possible to maintain the ART transferable state. In this case, once the ART transferable state is set, it is not necessary to perform the ART transferable state lottery thereafter until the normal advantageous section ends. On the other hand, in the case of playing for each unit game, at the start of the unit game and before determining whether or not the bonus combination is won, first, whether or not the unit game can be set to the ART transferable state is determined. The lottery may be carried out, and then it may be determined whether or not the bonus combination is won in the unit game.

Further, in the non-advantageous section, if "F_BB3+F_Watermelon 2" or "F_BB4+F_Watermelon 2" having different winning probabilities among the respective set values is determined as the internal winning combination, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is not determined. However, even if "F_BB3+F_Watermelon 2" or "F_BB4+F_Watermelon 2" is determined as the internal winning combination in the normal advantageous section, if it is in the ART transferable state, it is based on the bonus combination. After the bonus state ends, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs control processing such as transition between states. In this state transition control process, etc., based on the internal winning combination, while performing the transition control of each game state in the normal advantage section, such as resetting the game period of the normal advantage section according to a predetermined condition, etc. To do. The details of the control process such as transition between states will be described below.

(At the chance of winning the chance)
When it is the normal advantageous section and the bonus is not won, and the chance (“F_chance A1” to “F_chance A4” and “F_chance B1” to “F_chance B4”) is won. , The main CPU 101 sets the high-precision 2 state if the current state is the high-precision 1 state or the high-precision 2 state and the RT state is not the RT3 state, and normally plays the "9" game in the game period of the advantageous section. Reset it. For example, in the highly accurate 1 state (9 games), when the player wins the game 5 times, the "9" game is reset, so that substantially normal advantageous intervals are obtained. The game period will be extended by 5 games.

If the current state is the highly accurate 3 state and the RT state is not the RT3 state, the "9" game is reset during the game period of the normal advantageous section. If the current state is the high-precision 4 state and the RT state is not the RT3 state, and the remaining number of games in the current normal advantageous section game period is 8 or less, " 9” Reset the game. That is, the game period of the normal advantage section is appropriately extended based on the winning of the chance.

In the above, when the RT state is the RT3 state, the gaming period of the normal advantageous section is not reset even if the chance is won. In the RT3 state, the winning probability of the replay combination advantageous to the player is set. Although it is the played game state, it is basically the game state which continues only for 8 games, and, as will be described later, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section, similarly to the flag state (RT5 state), Since the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is made without any limitation, the end of the normal advantageous section and the end of the RT3 state are interlocked with each other, and the expectation for the bonus winning of the player even in the RT3 state. This is so as not to impair the feeling.

However, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section, the game period of the normal advantageous section is set such that the end of the normal advantageous section is always one game later than the end of the RT3 state. That is, the game period of the normal advantageous section is set to be a period longer than at least the game period (8 games) in the RT3 state. In the present embodiment, when the normal advantageous section is started, lighting of the state indicator is started, and when the normal advantageous section is shifted to the advantageous section, the lighting is continued while the normal advantageous section is shifted to the advantageous section. If not, the lighting is normally terminated when the advantageous zone ends.

Therefore, for example, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section or the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, when performing a similar expected feeling effect (a bonus winning combination or an effect that makes the player expect the ART winning), the normal advantageous section and the RT3 state If the game is finished in the same state as the state, the state indicator may be turned off during the execution of the expectation effect. In this case, the player will recognize that the winning is non-winning before the result is finally notified by the expectation effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section and the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, the same expected feeling effect is executed for eight games, and the final feeling is given to the eighth game by this expected effect effect. While the normal advantageous section is continued for one game after that, it is not possible to recognize whether it is right or wrong depending on the lighting mode of the status display, and the interest of the player is maintained. Is possible.

In addition, even if the RT3 state ends in the normal advantageous section, the remaining period (for example, one game) is still the normal advantageous section, and therefore, depending on the type of the internal winning combination here, the normal advantageous section is usually advantageous. Since the section may be extended, for example, even if it is informed that the bonus combination is not won in the expected effect production, the player usually hopes to extend the advantageous section and continues the game. I think. In this sense as well, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player.

The expectation effect that can be executed may be, for example, a continuous effect by the image displayed on the display device 11 or a continuous effect performed by another effect device (for example, the speaker group 84 or the LED group 85). It may be. Further, it is not necessarily a continuous effect, and any effect may be used as long as it is an effect performed to increase the player's expectation. For example, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section or in the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, the result may be notified in a predetermined number of games (for example, the eighth game). In this case, the number of games to be played for the predetermined number of times may be arbitrarily determined within a range not exceeding eight games or by lottery.

In addition, regardless of the RT state, in the normal sign state of the advantageous zone, the above-described expectation effect may be performed. In this case, the period in which the expectation effect can be executed may be the same as the RT3 state or the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section, or may be executed for a longer period than that.

Further, when the current state is this omen state and the RT state shifts to the RT3 state (that is, when the “RT3 shift eye” is displayed), the “8” game is normally played during the game period of the advantageous section. Reset it. In this case, since the normal advantageous section is shifted to the advantageous section when the normal advantageous section ends, by completely interlocking the end of the RT3 state and the end of the normal advantageous section, the advantageous section which is more advantageous to the player (without leaving the normal advantageous section) Is prioritized. Further, in this case, when the above-described expected feeling effect has already been performed, the expected feeling effect effect may be performed as it is until the end, or a new expected feeling effect effect is performed again for eight games. You may be allowed to. Further, the anticipation effect may be extended based on the transition of the RT state to the RT3 state.

(When one watermelon is won)
When the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1”) is won in the normal advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 is not in the omen state (that is, the ART winning has not yet been determined). For example, the ART lottery is performed as in the non-advantageous section.

Then, the main CPU 101 sets the high-precision 3 state if the current state is any one of the high-precision 1 to high-precision 3 states, the RT state is the RT3 state, and the ART is unwinned. Normally, the game period in the advantageous section is not reset. If the current state is any one of the high-precision 1 to high-precision 4 states, the RT state is the RT3 state, and the ART wins, the present omen state is set, and the number of remaining games in the RT3 state is set. The number of games is reset to the game period of the normal advantageous section.

If the current state is the high-accuracy 1 or high-accuracy 2 state, the RT state is not the RT3 state, and the ART is not winning, the high-precision 3 state is set, and the above-mentioned precursor period lottery is performed again and re-executed. The game period of the set normal advantage section is determined. If the current state is one of the high-precision 1 to high-precision 4 states, and the RT state is not the RT3 state but an ART winning, the warning sign state is set, and the high-precision 1 state and the high-precision state are set. In the case of 2 states or 4 states of high accuracy, the above-mentioned lottery period lottery is performed again to determine the game period of the normal advantageous section to be reset. In the case of the three highly accurate states, the game period of the normal advantageous section is not reset.

(When winning the bonus role)
When the bonus combination (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3”, and “F_BB4”) is won in the normal non-winning state, the main CPU 101 determines that the current normal non-winning period is ART. If it is not a shiftable state, the high-precision 4 state is set, and the "32" game is reset during the game period of the normal advantageous section in the high-precision 4 state after the bonus state ends. Further, if the current normal advantageous section is in the ART shiftable state, the main warning state is set, and the "0" game is reset during the normal advantageous section game period in the main warning state after the bonus state ends (that is, Immediately after the end of the bonus state, transition to the line battle preparation state of the advantageous section.

When it is a normal advantageous section, and in the bonus non-winning state and the state between flags, when the winning combination of the pressing order is won, the main CPU 101 notifies the pressing order of the winning combination of the pressing order. Specifically, a numerical value corresponding to the navigation data is displayed on the instruction monitor, and a command including information corresponding to the navigation data is transmitted so that the sub-control circuit 200 can notify the pushing order.

Here, in the present embodiment, if the RT state is the RT3 state or the RT5 state, the push order notification is performed each time the push order small winning combination is won until the normal advantageous section ends, while the RT state is RT3. If it is not the state or the RT5 state, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed only once in the normal advantageous section. It should be noted that the upper limit of the push order notification is not limited to once when the RT state is other than the RT3 state and the RT5 state, and can be set as appropriate. For example, it may be “twice” or “three times”.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the RT state is the RT3 state, the push order notification is performed each time the push order small winning combination is won until the normal advantageous section ends, but for example, the RT state is After the RT3 state has been reached and 8 games have been exhausted, the RT3 state ends, but the normal advantageous section may continue in some cases. In this case, after the RT3 state is once entered, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination may be continued until the normal advantageous section ends even after the RT3 state ends, or the RT3 state It may be configured such that the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is also terminated in association with the completion of the above, and only the normal advantageous section continues. That is, the push order notification can be performed only during the period when the RT state is the RT3 state.

Further, for example, when the RT state is not the RT3 state, the normal advantageous section may be shifted to, and the RT state may become the RT3 state in the normal advantageous section. In this case, if the push order notification has already been performed once, the upper limit number may be valid even in the subsequent RT3 state so that the push order notification is not performed. In the subsequent RT3 state, the upper limit number is notified. May be invalidated and the push order notification may be performed. Further, in this case, if the push order notification has not been performed even once, the upper limit number of times may be valid even in the subsequent RT3 state and the push order notification may be performed only once. In the RT3 state, the upper limit number of times may be invalidated and the push order notification may be performed. The same applies when the RT state is not the RT5 state and the normal advantageous section is entered, and the RT state becomes the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section.

When the upper limit number of push order notifications when the RT state is other than the RT3 state and the RT5 state is 1, and when the push order notification is normally performed twice or more in the advantageous interval, the RT state is the RT3 state or The RT5 state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, since the chances of the chances can also be won together with the bonus combinations, for example, in the non-advantageous section, the chances of the winnings are won, and the RT3 transition is not displayed, and the normal advantageous section is shifted to. In this case, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the bonus combination is won (that is, whether or not the RT5 state is the inter-flag state) when the first push order notification is performed. When the second push order notification is performed, it is confirmed that the player is not in the RT3 state, and as a result, it is possible to recognize that the bonus combination is won.

On the other hand, for example, when the RT3 transition is displayed and the normal advantageous section is transitioned, whether or not the bonus combination is won in the number of push order notifications (that is, whether the RT5 state is the inter-flag state or not). Whether or not) is difficult to recognize. For example, it is possible to recognize that the bonus combination is won based on the final effect contents of the above-described expected feeling effect.

That is, the RT3 state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is high, and, for example, the RT state does not change even when the RT1 transition eye or the RT1 transition lip is displayed. Since there is no limit to the notification of the pushing order of the small pushing order, it is possible to advance the game in the normal advantageous section more advantageously than the game in the normal advantageous section in other RT states, but on the other hand, the normal In the advantageous section, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the winning combination is won.

In the present embodiment, when the bonus combination is won during the advantageous section and the bonus state based on the bonus combination is activated, information of the stop operation (pushing order) advantageous to the player is notified in the bonus state. On the other hand, when the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section and the bonus state based on the bonus combination is activated, in the bonus state, the stop operation advantageous to the player is performed. Information (push order) is not notified. This is the same even when the bonus combination is won when the ART transition is possible in the normal advantage section. In this case, after the bonus state ends, the advantageous section is shifted to, but during the bonus state, information (stop order) of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified. The specific content of the push order notification will be described later with reference to FIG. 45 described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 24, when the push order small winning combination is won in the inter-flag state, unlike the bonus non-winning state, the “upper bell” and the “middle row” are irrespective of the stop operation order. The "bell" or "lower bell" is established, and eight medals are paid out. Even in this premise, the normal advantage section ends in the flag state (RT5 state) of the normal advantage section. Up to, the push order notification similar to the bonus non-winning state is performed. That is, in the RT5 state of the normal advantage section, when the push order combination is won, the same push order notification as in the RT3 state of the normal advantage section is issued regardless of whether the profit actually given by the push order changes. It is supposed to be done. As described above, this is done from the viewpoint of making it difficult to recognize whether or not the bonus combination is won, and to further maintain the expectation.

Note that, as described above, when the small winning combination in the push order is won in the inter-flag state, the number of medals to be paid out can be changed in accordance with the stop operation order, as in the non-winning bonus state. In this case, it is likely that the profit given by the push order notification is also increased in the flag state (RT5 state) of the normal advantageous section, so whether the bonus combination is won. Not only can the expectations of whether or not to be raised be increased, but also the expectations regarding the profits to be granted can be increased.

Further, in the normal advantageous section and in the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 updates the game period of the normal advantageous section for each unit game. Specifically, the number of games in the game period of the normal advantageous section is subtracted by "1", and subsequently, whether the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted (that is, whether the subtraction result becomes "0"). To judge. In addition, in the update of the game period of the normal advantageous section, the number of games is incremented by "1" for each unit game, and subsequently, whether the addition result has reached the number of games in the game period of the normal advantageous section or not. It may be possible to determine whether or not the game period of the normal advantage section has been exhausted by the determination of.

As a result of the update of the game period of the normal advantageous section, if the game period of the normal advantageous section is not exhausted (in FIG. 34, "period not yet exhausted"), the normal advantageous section is continued and the bonus non-winning of the normal advantageous section is won. The game in the state will be repeated.

In addition, as a result of the game period update of the normal advantageous section, when the game period of the normal advantageous section has been exhausted and it has not been decided to shift to the advantageous section (in FIG. 34, “period exhaustion ART non-winning) )), the normal advantageous section is ended, and the bonus non-winning state of the non-advantageous section is shifted to.

In addition, even if the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted as a result of the update of the game period of the normal advantageous section, if the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is not performed even once in the normal advantage section ( That is, in the case where the push order small winning combination is not won), the normal advantageous section may be continued until the push order small winning combination is notified once. By doing so, not only can the player be guaranteed to obtain the minimum profit in the normal advantageous section, but also during the push order notification of the push order small winning combination after the period is exhausted, for example, , If it is possible to win the bonus combination in the ART transferable state, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section after the bonus state is ended, so that the game can be made more diverse and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. You can

Further, when the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted as a result of the update of the game period of the normal advantageous section, and it is determined to shift to the line battle state of the advantageous section (in FIG. 34, “period”). In the "digest line battle winning", the normal advantageous section is ended, and the line battle preparation state (bonus non-winning state) of the advantageous section is entered. Since the advantageous section basically corresponds to the RT2 state, in the present embodiment, before the transition to the line battle state of the advantageous section, the line battle preparation state is set as a preparation period until the RT2 state is set. However, if the RT2 state is accidentally set at the end of the normal advantageous section, the line battle state may be directly entered without going through the line battle preparation state. Further, since both the RT0 state and the RT2 state are game states in which the winning probability of the replay combination is the highest (see FIGS. 16 and 17), the RT0 state is accidentally set to the RT0 state when the normal advantageous section ends. If so (or, if the RT3 state is completed and the RT0 state is entered), the line battle ready state may be directly entered without going through the line battle preparation state.

Further, as a result of the update of the game period of the normal advantageous section, when the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted and it is determined to shift to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section (in FIG. 34, “period”). In the "digest ending 1 win", the normal advantageous section is ended and the ending section of the advantageous section is set to the ending preparation state (bonus non-winning state). Note that, when the normal advantageous section ends, the advantageous section basically corresponds to the RT2 state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, before the transition to the RT2 state is performed before the transition to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section. Although it is arranged to shift to the ending preparation state as a preparation period, if the RT2 state is accidentally set at the end of the normal advantageous section, it is directly shifted to the ending 1 state without going through the ending preparation state. May be. Further, since both the RT0 state and the RT2 state are game states in which the winning probability of the replay combination is the highest (see FIGS. 16 and 17), the RT0 state is accidentally set to the RT0 state when the normal advantageous section ends. If so (or, if the RT0 state is entered based on the termination of the RT3 state), the ending 1 state may be directly entered without going through the ending preparation state.

<Summary of game characteristics of non-advantageous section and normal advantageous section>
Below, with regard to the game characteristics in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantage section (including a part of the game characteristics in the advantage section), the main parts thereof will be briefly described.

(1) The "chance eye" can be determined as an internal winning combination as well as a bonus combination.
(2) If the "winning chance" is won, and the bonus combination is also determined as the internal winning combination, the RT state becomes the RT5 state. In this case, if it is a non-advantageous section, it is shifted to a normal advantageous section (for example, “high accuracy 4 state” or “normal inter-flag advantageous state”).
(3) If the winning combination is a "chance eye", the bonus combination is not determined as an internal winning combination at the same time, and the "RT3 transition eye" is displayed based on the stop operation being performed in a specific mode. If so, the RT state becomes the RT3 state. In this case, regardless of whether the "RT3 shift eye" is displayed, if it is a non-advantageous section, it is shifted to a normal advantageous section (for example, "high accuracy 2 state").
(4) The normal advantageous section (e.g., "high accuracy 2 state") that has won and moved to the "chance eye" is longer than the period (e.g., 8 games) that is at least the RT3 state (e.g., 9 games). Between games), it is possible to continue.

(5) If a bonus winning combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, if the ART winning is determined, the bonus section is shifted to the advantageous section (for example, “line battle preparation state”).
(6) When the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus state based on the bonus combination is finished, if the ART winning is not determined (if the ART non-winning is determined), a specific period (for example, During 32 games), a normal advantageous section (for example, “high-precision 4 state”) is entered.
(7) Whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART) when the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and when the bonus combination has the same winning probability among a plurality of setting values However, if the winning combination has a different winning probability among a plurality of setting values, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART).
(8) When a bonus winning combination is won in a normal advantageous section, the bonus winning combination is a bonus winning combination having the same winning probability among a plurality of setting values, and a bonus winning combination having a different winning probability between a plurality of setting values In either case, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART) is determined.

(9) When the RT state is the RT3 state in the normal advantage section, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed until the normal advantage section ends.
(10) When the RT state is the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed until the normal advantageous section ends.
(11) When the RT state is not the RT3 state or the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section, the pushing order notification of the pushing order small winning combination is performed only for a predetermined number of times (for example, once).
(12) When the bonus combination is won in the advantageous section, in the bonus state based on the bonus combination, the push order notification of the small push order is performed, but when the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section. In the bonus state based on the bonus hand, the push order notification of the push order small combination is not performed regardless of whether or not it is determined to shift to the advantageous section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the “chance eye” is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to control the normal advantageous section for at least 9 games, and when the ART winning is determined, the advantageous section is obtained. When the "RT3 transition" is displayed, the RT state can be changed to the RT3 state, and when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT state is changed to RT5. It is possible to change to a state. In addition, it is possible to simultaneously determine the "chance eye" and the bonus combination as an internal winning combination. When the normal advantageous section is in the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the player is informed of an advantageous stop operation procedure for the small push order combination.

As a result, in the normal advantage section, the number of medals to be given is increased as compared to the non-advantageous section, and the expectation of whether or not to shift to the bonus state is also increased. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the normal advantageous section can be continued (9 games) is set to be longer than the period during which the RT3 state can be continued (8 games).

As a result, the player's expectation can be maintained regardless of whether or not the specific game state (RT3 state) is ended, and thus the interest in transition of the state more advantageous to the player is further improved. Can be planned.

Further, in the present embodiment, the “opportunity” is displayed when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, appropriate timing), and is not performed in the specific mode. In the case of an internal winning combination in which the "RT3 transition eye" is not displayed, and the normal advantageous section is in the RT3 state and the RT5 state, it is advantageous to the player about the pushing order small combination until the normal advantageous section ends. The procedure of the stop operation is notified, and when the normal advantageous section is not in the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous for the player about the pushing order small win is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, once). Is notified.

As a result, when the “chance eye” is won, whether or not the bonus combination is also determined as the internal winning combination and whether or not the “RT3 transition” is displayed, the advantage degree and contents of the normal advantage section are determined. Since it can be changed, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player regarding the transition to a more advantageous state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the bonus state based on the bonus combination that has been won in the non-advantageous section ends, if the ART winning is determined, it is shifted to the advantageous section, and if the ART winning is not determined. Is designed to shift to a normal advantageous section (for example, high-precision 4 states) for a specific period (for example, for 32 games).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is one of the normal advantageous intervals, whichever of the bonus combination has the same winning probability among a plurality of setting values and which has a different winning probability among the plurality of setting values. Even if the winning combination is won, it is decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, but when it is a non-advantageous section, it is advantageous when winning a bonus combination having different winning probabilities among a plurality of set values. It is not decided whether or not to shift to the section.

As a result, the transition of the subsequent game state (game section) can be made more diverse depending on the game state when the bonus combination is won and the type thereof. Can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section, it is possible to inform the player of the procedure of the stop operation advantageous for the small pushing order combination, and the pushing order is small even when the bonus state is controlled in the advantageous section. It is possible to inform the player of the stop operation procedure that is advantageous for the winning combination, but if the bonus state is controlled in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantage section, the procedure of the stopping operation that is advantageous to the player for the small push order combination is displayed. Notification is not possible.

As a result, it is possible to provide a normal advantageous section, which is a game section in which the degree of expectation of shifting to the advantageous section is increased and the possibility of increasing the number of medals to be given is increased. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game, and even when such a game section is provided, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from becoming excessive, and to excessively encourage the player's ambition. It can also be suppressed.

<Playability during line battle>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 41, the flow of the game during the line battle state of the advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 35 shows an outline of the flow of the game during the line battle state of the advantageous section. Further, FIG. 36 shows an example of various data tables stored in the main ROM 102, which are various tables referred to at least in the line battle preparation state and the line battle state in the advantageous section. 37 to 41, a display example of the display device 11 is shown in order to describe a mode in which the continuation degree of whether or not to continue the line battle state varies. In the present embodiment, the line battle state has an interval state, a battle state, and a continuous lottery state. In addition, in the present embodiment, the line battle state is basically a game state that is transferred via the line battle preparation state.

(Line battle preparation state)
When the ART winning is determined based on the winning of the bonus combination in the non-advantageous section or the normal advantageous section, the main CPU 101 shifts to the line battle preparation state when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends. .. In addition, in the line battle preparation state and the line battle state of the advantageous section, the bonus combination is won, and when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, the line battle preparation state is entered (that is, the line battle state is returned to. ). In this case, the RT state when the bonus state ends is the RT4 state (see FIG. 13), and the line battle preparation state is maintained until the RT state shifts to the RT2 state.

In this case, since the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state, the push order notification regarding the push sequence small win and the push sequence replay is not performed until the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state. After the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the push order notification of the push order small combination and the push order replay is started. Further, in this case, even when the "RT3 shift eye" is displayed in the RT4 state and the state shifts to the RT3 state, the push order notification of the push order small combination and the push order replay is started. The line battle preparation state may be terminated and the line battle state may be set when the RT3 state is entered.

In addition, as described above, for example, in the non-advantageous section or the normal advantageous section, when the ART lottery is performed based on the winning of the specific winning combination (eg, “Watermelon 1”) other than the bonus winning combination, the winning result When it is possible to determine to shift to the line battle state, the state shifts to the line battle preparation state when the normal advantageous section ends. Also in this case, the line battle preparation state is maintained until the RT state shifts to the RT2 state.

However, for example, in the case where the RT state is the RT0 state, although the push order notification about the push order small combination and the push order replay was performed, the stop operation was performed without following the push order notification. As a result, “RT1 transition eye” or “RT1 transition lip” is displayed, and when the RT state transitions to the RT1 state, the line battle state may be transitioned even if the RT state is not the RT2 state. .. The same applies to the right acquisition lottery preparation state and the ending preparation state. That is, when a pressing order error occurs in each preparation state, even if the RT state is not the RT2 state, the game state may be shifted to the corresponding gaming state.

In the line battle preparation state, the enemy selection table lottery, the ally selection table lottery, and the ally acquisition lottery are performed. It should be noted that the lottery related to these game characteristics is an example, and other lottery can be performed in the line battle preparation state. In addition, the lottery regarding these game characteristics can be performed even in each game state of the normal advantageous section. In this case, when the normal advantageous zone is shifted to the advantageous zone, the lottery result in the normal advantageous zone is reflected in the line battle state, and when the normal advantageous zone is not shifted to the advantageous zone, the lottery in the normal advantageous zone is drawn. The result should be discarded (cleared).

In the enemy selection table lottery, an enemy selection table for selecting information corresponding to an enemy character to be a battle target in a battle state described later is determined. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for enemy selection table shown in FIG. 36A, and selects any one of the enemy selection tables 1 to 8 based on the number of times the enemy is destroyed and the lottery value. Here, the number of times the enemy is destroyed is the number of times the enemy HP has become “0” in the battle state described below and the right acquisition state has been entered, and the number of times the line battle state has been determined to continue in the continuous lottery state described below. The cumulative number of times (that is, the number of times the line battle state has continued) is the number of times stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 103.

In the enemy selection tables 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 36A, each information is assigned so that the degree of continuation of the line battle state can be changed according to the number of times the enemy is destroyed. In the enemy selection tables 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 36A, "Low" indicates that the player's advantage degree is relatively low with respect to the continuation degree of the line battle state, and "Medium" indicates the continuation degree of the line battle state. Indicates that the degree of advantage of the player is moderate, and “high” indicates that the degree of advantage of the player is high regarding the degree of continuation of the line battle state.

In the present embodiment, as information corresponding to the enemy character that is the target of the battle, "A" (enemy character A), "B" (enemy character B), "C" (enemy character C), and "D" ( The enemy character D) is set, and either one of them is determined in the lottery for enemy type at the time of entering a battle, which will be described later. Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the degree of expectation that the line battle state continues in the order of “A”, “B”, “C”, and “D” gradually increases. That is, the advantage degree of the player is sequentially increased in the order of “A”, “B”, “C”, and “D”.

Then, in the later-described battle-type enemy type lottery, if the information indicated by the determined enemy selection table is "low", an enemy character (for example, "A") with a relatively low player's advantage is determined. The enemy character (for example, “D”) that is easy to be played and the player's advantage degree is relatively high is difficult to be determined, and if the information indicated by the determined enemy selection table is “high”, An enemy character (for example, “A”) having a relatively low advantage degree is difficult to be determined, and an enemy character (for example, “D”) having a relatively high advantage degree for the player is easily determined. If the information shown in the determined enemy selection table is "medium", the probability is in the meantime. In this way, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player regarding the degree of continuation of the line battle state.

In the teammate selection table lottery, a teammate selection table for selecting information corresponding to the teammate character for advancing the battle in an advantageous manner in the later-described battle state is determined. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the ally selection table lottery table shown in FIG. 36B, and selects one of the ally selection tables 1 to 8 based on the number of times the enemy has been destroyed and the lottery value. Since the number of times the enemy is destroyed has already been described, the description here is omitted.

In the present embodiment, as information corresponding to the ally character for advancing the battle advantageously, "1" (ally character 1), "2" (ally character 2), "3" (ally character 3), and "4". (Allied character 4) is set, and it is determined whether or not one or a plurality of ally characters are given or not in the ally type lottery at the time of entering a battle, which will be described later. Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the greater the number of assigned ally characters, the higher the degree of expectation that the line battle state will continue. That is, the greater the number of the assigned teammate characters, the higher the degree of advantage of the player.

Then, in the later-described battle ally type random determination, if the information indicated by the determined ally selection table is "extremely low", the ally character is rarely given and the information indicated by the determined ally selection table is displayed. Is low, the ally character is hard to be given, and even if it is given, if the information shown in the decided ally selection table is "medium", the ally character is easily given. However, it is difficult to attach a plurality of ally characters, and if the information indicated by the determined ally selection table is “high”, the ally character is likely to be attached and the plurality of ally characters are likely to be attached. In this way, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player regarding the degree of continuation of the line battle state.

In the ally acquisition lottery, in addition to the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, whether or not to grant the right to previously acquire the ally character is determined. For example, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to acquire a teammate character with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2 probability) based on winning a specific combination (for example, “chance eye” or “watermelon 1”). decide. Note that illustrations of tables referred to in the ally acquisition lottery are omitted.

Here, when it is determined as a result of the ally acquisition lottery to grant the right, at the time of entering the battle state, of the numbers of the ally characters not given as a result of the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, A ally character with a small number is added. For example, in the case of a ally type lottery at the time of entering a battle, which will be described later, when the ally character “2” is given, if the right is acquired, the ally character “1” is further given. That is, in the later-described battle entry ally type lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific ally character type is included, whereas in the ally acquisition lottery, at least one ally character is provided. Whether or not to decide is decided.

The right decided to be granted as a result of the ally acquisition lottery basically disappears when the subsequent battle state ends, and it is necessary to win the ally acquisition lottery again in order to obtain the right again. .. In this sense, the right can be said to be a “limited right” different from the “perpetual right” described later.

(Interval state)
As described above, when the line battle preparation state ends, the main CPU 101 first shifts to the interval state at the start of the line battle state. The interval state is a state in which it continues for 3 games, and when the game period in the interval state has passed 3 games, it shifts to the battle state. In the interval state, the team acquisition lottery described above is performed.

When the interval state ends, the lottery type for enemies at the time of battle entry and the lottery type for allies at the time of battle entry are performed.

In the lottery for enemies upon entry into the battle, based on the enemy selection table (one of 1 to 8) determined as a result of the lottery on the above-mentioned enemy selection table, information on the degree of expectation according to the current number of times the enemy is destroyed (“low” to Any one of “high”) is referred to, and information (any of “A” to “D”) corresponding to the enemy character to be battled is determined. It should be noted that illustrations of tables referred to in the lottery upon enemy entry at the time of battle entry are omitted.

In the ally type lottery at the time of battle entry, based on the ally selection table (one of 1 to 8) determined as a result of the ally selection table lottery described above, information on the degree of expectation according to the current number of enemy defeats (“extremely low”) ~ "High") is referred to, and information corresponding to the ally character for advancing the battle is determined. In addition, in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, for example, ““1” is won”, ““2” is won”, “3” is won”, “4” is won”, “1.2”. It is possible to determine that a plurality of ally characters are given, such as “winning winning”,... “Winning “1 to 4””, while a permanent right (or a limited right) described later is “ When "1" is given and "win" is determined, the lottery result is discarded (not reflected). Further, in this case, when "winning for "1.2" is determined, only the part of "winning for "1"" is discarded (not reflected), and "winning for "2"". The part of is reflected. Therefore, if no other right is given in the team acquisition lottery, the teammate characters in this case are “1” and “2”. Note that the tables referred to in the ally type lottery at the time of battle entry are not shown.

Further, when the interval state ends, the initial value “32” is set to the enemy HP and the friend HP. Then, the enemy type according to the result of the lottery type at the time of entering the battle is set, and the result of the lottery type at the time of entering the battle, the presence/absence of the limited right granted based on the result of the lottery for obtaining the ally, and the permanence described later. The ally type is set according to the presence or absence of the permanent right granted based on the result of the right acquisition lottery.

(Battle state)
As described above, when the interval state ends, the main CPU 101 next shifts to the battle state in the line battle state. The battle state lasts for at least 31 games. During this time, if the ally side attacks, the enemy HP decreases by the amount of the damage of the attack, and if the enemy side attacks, the amount of the damage of the attack is ally. It has a playability that HP decreases. Then, when the enemy HP becomes "0" or less before the end of the battle state, the state is shifted to the right acquisition lottery state, and when the enemy HP does not become "0" or less before the end of the battle state, , A continuous lottery state described later is entered.

In the battle state, when a "weak rare role" or "chance opportunity" is won, the winning game is not included in the count of the game period in the battle state. That is, the game period in the battle state is extended by the number of times of winning the “weak rare role” or the “chance opportunity”. In addition, in the battle state, if the “chance eye” is won, the “RT3 transition eye” is displayed, and the RT state becomes the RT3 state, the eight games in the RT3 state will be counted during the game period in the battle state. Is not included in. That is, the game period in the battle state is extended by the number of games in which the RT3 state continues.

In the battle state, a counter lottery at the time of a hit rep, a damage lottery at the time of a counter, a defense lottery at the time of hit rep, a damage lottery at the time of hit rep, and a damage damage lottery can be performed. Note that the lottery related to these game characteristics is an example, and other lottery can be performed in the battle state.

Here, also with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41, the relationship between the lottery related to various game characteristics performed in the battle state and the information corresponding to the teammate character will be described.

FIG. 37 shows a case where there is no ally in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state) (that is, when neither “1” to “4” is given as the information corresponding to the ally character). 6 is a diagram showing an example of display contents of the display device 11 of FIG.

First, the display device 11 displays the current “status” of the player-side self character (“self” in FIGS. 37 to 41) corresponding to the player himself as the basic display content during the battle state. At the same time, the enemy character on the enemy side determined as a result of the lottery on the enemy type at the time of entering the battle (“enemy A” in FIGS. 37 to 41. In this case, it is assumed that the enemy type “A” is selected). Display the current "status" of.

The status is information corresponding to the remaining numerical range of the friendly HP and the enemy HP set at the time of entering the battle state. In the present embodiment, the remaining numerical range of each of the friendly HP and the enemy HP is “32 to When "25", the status "normal" is set, when the remaining numerical value range is "24 to 17", when the status "Small broken" is set and when the remaining numerical value range is "16 to 9" , Status "medium damage" is set, remaining numerical value range is "8 to 1", status "major damage" is set, remaining numerical value range is "0" or less, status "defeated" Is set. Although the status "destroy" may be set for the enemy HP, the status "destroy" may not be set for the ally HP, and when the remaining numerical range of the ally HP is "1" or less, The ally HP is fixed at "1" and cannot be subtracted below it.

Then, the display device 11 displays “middle line attack effective” when there is no ally. This relates to the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the line battle state only for the center line (“DL1” in FIGS. 37 to 41) when no ally character of “1” to “4” is given in the battle state. It means to function as a judgment line.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when there is no ally, when the above-mentioned "middle lip" or "middle bell" is displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which "middle lip" or "middle bell" can be displayed is determined. When it is done, it becomes an attack on the ally side, and the damage damage lottery described later is performed, while the above-mentioned "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" is not displayed (that is, "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell"). If the internal winning combination that can be displayed is not determined) and you win the “Billed Lip” (“F_Billed Lip”), it becomes an attack on the enemy side and the damage damage lottery described below is not performed The damage damage lottery will now be performed.

FIG. 38 shows the display device 11 when the teammate “1” is acquired in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state) (that is, when “1” is added as the information corresponding to the teammate character). It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of. Note that the basic display contents are the same as those shown in FIG. 37, so description thereof is omitted here.

When the ally "1" is acquired, the display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective" and "upper line attack effective". This is because when the ally character “1” is given in the battle state, the center line (“DL1” in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line (“DL2” in FIGS. 38 to 41) are line battles. It means that it functions as a judgment line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the ally "1" is acquired, when the above-mentioned "middle lip" or "middle bell" is displayed (ie, "middle lip" or "middle bell" can be displayed, the internal winning When the winning combination is determined), and when the above-mentioned “upper lip” or “upper bell” is displayed (that is, when the internal winning combination that can display the “upper lip” or “upper bell” is determined) Will be an attack on the ally side, and the damage damage lottery described below will be performed, while the above-mentioned "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" is not displayed (that is, "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" may be displayed. The internal winning combination is not determined), the above-mentioned “upper lip” or “upper bell” is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination for which “upper lip” or “upper bell” can be displayed is not determined), “ If the player wins a "received lip" ("F_received lip"), it becomes an attack on the enemy side, and the damage damage lottery to be described later is not performed, but the damage damage lottery to be described later is performed.

In FIG. 39, in the line battle state (more specifically, in the battle state), when the teammates “1” and “2” are acquired (that is, “1” and “2” are added as information corresponding to the teammate character). FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of display contents of the display device 11 in the case of (there is a case). Note that the basic display contents are the same as those shown in FIG. 37, so description thereof is omitted here.

When the teammates "1" and "2" are acquired, the display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective", "upper line attack effective", and "lower line attack effective". This is because when the ally characters “1” and “2” are given in the battle state, the center line (“DL1” in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line (“DL2” in FIGS. 38 to 41). ), and the bottom line (“DL3” in FIGS. 39 to 41) function as a determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the line battle state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the ally "1" and "2" are acquired, when the above-mentioned "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" is displayed (that is, "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" is displayed). When the internal winning combination that can be performed is determined), when the above-mentioned “upper lip” or “upper bell” is displayed (that is, the internal winning combination for which the “upper lip” or “upper bell” can be displayed is determined). When the above-mentioned “lower lip” or “lower bell” is displayed (that is, when the internal winning combination for which “lower lip” or “lower bell” can be displayed is determined), While the damage damage lottery described below is performed, the above-mentioned "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" can be displayed is determined. No), the above "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination for which "upper lip" or "upper bell" can be displayed is not determined), and the above "lower lip" Or, if the “lower bell” is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination that can display the “lower lip” or the “lower bell” is not determined), and if the winning hit is “Bip hit” (“F_ bullet hit”) Is an attack on the enemy side, and the damage damage lottery described below is not performed, but the damage damage lottery at the time of a hit lip is described later.

In FIG. 40, in the line battle state (more specifically, in the battle state), when the teammates “1” to “3” are acquired (that is, “1” to “3” are added as information corresponding to the teammate character). FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of display contents of the display device 11 in the case of (there is). Note that the basic display contents are the same as those shown in FIG. 37, so description thereof is omitted here.

When the allies “1” to “3” are acquired, the display device 11 displays “middle-stage line attack effective”, “upper-stage line attack effective”, “lower-stage line attack effective”, and “with counter”. This is because when the teammate characters “1” to “3” are given in the battle state, the center line (“DL1” in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line (“DL2” in FIGS. 38 to 41). ), and the bottom line (“DL3” in FIG. 39 to FIG. 41) function as a determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the line battle state, and when the “hit bullet” (“F_ bullet hit”) is won. , It means that a lottery for countering damage at the time of a hit lip and a lottery for damage caused during counter can be performed later.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the teammates “1” to “3” are acquired, the teammates “1” and “2” are acquired, and the damage damage lottery described below and the damage received lottery at the time of hitting a lip described later are performed. Is the same, but in addition, the above-mentioned "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination for which "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" can be displayed is not determined), and the above-mentioned The "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination for which the "upper lip" or "upper bell" can be displayed is not determined), and the "lower lip" or "lower bell" described above is not determined. Is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination for which “lower lip” or “lower bell” can be displayed is not determined), and when the winning hit is “Bip Lip” (“F_Bip Lip”), Before the damage damage lottery is carried out, a counter lottery at the time of the bullet hit is performed to decide whether to activate the counter attack, and if it is won, it becomes an attack on the ally side, and the counter damage damage lottery described later. The damage lottery is not performed at the time of the hit rip described below.

In FIG. 41, in the line battle state (more specifically, in the battle state), when the teammates "1" to "4" are acquired (that is, "1" to "4" are added as information corresponding to the teammate character). FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of display contents of the display device 11 in the case of (there is a case). Note that the basic display contents are the same as those shown in FIG. 37, so description thereof is omitted here.

When the allies "1" to "4" are acquired, the display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective", "upper line attack effective", "lower line attack effective", "with counter", and "with defense" doing. This is because when the teammate characters “1” to “4” are given in the battle state, the center line (“DL1” in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line (“DL2” in FIGS. 38 to 41). ), and the bottom line (“DL3” in FIG. 39 to FIG. 41) function as a determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the line battle state, and when the “hit bullet” (“F_ bullet hit”) is won. , It means that the counter lottery at the time of hitting lip and the damage damage lottery at the time of counter described below can be performed, and even if you do not win the counter lottery at the time of hitting lip described later, the defense lottery at the time of hitting lip can be performed later. ing.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the teammates "1" to "4" are acquired, when the teammates "1" and "2" are acquired, the damage damage lottery described below, the damage damage lottery at the time of hitting a bullet described later, and the hit damage described later The counter lottery at the time of the rip and the damage damage lottery at the time of the counter are performed in the same manner, but in addition to that, the above-mentioned "middle lip" or "middle bell" is not displayed (that is, "middle lip" or "middle bell"). Is not determined), the above-mentioned “upper lip” or “upper bell” is not displayed (that is, an internal winning combination in which “upper lip” or “upper bell” can be displayed is determined) No), the above-mentioned "lower lip" or "lower bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination for which the "lower lip" or "lower bell" can be displayed is not determined), and "the hit lip" (" F_Billed Lip”), if a lottery for hitting a rep is performed, a lottery for hitting a ripping is performed to determine whether to activate a counter attack before the damage lottery during a ripping hit is performed. If you do not do this, the defense lottery at the time of hitting rip will be performed, and if you win this, it will be an attack on the enemy side, but it will be a defense success and the damage lottery at the time of hitting rep will not be performed. ..

In the present embodiment, the damage determination lottery described later is performed only when the “replay” symbol and the “bell” symbol are actually aligned on the line set as the determination line. Despite the fact that the push order is informed about, if the "bell" symbols are not actually aligned due to the player's mistake in the push order, the damage damage lottery described below may not be performed. , When the internal winning combination is determined in which the “Replay” symbol and the “Bell” symbol can be aligned (displayed) on the line set as the judgment line, the “Replay” symbol or the “Bell symbol” is actually determined. The damage damage lottery described later may be performed regardless of whether or not the symbols of “” are aligned. Any of these methods can be adopted. When the latter method is adopted, the "judgment line" is not the line on which the "judgment" itself is actually performed, but it has the significance of being able to inform the player that the damage lottery will be performed, for example. Since it will be a thing, it will still have important meaning for the player.

37 to 41, an example in which the teammate characters "1" to "4" are sequentially increased is described, but the teammate character may be, for example, "" depending on the result of the teammate type lottery when entering the battle. There may be a case where only "2", "3" only, "4" only, or "2" and "3", "3" and "4" are given. Therefore, in the following, the functions of the information "1" to "4" corresponding to the teammate character will be briefly described again.

When the information “1” corresponding to the ally character is set, the top line (“DL2” in FIGS. 38 to 41) in addition to the center line (“DL1” in FIGS. 37 to 41) is in the line battle state. It will function as a judgment line regarding the variation of the continuation degree.

When the information “2” corresponding to the teammate character is set, the bottom line (“DL3” in FIGS. 39 to 41) in addition to the center line (“DL1” in FIGS. 37 to 41) is the line battle state. It will function as a judgment line regarding the variation of the continuation degree.

When the information “3” corresponding to the ally character is set, even if the ally HP is originally reduced by the enemy side attack, the ally side attack is reduced and the enemy HP is reduced. There will be cases where

When the information “4” corresponding to the ally character is set, even if the ally HP is originally reduced as an attack on the enemy side, the ally HP may not be reduced.

Here, the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side) to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side) regardless of whether information “1” or “2” corresponding to the teammate character is set. When the winning combination number “7”, “8” or “24” is transmitted (see FIG. 32), the sub CPU 201 blinks, for example, on the display device 11 a portion where “middle line attack effective” is displayed. Processing such as displaying or emphasizing is performed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that expects the ally side to attack.

In the case where the information “1” corresponding to the teammate character is set, the winning combination number “6” is sent from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side) to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side). Alternatively, when “23” is transmitted (see FIG. 32 ), the sub CPU 201 performs processing such as blinking or highlighting the portion where “upper line attack effective” is displayed on the display device 11, for example. I do. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that expects the ally side to attack.

In the case where the information “2” corresponding to the teammate character is set, the winning combination number “10” is sent from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side) to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side). Alternatively, when “25” is transmitted (see FIG. 32 ), the sub CPU 201 blinks, or emphasizes and displays, for example, a portion of the display device 11 where “Lower line attack effective” is displayed. Process. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that expects the ally side to attack.

However, the aspect of the effect that the ally side expects to attack is not limited to this. For example, it may be an effect performed by another effect device (for example, the speaker group 84 or the LED group 85). Further, even when the winning combination number of the internal winning combination that does not have the above-described correspondence relationship is transmitted, one of the effects described above may be performed with a predetermined probability.

The type and function of information corresponding to the teammate character are not limited to those described above. For example, when information (for example, “5”) corresponding to a specific ally character is set, the amount of damage determined in the damage damage lottery described below increases (for example, the amount of damage determined is doubled). ) May have a function like this. Further, for example, when the information (for example, “6”) corresponding to a specific ally character is set, the damage received determined in the damage received lottery at the time of hitting rip described below decreases (for example, the determined damage received). May be reduced to 1/2).

The line functioning as the determination line is not limited to the valid line. For example, when information corresponding to a specific ally character is set, even if the line is different from the activated line, it may be set as a special line and this special line may be made to function as a determination line. Specifically, for example, when information (for example, “5”) corresponding to a specific ally character is set, the cross-down line functions as a determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the line battle state in addition to the center line. You may do so. Further, for example, when information (for example, “6”) corresponding to a specific ally character is set, the cross-up line functions as a determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the line battle state in addition to the center line. May be.

In such a case, the symbols displayed on the actual activated line are not the "replay" symbol arrangement or the "bell" symbol arrangement, but the symbol displayed on such a special line is "replay". If it is configured to be the same as the "Bell" symbol arrangement, the player can recognize that the degree of advantage fluctuates in the same manner as the effective line, and therefore, regardless of the actual number of effective lines. Instead, it is possible to provide the same playability. From this point of view, the determination line regarding the variation in the continuation degree of the line battle state does not necessarily include the effective line. For example, when the effective line is one cross-up line, the line battle The determination line regarding the variation in the degree of continuation of the state may be composed of a maximum of three lines of a center line, a top line, and a bottom line. That is, it is possible to configure the determination line regarding the variation in the continuation degree of the line battle state from only a special line different from the effective line.

Further, when defining the determination line, like the above-described effective line, it is possible to replace the lines with the symbols aligned in a line, or together with this, define a line in which the symbols are not aligned as an effective line. .. That is, as long as it is a line that passes through any one of the symbols (region of each of the columns (the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, the right reel 3R)), one or a plurality of lines configured by connecting with straight lines or polygonal lines It can be set as a judgment line.

For example, a line (an irregular line at V time) connecting the upper region of the left reel 3L, the lower region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R may be defined as the determination line. That is, in the present embodiment, since the symbols are displayed in the form of 3 rows×3 columns in the frame of the reel display window 4, it is possible to define 27 determination lines. At least one of the lines may be defined as the determination line.

Here, let us return to the explanation of the battle state again. As described above, when the information “3” corresponding to the ally character is set, when the “ball hit rep” (“F_ball hit rep”) is won, the ball hit rep counter lottery is performed. In the counter lottery at the time of hitting a rip, the main CPU 101 determines, with a predetermined probability, whether to activate a counter attack (winning) or not to activate a counter attack (non-winning). It should be noted that the tables referred to in the counter lottery at the time of hitting replies are not shown.

If you win the counter lottery at the time of a hit rip, the damage damage lottery at the time of the counter is subsequently performed. In the counter-time given damage lottery, the main CPU 101 refers to the counter-time given damage lottery table shown in FIG. 36C, and determines any one of the given damage values based on the lottery value. When the value of the damage done is determined, the value is subtracted from the value of the enemy HP, and the value of the enemy HP is updated. Along with this, the above-mentioned "status" of the enemy is appropriately updated. In addition, in this case, damage damage lottery is not carried out at the time of hitting a rip.

On the other hand, when the player does not win the random lottery at the time of hitting a rep, the information “4” corresponding to the ally character is set, and the information “3” corresponding to the ally character is not set, but “ When “4” is set, defense lottery is performed at the time of ripping a bullet. In the hit lot counter during random determination, the main CPU 101 determines, with a predetermined probability, whether to activate the defense (win) or not to activate the defense (non-win). It should be noted that the tables referred to in the defense lottery at the time of hitting a rip are not shown.

If you win the lottery for defense when hit by ripping, the lottery for damage received when ripping for hit is not performed. On the other hand, if the player does not win the defensive lottery at the time of hit rep, the information “4” corresponding to the ally character is not set, but “3” is set, and the counter lottery at the time of hit rep is won. If there is not, or if the information “3” and “4” corresponding to the teammate character is not set and the player has won “Bullet Lip” (“F_Bullet Lip”), the player will receive The damage lottery is performed.

In the damage received lottery during hit rep, the main CPU 101 refers to the damage damaged lottery during hit rep table shown in FIG. 36D, and determines any one damage value based on the enemy type and the lottery value. .. It should be noted that when the value of the damage is determined, the value is subtracted from the value of the teammate HP and the value of the teammate HP is updated. Along with this, the above-mentioned “status” of the ally is appropriately updated.

When the information “1” and “2” corresponding to the teammate character is not set, and when the internal winning combination for which “middle lip” or “middle bell” can be displayed is determined, and the watermelon (in this case) , “F_Watermelon 1” may be included, or “F_Watermelon 2” may be included. In the following, the same applies in this section), the damage damage lottery will be performed. Be seen.

In the case where the information “1” corresponding to the teammate character is set, an internal winning combination that can display “middle lip” or “middle bell”, or “upper lip” or “upper bell” is determined. In the case, and when the watermelon is determined as the internal winning combination, the damage lottery is performed.

In the case where the information “2” corresponding to the ally character is set, the internal winning combination in which “middle lip” or “middle bell” or “lower lip” or “lower bell” can be displayed is determined. In the case, and when the watermelon is determined as the internal winning combination, the damage lottery is performed.

In the case where the information “1” and “2” corresponding to the teammate character is set, “middle lip” or “middle bell”, “upper lip” or “upper bell”, or “lower lip” or “ When the internal winning combination that can display “lower bell” is determined, and when the watermelon is determined as the internal winning combination, the damage damage lottery is performed.

In the given damage lottery, the main CPU 101 refers to the given damage lottery table shown in FIG. 36E, and determines any one given damage value based on the internal winning combination and the lottery value. When the value of the damage done is determined, the value is subtracted from the value of the enemy HP, and the value of the enemy HP is updated. Along with this, the above-mentioned "status" of the enemy is appropriately updated.

Here, focusing on the RT state, the line battle state of the advantageous section basically corresponds to the RT2 state, but when the “RT3 transition eye” is displayed, it can also be the RT3 state. Referring to FIG. 16, in the RT2 state, the lottery value of “F_middle stage rep 1” is “5000”, the lottery value of “F_upper stage rep” and “F_lower stage rep” is “2450”, and “F_shot hit” The lottery value of “Lip” is “8970”, whereas in the RT3 state, the lottery value of “F_middle stage rip 2” is “32768”, and the lottery value of “F_bulleted rep” is “0”.

That is, in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state) of the advantageous section, if it is possible to shift to the RT3 state, whether or not the information “1” or “2” corresponding to the ally character is set. Instead, the internal winning combination that can display "middle rip" is determined with a high probability, and as a result, the damage lottery can be performed with a high probability, and the internal winning combination that can display "hit rep" is displayed. As a result of not being determined, it is possible to prevent the damage lottery from being performed at the time of a hit rip. Therefore, in the line battle state of the advantageous section (more specifically, the battle state), the RT3 state is the most advantageous RT state.

In the battle state, when the enemy HP becomes "0" or less (that is, "destroy" as the status) before the battle state ends, the main CPU 101 shifts from the next game to the advantageous section right grant lottery state. If the enemy HP is not below "0" and the game period in the battle state has not ended, the battle state is continued. Further, when the enemy HP is not equal to or less than "0" and the game period in the battle state is over, the game is shifted from the next game to the continuous lottery state in the line battle state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the case of winning the “Bullet Lip” (“F_Bullet Lip”), it is assumed that the counter lottery at the time of hit bullet rep, the lottery at the time of bullet hit rep and the damage lottery at the time of bullet hit Lip are performed. The lottery method in the battle state is not limited to this. For example, if an internal winning combination that is not subject to the damage damage lottery (however, except for the “weak rare combination”, the “chance eye”, and the bonus combination) is determined, the “bulleted lip” (“F_bulleted lip”) In the same manner as the above), the lottery during the hitting rip, the defense lottery during the hitting rip, and the damage lottery during the hitting rep may be performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the winning bulletin (“F_bulleting lip”) is won, the combination of the symbols of the “bulleting lip” is displayed on the center line. It is configured as a different internal winning combination, or is configured as a push-order replay of "Bullet Lip" ("F_Bullet Lip"), and the combination of symbols of "Bullet Lip" is displayed on the top line according to the procedure of the stop operation. Alternatively, it may be displayed on the bottom line. In this case, if the top line or the bottom line is the judgment line, it may be possible to perform the counter lottery at the time of hitting rep, the lottery for defense during hitting rep, and the lottery for damage during hitting rep The lottery may not be performed. Also, if the top line or the bottom line is the judgment line, the procedure of the stop operation may be notified so that the combination of the symbols “Bullet Lip” is not displayed on the top line or the bottom line. Good.

(Continuous lottery status)
As described above, when the enemy HP is not lower than "0" and the game period in the battle state ends, the main CPU 101 next shifts to the continuous lottery state in the line battle state. The continuous lottery state continues for 4 or 7 games, and if it is finally decided to shift from the line battle state to the right acquisition lottery state, shift to the right acquisition lottery state If it is decided to continue the line battle state, the line battle state is moved to the interval state in the line battle state again, and if neither of these decisions is made, the line battle state ends ( That is, the advantageous section ends) and the normal state of the non-advantageous section is entered.

In the continuous lottery state, continuous lottery and continuous lottery result rewriting lottery can be performed according to the enemy type and the damage state. Note that the lottery related to these game characteristics is an example, and other lottery can be performed in the continuous lottery state.

First, when shifting from the battle state to the continuous lottery state, the main CPU 101 performs continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state. In the continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state, the main CPU 101 refers to the continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 36F, and the enemy type, the damage state (that is, synonymous with “status” described above), and the lottery value, Based on the above, the game period in the continuous lottery state is 4 games, but neither the transition to the right acquisition lottery state nor the continuation of the line battle state is decided (“4G defeat”), and the game period in the continuous lottery state. Is 7 games, but it is not decided to shift to the right acquisition lottery state or to continue the line battle state (“7G defeat”), the game period of the continuous lottery state is 4 games, and the line battle state is changed. It is decided to continue (“4G continuation”), the game period of continuous lottery state is 7 games, it is decided to continue the line battle state (“7G continuation”), continuous lottery state The game period is 4 games, it is decided to shift to the right acquisition lottery state (“4G promotion”), and the game period in the continuous lottery state is 7 games, and it is possible to shift to the right acquisition lottery state. Any of the above is determined (“7G promotion”).

In the continuous lottery depending on the enemy type and the damage state, at least the lottery result (the above-mentioned “4G continuation”, “7G continuation”, “4G promotion”, and “7G promotion”) in which the advantageous section is not ended is determined. As a general rule, the probability increases in the order of enemy type "A", "B", "C", "D", and the ally status is "Major", "Medium", "Small". The order is to gradually increase in the order of “break” and “normal”, and the enemy statuses are sequentially increased in the order of “normal”, “small break”, “medium break”, and “major break”. That is, the three parameters of the enemy type, the ally status, and the enemy status are referred to and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section continues.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when entering the battle state, information corresponding to which enemy character is set, how the ally status changes during the battle state, and which enemy status is determined during the battle state. It is possible to change the degree of continuation of the line battle state depending on the transition. In addition, when the ally status and the enemy status change, the type of information corresponding to the ally character (for example, the number of determination lines) becomes important, whereby the degree of continuation of the line battle state is advantageous to the player. The probability of changing the value to a certain degree or changing the degree to a disadvantage to the player also changes.

Note that, in the continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 36F, when the ally status is “defeat” and the enemy status is “defeat”, it is confirmed that the lottery result in which at least the advantageous section is not ended is exceptionally determined. It has become. In this way, when the ally status is a specific status and the enemy status is a specific status, contrary to the principle described above, the probability that the advantageous section will continue is increased or the probability that the advantageous section will continue is decreased. You can also

Further, when the main CPU 101 shifts from the battle state to the continuous lottery state, the lottery result of the continuous lottery depending on the enemy type and the damage state is the lottery result in which the advantageous section is ended (the above-mentioned “4G defeat” and “defeat”). 7G defeat”), the continuous lottery result rewriting lottery is performed in the continuous lottery state. Specifically, in the continuous lottery state, when a "chance eye" or a bonus combination is won, when "4G defeat" is determined as the lottery result of the continuous lottery, it is rewritten to "4G continuation", for example. If "7G defeat" has been decided, rewrite as "7G continuation". In addition, when winning the watermelon (in this case, only “F_watermelon 1” may be included or “F_watermelon 2” may be included), the continuous lottery is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). Decide to rewrite the lottery result of. When it is decided to rewrite the lottery result of the continuous lottery, the lottery result of the continuous lottery is appropriately rewritten as in the above.

In the present embodiment, the continuous lottery result rewriting lottery is performed after the continuous lottery is performed according to the enemy type and the damage state, but the lottery method in the continuous lottery state is not limited to this. For example, in the continuous lottery state, first, the continuous lottery result rewriting lottery is performed (that is, the lottery is performed to determine whether to continue the line battle state for each game based on the internal winning combination), and the relevant lottery is performed. When it is not decided to continue the line battle state, the continuous lottery may be performed according to the enemy type and the damage state when the continuous lottery state ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the line battle state of the advantageous section, whether one or a plurality of lines (regardless of whether it is an effective line) is set as the determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the advantageous section is determined. It is possible to decide, and in the battle state during the line battle state, when the symbols of "Replay" or "Bell" are displayed side by side on the determined judgment line, the continuation degree of the advantageous section is set to the degree advantageous to the player. It is possible to change, and in the continuous lottery state during the line battle state, it is possible to decide whether or not to continue the advantageous section based on the degree of continuation of the determined advantageous section.

As a result, the degree of continuation of the advantageous section can be changed according to the determination result of the determination line, so that it is possible to improve interest in continuing the state advantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the battle state during the line battle state, in the determined determination line, for example, when the combination of the symbols of “shot bullets” is displayed, the continuation degree of the advantageous section is disadvantageous to the player. It can be changed to any degree.

As a result, it is possible to increase the tension in the advantageous section (for example, during the battle state in the line battle state), the game in the advantageous section is not monotonous, and there is an interest in continuing the state advantageous to the player. It is possible to improve.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to change the RT state in the line battle state in the advantageous section to the RT2 state, and when the “RT3 transition eye” is displayed, the RT state in the line battle state in the advantageous section. Can be changed to the RT3 state, and a specific internal winning combination (for example, “F_middle stage rep 1” and “F_middle stage” in which a combination of symbols of “middle stage rep” can be displayed on the determined determination line is displayed. The probability of deciding either "Rip 2") is higher in the RT3 state than in the RT2 state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the RT2 state, it is possible to determine a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, “F_ball hit lip”) in which the combination of symbols of “ball hit lip” can be displayed, and in the RT3 state, the predetermined internal winning combination can be determined. The internal winning combination of is not allowed to be decided.

As a result, during the advantageous section (for example, during the battle state in the line battle state), the degree of advantage of the player is further changed depending on which RT state, so that the game in the advantageous section is performed. Can be made more diversified, and the interest in continuing a state advantageous to the player can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, when the stop operation is performed at "bat order 1", "F_upper left bell 1" in which a combination of symbols "bell" is displayed on the top line and "bat order 1" are displayed. When the stop operation is performed with, the center line displays the combination of the symbols "Bell", "F_Middle left bell 1", and when the stop operation is performed with "Batting order 3", the top line is displayed. "F_upper bell 1" where the combination of symbols "Bell" is displayed and "F_" where the combination of symbols "Bell" is displayed on the center line when the stop operation is performed in "bat order 3" 32 can be determined as at least an internal winning combination, and as shown in FIG. 32, for example, “F_upper left bell 1” or “F_upper middle bell 1” is determined in the advantageous section. In the case of winning, "23" is transmitted as the winning combination number, and when "F_middle stage left bell 1" or "F_middle stage bell 1" is determined, "24" is transmitted as the winning combination number. It has become. Then, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute different effects depending on the transmitted winning combination number.

Thereby, for example, in the case where the player has a playability in which the degree of the advantage of the player varies depending on the line on which the symbol is displayed, such as the line battle state of the advantageous section, the effect related to the combination of the symbols displayed Therefore, it is possible to perform more appropriate effects without increasing the control load.

<Right acquisition lottery status and game play during right acquisition status>
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a flow of the game in the right acquisition lottery state and the right acquisition state in the advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 42 shows an outline of the flow of the game in the right acquisition lottery state and the right acquisition state.

(Right acquisition lottery preparation state)
The main CPU 101 wins the bonus combination in the right acquisition lottery preparation state, the right acquisition lottery state, and the right acquisition state of the advantageous section, and when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, shifts to the right acquisition lottery preparation state. (That is, return to these states). In this case, the RT state when the bonus state ends is the RT4 state (see FIG. 13), and the right acquisition lottery preparation state is maintained until the RT state shifts from the RT4 state to the RT2 state. When the RT state shifts to the RT2 state, the bonus winning combination is transferred to the right acquisition state if it is a rights acquisition state, and the bonus winning combination is transferred to the rights acquisition lottery state if it is a rights acquisition lottery state. Let

In this case, since the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state, the push order notification regarding the push sequence small win and the push sequence replay is not performed until the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state. After the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the push order notification of the push order small combination and the push order replay is started. Further, in this case, even when the "RT3 shift eye" is displayed in the RT4 state and the state shifts to the RT3 state, the push order notification of the push order small combination and the push order replay is started. When the state shifts to the RT3 state, the right acquisition lottery preparation state is ended, the right acquisition state is returned to return to the right acquisition state, and the right acquisition lottery state is returned to return to the right acquisition lottery state. You may make it return.

(Right acquisition lottery status)
As described above, when the right acquisition lottery preparation state is completed and when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition lottery state in the line battle state, the main CPU 101 shifts to the right acquisition lottery state. The right acquisition lottery state is a state in which it continues for 20 games, and during this period, information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is of course notified. Even if the right acquisition state is not entered, the line battle state is restored. Therefore, the right acquisition lottery state is a gaming state in which the gaming period of the advantageous section can be extended by itself. In the right acquisition lottery state, the right acquisition state transition lottery is performed.

In the right acquisition lottery, for example, the main CPU 101 may have only a “chance eye” or a watermelon (in this case, “F_watermelon 1” or “F_watermelon 2”) in the right acquisition lottery state. If you win), it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state from the next game. If the common bell (“F_upper common bell” and “F_middle common bell”) is won, it is determined with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4) to shift from the next game to the right acquisition state. Even when it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state, the right acquisition state may be shifted when the game period (20 games) in the right acquisition lottery state is finished. Also, when it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state, a precursory period is determined within the range of the number of games remaining in the game period of the right acquisition lottery state, and when the precursory period elapses, the precursor is transferred to the right acquisition state. You may do it. In addition, when the number of remaining games in the game period in the right acquisition lottery state occurs when shifting from the right acquisition lottery state to the right acquisition state, the remaining game number is added to the right acquisition state game period. Alternatively, it may be added to the next game period of the right acquisition lottery state (when the right acquisition state returns to the right acquisition lottery state).

(Right acquisition status)
As described above, when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition state in the right acquisition lottery state, and when the right acquisition lottery preparation state is restored, the main CPU 101 shifts to the right acquisition state. The right acquisition state is a state in which it continues for 10 games, and during this period, information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is of course notified. Then, regardless of whether the permanent right is acquired or not, the right acquisition lottery state is returned to. Therefore, this right acquisition state is a gaming state in which the gaming period of the advantageous section can be extended by itself. In the right acquisition state, the permanent right acquisition lottery is performed.

In the permanent right acquisition lottery, it is determined whether or not the right to permanently acquire the ally character (until the advantageous section ends) is given in advance, separately from the ally type lottery at the time of battle entry described later. It For example, the main CPU 101 determines to grant the permanent right when the bonus combination is won in the right acquisition state. Note that, for example, based on the winning of the specific combination (for example, “watermelon 1”), it may be determined to grant the permanent right with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4).

Here, when it is determined that the perpetual right is granted as a result of the lottery for permanent rights, each time the player enters the battle state, the number of the ally character that has not been granted as a result of the lottery by team type at the time of entering the battle is A ally character with a small number is added. For example, in the case of a ally type lottery at the time of entering a battle, which will be described later, when the ally character “2” is given, if the permanent right is acquired, the ally character “1” is further given. The function of the granted permanent right is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined as a result of the permanent right lottery that the permanent right is given, the ally character having the smallest number among the numbers of the ally characters to which the permanent right is not given is fixedly given. May be. For example, when the permanent right is first granted, the ally character “1” is given as the right content of this permanent right, and when the permanent right is given next, the ally character “2” is given as the right content of this permanent right. May be added.

In the present embodiment, whether or not a permanent right is granted is determined in the right acquisition state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the limited right described above is granted in the right acquisition state. It may be determined whether or not to execute. In this case, for example, the same lottery as the ally acquisition lottery described above may be performed, or the limited right described above may be given so that the probability that the limited right is granted is higher than the ally acquisition lottery described above. It may be determined whether or not it is given. Further, for example, in the right acquisition state, whether or not the above-described limited right is granted is determined for each unit game with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10) regardless of the internal winning combination. Good. If a permanent right or a limited right is granted by a trigger other than the bonus winning, a plurality of rights can be acquired in the right acquisition state.

In this case, as described above, for example, when two rights are granted (when the information “1” and “2” corresponding to the ally character are set), the determination line has the upper limit number in the battle state. (DL1 to DL3) will be set. Further, for example, when three rights are granted (when information “1” to “3” corresponding to the teammate character is set), in addition to this, the counter may be activated in the battle state. Like Further, for example, when four rights are granted (when information “1” to “4” corresponding to a teammate character is set), in addition to this, defense may be activated in the battle state. Like Here, for example, when 5 or more rights are granted in the right acquisition state, the rights of more than 4 may be carried over to the next battle state, or discarded (cleared). It may be done. Further, for example, when five or more rights are granted in the right acquisition state, it may be determined that the advantageous section always continues in the continuous lottery state after the end of the next battle state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the right acquisition state, it is determined whether or not the permanent right that allows the line battle state of the advantageous section to be advantageously advanced (the information corresponding to the ally character can be set) is granted. However, the content of rights that can be granted in the right acquisition state is not limited to this. For example, in the continuous lottery state of the line battle state, the continuation right that the line battle state is forcibly continued regardless of the lottery result (that is, the right to extend the advantageous section. “stock” or “number of sets”) It may be determined whether or not the right acquisition lottery state is forced to continue regardless of the lottery result in the right acquisition lottery state. It may be determined whether or not a continuous right (that is, a right to extend the advantageous section, which is sometimes referred to as “stock” or “number of sets”) is granted. That is, in the right acquisition state, the contents of the right that can be granted can be set as appropriate as long as they provide the player with a privilege.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the line battle state of the advantageous section, whether one or a plurality of lines (regardless of whether it is an effective line) is set as the determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the advantageous section is determined. It is possible to make a decision, and the decision result fluctuates depending on whether or not the right is granted in the right acquisition state. That is, it is possible to determine the determination line based on the right granted in the right acquisition state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when more rights than the upper limit number of determination lines are granted in the right acquisition state, the upper limit number of determination lines is first determined using the upper limit number of rights. Then, in the battle state during the line battle state, for example, when the combination of the symbols of "shot bullet rip" is displayed on the determined determination line, if the granted right does not remain, the advantageous section is continued. It is possible to change the degree to a degree unfavorable to the player and not to change the degree of continuation of the advantageous section to a degree unfavorable to the player if the granted right remains.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the permanent right is granted, a plurality of determination lines are always determined, and when the permanent right is not granted, one or more determination lines are determined when determining the determination line. One of the lines is set as the determination line.

This makes it possible to diversify the role of each gaming state in the advantageous section, and to change the continuation degree of the advantageous section in various ways, so that the interest regarding continuation of the advantageous state for the player is improved. be able to.

<Playability in ending 1 state and ending 2 state>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44, the flow of the game during the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state of the advantageous section will be described. In addition, in FIG. 43, the outline of the flow of the game in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state is shown. In addition, FIG. 44 shows an outline of ending effects performed in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state.

(Ending preparation state)
The main CPU 101 wins the bonus combination in the ending preparation state, the ending 1 state, and the ending 2 state of the advantageous section, and shifts to the ending preparation state when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends (that is, these). Return to the state of). In this case, the RT state when the bonus state ends is the RT4 state (see FIG. 13), and the ending state is maintained until the RT state shifts from the RT4 state to the RT2 state. When the RT state is changed to the RT2 state, the bonus winning combination is shifted to the ending 1 state if the winning combination is the ending 1 state, and the bonus winning combination is shifted to the ending 2 state if the winning combination is the ending 2 state.

In this case, since the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state, the push order notification regarding the push sequence small win and the push sequence replay is not performed until the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state. After the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the push order notification of the push order small combination and the push order replay is started. Further, in this case, even when the "RT3 shift eye" is displayed in the RT4 state and the state shifts to the RT3 state, the push order notification of the push order small combination and the push order replay is started. At the time of transition to the RT3 state, the ending preparation state is ended, the ending 1 state is returned to return to the ending 1 state, and the ending 2 state is returned to return to the ending 2 state. May be.

Further, the main CPU 101, in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, for example, when it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state by the ART lottery when the watermelon 1 is won, the game period of the normal advantageous section is consumed. Then, the state is changed to the ending preparation state (that is, waiting for the transition to the ending 1 state until the state is changed to the RT2 state).

(Ending 1 state)
As described above, the main CPU 101 shifts to the ending 1 state when shifting (returning) to the ending 1 state when the ending preparation state is completed. The ending 1 state is a state in which it continues for 100 games, and during this period, information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is of course notified. When the ending 1 state is completed, the line battle state is entered. The game state is the same as the line battle state in that it is in the game state of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section which shifts from the normal advantageous section, but the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the line battle state. In the ending 1 state, the permanent right acquisition lottery is performed as in the right acquisition state.

As in the case of lottery in the right acquisition state, in the ending 1 state, it may be determined whether or not the limited right described above is granted, or the continuation right for extending the advantageous section is granted. It may be determined whether or not

Further, for example, in the ending 1 state, when the bonus combination is won, the bonus state based on the bonus combination is finished, and the ending 1 state is returned via the ending preparation state, the game period of 100 games is again performed. It may be counted from the beginning, or may be counted by taking over the game period in the game in which the winning combination is won. In the latter case, for example, in the 10th game in the ending 1 state (the remaining 90 games), the bonus combination is won, the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, and the ending 1 state is restored via the ending preparation state. In this case, the game period in the ending 1 state may be 90 games.

Further, the game period in the bonus state may be included in the game period in the ending 1 state. For example, a winning combination is won in the 10th game in the ending 1 state (90 games remaining), the game period of the bonus state based on the bonus combination is 17 games, the bonus state ends, and the ending preparation state is passed. Then, when the game is returned to the ending 1 state, the game period of the ending 1 state may be 73 games.

(Ending 2 state)
When the number of games in the advantageous section is “1200” times or more, and when the interval state of the line battle state ends, the main CPU 101 shifts to the ending 2 state. The ending 2 state is a state that continues for 131 games, and during this period, information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is of course notified. Then, when the ending 2 state is completed, the advantageous section itself is also completed and the non-advantageous section is entered.

In this case, the game may be shifted to the ending 2 state when the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period reaches "1200" times (or more times than that, for example, "1369" times). Good. Further, in this case, even in the other gaming state of the advantageous section, the gaming state may be shifted to the ending 2 state. Further, the mode of counting the game period in the ending 2 state is the same as the mode of counting the game period in the ending 1 state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the ending 2 state ends, the advantageous section itself ends and the non-advantageous section is entered, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the ending 2 state ends, if the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period has not reached “1500” times, the line battle state may be entered again. Alternatively, the ending 2 state may be continued until the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period reaches “1500” times.

(Ending production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, an ending effect that can be performed in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state will be described.

The ending effect is basically an effect that suggests that the advantageous section will soon end when the period controlled by the advantageous section becomes "1200" times or more, as the phrase indicates. Has become. Further, considering the probability that the period controlled in the advantageous section is “1200” times or more, the special effect has a lower probability of being executed than other effects.

The ending effect is configured as a series of story effects including, for example, the first to eighth episodes and the final episode, and as the game period in the ending 2 state progresses, the content of the story also progresses. There is. As described above, in the case where the ending 2 state is configured to be able to continue until the regulation monitoring period becomes “1500” times after the period controlled to the advantageous section becomes “1200” times, The content of the story may be advanced according to the game period until the regulation monitoring period reaches "1500" times.

Here, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the ending 1 state when the advantageous section is started, the ending 1 state is set even though the advantageous section is just started. The ending production is executed inside.

However, in the ending 1 state, part of the series of story effects described above is executed, and not all of them are executed. Specifically, the first to eighth episodes of the first to eighth episodes and the final episode are executed, but the final episode is not executed. In this case as well, basically, as in the ending 2 state, the content of the story progresses as the game period in the ending 1 state progresses.

A specific example in which a part of the series of story effects described above is executed in the ending 1 state will be described with reference to FIG. For example, in the ending preparation state, the introduction effect of the ending effect is performed. Then, when the ending 1 state is started (ART start), the ending effect is started, and the story sequentially progresses like the first episode, the second episode,... The eighth episode. Then, when the eighth episode ends, a character such as "continue" is displayed on the display device 11 to indicate that the story is not completed.

On the other hand, in the ending 2 state, when the ending 2 state is started (advantageous interval ≧1200 interval state end), the ending effect is started, and the first, second,... The story progresses. Then, when the eighth story ends, the story of the final story is developed next, and when the story of the final story ends, characters such as “THE END” are displayed on the display device 11 to indicate that the story is completed. ..

Note that the above-described effect contents of the ending effect are examples of the effect contents of the ending effect that can be executed over a plurality of times of games, and the effect contents of the ending effect are not limited to this. Any production content may be used as long as the production content has value for the player.

For example, if there is an animation or a character used as a motif of Pachi-slot 1, a special video of an animation or a special video of a character that cannot normally be seen is displayed on the display device 11 in the ending effect in the ending 2 state. It should be one. In this case, in the ending effect in the ending 1 state, the contents of these images are displayed on the display device 11 with a shorter content than the ending effect in the ending 2 state (for example, summarized, halfway or as another content). It should be one. However, instead of these, or together with these, each ending effect can be performed by the music or voice output from the speaker group 84 and the light emission mode by the LED group 85.

Further, the ending effect may be one in which the effect content proceeds regardless of the number of remaining games. For example, the time required for the unit game is temporarily set to "6 seconds" (this value is arbitrary), and the ending effect in the ending 2 state is set as a series of effects of "6 seconds x 131 times of game = 786 seconds", This series of effects is started at the timing controlled to the ending 2 state, and the ending effects in the ending 1 state are a part of the series of effects of "6 seconds x 100 games = 600 seconds". As a result, a part of the series of effects may be started at the timing controlled to the ending 1 state. By doing so, it is not necessary to advance the ending effect according to the number of games, so that it is possible to reduce the control load related to the effect. Further, in this case, when the execution of the series of effects described above ends at a timing before the end of the advantageous section, the screen at the end is displayed as it is until the end of the advantageous section. Alternatively, the series of effects described above may be started again from the beginning (or from the middle) (that is, may be executed in a loop). Further, in this case, when the advantageous section ends at the timing before the execution of the series of effects described above ends, the series of effects described above may be forcibly ended even in the middle thereof. However, the series of effects described above may be executed until the end.

Although not shown in FIG. 44, in the present embodiment, in the advantageous section, until the game period in the advantageous section becomes “1200” games (or until the state shifts to the ending 1 state). , It is decided to continue the advantageous section (for example, it is decided to continue the line battle state in the continuous lottery state of the line battle state, or the right acquisition lottery state is finished, and then shifts to the interval state. ) Every time, the display device 11 is configured to execute a suggestion effect that suggests a guideline of the period controlled in the advantageous section.

Specifically, for example, a progress bar, a map, etc. divided into 12 cells are displayed in a predetermined area in the display device 11, and one cell is displayed each time the number of games played in the advantageous period is 100 games. A suggestion effect is performed such that the display mode is changed each time. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the approximate number of game periods in the advantageous section. It should be noted that, for example, the progress bar, the map, or the like may be divided into 15 squares and the degree of exhaustion of the regulation monitoring period may be displayed. Moreover, these are examples of the display content of the suggestive effect, and the display content is not limited to this. For example, the actual number of games in the game period in the advantageous section may be displayed.

Further, the suggestive effect may be displayed only during the first game in the interval state, or may be displayed throughout the interval state (between three games). Further, it may be displayed only in a line battle state in which the advantageous section may end, or may be always displayed in each game state in the advantageous section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ending 2 state is entered, the ending effect (special effect) can be executed, and when the transition to the advantageous section is determined, the ending 1 When it is determined to shift to the state, it is possible to execute a part of the ending effect (special effect) in the ending 1 state.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the special execution, which is a part of the special effects that can be normally executed at the end of the game in the advantageous state for the player, satisfies the predetermined execution condition, , Can be executed in the early stage of the game in a state advantageous to the player. As a result, the player comes to play the game while wanting to see all the special effects, so that the player's motivation for the game can be increased and the interest of the effect can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the regulation monitoring period becomes “1500” times until 131 games have elapsed since the ending 2 state and the advantageous section ends, or from the ending 2 state to “1500” times. The ending effect (special effect) can be executed until the section ends. As a result, even when the acquisition of the game medium is restricted, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the player.

In the present embodiment, the advantageous period is controlled each time it is decided to continue the advantageous period until the game period in the advantageous period becomes “1200” games or until the ending 1 state is entered. It is possible to execute suggestive production that suggests a guide for the period of time. This makes it possible for the player to generally understand the time when the execution of the special effect starts, the time when the advantageous section ends, etc. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with appropriate information while enhancing the interest of the game. it can.

(Other example of ending control)
In the present embodiment, when, for example, 1500 G is reached after the advantageous section is started, limit processing for ending the advantageous section is executed even if the number of remaining games remains, but it is decided that the limit processing will be performed in the future. (For example, at the stage when the total value of the number of completed games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes equal to or more than the specified value), the main control board 71 sets the payout state to “ending” (for example, ending 2 state). Transition. On the other hand, even when the sub-control board 72 shifts the payout state to "ending" on the main side, the sub-control board 72 does not immediately shift the effect state on the sub side to "ending (END)", The production state is changed to "ending" with the condition as a trigger. In the following, particularly, the details of the control in which the sub control board 72 shifts the effect state to “ending” will be described. In the present embodiment, the advantageous section may include a “normal advantage section” or the like, but in this example, the “advantage section” and the “ART” will be described as being in exactly the same game state.

In this example, a main-side counter that counts on the main (main control board 71) side and a sub-side counter that counts on the sub (main control board 71) side are provided in association with the advantageous section. The main control board 71 uses the first counter to count the number of games (the number of completed games) that have passed during the advantageous period, and uses the second counter to continue the advantageous period (the number of remaining games). ) Is counted. The main control board 71 performs limit processing when the value of the first counter reaches “1500”, ends the advantageous period regardless of the value of the second counter, and sets the value of the first counter to “1500”. When the value of the second counter reaches “0” before reaching, the advantageous period ends.

On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 uses the third counter to count the number of games (the number of completed games) that have passed during the advantageous period, and uses the fourth counter to continue the advantageous period ( A game of the period (remaining game number) in which the advantageous period is continued by counting the period (the number of notified games) informed to the player of the remaining game number) and using the fifth counter. An unannounced period (the number of unannounced games (=the number of hidden additional games)) is counted. When the sub-control board 72 reports the number of hidden additional games, the sub-control board 72 adds the reported number of games and subtracts the unreported game number by the notified number of games.

Since the number of consumed games counted in both main and sub basically match, the value of the first counter on the main side and the value of the third counter on the sub side match (note that the advantageous interval If the value and "ART" do not match, the limit process is not performed on the sub side, so it is not necessary for the sub side to count the number of completed games in the advantageous section, and the number of completed games in "ART" must be counted. Therefore, the values of both counters do not completely match, but are not related to the control described below).

Further, on the sub-side, since the number of notified games and the number of remaining games that have not been notified are separately counted, the value of the second counter on the main side and the fourth counter on the sub-side are counted. Does not match, and the value of the second counter on the main side does not match the value of the fifth counter on the sub side. However, since the sum of the number of remaining games that has been notified and the number of remaining games that have not been notified matches the number of remaining games that is counted on the main side, the value of the second counter on the main side and the sub-game The sum of the value of the fourth counter and the value of the fifth counter on the side matches.

The main control board 71 controls the transition to the “ending” based on the sum of the number of completed games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section. For example, as a result of adding the number of games, the advantageous section When the total value of the number of completed games and the number of remaining games exceeds a specified value, the payout state is changed to “ending”.

On the other hand, the sub control board 72 “ends” the production state on the sub side according to the total value of the number of consumed games and the number of notified games of the advantageous section (that is, the total value excluding the number of unreported games). END)”. Here, the sub control board 72 shifts the effect state to “ending” by referring to, for example, a sub_ending transition lottery table (not shown).

For example, the sub_ending transition lottery table defines a total value of the number of consumed games and the number of notified games as a reference item, and a lottery result (non-winning lottery) indicating whether or not to shift to the “ending” for each total value. Information on the lottery value for winning is defined. According to such a sub_ending transition lottery table, for example, when the total value of the number of consumed games and the number of notified games is “1000 to 1199G”, there is a probability of 24576/32768 to “ending”. Non-win for the transfer lottery, and winning for the transfer lottery to the "ending" with a probability of 8192/32768.

Further, for example, the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to “ending” with a higher probability as the sum of the number of consumed games and the number of notified games in the advantageous section increases. Then, when the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to "ending", the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect stage to a dedicated "ending stage" and maintains the "ending stage" until the advantageous section ends. If the payout state on the main side has not transitioned to "ending", it is not necessary to perform the lottery to shift to "ending" on the sub side. Therefore, the sub control board 72 sets the payout state on the main side. Only when the number shifts to "ending" (that is, when the sum of the number of games played in the advantageous section and the number of remaining games in the counter managed by the main side exceeds the specified value) The lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to shift the state to “ending”.

In this way, by shifting to the special effect stage when shifting to "ending", the player can know in advance that the limit process will be performed. Since it is determined that the limit process will be performed after shifting to the "ending stage", it is meaningless to perform the additional notification effect of the number of games. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 does not perform the additional notification effect after shifting to the “ending stage”.

In addition, the transition to the "ending stage" is performed with a higher probability as the summed value on the sub side (excluding the number of uninformed games) increases while the summed value on the main side reaches or exceeds the specified value. Therefore, the probability of transition to the "ending stage" is higher as the number of additional games (unannounced games) held unannounced is higher, and the number of additional games held unannounced is higher. It has a low probability.

After the transition to the "ending stage", in principle, the production of the "ending stage" is continued until the end of the advantageous section, and the production of the "ending stage" is finished in the game in which the advantageous section ends, and the game ends. Time or at the start of the next game, the stage is shifted to the production stage corresponding to the normal section.

Also, while staying at the "ending stage", it is desirable to maintain the "ending stage" because there is no change in the situation where the limit process is still performed soon even if the bonus is activated. Here, in the game immediately before the end of the advantageous period (for example, the game in which the value of the first counter is “1499”), a bonus such as BB1 to BB4 for winning a predetermined number of games is won and the bonus is activated. In this case, the first counter reaches "1500" during the bonus operation, the limit process is performed, and the advantageous period ends. At this time, if the "ending stage" is ended and the production stage is changed to another production stage (the production stage corresponding to the normal section or the production stage in bonus operation) even during the bonus operation in which the payout is increased. , There is a risk of giving the player a feeling of strangeness. Therefore, when the advantageous period ends due to the limit process during the bonus operation, the sub control board 72 continues the effect stage as the "ending stage" until the bonus ends, and at the end of the bonus (the advantageous period It is also possible to shift to the production stage corresponding to the normal section (by performing an end notification, displaying a slip-in prevention, etc.).

Furthermore, even when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination immediately before the limit process is activated such as the value of the first counter is “1498” to “1500” and the bonus combination is carried over without winning, the sub-control board 72 It is preferable to perform a delay process for ending the ending state by continuing the “ending stage”, waiting for the end of the bonus that has been activated by the bonus role being carried over, and ending the “ending stage”. In this case, since the advantageous section ends due to the limit process, and the "ending stage" is temporarily continued even in a situation (normal section) in which the pushing order and the like are not notified, the sub control board 72 In such an "ending stage" of the non-advantageous section, it is preferable to make the player different from the "ending stage" in the advantageous section so as to clearly indicate to the player that the machine is not in failure. Further, the sub-control board 72, in the "ending stage" of the non-advantageous section, wins a bonus role in a game in which a bonus role can be won (a game in which a winning role of a bonus role such as replay is not won). It is also possible to notify the player of the situation in an easy-to-understand manner by notifying that the situation is urgent, or that the "ending stage" has ended after the bonus function has ended and the bonus function has ended. When the advantageous section ends during the bonus operation due to the limit processing, or when the limit processing is likely to be performed during the bonus operation, the sub control board 72 is different from the other bonus operation. The effect (for example, an effect that celebrates a large number of acquisitions or an effect that includes some advantageous information such as setting suggestion information) may be performed at the start, operation, or end of the bonus.

In addition, when the advantageous section ends, the main control board 71 performs a game operation (for example, a medal insertion operation for the next game or an automatic re-insertion operation by a re-game operation for a predetermined time after the stop of all reels). It is also possible to perform freeze processing at the end of the advantageous section that does not accept (for example). At this time, the sub-control board 72 uses the freeze time at the end of the advantageous section to display information about the advantageous section such as the number of medals, the number of games played, or the number of sets acquired during the advantageous section. It is also possible to display, and it is also possible to display the sticking-in prevention display in accordance with these. Further, as described above, when the end of the advantageous section due to the limit processing occurs during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 causes a freeze at the end of the advantageous section due to the limit processing so as not to prevent the bonus from being digested. Instead, the freeze at the end of the advantageous section may be performed at the end of the bonus. It should be noted that, regardless of the end of the advantageous section, a predetermined time is set at the end of the bonus for the purpose of securing a display time for displaying information about the advantageous section such as the number of medals acquired during the advantageous section at the end of the bonus. If the freeze of the advantageous section occurs during the bonus operation, the freeze at the end of the advantageous section is not performed at the end of the advantageous section or at the end of the bonus, and the main control board 71 It is also possible that only the freeze at the end of the bonus is performed at the end of the bonus, and during the freeze at the end of the bonus, the sub-control board 72 displays information regarding the advantageous section, the intrusion prevention display, and the like. By suppressing a plurality of game delays caused by freezes, it is possible to prevent the game tempo from becoming worse. The contents described so far may be applied even when the advantageous section ends during the bonus operation by the limit process of another example described later, and the specification designer may change the above depending on the type of the limiter to be activated. Whether the process is applied or not applied can be arbitrarily determined in consideration of the flow of the effect.

(Variable limiter)
Up to this point, the condition for executing the limit process for ending the advantageous period has been described on the premise that the limit process execution condition is constant, for example, 1500 G has been reached after the advantageous period was started. However, the execution condition of the limit process by the main control board 71 does not necessarily have to be constant, and if the advantageous section is not continued beyond at least the upper limit value (for example, 1500 G from the start of the advantageous section), the excessive gambling property is sufficiently high. The effect of suppressing can be exhibited. Therefore, when the first counter (the number of consumed games) satisfies a predetermined ending condition, the main control board 71 sets the advantageous section before the first counter (the number of consumed games) exceeds the upper limit value. It is also possible to perform limit processing to be ended.

For example, in a pachi-slot of a set number management type in which "ART" is fixed at 50 G per set, due to a "normal advantageous period" period, a bonus during "ART", etc., a halfway timing with respect to the number of games in one set ( For example, the "ART" of the current set may end when the remaining upper limit value is 20G (1480G). In such a case, the entire "ART" of the next set cannot be performed (50G), and the limit process is performed during the set. Even if the "ART" of the next set is started, if it is forcibly ended immediately, the player may feel dissatisfied. Therefore, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing of the advantageous section at the end of the “ART” of the current set, which has a good break even before the upper limit is reached. As a result, the advantageous section (“ART”) is surely ended at a timing with a good break, so that the possibility that the player feels unsatisfied can be reduced.

Further, depending on the pachi-slot, it is conceivable to perform a predetermined ending control when performing the limit processing, so a case of performing such ending control will also be described. For example, in a pachi-slot of a set number management type in which "ART" is fixed at 50 G per set, the total value of the number of completed games and the number of remaining games from the start of the advantageous period is in the range of 1400 to 1450 G (a predetermined end condition is satisfied). When the setting range) is reached, the main control board 71 sets an advantageous section (“ART”) of 50G as one set for ending regardless of the number of remaining undigested sets, and the one set for ending is set. The limit process may be executed when the predetermined end condition is satisfied when the end is completed, and the advantageous section may be ended. That is, the limit process is reserved at the time of 1400 to 1450G from the start of the advantageous section and is executed at 1450 to 1500G. By allowing the execution timing of the limit process to have a certain range in this way, it is possible to appropriately suppress gambling while preventing the advantageous section from ending at an unnatural timing and making the player feel uncomfortable. .. Also, even if the number of games per "ART" set is fixed, the timing of deciding one set for ending is due to the addition of bonus operation and the addition of specialization state that is different from the basic set. Since it is not necessarily exactly 1400 games which is a multiple of 50, it is preferable to give a range to the setting range of the predetermined ending condition (the period during which the limit process can be reserved).

Note that, as will be described later, the limit process can be performed not only on the number of games but also on the basis of the difference in the number of medals that the player has acquired during the advantageous section and the number of times the navigation has occurred (a number limiter, a payout number limiter described later, Navi count limiter). The above description of the variable limiter can be applied regardless of the type of limit processing. That is, the main control board 71 does not limit the execution timing of the limit process to the case where the limit process activation counters (game number counter, payout number counter, navigation number counter, etc.) reach the limiter activation threshold (upper limit value). If a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the limit process may be performed before the limiter activation threshold is reached. Note that the predetermined end condition is arbitrary, but as an example, if the "ART" of the set number management type starts the "ART" of the next set, the limiter is activated during the "ART" of the next set. It is possible to adopt that it is predicted that it will happen (in Pachi-slot, the increase amount of medals per game in "ART" and the winning probability of each hand can be grasped from the design specifications. Even if a number limiter, a payout number limiter, or a navigation number limiter, which will be described later, is used, it can be predicted that the limiter will be activated during the "ART" of the next set).

The technical ideas regarding this point are summarized as follows.
The second numerical value (remaining number of games that can continue the advantageous period, difference number, number of times of navigation) indicating the remaining period in which the specific game state (advantageous period) can be continued is set as the end threshold value (remaining 0 games, 0 sheets, 0 times) When it reaches, the specific game state is ended, and at least the first numerical value (the number of completed games, etc.) counted by the counting means is a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous interval 1500 game digestion in which limit processing is executed). Alternatively, as in the modified example, when the execution timing of the limit process is allowed to have a range, when the set number of games from 1450 to 1500 is reached, etc.), the value of the second numerical value is the end value. Specific state ending means (main control board 71) for ending the specific game state even when the threshold value is not reached.
Note that the specific state ending means collectively describes both the process of ending the advantageous period based on the fact that the right of the advantageous period such as "ART" has become zero and the case of ending the advantageous period by the limit process. The program may be provided as another process.

In the present embodiment, in the lottery using the various data tables described above (including those not shown) (including the lottery not particularly described as the lottery using the table), the random number circuit 110 is used. Random number random number values (random number values for production) extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 255) by the random number registers 2 to 7 are sequentially subtracted by the specified lottery value, and the result of the subtraction is negative. Internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not (whether a so-called “carriage” has occurred). That is, the lottery value is subtracted from the lottery random number to determine whether or not the lottery is won. However, the lottery method is not limited to this, and the lottery value is added to the extracted random number for lottery, and the addition result is It may be determined whether or not the number exceeds 256 (whether or not a so-called "overflow" has occurred), and the winning/non-winning may be determined.

<Notification function by control on the main side>
In the conventional pachi-slot, the sub-(sub-control board 72) side determines whether or not to inform the player of advantageous stop operation information (pushing order, etc.). However, since the presence or absence of this notification affects the profit of the player (so-called payout), in recent years, the main (main control board 71) side that manages the profit of the player is required to control. .. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the information display 6 controlled on the main side is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying the information of the stop operation, and by the control on the main side, A function of notifying (instructing) the information of the reel stop operation is provided.

Here, in FIG. 45, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the correspondence between each gaming state controlled on the main side, the internal winning combination, and the navigation data is shown. Note that the navigation data “1” to “6” shown in FIG. 45 represent the numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor as well as the content of notification of the stop operation information. Further, the navigation data “0” shown in FIG. 45 represents that the information of the stop operation is not notified. Further, in FIG. 45, only the push order small combination and the push order replay are described. However, for internal winning combinations other than the push order small combination and the push order replay, the navigation data is basically “0”.

In each gaming state of the non-advantageous section, no matter which internal winning combination shown in FIG. 45 is determined, the navigation data "0" is set and the information of the stop operation is not notified. It should be noted that when the navigation data “0” is set, in the present embodiment, no numerical value is displayed on the instruction monitor, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the numerical value “0” is displayed on the instruction monitor. You may do it. Further, when the navigation data “0” is set, in the present embodiment, the information corresponding to this is not transmitted to the sub side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to this is transmitted to the sub side. You may do so.

In the bonus non-winning state and the inter-flag state of the normal advantageous section, when the internal winning combination of "F_upper left bell 1" or "F_middle left bell 1" is determined, the navigation data "1" is set. It The navigation data "1" corresponds to "bat order 1". If the internal winning combination of either "F_upper left bell 2" or "F_middle left bell 2" is determined, the navigation data "2" is set. The navigation data “2” corresponds to “bat order 2”.

When the internal winning combination of any one of "F_upper middle bell 1", "F_middle bell 1" and "F_lower middle bell 1" is determined, the navigation data "3" is set. The navigation data "3" corresponds to "bat order 3". Further, when the internal winning combination of any one of "F_upper middle bell 2", "F_middle bell 2" and "F_lower middle bell 2" is determined, the navigation data "4" is set. The navigation data "4" corresponds to "bat order 4".

In addition, "F_upper right right bell 1", "F_upper right left bell 2", "F_middle right left bell 1", "F_middle right left bell 2", "F_lower right right bell 1", and "F_lower right left bell 2". If any of the internal winning combinations is determined, the navigation data “5” is set. The navigation data "5" corresponds to "bat order 5". Also, “F_upper right middle bell 1”, “F_upper right middle bell 2”, “F_middle right middle bell 1”, “F_middle right middle bell 2”, “F_lower right middle bell 1”, and “F_ If any of the internal winning combinations of the lower right bell 2” is determined, and if any of the internal winning combinations are determined, the navigation data “6” is set. The navigation data "6" corresponds to "bat order 6".

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, when the internal winning combination of either “F_upper left bell 1” or “F_upper left bell 2” is determined, if “batt order 1” or “batt order 2”, Since the push order is correct, the navigation data can be common navigation data. However, in the present embodiment, due to the structure of the internal winning combination, the push order small combination is originally set as a push order of 6 choices. In order not to cause a feeling of strangeness, the navigation data “1” is set when the internal winning combination of “F_upper left bell 1” is determined, and the internal winning combination of “F_upper left bell 2” is determined. In this case, the navigation data "2" is set. The same applies to other push-order small roles.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state and the inter-flag state of the normal advantageous section, when any internal winning combination of the push-order replay is determined, the navigation data “0” is set. That is, in the bonus non-winning state and the inter-flag state of the normal advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order replay is not performed. In addition, in the bonus state of the normal advantageous section, when any internal winning combination of the push order small combination is determined, the navigation data “0” is set. That is, in the bonus state of the normal advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is not performed.

In each gaming state of the advantageous section, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 replay 1" or "F_RT1 replay 1" is determined, the navigation data "1" is set. The navigation data "1" corresponds to "bat order 1". In addition, when the internal winning combination of “Replay 1 in F_RT2” is determined and it is determined that the navigation data “1” is set by the lottery (1/2 probability), the navigation data “ 1” is set. The mode in which the navigation data “1” is set in the small push order combination (non-bonus state between bonus states and state between flags) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_1" is determined, the navigation data "1" is set.

When the internal winning combination of either “F_RT0 replay 2” or “F_RT1 replay 2” is determined, the navigation data “2” is set. The navigation data “2” corresponds to “bat order 2”. Also, when the internal winning combination of “Replay 1 in F_RT2” is determined and it is determined that the navigation data “2” is set by lottery (1/2 probability), the navigation data “ 2” is set. The mode in which the navigation data "2" is set in the small push order combination (non-winning bonus state and state between flags) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_2" is determined, the navigation data "2" is set.

If the internal winning combination of either “F_RT0 replay 3” or “F_RT1 replay 3” is determined, the navigation data “3” is set. The navigation data "3" corresponds to "bat order 3". In addition, when the internal winning combination of “Replay 2 in F_RT2” is determined and it is determined that the navigation data “3” is set by the lottery (1/2 probability), the navigation data “ 3” is set. The mode in which the navigation data "3" is set in the small push order combination (non-winning bonus state and inter-flag state) is the same as that in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_3" is determined, the navigation data "3" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 replay 4" or "F_RT1 replay 4" is determined, the navigation data "4" is set. The navigation data "4" corresponds to "bat order 4". Also, when the internal winning combination of “Replay 2 in F_RT2” is determined and it is determined that the navigation data “4” is set by the lottery (1/2 probability), the navigation data “ 4” is set. The mode in which the navigation data “4” is set in the small push order combination (non-winning bonus state and inter-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantage section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_4" is determined, the navigation data "4" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 replay 5" or "F_RT1 replay 5" is determined, the navigation data "5" is set. The navigation data "5" corresponds to "bat order 5". Also, when the internal winning combination of “F_RT2 Replay 3” is determined and it is determined that the navigation data “5” is set by lottery (1/2 probability), the navigation data “ 5” is set. The mode in which the navigation data “5” is set in the small push order combination (non-winning bonus state and inter-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantage section. In addition, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of “F_JAC1_5” is determined, the navigation data “5” is set.

If the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 replay 6" or "F_RT1 replay 6" is determined, the navigation data "6" is set. The navigation data "6" corresponds to "bat order 6". Also, when the internal winning combination of “F_RT2 Replay 3” is determined and it is determined that the navigation data “6” is set by lottery (1/2 probability), the navigation data “ 6” is set. The mode in which the navigation data “6” is set in the small push order combination (non-winning bonus state and inter-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantage section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_6" is determined, the navigation data "6" is set.

As described above, in this embodiment, the main (main control board 71) side informs the information of the reel stop operation by displaying the numerical values of “1” to “6” on the instruction monitor. Further, the numerical values of "1" to "6" displayed on the instruction monitor uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation notified by each.

The numbers "1" to "6" notified on the main side (instruction monitor) uniquely correspond to the content of the stop operation to be notified, but all players are clear based on the values. It is not always possible to understand the content of the notification. For example, there is a possibility that the player may not be able to comprehend the content of the notification just by displaying the numerical value "6" on the instruction monitor on the main side.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the notification on the main side, information on the stop operation of the stop button is also notified on the sub side. Specifically, the display device 11 (the projector mechanism 211 and the display unit 212) controlled on the sub side is used to notify the information regarding the stop operation by the control on the sub side.

For example, when notifying the pressing order "middle, left, right" (batting order 3), the main side displays the numerical value "3" on the instruction monitor, and the sub side displays the middle reel 3C in the display screen of the display device 11. The numerical value "1" is displayed above, the numerical value "2" is displayed above the left reel 3L, and the numerical value "3" is displayed above the right reel 3R. With this display, the pressing order is "middle, left, Notify that the order is “right”.

The timing of notification on the main side can be set to any timing as long as it is at least one game period for notification. For example, the main side may be notified at the timing when the player's start operation is detected (accepted), the main side may be notified at the start of rotation of the reel, or the first stop operation to the third stop operation. The main side may be notified at the timing when any one of the stop operations is detected. On the other hand, it is preferable that the sub-side informs at least before the first stop operation. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in the game of notifying the information of the stop operation during the advantageous section, after the internal lottery process (see S204 of FIG. 56 described later), the reel stop control process (FIG. 56 described later). Before S213) is started, a command including this navigation data (or information corresponding thereto) as a parameter is transmitted from the main (main control board 71) side to the sub (sub control board 72) side. You can do this. In this case, an existing command (for example, a start command or a reel rotation start command) may include a parameter of the navigation data (or information corresponding thereto), or the navigation data (or equivalent information) may be included. Information) to send a dedicated command. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify the information of the stop operation on both the instruction monitor on the main side and the display device 11 on the sub side.

Further, as another method, in the game of notifying the information of the stop operation during the advantageous section, as described above, as the information for identifying the internal winning combination, the winning combination number may be transmitted from the main side to the sub side. Good. According to this method, the sub side can specify the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player without sending information corresponding to the navigation data, so that the amount of data to be transmitted can be reduced.

<Description of operation of main control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 90 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 84.

[Process at power-on (reset interrupt)]
First, the power-on (reset interrupt) process of the pachi-slot 1 performed by the control of the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing at power-on (reset interrupt). In the power-on (reset interrupt) process shown in FIG. 46, when the power management circuit 93 detects that the supply of the power supply voltage to the microprocessor 91 is started, the reset signal is sent to the microprocessor 91 “. It is output to the "XSRST" terminal, and after a delay operation in the security mode, it is executed based on an interrupt request signal output from the interrupt controller 112 of the microprocessor 91 to the main CPU 101.

First, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing of the timer circuit 113 (PTC) (S1). In this process, the main CPU 101 initializes the timer circuit 113. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets a frequency division ratio in a timer prescaler register (not shown), sets interrupts in a timer control register (not shown), and sets a timer counter (not shown). Set the initial count value.

Next, the main CPU 101 initializes the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1) for the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200, and the second serial communication circuit 115 (SCU2) for the second interface board. Initialization processing is performed (S2). Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing of the random number circuit 110 (RDG) (S3). Next, the main CPU 101 conducts a write test of the main RAM 103 (S4).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the writing to the main RAM 103 is normally performed as a result of the writing test (S5).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S5 that the writing to the main RAM 103 was not normally performed (NO in S5), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S13 described below. On the other hand, in S5, when the main CPU 101 determines that writing to the main RAM 103 is normally performed (YES in S5), the main CPU 101 determines the state of the timer control register (not shown) of the timer circuit 113. Is acquired (S6).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the timing at which the interrupt processing occurs based on the obtained state of the timer control register (S7). Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines, based on the acquired state of the timer control register, whether or not 1.1172 ms has elapsed after the timer count was started.

In this embodiment, when the timer time of 1.1172 ms is set by the initialization process of the timer circuit 113 in S2, the counting process of the CPU built-in timer is started. After that, the status of the timer circuit 113 can be obtained by reading the information in the timer control register (not shown). In the present embodiment, the control register for the timer has a bit (discrimination bit) capable of discriminating (reference) whether or not the current state is the timing at which the interrupt processing occurs (whether or not the timer is in the interrupt state). ) Is provided.

Therefore, in the process of S6, the main CPU 101 reads information from the timer control register (not shown), and in the process of S7, the main CPU 101 turns on/off the discrimination bit in the timer control register ( By referring to "1"/"0"), it is determined whether or not the current state is the timing at which interrupt processing occurs. When 1.1172 ms have elapsed from the start of counting by the timer circuit 113 (when the count value of the timer circuit 113 is 0), the determination bit is turned on.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S7 that the current state is not the timing at which the interrupt process occurs (NO in S7), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S6 and repeats the processes of S6 and subsequent steps.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S7 that the current state is the timing at which the interrupt processing occurs (YES in S7), the main CPU 101 sets the command transmission start timer (S8). The command transmission start timer is a timer for managing a startup delay period (see FIG. 85 described later) which will be described later. The period from when the command transmission start timer is set to 0 is set by the main control circuit 90 ( Command data is not transmitted from the main control board 71) to the sub control circuit 200 (sub control board 72) (see FIG. 80 described later). As a result, when the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on, the time required for the activation control of the sub CPU 201 (the time until the command can be received) is secured. That is, by setting the command transmission start timer, the transmission of communication data (command data) by the communication data transmission process is delayed for a period corresponding to this. In the present embodiment, in S8, "21801" (21801 x 1.1172 ms = about 24.3561 seconds) is set as the value of the command transmission start timer. However, the value of the command transmission start timer can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the sub control circuit 200 mounted at the same time.

The command transmission start timer is a software timer allocated in 2 bytes in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103, and is arranged at an address that is not erased by the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum check process (out of regulation) (S9). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the sum check process of the main RAM 103, and the work of this process is performed in the non-regular work area (see FIG. 11C) in the main RAM 103. The program used in the sum check process is stored in the non-regulated area in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 11B). The details of the sum check process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55 described later.

After the processing of S9, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (S10).

In S10, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (YES in S10), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S15 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S10 that the setting key type switch 54 is not in the on state (NO in S10), the main CPU 101 determines the sum check determination based on the result of the sum check process in S9. It is determined whether or not the result is normal (S11).

In S11, when the main CPU 101 determines that the sum check determination result is not normal (when S11 is NO determination), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S13 described below. On the other hand, in S11, when the main CPU 101 determines that the sum check determination result is normal (YES in S11), the main CPU 101 performs game return processing (S12). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of returning the game state to the state before the detection of the power failure. The details of the game return processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 47 described later.

If NO is determined in S5 or S11, the main CPU 101 displays the character string "88" meaning the occurrence of an error on the information display 6 (7-segment LED display) (S13). After that, the main CPU 101 repeats the WDT clearing process (S14).

Here, returning to the process of S10 again, when the determination of S10 is YES, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change confirmation process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a process of generating and storing a setting change command at the start of setting change. The details of the setting change confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S16). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address "at the time of RAM abnormality or setting change start" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of initialization start, and the game is started from the start address. The information up to the final address in the RAM area for use is erased (cleared). Then, after the processing of S16, the main CPU 101 starts the main processing described later (see FIG. 56 described later).

[Game return processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the game return processing performed in S12 during the power-on (reset interrupt) processing (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game return processing.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the stack pointer at the time of power failure in the stack pointer (SP) (S21). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the command transmission start timer has counted up (S22). In S22, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer has not counted up (when S22 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S22.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S22 that the command transmission start timer has counted up (in the case of YES determination in S22), the main CPU 101 determines that the on-edge data before the interrupt processing of the input port and the current The set on-edge data is cleared (turned off) (S23). Next, the main CPU 101 reads the backup data of the output port from the output port backup storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 and sets it in the output port (S24). Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data of the input port, and saves the data in the data storage area (input port storage area 1 and input port storage area 2) of the current input port and before the interrupt processing (S25). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the rotating cylinder control data storage area (S26). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of reels to be checked (“3” in this embodiment) (S27).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires reel control management information (data relating to fluctuation control of the display row at the time of power interruption) of a predetermined reel based on the address of the set spinning drum control data storage area (S28). The reel control management information (variation control management information on the display row) is information regarding the control state (rotational state) of each reel, and is backed up and saved when the power is cut off.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel control management information is information corresponding to the rotation status during reel acceleration, constant speed waiting, or constant speed (S29).

In S29, when the main CPU 101 determines that the condition of S29 is not satisfied (NO in S29), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S32 described below. On the other hand, in S29, when the main CPU 101 determines that the condition of S29 is satisfied (YES in S29), the main CPU 101 clears the drum control data (reel control management information) (S30). By this processing, after the game is returned, the reel rotation control is started from the acceleration processing. Next, the main CPU 101 sets the reel operation timing value (execution start timing “1” of the spinning cylinder control data) (S31). When the reel operation timing is set to "1", the excitation change timing comes within the reel control processing (see S903 in FIG. 79, which will be described later), so the main CPU 101 accelerates the reel rotation control. Start from.

After the processing of S31 or when the determination of S29 is NO, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reels (S32). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the number of reels after subtraction is "0" (S33).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S33 that the value of the number of reels after subtraction is not "0" (NO in S33), the main CPU 101 changes the reel to be checked and shifts the processing to S28. The process is returned and the processes from S28 are repeated.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S33 that the value of the number of reels after subtraction is "0" (YES in S33), the main CPU 101 performs the RAM initialization process (S34). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address "at power recovery" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and from the start address to the end of the game RAM area. Erase (clear) the information up to the address.

Next, the main CPU 101 restores the data of all the registers saved at the time of the power failure detection to all the registers (S35). Then, after the processing of S35, the main CPU 101 ends the game return processing, and returns the processing to the processing at the time of power failure detection.

In the present embodiment, the game return processing is performed as described above. In the game return processing of the present embodiment, as described above, the input/output state of each port at the time of power failure is secured at the time of power recovery, and when the reel is rotating at the time of power failure, reel control management at power recovery The processing required to acquire the information and start the re-rotation of the reel is also performed (see the processing of S26 to S33). Therefore, in this embodiment, the reel re-rotation control can be stably performed even when the power is restored from the power interruption during the rotation of the spinning drum, and the player does not feel uncomfortable.

[Setting change confirmation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the setting change confirmation process performed in S15 during the power-on (reset interrupt) process (see FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting change confirmation process. In addition, when the setting key type switch 54 is turned on after the power of the gaming machine is turned on (that is, in the case of “setting confirmation” for confirming the current setting value), this setting change confirmation is performed from S44 described later. The processing may be started.

First, the main CPU 101 initializes the non-specified RAM area in the main RAM 103 (S41). Next, the main CPU 101 executes one interrupt waiting process (S42). In this process, when the command transmission start timer is counting up, the non-operation command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process (see FIG. 80) described later. If the command transmission start timer has not counted up, neither command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. Therefore, if the command transmission start timer has not counted up, this process may be omitted. May be.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S43). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address "at the time of RAM abnormality or setting change start" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of initialization start, and the game is started from the start address. The information up to the final address in the RAM area for use is erased (cleared).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting key type switch 54 is in the on state (S44). A setting key (not shown) inserted into the setting key type switch 54 is an operation key for setting the set values (settings 1 to 6) of the pachi-slot 1. When the setting key is turned on, the setting key is set. The key-type switch 54 is turned on.

In S44, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is not in the ON state (NO in S44), the main CPU 101 terminates the setting change confirmation process and powers on the process (reset interrupt). ) Step S16 of the time processing (see FIG. 46) is performed. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S44 that the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (YES in S44), the main CPU 101 performs the medal acceptance prohibition process (S45). By this processing, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven, and the inserted medal is ejected from the medal payout opening 24 (see FIG. 2).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the setting change start or setting confirmation start information (005H: first value) in the L register, and performs the setting storage command (setting change/setting confirmation start) generation/storage processing (S46). .. In this process, the main CPU 101 generates setting change command data (first command data) transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 at the start of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, and outputs the command data. It is saved in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Details of the setting change command generation/storing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 described later. The setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation start) stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the error count relay to the on state (S47). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment display setting process of the set value (S48). By this processing, the current set value can be displayed on the 7-segment LED in the information display 6.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines which of the setting change and the setting confirmation has been performed (S49). In S49, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting has not been changed (the setting has been confirmed) (NO in S49), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S54 described below.

On the other hand, in S49, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting has been changed (the setting has not been confirmed) (YES in S49), the main CPU 101 determines whether the reset switch 76 is in the ON state. It is determined whether or not (S50).

In S50, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reset switch 76 is in the ON state (YES in S50), the main CPU 101 updates the set value (S51). That is, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the set value within the range of “1” to “6” each time the reset switch 76 is operated. After the processing of S51, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S48 and repeats the processing of S48 and thereafter. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S50 that the reset switch 76 is not in the on state (NO in S50), the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 79 is in the on state (S52). ..

In S52, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 79 is not in the ON state (NO in S52), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S48 and repeats the processes from S48. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S52 that the start switch 79 is in the ON state (YES in S52), the main CPU 101 sets the setting value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The value is stored (S53).

If the determination in S49 is NO or after the processing in S53, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 54 is in the off state (S54).

In S54, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is not in the OFF state (NO in S54), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S54. On the other hand, in S54, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is in the off state (YES in S54), the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change or the setting confirmation is performed. Is determined (S55).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S55 that the setting has not been changed (the setting has been confirmed) (NO in S55), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S57 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S55 that the setting has been changed (the setting has not been confirmed) (YES in S55), the main CPU 101 performs the RAM initialization process (S56). .. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address (at the end of setting change) (not shown) in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C (the address next to the setting value storage area) as the start address for initialization. The information from the top address to the last address of the game RAM area is erased (cleared).

After the processing of S56 or when the determination of S55 is NO, the main CPU 101 sets information (004H: second value) of the setting change end or the setting confirmation end in the L register, and the setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation end). ) Is generated and stored (S57). In this processing, the main CPU 101 generates setting change command data (second command data) transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 at the end of the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, and outputs the command data. It is saved in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Details of the setting change command generation/storing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 described later. Further, the setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation end) stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by a communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S57, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change confirmation processing, and moves the processing to the processing of S16 of the power-on (reset interrupt) processing (see FIG. 46).

[Setting change command generation and storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the setting change command generation/storing process performed in S46 and S57 in the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) will be described. Note that FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting change command generation/storage process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets information of set values (1 to 6) in the E register (S61). Next, the main CPU 101 sets RT state information in the C register (S62). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the command type information (02H) of the setting change command in the A register (S63).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes communication data storage processing (S64). In this processing, the main CPU 101 sets the information set in each register in S61 to S63 and the information set in the L register in S46 or S58 (see FIG. 48) (setting change start/setting change end/setting change status/ Setting confirmation start/setting confirmation end) is used to generate setting change command data, and the generated command data is stored in the communication data storage area. The details of the communication data storage processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S64, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change command generation/storage processing. When ending the setting change command generation/storing process performed in S46 of the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48), the main CPU 101 executes the process after the process of S64 in the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48). The process moves to S47. Further, when ending the setting change command generation/storage processing performed in S57 during the setting change confirmation processing (see FIG. 48), the main CPU 101 ends the setting change command generation/storage processing after the processing of S64, and sets The change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) also ends.

[Communication data storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, for example, the communication data storage processing performed in S64 of the setting change command generation storage processing (see FIG. 49) will be described. The communication data storage process is executed not only when the setting change command is generated, but also when another command is generated. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of communication data storage processing.

First, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the A register as communication command type data in a communication data temporary storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103 (S71). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the H register and the L register in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 as the parameters 1 and 2 of the communication command, respectively (S72).

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the D register and the E register in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 as the parameters 3 and 4 of the communication command, respectively (S73). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the B register and the C register in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 as the parameter 5 and the RT state data of the communication command, respectively (S74).

Next, the main CPU 101 generates BCC data (sum value) of the communication command from the data values set in the A register to the L register (S75). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the generated BCC data in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 (S76).

After the processing of S76, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a free space in the communication data storage area in the main RAM 103 (S77). In this embodiment, a maximum of 9 command data can be stored in the communication data storage area.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S77 that there is no free space in the communication data storage area (NO in S77), the main CPU 101 terminates the communication data storage processing, and, for example, the setting change command generation storage processing ( (See FIG. 49) also ends.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S77 that there is a free space in the communication data storage area (when YES is determined in S77), the main CPU 101 stores the communication data in the temporary storage area for communication data by the processing of S71 to S76 described above. The respective data are stored (registered) in the communication data storage area as communication data (command data) (S78).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes communication data pointer update processing (S79). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a process of updating the communication data pointer indicating the storage address of the communication data in the communication data storage area. The details of the communication data pointer update processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 51 described later.

Then, after the processing of S79, the main CPU 101 ends the communication data storage processing, and also ends the setting change command generation storage processing (see FIG. 49), for example.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when one packet (8 bytes) of communication data (command data) is created, various parameters are transferred from the register and stored in the communication data temporary storage area (communication buffer). In such a method of creating command data, the data stored in each register at the time of command generation is directly stored in the communication data temporary storage area as various parameters of the command data. Therefore, when command data including an unused parameter is created, the value of the unused parameter becomes an indefinite value every time it is created. This makes it difficult to analyze the communication data and suppress fraudulent acts such as goto, and since it is not necessary to add unnecessary goto countermeasure processing, the program of the main control circuit 90 by adding the goto countermeasure processing is not necessary. It is possible to suppress pressure on the capacity.

[Communication data pointer update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the communication data pointer updating process performed in S79 in the communication data storing process (see FIG. 50) will be described. Note that FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the communication data pointer update processing.

First, the main CPU 101 acquires the value of the communication data pointer currently set (S81).

Next, the main CPU 101 adds and updates the value of the communication data pointer for one packet (8 bytes) (S82). In this process, if the value of the updated communication data pointer is equal to or larger than the upper limit size of the communication data storage area, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the updated communication data pointer to "0", As a result, all command data stored in the communication data storage area is invalidated (the same state as the discarded state).

In this embodiment, the amount of data (one packet) transmitted in one transmission operation is 8 bytes. That is, in this embodiment, one command data can be transmitted by one transmission operation. Further, in the present embodiment, since a maximum of 9 command data can be stored in the communication data storage area, the upper limit size of the communication data storage area is 72 bytes (=8 bytes×9). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the range of the communication data pointer is set to "0" to "71", and the value of the communication data pointer after updating (when the communication data pointer is updated by +8) is "71 ( Upper limit value)”, the value of the updated communication data pointer is set to “0” (return the communication data storage address to the start address) and store the communication data. Invalidates all command data stored in the area (sets the same state as the discarded state). When the value of the communication data pointer is set to "0", the next time command data is stored in the communication data storage area, the command data is stored from the start address of the communication data storage area, so the command data is stored before that. The new command data will be overwritten with the new command data. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to initialize (clear) the communication data storage area when the value of the communication data pointer exceeds "71 (upper limit value)".

Then, after the processing of S82, the main CPU 101 finishes the communication data pointer updating processing and also finishes the communication data storing processing (see FIG. 50).

[Disconnect (external) processing]
Next, the power-off (external) processing of the pachi-slot 1 performed by the control of the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process at the time of power failure (external). In the power interruption (external) process shown in FIG. 52, when the power management circuit 93 detects a decrease (power interruption) in the power supply voltage supplied to the microprocessor 91, an interruption detection signal is sent to the microprocessor 91. Is output to the "XINT" terminal of the microprocessor 91, whereby the interrupt request signal output from the interrupt controller 112 of the microprocessor 91 to the main CPU 101 is executed.

First, the main CPU 101 saves the data set in all the registers (S91). Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data set in the power failure detection port (S92).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection port is on (S93).

In S93, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure detection port is not in the ON state (NO in S93), the main CPU 101 sets the interrupt process permission (S94). Then, after the processing of S94, the main CPU 101 ends the power-off (external) processing. It should be noted that these processes performed when S93 is NO determination correspond to the process of the countermeasure against the instantaneous power failure that occurs when the power management circuit 93 momentarily detects the power interruption.

On the other hand, in S93, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure detection port is in the on state (YES in S93), the main CPU 101 sets medal insertion impossible and stops the hopper device 51. (S95).

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the currently set stack pointer (SP) value in the stack area of the game RAM area in the main RAM 103 (S96).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a checksum generation process for the main RAM 103 (S97). It should be noted that this processing is performed in the non-regular work area (see FIG. 11C) in the main RAM 103. The program used in this checksum generation process is stored in the non-regulated area in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 11B). The details of the checksum generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets access prohibition to the main RAM 103 (S98). After the processing of S98, the infinite loop processing is performed until the power supply is stopped (the power supply voltage reaches a voltage at which the main CPU 101 cannot operate).

[Checksum generation processing (non-standard)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the checksum generation process performed in S97 during the power interruption (external) process (see FIG. 52) will be described. Note that FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the checksum generation process.

First, the main CPU 101 stores the current value of the stack pointer (SP) (address in use in the stack area of the game RAM area) in the non-specified stack area of the non-specified RAM area of the main RAM 103 (S101). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the non-specified stack area in the stack pointer (S102). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the upper address value (F0H) of the RAM address (address of the non-standard stack area) in the Q register (S103). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the power failure occurrence flag (S104).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the stack pointer to the calculation start address of the sum value in the game RAM area, and sets the sum calculation counter to the value obtained by dividing the number of bytes of the sum value calculation target storage area by “2”. Set (S105). The sum calculation counter is a counter for determining the trigger for ending the sum value calculation, and is provided in the main RAM 103. Then, when the sum calculation counter set in S105 becomes "0", the sum value calculation process of the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 ends.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the HL register to 0 (sets the value "0") (S106). By this processing, the initial value "0" of the sum value is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes an instruction code called a "POP instruction", and stores the data (saved value) of 2 bytes in the DE register from the address of the storage area of the main RAM 103 set in the stack pointer (SP). Read out (S107).

When the "POP" instruction is executed, the data (memory contents) saved in the 1-byte area of the address specified by the stack pointer is loaded into the lower register of the pair register and specified by the stack pointer. The data (memory content) stored in the 1-byte area of the address obtained by updating the created address by 1 is loaded into the register on the upper side of the pair register. Further, when the "POP" instruction is executed, an address updating process (a process of adding "2" to the address) of 2 bytes is performed on the address set in the stack pointer (SP).

Therefore, in the process of S107, the data (memory content) saved at the address designated by the stack pointer is loaded into the E register and is saved at the address obtained by adding "1" to the address designated by the stack pointer. Data (memory contents) being loaded into the D register.

After the process of S107, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation process (S108). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the value stored in the DE register to the value stored in the HL register, and stores the added value in the HL register as a sum value.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S109). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S110).

In S110, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not “0” (NO in S110), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S107 and repeats the processes of S107 and subsequent steps. That is, the processes of S107 to S110 are repeated until the sum value calculation process of the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 is completed.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S110 that the value of the sum calculation counter is “0” (YES in S110), the main CPU 101 sets the DE register in the non-specified RAM area in the main RAM 103. The calculation start address of the sum value is set, and the non-standard sum count value is set in the sum calculation counter (S111). The non-prescribed sum count value is the number of bytes in the non-prescribed storage area. Therefore, when the sum calculation counter set in S111 becomes “0”, the sum value calculation process of the non-regulated RAM area of the main RAM 103, that is, the sum value calculation process of the entire main RAM 103 ends.

Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data (saved value) of the 1-byte area from the address of the non-regular RAM area set in the DE register to the A register (S112).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation process (S113). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the value stored in the A register to the value stored in the HL register, and stores the added value in the HL register as a sum value.

Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address stored in the DE register and subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S114). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S115).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S115 that the value of the sum calculation counter is not "0" (NO in S115), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S112 and repeats the processes of S112 and thereafter. That is, the processes of S112 to S115 are repeated until the process of adding the sum value of the non-regulated RAM area of the main RAM 103 to the sum value of the game RAM area is completed.

On the other hand, in S115, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is “0” (YES in S115), the main CPU 101 determines the value stored in the HL register when the power failure occurs. The sum value is stored in a sum value storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103 (S116). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the stack pointer (SP) stored in the non-standard stack area in S101 to the stack pointer (S117). Then, after the processing of S117, the main CPU 101 ends the checksum generation processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S98 at the time of power interruption (external) processing (see FIG. 52).

[Sum check processing (non-standard)]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, the sum check processing performed in S9 of the power-on processing (see FIG. 46) will be described. 54 and 55 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the sum check process.

First, the main CPU 101 saves the current stack pointer (SP) value in the non-standard stack area (S121). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the stack pointer to the address of the sum value storage area, and sets the sum calculation counter to a value obtained by dividing the number of bytes in the sum value calculation target storage area by “2” (S122). Note that the sum calculation counter set here is a counter for determining the end timing of the sum value calculation (sum value subtraction processing), and is provided in the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a sum value (checksum) from the sum value storage area (S123). By this processing, the checksum (initial value before subtraction) generated when the power failure occurs is stored in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the “POP” instruction, and reads the data (saved value) of the 2-byte area from the address of the storage area of the main RAM 103 set in the stack pointer (SP) to the DE register (S124). .. At this time, by executing the "POP" instruction, the data (memory content) saved in the 1-byte area of the address designated by the stack pointer is loaded into the E register and the address designated by the stack pointer is loaded. The data (memory content) saved in the 1-byte area of the 1-updated address is loaded into the D register. When the "POP" instruction is executed, an address update process (process of adding 2 to the address) for 2 bytes is performed on the address set in the stack pointer (SP).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation (subtraction) process (S125). Specifically, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value stored in the DE register from the value stored in the HL register (the initial sum value or the sum value after the previous subtraction processing), and the subtraction is performed. The value is stored in the HL register as a sum value.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S126). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S127).

In S127, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not “0” (NO in S127), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S124 and repeats the processes of S124 and subsequent steps. That is, the processes of S124 to S127 are repeated until the sum value subtracting process is completed over the entire game RAM area of the main RAM 103.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S127 that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (YES in S127), the main CPU 101 sets the DE register in the non-specified RAM area in the main RAM 103. The calculation start address of the sum value is set, and the non-standard sum count value is set in the sum calculation counter (S128). The non-standard thumb count value is the number of bytes in the non-standard RAM area.

Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data (stored value) of the 1-byte area from the address of the non-regular RAM area set in the DE register to the A register (S129).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation (subtraction) process (S130). Specifically, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value stored in the A register from the value stored in the HL register, and stores the subtracted value as a sum value in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address stored in the DE register and subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S131). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the updated sum calculation counter value is “0” (S132).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the value of the sum calculation counter is not "0" (NO in S132), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S129 and repeats the processes of S129 and thereafter. That is, the processes of S129 to S132 are repeated until the sum value subtraction process is completed over the entire non-regulated RAM area of the main RAM 103.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (YES in S132), the main CPU 101 sets "sum abnormality" in the determination result of the sum check process. Yes (S133). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the calculated sum value is "0" (S134).

In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the state (1/0) of the zero flag (bit 6) of the flag register F to determine whether or not the sum value is "0". In the present embodiment, the sum value is "0" when the sum calculation counter value set in S128 becomes "0", that is, when the sum value subtraction process is completed over the entire main RAM 103. , The zero flag of the flag register F is set to “1”, and when the sum value is not “0”, the zero flag of the flag register F is set to “0”. Therefore, at the time of the processing of S134, if "1 (ON state)" is set in the zero flag of the flag register F, the main CPU 101 determines that the sum value is "0".

When the main CPU 101 determines in S134 that the calculated sum value is not "0" (NO in S134), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S139 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S134 that the calculated sum value is “0” (YES in S134), the main CPU 101 sets “abnormal power interruption” in the determination result (S135). ).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the power failure occurrence flag (S136). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure occurrence flag is a status without power failure (off state) (S137).

In S137, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure occurrence flag indicates that there is no power failure (YES in S137), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S139 described below. On the other hand, in S137, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure occurrence flag is not in the state of no power failure (NO in S137), the main CPU 101 sets “normal” in the determination result (S138).

When the determination of S134 is NO or the determination of S137 is YES after the processing of S138, the main CPU 101 saves the determination result in the sum check determination result and clears (turns off) the power failure occurrence flag (S139). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the stack pointer (SP) stored in the non-standard stack area in S121 to the stack pointer (S140). Then, after the processing of S140, the main CPU 101 ends the sum check processing, and moves the processing to the processing of S10 of the power-on processing (see FIG. 46).

[Main processing of pachi-slot by control of main CPU]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the main processing (main operation processing) of the pachi-slot 1 executed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described. Note that FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of main processing (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

First, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S201). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address "at the end of one game" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and from the start address to the game RAM area. Erase (clear) the information up to the final address. The storage area in this range is, for example, a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area in which data must be erased for each unit game (game).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal acceptance/start check processing (S202). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs an input check process for the medal sensors (see FIG. 5) and the start switch 79. The details of the medal acceptance/start check process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random value acquisition process (S203). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the random number value for the internal winning combination lottery (0 to 65535: the value of the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 that becomes the hard latch random number) and the random number value for effect used in various lottery related to the game property ( 0-65535: the value of the random number register 1 of the random number circuit 110 that becomes a soft latch random number, 0-255: each value of the random number registers 2 to 7 of the random number circuit 110 that becomes a soft latch random number), and the like. The random number value is stored in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The details of the random value acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out an internal lottery process (S204). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs an internal winning combination determination process by lottery based on the random number value (hard latch random number) extracted in S203. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 64 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol setting process (S205). In this process, the main CPU 101, for example, a process of generating an internal winning combination from the hit request flag status (flag status information), a process of expanding the hit request flag data, and a process of storing the hit request flag data in the hit request flag storage area. And so on. The details of the symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 65 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a start command generation/storage process (S206). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates start command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and saves the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by a communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The start command is configured to include a parameter (a winning combination number or the like) for specifying an internal winning combination or the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a second interface board control process (S207). The second interface board control process is executed in the non-specified work area of the main RAM 103. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs, for example, a process for outputting a test signal related to the push-order navigation determined by the main control board 71 via the second interface for testing machine 302.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game start state-based control process (S208). In this process, the main CPU 101, at the time of starting the game, among the various controls in the normal state of the non-advantageous section, each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, and each gaming state of the advantageous section described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 44, Performs various processes for performing various controls that need to be performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes reel stop initialization processing (S209). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to a reel stop initial setting table (not shown), and acquires a pull-in priority table selection table number, a pull-in priority table number, and a stop table number based on the internal winning combination and the game state. And a process of storing "3" in the stop button non-operation counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes reel rotation start processing (S210). In this processing, the main CPU 101 requests rotation start of all reels. Then, when the rotation start of all reels is requested, three stepping motors (not shown) are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 79 to be described later) described later that is executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). The rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is controlled and started. Then, each reel is subjected to acceleration control until the rotation speed thereof reaches a constant speed, and then controlled so that the constant speed is maintained.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes reel rotation start command generation and storage processing (S211). In this processing, the main CPU 101 generates the data of the reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and stores the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by a communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The reel rotation start command includes a parameter indicating that the reel rotation start operation has started.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a pull-in priority storage process (S212). In this process, the main CPU 101 acquires the attraction-in priority data and stores it in the attraction-in priority data storage area. The details of the attraction-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes reel stop control processing (S213). In this processing, the main CPU 101 controls the rotation stop of the corresponding reel based on the timing when the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are respectively pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a winning search process (S214). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the data in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) in the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25). Further, in this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the activated line, and sets the payout number of medals based on the determination result. The details of the prize search processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes illegal hit check processing (S215). In this process, the main CPU 101 combines the winning request flag (internal winning combination) and the winning operation flag (display combination), and determines whether or not there is an illegal hit error based on the combined result. The details of the illegal hit check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 74 described later. Further, as long as each reel is stopped by the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 72, which will be described later) without causing a wrong winning, the illegal hit check processing can be omitted from the viewpoint of reducing the control load.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a prize check/medal payout process (S216). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation command generation process. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 drives the hopper device 51 and updates the credit number based on the payout number of the display combination determined in S214, and performs the medal payout process. The details of the winning check/medal payout processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 75 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs BB check processing (S217). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the operation and the end of the bonus state. The details of the BB check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs RT check processing (S218). In this processing, the main CPU 101 controls the transition of the RT state based on the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the activated line. The details of the RT check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 78 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out control processing by state at the end of the game (S219). In this processing, the main CPU 101, at the end of the game, among the various controls in the normal state of the non-advantageous section, each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, and each gaming state of the advantageous section described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 44. Performs various processes for performing various controls that need to be performed. After the processing of S219 (after the end of one game), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S201.

[Medal reception/start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58, the medal acceptance/start check processing performed in S202 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. 57 and 58 are flowcharts showing the procedure of medal acceptance/start check processing.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is “0” (whether or not there is an automatic insertion request) (S221). In this process, when the automatic insertion medal counter is "1" or more, the main CPU 101 determines that there is an automatic insertion request. The automatic insertion medal counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination relating to the replay (replay) has been established in the previous unit game. When the display combination relating to the replay is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion medal counter.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S221 that the value of the automatic-insertion medal counter is “0” (YES in S221), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S225 described later.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S221 that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (NO in S221), the main CPU 101 performs medal insertion processing (S222). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion command generation/storage process, an LED lighting control process for the number of inserted medals, and the like. The details of the medal insertion process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value of the automatic insertion medal counter (S223). In this process, the main CPU 101 may subtract the value of the automatic insertion medal counter at once (for example, "3") or may subtract "1" by one. Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the automatically inserted medal counter after subtraction is "0" (S224).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S224 that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (NO in S224), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S222 and repeats the processes from S222.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S224 that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (YES in S224) or in S221, the main CPU 101 determines that the medal auxiliary storage Warehouse switch check processing is performed (S225). In this process, the main CPU 101 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals based on the ON/OFF state of the medal auxiliary storage switch 75.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes medal insertion state check processing (S226). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal can be inserted, based on the result of the medal insertion state check process (S227).

In S227, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not in a state where the medal can be inserted (NO in S227), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S231 described below.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S227 that the medal can be inserted (YES in S227), the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion check process (S228). In this process, the main CPU 101, for example, based on the medal sensor input state, a process of determining whether or not the medal has normally passed, and credits the medal when the specified number of medals has been inserted. Perform processing, etc. The details of the medal insertion check process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a medal can be inserted or credited based on the result of the medal insertion check process (S229).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S229 that a medal can be inserted or credits can be made (YES in S229), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S231 described below. On the other hand, in S229, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not in a medal insertion or creditable state (NO in S229), the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S230). By this processing, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is no longer driven (the excited solenoid is demagnetized), and the select plate 804 shifts from the guide position to the discharge position, so that the inserted medals are It will be discharged from the medal payout opening 24.

After the processing of S230, if the determination of S227 is NO, or if the determination of S229 is YES, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current inserted number of medals is the playable start number (S231). In this embodiment, the number of games that can be started is three regardless of the game state (that is, the game can be started only when three cards are inserted).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S231 that the current number of inserted medals is the playable start number (YES in S231), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S234 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S231 that the current number of inserted medals is not the playable start number (NO in S231), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not medals have been inserted (S232). ).

In S232, when the main CPU 101 determines that a medal has been inserted (YES in S232), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to S226, and repeats the processing from S226. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S232 that no medals have been inserted (NO in S232), the main CPU 101 performs the setting change confirmation process described in FIG. 48 (S233). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of generating and storing a setting change command at the start of setting confirmation. As a result, regardless of whether the gaming state is the bonus state (special prize operating state) or not, the set value and the hall menu (various history data (errors, interruption history, etc.)) can be confirmed, and It is possible to suppress cheating. It should be noted that in the setting change confirmation process performed in S233, even if the setting key type switch 54 is in the OFF state, the generation and storage process of the setting change command (setting confirmation start) including at least the current setting value information is performed. Alternatively, the command data may be stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Thereby, it may be possible to check whether or not the set value is appropriate (is within the range of the settings 1 to 6) for each game.

After the processing of S233 or when the determination of S231 is YES, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is in the on state (S234).

In S234, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 79 is not in the ON state (NO in S234), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226, and repeats the processes from S226.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S234 that the start switch 79 is in the ON state (YES in S234), the main CPU 101 performs the medal acceptance prohibition process (S235). By this processing, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is no longer driven (the excited solenoid is demagnetized), and the select plate 804 shifts from the guide position to the discharge position, so that the inserted medals are It will be discharged from the medal payout opening 24.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the medal monitoring timer to a timer value (“72” in this embodiment) (S236). The medal monitoring timer is a timer for monitoring the period until the deenergized solenoid of the energized solenoid is completed in the selector 66 (that is, the period until the select plate 804 moves from the guide position to the ejection position). (See FIG. 86 to be described later), for example, when the period until demagnetization of the energized solenoid is 80 ms, a timer value for measuring at least a period (“about 80.44 ms”) longer than that. Is set. That is, the medal monitoring timer is actually operated after the start lever 16 is operated (the start switch 79 is in the ON state) and the medal acceptance prohibition control is started when the number of medals that can be played is inserted. To monitor a specific period until the medal acceptance is (physically) banned. As a result, in combination with a start lever ON flag described later and a medal insertion check 2 process described later, when a medal is inserted during the specific period, the medal is swallowed by mistake (that is, the medal is inserted). However, it is prevented from being stored in the hopper device 51 without being counted). The value of the medal monitoring timer can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the selector 66 (mainly solenoid). Further, as long as it is ensured that the swallowing of medals is ensured, it is possible to set the period shorter than the period until the demagnetization of the energized solenoid is completed.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the start lever ON flag to the ON state (S237). The start lever ON flag is information for identifying whether or not the start lever 16 has been operated (the start switch 79 has been turned on) when the number of medals that can be played is inserted. ..

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a medal insertion check 2 process (S238). In this process, the main CPU 101 basically performs the same process as the medal insertion check process. The details of the medal insertion check process and the medal insertion check 2 process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever ON flag is in the off state (S239). In S239, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start lever ON flag is in the OFF state (YES in S239), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226, and repeats the processes from S226.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S239 that the start lever ON flag is not in the OFF state (that is, it is in the ON state) (NO in S239), the main CPU 101 sets the medal monitoring timer to “0”. It is determined whether there is any (S240). When the main CPU 101 determines in S239 that the medal monitoring timer is not "0" (that is, "1" or more) (NO in S240), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S238, and after S238. The process of is repeated.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S240 that the medal monitoring timer is "0" (YES in S240), the main CPU 101 ends the medal acceptance/start check process and executes the process in the main flow ( 56) (see FIG. 56).

[Medal insertion process]
Next, referring to FIG. 59, S222 in the medal acceptance/start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58) and S265 in the later-described medal insertion check process (see FIGS. 60 and 61) are performed. The processing will be described. Note that FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the medal insertion process.

First, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the medal counter value (S241). The medal counter is a counter for counting the number of inserted medals, and is provided in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes medal insertion command generation/storage processing (S242). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of a medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and saves the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by a communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. That is, the medal insertion command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 each time one medal is inserted. The medal insertion command includes a parameter for specifying the number of inserted medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 turns off the first to third LEDs for displaying the number of inserted medals included in the LED 82 (see FIG. 6) (S243). Next, the main CPU 101 calculates LED lighting data (lighting control data) corresponding to the number of inserted medals (lighting control data) based on the number of inserted medals (value of the medal counter) (S244). In this process, for example, when the number of inserted medals is one, LED lighting data for lighting only the first LED for displaying the number of inserted medals is calculated, and when the number of inserted medals is three, for example. For, LED lighting data for lighting all of the first to third LEDs for displaying the number of inserted medals is calculated. The method of calculating the LED lighting data will be described in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 101 uses the calculated LED lighting data to light the corresponding LED for displaying the number of inserted medals (S245). After the processing of S245, the main CPU 101 terminates the medal insertion processing, and the processing is S223 of the medal acceptance/start check processing (see FIGS. 57 and 58), or the medal insertion check processing described later (FIGS. 60 and 61). (Refer) to S253.

[Medal insertion check processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the medal insertion check process and the medal acceptance/start check process (FIGS. 57 and 58) performed in S228 of the medal acceptance/start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58). The medal insertion check 2 process performed in S238 of the reference) will be described. 60 and 61 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the medal insertion check process. It should be noted that the medal insertion check 2 process is started from S253 of the medal insertion check process, and the processes of S253 to S268 are the same as those in the medal insertion check process. The procedure of the input check process will be described.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a replay is in progress (S251).

In S251, when the main CPU 101 determines that the game is being replayed (YES in S251), the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion check process, and performs the medal acceptance/start check process (FIG. 57 and FIG. 57). 58)) to S229.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S251 that the game is not being played again (NO in S251), the main CPU 101 permits medal acceptance (S252). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is driven (the demagnetized solenoid is excited), and the select plate 804 shifts from the ejection position to the guide position, so that the medal insertion slot 14 is inserted. The medals thus obtained are counted and stored in the hopper device 51.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a bet button check process (S253). In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the bet button (MAX bet button 15a or 1 bet button 15b) is operated based on the ON/OFF state of the BET switch 77. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the bet operation is completed based on the result of the bet button check process of S253 (S254).

In S254, when the main CPU 101 determines that the betting operation is completed (YES in S254), the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion check process (or the medal insertion check 2 process) and accepts the process. The process proceeds to S229 of the start check process (see 57 and FIG. 58) (or S239 of the medal acceptance/start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58)).

On the other hand, in S254, when the main CPU 101 determines that the betting operation is not completed (NO in S254), the main CPU 101 determines the medal sensor input state (game medium acceptance state) during the current process, The medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing is acquired (S255). The medal sensor input state is information indicating the passing state of the medals received in the medal insertion slot 14 in the selector 66, and is generated by the detection result of each medal sensor (see FIG. 5) of the selector 66.

In the present embodiment, the medal sensor input state is represented by 1-byte (8-bit) data, and the detection result of the upstream first medal sensor 806 provided side by side in the medal passing direction at the exit of the selector 66 is It corresponds to the information of bit 0 (“0” or “1”), and the detection result of the second medal sensor 807 on the downstream side corresponds to the information of bit 1 (“0” or “1”). If the passage of the medal is detected by the first medal sensor, the bit 0 is set to "1", and if the passage of the medal is detected by the second medal sensor, the bit 1 is set to "1". To be done. Therefore, the medal sensor input state “00000000B” indicates the state before or after the passage of the medal (at the time of passage), the medal sensor input state “00000001B” indicates the state at the start of passing the medal, and the medal sensor input state “ "00000011B" indicates a state during passage of a medal, and "000010B" input state by a medal sensor indicates a state immediately before the completion of passage of a medal.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal sensor input state during the current process has changed from the medal sensor input state during the previous process (S256).

In S256, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state in the current process has not changed from the medal sensor input state in the previous process (NO in S256), the main CPU 101 determines that the state in S262 to be described later. Perform processing.

On the other hand, in S256, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state in the current process has changed from the medal sensor input state in the previous process (when YES in S256), the main CPU 101 determines that the start lever ON flag is set. If is on, the start lever ON flag is set to off (S257). That is, in this process, the main CPU 101 inserts medals in a specific period from when the start operation is performed and the control for prohibiting medal reception is started to when the reception of medals is actually (physically) prohibited. When it is detected, processing for invalidating the start operation is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 generates a normal value (normal change value) of the medal sensor input state obtained in the current process by an arithmetic process based on the medal sensor input state in the previous process (S258).

In this process, when the medal sensor input state at the previous process is "00000000B" (when both the first and second medal sensors have not detected medals), the normal change value of the medal sensor input state is determined. "00000001B" (when the first medal sensor detects medals and the second medal sensor does not detect medals) is generated, and when the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing is "00000001B", the medal sensor As a normal change value of the input state, "00000011B" (when both the first and second medal sensors are medal detection) is generated. In this process, when the medal sensor input state at the previous process is "00000011B", the normal change value of the medal sensor input state is "00000010B" (the first medal sensor has not detected the medal, When the medal sensor is a medal detection) and the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing is “00000010B”, the normal change value of the medal sensor input state is “00000000B” (first and second medals). (If both sensors have not detected medals).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the input state of the medal sensor during the current process is the same as the normal change value generated in S258 (S259). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not a medal backward error has occurred, and if the determination condition of S259 is not satisfied, the main CPU 101 determines that a medal backward error has occurred.

In S259, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state during the current process is not the same as the normal change value generated in S258 (NO in S259), the main CPU 101 executes the process of S263 described below. To do.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S259 that the medal sensor input state during the current process is the same as the normal change value generated in S258 (YES in S259), the main CPU 101 determines that the current process is in progress. It is determined whether or not the medal sensor input state of is the state when the medal has passed ("0000000B") (S260). In S260, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state in the current process is the state of passing medals (YES in S260), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S264 described below.

In S260, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state in the current process is not the state of passing medals (NO in S260), the main CPU 101 sets the medal passage check timer (S261). The time set in the medal passage check timer in this process can be set to any time as long as it is possible to determine whether or not the medal has passed through the selector 66. Further, the timer value set in this process may be changed according to the medal sensor input state in the current process, for example.

After the processing of S261 or when the determination of S256 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is the state of passing medals ("00000011B") and the medal passage check timer is stopped. It is determined (S262). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not a medal passing error (inserted medal passing time error) has occurred. If the determination condition of S262 is satisfied, the main CPU 101 determines that a medal passing error has occurred.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S262 that the determination condition of S262 is not satisfied (NO in S262), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S253, and repeats the processes of S253 and thereafter.

On the other hand, in S262, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination condition of S262 is satisfied (YES in S262), or when S259 is NO, that is, a medal passing error or a medal backward error has occurred. When it is determined that the main CPU 101 performs error processing (S263). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs various processes when an error occurs, such as an error command generation and storage process. The details of the error processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 62 described later. Then, after the processing of S263, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S253, and repeats the processing of S253 and thereafter.

Here, returning to the processing of S260 again, if the determination of S260 is YES, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a prescribed number (three in the present embodiment) of medals have been inserted (S264). ..

In S264, when the main CPU 101 determines that the prescribed number of medals have not been inserted (NO in S264), the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion process described in FIG. 59 (S265). Then, after the processing of S265, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S253, and repeats the processing of S253 and thereafter.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S264 that the prescribed number of medals have been inserted (YES in S264), the main CPU 101 adds “1” to the value of the credit counter (S266). ). Next, the main CPU 101 executes medal insertion command generation/storage processing (S267). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of a medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and saves the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by a communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of credits of medals is the upper limit value (50 in the present embodiment) based on the value of the credit counter (S268).

In S268, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits of medals is not the upper limit value (NO in S268), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S253, and repeats the processes of S253 and thereafter. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S268 that the number of credits of medals is the upper limit value (YES in S268), the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion check process (or the medal insertion check 2 process). The process is moved to S229 of the medal acceptance/start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58) (or S239 of the medal acceptance/start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58)).

[Error handling]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, for example, the error process performed in S263 in the medal insertion check process (see FIGS. 60 and 61) will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of error processing.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a medal solenoid off process (S271). Specifically, the main CPU 101 stops driving the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a saving process of the payout amount display data of medals (S272). Next, the main CPU 101 executes error table setting processing (S273).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires an error factor (S274). Note that the error factor acquired in this process changes according to the process in which the error process currently being processed is read. The error factors targeted in this embodiment include "hopper empty error", "hopper jam error", "inserted medal passage count error", "inserted medal passage check error", "inserted medal passage check error", The "insertion medal passing time error", "insertion medal backward error", "insertion medal auxiliary storage full error", and "illegal hit error" are defined. For example, when the error process is read after the process of S259 during the medal insertion check process, "insertion medal reverse error (Cr)" is acquired as the error factor in this process. Further, for example, when the error process is read after the process of S262 during the medal insertion check process, in this process, “inserted medal passing time error (CE)” is acquired as the error factor.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires error display data from the error table and the error factor (S275). For example, when the error factor is "inserted medal retrograde error (Cr)", in this process, 1-byte data "01001110B" is output as error display data to be output to the upper 7-segment LED among the 2-digit 7-segment LED. Is acquired, and 1-byte data “00001001B” is acquired as error display data to be output to the 7-segment LED of the lower digit. In this case, two characters "Cr" are displayed as error information on the 2-digit 7-segment LED.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error command (occurrence) generation/storage process (S276). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of an error command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 when an error occurs, and saves the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The error command stored in the communication data storage area when an error occurs is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The error command when an error occurs is configured to include a parameter indicating the error occurrence.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting process for one interrupt time (1.1172 ms) (S277). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the error has been canceled (S278).

In S278, when the main CPU 101 determines that the error has not been cleared (NO in S278), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S277 and repeats the processes from S277.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S278 that the error has been canceled (YES in S278), the main CPU 101 performs the error factor clearing process (S279). It should be noted that this processing is performed in the non-specified work area of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a restoration process of the payout amount display data of the medals saved in S272 (S280).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes an error command (cancel) generation/storage process (S281). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of an error command at the time of error cancellation, which is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and saves the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The error command at the time of releasing the error, which is stored in the communication data storage area, is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The error command at the time of error cancellation is configured to include a parameter indicating error cancellation. After the processing of S281, the main CPU 101 ends the error processing, and moves the processing to S253 in the medal insertion check processing (see FIGS. 60 and 61), for example. In error cancellation, the error factor that has occurred is canceled and the reset switch 76 is pressed to cancel the error state.

[Random value acquisition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the random number value acquisition processing performed in S203 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random value acquisition process.

First, the main CPU 101 obtains the hard latch random number (0 to 65535) of the random number register 0 of the random number circuit, and uses the obtained random number value as a random number value for the internal winning combination lottery (random number storage area (not stored). (S291).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a soft latch random number acquisition register setting process for generating soft latch random numbers (0 to 65535 or 0 to 255) of the random number registers 1 to 7 of the random number circuit (S292). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of soft latch random numbers to be acquired (for example, 7) (S293). The acquired number can be set by appropriately increasing or decreasing according to the number of lotteries that can be performed in one game.

Next, the main CPU 101 collectively acquires the acquired number of soft latch random numbers and stores the acquired number of soft latch random numbers in the random value storage area (S294). At this time, the soft latch random numbers (random number values for effect) obtained from the random number registers 1 to 7 of the random number circuit 110 are hard latch random numbers (obtained from the random number register 0 of the random number circuit in the random number value storage area. It is stored in an area different from the area in which the random number for the internal winning combination lottery) is stored. Then, after the processing of S294, the main CPU 101 ends the random value acquisition processing, and moves the processing to S204 of the main flow (see FIG. 56). In the present embodiment, in order to store one 2-byte random number (random number for internal winning combination lottery) and six 1-byte random numbers (random number for effect), the main RAM 103 has an 8-byte storage area. Allocated as a random number storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, the 2-byte random soft latch random number is not used.

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the internal lottery process performed in S204 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a set value/medal insertion number check process (S301). In this processing, the main CPU 101 checks the set value of the current game (one of 1 to 6) and the number of inserted medals (three in the present embodiment).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the internal lottery table for the normal game (see the internal lottery table in the “RT0” state shown in FIGS. 16 and 17) and the number of lottery (98 times in this embodiment) (S302). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RB is operating (S303). In S303, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RB is not operating (NO in S303), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S305 described below.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S303 that the RB is operating (YES in S303), the main CPU 101 determines that the internal lottery table for RB (see the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 18) and The number of lotteries (7 times in this embodiment) is set (S304). In this process, the internal lottery table for general game and the lottery number set in S302 are overwritten with the internal lottery table and lottery number for RB.

After the processing of S304 or when the determination of S303 is NO, the main CPU 101 acquires the determination data (data regarding the address) of the lottery target combination from the set internal lottery table, and updates the lottery table address (S305).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination data is RT state-specific data (S306). In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lottery target combination currently acquired is an internal winning combination in which the lottery value changes according to the RT state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the address defined in the determination data of the currently obtained lottery target combination is an address in the lottery value selection table for RT states (not shown). ..

In S306, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is not RT state-specific data (NO in S306), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S308 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S306 that the determination data is the RT state-specific data (YES in S306), the main CPU 101 selects the selection data from the RT state lottery value selection table based on the determination data. Is acquired and the acquired selection data is set as the determination data (S307).

After the processing of S307 or when the determination of S306 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination data of the lottery target combination is the data for each setting (S308). In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently-winning lottery target winning combination is an internal winning combination in which the lottery value changes according to the set value. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the address specified in the determination data of the currently obtained lottery target combination is the address in the setting-based internal lottery value table (not shown).

In S308, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is not the data for each setting (NO in S308), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S310 described below. On the other hand, in S308, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is the setting-specific data (YES in S308), the main CPU 101 adds the setting value data (any one of 0 to 5) to the determination data. Then, the added value is set as the determination data (S309). The setting value data added to the determination data in this process is data associated with the setting value, but the setting value data “0” to “5” are not the values of the setting value itself, This is data corresponding to "setting 1" to "setting 6".

After the processing of S309 or in the case of NO determination in S308, the main CPU 101 calculates the address of the area in which the lottery value of the lottery target winning combination is stored, based on the set determination data (address data), and sets it to the address. The stored lottery value is acquired (S310).

For example, in the case of an internal winning combination in which the lottery value changes according to both the RT state and the set value, both the RT state lottery value selection table and the setting-based internal lottery value table are referred to and the lottery value is selected. Is obtained. That is, for example, in the internal lottery table for the normal game state (see FIG. 16 and FIG. 17), with the RT0 state as a reference, the internal lottery combination in which the lottery value changes when the RT states are different (for example, “F_maintain lip” Etc.), the lottery value is changed according to the game state (RT1 to RT5 state), and the lottery value is changed when the set values are different (for example, “F_maintenance lip”), The lottery value is changed according to the set value (settings 1 to 6).

Next, the main CPU 101 obtains the random number value (any of 0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery stored in the random number storage area (S311).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes lottery execution processing (S312). In this processing, the main CPU 101 adds the random number value acquired in S311 to the lottery value acquired in S310, and sets the addition result as a lottery result (winning/non-winning of the lottery target combination). In this lottery execution process, when the sum of the lottery value and the random number value exceeds 65535 (when it overflows), it is determined that the lottery target winning combination has been won (the lottery target winning combination has been determined as an internal winning combination). It

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the value obtained by adding the random determination value to the random number value (the random number value after the random determination is executed) as a new random number value in the random number storage area (S313). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lottery execution process has been won (whether or not an overflow has occurred) (S314).

In S314, when the main CPU 101 determines that the lottery execution process has been won (YES in S314), the main CPU 101 refers to the internal lottery table and outputs the winning request flag status corresponding to the winning internal winning combination ( For example, a prize winning number (that is, information that can identify the type of a winning bonus combination) and a small winning combination number (that is, a winning small win or a replay combination) corresponding to “No.” in FIGS. The value) of (information that can identify the type) is acquired (S315). Then, after the processing of S315, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery processing, and moves the processing to S205 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S314, when the main CPU 101 determines that the lottery execution process is not successful (NO in S314), the main CPU 101 updates the lottery target combination to the next combination in the internal lottery table, and draws the lottery. The number of times is subtracted by 1 (S316). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of lotteries after subtraction is “0” (S317).

In S317, when the main CPU 101 determines that the lottery count after subtraction is not “0” (NO in S317), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S305, and repeats the processes from S305.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S317 that the number of lotteries after subtraction is “0” (YES in S317), that is, when the internal winning combination is “out”, the main CPU 101 determines that The lost status is set (S318). The “miss status” corresponds to a hit request flag status in which both the special winning number and the small winning number are “0”. Then, after the processing of S318, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery processing, and moves the processing to S205 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Design setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the symbol setting process performed in S205 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol setting process.

First, the main CPU 101 extracts the prize winning number and the small winning combination number based on the hit request flag status acquired in the internal lottery process, and stores the extracted special winning number and the small winning combination number in the main RAM 103. It is saved in the winning number storage area (not shown) (S321).

In the present embodiment, the internal winning combinations “F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3”, and “F_BB4” are associated with the special winning numbers “1” to “4”, respectively. Further, the internal winning combinations "F_confirmed rep" to "F_ bullet hit rep" are associated with the small-win winning numbers "1" to "23", respectively (see FIG. 23), and the small-win winning numbers "24" to. “61” is associated with the internal winning combination “F_chance eye A1” to “F_lower right middle bell 2” (see FIG. 24), and the small winning combination numbers “62” to “68” are associated with each other. The internal winning combinations “F_JAC1_1” to “F_JAC2” are associated with each other (see FIG. 23). Then, the value of the hit request flag status is configured by a value obtained by multiplying the prize number indicating these values by the value of the prize winning number and adding the small winning number. Therefore, in the process of S321, the prize winning number and the small winning combination number are extracted from the value of the hit request flag status. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 divides the value of the hit request flag status by the prize number. It should be noted that this is an example of data compression for identifying the internal winning combination, and other data configurations can be appropriately adopted as long as the special winning number and the small winning combination number can be extracted.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small winning combination (or the replay winning combination) has been won based on the extracted small winning combination winning number (S322). In this process, if the small winning combination number is any of 1 to 68, the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or replay combination) has been won, and if the small winning combination number is 0. The main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or the replay winning combination) has not been won.

In S322, when the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) has not been won (NO in S322), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S331 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S322 that the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) has been won (in the case of YES determination in S322), the main CPU 101 sets the small winning combination winning number as the initial value of the subtraction result ( S323).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a hit request flag table (not shown) (S324). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the subtraction result and updates the subtraction result (S325). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the subtraction result is less than "0" (S326).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S<b>326 that the subtraction result is not less than “0” (NO in S<b>326 ), the main CPU 101 performs the bit number calculation process (S<b>327 ). In the bit number calculation process of S327, the number of blocks in the storage area of the hit request flag data corresponding to the winning combination winning number defined in the hit request flag table is acquired.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a bit number calculation process (S328). In the bit number calculation process of S328, the number of bytes of the hit request flag data in block units defined in the hit request flag table is calculated.

Note that the above-described processing of S325 to S328 is repeated for the number of small winning combinations. Further, when the processes of S325 to S328 are repeated a plurality of times, the number of blocks and the number of bytes of the hit request flag data in block units, which are respectively acquired in the bit number calculation process of S327 and S328, are saved in another storage area. To be done. Further, the number of blocks and the number of bytes of the hit request flag data in block units obtained by the above-described processing of S325 to S328 serve as information (on-bit information) that specifies the storage destination of the hit request flag data.

Here, returning again to the processing of S326, when the main CPU 101 determines in S326 that the subtraction result is less than “0” (YES in S326), the main CPU 101 determines that the hit request flag storage area ( The internal winning combination storing area) is set (S329). At this time, the main CPU 101 determines the hit request flag to be checked (updated) based on the number of blocks and the number of bytes (on-bit information) of the hit request flag data in block units obtained by the processing of S325 to S328 described above. Set only the storage area. Specifically, the address of the hit request flag storage area to be checked (updated) is stored in the DE register.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a compressed data storage process (S330). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a process of transferring (developing) the hit request flag data to a predetermined storage area in the hit request flag storage area to be checked (updated). Details of the compressed data storage processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 66 described later.

After the processing of S330 or when the determination of S322 is NO, the main CPU 101 refers to the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 26) and determines whether or not there is a carryover combination (S331). When the main CPU 101 determines in S331 that there is a carryover combination (when YES is determined in S331), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S334 described below.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S331 that there is no carryover combination (NO in S331), the main CPU 101 determines a bonus combination (BB1 to BB4) based on the special winning number extracted in the process of S321. ) Is determined whether or not it is won (S332).

In S332, when the main CPU 101 determines that the bonus combination has not been won (NO in S332), the main CPU 101 ends the symbol setting process, and the process proceeds to S206 of the main flow (see FIG. 56). Transfer.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S332 that the bonus combination has been won (YES in S332), the main CPU 101 stores the winning special prize number in the carryover combination storing area (S333).

After the processing of S333 or when the determination of S331 is NO, the main CPU 101 sets the prize winning number in the winning number storage area (not shown), sets the hit request flag data in the hit request flag storage area, and sets the RT state to RT5. The state is set (S334). Then, after the processing of S334, the main CPU 101 ends the symbol setting processing, and moves the processing to S206 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Compressed data storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, for example, the compressed data processing performed in S330 in the symbol setting processing (see FIG. 65) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of compressed data storage processing.

The compressed data storage process shown in FIG. 66 is executed not only in S330 in the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65) but also in S649 in the later-described symbol code acquisition process (see later-described FIG. 68). In the compressed data storage process executed in S330 of the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65), the flag data to be processed is hit request flag data (flag data related to the winning combination), but a symbol code acquisition process described later. In the compressed data storage processing executed in S649 in (see FIG. 68 described later), the flag data to be processed is winning operation flag data (flag data relating to winning combinations). Then, both processes are the same except that the types of flag data to be processed are different.

Therefore, in the flowchart of FIG. 66, the flag data to be processed is referred to as “processing target flag data”, and the flag table to be processed is referred to as “processing target flag table”. In addition, in accordance with this description, in the following description of the compressed data storage processing, the hit request flag data or the winning operation flag data is referred to as "processing target flag data", and the hit request flag table or the symbol corresponding winning operation table described later. (Not shown) is called a "processing target flag table".

First, the main CPU 101 sets the storage destination check bit (S341). In this process, the storage destination check bit is stored in a register other than the A register.

The storage destination check bit is 1-byte data for designating a block as a storage destination (transfer destination) of the processing target flag data. In the present embodiment, both the hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area are composed of two blocks (a storage area 1-8 block and a storage area 9 block). Then, for example, when the internal winning combination "F_JAC1_1" is determined, the number of blocks of the storage destination is "2", and thus in the processing of S341, "00000011B" is set as the storage destination check bit. The value of bit 0 (1/0) of this 1-byte data corresponds to the presence or absence of the storage destination in the blocks of storage areas 1 to 8, and the value of bit 1 (1/0) is the block of storage area 9 It corresponds to the presence or absence of the storage destination in.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the byte-by-byte transfer counter to "8" (S342). In this embodiment, since the number of bytes of at least one block is "8", "8" is set as the initial value of the transfer counter.

Next, the value of the transfer instruction bit is extracted from the storage destination check bit (S343). The transfer instruction bit corresponds to the data of bit 0 in the storage destination check bit, and in the processing of S343, the storage destination check bit stored in the 1-byte register is right-shifted once (one bit). As a result, the transfer instruction bit is extracted. Specifically, when a 1-byte register (a register other than the A register) in which the storage destination check bit is stored is right-shifted once, the data stored in bits 7 to 1 is changed to bits 6 to 0, respectively. While moving, the data of bit 0 before the shift is output. Then, the data output by this shift processing becomes the value of the transfer instruction bit.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a transfer instruction based on the value of the extracted transfer instruction bit (S344). In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines that there is a transfer instruction when the value of the extracted transfer instruction bit is “1”. For example, when "00000011B" is set as the storage destination check bit, the transfer is performed in the determination processing of S344 of the first time (corresponding to the first block of the storage area) and the second time (corresponding to the second block of the storage area). It is determined that there is an instruction.

In S344, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no transfer instruction (NO in S344), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S354 described below.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S344 that there is a transfer instruction (YES in S344), the main CPU 101 acquires the byte unit storage destination designation information from the processing target flag table (S345). In this process, as the byte-unit storage destination designation information, 1 indicating the transfer destination is stored in the head address of the area in which the flag data of the processing target winning combination (winning combination or winning combination) in the processing target flag table is stored. Bytes of data are retrieved.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an update process (a process of adding 1 to the address) of the address referred to in the process target flag table (S346). Further, in this processing, the main CPU 101 sets, as an initial address, an address designating the top storage area of the block that is the storage (transfer) destination of the processing target flag data. For example, in the processing of the first block, the address of the storage area 1 is set as the initial address in the processing of S346, and in the processing of the second block, the address of the storage area 9 is set as the initial address in the processing of S346. ..

Next, the main CPU 101 extracts the value of the transfer instruction bit from the byte-unit storage destination designation information (S347). Note that the transfer instruction bit here corresponds to bit 0 of the byte unit storage destination designation information, and in the process of S347, the byte unit storage destination designation information stored in the 1-byte register is shifted to the right once. Thus, the value of the transfer instruction bit is extracted (the data of bit 0 is output).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a transfer instruction based on the value of the transfer instruction bit extracted in the process of S347 (S348). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that there is a transfer instruction when the value of the extracted transfer instruction bit is “1”. For example, when “00000001B” is set as the byte-unit storage destination designation information, the bit 1 data “1” is processed in the first time (the storage area 1 of the first block or the storage area 9 of the second block) S347. Is output as the value of the transfer instruction bit and it is determined that there is a transfer instruction, but in the processing of S347 of the second to eighth times, it is determined that there is no transfer instruction.

In S348, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no transfer instruction (NO in S348), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S351 described below.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S348 that there is a transfer instruction (YES in S348), the main CPU 101 determines that the processing target flag stored in the address in the currently set processing target flag table is set. The data (winning request flag data or winning action flag data) is transferred (copied) to the designated storage area (S349).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an update process (a process of adding 1 to the address) of the address referred to in the process target flag table (S350).

After the process of S350 or when the determination of S348 is NO, the main CPU 101 performs an update process (a process of adding 1 to the address) that specifies the storage area that is the storage destination of the process target flag data (S351). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the transfer counter (S352).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the transfer counter is "0" (S353). When the main CPU 101 determines in S353 that the value of the transfer counter is not "0" (NO in S353), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S347 and repeats the processes of S347 and subsequent steps.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S353 that the value of the transfer counter is "0" (YES in S353), the main CPU 101 determines whether the transfer instruction target remains in the current storage destination check bit. It is determined whether or not (S354). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a bit storing "1" in the storage destination check bits at the time of the current process. Then, the main CPU 101 issues a transfer instruction to the current storage-destination check bit when there is still a bit storing “1” in the storage-destination check bits, that is, when there is a block to be processed. It is determined that the target remains.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S354 that the transfer instruction target remains in the current storage destination check bit (YES in S354), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S342, and the processes of S342 and subsequent processes. repeat. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S354 that the transfer instruction target does not remain in the current storage destination check bit (in the case of NO determination in S354), the main CPU 101 terminates the compressed data storage process and executes the process. For example, the process proceeds to S331 in the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65).

[Loading priority storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the attraction-in priority storage processing performed in S212 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the attraction-in priority storage process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the number of search reels to "3" (S621). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S622). In this process, a pull-in priority table (not shown) is selected based on the internal winning combination and the operation stop button.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a pull-in priority storage area selection process (S623). In this processing, the pull-in priority data storage area of the reel to be searched is selected. Next, the main CPU 101 sets "20" as the number of symbol checks (number of times) (S624).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol code acquisition process (S625). In this processing, the symbol code is acquired by referring to the winning operation flag storage area and the symbol code storage area corresponding to the number of symbol checks. The details of the symbol code acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a logical product calculation process (S626). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation flag data generation process. Details of the logical product operation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 69 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority order acquisition process (S627). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the bit to “1” in the winning operation flag (winning combination) storage area (see FIG. 25), and sets the bit to “1” in the hit request flag storage area. For the winning combination, the attraction priority data is acquired by referring to the attraction priority table (not shown). The details of the attraction-in priority order acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103 (S628). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area so that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond.

The pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a storage area for priority data for each type of main reel. In each attraction priority data storage area, attraction priority data determined according to each symbol position "0" to "19" of the corresponding main reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to this pull-in priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the stop table.

The content of the priority attraction-in data stored in the attraction-in priority data storage area differs depending on the type of attraction-in priority table number in the attraction-in priority table referred to when determining the attraction-in priority data. Further, the larger the value of the attraction-in priority data, the higher the priority. By referring to the attraction-in priority data, it is possible to make a relative evaluation of the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the main reel. That is, the symbol for which the largest value is determined as the attraction-in priority data is the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the attraction-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the main reel. In addition, when there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the attraction-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the priority order defined by the priority order table.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the attraction-in priority storage area (S629). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the attraction-in priority data storage area for the next check symbol. Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of symbol checks (S630). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is "0" (S631).

In S631, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of symbol checks is not “0” (NO in S631), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to S625 and repeats the processing of S625 and thereafter. On the other hand, in S631, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of symbol checks is "0" (YES in S631), the main CPU 101 executes the process of changing the reel to be searched (S632).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of search reels (S633). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of search reels is “0”, that is, whether or not the series of processes described above has been performed for all the main reels (S634).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S634 that the number of search reels is not “0” (NO in S634), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S622 and repeats the processes of S622 and subsequent steps. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S634 that the number of search reels is “0” (YES in S634), the main CPU 101 ends the attraction-in priority storage process and executes the process in the main flow (FIG. (See 56)) to S213.

[Design code acquisition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the symbol code acquisition process performed in S625 in the attraction-in priority storage process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol code acquisition process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a clearing process of the winning operation flag storage area (S641). In this processing, the main CPU 101 sets “0” in all the storage areas in the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25). Next, the main CPU 101 sets a first reel symbol arrangement table (not shown) (S642).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first reel (the left reel 3L) is stopped (S643).

In S643, when the main CPU 101 determines that the first reel (left reel 3L) is stopped (YES in S643), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S647 described below. On the other hand, in S643, when the main CPU 101 determines that the first reel (the left reel 3L) is not stopped (NO in S643), the main CPU 101 sets the second reel symbol arrangement table (not shown). Yes (S644). In this process, the first reel symbol arrangement table set in the process of S642 is overwritten with the second reel symbol arrangement table.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second reel (middle reel 3C) is stopped (S645).

In S645, when the main CPU 101 determines that the second reel (the middle reel 3C) is stopped (YES in S645), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S647 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S645 that the second reel (middle reel 3C) is not stopped (NO in S645), the main CPU 101 sets the third reel symbol arrangement table (not shown). Yes (S646). In this process, the second reel symbol arrangement table set in the process of S644 is overwritten with the third reel symbol arrangement table.

After the processing of S646, or when S643 or S645 is YES, the main CPU 101 performs the symbol check process at the time of executing the stop operation for the reel to be stopped, and the symbol corresponding to the symbol acquired by the symbol check process. A winning operation table (not shown) is acquired (S647). The symbol-corresponding winning operation table is a table for making it possible to identify the types of winning combinations (symbol combinations) that can be won if the corresponding symbols stop on the activated line on the reels subject to stop control.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a winning operation flag storage area (S648). Next, the main CPU 101 executes the compressed data storage process described in FIG. 66 (S649). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a process of transferring (developing) the winning operation flag data which can be won stored in the symbol corresponding winning operation table to the corresponding storage area in the winning operation flag storage area.

For example, when the first reel (left reel 3L) is stopped and the symbol located on the activated line at the time of the stop operation is “blank”, the winning symbol combinations (combinations) are as shown in FIGS. As shown in, “S_XD lip”, “S_bar lip 2”, “S_RT1 transition lip”, and “S_special combination 1”.

After the processing of S649, the main CPU 101 sets the winning operation flag storage area updated by the compressed data storage processing, sets the symbol code storage area, and the data length of the winning operation flag storage area (9 bytes in this embodiment). Is set (S650). Then, after the processing of S650, the main CPU 101 ends the symbol code acquisition processing, and moves the processing to S626 of the attraction-in priority storage processing (see FIG. 67).

[AND operation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, for example, the AND operation process performed in S626 in the attraction-in priority storage process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the AND operation processing. Note that the logical product arithmetic processing shown in FIG. 69 is performed not only in S626 in the attraction priority order storage processing (see FIG. 67) but also in S686 in the attraction priority order acquisition processing (see FIGS. 70 and 71 below). Is also executed.

In the logical product calculation process executed in S626 of the attraction-in priority storage process (see FIG. 67), the two data items that are logical product calculated are the winning operation flag storage set in S650 in the above-mentioned symbol code acquisition process. It is the data of the area and the data of the symbol code storage area. The former data corresponds to "logical product destination data" described later, and the latter data corresponds to "logical product source data" described later. Further, in this case, the number of bytes “9” of the data length (9 bytes) set in S650 during the above-described symbol code acquisition processing corresponds to the “number of logical products” described later.

On the other hand, in the AND operation processing executed in S686 of the attraction priority order acquisition processing (see FIGS. 70 and 71 to be described later), two pieces of data to be ANDed are the hit (attraction) request flag storage area. And the data of the winning operation flag storage area. The former data corresponds to "logical product destination data" described later, and the latter data corresponds to "logical product source data" described later. Further, in this case, the number of bytes “1” of the data length (1 byte) of the RT operation combination display flag described later corresponds to the “number of AND operations” described later.

First, the main CPU 101 acquires logical product original data (for example, data in the symbol code storage area) (S661). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a logical product operation of the logical product source data and the logical product destination data (for example, the data of the winning operation flag storage area), and stores the calculation result as the logical product destination data (S662).

Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the logical product source data to be acquired (S663). Next, the main CPU 101 increments the address of the logical product destination data to be referenced by 1 (S664).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the logical product number (S665). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of logical products is “0” (S666).

In S666, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of ANDs is not “0” (NO in S666), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S661 and repeats the processes from S661. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S666 that the number of AND operations is “0” (YES in S666), the main CPU 101 terminates the AND operation processing and stores the processing, for example, in the attraction priority order storage. The process moves to S627 of the process (see FIG. 67).

[Acquisition priority acquisition processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71, the attraction-in priority order acquisition processing performed in S627 in the attraction-in priority order storage processing (see FIG. 67) will be described. 70 and 71 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the attraction-in priority order acquisition process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is time to check the right reel 3R (specific display row) (S671).

In S671, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not time to check the right reel 3R (NO in S671), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S674 described below. On the other hand, in S671, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is time to check the right reel 3R (YES in S671), the main CPU 101 sets “ANY combination” as the symbol combination (winning combination) related to the internal winning combination. It is determined whether or not (predetermined symbol combination) is included (S672). The “ANY winning combination” here means a winning combination in which the winning is fixed regardless of at least the stop symbol of the right reel 3R (at least a winning symbol in which the stopping symbol of the right reel 3R is an arbitrary symbol). However, in this embodiment, the "ANY combination" is not defined.

In S672, when the main CPU 101 determines that the “ANY combination” is not included in the symbol combination related to the internal winning combination (when the determination of S672 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S674 described later. On the other hand, in S672, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the internal winning combination includes “ANY winning combination” (YES in S672), the main CPU 101 determines that “ANY” in the winning operation flag storage area. The storage area corresponding to the "role" is masked (S673). Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets "1" to the bit corresponding to the "ANY combination" in the winning operation flag storage area. In addition, when "ANY combination" is not defined in the symbol combination (winning combination) related to the internal winning combination, the processes of S671 to S673 may be unnecessary. Further, when the "ANY combination" defines the stop symbol of the left reel 3L or the middle reel 3C as an arbitrary symbol, the processes of S672 and S673 are performed even when the left reel 3L or the middle reel 3C is checked. It may be performed (the same applies to the processing of S681 to S683 described below).

After the processing of S673, or when the determination of S671 or S672 is NO, the main CPU 101 adds the address "1" to the address of the rearmost storage area as the address of the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25). Is set, stop prohibition data is set, and the winning operation flag data length (the data length of the winning operation flag storage area: 9 bytes in the present embodiment) is set (S674). Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the value of the stock button operation counter and the stop button operation state (S675). The stop button operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons whose stop operation has been detected. The operation state of the stop button is acquired by referring to the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 28).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the address of the winning operation flag storage area that has been set (-1 update) (S676). Next, the main CPU 101 generates hit request flag data from the set winning operation flag storage area and the hit request flag storage area corresponding thereto (see FIG. 25), and based on the created hit request flag data. A prohibited winning operation position is generated (S677).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop operation position is the prohibited winning operation position (S678).

In S678, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation position is not the prohibited winning operation position (NO in S678), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S678 that the stop operation position is the prohibited winning operation position (YES in S678), the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button operation counter is the third stop value. It is determined whether or not (S679).

In S679, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button actuation counter is the third stop value (YES in S679), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S705 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S679 that the value of the stop button actuation counter is not the third stop value (NO in S679), the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button actuation counter is the second stop value. It is determined whether the value is a value (S680).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S680 that the value of the stop button actuation counter is not the second stop value (NO in S680), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S680 that the value of the stop button actuation counter is the second stop value (YES in S680), the main CPU 101 determines whether the right reel 3R has been stopped. It is determined (S681).

In S681, when the main CPU 101 determines that the right reel 3R is stopped (YES in S681), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S681 that the right reel 3R is not stopped (NO in S681), the main CPU 101 determines that the hit request flag may interfere with the "ANY winning combination". It is determined whether or not (whether or not “ANY combination” is included in the symbol combination (winning combination) related to the internal winning combination) (S682).

In S682, when the main CPU 101 determines that the hit request flag is not a flag that may interfere with the “ANY winning combination” (YES in S682), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S682 that the hit request flag is a flag that may be interfered with by the "ANY winning combination" (when NO is determined in S682), the main CPU 101 determines that the current check is "ANY." It is determined whether or not it is time to check the hit request flag including “win” (S683).

In S683, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current check is at the time of checking the hit request flag including the “ANY winning combination” (YES in S683), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S705 described below.

On the other hand, in S683, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current check is not the time of checking the hit request flag including the "ANY combination" (NO in S683), NO in S678 or S680, or S681. Alternatively, if the determination in S682 is YES, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the winning operation flag data length (S684). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the winning operation flag data length is “0” (S685).

In S685, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data length is not “0” (NO in S685), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S676 and repeats the processes from S676.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S685 that the winning operation flag data length is "0" (YES in S685), the main CPU 101 performs stop control pull-in request flag setting processing (S686). .. In this process, for example, the main CPU 101 performs the logical product calculation process described in FIG. In the logical product calculation process executed in the process of S686, as described above, the data in the hit (pull-in) request flag storage area is set to the "logical product destination data", and the data in the winning operation flag storage area is set. The "logical product original data" is set, and the "logical product number" is set to the byte number "1" of the data length (1 byte) of the RT operation combination display flag. The RT operation combination display flag is a storage area in which a symbol combination related to RT transition is defined in the winning operation flag storage area, and in the present embodiment, only the storage area 1 is provided as shown in FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the attraction-in priority table address storage area to obtain the attraction-in priority table (S687). In this process, the initial value "1 (001H)" of the attraction priority data is set to the address that is currently set, and any attraction priority table is acquired.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the data of the attraction priority table stored at the currently set address is the end code (000H) (S688).

In S688, when the main CPU 101 determines that the data of the attraction priority table stored at the currently set address is the end code (YES in S688), the main CPU 101 proceeds to S705 described later. Process. On the other hand, in S688, when the main CPU 101 determines that the data of the attraction-in priority table stored at the currently set address is not the end code (NO in S688), the main CPU 101 determines the winning operation. The flag storage area is set (S689).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the attraction priority data based on the attraction priority table stored at the currently set address (S690). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the block counter of the attraction priority table (S691).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of checks in the attraction priority table and increments (+1 updates) the address of the attraction priority table to be referenced (S692).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires check data based on the updated address of the attraction-in priority table, and extracts check bits from the check data (S693).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the extracted check bit is “1” (S694).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S694 that the value of the extracted check bit is not "1" (NO in S694), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S699 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S694 that the value of the extracted check bit is "1" (YES in S694), the main CPU 101 increments the address of the attraction-in priority table to be referenced by one. (+1 update), and the determination data is acquired from the pull-in priority table based on the updated address (S695).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently obtained winning operation flag data is a determination target based on the determination data acquired in S695 (S696). In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the currently obtained winning operation flag data with the determination data, determines whether the former corresponds to the latter, and the former corresponds to the latter. In this case, it is determined that the currently-acquired winning operation flag data is the determination target.

In S<b>696, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data is not the determination target (NO in S<b>696 ), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S<b>699 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S696 that the winning operation flag data is the determination target (YES in S696), the main CPU 101 updates the attraction-in priority data (S697). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates (overwrites) the currently set attraction-in priority data with the attraction-in priority data associated with the determination data acquired in S697.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes check data update processing (S698). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the check data rightward by 1 bit (direction from bit 7 to bit 0). In this process, "0" is set in bit 7 of the check data after the shift.

After the processing of S698 or when the determination of S694 or S696 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a check target bit (a bit for which "1" is set) in the check data (S699).

In S699, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no check target bit in the check data (NO in S699), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S702 described below. On the other hand, in S699, when the main CPU 101 determines that the check data has a bit to be checked (YES in S699), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the winning operation flag storage area to be checked (+1 update). ), and 1 is subtracted from the number of checks (S700).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the number of checks is "0" (S701). When the main CPU 101 determines in S701 that the number of checks is not "0" (NO in S701), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S698, and repeats the processes from S698.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S701 that the number of checks is "0" (YES in S701), the main CPU 101 sets the number of checks in the address of the winning operation flag storage area which is currently referred to. The address of the winning operation flag storage area is updated by addition, and the value of the block counter is decremented by 1 (S702). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the block counter is "0" (S703).

In S703, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the block counter is not “0” (NO in S703), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S692 and repeats the processes from S692.

On the other hand, in S703, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the block counter is “0” (YES in S703), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the attraction priority table to be referred to (+1 update). ) (S704). After the processing of S704, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S688 and repeats the processing of S688 and thereafter.

Here, the process returns to the processing of S679, S683 or S688 again, and in the case of YES determination in S679, S683 or S688, the main CPU 101 uses the attraction-in priority data set at this time as the final attraction-in priority data. Set (S705). When S679 or S683 is YES, the main CPU 101 sets "0 (00H)" as the final attraction priority data. In this case, since the end code is assigned to the pull-in priority data "0 (00H)", no pull-in data (stop prohibited) is set. Then, after the processing of S705, the main CPU 101 terminates the attraction priority order acquisition processing, and moves the processing to S628 of the attraction priority storage processing (see FIG. 67).

[Reel stop control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the reel stop control process performed in S213 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the reel stop control processing.

First, the main CPU 101 executes reel stop enable signal OFF processing (S711). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a port output process of reel stop enable signal OFF data. Further, this processing is performed using the non-regular work area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the rotation speeds of all the reels have reached a predetermined constant speed (whether or not they have become “constant speed”) (S712). In S712, when the main CPU 101 determines that the rotation speeds of all reels are not “constant speed” (NO in S712), the main CPU 101 repeats the processing of S712.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S712 that the rotation speeds of all reels have reached the "constant speed" (YES in S712), the main CPU 101 performs a reel stoppable signal ON process (S713). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a port output process of reel stop enable signal ON data. Further, this processing is performed using the non-regular work area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S714).

In S714, when the main CPU 101 determines that the valid stop button is not pressed (NO in S714), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S713 and repeats the processes from S713. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S714 that the valid stop button has been pressed (YES in S714), the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 28) and indicates that the stop button has not been pressed. The value of the operation counter is decremented by 1 (S715).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines the reel to be searched from the operation stop button (S716). Further, in this process, an address (start address) setting process of the spinning control data storage area in which the reel control management information of the search target reel is stored is also performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes reel stop enable signal OFF processing (S717). This process is performed using the non-regular work area of the main RAM 103, as in S711. Next, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 103 based on the value of the symbol counter (S718).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes reel stop selection processing (S719). Although detailed description is omitted, in this process, the main CPU 101 performs a sliding frame number selection process.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines a scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S719, and stores the determined scheduled stop position in the main RAM 103 (S720). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position and sets the addition result as the planned stop position.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a symbol code storage process (S721). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the planned stop position is stored in the symbol code storage area. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the reel to be controlled is the last stopped reel (third stopped reel) (S722). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel to be controlled is the final stop (third stop) reel based on the value of the stop button non-operation counter, and the value of the stop button non-operation counter is When it is "0", it is determined that the reel to be controlled is the reel that is finally stopped.

In S722, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reel to be controlled is not the final stopped reel (NO in S722), the main CPU 101 performs control change processing (S723). In this process, the stop information group used to stop the reels is updated when the reel is at the specific stop position. Next, the main CPU 101 performs the attraction-in priority storage process described in FIG. 67 (S724).

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a standby processing for the remaining stop interval time (S725). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a standby process until a preset predetermined reel stop interval time elapses. Then, after the processing of S725, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S711, and repeats the processing of S711 and thereafter.

Here, returning to the processing of S722 again, in S722, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop (in the case of YES determination in S722), the main CPU 101 causes the excitation of all reels. It is determined whether or not is in the stopped state (S726). In S726, when the main CPU 101 determines that the excitation of all reels is not stopped (NO in S726), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S726.

On the other hand, in S726, when the main CPU 101 determines that the excitation of all the reels is in the stopped state (when the determination in S726 is YES), the main CPU 101 keeps the stop button that has been subjected to the third stop operation in the ON state. It is determined whether or not (the stop button is not released) (S727). In S727, when the main CPU 101 determines that the third stop-operated stop button is still in the ON state (YES in S727), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S727. On the other hand, in S727, when the main CPU 101 determines that the third stop-operated stop button is not still in the ON state (NO in S727), the main CPU 101 ends the reel stop control process and executes the process. The process moves to S214 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Prize search processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the winning combination search process performed in S214 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. It should be noted that FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the prize winning search process.

First, the main CPU 101 transfers the data in each storage area stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) to the corresponding storage area in the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25) and stores it (S761). .. At the end of this process, the last address of the winning operation flag storage area is set in the DE register.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the payout amount data table (not shown) that defines the payout amount (see FIG. 19 to FIG. 22) of the winning combination (symbol combination) in the HL register (S762). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the payout number table number (for example, “4” in the present embodiment) as the initial value of the prize search counter, and sets the initial value in the B register (S763).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the payout number of medals (any one, two, five, and eight in this embodiment) in the C register based on the address set in the HL register. The data to be judged is set in the A register, and "2" is added to the address set in the HL register (+2 is updated) (S764). In the payout number data table, the data of the payout number of medals is defined as, for example, “payout number (1, 2, 5 or 8)*2+0”. Further, hereinafter, the data “0” in the data “Payout number (1, 2, 5, or 8)*2+0” of the payout number of medals set in the C register is referred to as “determination bit”. This determination bit is information indicating whether or not the block is a determination target block for the winning search.

Next, the main CPU 101 extracts the value of the determination bit from the data of the number of paid-out medals set in the C register (S765). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a determination target block based on the value of the extracted determination bit (S766). In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines that the block is the determination target block when the value of the extracted determination bit is “1”. Note that, in the present embodiment, the value of the determination bit is always set to "0" regardless of the number of paid-out medals, and therefore the process of S766 is always a NO determination.

In S766, when the main CPU 101 determines that the block is not the determination target block (NO in S766), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S768 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S766 that the block is the determination target block (YES in S766), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the address of the winning operation flag storage area set in the DE register (- 1 update) (S767).

After the processing of S767 or when the determination of S766 is NO, the main CPU 101 extracts the data in the storage area designated by the address of the winning operation flag storage area set in the DE register as the determination data (S768).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the determination is a win based on the determination target data set in the A register in S764 and the determination data extracted in S768 (S769). In this process, if the determination target data set in the A register in S764 is the same as the determination data extracted in S768, the main CPU 101 determines that the determination result is a winning.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S769 that the result of the determination is not a win (in the case of NO determination in S769), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S776 described later. On the other hand, in S769, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the determination is a win (in the case of YES determination in S769), the main CPU 101 determines that the current game is a three-card game (a game in which the number of medals is three) ) Is determined (S770).

In S770, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current game is a three-card game (YES in S770), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S772 described later. On the other hand, in S770, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current game is not the 3-card game (NO in S770), the main CPU 101 pays out the 2-card game (the game in which the number of medals is 2). The number of sheets is set in the C register (S771). In the present embodiment, since there is no two-card game, the processes of S770 and S771 are unnecessary.

After the processing of S771 or when the determination of S770 is YES, the main CPU 101 performs update processing of the payout number (S772). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the payout number of medals set in the C register to the current prize number counter value, and sets the value after the addition as the payout number.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the payout number is less than the maximum payout number “15” (S773).

In S773, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the payout number is less than the maximum payout number “15” (YES in S773), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S775 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S773 that the value of the payout number is not less than the maximum payout number "15" (NO in S773), the main CPU 101 sets the maximum payout number "15" to the payout number. Yes (S774).

After the processing of S774 or when the determination in S773 is YES, the main CPU 101 stores the payout number in the winning number counter (S775).

After the processing of S775 or if NO in S769, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is another winning (S776). In S776, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is another winning (in the case of YES determination in S776), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S769, and repeats the processes of S769 and thereafter.

On the other hand, in S776, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no other winning (NO in S776), the main CPU 101 decrements (-1 updates) the value of the winning retrieval counter (S777). Note that, for example, when the number of activated lines is one, a plurality of small wins do not overlap, and therefore the determination process of S776 is always a NO determination.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the prize search counter is "0" (S778).

In S778, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the prize search counter is not “0” (NO in S778), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S764 and repeats the processes from S764. On the other hand, in S778, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the prize search counter is “0” (YES in S778), the main CPU 101 ends the prize search process and executes the process in the main flow (FIG. (See 56)).

[Illegal hit check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the illegal hit check processing performed in S215 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of illegal hit check processing. In addition, the illegal hit is a lottery number in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 64) and is stored in the winning number storage area in the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65) as a special winning number and a small winning number (internal winning combination). Based on this, the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are terms indicating that they are stopped on the activated line with a symbol combination that cannot be established (symbol combination is not established).

First, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25) (S781). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the size of the winning operation flag storage area (the number of bytes, “9” in this embodiment) to the value of the check counter (S782).

Next, the main CPU 101, based on the address of the winning action flag storage area that is currently set, the internal winning combination stored in the storage area in the hit request flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area) corresponding to the address. Data (hit request flag data) is acquired (S783). Next, the main CPU 101 combines the data of the winning combination (winning operation flag data) stored at the address of the currently set winning operation flag storage area and the data of the internal winning combination (winning request flag data) ( S784).

In this synthesizing process, the main CPU 101 first obtains the exclusive OR of the data of the winning combination (winning operation flag data) and the data of the internal winning combination (winning request flag data). Next, the main CPU 101 obtains a logical product of the calculated exclusive logical sum calculation result and the winning combination data (prize operation flag data), and sets the logical product calculation result as a combination result. When the illegal hit error does not occur, the value of this combined result is "0".

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an illegal hit error has occurred based on the result of the combining process of S784 (S785).

In S785, when the main CPU 101 determines that an illegal hit error has not occurred (NO in S785), the main CPU 101 updates the address of the winning operation flag storage area to be referenced by +1 (S786). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the check counter (S787). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the check counter is "0" (S788).

In S788, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the check counter is not “0” (NO in S788), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S783 and repeats the processes from S783. On the other hand, in S788, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the check counter is “0” (YES in S788), the main CPU 101 ends the illegal hit check process and executes the process in the main flow (FIG. (See 56)).

Here, returning again to the processing of S785, when the main CPU 101 determines in S785 that an illegal hit error has occurred (when YES is determined in S785), the main CPU 101 performs the error processing described in FIG. Is performed (S789). By this processing, a 2-digit 7-segment LED (for both display of payout number and error display) included in the information display 6 is used to display two characters “EE” indicating occurrence of illegal hit error as error information. Error display data is output. The occurrence state of the illegal hit error (error state) is canceled by pressing the reset switch 76 (see FIG. 6).

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the value of the winning number counter and the data in the hit request flag storage area (S790). Then, after the processing of S790, the main CPU 101 ends the illegal hit check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S216 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, the winning operation flag storage area (display combination storing area) has the same structure as that of the hit request flag storing area (internal winning combination storing area). The winning request flag storage area and the winning action flag storage area, which are arranged in the main RAM 103 during the process of combining the winning combination of the storage area and the internal winning combination, can have the same configuration. Therefore, the calculation result of S784 in the illegal hit check processing of the present embodiment (the result of combining the data of the winning combination and the data of the internal winning combination) is simply the logical product of the data of the winning combination and the data of the internal winning combination. (For example, executed by "AND" instruction). As a result, in the present embodiment, the illegal hit check processing can be made efficient and simplified, the free space of the main control program can be secured (increased), and the increased free space is used to improve the game playability. It becomes possible to raise.

[Prize check/medal payout processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the winning check/medal payout processing performed in S216 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning check/medal payout processing.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation command generation process (S801). In this processing, the main CPU 101 generates type data and various communication parameters included in the winning operation command transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. It should be noted that the winning operation command includes parameters for specifying a winning operation flag (display combination) and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the communication data storage processing described in FIG. 50 (S802). By this processing, the winning operation command data is saved in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The winning operation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by a communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is "0" (S803). In S803, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning number counter is “0” (YES in S803), the main CPU 101 ends the winning check/medal payout process, and executes the process in the main flow ( (See FIG. 56) The process proceeds to S217.

On the other hand, in S803, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning number counter is not “0” (NO in S803), the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits (the number of stored coins) of the medal is the upper limit number (the present number). In the embodiment, it is determined whether the number is 50 or more (S804).

In S804, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits of medals is not equal to or more than the upper limit (NO in S804), the main CPU 101 adds “1” to the value of the credit counter (+1 update) ( S805). The added credit counter value is displayed by a two-digit 7-segment LED (not shown) for displaying the number of stored sheets, which is included in the information display 6. Next, the main CPU 101 executes a medal payout number check process (S806). The details of the medal payout number check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the payout of medals has been completed (S807). In S807, when the main CPU 101 determines that the payout of medals is completed (YES in S807), the main CPU 101 ends the winning check/medal payout process, and the process is in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Then, the process proceeds to S217.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S807 that the payout of medals has not been completed (NO in S807), the main CPU 101 performs payout interval standby processing (S808). In this process, the main CPU 101 waits until a preset medal payout interval time (60.33 msec in this embodiment: 54 cycles of an interrupt process (1.1172 msec cycle) described later in FIG. 79) elapses. Wait. After the processing of S808, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S803 and repeats the processing of S803 and thereafter.

Here, again returning to the processing of S804, in S804, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits of medals is the upper limit number (50) or more (when YES is determined in S804), the main CPU 101 determines A medal payout process is performed (S809). By this processing, medals that have not been accumulated as the number of credits are paid out. Even in the process of S809, the processes of S806 to 806 may be repeated each time one medal is paid out until the medal payout is completed. After the processing of S809, the main CPU 101 ends the winning check/medal payout processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S217 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Medal payout number check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the medal payout number check process performed in S806 of the prize check/medal payout process (see FIG. 75) will be described. Note that FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the medal payout number check processing.

First, the main CPU 101 adds “1” to the value of the medal OUT counter (+1 update) (S811). The medal OUT counter is a counter for counting the number of payouts of medals. Next, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the payout number counter (+1 update) (S812). The payout number counter is a counter for counting the payout number of medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a payout number 7SEG display process (S813). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a control process for displaying the value of the payout amount counter by a 2-digit 7-segment LED (not shown) for displaying the payout amount included in the information display 6.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the combination end number counter (S814). In addition, the winning combination consecutive number counter, the bonus combination is won (the combination of the combination "C_red same color BB", "C_blue same color BB", "C_red different color BB" or "C_blue different color BB" is available). Then, when the bonus game starts, the number of payouts that can be paid out in the bonus game is set (see FIG. 77 described later), the remaining number of payouts of medals during the bonus game is counted, and the bonus game is finished. This is a counter for making a determination (see S822 in FIG. 77 described later). In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the value of the combination end number counter with its lower limit value "0", and when the value of the combination end number counter is larger than the lower limit value "0", the combination end number. The value of the counter is decremented by 1 (updated by -1), and when the value of the combination end number counter is less than or equal to the lower limit value "0", the value of the combination end number counter is held at "0". Note that the payout number set in the combination end number counter is not the number actually paid out to the player. For example, the combination end number counter is set to 240, and the combination end number counter is set to 240. When 15 medals are paid out in this state, the actual payout number is 255. The winning combination ending number counter becomes “0” after paying out 240 pieces, and thereafter, the lower limit value “0” of the value of the winning combination ending number counter is maintained.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning number counter (-1 update) (S815).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes credit information command generation processing (S816). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates type data and various communication parameters included in the credit information command transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. The credit information command includes a parameter that specifies the number of credits of a medal.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the communication data storage processing described in FIG. 50 (S817). By this processing, the credit information command data is saved in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The credit information command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by a communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. Then, after the processing of S817, the main CPU 101 ends the medal payout number check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S807 in the winning check/medal payout processing (see FIG. 75).

[BB check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the BB check processing performed in S217 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the BB check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the bonus state (S821). In S821, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current game state is not the bonus state (NO in S821), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S831 described later.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S821 that the current game state is the bonus state (YES in S821), the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the combination end number counter is "0" or less. It is determined whether or not (S822). In S822, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the combination end number counter is not equal to or less than “0” (NO in S822), the main CPU 101 ends the BB check process and executes the process in the main flow (FIG. (Refer to 56)).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S822 that the value of the combination end number counter is "0" or less (YES in S822), the main CPU 101 performs the bonus end process (S823). In this process, the main CPU 101 clears various information in the bonus state. Next, the main CPU 101 sets the RT4 state flag to the ON state (S824). In this processing, the main CPU 101 sets the RT state after the bonus state ends to the RT4 state. Then, after the processing of S824, the main CPU 101 ends the BB check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

Here, again, returning to the processing of S821, when the determination of S821 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines that the main CPU 101 has a symbol combination (combination “C_red same color BB”, “C_blue same color BB”, “C_red different color BB”). Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the "C_blue different color BB" symbol combination) is displayed (S825). In S825, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the BB combination is not displayed (NO in S825), the main CPU 101 ends the BB check process and executes the process in the main flow (see FIG. 56). The process moves to S218 in the process.

On the other hand, in S825, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the BB combination is displayed (YES in S825), the main CPU 101 performs the bonus operation time process (S826). In this process, various processes necessary for starting the operation of the bonus such as setting a bonus state in the game state of the next game are performed. Next, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (the number of payouts that triggers the end of bonus: “240” in BB1 and BB2, “165” in BB3 and BB4) in the value of the combination end number counter (in this embodiment). S827). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the RT5 state flag to the off state (S828). In this process, the main CPU 101 clears the RT state before starting the bonus state. Then, after the processing of S828, the main CPU 101 ends the BB check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[RT check processing]
Next, the RT check processing performed in S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described with reference to FIG. 78. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the RT check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the bonus state (S831). In S831, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current game state is the bonus state (YES in S831), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process, and the process is the main flow (see FIG. 56). The process moves to S219 in the process.

On the other hand, in S831, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is not the bonus state (NO in S831), the main CPU 101 determines whether the RT state is the RT5 state (inter-flag state). Is determined (S832). In S832, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is the RT5 state (YES in S832), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process, and the process proceeds to S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move to processing.

On the other hand, in S832, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is not the RT5 state (NO in S832), the main CPU 101 determines whether the RT state is the RT3 state (S833). When the main CPU 101 determines in S833 that the RT state is not the RT3 state (NO in S833), the main CPU 101 shifts to the process of S837.

On the other hand, in S833, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is the RT3 state (YES in S833), the main CPU 101 decrements the RT game number counter by 1 (S834). That is, the main CPU 101 manages the game period in the RT3 state. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the RT game number counter has become 0 (S835). In S835, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT game number counter is not 0 (NO in S835), the main CPU 101 terminates the RT check process and executes the process in the main flow (see FIG. 56). The process moves to S219 in the process.

On the other hand, in S835, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT game number counter has become 0 (YES in S835), the main CPU 101 sets the RT0 state flag to the ON state and the RT3 state flag to the OFF state. Is set (cleared) to (S836). By this processing, the RT state becomes the RT0 state. After the processing of S836, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

In S833, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is not the RT3 state (NO in S833), the main CPU 101 displays the symbol combination relating to the transition to RT3 (combination “S_RT3 transition”). It is determined whether or not (S837). In S837, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols relating to the transition to RT3 is displayed (YES in S837), the main CPU 101 sets the RT3 state flag to the ON state, and the RT game number counter. 8 is set (S838). In this case, the other RT state flags are set to the off state. By this processing, the RT state becomes the RT3 state. Then, after the processing of S838, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S837, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the transition to RT3 is not displayed (NO in S837), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols related to the transition to RT1 (combination “R_RT1 It is determined whether or not the "transition pattern" is displayed (S839). In S839, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the transition to RT1 is not displayed (NO in S839), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols related to the RT1 transition rep (combination “S_RT1 transition rep It is determined whether or not the "combination of symbols" is displayed (S840).

In S839, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the RT1 transition is displayed (YES in S839), and in S840, the main CPU 101 displays the symbol combination related to the RT1 transition lip. If it is determined that the answer is YES (YES in S840), the main CPU 101 sets the RT1 state flag to the ON state (S841). In this case, the other RT state flags are set to the off state. By this processing, the RT state becomes the RT1 state. Then, after the processing of S841, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S840, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols relating to the RT1 transition rep is not displayed (NO in S840), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols relating to the RT2 transition rep (combination “S_RT2”). It is determined whether or not a “combination lip” symbol combination) is displayed (S842). When the main CPU 101 determines in S842 that the combination of symbols relating to the RT2 shift rep is displayed (YES in S842), the main CPU 101 sets the RT2 state flag to the ON state (S843). In this case, the other RT state flags are set to the off state. By this processing, the RT state becomes the RT2 state. Then, after the processing of S843, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S842, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination relating to the RT2 transition rep is not displayed (NO in S842), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols relating to the RT0 transition rep (combination “S_RT0”). It is determined whether or not a "combination of symbols" is displayed (S844). When the main CPU 101 determines in S844 that the combination of symbols relating to the RT0 transition rep is displayed (YES in S844), the main CPU 101 sets the RT0 state flag to the ON state (S845). In this case, the other RT state flags are set to the off state. By this processing, the RT state becomes the RT0 state. Then, after the processing of S845, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56). On the other hand, in S844, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols relating to the RT0 transition rep is not displayed (NO in S844), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process and executes the process in the main flow ( (See FIG. 56 ).

[Interrupt Processing Under Control of Main CPU (1.1172 msec)] Next, with reference to FIG. 79, an interrupt processing performed by the main CPU 101 in a 1.1172 msec cycle will be described. Note that FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the interrupt processing. The interrupt process that is repeatedly executed at a cycle of 1.1172 msec occurs based on the output timing of the timeout signal of the timer circuit 113 set in the initialization process of the timer circuit 113 (PTC) (see S2 in FIG. 46). This is a process executed when an interrupt request signal from the interrupt controller 112 is input to the main CPU 101.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process (S901). Next, the main CPU 101 executes an input port check process (S902). In this processing, various switches such as a start switch 79 and a stop switch connected via the external bus interface 104, index sensors (not shown) provided on each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, etc. The signals input from the various sensors are checked. In the present embodiment, these various switches and various sensors pass through the cabinet side relay board 44, the door relay terminal board 68, the reel relay terminal board 74, and the like, and the input port IC (non-operating) via the external bus interface 104. It is connected to the input terminal of the input IC which is connected to the output terminal of (shown). In the main RAM 103, the main CPU 101 stores an input port storage area (not shown) for storing the state of the input port IC (in the present embodiment, simply referred to as “input port”) connected to the external bus interface 104. ) Is assigned. Here, the input port storage area is, for example, an input port storage area 1 for storing the current state of the input port, and an input port storage area 2 for storing the state of the input port before the interrupt processing. Composed of. Then, in this process, the main CPU 101 first saves various information stored in the input port storage area 1 in the input port storage area 2, and then stores various information read from the input port in the input port storage area 1. To do. The connection configuration of various switches and various sensors and the configuration of the input port storage area are not limited to those described above. That is, the main CPU 101 may have a configuration in which the on/off states of various switches and various sensors can be recognized.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes reel control processing (S903). In this process, the main CPU 101 starts the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the rotation start of all reels is requested, and thereafter, the respective reels rotate at a constant speed. Drives and controls three stepping motors. When the number of sliding symbols is determined, the main CPU 101 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding symbols. Then, the main CPU 101 waits until the updated symbol counter coincides with the value corresponding to the planned stop position (the symbol at the planned stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the display window), and then the corresponding reel. The corresponding stepping motor is drive-controlled so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes communication data transmission processing (S904). In this process, mainly, various commands stored in the communication data storage area are transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 via the first serial communication circuit 114 (see FIG. 8) of the main control circuit 90. The details of the communication data transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the inserted medal passage check process (S905). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of checking whether or not the inserted medal has passed through the selector 66, based on the detection result (medal sensor input state) of each medal sensor (see FIG. 5).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs 7-segment LED drive processing (S906). In this process, the main CPU 101 drives and controls various 7-segment LEDs included in the information display device 6 to display, for example, the number of medals paid out, the number of credits, stop button press order data, and the like. The details of the 7-segment LED drive processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes timer update processing (S907). In this processing, the main CPU 101 counts (subtracts) the various set timers. The details of the timer updating process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs error detection processing (S908). Next, the main CPU 101 executes door open/close check processing (S909). In the door open/close check process, the main CPU 101 checks the open/closed state of the front door 2b (see FIG. 2) by checking the on (door closed)/off (door open) state of the door open/close monitor switch 67.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a test firing test signal control process (S910). In this process, a control process for outputting various test signals to the tester via the second interface boat or the like is performed. Further, this processing is executed using the non-regular work area of the main RAM 103 (see FIG. 11C). In addition, in this embodiment, this process is performed also at the time other than the test firing test (after the pachi-slot 1 is installed in the game shop), but at this time, the main control board 71 passes through the second interface boat or the like. Since various test signals are generated, they are not output because they are not connected to the tester.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes register restoration processing (S911). Then, after the processing of S912, the main CPU 101 ends the interrupt processing.

[Communication data transmission process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the communication data transmission process performed in S904 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 79) will be described. Note that FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the communication data transmission process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs WDT setting processing (S961). In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs processing such as restarting the WDT in the reset controller 106. The details of the WDT setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the command transmission start timer has counted up (S962). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transmission of communication data is being delayed. In S962, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer has not counted up (NO in S962), the main CPU 101 ends the communication data transmission process and interrupts the process (FIG. 79). (Refer)) to the processing of S905.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S962 that the command transmission start timer has counted up (YES in S962), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the communication data has been completely transmitted (S963). .. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the data stored in the command status register (not shown) of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1), and if the data indicating the completion of transmission is stored, the communication data Determines that the transmission is completed, and if the data indicating the completion of the transmission is not stored, the communication data is determined not to be transmitted.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S963 that the communication data has not been transmitted (NO in S963), the main CPU 101 ends the communication data transmission process and interrupts the process (see FIG. 79). The process moves to S905 in the middle. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S963 that the communication data has been completely transmitted (YES in S963), the main CPU 101 performs communication data acquisition processing (S964). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of acquiring communication data (command data) from the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the acquired communication data includes untransmitted data (S965). In S965, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is untransmitted data in the acquired communication data (YES in S965), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S969 described below.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S965 that there is no untransmitted data in the acquired communication data (NO in S965), the main CPU 101 sets the no-operation command data in each register (S966). ). The non-operation command data is information (for example, that these operations have been performed) related to a game operation of the player (for example, a throw-in operation, a start operation, and a stop operation as an operation for advancing the game). Each parameter is set so as not to include the information indicating (1) or the information indicating the internal winning combination determined based on the start operation. The parameters of the non-operation command data include, for example, a parameter indicating the on/off state of each switch in the pachi-slot 1, and a parameter indicating the on/off state of each sensor (for example, the input port storage area 1 And information stored in the input port storage area 2). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 side may determine the possibility of malfunction or failure of these switches or sensors.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs communication data storage processing (see FIG. 50) (S967). That is, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing the no-operation command data generated in S966 in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 executes communication data acquisition processing (S968). That is, the main CPU 101 performs a process of acquiring the no-operation command data stored in the communication data storage area in S967.

Thus, in this embodiment, at least a non-operation command is transmitted for each interrupt process (see FIG. 79) even when there is no communication data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200. It is like this. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized communication data from being transmitted from the outside due to the absence of communication data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200. From this point of view, the non-operation command data does not include information related to the game operation of the player, but the content of each parameter to be set is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate. Is.

After the processing of S968 or if the determination of S965 is YES, the main CPU 101 sets the buffer size for one packet in the transmission counter (S969). In this embodiment, since the transmission data for one packet is 8 bytes, the buffer size for one packet is also composed of 8 bytes. In addition, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of communication data (command data) is stored in the communication data storage area, the communication data is transmitted in the order of storage (oldest stored first) (FIFO format). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the transmission data from the communication buffer and sets it in the transmission data register (S970). Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets transmission data in 1-byte units in a transmission data register (not shown) of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1). As a result, the set transmission data is transferred to the transmission shift register (not shown) of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1) and transmitted for each packet.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates (+1) the address of the communication buffer by "1" (S971). Next, the main CPU 101 decrements the transmission counter by "1" (S972). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transmission counter is "0" (S973). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transmission of the transmission data for one packet is completed. In S973, when the main CPU 101 determines that the transmission counter is not “0” (NO in S973), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S970 and repeats the processes of S970 and subsequent steps.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S973 that the transmission counter is "0" (YES in S973), the main CPU 101 performs communication data pointer update processing (see, for example, FIG. 51) (S974). ). Then, after the processing of S974, the main CPU 101 ends the communication data transmission processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S905 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

[WDT setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the WDT setting process performed in S961 during the communication data transmission process (see FIG. 80) will be described. Note that FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the WDT setting process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the WDT clear register (not shown) in the WDT in the reset controller 106 (S981). Next, the main CPU 101 sets clear data (eg, “55H”) at the set address (S982). Next, the main CPU 101 sets restart data (for example, "AAH") at the set address (S983).

Next, the main CPU 101 compares the command transmission start timer with its lower limit value “0”, and when the command transmission start timer is larger than the lower limit value “0”, decrements the command transmission start timer by 1 (-1 update). If the command transmission start timer is equal to or lower than the lower limit value "0", the command transmission start timer is held at "0" (S984). After the processing of S984, the main CPU 101 ends the WDT setting processing, and moves the processing to the processing of S962 of the communication data transmission processing (see FIG. 80).

As described above, in this embodiment, the WDT reset setting and management information (WDT enable/disable, reference clock, timeout time (for example, 419.4 ms), etc.) are stored in the program management area. By performing the processing of S983, the set timeout time is remeasured. When the reset signal is output due to the timeout and the main CPU 101 is restarted, the main CPU 101 is restarted without the power-off (external) process (see FIG. 52) being executed. The sum value calculated by (53) is not stored in the main RAM 103 (sum value storage area). Therefore, in this case, the result of the sum check determination in the power-on process (see S11 of FIG. 46) is not normal (that is, "RAM abnormality"), and the information display 6 (7-segment LED display) displays an error. A character string "88" meaning occurrence is displayed.

[7-segment LED drive processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the 7-segment LED drive processing performed in S906 during the interrupt processing (see FIG. 79) will be described. Note that FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 7-segment LED drive processing.

First, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the interrupt counter (+1 update) (S921). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the interrupt counter is an odd number (S922).

In S922, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the interrupt counter is not an odd number (NO in S922), the main CPU 101 ends the 7-segment LED drive process and interrupts the process (see FIG. 79). ) To S907. That is, in the present embodiment, the 7-segment LED driving process is performed every two interrupt cycles. In the present embodiment, an example in which the 7-segment LED drive processing is executed when the value of the interrupt counter is an even number has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and 7-segment LED drive processing is performed when the value of the interrupt counter is an odd number. The LED drive processing may be executed, or the execution timing of the 7-segment LED drive processing may be determined using the quotient or the remainder when the value of the interrupt counter is divided by an arbitrary integer.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S922 that the value of the interrupt counter is an odd number (YES in S922), the main CPU 101 acquires navigation data from the navigation data storage area (S923). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the push order display data storage area for storing the push order display data output to each cathode of the 7-segment LED (S924).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs 7-segment display data generation processing (S925). In this process, the main CPU 101 creates push order display data (7-segment display data) based on the navigation data, and stores the generated push order display data in the push order display data storage area. The details of the 7-segment display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the value of the credit counter (S926). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the credit display data storage area for storing the credit display data output to each cathode of the 7-segment LED (S927).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs 7-segment display data generation processing (S928). In this processing, the main CPU 101 generates credit display data (7-segment display data) based on the value of the credit counter, and stores the generated credit display data in the credit display data storage area. The details of the 7-segment display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the 7-segment common counter storage area for storing the value of the 7-segment common counter described later (S929). Next, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the 7-segment common counter (+1 update) (S930). In this process, when the updated 7-segment common counter value becomes "8", the main CPU 101 sets the 7-segment common counter value to "0". In the present embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is dynamically controlled, the value of the 7-segment common counter is updated every eight cycles.

Next, the main CPU 101 creates common selection data based on the value of the 7-segment common counter, and outputs the address of the target cathode data storage area (the push order display data storage area or the target storage area in the credit display data storage area). Is set (S931). Next, the main CPU 101 outputs clear data to the cathode of the 7-segment LED (S932). This processing is performed in order to turn off the 7-segment LED to eliminate the influence of the afterimage.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires and sets 7-segment cathode output data from the target cathode data storage area (S933). Next, the main CPU 101 generates 7-segment common output data from the 7-segment common backup data and the common selection data (S934).

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the 7-segment common output data and the 7-segment cathode output data in the 7-segment common backup data and the 7-segment cathode backup data, respectively (S935). Next, the main CPU 101 outputs 7-segment cathode output data and 7-segment common output data (S936). Then, after the processing of S936, the main CPU 101 ends the 7-segment LED driving processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S907 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

[7-segment display data generation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the 7-segment display data generation process performed in S925 and S928 in the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82) will be described. Note that FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 7-segment display data generation process.

The "display data" described below, which is generated by the 7-segment display data generation process performed in S925 of the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82), corresponds to the push-order display data, and the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. “Display data”, which will be described later, generated in the 7-segment display data generation process performed in S928 of FIG. 82) corresponds to credit display data.

First, the main CPU 101 divides the display data set in the cathode data storage area by “10”, obtains the quotient value of the division result as the display data of the upper digit of the 2-digit 7-segment LED, and performs the division. The residual value of the result is acquired as the display data of the lower digit (S941). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether to display upper digits based on the acquired upper digit display data (S942).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S942 that the high-order digit display is to be performed (YES in S942), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S944 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S942 that the upper digit is not displayed (NO in S942), the main CPU 101 sets no upper digit display (S943).

After the processing of S943 or when the determination of S942 is YES, the main CPU 101 refers to a 7-segment cathode table (not shown) and acquires the display data of the higher digit (S944). Next, the main CPU 101 saves the acquired upper digit display data in the upper digit display data storage area (not shown) (S945).

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to a 7-segment cathode table (not shown) to acquire display data of lower digits (S946). Next, the main CPU 101 saves the acquired lower-order digit display data in the lower-order digit display data storage area (not shown) (S947).

Then, after the processing of S947, the main CPU 101 ends the 7-segment display data generation processing. At this time, if the executed 7-segment display data generation process is the process of S925 in the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to the process of S926 in the 7-segment LED drive process. Transfer. On the other hand, when the executed 7-segment display data generation process is the process of S928 in the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to the process of S929 in the 7-segment LED drive process. ..

[Timer update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the timer updating process performed in S907 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 79) will be described. Note that FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the timer updating process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the update start address of the 2-byte timer storage area (not shown) in the HL register, and sets the 2-byte timer number in the B register (S951). The 2-byte timer storage area is used to manage a time of 286 ms (256×1.1172 ms) or more (that is, a timer value exceeding 1 byte).

Next, the main CPU 101 compares the 2-byte timer number with the lower limit value "0", and if the 2-byte timer number is larger than the lower limit value "0", subtracts 1 from the 2-byte timer number (-1 update). If the 2-byte timer number is less than or equal to the lower limit value "0", the 2-byte timer number is held at "0" (S952). Further, in the processing of S952, the main CPU 101 subtracts 2 (-2 updates) from the update start address of the 2-byte timer storage area set in the HL register. Note that, for example, since the command transmission start timer is also a 2-byte timer, the update may be performed in this processing (see FIG. 81).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the 2-byte timer number set in the B register (updates -1) (S953). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the 2-byte timer number set in the B register is "0" (S954).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S954 that the number of 2-byte timers set in the B register is not “0” (NO in S954), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S952, and the processes in S952 and subsequent steps are performed. Repeat the process.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S954 that the 2-byte timer number set in the B register is “0” (YES in S954), the main CPU 101 sets the 1-byte timer storage area in the HL register. The update start address is set, and the 1-byte timer number is set in the B register (S955). The 1-byte timer storage area is used for managing a time period shorter than 286 ms (256×1.1172 ms) (that is, a timer value that does not exceed 1 byte). For example, a medal monitoring timer or the like is updated as a 1-byte timer.

Next, the main CPU 101 compares the 1-byte timer number with the lower limit value “0”, and if the 1-byte timer number is larger than the lower limit value “0”, subtracts 1 from the 1-byte timer number (-1 update). If the 1-byte timer number is less than or equal to the lower limit value "0", the 1-byte timer number is held at "0" (S956). Further, in the processing of S956, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 (-1 update) from the update start address of the 1-byte timer storage area set in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the 1-byte timer number set in the B register (-1 update) (S957). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the 1-byte timer number set in the B register is "0" (S958).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S958 that the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register is not "0" (NO in S958), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S956 and executes the processes in S956 and thereafter. Repeat the process.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S958 that the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register is "0" (YES in S958), the main CPU 101 performs electromagnetic counter control processing (S959). ). In this process, an output control process for outputting a signal indicating IN/OUT of the medal to the external centralized terminal board 47 is performed. Then, after the processing of S959, the main CPU 101 ends the timer updating processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S908 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

<Explanation of operation when power is turned on>
Next, the operation of the pachi-slot according to the embodiment of the present invention when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the pachi-slot 1 when the power is turned on.

In FIG. 85, “MainCPU” indicates the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90), and “SubCPU” indicates the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200).

In addition, in FIG. 85, the operation state "security mode" of "MainCPU" indicates the above-mentioned security mode, and the operation state "start delay period" of "MainCPU" is described above after the end of the security mode. The command transmission start timer is set, and the period until the set command transmission start timer becomes "0" (that is, the setting change is possible but the transmission of communication data is delayed) is shown. The operation state “normal operation period” of “MainCPU” indicates a state in which the delay of the transmission of the communication data has ended and the communication data can be transmitted to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200).

Further, in FIG. 85, the operation state “initialization” of the “SubCPU” is the initialization (startup) process (hardware start-up time, BIOS (driver) initialization, kernel process when the sub CPU 201 (sub-control circuit 200) is powered on. (OS) startup (that is, a state in which communication data transmitted from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90) cannot be received), and the operating state “normal operating period” of “SubCPU” is This shows a state in which the initialization (startup) process at the time of turning on the power is completed and the communication data transmitted from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90) can be received.

In addition, in FIG. 85, in the “setting operation A”, the setting change is started in the “start delay period” (for example, the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state and the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on), and then the “normal operation” is performed. The operation when the setting change is completed in the “operation period”, and the “transmission mode A” is the setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting change in the case of “setting operation A”. The transmission timing of a command (setting change/setting confirmation end) (COM2) is shown. In the “MainCPU setting change process” under “Transmission mode A”, the setting change command is the communication of the main RAM 103 in the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) by the main CPU 101 in the case of “Transmission mode A”. The timing at which the data is stored (registered) in the data storage area (see also the setting change command generation and storage processing of FIG. 49 and the communication data storage processing of FIG. 50) is shown.

Further, in FIG. 85, in the “setting operation B”, the setting change is started in the “start delay period” (for example, the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state and the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on), and then the “setting operation B” is performed. The operation when the setting change is completed in the "startup delay period" is shown. "Transmission mode B" is the setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting in the case of "setting operation B". The transmission timing of a change command (setting change/setting confirmation end) (COM2) is shown. In the “Main CPU setting change process” under “Transmission mode B”, the setting change command is the communication of the main RAM 103 in the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) by the main CPU 101 in the case of “Transmission mode B”. The timing at which the data is stored (registered) in the data storage area (see also the setting change command generation and storage processing of FIG. 49 and the communication data storage processing of FIG. 50) is shown.

When the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on and the reset signal is input, the security section (not shown) of the microprocessor 91 controls the operation mode to the security mode. In the security mode, activation of the main CPU 101 is delayed for a period according to the setting stored in the security setting area. When the security mode ends, the main CPU 101 delays the transmission of communication data for a predetermined period. The main CPU 101 can change the setting even when the transmission of the communication data is delayed.

Here, as shown in “setting operation A”, when the setting change is started during the delay of the transmission of the communication data and the setting change is ended after the delay of the transmission of the communication data ends, the main CPU 101 determines that the communication When the delay of data transmission ends, a setting change command (setting change/start of setting confirmation) (COM1) is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and when the setting change is completed, the setting change command (setting Change/setting confirmation end) (COM2) is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

On the other hand, as shown in “setting operation B”, when the setting change is started during the delay of the transmission of the communication data and the setting change is ended during the delay of the transmission of the communication data as well, the main CPU 101 determines that the communication data When the transmission delay ends, a setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation start) (COM1) and a setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation end) (COM2) are sequentially transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. .. That is, when the delay of transmission of communication data is completed, a setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation start) (COM1) and a setting change command (setting change/setting confirmation end) (COM2) are stored in the communication data storage area. If registered, these communication data are transmitted in the order of registration.

As described above, according to the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, by delaying the activation of the main CPU 101 when the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on, it is possible to stably activate the main control circuit 90 and to activate the main CPU 101. After the delay ends, by delaying the transmission of the communication data, it is possible to secure the time required to activate the sub control circuit 200 and stably activate the sub control circuit 200.

After the delay of the start of the main CPU 101 is completed, the setting can be changed even before the delay of the transmission of the communication data is completed. Therefore, for example, when the opening operation is performed in the game shop, When the power of No. 1 is turned on (that is, when the reset signal is input accordingly), the setting can be changed in advance without waiting for the completion of activation of the sub control circuit 200. It is possible to improve work efficiency in.

Furthermore, if the settings are changed before the delay in sending the communication data ends, the communication data indicating these are registered at the start of the settings change or at the end of the settings change, and the delay in the transmission of the communication data is delayed. Since these communication data are transmitted in the order in which they are registered when the operation is completed, even if the setting is changed in advance without waiting for the completion of the activation of the sub control circuit 200, As a result, it is possible to prevent the information held between the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200 from being inconsistent. Further, for example, even in the case where the sub-control circuit 200 is configured to determine fraudulent behavior or error depending on the order of communication data transmitted from the main control circuit 90, the result of such determination It is possible to make an accurate determination without affecting the.

Further, according to the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, at least the non-operation command data is transmitted when the communication data is transmitted, even if the communication data is not registered. For example, it is possible to prevent communication data from being transmitted from the outside by an unauthorized means such as unauthorized access to the connection line between the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200. Further, since the non-operation command data is not registered and transmitted before the delay of the transmission of the communication data ends, the control load when the pachi-slot 1 is powered on can be reduced. In addition, from the viewpoint of mainly preventing fraud, the non-operation command data may not include information related to the game operation of the player.

Further, according to the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the delay period for starting the main CPU 101 is configured by a fixed period and a variable period, and these periods (or their ranges) can be appropriately selected and set. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate delay time according to the specifications of the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200. From the viewpoint of shortening the period until the setting can be changed, it is possible to set a predetermined period range in which 0 is always determined as the variable period (for example, “no setting” in the random extension period). In that case, the range of the predetermined period may be set.

Note that, in the present embodiment, an example will be described in which after the security mode ends, the setting value setting operation (setting change operation) is possible during the period in which the transmission of communication data is delayed (“start delay period”). However, the operation that can be executed during the period in which the transmission of the communication data is delayed (“activation delay period”) is not limited to this. For example, the setting key type switch 54 is turned on, the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on, and the setting key type switch 54 is turned on during a period in which transmission of communication data is delayed (“start delay period”). In this case, the setting value confirmation operation (setting confirmation operation) may be enabled during the period. As a result, for example, when opening a work in a game shop, if the setting is not changed but the current set value is desired to be confirmed, the setting can be confirmed in advance without waiting for the completion of the activation of the sub control circuit 200. Since it can be performed, it is possible to improve work efficiency when the power is turned on.

<Explanation of operation when inserting medals>
Next, the operation of the pachi-slot according to the embodiment of the present invention at the time of inserting a medal will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the pachi-slot 1 at the time of inserting a medal.

In FIG. 86, the “start switch” indicates the start switch 79, and the “medal sensor” indicates the detection states of the upstream medal sensor (first medal sensor) 806 and the downstream medal sensor (second medal sensor) 807. "Medal sensor input state" indicates that the "medal acceptance signal" indicates that the on state ("ON") is permitted to accept medals (medal acceptance permission), and the off state ("OFF") is the medal. Shows a state in which the acceptance of is prohibited (medal acceptance is prohibited) (see FIGS. 57 and 58).

Further, in FIG. 86, “solenoid” indicates the solenoid of the selector 66 (driving source that shifts the select plate 804 to the guide position or the ejection position), and “monitoring timer” indicates the medal monitoring timer (FIG. 57 and FIG. 58), "operating state", a state in the pachi-slot 1 that allows the progress of the game after the start operation ("during game") and a state that does not allow the progress of the game after the start operation ("wait for game" )) is shown.

When the number of medals that can be started in the game (three in the present embodiment) has been inserted, the main CPU 101 allows the start operation for the start lever 16 to be accepted. As shown in FIG. 86, in this state, if medals can be stored as the number of credits (if the number of credits is less than 50), the start lever 16 is started (started by the start switch 79). Until the operation is detected), the state where the medal acceptance is permitted (the state where the medal acceptance signal is “ON”) continues. Although illustration is omitted, in this state, if the medals cannot be stored as the number of credits (if the number of credits is 50), acceptance of medals is prohibited (the medal acceptance signal is “OFF”). It is a state).

In the state where the number of medals that can be started in the game (three in the present embodiment) is inserted and the medals can be stored as the number of credits, the main CPU 101 performs a start operation by the start switch 79 (first start on the left side in FIG. 86). When the operation (transition of the start switch 79 from “OFF” to “ON” is referred to as “start operation A”) is detected, the state where the acceptance of medals is permitted (the medal acceptance signal is “ON”) From a certain state) to a state where the reception of medals is prohibited (a state where the medal reception signal is “OFF”), the solenoid of the selector 66 is started to be changed to the demagnetized state, and monitoring by the medal monitoring timer ( Measurement). At this time, the above-mentioned start lever ON flag is turned on.

When the medal is inserted (that is, before the solenoid of the selector 66 completes the transition from the energized state to the demagnetized state) during the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer, the main CPU 101 inputs the medal sensor input of each medal sensor. When it is determined that a medal has been inserted based on the state), the inserted medal is counted so that the solenoid of the selector 66, which was in the process of changing from the excited state to the demagnetized state, is changed to the excited state again, Guided in the hopper device 51. Further, in this case, the "start operation A" is detected by the start switch 79, but based on the detection, the operation state is changed to a state in which the game can be advanced after the start operation ("during game"). Do not move. At this time, the above-mentioned start lever ON flag is turned off. That is, in this case, the "start operation A" is invalidated.

It should be noted that the main CPU 101 inserts a medal (that is, the medal of each medal sensor) during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer (that is, before the solenoid of the selector 66 completes the transition from the energized state to the demagnetized state). When it is determined that a medal has been inserted based on the sensor input state), the medal acceptance is further permitted from the state where the medal acceptance is prohibited (the state where the medal acceptance signal is “OFF”). You may make it change to a state (state where the medal acceptance signal is "ON").

After that, the main CPU 101 again designates the start operation by the start switch 79 (the second start operation on the right side in FIG. 86 (transition of the start switch 79 from “OFF” to “ON”) as “start operation B”). Is detected, the solenoid of the selector 66 is changed from the excited state to the demagnetized state again, and the medal monitoring timer starts monitoring (measurement) again. At this time, the above-mentioned start lever ON flag is turned on again.

Then, the main CPU 101 does not insert a medal during the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer (that is, before the transition of the solenoid of the selector 66 from the energized state to the demagnetized state is completed) (when the medal sensor of each medal sensor is operated). When it is not determined that a medal has been inserted based on the medal sensor input state), the operating state is set after the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is completed (that is, after the solenoid of the selector 66 is completely changed from the excited state to the demagnetized state). Is changed to a state in which the game can proceed after the start operation (“during game”), and the game can be advanced (that is, medal acceptance/start check processing (see FIGS. 57 and 58)). Process can be executed).

Although illustration is omitted, the main CPU 101 shifts from the state where the "start operation A" is detected by the start switch 79 and the medal acceptance is permitted (the medal acceptance signal is "ON"). Of the selector 66 is prohibited (the medal acceptance signal is “OFF”), the solenoid of the selector 66 is started to be demagnetized, and the medal monitoring timer starts monitoring (measurement). After that, during the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer (that is, before the solenoid of the selector 66 completes the transition from the energized state to the demagnetized state), no medals are inserted (the medal sensor input state of each medal sensor). Even when it is not determined that a medal has been inserted based on the above, similarly to the case where the "start operation B" is detected by the start switch 79, after the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is completed (that is, the solenoid of the selector 66 is excited). After the transition from the state to the demagnetized state is completed), the operating state is changed to a state (“in game”) that allows the progress of the game after the start operation, and it is possible to progress the game (that is, medal acceptance The processing after the start check processing (see FIGS. 57 and 58) can be executed).

As described above, according to the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when the game is started with the start operation of the player, for example, a medal monitoring timer for preventing the occurrence of “swallow” of medals is provided. Is set. With this medal monitoring timer, in the selector 66, the inserted medals are discharged from the state where the inserted medals are stored inside the gaming machine (the select plate 804 is in the guide position because the solenoid is in the excited state) to the outside of the gaming machine. The time required to physically change to the state (the state where the select plate 804 is in the ejection position due to the demagnetization state of the solenoid) is secured.

Then, when a medal is inserted during the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer, the starting operation which is the basis of the medal is invalidated, and in the selector 66, the inserted medal is placed inside the gaming machine. Return to the stored state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of "swallowing" of medals and appropriately process the inserted medals.

Further, according to the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, even when a medal is inserted during the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer, the medal is counted, so that the number of inserted medals is reduced. It is possible to prevent counting omissions, and it is possible to more appropriately process the inserted medals.

According to the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the timer value (for example, “72”) of the medal monitoring timer is changed from the state in which the inserted medals are stored inside the gaming machine to the state in which they are discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. Since it is set to a period (for example, “72”×1.1172 ms) longer than the period until physically changing (for example, 80 ms), the occurrence of “swallowing” of medals is surely prevented. As a result, the inserted medals can be processed more appropriately. In addition, when the drive unit is a solenoid as in the present embodiment, such an effect becomes more remarkable.

<Other effects that can be executed in this embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 91, an example of other effects that can be executed in the present embodiment will be described in addition to the effects described above. In the following, as an example of other effects, it is described that a bonus winning combination winning notification effect for notifying whether or not a bonus combination is won can be executed, but its use is a bonus combination. The present invention is not limited to the one that informs whether or not the winning is won.

For example, the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section may be executed to inform whether or not it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, or in the line battle state of the advantageous section, the advantageous section May be executed in order to notify whether or not is decided to continue. Further, in the right acquisition lottery state of the advantageous section, it may be executed to inform whether or not it is determined to shift to the right acquisition state, or in the right acquisition state of the advantageous section, It may be executed to notify whether or not it has been decided to grant the right. That is, it can be used as an effect executed to inform the player whether or not the privilege is granted.

(Example of a bonus winning combination notification effect (No. 1))
First, with reference to FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, an example of a bonus winning combination notification effect (No. 1) will be described. 87 and 88 show, for example, a bonus winning combination that can be displayed on the display device 11 with a predetermined probability when an internal winning combination (for example, a "chance eye") that expects a (simultaneous) winning of a bonus winning combination is determined. The production example (the 1) of information production is shown. It should be noted that FIG. 87 shows a display example when the bonus combination is not won (when the bonus combination is not won), and in FIG. 88, a display example when the bonus combination is won (when the bonus combination is won). Is shown.

As shown in FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, in the example of the bonus winning combination notification effect (No. 1), the effect entitled “Fault Searching Effect” is performed. For example, if there is an original work such as a manga, animation, or game that is used as a motif of Pachi-slot 1, this "error-finding effect" is based on an image that is the same as or close to the predetermined image in the original work. As an image, it is an effect that allows the player to find out whether there is a difference (that is, a mistake) from the base image. In this case, the predetermined image may be the original image (that is, the same image), or the original image may be A/D converted, the aspect ratio changed, and the resolution changed. Or may be a remastered (ie, approximate) image. Although the image is based on the original work, it may be an image newly created for use in the production of the pachi-slot 1.

The base image is not limited to the one described above, and can be set appropriately. For example, even when there is no original work (for example, when it is an original motif), an image that is the same as or close to the image that can be displayed in another effect in the pachi-slot 1 may be set. Further, for example, an image that is the same as or similar to the image printed in the booklet distributed at the game store for explaining the specifications of the pachi-slot 1 may be set. Further, for example, the base image does not have to be a still image, may be a moving image, and still images may be sequentially displayed in a slide format.

In the upper part of FIG. 87, an image in which five characters are displayed is displayed together with the characters “all together!”. The image is the same as the base image. Also, below the image, a message and a cursor prompting you to point out the points that differ from the base image, such as "If there is a part that is different from the image you know, place the cursor and decide!" And are displayed.

At this time, the player moves the cursor to a desired position (by performing a selection operation) by tracing a predetermined area on the display surface of the sub-display device 18 provided with the touch sensor 19 with a finger, and the sub-display is also performed. A decision button (not shown) displayed on the display surface of the device 18 is touch-operated (decision operation is performed), and a portion which the user thinks is wrong is designated.

It should be noted that the means for detecting various operations related to the production such as the selection operation and the determination operation by the player are not limited to the sub display device 18. For example, when the display device 11 is a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, a touch sensor is provided on at least a part of the display device 11 (for example, a portion where the upper display in FIG. 87 is performed). When the touch sensor detects the movement of the player's finger (when a selection operation is performed), the cursor is moved accordingly, and an enter button displayed at the place where the touch sensor is provided. When (not shown) is pressed (when a determination operation is performed), an effect of notifying the result may be performed accordingly. Further, for example, when a physical operation means (for example, a cross key and an effect button, a jog dial, etc.) capable of detecting various operations related to effects such as a selection operation and a decision operation is provided, such a physical operation means is used. The selection operation or the determination operation may be detected by. That is, any means can be applied as long as it can detect various operations related to the player's effect.

Here, for example, in the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 87, it is assumed that the player designates the portion where the character at the right end is displayed. Then, since the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 87 has no difference from the base image, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 87, the fact that the error search result in the “error search effect” has failed is notified. "I'm sorry ~ sorry" message is displayed.

On the other hand, in the upper part of FIG. 88, an image in which four characters are displayed is displayed together with the characters “all together!”. The image is different from the base image in the portion where the rightmost character is not displayed. Also, similar to FIG. 87, a point different from the base image should be pointed out as in the case of FIG. 87, such as “If there is a part different from the known image, move the cursor to make a decision!”. A message prompting you to do so and a cursor are displayed.

Here, for example, in the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 88, it is assumed that the player designates a portion where the rightmost character is not displayed. In this case, since the designated portion is a portion different from the base image, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 88, a "for finding error" "notification for notifying that the result of the error search is successful" Along with the message "around", a message "bonus confirmed!" for notifying that the bonus combination has been won is displayed.

On the other hand, for example, in the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 88, it is assumed that the player designates the portion where the character at the left end is displayed. In this case, since the designated part is not a part different from the base image, as in the lower part of FIG. 87, “off” for notifying that the result of the error search in the “error search effect” is a failure has occurred. The message "~ sorry" is displayed, and even if the bonus combination is won, it is not notified that the bonus combination is won.

The production modes shown in FIGS. 87 and 88 show an example of the production mode in the “error search production”, and for example, the following production modes can also be adopted.

For example, the base image is based on a predetermined theme in the original work (for example, the first episode in the original work), and a plurality of (for example, five) images (for example, digest images) are displayed in a slide format. It is assumed to be a thing. Then, when the bonus combination is not won, the slide images are sequentially displayed as they are, and then each image of the slide is displayed in a thumbnail shape. On the other hand, when a winning combination is won, slide images in which some of the slide images are different are sequentially displayed, and then each image of the slide is displayed in a thumbnail shape.

The player searches each of the images displayed in the thumbnail form to determine whether or not the images based on a theme different from the predetermined theme (for example, the number of stories different from the first episode in the original work) are included, and the predetermined image is displayed. The selection operation and the determination operation are performed on an image that is thought to be an image of a theme different from the theme. Then, in the case where an image of a theme different from the predetermined theme is included and the player specifies the image, the result of the error search in the “error search effect” should be successful. Good. Specifically, for example, in the first episode of the original work, although only the characters A and B appear, the slide images displayed when the bonus combination is won include the third episode and subsequent episodes of the original work. It suffices to include an image in which the character C that appears only in is displayed. By doing so, for example, a player who is attached to the original work can perform the “error search performance” with particular feelings, so that it becomes possible to further enhance the interest in the performance.

Further, as described above, in the case of displaying an image at least a part of which is different from the base image in the “error search effect”, the part different from the base image does not have to be only one place, and a plurality of places may be different. .. In this case, for example, the number of different places may be different depending on the type of the winning combination. For example, if there is one part different from the base image, it is highly possible that BB3 or BB4 is won, and if there are multiple parts different from the base image, there is a possibility that BB1 or BB2 is won. It may be higher. By doing this, it is possible to suggest even the type of bonus combination that has been won.

Also, when notifying that the result of the error search in the "error search production" was a failure, for example, a message such as "???" is displayed to clearly indicate that the result of the error search was a failure. You may not.

In addition, if a plurality of types of base images are provided and, for example, if the "chance eye" is won, one of the plurality of types of base images is determined, and thereafter, whether or not the bonus combination is won. Depending on whether to display the base image as it is, or to display as an image having a different portion at least in part, it may be determined. Further, in this case, the difficulty level for finding an error may be different depending on the type of the determined base image.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the predetermined advantageous condition is given to notify whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition (for example, winning a bonus combination) that enables control to a bonus state advantageous to the player is established. Is satisfied, the first specific image (for example, an image partially different from the base image) is displayed, and when the predetermined advantageous condition is not satisfied, the second specific image (for example, the base image) is displayed. The same image) can be displayed, and when the player performs an operation of designating a part different from the second specific image when the first specific image is displayed, the predetermined image is displayed. It is possible to display a special image (for example, a message of "bonus confirmed!") that notifies that the advantageous condition is established.

With this, it is possible to inform whether or not the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied by the new effect mode in which the predetermined operation of the player is also involved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest regarding the transition to the advantageous state for the player. Can be planned.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second specific image is an image that is the same as or similar to the predetermined image in the original work used as the motif of the gaming machine. This makes it easier for a player who is attached to the original work to recognize whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition has been established, and thus it is possible to increase the motivation for the game and further enhance the interest in the production.

(Example of a bonus winning combination notification effect (No. 2))
Next, with reference to FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, an example of a bonus winning combination notification effect (No. 2) will be described. FIG. 89 shows a bonus winning combination notification effect that can be displayed on the display device 11 with a predetermined probability when, for example, an internal winning combination (for example, a “chance eye”) that expects a (simultaneous) winning of a bonus winning combination is determined. FIG. 90 shows a timing chart of an effect example (No. 2), and FIG. 90 shows a display example of the effect example (No. 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect. In the example of the bonus winning combination notification effect (No. 2), the example in which the effect is performed by the display device 11 is described, but the example is not limited to this, and other effect devices (for example, the speaker group 84 and The effect can be executed by the LED group 85).

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, in the example of the bonus winning combination notification effect (No. 2), an effect entitled “long press effect” is performed. In this "long press effect", for example, when the stop operation in the third stop operation is long pressed in the following manner, a different effect from that in the case where it is not long pressed is performed. is there.

In the present embodiment, the operation means that is the target of the "long press" is the stop button (any one of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R) in the third stop operation. It is not limited to. For example, the stop button in the first stop operation (either the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, or the right stop button 17R) may be used, or the stop button in the second stop operation (the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C). Or the right stop button 17R). Alternatively, the stop button may be operated at a timing not directly related to the stop operation. That is, when any of the stop buttons is operated, the “long press effect” can be performed.

Further, for example, the operation means that is the target of the “long press” may be the bet button (MAX bet button 15a or 1 bet button 15b) or the start lever 16. In this case, when the bet button is operated at the timing of the medal insertion operation, the “long press” can be the target, and the bet button can be operated at the timing different from the timing of the medal insertion operation. It can also be the target of “push”. Further, in this case, when the start lever 16 is operated at the timing of the start operation, the “long press” can be targeted, and when the operation is performed at a timing different from the timing of the start operation, the “long press” is performed. It can also be the target of.

Further, for example, the operating means that is the target of the "long press" is not limited to the operating means for performing the above-described game-related operation, but may be an operating means for performing an effect-related operation. For example, it may be the sub display device 18 provided with the touch sensor 19, the display device 11 provided with the touch sensor in at least a part of the above, or the physical operation means described above.

As shown in FIG. 89, for example, when it is determined that the "long press effect" is to be executed, the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is started, and the stop switch is turned on (on edge). When 3 seconds have passed in the state (long press), "effect 1" is executed, and after that, when the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is completed and the stop switch is turned off (off edge), The “effect 2” is executed. That is, when the stop button in the third stop operation is pressed for a predetermined period (3 seconds), "effect 1" and "effect 2" are executed. When the stop switch is turned off (off edge) during execution of "effect 1", the execution of "effect 1" is ended and the execution of "effect 2" is started even in the middle.

On the other hand, for example, when it is determined that the "long press effect" is to be executed, the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is started, but the stop switch is in the on state (on edge). Before 3 seconds have elapsed, when the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is completed and the stop switch is turned off (off edge) (short press), "effect 1" is not executed and " Only production 2” is executed.

The effect pattern of "long press effect" is not limited to the one described above. For example, when pressing the stop button in the third stop operation is started and the stop switch is in the on state (on edge) for 3 seconds (long press), "production 1" and subsequently "production 2" May be included. That is, when the stop button is started to be pressed in the third stop operation and the stop switch is in the on state (on edge) for 3 seconds (long press), the stop switch is in the off state (off edge). Regardless of whether or not it is, it may have an effect pattern in which "effect 1" and "effect 2" are executed. In addition, for example, when the stop button is started to be pressed in the third stop operation and three seconds have passed while the stop switch was in the on state (on edge) (long press), only “effect 2” is executed. You may have a production pattern.

Further, for example, although the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is started, the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is completed before 3 seconds have elapsed while the stop switch is in the on state (on edge). However, when the stop switch is in the off state (off edge) (short press), there may be an effect pattern that is executed as "effect 1" and subsequently "effect 2". That is, even before the stop switch is in the on state (on edge) for 3 seconds, if the stop switch is in the off state (off edge), "effect 1" and "effect 2" are displayed. It may have an effect pattern to be executed. In addition, for example, even before 3 seconds have elapsed in the state where the stop switch is in the on state (on edge), when the stop switch is in the off state (off edge), only "effect 1" is executed. It may have a production pattern.

In the case of having a plurality of effect patterns in this way, for example, any one of these effect patterns is selected with a different selection probability depending on whether or not the bonus combination is won. You can do this. Further, in such a case, even if the stop button is started to be pressed in the third stop operation and the stop switch is in the on state (on edge) for 3 seconds, the “effect 2” is already executed. If so, "effect 1" may not be executed.

An example of a mode in which the "effect 1" and the "effect 2" shown in FIG. 89 are executed will be described with reference to FIG. 90. In addition, in FIG. 90, a display example at the time of long push and short push when the bonus combination is won will be described.

First, when it is determined that the “long press effect” is to be executed, first, at least at a predetermined timing before the stop operation of the third stop operation is performed, for example, “keep pressing”. A message is displayed, and an effect is urged that the stop button should be held down during the stop operation of the third stop operation.

Then, at the time of the stop operation of the third stop operation, if the player continues to press the stop button for 3 seconds or more, for example, "STEP1" to "STEP3" are sequentially displayed, "Demonstration 1". Is executed. Then, when the player finishes pressing the stock button, for example, “effect 2” for notifying that the bonus combination is won by displaying “WIN!” is executed. In addition, when the bonus combination is not won, in the “effect 2”, it is notified that the bonus combination is not won, for example, “LOSE” is displayed. Further, in the “effect 1”, for example, the degree of expectation of winning the bonus combination may be notified. In this case, for example, in the case of having the effect pattern displayed up to "STEP 1", the effect pattern displayed up to "STEP 2", and the effect pattern displayed up to "STEP 3", and winning the bonus combination For example, the effect patterns displayed up to “STEP 3” can be easily selected, and when the bonus combination is not won, the effect patterns displayed up to “STEP 3” can be made difficult to be selected. By doing so, the degree of expectation of winning the bonus combination will be informed by long-pressing, so it is possible to further enhance the interest regarding the production in which the content changes according to the operation of the player. You can

On the other hand, at the time of the stop operation of the third stop operation, if the player does not continue to press the stop button for 3 seconds or more, for example, the degree of expectation of winning the bonus combination as described above is notified. "Production 1" is not executed, but only "Production 2" that is informed of whether or not the bonus combination is won.

It should be noted that various methods can be adopted for the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side) to recognize the pressing time of the stop button. For example, in the reel stop control process (see FIG. 72), when the main CPU 101 transmits a reel stop command each time the stop switch detects that the valid stop button is pressed, the sub CPU 201 When the reel stop command based on the pressing of the stop button of the 3 stop operation is received, the time measurement is started, and when the time measurement time is 3 seconds, "effect 1" is executed and the third stop operation is performed. When the winning button operation command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is received after the stop button is pressed, the "effect 2" may be executed. Further, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the “effect 1” based on the parameter indicating the on/off state of the stop switch included in the no-operation command transmitted from the main CPU 101, and whether the “effect 2” is set. The execution timing may be controlled. With this, the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side) does not need to measure the pressing time of the stop button, which reduces the control load related to the effect of changing the contents according to the operation of the player. be able to.

Note that when the "long press effect" is controlled by the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side), for example, by the operation time for the above-described touch panel or physical operation means, the sub CPU 201 is independently operated. It is possible to measure the time during which the operation means is operated and control the effect contents according to the result of the time measurement. Here, in the gaming machine as described in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 side has a capacity limit, but the sub control circuit 200 side generally has no special restriction, so at least If the sub CPU 201 controls such an effect, the control load related to the effect can be reduced.

In addition, the predetermined condition for performing the control for executing the “effect 2” is not limited to the end of the operation on the operation unit, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the predetermined condition may be that an operation on an operation means different from the target operation means is performed, or if the number of operations on the target operation means is less than the predetermined number of times, the 1” and “effect 2” are generated in this order, and when the number of operations on the target operation means reaches a predetermined number of times, a predetermined condition is satisfied and “effect 1” is not generated. 2” may be generated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the operation (for example, the on-edge) of the specific operation means is detected, the timing is started, and when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the timing, “ Before performing the effect 1", the control for executing the effect 2 is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an off edge is detected), and before a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of timing. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible not to perform the control for executing "effect 1".

Accordingly, even when the effect is changed depending on the operation mode of the specific operation means, it is possible to reduce the control load related to the effect.

(Example of a bonus winning combination notification effect (No. 3))
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, an example (No. 3) of the bonus winning combination notification effect will be described. FIG. 90 shows a display device with a predetermined probability when, for example, an internal winning combination (for example, “watermelon 2”) that expects a (simultaneous) winning of a bonus combination is determined and the bonus combination is also won. 11 shows a display example of an effect example (3) of the bonus winning combination notification effect that can be displayed in FIG. In the example of the bonus winning combination notification effect (No. 3), the example in which the effect is executed by the display device 11 is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other effect devices (for example, the information display 6). , LED 82, or an instruction monitor (instruction display device) can be used to execute the effect.

For example, the game value display unit (VL) shown in FIG. 91 may be displayed on the display device 11 in a predetermined area (payout number display unit) where the number of payouts can be displayed when a small winning combination is established. If it is an advantageous section, it may be displayed in a predetermined area (acquired number display section) in which the cumulative number of payout numbers in the advantageous section can be displayed, or an area different from these payout number display section and acquired number display section. May be displayed in a predetermined area. Further, as described above, the 7-segment display device such as the information display device 6 controlled by the main control circuit 90 side may function as the game value display unit (VL) when the effect is executed. Good.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the example of the bonus winning combination notification effect (No. 3), an effect entitled “number-first display effect” is performed. This "number-of-places display effect" is, for example, that the number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state (planned acquisition number) is notified before the operation in the bonus state is started, so that the player wins the bonus role. It is a performance that informs that you have done it.

In the following, an example in which the value of the combination end number counter is displayed as the expected number of sheets to be notified in the "number destination display effect" is described, but it is notified in the "number destination display effect". The mode of the expected number of sheets to be acquired is not limited to this. For example, in the BB3 state or the BB4 state, the value of the combination end number counter is "165", but if all the "15" medals are paid out in each game in the bonus state, the BB3 state Alternatively, in the BB4 state, the game can be played “12 times”, and the actual payout number is “180”. Therefore, “180”, which is the actual payout number, may be displayed as the scheduled acquisition number. Further, even in the BB3 state or the BB4 state, it is necessary to insert three medals and play a game. Therefore, if the value of the combination end number counter is "165", all the games in the bonus state are assumed. If "15" medals are paid out, the net additional number of each game is "15-3=12". Therefore, according to the value of the combination end number counter, the cumulative total number of net increase is set to "12" x "11 times" = "132", and this "132" is displayed as the expected number of acquisitions. You may do it. Further, as described above, since the game can be actually played “12 times”, the cumulative total number of net increase is “12”ד12 times”=“according to the number of times the game can be actually played”. The number of 144 sheets may be set, and this “144” sheet may be displayed as the scheduled acquisition count.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the BB1 to BB4 states, since the push order small winning combination is won, the medals to be paid out for each game depending on whether or not the pushing order is correct when the push order small winning combination is won. The number of sheets also changes ("15 sheets" or "6 sheets", see FIG. 23). In addition, when the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, the pushing order is not notified in the bonus state based on the bonus combination, and when the bonus combination is won in the advantageous section, the bonus combination is won. In the bonus state based on, the push order notification is performed.

Therefore, for example, when a bonus combination (for example, “F_BB3”) is won in the advantageous section, the above-mentioned “144” sheets (“180” sheets when the number of thrown-in sheets is not considered) are displayed as the expected number of times of acquisition. However, in the case where the bonus combination (eg, “F_BB3”) is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and the probability that “15 coins” will be paid out when the push order notification is not performed in the bonus state, If it is set to 50%, (“12 sheets”ד8 times”=96 sheets)+(“3 sheets”ד8 times”=24 sheets)=“120” sheets (when the number of input sheets is not considered May be displayed as (15 sheets)ד8 times”=120 sheets)+(“6 sheets”ד8 times”=48 sheets)=“168” sheets” as the planned acquisition number. .. In other words, the expected number of sheets to be notified in the "number-of-numbers display effect" may be an expected value of the number of payouts (or a net increase in number) in the bonus state.

As shown in FIG. 91, for example, when a predetermined internal winning combination including a bonus combination (for example, “F_BB3+F_watermelon 2”) is determined, it is determined that the “number-of-numbers display effect” is executed. In this case, when the rotation of all reels is stopped (that is, after the third stop), the expected acquisition number “165” is displayed on the game value display unit (VL). As a result, the player is notified that the bonus combination (“F_BB3” or “F_BB4” in the example shown in FIG. 91) has been won. In addition, in the present embodiment, the combination of the symbols related to the small combination and the replay combination is controlled to be stopped with priority over the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination, so basically, the game that is won in this bonus combination (the bonus combination). In the winning game), a combination of symbols related to a small combination or a replay combination (“C_watermelon” in the example shown in FIG. 91) is displayed, and a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination (“C_red” in the example shown in FIG. 91). Different color BB") is not displayed. Of course, in the bonus winning winning game, it is possible to display a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination, but in this case, the “number-of-firsts display effect” may not be executed, and will be described later. As described above, the “playing number display effect” is used to display the remaining value of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state (or the actual number of medals actually paid out) on the game value display portion (VL). It can also be executed.

After that, until the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed (until the bonus combination is established), the expected acquisition number “165” is continuously displayed on the game value display unit (VL). Then, even when the operation of the bonus state is started, the display of the expected acquisition number “165” on the game value display portion (VL) continues, and for example, the combination of the symbols related to the small winning combination in the bonus state (the example shown in FIG. 91). Then, when "Bell+JACA: 15 sheets" is displayed (the winning in the bonus state occurs), the number displayed on the game value display section (VL) is appropriately subtracted and updated to be displayed. That is, the game value display unit (VL) displays the expected number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state before the bonus state is started, and in the bonus state, the number of medals actually paid out. In accordance with the above, the remaining number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state (or the actual number of medals actually paid out) is displayed.

In the present embodiment, when the bonus combination is won, it may be decided to shift to the advantageous section. Therefore, for example, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section when a bonus combination is won, the expected number of sheets to be acquired in this advantageous section (a general expected value is sufficient. If 40 games are continued, and if one game averages one medal in the line battle state, net addition of "40" will be added to the expected number of bonuses (addition) You may make it display on a value display part (VL).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the right to allow the generation of the advantageous state (for example, the bonus state) is granted (for example, the bonus combination is won), the determination is made. It is possible to execute a specific notification effect (for example, “number-of-numbers display effect”) to be notified, and in this specific notification effect, a predetermined value related to a game value that can be acquired in an advantageous state that is generated based on the right decided to be granted. It is possible to display a value (for example, the value of the combination end number counter as the expected acquisition number).

As a result, since it is possible to perform an effect that specifically informs the value of the right (winning content) obtained by the player, it is possible to increase the interest in the effect and the interest in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined value is displayed in the specific notification effect, the display of the predetermined value is continued at least until the occurrence of the advantageous state thereafter, and when the game value is obtained in the advantageous state, it is acquired. The display of the predetermined value is updated based on the value of the game value.

With this, a series of effects for notifying the value can be appropriately performed before and after the occurrence of the advantageous state, and therefore, interest in the effects can be further enhanced.

<Modifications, etc.>
The configuration and operation of the gaming machine of the invention according to the present embodiment have been described above, including the operational effects. However, the invention according to this embodiment is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be made without departing from the gist of the invention according to this embodiment.

[Modification]
In the present embodiment, at least in the non-advantageous section, when "F_BB3+F_Watermelon 2" and "F_BB4+F_Watermelon 2" having different winning probabilities between the set values are won, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is determined. Even if "F_BB3+F_Watermelon 2" and "F_BB4+F_Watermelon 2" that won't be decided (do not perform ART lottery) but have different winning probabilities between the set values, the difference between the set values It is also possible to determine whether to shift to the advantageous section (perform the ART lottery) like other internal winning combinations including bonus combinations having the same winning probability. In this case, in the ART lottery, the probability that it is determined to shift to the advantageous section may be the same winning probability among the set values. That is, by defining a bonus winning combination having different winning probabilities between the set values, the probability that the transition to the advantageous section is determined may be changed between the set values.

Further, in the present embodiment, the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified even in the normal advantage section, but the probability that the normal advantage section is determined to shift to the advantage section is determined. Is favored over the non-advantageous section, but it may be configured as a section in which the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified. In this case, when the non-advantageous section is shifted to the normal advantageous section, the state indicator is not started to be lit, and the lighting of the state indicator is started only when it is shifted to the advantageous section. Good.

It should be noted that the normal advantageous section is a period during which the player's medals are reduced as a whole (that is, the payout rate is less than “1”), regardless of whether or not the information of the advantageous stop operation is notified to the player. Period), and the advantageous section may be a period during which the medals of the player increase as a whole (that is, a period in which the payout rate exceeds "1"). In addition, even if there is a period (for example, each of the above-described preparation states) in which the medals of some players decrease in the advantageous section, the period may be included in the advantageous section.

That is, when the game section is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section, the advantageous section enhances the player's expectation but cannot expect an increase in the number of balls (for example, "normal It may be configured to include an "advantageous section") and an increase section (for example, the "advantageous section" of the present embodiment) in which an increase in the number of balls actually expected can be expected.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the RT2 state during the advantageous section, even when the push order is notified, the player shifts (falls) to the RT1 state due to a mistake in the push order. , It is supposed that the game period of the advantageous section progresses (is updated), but in this case, the game period of the advantageous section does not proceed (is not updated) until it shifts (returns) to the RT2 state. You can also Further, in this case, for example, a part of the number of games required from the fall to the RT1 state to the return to the RT2 state (for example, the game required to fall from the RT1 state to the RT2 state) If the number of games is 10, the game is 1/2 of 5 games, or 2 games are uniformly played regardless of the number of games required from returning to RT1 state to returning to RT2 state). The period may be advanced (updated).

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the "chance eye" is determined as the internal winning combination, it is not directly determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (the ART lottery is not performed). However, the internal winning combination and the condition in which the ART lottery is performed can be appropriately modified and set. For example, if the "chance eye" is determined as the internal winning combination, and if the "chance hand" is established, the ART lottery is not performed and the "chance hand" is dropped and the "RT3 transition eye" is established. In this case, the ART lottery may be performed regardless of whether or not the state shifts to the RT3 state. In other words, when a specific internal winning combination is won, the ART lottery may not be performed when a winning is generated, and the ART lottery may be performed when a winning is not generated due to being missed.

Further, for example, a small winning combination that pays out medals less than or equal to the number of inserted medals (for example, 3) is determined as an internal winning combination with a high probability, and in principle, a bonus winning combination is not established in a state between flags, and It is also possible to adopt a specification in which a basic game state is set as a state between flags to allow a game to be played. Further, in this case, the bonus state may be configured as a state in which the acquired medals are reduced or maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of games corresponding to the regulation monitoring period is set to "1500 times", but the number of games corresponding to the regulation monitoring period may be less than or more than that. Good. Further, the regulation monitoring period may be changed according to the game situation. For example, the regulation monitoring period is determined by the net increase in the number of medals (or the number of payouts), and the net decrease in the number of coins (that is, the player inserts the medal in a predetermined pachi-slot 1) during a predetermined business day of the game store. However, if the number of medals that are not returned to the player due to payout and are profitable to the game shop side (or simply the number of inserted medals) is “500”, medals corresponding to a predetermined regulation monitoring period It is also possible to add "500" to the number of "1500" and to forcibly end the advantageous section until a medal of "2000" is obtained in a series of advantageous sections.

[Another example of game playability (game specification) mountable in this embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92 to FIG. 99, another example of the playability (that is, game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as the gaming state, a bonus state (special gaming state) is a gaming period that is advantageous to the player when the bonus is activated, and a gaming period that is relatively disadvantageous to the player because it is not the bonus state. There is a non-bonus state (normal game state), and further, among the non-bonus states, there are a plurality of RT states having different winning probabilities of the re-play (replay) role, so that the advantage degree of the player is changed. (See FIG. 13). In addition, in the present embodiment, as a game section, an advantageous section (an advantageous state) that is a game section that is advantageous to the player when the information of the stop operation is notified to the player, and it is not the advantageous section, which is relatively It has been described that the player has a non-advantageous section (normal state), which is a disadvantageous game section (see FIG. 14). Then, various modifications can be made to the various conditions such as the game state and the start/continuation/end of the game section and the contents thereof. In addition, unless otherwise indicated, in other examples (1 to 6) of the game property (game specification) shown below, the game state, the game section, the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols, etc. in the present embodiment. A game element can be used as appropriate.

[Another example of playability (game specifications) (1)]
First, with reference to FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, another example (No. 1) of the playability (game specification) which can be mounted in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram conceptually explaining a game flow in another example (1) of the game property (game specification), and FIG. 93 is another example (1) of the game property (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the provision expected value of the game value in.

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the player usually starts the game from the (A) non-advantageous section. (A) In the non-advantageous section, the game value amount is reduced due to the fact that the player is not notified of the stop operation information. In other words, the expected value (gradient value) of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is a negative value, which is a downward slope.

In the (A) non-advantageous section, when (1) the condition for starting the advantageous section is satisfied, the (A) non-advantageous section is shifted to the (B) advantageous section. (B) In the advantageous section, the game value amount increases (at least does not decrease) because the player is informed of the stop operation information. That is, the expected value (gradient value) of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes a positive value (at least not a negative value) and becomes an upward slope (not at least a downward slope). It should be noted that, for convenience of explanation, in the present example, the expected grant value in the ready state and the expected grant value in the bonus state are not considered.

It should be noted that the expected addition value can be calculated (designed) as follows. For example, if the pressing order (for example, 5 choices) is correct, 15 medals are paid out, and if the pressing order (for example, 5 choices) is incorrect, no medals are paid out. In the case of (32768/65536) and it is necessary to bet three medals for one game in principle, 30 medals are required for ten games. In the case of (A) non-advantageous section, when the player wins the push order small win during 10 games, the push order becomes the correct answer and the payout of 15 medals is 1/10. Since it is (1/2×1/5), if the probability is met, the amount of medals will be -15 (15-30) during 10 games, so the expected value of grant is 1 It becomes "-1.5 pieces" per game. On the other hand, in the case of (B) advantageous section, if the information of the stop operation is notified about all the push order small wins and the player performs the stop operation according to it, the push order small win is won during 10 games. Since it is 1/2 that the push order is correct and 15 coins can be paid out, if the probability is the same, the medal amount will be +45 coins (75 coins during 10 games). Since it is -30), the expected value of grant is "+4.5" per game. However, these are examples for convenience of explanation, and it is also possible to calculate (design) the expected grant value by taking into consideration the winning probability of the replay role and the winning probability of the bonus role (and expected grant value in the bonus state). Is.

In this example, the expected value (gradient value) of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value (expected value α) in the advantageous section (B) (B-1) advantageous section 1 Then, the expected value (gradient value) of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the second expected value (expected value β) different from the first expected value (expected value α) (B-2). ) Advantageous section 2 is provided, and when (2) the expected value variation condition is satisfied, the transition is made from (B-1) advantageous section 1 to (B-2) advantageous section 2. In this example, when (1) the condition for starting the advantageous section is satisfied, first, the transition from the (A) non-advantageous section to the (B-1) advantageous section 1 is performed, and (B-1) in the advantageous section 1 (2). When the expected value change condition is satisfied, the transition to (B-2) the advantageous section 2 is made, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, if (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, first, (A) the non-advantageous. The section may be shifted to the (B-2) advantageous section 2, and if the (2) expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied in the (B-2) advantageous section 2, the section may be shifted to the (B-1) advantageous section 2. ..

Further, for example, when (1) the condition for starting the advantageous section is satisfied, it may be determined which of (B-1) the advantageous section 1 or (B-2) the advantageous section 2 is to be moved. , (1) With respect to the start condition of the advantageous section, (B-1) the start condition (1-1) of the advantageous section 1 and (B-2) the start condition (1-2) of the advantageous section 2 are respectively defined, (A) In the non-advantageous section, depending on which start condition (1-1 or 1-2) is satisfied, the transition to (B-1) the advantageous section 1 or (B-2) the advantageous section 2 is made. You can

Then, in (B) the advantageous section ((B-1) the advantageous section 1 and (B-2) the advantageous section 2), when the condition for ending the (3) advantageous section is satisfied, (B) the advantageous section becomes (A) non-existent. Transition to the advantageous zone (that is, the advantageous zone ends). In this example, the transition control of the (A) non-advantageous section and the (B) advantageous section is performed in this manner.

Here, in this example, the expected value α in the (B-1) advantageous section 1 is configured to be larger than the expected value β in the (B-2) advantageous section 2 (that is, (B- 2) The expected value β in the advantageous section 2 is configured to be smaller than the expected value α in (B-1) the advantageous section 1). Specifically, for example, when the above example is used, in (B-1) the advantageous section 1, the probability (notification probability) of notifying the information of the stop operation at the time of winning the small push order win is 100% (that is, By making the notification 5 times during the winning of 5 times), the expected value α is set to “+4.5 pieces”, while (B-2) in the advantageous zone 2, the information of the stop operation is obtained when the winning of the small push combination is won. The expected value β is set to “+−0 sheets” by setting the probability of notification (notification probability) to 40% (that is, notification twice in five times of winning).

The expected value α and the expected value β can be set arbitrarily. For example, if (B-1) the advantageous zone 1 is in an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than at least (A) the non- advantageous zone, the notification probability in the advantageous zone 1 is 1% to 100%. It can be set to any notification probability. Further, for example, (B-2) advantageous section 2 is in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player at least as compared with (A) non-advantageous section, and (B-1) advantageous section 1 has a lower notification probability. If so, the notification probability in the advantageous section 2 can be set to any notification probability from 1 to 100%.

Further, each of the notification probability in the advantageous section 1 and the notification probability in the advantageous section 2 may be a predetermined probability or may be changed according to the status of providing the game value. For example, when the expected value α and the expected value β are set to “+3.0 sheets” and “+1.0 sheets”, respectively, (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2 In each of the above, an expected expected value is calculated for each predetermined number of games (for example, 10 times), and the calculated expected expected value is a predetermined threshold value (for example, plus or minus) than the expected value α and the expected value β. 1)), the notification probability is changed as appropriate in the subsequent game, in each period of (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2. The final assigned expected value may be (approximated to) the expected value α and the expected value β.

Further, the method of setting the expected value α and the expected value β is not limited to the method of changing the notification probability described above. For example, (B-1) advantageous section 1 is a state where the winning probability of the replay combination is high (high RT state), and (B-2) advantageous section 2 is a state where the winning probability of the replay combination is low (low RT state), The expected value β may be set to be smaller than the expected value α by changing the winning probability (winning probability) of the replay role (in this case, the expected winning value is added to the winning probability of the replay role). Also, the notification probability may or may not be changed). That is, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed by controlling the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2 in different RT states.

Further, for example, (B-1) the advantageous section 1 is set to a state where it is not difficult for the bonus (bonus state) to operate, and (B-2) the advantageous section 2 is a state where it is difficult to operate the bonus, The expected value β may be set to be smaller than the expected value α by making the bonus operation probability (winning probability) different (in this case, the expected value to be given is the bonus operation probability and the award in the bonus state). The expected value is taken into consideration, and the notification probability may or may not be changed). That is, regarding the bonus operation, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed by controlling (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2 in different control states. .. In addition, the state that does not make it difficult to operate the bonus, or the state that makes it difficult, the type of internal winning combination (including carryover combination), the type of game state, the control content of the stop control according to them, or the stop operation It is possible to appropriately create the information notification contents of the above and the like in combination (for example, see the description of FIGS. 94 to 99 described later).

Further, for example, in the case of the pushing order small winning combination of the above example, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode, 15 medals are paid out, and the stop operation is performed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode. If it is performed, 6 medals shall be paid out, and (B-1) When the pushing order small winning combination is won in the advantageous zone 1, the information of the stop operation showing the above-mentioned predetermined mode shall be notified. (B-2) When the pushing small winning combination is won in the advantageous zone 2, the information of the stop operation indicating the above-mentioned specific mode is notified, and the expected value β is made larger than the expected value α by changing the payout number. May be set to be smaller (in this case, the notification probability may be changed or may not be changed).

Further, for example, a plurality of types of push order small wins in the above-described example are provided (for example, push order small win A and push order small win B), and the winning probability of the push order small win B is the winning of the push order small win A. (B-1) When the push order small winning combination A wins in the advantageous section 1, the information of the stop operation is notified, while when the push order small winning combination B wins, the stop operation is stopped. The information is not notified (though the information of the stop operation may be notified). (B-2) When the push order small winning combination B is won in the advantageous section 2, the information of the stop operation is notified. Alternatively, the expected value β may be set to be smaller than the expected value α by not notifying the information of the stop operation when the push order small winning combination A is won. That is, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed by making the notification target combination different between (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2. It should be noted that the winning probabilities of the small pushing order combination A and the small pushing order combination B are the same (or substantially the same), but the payout number at the time of the correct pushing order combination is made different from 15 to 6 as described above. Thus, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed.

Further, for example, as an internal winning combination, a push order small combination (for example, 6 selections) and a push order replay (for example, 6 selections) are provided, and a high RT state and a low RT state are provided as game states, When you win the push order replay, if the push order is correct, it moves to the high RT state in the low RT state, and the high RT state is maintained in the high RT state. A combination of symbols is displayed. On the other hand, if the pushing order is incorrect, the low RT state is maintained in the low RT state, and the low RT state is entered in the high RT state (see, for example, FIG. 23), (B -1) In the advantageous zone 1, when the winning order of the pushing order small win and the pushing order replay is won, the pushing order which is the correct answer is notified, and when the winning of the pushing order small win is won, the medals increase. When the push order replay is won, the expected value α is set such that the state shifts to the high RT state or the high RT state is maintained. (B-2) In the advantageous section 2, the correct answer is given for one of these. The expected value β may be set by not notifying the pressing order that results in.

In this case, (B-2) When the advantageous section 2 is set to a state where the correct push order is notified for the push order small win and the correct push order is not notified for the push order replay, a high RT is set. It is difficult to shift to the state or maintain the high RT state (the stay rate in the low RT state becomes high), but it is easy to increase the medals when the winning push small win is won. Can be created. Further, in the case where (B-2) the advantageous section 2 is set to a state where the correct pushing order is notified for the pushing order replay and the correct pushing order is not notified for the pushing order small win, the high RT state is set. It is easy to shift to or to maintain the high RT state (the stay rate in the high RT state is high), but it is difficult to increase medals when winning the push order small win. can do. That is, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed by differentiating the type of the internal winning combination to be notified between (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2. Good (in this case, the notification probability may be changed or may not be changed). In (B-2) advantageous zone 2, the expected value β is set by not notifying the push order that is the correct answer regardless of whether the push order small combination or the push order replay is won. You can also do so.

Further, for example, for the small push order combination (for example, 6 choices), in the (B-1) advantageous section 1, at least the first and second stop operations have the correct push order (that is, the correct answer push). The expected value α is set by being notified of all the orders, and in (B-2) the advantageous section 2, the pressing order that is the correct answer only for the first stop operation (that is, a part of the correct pressing order). ), the expected value β may be set. Specifically, for example, when the first stop operation is "left", the second stop operation is "middle", and the third stop operation is "right", when the winning order of the pressing order is the correct pressing order, the winning order is: (B-1) If it is the advantageous zone 1, the pushing order of "left → middle → right" is notified, and if the stop operation is performed according to the notification, the medals can be increased with a probability of 100%. (B-2) If it is in the advantageous zone 2, the pushing order "left →? →?" is notified, and even if the stop operation is performed according to the notification, the remaining two options must be correctly answered by the player. Therefore, it is only possible to increase medals with a 50% probability. That is, the expected value α and the expected value β are changed by differentiating the notification content (selection number) of the information of the stop operation between (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2. (In this case, the notification probability may be changed or may not be changed).

Further, for example, (B) the advantageous section is informed of the stop operation without fail, and the expected value is a high net increase of "+10.0 sheets", but the duration of one time is relatively short (for example, between 8 games). ) It is configured as an increased section (special advantageous section), and information of the stop operation is not notified of (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2 (or with a predetermined probability less than the special advantageous section). However, the special advantageous section and the normal advantageous section can be mutually switched to each other as an effect section (normal advantageous section) having different expected values with respect to the transition to the special advantageous section. To do. Then, (B-1) in the advantageous zone 1, a transition lottery (AT lottery) to the special advantage zone is performed, and in the lottery, for example, it is determined that there is a probability of about 1/5 to shift to the special advantage zone. On the other hand, the transition probability is set so as to win (win the AT lottery) (that is, the expected value α is set by the increase rate of the game medium in the increase section and the transition probability to the increase section), while (B- 2) The AT lottery is also performed in the advantageous section 2, but in the lottery, the transition probability is set so that the AT lottery is won with a probability of, for example, about 1/20 (that is, the increase of the game medium in the increase section). The expected value β smaller than the expected value α is set depending on the rate and the transition probability to the increase section.

That is, the expected value α and the expected value β are changed by making the transition probabilities to the increasing section (special advantageous section) different in (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2. You may. The transition probability described above can be set as appropriate. Further, AT lottery may not be performed in (B-2) advantageous section 2, and in this case, in (B-2) advantageous section 2, for example, with a probability of about 1/20, (B- 1) Whether or not to shift to the advantageous section 1 is randomly determined, and when the lottery is won, the (B-2) advantageous section 2 may be shifted to the (B-1) advantageous section 1. Further, the condition for shifting from (B-1) advantageous section 1 to (B-2) advantageous section 2 can be set appropriately. In this case, for example, in the (B-1) advantageous section 1, a game is played for a predetermined period (for example, 5 games) without winning the AT lottery, and a fall occurs when the AT lottery is non-win The lottery is won, the number of continuous transitions to the increased section (special advantageous section) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times), and the number of coins acquired in the increased section (special advantageous section) is a predetermined number (for example, 400). Beyond the number of sheets), it can be adopted. As described above, the game characteristics can be further diversified by the transition specifications of (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2.

In this example, as a state in which different expected grant values are set, the expected value α is set (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the expected value β is set (B-2) advantageous section 2 Although the description is given by taking as an example the case of having two states, the states in which different expected application values are set may be three or more and can be set appropriately. For example, it may further have an advantageous section 3 in which the expected value γ is set (B-3). In this case, the expected addition value can be set to satisfy α≧γ≧β, or can be set to satisfy α≧β≧γ. That is, between (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2, a (B-3) advantageous section 3 having an intermediate expected value of provision is set, or (B-2) advantageous section. By setting the advantageous section 3 in which the grant expected value is smaller than 2 (B-3) and changing the grant expected value stepwise every time the variation condition is satisfied in sequence, a more subdivided grant expected value can be obtained. Adjustment may be possible.

(First Mode in Another Example (Part 1) of Gaming (Game Specifications))
Next, the first aspect of the game specification based on the other example (1) of the above-mentioned game property (game specification) will be described. In the first mode, for example, the expected value α is set to “+3.0 sheets” and the expected value β is set to “+2.0 sheets”. However, as described above, the expected value of grant can be set arbitrarily.

In the first aspect, in (A) the non-advantageous section, when (1) the condition for starting the advantageous section is satisfied, the procedure shifts to (B-1) the advantageous section 1. It should be noted that (1) as the start condition of the advantageous zone, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, a condition that determines to shift to ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transfer lottery based on the type (or dedicated not based).

(B-1) When it shifts to the advantageous section 1, at least a predetermined period (a predetermined arbitrary game period can be set, for example, for 50 games), the expected expected value α is the expected value α (for example, “+3”). (B-1) Advantageous section 1 will continue. Further, in (B-1) advantageous zone 1, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous zone. As conditions for determining to continue the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, conditions for determining to continue ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transfer lottery based on the type of (or not based on).

(B-1) When it is decided to continue the advantageous section when the game is played in the advantageous section 1 for the predetermined period, (2) the expected value changing condition is satisfied, and (B-2 ) Move to Advantage Zone 2. (B-2) When the advantageous section 2 is entered, the expected expected value is the expected value β (for example, “+2” for at least a specific period (for example, an arbitrary game period set in advance, for example, 100 games)). (B-2) Advantageous section 2 continues. In (B-2) Advantageous section 2, it is not determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section. (B-2) When the game is played for the specific period in the advantageous zone 2, (3) the condition for ending the advantageous zone is satisfied, and the process shifts to (A) the non- advantageous zone.

On the other hand, (B-1) when the game is played in the advantageous period 1 for the predetermined period, even if it is not decided to continue the advantageous period, (3) the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied, ( A) Shift to the non-advantageous section.

In addition, (B-1) when a game is played in the above-described predetermined period in the advantageous section 1 and it is determined to continue the advantageous section, (2) the expected value change condition is satisfied. In this case, once (B-1) the advantageous section 1 is shifted to the (A) non-advantageous section, and a predetermined waiting period (for example, an arbitrary omen state between 4 and 32 games) has passed in the (A) non- advantageous section. After that, the (A) non-advantageous section may be shifted to (B-2) the advantageous section 2 and the advantageous section may be continued.

In addition, in the first aspect, (B-2) the advantageous section 2 is assumed to continue for the specific period, but the specific period is not set as a predetermined arbitrary game period, for example, (B-1) In the entire (B) advantageous section including the advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2, it may be a period until the granted expected value reaches the expected value β (for example, “+2.0 sheets”). That is, in the beginning of the advantageous section (B-1), the expected value α is increased by the expected value α, and in the subsequent advantageous section (B-2), the expected value β is adjusted (smaller) by the expected value β. You may. In this case, the predetermined waiting period may be included in the entire (B) advantageous section or included in the (B) entire advantageous section when the expected value to be imparted is adjusted by the expected value β. It may be not.

Specifically, for example, in the case where (B-1) the advantageous value 1 is provided with a game value of the expected value α, the amount of the game value provided in the (B-1) advantageous section 1 is 3 cards×50 games. It becomes "150 sheets". After that, in (B-2) the advantageous section 2, a certain criterion (for example, 50 games may be used, a game longer than that, a game shorter than that, or an actual game time). In addition, (B) other notifications can be appropriately adopted), and the notification probability is adjusted as appropriate so that (B) the expected expected value of the entire advantageous section becomes the expected value β. For example, if the entire (B) advantageous section is 100 games, (B-1) the advantageous value 1 is given a game value of "150 cards", so the remaining advantageous section is the (B-2) advantage. In section 2, the notification probability is adjusted so that a game value of “50 cards” is given between 50 games, and (B) a game value of “200 cards” is given to the entire advantageous section. ..

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, a state in which the expected value of the gaming value is relatively high (expected value α is set for a predetermined period after the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) is started. (B-1) It becomes possible to play the game in the advantageous section 1), and the expected value of the game value is relatively low for a specific period after the advantageous state is continued (the expected value β is set ( B-2) It becomes possible to play a game in the advantageous section 2). Therefore, it is possible to maintain the enjoyment of the game while maintaining the appropriate gambling property.

In the gaming machine according to the first aspect, it is possible not to decide to continue the advantageous state for a specific period ((B-2) advantageous section 2) after the advantageous state is continued. By doing so, the payout rate can be managed more appropriately.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the first aspect, even when it is decided to continue the advantageous state during the advantageous state, the advantageous state is temporarily ended, and after the predetermined waiting period elapses, the advantageous state May be continued (restarted). With this, not only can the payout rate be managed more appropriately, but also the interest of the game can be improved with respect to whether or not the advantageous state continues.

(Second Mode in Another Example (1) of Gaming (Game Specifications))
Subsequently, a second aspect of the game specification based on the other example (1) of the above-described game property (game specification) will be described. In the second mode, for example, the expected value α is set to “+7.5 sheets” and the expected value β is set to “+-0 sheets”. However, as described above, the expected value of grant can be set arbitrarily.

In the second aspect, in (A) the non-advantageous section, when (1) the condition for starting the advantageous section is satisfied, the procedure shifts to (B-1) the advantageous section 1. It should be noted that (1) as the start condition of the advantageous zone, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, a condition that determines to shift to ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transfer lottery based on the type (or dedicated not based).

(B-1) When the transition to the advantageous section 1, at least a predetermined period (a predetermined game period can be set, for example, 100 games), the expected expected value α is the expected value α (for example, “+7”). (B-1) Advantageous section 1 continues. It should be noted that this predetermined period may be, for example, a period from the start of (B-1) advantageous section 1 until the game value provided becomes a predetermined amount (for example, 1000 cards) (or until it exceeds). However, (B-1) the game time from the start of the advantageous section 1 may be a period until the game time reaches (or exceeds) a predetermined time (for example, 0.25 hours).

(B-1) When the game is played in the advantageous section 1 for the predetermined period, (2) the expected value changing condition is satisfied, and (B-2) the advantageous section 2 is entered. (B-2) When moving to the advantageous section 2, (3) the expected value to be given becomes the expected value β (for example, “+−0”) until the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (B-2) Advantage Section 2 continues. In this second aspect, (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is, for example, (B) that the game has been played for a specific period (for example, 1500 games) since the beginning of the advantageous section, or ( B) It can be defined as that the game value provided since the start of the advantageous section has become a specific amount (for example, a net increase of 3000 cards). See processing). Further, even before the ending condition determined in this way is satisfied (for example, before the limit process is executed), a winning combination is won in the bonus combination (a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed and the bonus state is activated). ), regardless of whether it is (B-1) advantageous section 1 or (B-2) advantageous section 2, (B) the advantageous section ends, and (B) from the advantageous section to (A). Move to the non-advantageous section. That is, in (B) the advantageous section, displaying the combination of symbols relating to the bonus combination that enables the shift to the bonus state is one of the conditions for ending the (3) advantageous section.

Note that (3) various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, conditions that determine to end in ART) can be adopted as the end condition of the advantageous zone, and the internal winning combination It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transfer lottery based on the type (or dedicated not based). Further, in (B-2) the advantageous section 2, for example, until the condition for ending the (3) advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section ((B-2 ) It is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section 2), and when it is determined to continue the advantageous section, the advantageous section is continued for this predetermined unit, and it is not decided to continue the advantageous section. May end the advantageous section even before (3) the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. In this case, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, conditions under which it is determined to continue ART) can be adopted as the conditions for determining to continue the advantageous section, and It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on the type of internal winning combination (or dedicated not based).

Further, in the second aspect, in the (B) advantageous section, for example, the specific notification can be executed using the display device 11 or the like. This specific notification is a notification effect for informing the player that the bonus combination has been won (carried over). However, in the second mode, the advantageous section ends when the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed, so this specific notification is (display the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination. Suggesting information that allows the player to select either ()) ending the advantageous period, or continuing the advantageous period (by avoiding the combination of symbols relating to the bonus combination being displayed) It can be said that it is a notification effect for performing. Further, simply by displaying a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination, it may be a notification effect for suggesting that it is possible to shift to the bonus state, or a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination may be displayed. It may be a notification effect for suggesting that the advantageous section can be continued by avoiding.

For example, in the second mode, (B) in the advantageous section, when the bonus combination is won (or when the bonus combination is carried over), the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be displayed. In the case of a game, the specific notification can be executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the stop control for establishing the replay combination or the small combination preferentially over the bonus combination is performed, when the bonus combination and the replay combination or the small combination are won in succession (or, the bonus combination is In the case where the replay combination or the small combination is won in the case of being carried over), in principle, the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is not displayed. That is, "a game in which a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination can be displayed" is not such a situation, and if the timing of the stop operation by the player is appropriate, the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is It means that the game can be displayed.

When the specific notification is configured to be executed as described above, the player plays the game period until (3) the advantageous period ending condition is satisfied (for example, the advantageous period limit process is executed). Within the range, the advantageous section can be continued by avoiding the transition to the bonus state. From such a viewpoint, it is not always necessary to divide the (B) advantageous section into the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2 (that is, the granted expected value is the expected value α). It is not necessary to differ between the expected value β and the expected value β), and (B) the expected expected value in the advantageous section may be a constant expected expected value (for example, “+1.5 sheets”).

Further, for example, in the second mode, (B-1) in the advantageous section 1, when the bonus combination is won (or when it is carried over), (2) when the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied. Can be configured such that (2) the specific notification is executed when the expected value change condition is satisfied. In this case, in the same way as above, in the game after the specific notification becomes executable, the specific notification is given when the game is a "game in which a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination can be displayed". It may be configured to be executed. In addition, after (2) the expected value change condition is satisfied and before (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, (B-2) when the bonus combination is won in the advantageous section 2, at this time, It can be configured such that the specific notification is executed. In this case, in the same way as above, in the game after the specific notification becomes executable, the specific notification is given when the game is a "game in which a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination can be displayed". It may be configured to be executed. In addition, in the case where the bonus combination is won (or carried over) in the advantageous section 1 (B-1), the "combination of symbols relating to the bonus combination is displayed. If it is a “playable game”, the specific notification may be executed.

When the specific notification is configured to be executed as described above, the player plays the game period until (3) the advantageous period ending condition is satisfied (for example, the advantageous period limit process is executed). Within the range of (B-1), for example, in the game period of the advantageous section 1, the game value is dramatically increased by setting the expected value α, so that the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed. This is avoided, and the advantageous section is continued. (B-2) In the game period of the advantageous section 2, the expected value β is not set, so that the game value does not dramatically increase, so the bonus combination is concerned. It is also possible to display a combination of symbols and end the advantageous section, and then in the subsequent game, (1) establish the condition for starting the advantageous section again (B-1) and select to move to the advantageous section 1. It is possible to choose, and if there is not enough time, it is possible to choose to end the game as it is. On the other hand, in the game period of (B-2) advantageous section 2, the expected value β is set, so that the game value does not dramatically increase, but (A) it is more advantageous to the player than the non-advantageous section. Since there is nothing wrong with this, in order to enjoy the game, it is possible to avoid displaying the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination and select to continue the advantageous section.

In addition, in the second aspect, when the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed (B) to end the advantageous section, for example, it is possible to give a special privilege using the display device 11 or the like. ing. This special privilege is a privilege that is not related to the granting of a game value (that is, does not affect the payout rate) among the various privileges granted to the player. In addition, the special privilege is related to the addition of the gaming value (that is, the payout rate is affected) (for example, the right to establish the transition condition of the advantageous section, or the information of the stop operation during the bonus state). The right to be notified, etc.), but from the perspective of optimizing gambling, it should be a privilege that is not related to the addition of a game value (that is, does not affect the payout rate). Is desirable.

As a specific example of the special privilege, for example, execution of a special effect (for example, various ending effects described above and other premier effects) that is not normally executed, and special notification that informs the player of useful information ( For example, notification of setting value suggestion, notification of expectation for each effect content, execution of history notification of winning probability of bonus combination, transition probability of advantageous zone, etc.), information provided via the Internet using the mobile terminal of the player It may include giving points on the provided services and releasing specific conditions.

In the case where the special privilege is configured as described above, the player does not enjoy a direct privilege such as giving a game value, but an indirect privilege with high interest in enjoying the game is provided. In particular, as in (B-2) Advantageous section 2, the advantageous value is set early in the state where the game value is not dramatically increased by setting the expected value β, as in (B-2) Advantageous section 2. You can also give incentives to terminate.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) is satisfied when a predetermined end condition ((3) end condition of the advantageous section) is satisfied or a predetermined end condition is satisfied. It ends when the special game state (bonus state) is entered before. Then, in the advantageous state, when it is possible to shift to the special game state, a specific notification indicating that effect is executed. Therefore, the player can continue the advantageous state by avoiding the transition to the special game state if it is within the range of the prescribed predetermined ending condition. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the enjoyment of the game while maintaining the appropriate gambling property.

Further, in the gaming machine of the second aspect, the predetermined ending condition is, for example, when the player is given a certain privilege (or when it is assumed that the privilege is given) (for example, the limit process described above or later). May be terminated. With this configuration, the payout rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the second aspect, from the start of the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) until the specific variation condition ((2) expected value variation condition) is satisfied, the game is played. It becomes possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of value addition is relatively high (expected value α is set ((B-1) advantageous section 1), and the advantageous state ends after a specific variation condition is satisfied. Until that time, the game can be played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low (expected value β is set ((B-2) advantageous section 2)). Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special game state as a trigger even before a predetermined ending condition is satisfied. That is, for example, when playing a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. Thus, it is possible to end the advantageous state and try to get an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the enjoyment of the game while maintaining the appropriate gambling property.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the second aspect, from the start of the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) until the specific variation condition ((2) expected value variation condition) is satisfied, the game is played. It becomes possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of value addition is relatively high (expected value α is set ((B-1) advantageous section 1), and the advantageous state ends after a specific variation condition is satisfied. Until that time, the game can be played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low (expected value β is set ((B-2) advantageous section 2)). Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special game state as a trigger even before a predetermined ending condition is satisfied. Furthermore, when the advantageous state ends with the transition to the special game state, it is possible to give a special privilege that is not related to the giving of a game value. That is, for example, when playing a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. Thus, it is possible to end the advantageous state and try to get an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. Further, in the case of shifting to the special game state and ending the advantageous state, a special privilege which is not given when the predetermined ending condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is ended is given, so that the advantageous state is given to the player. It is also possible to give an incentive to end the task early. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the enjoyment of the game while maintaining the appropriate gambling property.

In the gaming machine of the second aspect, when the game is played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, if the shift to the special gaming state is possible, this is indicated. The specific notification may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is an option not to continue the game when the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and it is possible to maintain the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine of the second aspect, the expected value of the game value in the advantageous state is adjusted by the probability (information probability) of being notified of the stop operation of the player in the advantageous state. You may. With this configuration, the payout rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

[Another example of game play (game specifications) (Part 2)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, another example (No. 2) of the playability (game specification) that can be mounted in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a diagram conceptually illustrating a game flow in another example (2) of the game property (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 94, in this example, there are general gaming state (CZ state), (A) BB1 state, (B) BB2 state, and (C) BB3 state gaming state. The general gaming state (CZ state) is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is low, and the transition to the advantageous section does not occur. This gaming state itself is not a gaming state advantageous to the player, It is positioned as a gaming state (chance zone. Special prize extended state) which is more advantageous than the (A) BB1 state in that it can shift to the (B) BB2 state or the (C) BB3 state. In addition, the general gaming state (CZ state), the (B)BB2 state, and the (C)BB3 state are positioned as a series of increase sections described later. Even in the general gaming state (CZ), as in the case of the (A) BB1 state, the advantageous section may be configured to occur for a specific period when a specific notification condition is satisfied.

In the general game state (CZ state), if BB1 (for example, BB1 and BB2 in the present embodiment) is won and the combination of symbols related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, (1) BB1 start condition is satisfied. Then, the general game state (CZ state) shifts to the (A) BB1 state. As will be described later, this is positioned as a transition of the game state which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. Further, in the general game state (CZ state), if BB2 (for example, BB3 in the present embodiment) is won and the symbol combination related to BB2 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, (3) BB2 start condition is satisfied. Then, the general game state (CZ state) shifts to the (B) BB2 state. Further, in the general game state (CZ state), when BB3 (for example, BB4 in the present embodiment) is won and the symbol combination related to BB3 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, (5) BB3 start condition is satisfied. Then, the general game state (CZ state) shifts to the (C)BB2 state. As will be described later, these are positioned as game state transitions that are relatively advantageous to the player.

Here, in the general game state (CZ state), once the BB1 is won, the BB1 is carried over until the symbol combination relating to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the activated line (the display of the symbol combination relating to BB1 is permitted. Since the BB1 permission state is continued), the BB2 and BB3 are not won in the general game state (CZ state). Further, in the general game state (CZ state), once the BB2 or BB3 is won, the BB2 or BB3 is carried over until the combination of symbols related to BB2 or BB3 is stopped and displayed on the activated line (related to BB2 or BB3). Since the BB2 permitted state or the BB3 permitted state where the display of the combination of symbols is permitted continues), the BB1 is not won in the general gaming state (CZ state). That is, in the general game state (CZ state), if any of the bonus combinations (BB1 to BB3) is won, the bonus state corresponding to the winning bonus combination is not finished and the general game state (CZ state) is not returned again. As long as it does not win other bonus roles.

In this example, the symbol combination related to BB2 is configured as a symbol combination such as "red 7-red 7-red 7", and the symbol combination related to BB3 is, for example, "blue 7-blue 7-blue". It is configured as a combination of symbols such as "7". The symbol combination related to BB1 is configured as a symbol combination such as "red 7-red 7-cherry 1" and "blue 7-blue 7-cherry 1" (see FIG. 15). In this example, in the case of being configured in this way, when one of the bonus combinations (BB1 to BB3) is won in the general game state (CZ state), the winning notification indicating that the bonus combination is won is performed. You may be allowed to. Specifically, a display such as "Aim for 7!" may be displayed to indicate to the player that the "red 7" symbol or the "blue 7" symbol should be aimed. In this case, for example, when the player is aiming for the "red 7" symbol and hitting BB2, if the player wins BB2, "red 7" becomes a complete set and shifts to the BB2 state, and wins BB3. In the case, "Red 7" is not aligned, and the combination of symbols related to BB1 is not displayed. It is recognized that BB3 is won, and when the winning is awarded to BB1, the combination of symbols related to BB1. Is displayed and the state shifts to the BB1 state. By doing so, it becomes possible to further improve the interest of the notification in the game of this example. In addition, the winning notification as described above may be performed unconditionally when one of the bonus combinations (BB1 to BB3) is won in the general game state (CZ state), for example, the general game. When the advantageous section can be generated in the state (CZ state), it may be performed only during the advantageous section.

The (A)BB1 state is composed of (A-1)BB1 general, (A-2)BB1RB flag in-between, and (A-3)BB1RB in-between. In addition, in the (A) BB1 state, BB1 to BB3 are not newly drawn, and thus, as long as the (A) BB1 state continues, the general gaming state (CZ state), (B) BB2 state, and (C) There is no case of shifting to the BB3 state.

(A-1) BB1 In general, the winning probability of the re-play (replay) combination is low (or the winning probability of the re-play (replay) combination is "0" (that is, the re-play (replay) is not randomly selected). )) is set. In addition, a small push order (for example, 9 correct medal payouts with 6 correct press order answers, 1 medal payout if the correct push order is correct but the timing of the stop operation is correct, and the stop operation timing is also the wrong press order. If it is inappropriate, there is no medal payout, etc.), RB for operating the RB state in which the winning probability of any of the small wins is improved compared to the non-operating state, and whether (A) BB1 state is the advantageous section The advantageous section lottery combination for which the determination is made is set so as to win each with an arbitrary predetermined probability.

(A-2) During the BB1RB flag, the winning probability of the re-play (replay) hand is low (or the winning probability of the re-play (replay) hand is "0" (that is, the re-play (replay) hand is not randomly selected). So)) set. Further, the push order small winning combination, the advantageous section lottery winning combination, and the like are set so as to be won with arbitrary predetermined probabilities. In addition, the basic configuration of the push order small winning combination (1/6 is the correct push order and 5/6 is the incorrect push order) is the same as in (A-1)BB1 general. Further, since the RB has been carried over, it is not newly drawn, but the winning state (permitted state) continues. The winning probabilities of the replay (replay) combination may be the same or different between (A-1) BB1 general and (A-2) BB1RB flag.

(A-3) In BB1RB, the winning probability of the re-play (replay) combination is low (or the winning probability of the re-play (replay) combination is "0" (that is, the re-play (replay) is not randomly selected). )) Set. Further, the push order small winning combination, the advantageous section lottery winning combination, and the like are set so as to be won with arbitrary predetermined probabilities. In addition, the basic configuration of the push order small winning combination (1/6 is the correct push order and 5/6 is the incorrect push order) is the same as in (A-1)BB1 general. In addition, in (A-1) BB1 general medium and (A-2) BB1RB flag middle and (A-3) BB1RB middle, the respective winning probabilities of the pushing order small combination and the advantageous section lottery combination are the same. It can be different or different. Alternatively, in (A-3) BB1RB, as the internal winning combination of a type different from the above-mentioned pushing order small winning combination and the above-mentioned advantageous section lottery, the pushing order small winning combination and the advantageous section lottery winning the same role are won. You may do it. In addition, in (A-1) BB1 general middle, (A-2) BB1RB flag middle and (A-3) BB1RB middle, the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination may be the same, May be different.

In the general game state (CZ state), if (1) BB1 start condition is satisfied, first, the state shifts to (A-1) BB1 general. (A-1) In the BB1 general, when the RB is determined as the internal winning combination, (A-2) the BB1RB flag is shifted to, and (A-2) BB1RB flag is shifted to a symbol relating to the RB. Is continued until the combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line (the permitted state in which the display of the combination of symbols related to RB is permitted continues). (A-2) When the combination of symbols relating to RB is stopped and displayed on the activated line during the BB1RB flag, (A-3) the process shifts to BB1RB. (A-3) In BB1RB, an ending condition of the RB state (for example, there is a predetermined number of winnings of 8 times or less, or a game of an arbitrary predetermined number of 12 times or less) When it is established, the process shifts to (A-1)BB1 general. In addition, during the (A-2) BB1RB flag, stop control is performed to preferentially establish the replay combination or the small combination rather than the bonus combination (RB), so that the combination of symbols related to RB is on the activated line. The stop display may be made difficult (or the stop display may not be made), and as a result, it may be difficult (or not) to shift to (A-3) BB1RB.

In any of (A-1) BB1 general state, (A-2) BB1RB flag state, and (A-3) BB1RB state, the number of medals paid out in the (A) BB1 state became the specified number. In the case (for example, when the number exceeds 285), (2) the ending condition of BB1 is satisfied, and the state shifts from the (A) BB1 state to the general gaming state (CZ state).

In any state of (A-1) BB1 general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, when the winning combination is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether to shift to the advantageous section, and if it is the advantageous section, it is determined whether to extend the advantageous section. In this case, a single winning will give or extend an advantageous section of 30 games, for example. Note that the trigger and the period for determining the grant or extension of the advantageous section are not limited to those described above. For example, according to not only the result of the winning/winning lottery when winning the advantageous zone lottery, but also the result of the winning/winning lottery when winning the other internal winning combination, and the result of the winning/winning lottery not based on the internal winning combination. It may be possible to determine whether to give or extend the advantageous section. Further, when the granting or extension of the advantageous section is determined, the duration of the advantageous section may be separately determined by lottery or the like. In addition, (A) at an arbitrary timing before the BB1 state is started (for example, when winning BB1, or when winning the advantageous zone lottery in the general game state (CZ state) after winning BB1), It may be possible to determine whether or not the entire period (or part of the period) of the BB1 state is set as the advantageous section.

In any of the states of (A-1) BB1 general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, in the case of an advantageous section, for example, the above-mentioned pushing order sub-role. The information of the stop operation (which is the correct answer in the push order) is notified in the winning game, and as a result of the stop operation being performed according to the notification, the advantageous section becomes an increase period in which the game value increases (or at least does not decrease). . On the other hand, if it is a non-advantageous section, for example, as a result of not being notified of the stop operation (which is the correct push order) in the game in which the above-mentioned push order small win is won, the game value of the non-advantageous section decreases. It will be a period.

As described above, in this example, the (A) BB1 state does not end until the number of paid-out medals in the BB1 state exceeds “285”. Therefore, for example, without considering the case of winning a replay combination or other small winning combinations, and not considering the case where there is one payout in the pushing order small winning combination, the total winning probability of the pushing order small winning combination is not considered. When the value is about 1/2 (32768/65536), the number of payouts of 9 sheets required to end the (A) BB1 state is “32 times” (32 times×9 sheets=288 sheets), and the above push If the small winning combination wins according to the probability, the shortest number of games that can end the (A) BB1 state is "64 times" (32 times 1/2). Therefore, if all of the (A)BB1 state is an advantageous section, if you play the game "64 times", the (A)BB1 state is ended early while the game value increases during the game period. It is possible to shift to the game state (CZ state). On the other hand, if (A) BB1 state is all in the non-advantageous section, the probability that 9 coins will be paid out in the game won by the above push-order small win is reduced to 1/6, so (A) The standard number of games that can end the BB1 state is "384 times" (64 times ÷ 1/6), and the game value will decrease during the game period.

The (B)BB2 state is composed of (B-1)BB2 general, (B-2)BB2RB flag in-between, and (B-3)BB2RB in-between. In addition, in the (B) BB2 state, BB1 to BB3 are not newly drawn, and so long as the (B) BB2 state continues, the general gaming state (CZ state), the (A) BB1 state, and (C) There is no case of shifting to the BB3 state.

(B-1) In the general BB2, the winning probability of the replay (replay) hand is low (or the winning probability of the replay (replay) hand is relatively high, but (B-2) BB2RB flag middle Lower than). In addition, a small push order (for example, 9 correct medal payouts with 6 correct press order answers, 1 medal payout if the correct push order is correct but the timing of the stop operation is correct, and the stop operation timing is also the wrong press order. If it is inappropriate, there is no medal payout, etc.), RB for operating the RB state in which the winning probability of any small win is improved compared to the non-operating state, and (B) BB2 state after the general game state (CZ state) ), when the state shifts to the (A)BB1 state, it is determined whether or not the (A)BB1 state is set as the advantageous zone. Is set to.

(B-2) During the BB2RB flag, the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is set to be high. Further, the push order small winning combination, the advantageous section lottery winning combination, and the like are set so as to be won with arbitrary predetermined probabilities. In addition, the basic configuration of the push order small winning combination is different from that in (B-1) BB2 general, so that no matter which push order the stop operation is performed, nine pieces are paid out (that is, an incorrect answer is given). The control is changed so that there is no push order. Further, since the RB has been carried over, it is not newly drawn, but the winning state (permitted state) continues.

(B-3) During BB2RB, replay (replay) is set not to be randomly selected. Further, the push order small winning combination is set to be won with a high probability, and the advantageous zone lottery combination is set to be won with an arbitrary predetermined probability. In addition, the basic configuration of the push order small winning combination is different from that in (B-1) BB2 general, so that no matter which push order the stop operation is performed, nine pieces are paid out (that is, an incorrect answer is given). The control is changed so that there is no push order. Alternatively, in (B-3) BB2RB, an RB medium/small combination and an advantageous zone lottery, each of which has a similar role, wins as an internal winning combination of a type different from the above-mentioned push order small winning combination and the above advantageous zone lottery. You can

However, in the (B)BB2 state, the basic configuration of the pushing order small winning combination is (B-1)BB2 in (B-3)BB2RB so that the middle of (B-2)BB2RB flag is most advantageous. The configuration may be the same as in the general case (1/6 is the correct pressing order and 5/6 is the incorrect pressing order). That is, in the (B) BB2 state, assuming that the information of the stop operation is not notified, (B-1) BB2 general and (B-3) BB2RB are relatively disadvantageous periods (reduction periods), (B-2) The middle of the BB2RB flag may be configured as an advantageous period (increase period). By doing this, in the general (B-1) BB2, the RB is won at an early stage to shift to the period between (B-2) BB2RB flags, and after that, to stop shifting to (B-3) BB2RB. By performing the operation (or by performing such stop control), the player can play the game in the most advantageous state, so that the player can further diversify the playability in the advantageous state, The entertainment can be improved without the game becoming monotonous. Further, by not increasing the game state, which is an increase period more than necessary, the payout design can be simplified and the gambling performance can be made moderate.

Further, as described above, in the (B)BB2 state, when the (B-2)BB2RB flag is configured to be the most advantageous, the game in which the RB is won, and the combination of the symbols related to the RB after that. In the game that can be displayed, it may be notified that the RB has won or that a combination of symbols related to the RB can be displayed. The notification allows the player to perform a stop operation so as not to display the symbol combination related to RB. The notification may be an instruction or suggestion that the combination of symbols related to RB should not be displayed.

In this way, in a special game state in which a special combination (for example, BB which is a character continuous operation device related to a first-class special combination) is won, and a combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is displayed, the special combination is activated. Corresponding to the first gaming state, which is the non-winning state of the combination (for example, RB which is the first type special character), the second gaming state, which is the winning state (carry-over state) of the specific combination, and the specific combination. It has a third game state (specific game state) that is activated by the display of a combination of symbols, and in the second game state, the stop control of a predetermined winning combination (for example, a small pushing order combination) is advantageous for the player. The control is changed, and the specification that enables the second game state to be maintained by the player's stop operation or internal control is, of course, another game property (game specification) other than this embodiment and this example. The present invention can also be applied to the bonus state described in the example (or other increase period (increase section)). In the following, for convenience of description, such a bonus state specification is referred to as a “special bonus state”.

In the general game state (CZ state), when (3) BB2 start condition is satisfied, first, the state shifts to (B-1) BB2 general state. (B-1) In the general BB2, when the RB is determined as an internal winning combination, (B-2) the BB2RB flag shifts, and (B-2) the BB2RB flag shifts, a symbol relating to the RB. Is continued until the combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line (the permission state in which the display of the combination of symbols related to RB is permitted continues). (B-2) When the symbol combination related to RB is stopped and displayed on the activated line during the BB2RB flag, the process moves to (B-3) BB2RB. (B-3) In the BB2RB, an ending condition of the RB state (for example, winning a predetermined number of times less than or equal to 8 times, or playing a predetermined number of times less than or equal to 12 times) When it is established, it shifts to (B-1)BB2 general. In addition, during the (B-2) BB2RB flag, stop control is performed to preferentially establish the replay combination or the small combination rather than the bonus combination (RB), so that the combination of symbols related to RB is on the activated line. The stop display may be made difficult (or the stop display may not be made), and as a result, it may be difficult (or not) to shift to (B-3)BB2RB.

In any state of (B-1) BB2 general, (B-2) BB2RB flag state, and (B-3) BB2RB state, the payout number of medals in the (B) BB2 state is the specified number. In the case (for example, when the number exceeds 150), the ending condition of (4) BB2 is satisfied, and the state shifts from the (B) BB2 state to the general gaming state (CZ state).

In this example, the RB that is won in the (A-1)BB1 general and the RB that is won in the (B-1)BB2 general are not particularly described separately, but for example, (A-1 ) In BB1 general, the RB to be won is set to "RB1" (corresponding symbol combination is "symbol combination relating to RB1", corresponding RB state (A-3) is "RB1 state"), and (B-1) RB2 The RB to be won in general is "RB2" (the corresponding symbol combination is "the symbol combination relating to RB2", the corresponding RB state (B-3) is the "RB2 state"), and different RB combinations can be won. In the middle of the (A-2) BB1RB flag (“RB1 permission state”), the basic configuration of the pushing order small winning combination is the same as that of the (A-1) BB1 general medium. In the middle of the (B-2) BB2RB flag (“RB2 permitted state”), the basic structure of the small push-order combination may be different from that of the (B-1) BB2 general medium.

(B-2) During the BB2RB flag, and (B-3) BB2RB, even if the stop operation is performed in any of the pressing orders in the game in which the above-mentioned pressing order small winning combination is won, 9 pieces of payout are paid out. As a result, the period becomes an increasing period in which the game value increases (or at least does not decrease). On the other hand, in general (B-1) BB2, if the stop operation is performed in the pushing order that will be the correct answer in the game in which the above-mentioned pushing order small winning combination is won, 9 pieces of payout will be made, while the pushing that does not become the correct answer When the stop operation is performed in order, as a result of not paying out 9 coins, the period is a reduction period in which the game value decreases. However, since the transition from (B-1) BB2 general to (B-2) BB2RB flag transition occurs with the winning of RB, if the (B) BB2 state as a whole is seen, the relevant period is an increase period in which the game value increases. Positioned as.

Note that the method of setting the entire (B) BB2 state as an advantageous period (increase period) for the player is not limited to the above. For example, it is assumed that (3) the BB2 start condition is satisfied until (4) the BB2 end condition is satisfied, and the RB state is always controlled. In the RB state, the stop operation is performed in any pressing order. Alternatively, the RB medium/small combination that pays out 9 (or more if it is in the range up to 15) may be won with an extremely high probability. Alternatively, without changing the basic configuration of the push order small winning combination, the control is always performed in the advantageous section from the time (3) the BB2 start condition is satisfied to the time (4) BB2 end condition is satisfied. It may be configured such that when the winning of the small winning combination is won, or at least, the increase order is given by informing the pressing order of the correct answer at a predetermined probability such that the expected grant value becomes positive.

In any of (B-1) BB2 general state, (B-2) BB2RB flag state, and (B-3) BB2RB state, when the above advantageous zone lottery combination is won, (4) BB2 end condition BB1 is won in the general game state (CZ state) that has been established and has been transferred, and (1) the right to use the BB1 state (A) as an advantageous section that has transitioned when the BB1 start condition has been established (for example, the number of sets or stock) ) Is determined. In this case, with one win, for example, the right to make 30 games an advantageous section is given. The trigger and the period for which the grant of the right is determined are not limited to those described above. For example, according to not only the result of the winning/winning lottery when winning the advantageous zone lottery, but also the result of the winning/winning lottery when winning the other internal winning combination, and the result of the winning/winning lottery not based on the internal winning combination. The grant of the right may be determined. Further, when the grant of the right is decided, the duration of the advantageous section may be decided separately by lottery or the like. In addition, at any timing between (3) when the BB2 start condition is satisfied and (4) when the BB2 end condition is satisfied (for example, when BB2 wins or when BB2 ends), the BB1 state It may be possible to determine whether or not to grant the right to use the entire period (or part of the period) as the advantageous section.

The (C)BB3 state is made up of (C-1)BB3 general, (C-2)BB3RB flag in-between, and (C-3)BB3RB in-between. In addition, in (C-1)BB3 general, (C-2)BB3RB flag, (C-3)BB3RB, and (5)BB3 start conditions, if BB2 is replaced with BB3, (B- The description is omitted here because it is the same as the start conditions of 1) BB2 general, (B-2) BB2RB flag, (B-3) BB2RB, and (3) BB2. The condition (6) BB2 is satisfied when the number of paid-out medals in the state (C) BB3 reaches a prescribed number (for example, when the number exceeds 60).

Under such a premise, the flow of the game in this example will be described. In this example, the (A)BB1 state, which is the non-advantageous section, is positioned as a normal game that is not advantageous to the player, so the player usually starts the game from the (A)BB1 state, which is the non-advantageous section. .

In the (A) BB1 state, there is no transition to another gaming state until the ending condition of (2) BB1 is satisfied. Here, if the (A) BB1 state is an advantageous section, the section functions as an increase period, so that not only can the game value be increased, but also the opportunity to receive the payout increases, which leads to early ( 2) It becomes possible to meet the ending condition of BB1 (that is, the game period until the shift to the general game state (CZ state) can be shortened). On the other hand, if the (A) BB1 state is a non-advantageous section, the section functions as a reduction period, so that the game value is reduced, and the number of opportunities to receive the payout does not increase (2) early It is not possible to satisfy the ending condition of BB1 (that is, it is not possible to shorten the game period until shifting to the general game state (CZ state)).

In the (A) BB1 state, when the ending condition of (2) BB1 is satisfied, the game state shifts to the general game state (CZ state). General game state (CZ state), if you can win BB2 or BB3 before winning BB1, general game state (CZ state) → (B) BB2 state (or (C)BB3 state) → general game state (CZ state)→(B)BB2 state (or (C)BB3 state), etc., and is configured as a state (a series of increasing sections) in which a bonus state advantageous to the player can be repeatedly activated. However, if BB1 is won before the BB2 or BB3 is won, it is impossible to repeatedly activate the bonus state advantageous to the player, and the series of increase sections ends. In order to shift to the series of increasing sections again, it is necessary to end the (A) BB1 state, which is a decreasing period if it is not an advantageous section.

That is, in the (A) BB1 state, the player desires to shift to the advantageous zone or to continue the advantageous zone, and if the player actually shifts to the advantageous zone or the advantageous zone continues, the game value is increased. While doing, it is possible to shorten the game period until shifting to the general game state (CZ state). In the general game state (CZ state), if it is desired to win BB2 or BB3 before winning BB1, and if it is possible to actually win BB2 or BB3, (B) BB2 state or (C) It is possible to increase the game value in the BB3 state. The same applies when these game states are finished and the game state returns to the normal game state (CZ state) again. In addition, in the (B)BB2 state or the (C)BB3 state, it is desired that the right to give the (A)BB1 state as an advantageous section is given. In this example, for example, in the combined probability of winning the bonus combination (BB1 to BB3), the winning probability of BB1 is about 50%, the winning probability of BB2 is about 25%, and the winning probability of BB3 is about 25%. Therefore, BB2 or BB3 does not always continue to win in the normal gaming state (CZ state). However, if the right to (A) BB1 state as an advantageous section is given in advance, even if BB1 is won before winning BB2 or BB3, if (A) BB1 state is in the increasing period, The game value is increased, and it is possible to return to the general game state (CZ state) at an early stage. In this example, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game due to such playability.

According to the gaming machine of this example, in the normal game state (general game state (CZ state)), if the second special combination (BB2 or BB3) is won before the first special combination (BB1) is won, The state shifts to the 2 special game state ((B)BB2 state or (C)BB3 state), and the second special game state functions as an increasing period during which the game value increases. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, if the first special winning combination is won before the second special winning combination is won, the first special gaming state ((A)BB1 state) is entered, and the stop operation is performed in the first special gaming state. When the operation information regarding is not notified (when it is a non-advantageous section), the first special game state functions as a reduction period during which the game value decreases.

Therefore, in the normal game state, the player can continue an advantageous game period by repeating the shift to the second special game state without shifting to the first special game state, but the first special game state. When the game state is entered, the player cannot continue the advantageous game period unless the first special game state is ended and the normal game state is entered.

Here, according to the gaming machine of this example, when a specific notification condition is satisfied (for example, when it is determined to shift to an advantageous section, or it is determined that a right to be an advantageous section is granted). In the first special game state, when the predetermined winning combination (pushing order small winning combination) is won, a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces) of game value is given to the operation information regarding the stop operation. Become. Since the first special game state ends when a prescribed number (for example, more than 285) of game values are given, the first special game state ends by being notified of such information. The time can be advanced. That is, it is possible to change the period until the normal game state in which the second special game state can be entered is changed depending on whether or not the operation information regarding the stop operation is notified in the first special game state. Therefore, by making it possible to change the period until the state transitions to the advantageous state, it is possible to make the game rich in variety.

In the gaming machine of this example, the period in which the operation information regarding the stop operation is notified in the first special game state may also function as the increase period. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game even during the period until the state shifts to the advantageous state.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, in the first special game state, it is possible to further shift to the first specific permission state (during (A-2)BB1RB flag), and in the second special game state, further second specific permission. It is possible to shift to a state (between (B-2) BB2RB flag or (C-2) BB3RB flag), and in the first special game state, stop operation is performed regardless of whether it is the first specific permission state or not. You may make it function as a decrease period the period when the operation information regarding is not notified, and in the second special game state, function as the increase period the period of the second specific permission state. By doing so, the playability can be further varied and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Another example of playability (game specifications) (3)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, another example (No. 3) of the playability (game specification) that can be mounted in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a diagram conceptually explaining a game flow in another example (3) of the game property (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 95, in this example, there are (A) RT0 state, (B) BB state, and (C) RT1 state game state. The (A) RT0 state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the re-play (replay) combination is lower than that of the (C) RT1 state, and the state can shift to any of the (B) BB state and the (C) RT1 state. (A) In the RT0 state, when the control is not performed in the advantageous section, (A-1) becomes a normal (non-advantageous section), which is a reduction period in which the game value decreases, and when the control is performed in the advantageous section. Is an (A-2) advantageous period, which is an increasing period during which the game value increases. As the specific notification condition that can be controlled to the advantageous section, various conditions described in other examples of game characteristics (game specifications) other than this embodiment and this example can be adopted.

(A) When the BB (bonus combination) is won in the RT0 state, the BB flag is carried over (BB permitted state) until the BB is carried over until the symbol combination related to the BB is stopped and displayed on the activated line. Between the BB flags, the state (C) RT1 does not shift even if the bell spilled eyes described later are stopped and displayed on the activated line. In this example, BB is won in combination with any of the small winning combinations (for example, a winning combination called a rare winning combination, which has a relatively low winning probability. It may be a replay winning combination), and does not win alone. In addition, in the present embodiment, stop control is performed to preferentially establish the replay combination or the small combination rather than the bonus combination, so that the combination of symbols related to BB is displayed in the game in which BB is won. BB will be carried over after the next game. Then, the combination of symbols related to BB is a stop operation in a game in which the result of the internal lottery between the BB flags is “miss” (that is, a game in which none of the other replay hands and small wins is won). It can be displayed (winning) when the timing is appropriate. In this example, the probability of “miss” in the (A) RT0 state is set to about “1/12”. However, as long as “miss” can occur, this “miss” probability can be set to an arbitrary value. In addition, there may be a case where the BB wins independently, and in this case, it is assumed that a combination of symbols related to the BB can be displayed in the game in which the BB is won.

(A) In the RT0 state, between the BB flags, in the game in which the internal lottery result is "miss", when a combination of symbols related to BB is displayed, (1) BB start condition is satisfied, (A) Transition from the RT0 state to the (B)BB state. (B) BB state is a gaming state in which the state does not shift to (C) RT1 state, and is a gaming state in an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. Note that (B) the method of setting the BB state as the increasing period is, for example, the various methods described in other examples of the game characteristics (game specification) other than the present embodiment and this example, such as the above-mentioned “special bonus state”. Can be adopted. In the (B) BB state, when a prescribed number (for example, more than 140) of game values are given, the game value is given as an upper limit, (2) BB end condition is satisfied, and (B) BB state is changed to (A). ) Move to RT0 state.

(A) In the RT0 state, before the BB flag is set (that is, when the BB non-flag is set), (3) If the bell-eye drops are stopped and displayed on the activated line, the (C) RT1 state is set. Transition. The bell spill is, for example, a combination of symbols similar to the “R_RT1 transition” in the present embodiment, and in the game in which the winning order of the pushing order is small, the pushing order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate. It is a combination of symbols displayed in some cases. Therefore, if the (A) RT0 state is the (A-2) advantageous section, the correct pressing order is notified, so that it is not displayed as long as the stop operation is performed according to the notification, ( A-1) In the normal case (non-advantageous section), since the correct push order is not notified, the possibility of display is high. In this example, if the winning probability of BB is about 1/20 (3276/65536), the combined winning probability of the push order small win is about 1/3 (21845/65536) higher than that. Should be designed to. For the push order small winning combination, various specifications described in other examples of game characteristics (game specifications) other than the present embodiment and this example can be adopted, but for example, in the push order (for example, 6 options) If the correct answer is given, 9 pieces are paid out, and the bell spill is not displayed. If the answer is not correct in the pressing order, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, 1 piece is paid out and the bell spill is not displayed If the timing is not appropriate, 0 sheets will be paid out, and it is possible to adopt a specification in which a spilled bell is displayed.

(C) The RT1 state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is higher than that of the (A) RT0 state, and (B) the BB state does not shift. In the (C) RT1 state as well, as in the (A) RT0 state, when not controlled to the advantageous section, (C-1) becomes a normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value is reduced. In the case of being controlled to the advantageous section, (C-2) becomes the advantageous section, which is an increasing period in which the game value increases. As the specific notification condition that can be controlled to the advantageous section, various conditions described in other examples of game characteristics (game specifications) other than this embodiment and this example can be adopted.

Even in the (C) RT1 state, when the BB (bonus combination) is won, the control is performed between the BB flags (BB permitted state) as in the (A) RT0 state. However, in the (C) RT1 state, the winning probability of the re-play (replay) role is increased by the "miss" probability "1/12" of the (A) RT0 state, and the "miss" probability is "0". (That is, "loss" does not occur). Therefore, even if it is between the BB flags, there is no case where the combination of symbols related to BB can be displayed in the (C)RT1 state. However, even if the "miss" occurs at an extremely low probability (for example, 1/8192), and in the game where the "miss" occurs between the BB flags, it is possible to display a combination of symbols related to the BB. Good (that is, the (C)RT1 state may be configured as a state in which it is more difficult to display the symbol combination related to BB than the (A)RT0 state).

In addition, when it is possible to cause the "miss" even in the (C)RT1 state, when the combination of symbols relating to BB cannot be displayed in the unit game in which the "loss" occurs, the (B)BB state is set. Since the state cannot be changed and the (C)RT1 state continues after the next game, if the stop operation is performed in a mode in which the combination of symbols related to BB cannot be displayed in the unit game in which the “miss” has occurred, the game Person's loss will be extremely large. Therefore, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a loss, (C) in the unit game in which the "miss" has occurred in the RT1 state, after the start operation until the stop operation becomes effective, the combination of symbols related to BB The effect that suggests that the display is allowed, the effect that notifies that the combination of symbols related to BB should be aimed, the freeze effect that delays the start of rotation of each reel after the start operation, and the time required until the stop operation is effective. It is desirable to make it possible to execute any one or a plurality of effects such as a stop operation invalidation effect that takes a longer time than usual so that the player can easily display a combination of symbols related to BB.

In the (C) RT1 state, when (4) a prescribed number of games (for example, 500 games) are exhausted, the (C) RT1 state is shifted to the (A) RT0 state. That is, (C) When the RT1 state is finished and the BB flag is in between, it is possible to display a combination of symbols related to BB when a "loss" occurs. Even when the (C)RT1 state shifts to the (A)RT0 state, there is a possibility of falling again to the (C)RT1 state when the BB non-flag state is reached. Therefore, in such a case, (A) In the RT0 state, until the BB flag is reached (that is, until BB is won), (A-2) the advantageous section is continued, and the player is rescued. You may do it.

According to the gaming machine of the present example, when the special combination (BB) is won, the special permission state (BB permission state) is entered, and when the normal game state ((A) RT0 state), the combination of special symbols (BB) It is possible to shift to a special game state ((B)BB state) by displaying a combination of symbols relating to), while the specific game state ends if the specific game state ((C)RT1 state) Until it does, it is not possible to display the combination of special symbols and shift to the special game state. Also, in the specific game state, when the specific combination (push order small combination) is won in the normal game state that is not the special permission state, the specific symbol is not performed in the specific mode (mode in which the push order is the correct answer) without performing the stop operation. A transition is made based on the display of the combination (bell spilled eyes). Then, when the specific notification condition is satisfied, during a specific period (advantageous section) in the normal game state and the specific game state, operation information regarding a specific aspect is notified when a specific combination is won, and a stop operation is performed according to the notification. If done, the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number (for example, 9) of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine of the present example, in the normal gaming state, when a specific period during which operation information related to a specific aspect is notified is given, the shift to the special gaming state is performed without shifting to the specific gaming state. It is possible not only to repeat (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also to increase the game value given when the specific winning combination is won. Also, in the specific game state, when the specific period during which operation information related to a specific mode is notified is given, it is not possible to shift to the special game state unless the specific game state ends, but when a specific winning combination is won. The game value given to the player will increase. In addition, even in a case where the normal game state is not in a specific period in which operation information related to a specific mode is notified, it may be possible to repeat the transition to the special game state without transitioning to the specific game state. .

That is, according to the gaming machine of the present example, whether it is in the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state, or in the normal gaming state for a specific period during which operation information regarding a specific aspect is notified, or in the specific gaming state It is possible to variably change the degree of advantage of the player depending on whether or not it is a specific period in which the operation information regarding the aspect is notified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game motivation and interest.

In the gaming machine of the present example, at least the period in which the operation information related to the specific mode is notified in the specific game state may function as an increase period in which the game value increases. In this way, the game value may increase even in the specific game state, so that the interest of the game can be maintained even during the specific game state in which the special game state is not entered.

(Modification of this example)
In this example, there are (A) RT0 state, (B) BB state, and (C) RT1 state game state, and in the (A) RT0 state, BB as a special role is a pressing order small win as a specific role. If the player wins earlier than the above, (C) transitions to the BB state without transitioning to the RT1 state, and such a transition can be repeated, thereby creating a series of increase intervals. It was possible to do. Further, in the (A) RT0 state, if the push order small combination as the specific combination is won before the BB as the special combination, and if the player's stop operation is appropriate, the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state. However, if the player's stop operation is not appropriate, the state shifts to (C) RT1 and the series of increase sections ends. Then, in the (C) RT1 state, unless a certain transition condition (in this example, the digestion of a prescribed number of games) is satisfied, the (A) RT0 state is not transitioned. However, the method for starting, continuing, and ending such a series of increasing sections is considered to have further room for modification, and will be described below.

The modified example is the same as the present example in that it has the game states of (A) RT0 state, (B) BB state, and (C) RT1 state, but MB as a specific combination (related to the second class special combination) If the combination of symbols relating to MB is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the character state continuous operating device) is used to shift to (D) MB state. The winning probability of BB is set to about 1/10 (6553/65536), and the winning probability of MB is set to about the same. The MB is a bonus role, and once it is won, it is assumed that the MB is carried over until the combination of symbols related to the MB is displayed (between MB flags, MB permitted state). It is assumed that the MB always wins a duplicate with any one of the special small winning groups (for example, the special small winning groups 1 to 3) and does not win alone.

(A) In the RT0 state, when MB+special small winning combination group 1 wins in duplicate, a stop operation is defined in a correct answer mode (for example, the timing of the stop operation for the reel 3L is the second range below or the third range below). When it is performed in a mode that is a first range different from the range, or a mode in which the stop operation is performed by the first stop on the left), the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the activated line, ( D) Transition to MB state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in a predefined correct manner, the combination of symbols related to MB is not stopped and displayed on the activated line, and the combination of symbols related to any special small win (specific (Combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed on the activated line, for example, one medal is paid out, and the state shifts to the (C)RT1 state between the MB flags.

(A) In the RT0 state, when the MB+special small winning group 2 is won in duplicate, the stop operation has a predetermined correct mode (for example, the timing of the stop operation on the reel 3L is the first range and the third range below). When it is performed in a mode that is a second range different from the range, or a mode in which the stop operation is performed by the first stop in the middle), the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the activated line, ( D) Transition to MB state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in a predefined correct manner, the combination of symbols related to MB is not stopped and displayed on the activated line, and the combination of symbols related to any special small win (specific (Combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed on the activated line, for example, one medal is paid out, and the state shifts to the (C)RT1 state between the MB flags.

(A) In the RT0 state, when the MB+special small winning group 3 wins overlappingly, the stop operation has a predetermined correct mode (for example, the timing of the stop operation on the reel 3L is the first range and the second range). When it is performed in a mode that is a third range different from the range, or a mode in which the stop operation is performed by the first stop on the right), the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the activated line, D) Transition to MB state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in a predefined correct manner, the combination of symbols related to MB is not stopped and displayed on the activated line, and the combination of symbols related to any special small win (specific (Combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed on the activated line, for example, one medal is paid out, and the state shifts to the (C)RT1 state between the MB flags.

In this modified example, when a plurality of MBs (for example, MB1, MB2, and MB3) are used as the specific winning combination, and a combination of symbols related to any of the MBs is stopped and displayed on the activated line (D). It may be possible to shift to the MB state. In this case, the total winning probability of MB may be set to be approximately the same as the winning probability of BB. In addition, MB1, MB2, and MB3 may be the same as the special small winning group without fail, and may not be won by themselves. Then, when the MB1+special small winning group is a double winning, the same control as the MB+special small winning group 1 is performed, and when the MB2+special small winning group is a double winning, the same as the MB+special small winning group 2. When the control is performed and the MB3+special small winning group is won in a duplicated manner, the same control as the MB+special small winning group 3 may be performed.

That is, in the (A) RT0 state, when the MB is won, if the mode of the stop operation is appropriate in the game in which the MB is won (for example, when the correct answer is given to the above three options), the (D) MB state Move to. (D) The MB state is, for example, a bonus state in which two medals are always paid out with a bet of two coins, and when a prescribed number (more than two) of game denominations are provided, the upper limit of the game valuation is given. Then, the MB end condition is satisfied, and the state changes from (D) MB state to (A) RT0 state. Here, the (D)MB state itself is not an increasing period in which the game value increases (however, it is not a decreasing period but a non-increasing period), but after the end, it shifts to the (A)RT0 state, so that (D)MB state. The transition to the state is positioned as the transition to the series of increasing sections described above or the continuation of the series of increasing sections.

On the other hand, in the (A) RT0 state, when the MB is won, the mode of the stop operation is not appropriate in the game in which the MB is won (for example, when the correct answer is not given to the above three options), (C) Transition to the RT1 state. In this modification, the (C)RT1 state between the MB flags does not end until the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. Then, (C) the "miss" probability in the RT1 state is set to about "1/300". That is, in order to end the (C)RT1 state and shift to the (A)RT0 state, in the game in which the "miss" occurs in the (C)RT1 state, the combination of symbols relating to the MB is displayed (D). ) It is necessary to shift to the MB state and digest the game in the (D) MB state. In addition, when the special small winning group described above is won in the (C) RT1 state, it may be possible to display the combination of symbols related to the MB even when the correct answer is given to the above-mentioned three options.

(Game flow of a modified example of this example)
In this modification, the (C)RT1 state between the MB flags is positioned as a normal game that is not advantageous to the player, so the player normally starts the game from the (C)RT1 state between the MB flags. To do.

In the (C) RT1 state, the transition to the (A) RT0 state does not occur unless the transition to the (D) MB state is performed. The player plays the game after waiting for the "loss" to occur. If a combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed in the game in which the "loss" has occurred, the state shifts to the (D)MB state, and after finishing the (D)MB state, shifts to the (A)RT0 state.

(A) When the bonus combination is won in the RT0 state, the probability that the bonus combination is BB is 1/2 (50%), and the probability that it is MB is 1/2 (50%). When the bonus combination initially won after the state (C) RT1 is changed to the state (A) RT0 is BB, a series of increase sections is started. After the winning of BB, there is no winning of MB (that is, without shifting to (C)RT1 state), and the combination of symbols related to BB is displayed (B)shifting to BB state, (B It is possible to increase the game value in the BB state. The (B) BB state is configured as, for example, the above-mentioned “special bonus state”. (B) When the BB state ends, the state returns to the (A) RT0 state again, and if the BB can be won before the MB is won again with a probability of 50%, a series of increase intervals continues. That is, a series of increase sections is a game section that can be looped with a probability of 50% (loop rate of 50%). The loop rate is an example, and can be set to an arbitrary value by appropriately changing the lottery value (winning probability) of the bonus combination.

In the (A) RT0 state that has become a series of increasing sections, if you win the MB before you win the BB, if you can display the combination of symbols related to the MB in the game that won the MB, ( D) It is possible to return to the (A) RT0 state again through the transition to the MB state. In this case as well, a series of increasing sections continues. On the other hand, if the combination of symbols related to MB cannot be displayed in the game won to MB, (C) RT1 state is entered. In this case, a series of increase sections ends.

Further, when the (C)RT1 state shifts to the (A)RT0 state and the first winning combination is MB, a series of increasing sections is not started. However, as described above, when the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed in the game won in MB, it is possible to return to (A) RT0 state again through the transition to (D) MB state. it can. In this case, it may be possible to start a series of increasing sections in the returned (A) RT0 state. On the other hand, if the combination of symbols related to MB cannot be displayed in the game won to MB, (C) RT1 state is entered. In this case, there is no case where a series of increasing sections can be started. In addition, in the above description, when the first winning combination is BB after shifting from the (C)RT1 state to the (A)RT0 state, the start of a series of increasing sections is described. However, the (C)RT1 state From (A) to RT0 state may be the start of a series of increasing sections, or (C) from RT1 state to (A) RT0 state, the first winning bonus combination is BB, and the BB concerned. The time when the combination of symbols related to is displayed and the state shifts to the (B) BB state may be the start of a series of increasing sections.

(First Mode of Advantageous Interval Specification in Modification of this Example)
Next, the first mode of the advantageous zone specification when the game characteristic (game specification) of the modified example of the present example described so far is adopted will be described. The first aspect is a specification in which an advantageous section is not provided.

As described above, in the game property (game specification) of the modified example of this example, (A) RT0 state → (B) BB state → (A) RT0 state → (B) BB state... By repeating the A) RT0 state and the (B) BB state mutually, it is possible to create a series of increasing sections, so that even if the player is not informed of the stop operation, the game is highly entertaining. It is possible to do. Therefore, as in the case of the first aspect, the advantageous section may not be provided.

Also in this first mode, for example, when (B) BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, notification or suggestion to that effect can be made, and (B) RB is won in the BB state. When this is done, it is possible to make an announcement or suggestion to that effect. On the other hand, (A) When the MB is won in the RT0 state, and (C) When the combination of symbols relating to the MB can be displayed in the RT1 state, at least a game method in which the symbol combination relating to the MB is displayed is estimated. It is desirable not to make such announcements or suggestions. Here, "announcement or suggestion such that a game method in which a combination of symbols relating to MB is displayed is inferred" is, for example, directly announcing or suggesting that a combination of symbols relating to MB can be displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, but includes a notice or suggestion that the above-mentioned special small winning group has won or a combination of symbols related to the special small winning group that has won. This is because if such a notification or suggestion substantially increases the probability that the (C)RT1 state will end, the gambling performance of the game may become excessively high. However, since (C) RT1 state is not included in the series of increasing sections at least, when (C) RT1 state can display a symbol combination related to MB, “a combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. "Announcement or suggestion" that the game method to be used can be guessed.

(Second Mode of Advantageous Interval Specification in Modification of this Example)
Next, a second mode of the advantageous section specification when the game characteristic (game specification) of the modified example of the present example described so far is adopted will be described. The second mode is a specification in which (B) it is possible to shift to the advantageous section only during the BB state.

As described above, in the game property (game specification) of the modified example of the present example, in (B) BB state, the game value given according to the mode of the stop operation of the player, such as the push order small win, can be changed. Since the internal winning combination can be determined, if (B) the BB state is used as an advantageous section and the player is informed of the stop operation, (B) the expected value of the game value given to the BB state is set. It can be maximized, which not only improves the interest of the player, but also contributes to ensuring the fairness of the game and the manageability of the payout rate. Therefore, as in the second mode, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section only during the (B) BB state. In this case, the advantageous section may be started when the (B)BB state is started, and the advantageous section may be ended when the (B)BB state is ended.

In the second mode, as in the first mode, for example, when (A) RT0 is won and BB is won, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. (B) When the RB is won in the BB state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. On the other hand, when (A) RT0 state wins the MB, and (C) RT1 state when the combination of symbols relating to the MB can be displayed, at least the combination of symbols relating to the MB, as in the first aspect. It is desirable not to make announcements or suggestions that would suggest the game method in which is displayed.

(Third Mode of Advantageous Interval Specification in Modification of this Example)
Next, a description will be given of a third mode of the advantageous section specification when the game property (game specification) of the modified example of the present example described so far is adopted. The third mode is a specification in which it is possible to shift to the advantageous section during (A) RT0 state and (C) RT1 state.

The third mode is basically the same as that described in this example, and in the (A) RT0 state, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, (A-1) normal (non- (A-2) the advantageous section, and when the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, the (A-2) the advantageous section is shifted to the (A-1) normal (non-advantageous section), Further, in the (C) RT1 state, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, the (C-1) normal (non-advantageous section) is shifted to the (C-2) advantageous section, and the advantageous section When the termination condition is satisfied, the (C-2) advantageous section is shifted to the (C-1) normal (non-advantageous section).

However, in this example, in the case of (A-2) advantageous section in the state of (A) RT0, the pushing order that is the correct answer for the pushing order small winning combination is notified, so that (C) RT1 is substantially generated. Although the information that can avoid the transition to the state is also notified, in the third aspect, the information that can avoid the transition to the (C)RT1 state is not notified. That is, in the (A-2) advantageous section, when a small winning combination in the pushing order is won, the pushing order which is the correct answer is notified, so that (A-1) more than in the normal (non-advantageous section). Although a game value is given, if the MB is won, "the announcement or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols relating to the MB is displayed is guessed" is not made, and the player voluntarily changes to the MB. When the combination of such symbols can be displayed (A) the RT0 state is maintained, but when the player cannot display the combination of symbols relating to MB by himself (C). It is adapted to shift to the RT1 state.

However, for example, in the case of (A) RT0 state, when (A-2) advantageous section is provided and 50 games are given as the duration of the advantageous section, 10 games later (that is, the duration of the advantageous section remains 40 games). If the MB is won and the combination of symbols relating to the MB is not displayed (C) and the state shifts to the RT1 state, the duration may be 40 games (C-2), and the advantageous period may shift. . That is, the duration of the given advantageous section may be taken over from the (A) RT0 state to the (C) RT1 state or from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state (note that in the latter case, In (D), the game period in the MB state may or may not be included in the advantageous period).

Further, (A) RT0 state is a game period included in a series of increasing sections, so (A) RT0 state does not include (A-2) advantageous section, and is not included in a series of increasing sections. It is a period, and the (C-2) advantageous section may be provided only in the (C) RT1 state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. That is, the third mode is advantageous for the purpose of relieving a player who plays a game in a game period ((C)RT1 state) relatively disadvantageous to the player and preventing a decrease in the interest of the game. A section ((C-2) advantageous section) may be provided.

In the third aspect as well, similar to the first aspect, for example, when (B) BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. (B) When the RB is won in the BB state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. However, as in the case of the third aspect, when the advantageous section is positioned as a game section that facilitates winning of an internal winning combination (for example, a small combination) related to winning, (A) RT0 state is changed to BB. When there is a mode of the stop operation (pushing order or timing of the stop operation) that facilitates the display of the symbol combination related to BB when the winning is won, the stop operation of the stop operation is performed based on the advantageous section. Although it is not desirable to directly notify the mode, such notification may be performed.

In this modification, the second aspect and the third aspect are described as different aspects, but an advantageous zone aspect in which the second aspect and the third aspect are combined is adopted. You can also In this case, if the (A) RT0 state winning the BB is the (A-2) advantageous section, the information of the stop operation is notified even in the (B) BB state, and the (A-1) normal (non-advantageous section). In this case, the information of the stop operation may not be notified even in the (B) BB state. Further, in this case, in (B) BB state, which is shifted from (A-2) advantage section, the duration of the advantage section is sequentially updated as the game progresses (that is, the duration of the given advantage section is changed). The duration of the advantageous section may not be updated (that is, the duration of the given advantageous section may not be reduced).

(Fourth Mode of Advantageous Interval Specification in Modification of this Example)
Next, a description will be given of a fourth mode of the advantageous zone specification when the game characteristic (game specification) of the modified example of the present example described so far is adopted. The fourth mode is a specification in which the (A) RT0 state can shift to the advantageous section.

In the fourth aspect, contrary to the above-described third aspect, (A) in the RT0 state (A-2) in the advantageous section, when the MB is won, "a combination of symbols related to MB is By making an announcement or suggestion such that the displayed game method can be guessed, (C) information that can avoid the transition to the RT1 state is notified, but when the push order small win is won, it is a correct answer. The pushing order is not notified. Further, in the (C) RT1 state, when (C-2) the advantageous section, it is possible to display the combination of symbols relating to MB, "a gaming method in which a combination of symbols relating to MB is displayed is inferred. "Announcement or suggestion" is performed, but (A) the information that enables the transition to the RT0 state is notified, but if the winning order is a small winning order, the correct pressing order is not notified. It is a thing.

In the fourth aspect, for example, the advantageous section may be provided with only the (A-2) advantageous section and not provided with the (C-2) advantageous section. That is, the advantageous section is configured to have a function of continuing a series of increasing sections ((A) continuing the RT0 state), and (C) not having a function of ending the RT1 state. You may.

Further, in the fourth aspect, a method of managing the advantageous section by the number of times (the number of times of navigating) the “announcement or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is supposed” is performed. Is preferred. For example, in (C) RT1 state, a combination of symbols related to MBs is displayed, (D) transitions to MB state, and (D) MB state ends and (A) transitions to RT0 state. At any timing, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, and when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the number of times of navigation to be given is determined. Then, in the transitioned (A) RT0 state ((A-2) advantageous section), the number of times of navigation determined is "notification or suggestion such that a game method in which a combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is inferred". Should be done. However, in the (A) RT0 state, for example, a winning combination for the BB is displayed, a combination of symbols relating to the BB is displayed, the state shifts to the (B) BB state, and the (B) BB state ends and the (A) RT0 state is set. At any one of the transition timings, it is decided whether or not to shift (extend) to the advantageous zone, and if it is decided to shift (extend) to the advantageous zone, decide the number of times of navigation to be given. You may. It should be noted that although the management based on the number of times of navigation has been described as preferable, it does not prevent the adoption of other management methods (for example, management based on the number of games).

In the fourth mode as well, similar to the first mode, for example, when (B) BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. (B) When the RB is won in the BB state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. However, if the advantageous section is positioned as a game section that facilitates continuation of a series of increasing sections as in the case of the fourth mode, (A) when the BB is won in the RT0 state, the BB is related to When there is a mode of the stop operation (pushing order or timing of the stop operation) that facilitates the display of the combination of symbols, the mode of the stop operation is directly notified based on the advantageous section. This is not desirable, but such notification may be performed.

In this modification, the third aspect and the fourth aspect are described as different aspects, but an advantageous section aspect in which the third aspect and the fourth aspect are combined is adopted. You can also In this case, in the case of (A-2) advantageous section, since the pushing order which is the correct answer when the small winning combination of the pushing order is won is notified, (A-1) a lot more than the normal (non-advantageous section). When the gaming value is given and the MB is won, the notification or suggestion that the gaming method in which the combination of symbols relating to the MB is displayed can be inferred is performed, and (C) the transition to the RT1 state is avoided. It suffices if the possible information is notified. In addition, (C-2) If it is an advantageous section, the pushing order that will be the correct answer when the small winning combination is won is notified, so that (C-1) more games than normal (non-advantageous section) When a value is given and a symbol combination relating to MB can be displayed, "announcement or suggestion that the game method in which the symbol combination relating to MB is displayed is inferred" is performed, and (A) RT0 Information that enables the transition to the state may be notified. As described above, even in the (C-2) advantageous section, when the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed, "a game method in which a combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is inferred. "No announcement or suggestion" may be prohibited.

(Advantageous section limiter in the modification of this example)
Subsequently, the game characteristic (game specification) of the modified example of the present embodiment described so far is adopted, and the advantageous section specification includes at least the third aspect or the fourth aspect as the advantageous section specification. The limit processing of the advantageous section in the case of adopting will be described.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the above-described or later-described limit processing in order to prevent the gambling property from becoming excessively high due to the advantageous section continuing for too long. For example, if the number of games is the limit number of games, the advantageous section continues for “1500 games”, and if it is the “number of sheets limiter”, if the medal of “2400” is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is still in the advantageous section. Even when the number of games, the number of sets, the stock, the number of times of navigation, the number of differences, etc. remain, the limit process is forcibly ended and the advantageous section is shifted to the non-advantageous section.

However, according to the game characteristic (game specification) of the modified example of the present example, a series of increase sections may continue even after the advantageous section ends due to the execution of such limit processing. That is, there is a problem that a series of increasing sections may lose the significance of setting a certain limit on the continuation of the advantageous section that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, in order to provide a gaming machine capable of limiting an advantageous section in consideration of a series of increasing sections, it is desirable to make the following arrangement.

For example, in the game characteristic (game specification) of the modified example of the present example, the advantageous section is started at the same time as the series of increasing sections starts or before the series of increasing sections starts. As one specific example, when it is determined that a series of increase intervals starts when (A) RT0 state wins BB, (A) at the same time when BB is won in RT0 state, or (A) The advantageous section is started when the RT0 state is entered. Further, as another specific example, when it is determined that the series of increase intervals starts when the state changes to the (A)RT0 state, the (A)RT0 state is changed at the same time, or the (D)MB state is set. The advantageous section is started when, for example, transition to. It should be noted that the start of the advantageous section here means the start of the advantageous section on the limit process (for control), and is not necessarily the actual duration of the advantageous section (the number of games, the number of sets, the stock, It does not mean that the number of navigations, the number of differences, etc.) is added. Therefore, for the duration of the advantageous section, for example, various conditions described in other examples of the game property (game specification) other than this embodiment and this example are adopted, and granted (or extended) in each game state. It is only necessary to decide whether or not the item is given, and to grant (or extend) according to the decision result. However, whether or not to grant (or extend) the duration of the advantageous section may be determined at the start point.

Here, in the case of the “game number limiter”, the upper limit number of games is, for example, “1500 games”, but from this “1500”, a bonus state (for example, (B) BB state. If there is a bonus state, the expected number of games (average number of games that may continue for the longest number of them) is a threshold value according to the loop rate (the loop rate is converted to the number of games). The value multiplied by the variable defined as the multiplication rate for doing) is subtracted, and it is calculated as the instruction stop game number (or specified in advance). For example, in the modified example of this example, when the expected number of games in the bonus state is "20 games" and the threshold value corresponding to the loop rate of 50% is "6", the number of instruction stop games is "1500 games-20 games". ×6=1380 games”.

Here, in the case of the “number limiter”, the upper limit number of acquired sheets is, for example, “2400 sheets”, but from this “2400”, a bonus state (for example, (B) BB state. If there is a bonus status, the expected number of coins (the one that may be awarded the most medals) (average number of coins) is converted into a threshold value (loop rate is converted to number of coins) according to the loop rate. The value multiplied by a variable defined as a multiplication rate) is subtracted, and the value is calculated as an instruction stop acquisition number (or specified in advance). For example, in the modified example of this example, if the expected number of bonuses to be acquired is "120" and the threshold value corresponding to the loop rate of 50% is "6", the number of instruction stop acquisitions is "2400-120. ×6=1680 sheets”.

When the limit process is configured to be performed by the "game number limiter", when the advantageous period started at the start point is continued and the number of games reaches "1380 games" (number of instruction stop games) , If the duration of the advantageous section remains (in terms of control), the advantageous section will continue, but in subsequent games, the information of the stop operation will not be notified (that is, the instruction function will stop). ).

Further, in the case where the limit process is performed by the “number limiter”, when the advantageous period started at the above-mentioned start time is continued as it is and the acquired number reaches “1680” (instruction stop acquisition number) , If the duration of the advantageous section remains (in terms of control), the advantageous section will continue, but in the subsequent games, the information of the stop operation will not be notified (that is, the instruction function will stop) .

In addition, it is the processing after the instruction function is stopped based on reaching the instruction stop game number or the instruction stop acquisition number, but before the limit processing is executed, if a series of increase sections are finished, At the same time, or after the end, the advantageous section is ended. As one specific example, when it is determined that a series of increase sections wins the MB in the (A) RT0 state, and the combination of symbols related to the MB is not displayed (C) the RT1 state is completed, , (C) RT1 state at the same time, or (C) RT1 state when the next game of the game is started, the advantageous section is ended. In addition, in the (A) RT0 state and the (B) BB state, a series of increasing sections may still continue. Therefore, at least (C) RT1 is the process of terminating the (control) advantageous section. It is desirable to be in the state. However, this is not the case when the advantageous section is ended by executing the limit process. That is, in (A) RT0 state and (B) BB state, when "1500 games" is reached in the case of "game number limiter" and "2400 sheets" is reached in the case of "number of sheets limiter", It may be possible to end the advantageous section by executing the limit process.

It should be noted that when the advantageous section continues to reach the instruction stop game number or the instruction stop acquisition number, the instruction function is stopped, which is substantially synonymous with the end of the advantageous section. Therefore, the “1500 games” of the “game number limiter” and the “2400 sheets” of the “number of sheets limiter” are set to values that are set as the regulation values of the gaming machines that can be installed in the game store, and the modification of the present example In a gaming machine equipped with a series of increased sections such as the game playability (game specification), the instruction stop game number or the instruction stop acquisition number is calculated from the regulation value as described above, and the calculated instruction stop is calculated. The value of the number of games or the number of instructions stop acquisition number may be predetermined as the value of the “game number limiter” or the “number limit”, and the limit process may be executed. In other words, if a series of increase sections are installed, the increase period of increasing the game value may greatly exceed the planned payout design or the range of the predetermined regulation value. Any method can be adopted as long as it is possible to regulate the advantageous section (forwardly) after taking into consideration the portion that is lost.

Further, the game characteristics (game specifications) described in the modified example of the present example, the first to fourth aspects of the advantageous interval specification in the modified example of the present example, and the technical idea regarding the advantageous interval limiter in the modified example of the present example are The game machine according to the modified example is described as an example, and the present invention is not limited to the game machine according to the modified example of this example. That is, the game machine described in this embodiment, this example, and other examples of game play (game specification) other than this example can be appropriately modified and applied.

[Another example of playability (game specifications) (Part 4)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, another example (No. 4) of the playability (game specification) that can be mounted in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram conceptually explaining a game flow in another example (4) of the game property (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 96, in this example, (A) RT0 state, (B) RT1 state non-flag state, (C) RT1 state MB flag state, (D) RT2 state BB flag state, (E) BB state, There are (F) MB game states. It should be noted that the (A) RT0 state and the (E) BB state are positioned as the series of increasing sections described above.

In (A) RT0 state, the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is at least lower than (B) (C) RT1 state, (B) RT1 state non-flag, (D) RT2 state BB flag, and ( F) It is a game state in which it is possible to shift to the MB state. In addition, since BB, MB, push order small win, bell spill, etc. are the same as those described in the other example (part 3) (including modified examples) of the game property (game specification), The description of is omitted. However, in this example, MB is a winning combination that overlaps with any small combination or replay combination (for example, the above-mentioned rare combination) and does not win alone, and in the game in which MB is won, the combination of symbols related to MB is In the game in which the internal lottery result is “missed” between the MB flags without being displayed, the symbol related to MB is always irrespective of the pushing order and the timing of the stop operation (that is, the mode of the stop operation). Although the combination is configured to be displayed, in the same manner as described in the modified example of the other example (3) of the game property (game specification), the MB is changed according to the mode of the stop operation of the player. It is also possible to configure so that a combination of symbols related to MB may be displayed in the game that is won.

(A) In the RT0 state, when the control is not performed in the advantageous section, (A-1) becomes a normal (non-advantageous section), which is a reduction period in which the game value decreases, and when the control is performed in the advantageous section. Is an (A-2) advantageous period, which is an increasing period during which the game value increases. As the specific notification condition that can be controlled to the advantageous section, various conditions described in other examples of game characteristics (game specifications) other than this embodiment and this example can be adopted.

When (1) BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, the state shifts between the (D) RT2 state BB flags as the BB permission state. Further, in the (A) RT0 state, when the MB is won, the state shifts between the MB flags as the MB permitted state, but the RT state does not change. Further, between the (A) RT0 state MB flags, even if the bell-eye drops are stopped and displayed on the activated line, the (C) RT1 state MB flags do not shift. Further, in (A) RT0 state, the probability of "miss" is set to be higher than at least (B) (C) RT1 state (for example, to "1/6"), so the symbol combination related to MB is displayed. As a result, the condition (4) MB start condition is easily established. Further, in (A) RT0 state, before (D) RT2 state before transition between BB flags or before between MB flags (that is, when between non-flags), (5) Bell spill is valid. When it is stopped and displayed on the line, the state shifts to (C) RT1 state non-flag.

During (B) RT1 state non-flag, the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is higher than at least (A) RT0 state, (A) RT0 state, (C) RT1 state between MB flags, and (D) RT2. It is a game state that can be transferred between state BB flags. (B) Between the RT1 state non-flags, when not controlled in the advantageous section, (B-1) becomes a normal (non-advantageous section) and becomes a reduction period in which the game value decreases, and is controlled in the advantageous section. If so, (B-2) it becomes an advantageous section, which is an increasing period during which the game value increases. As the specific notification condition that can be controlled to the advantageous section, various conditions described in other examples of game characteristics (game specifications) other than this embodiment and this example can be adopted.

When (1) BB is won during the (B) RT1 state non-flag, the state shifts to the (D) RT2 state BB flag as the BB permission state. When (6) MB is won during (B) RT1 state non-flag, the state shifts to (C) RT1 state MB flag as the MB permitted state (RT state does not change). In this example, since the combination of symbols related to MB is not displayed in the game won in MB, (B) RT1 state does not shift from the non-flag state to (F) MB state However, as described above, it may be configured such that there is a case where the state shifts from (B) RT1 state non-flag state to (F) MB state. The (B) RT1 state non-flag state and the (C) RT1 state MB flag state are basically the same RT state (RT1 state), and (B) (C) any RT1 state, (9) When the number of games in the RT1 state reaches the specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) (that is, when 1500 games have been exhausted), (A) RT0 state is entered. At this time, if it is between (B) RT1 state non-flags, it shifts between (A) RT0 state non-flags, and if (C) between RT1 state MB flags shifts between (A) RT0 state MB flags. ..

Between the (C) RT1 state MB flags, the winning probability of the re-play (replay) combination is higher than at least the (A) RT0 state, and it is a gaming state in which the state can shift to the (A) RT0 state and (F) MB state. . (C) Between the RT1 state MB flags, when not controlled to the advantageous section, (C-1) becomes a normal (non-advantageous section) and becomes a reduction period in which the game value decreases, and is controlled to the advantageous section. If there is, (C-2) it becomes an advantageous section, which is an increasing period in which the game value increases. As the specific notification condition that can be controlled to the advantageous section, various conditions described in other examples of game characteristics (game specifications) other than this embodiment and this example can be adopted.

(C) Between the RT1 state MB flags, the "miss" probability is set to be extremely lower than at least the (A) RT0 state (for example, to "1/8192"), so that the symbol combination related to MB is displayed. Therefore, it is difficult to satisfy the condition (7) MB start. During the (C) RT1 state MB flag, there is no case of newly winning the MB or winning the BB because the MB is in the permitted state.

Between the (D) RT2 state BB flags, the winning probability of the re-play (replay) combination is at least lower than that of the (B) (C) RT1 state, and the (E) BB state is a gaming state in which the winning probability is possible. (D) When the combination of symbols relating to BB is displayed between the RT2 state BB flags, (2) BB start condition is satisfied, and the state shifts to (E) BB state. Also, between the (D)RT2 state BB flags, the "miss" probability is set to be higher than at least the (B)(C)RT1 state (for example, to "1/12"), so that the symbol relating to BB It is easy for the combination to be displayed and (2) BB start condition to be satisfied. During the (C) RT2 state BB flag, there is no case of newly winning the BB or winning the MB because the BB is in the permitted state.

The (E)BB state is, for example, a gaming state that is configured by the above-mentioned “special bonus state” and has an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. In the (E)BB state, when a prescribed number (for example, more than 140) of game values are given, the game value is given as an upper limit, and (3)BB end condition is satisfied, and (B)BB state is changed to (A). ) Move to RT0 state.

The (F) MB state is a gaming state that is configured as a normal bonus state and has an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. It should be noted that, as in the case of the modified example of the other example (3) of the game property (game specification), it may be configured as a no increase/decrease period. (F) In the MB state, when a specified number (eg, more than 13) of game values are given, the game value is given as an upper limit, (8) MB end condition is satisfied, and (A) RT0 state is shifted. If it is, the (F) MB state shifts to the (A) RT0 state, and if the (C) RT1 state MB flag shifts, the (F) MB state shifts to the (B) RT1 state non-flag shift. Move to.

That is, in the (F)MB state, the RT state does not change due to its operation or termination (more specifically, the (B)(C)RT1 state operates through the (F)MB state). ing. Here, the (B) and (C) RT1 states do not end for a prescribed number of games (for example, 1500 games) from the start. Therefore, the activation or termination of the (F)MB state does not affect the specified number of games. However, the period in the (F)MB state may be included in the counting target of the specified number of games, or the counting of the specified number of games may be interrupted (not included).

The transition control between the (F)MB state and the (B)(C)RT1 state is not limited to that described above. For example, when the (F)MB state is completed, even if the transition is made between the (C)RT1 state MB flags, the transition may be made to the (A)RT0 state. That is, the RT1 state may be ended when the MB state is activated or ended. In this example, when the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state MB flag, the specified number of games is consumed to shift to the (A) RT0 state MB flag, and the (F) MB state is activated to (A) RT0. If the state is shifted between non-flags, or (F) MB state is activated to shift between (B) RT1 state non-flags, and BB is not won there, it does not shift to a series of increase intervals. Therefore, when the (F)MB state is completed, if the transition is made between the non-flags of the (A)RT0 state, the frequency of transition to a series of increase sections can be increased. This may be appropriately selected according to the intended payout rate and its content.

According to the gaming machine of this example, when the special combination (BB) is won, the special permission state (BB permission state) is entered and the second specific game state ((D)RT2 state) is entered, and the special symbol While it is not difficult to display the combination (combination of symbols related to BB) and shift to the special game state ((E)BB state), if the special combination (MB) is won, the special permission state (MB permission) State) but the game state does not shift, if the first specific game state (between (C) RT1 state MB flag), a combination of special symbols (symbols related to MB) until the first specific game state ends It is difficult to shift to the special game state ((F)MB state) by displaying the combination), and as a result, it is difficult to shift to the normal game state ((A)RT0 state). Further, in the first specific game state, when the special combination (push order small combination) is won in the special permission state and the normal game state that is not the special permission state, the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (mode in which the press order is the correct answer). Is performed and a transition is made based on the display of a combination of specific symbols (bell-shaped eyes). Then, when the specific notification condition is satisfied, during the specific period (advantageous section) in the normal game state and the first specific game state, operation information regarding a specific mode is notified when a specific winning combination is won, and the operation is stopped according to the notification. If the operation is performed, the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given.

Here, according to the gaming machine of this example, in the normal game state, when a specific combination is won, a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a special combination or a special combination is won before shifting to the first specific game state. If the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special combination is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. . On the other hand, in the first specific game state, if the special combination is won and the special permitted state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game in the normal game state again via the special game state.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, when the special combination (BB) is won, the special permission state (BB permission state) is entered, and the second specific game state ((D)RT2 state) is entered, and While it is not difficult to display a combination of symbols (combination of symbols related to BB) and shift to the special game state ((E)BB state), when the special winning combination (MB) is won, the special permission state ( If the first specific game state (between (C) RT1 state MB flag), the game state does not shift, but a prescribed number (for example, 1500 games) of games are played and the first It is difficult to display the special symbol combination (combination of symbols relating to MB) and move to the special game state ((F)MB state) until the specific game state ends, and as a result, the normal game state ((A ) It is difficult to shift to the RT0 state). Further, in the first specific game state, when the special combination (push order small combination) is won in the special permission state and the normal game state that is not the special permission state, the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (mode in which the press order is the correct answer). Is performed and a transition is made based on the display of a combination of specific symbols (bell-shaped eyes). Then, when the specific notification condition is satisfied, during the specific period (advantageous section) in the normal game state and the first specific game state, operation information regarding a specific mode is notified when a specific winning combination is won, and the operation is stopped according to the notification. If the operation is performed, the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given.

Here, according to the gaming machine of this example, in the normal game state, when a specific combination is won, a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a special combination or a special combination is won before shifting to the first specific game state. If the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special combination is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. . On the other hand, in the first specific game state, if the special combination is won and the special permitted state is achieved, it becomes difficult to play the game in the normal game state again via the special game state until the specified number of games are played.

Under such a game property, in the normal game state, when a specific period during which operation information regarding a specific aspect is notified is given, the special game state (or the special game state) is entered without shifting to the first specific game state. It is possible not only to repeat the shift (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also to increase the game value given when the specific combination is won. Further, in the first specific game state, when the specific period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified is given, for example, in the case of the special permission state, it is not possible to shift to the normal game state via the special game state. Although difficult, the game value given when a specific winning combination is won will increase. Further, even in the normal game state, even when the specific period for notifying the operation information regarding a specific mode is not informed, shift to the special game state (or special game state) without shifting to the first specific game state May be repeated.

That is, according to the gaming machine of this example, it is in the normal game state or the first specific game state, in which order the special combination, the special combination or the specific combination is won in the normal game state, the first specific game. In a specific state in which the special combination or special combination is won, whether or not it is a specific period in which operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or related to a specific mode in the first specific gaming state It is possible to change the advantage degree of the player in various ways according to whether or not it is a specific period in which the operation information is notified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game motivation and interest.

In the gaming machine of this example, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the first specific game state may be made to function as an increase period in which the game value increases. In this way, since the game value may increase even in the first specific game state, the interest of the game is maintained even during the specific game state in which it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Can be made

[Another example of playability (game specifications) (Part 5)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, another example (No. 5) of the playability (game specification) that can be mounted in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a diagram conceptually illustrating a game flow in another example (No. 5) of game property (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 97, in this example, (A) general game state (non-bonus state), (B) BB1 state, (C) BB1 flag interval, (D) BB2 state, (E) BB2 flag interval, ( There is a game state between F)BB3 state and (G)BB3 flag. In this example, the type of bonus combination won in the normal game state (normal game state), and whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning game in the bonus combination is displayed is made to have different game characteristics. is there.

The combination of symbols related to BB1 is configured in the same manner as, for example, “C_red same color BB” (see FIG. 20) of the present embodiment. The combination of symbols related to BB2 is configured in the same manner as, for example, the “C_blue same color BB” (see FIG. 20) of the present embodiment. The symbol combination related to BB3 is configured as, for example, "BAR-BAR-BAR" (see FIG. 15). At this time, the "red 7" symbol, the "blue 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol are arranged at equal intervals (or approximately equal intervals) on at least one reel (or all reels), When the stop operation is performed on the reel, the timing at which the "red 7" symbol is displayed, the timing at which the "blue 7" symbol is displayed, and the timing at which the "BAR" symbol is displayed overlap. Configure not to. That is, when the "red 7" symbol is aimed and pressed, the "blue 7" and "BAR" symbols are not displayed, and when the "blue 7" symbol is aimed and pressed, " There is no case where the "red 7" and "BAR" symbols are displayed, and when the "BAR" symbol is pressed and pressed, the "red 7" and "blue 7" symbols are not displayed To do. The combination of symbols related to BB3 may be configured in the same manner as, for example, “C_red different color BB” or “C_blue different color BB” (see FIG. 20) of the present embodiment.

(A) In the normal game state (non-bonus state), for example, when a bonus combination (one of BB1 to BB3) can be won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/45 in total), the winning bonus combination is BB1. A certain probability is "45%" (the winning probability is "1/100"), and a probability that the winning bonus combination is BB2 is "45%" (the winning probability is "1/100"). The probability that the bonus combination is BB3 is “10%” (the winning probability is “1/450”). The bonus winning ratio is an example, and BB1 to BB3 may be won with the same winning probability (winning ratio), or may be won with a different ratio from the above. Further, in the (A) general game state (non-bonus state), BB1, BB2, and BB3 are configured not to win as a replay combination or a small combination as a duplicate and to win independently. In addition, as long as the combination of the corresponding symbols can be displayed in the winning game, it may be configured to be won overlapping with other small winning combinations.

(A) In the general game state (non-bonus state), (1-1) when BB1 is won, (2-1) when BB2 is won, and when (3-1) BB3 is won Also, a bonus winning notification is given in the game that has been won. This bonus winning notification is configured as a predetermined notification that can notify that any one of BB1 to BB3 is determined as the internal winning combination, but does not allow the type to be notified. The predetermined notification is, for example, that a character such as "big hit!" is displayed or that the win lamp is turned on, and it is notified that the bonus combination is won. It is not possible to sense whether or not BB3 is won.

(A) In the general game state (non-bonus state), if (1-1) BB1 is won, the player succeeds in pushing the "red 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is appropriate), and BB1 When the combination of symbols relating to (1) can be stopped and displayed on the activated line, (1-2) BB1 is established, and (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state) shifts to (B) BB1 state. (B) In the BB1 state, as in the other examples, the game value is increased, and in the (B) BB1 state, when a prescribed number (for example, more than 140) of game values are given, the game value becomes It becomes the upper limit of grant, and (1-4) BB1 ends, and the state shifts from the (B) BB1 state to the (A) general game state (non-bonus state).

On the other hand, if the player fails to push the "red 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate) and the symbol combination related to BB1 cannot be stopped and displayed on the activated line, (1- 3) BB1 is not established, and the state shifts from (A) the general game state (non-bonus state) to (C) the BB1 flag.

In this example, similar to the present embodiment and other examples, there are push order small wins, which will be described as 6 choices of push order small wins 1 to 6. In the normal stop control, the pushing order small win 1 is the correct pushing order for left, middle and right, and 9 cards are paid out regardless of the timing of the stopping operation. If the other pushing order is the incorrect pushing order and the timing of the stopping operation is appropriate. 1 piece is paid out, if it is not appropriate, it is missed (no payout), push order small win 2, the right and left middle is the push order correct answer, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, 9 pieces are paid out, and the other push order is the wrong push order answer, If the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one piece is paid out, if it is not appropriate, it is missed (no payout), and the pushing order small win 3 is the correct answer in the right and left middle order, and 9 pieces are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation, other pushing order Is a wrong push order, and if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one piece is paid out, if it is not right, it is missed (no payout). Discharge of 1 sheet, other push order is wrong order of push order, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, 1 piece is paid out, if it is not appropriate, it is missed (no payout) 9 pieces are paid out regardless of the operation timing, the other pushing order is the wrong pushing order, and 1 piece is paid out if the timing of the stopping operation is appropriate, if it is not appropriate, it is dropped (no payout), the pushing order small win 6 is right The middle left is the correct push order and 9 cards are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation. The other pressing order is the wrong press order, and 1 card is paid out if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. Become.

(C) Between the BB1 flags, the winning probability of the replay (replay) hand is higher than that of (A) the general game state (non-bonus state), and the “miss” probability is set to, for example, about “1/4000”. As described in other examples, also in this example, between the (C) BB1 flags, it is possible to display the combination of symbols related to BB1 only in the game in which "miss". If the combination of symbols related to BB1 can be displayed in the game that is "missed", (1-2) BB1 is established, and the state shifts from (C) BB1 flags to (B) BB1 state. Further, between (C) BB1 flags, bonus type notification is performed in which it is notified that the winning combination that was won is BB1 (that is, the type of bonus combination). This bonus type notification is configured as a specific notification for notifying that BB1 has been won (display of a combination of symbols related to BB1 is permitted) between BB1 flags. This specific notification can be made to give a sense that the player wins BB1 by displaying a character such as "red 7 inside hit" or lighting a lamp corresponding to "red 7". ing. It should be noted that this specific notification can be made to be always performed during the period between the (C)BB1 flags, or in the game in which the combination of symbols related to the BB1 can be displayed between the (C)BB1 flags. You can choose to be invited.

Further, between the (C) BB1 flags, the stop control is changed for the push order small wins 1 to 6. Specifically, if you win the push order small win 1, the push order small win 3, and the push order small win 5, regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation (without considering these factors), 9 cards are paid out. Therefore, if you win the push order small win 2, the push order small win 4, and the push order small win 6, one payout will be made regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation (without considering these factors). Stop control is changed to. Here, since the same winning probability for each of the push order small winning combinations 1 to 6, assuming that the push order is not notified, normal stop control is performed (A) general game The return rate to the player is configured to be higher between the state (non-bonus state) and between the (G)BB3 flags described later than between the (C)BB1 flags. The (C) BB1 flag interval may be configured as a reduction period (however, the reduction rate is low when viewed from (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state) and (G-1) non-advantageous section described later). Alternatively, it may be configured as an increase period (however, the increase rate is low when viewed from an advantageous section (G-2) described later). Also, in terms of the expected value of grant, it may be configured as a non-increased period. Further, although the expected addition value is hardly influenced, even between the (C) BB1 flags, for example, between the (C-1) non-advantageous section and the (C-2) advantageous section according to a specific notification condition. Alternatively, the shift control may be performed.

(A) In the general game state (non-bonus state), if (2-1) BB2 is won, the player succeeds in pushing the "blue 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is appropriate), and BB2 When the symbol combination related to (1) can be stopped and displayed on the activated line, (2-2) BB2 is established, and (A) general game state (non-bonus state) shifts to (D) BB2 state. In the (D)BB2 state, as in the other examples, the game value increases for an increasing period, and in the (D)BB2 state, when a prescribed number (for example, more than 140) of game values are given, the game value becomes It becomes the upper limit of grant, and (2-4) BB2 ends, and the state shifts from the (D) BB2 state to the (A) general game state (non-bonus state).

On the other hand, if the player fails to push the "blue 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate) and the symbol combination related to BB2 cannot be stopped and displayed on the activated line, (2- 3) BB2 is not established, and the state shifts from (A) the general game state (non-bonus state) to (E) the BB2 flag. Note that if (BB)1 is replaced with BB2 and “Red 7” is replaced with “Blue 7” between (E)BB2 flags, the operation is basically the same as between (C)BB1 flags, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. To do. The same applies to bonus type notification.

(A) In the general game state (non-bonus state), if the player wins (3-1) BB3, the player succeeds in pushing the "BAR" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is appropriate), and BB3 When the combination of such symbols can be stopped and displayed on the activated line, (3-2) BB3 is established, and (A) general game state (non-bonus state) shifts to (F) BB3 state. In the (F)BB3 state, as in other examples, the game value increases for an increasing period, and in the (F)BB3 state, when a prescribed number of game values (for example, more than 140) are given, the game value becomes It becomes the upper limit of grant, and (3-4) BB3 ends, and the state shifts from the (F) BB3 state to the (A) general game state (non-bonus state). The (F)BB3 state may be configured as a decreasing period or a non-increasing period.

On the other hand, if the player fails to push the "BAR" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate) and the symbol combination related to BB3 cannot be stopped and displayed on the activated line, (3-3 ) BB3 is not established, and the state shifts from the (A) general game state (non-bonus state) to the (G) BB3 flag.

The (G) BB3 flags have a higher winning probability of the replay (replay) role than the (C) BB1 flags and the (E) BB2 flags, and the "miss" probability is, for example, about "1/65536" or " It is set to "0". That is, between the (G) BB3 flags, the probability that the symbol combination relating to BB3 is displayed is extremely low, or the symbol combination relating to BB3 is not displayed. The setting of the “miss” probability is not limited to this, and may be set to the same extent as between the (C) BB1 flags and between the (E) BB2 flags, or may be set to a higher probability than these. This may be appropriately selected according to the intended payout rate and its content. (G) Similarly between the BB3 flags, the combination of symbols related to BB3 can be displayed only in the game in which "missing". If the combination of symbols related to BB3 can be displayed in the game that is "missed", (3-2) BB3 is established and the state shifts from (G) BB3 flags to (F) BB3 state. Note that the bonus type notification is basically the same as between the (C) BB1 flags, if “red 7” is replaced with “BAR”, and therefore the description thereof is omitted here.

Further, between the (G)BB3 flags, the stop control is not changed for the push order small wins 1 to 6, and the normal stop control is performed. Therefore, assuming that the notification of the pushing order is not performed, the return rate to the player is higher between the (C) BB1 flags and between the (E) BB2 flags, but between the (G) BB3 flags, If it is not controlled to the advantageous section, (G-1) it becomes a non-advantageous section and it becomes a reduction period in which the game value decreases. However, if it is controlled to the advantageous section, (G-2) it is advantageous. In the (G-2) advantageous section, at least the pushing order which is the correct answer at the time of winning the pushing order small winning combinations 1 to 6 is notified as a result of the section becoming the section and the gaming value increases. (C) Between BB1 flags And (E) the return rate to the player is higher than that between the BB2 flags (the higher the expected expected value is). As the specific notification condition that can be controlled to the advantageous section, various conditions described in other examples of game characteristics (game specifications) other than this embodiment and this example can be adopted.

That is, if (1-1) BB1 is won and (1-2) BB1 is established, the game value is increased to (B) BB1 state, and if (1-3) BB1 is not established, (C) Between the BB1 flags, the game value gradually increases or gradually decreases. Between (C) BB1 flags, it is configured to continue until (1-2) BB1 is established. If (2-1) BB2 is won and (2-2) BB2 is established, the game value is increased to (D) BB2 state, and if (2-3) BB2 is not established, (E) Between the BB2 flags, the game value gradually increases or gradually decreases. Between (E)BB2 flags, it is configured to continue until (2-2)BB2 is established.

If (3-1)BB3 is won and (3-2)BB3 is established, (F)BB3 state is entered and the game value is increased. If (3-3)BB3 is not established, (G) Between BB3 flags, the game value sharply decreases in the non-advantageous section (G-1), while the game value sharply increases in the advantageous section (G-2). Between (G) BB3 flags, it is configured to continue with a very low probability until (3-2) BB3 is satisfied, or basically not to end once the transition is made. Since BB1 and BB2 have a higher winning probability than BB3, it is possible to sufficiently secure a period in which the gambling property can be suppressed. In addition, usually, when the game machine is installed in a game store, the former game property is provided, and after a while, the latter game property is likely to be provided. However, it is possible to ensure that the game playability can be changed by the following initialization operation.

For example, when the setting change operation (initialization operation for initializing the gaming state) is performed when the flag is between (C)BB1 flag, between (E)BB2 flag, or between (G)BB3 flag, carryover combination By clearing BB1, BB2, or BB3 as (1), (A) general game state (non-bonus state) is entered. That is, when the (G) BB3 flags are not configured to end, the BB3 as the carryover combination is cleared based on the setting change operation being performed (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state). ). However, when the setting change operation is performed, if (C) between BB1 flags or (E) between BB2 flags, BB1 or BB2 as a carryover combination is cleared (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state). ), but if it is between (G) BB3 flags, BB3 as the carryover combination is not cleared and (A) the normal gaming state (non-bonus state) may not be shifted. Further, it is also possible to configure such that none of BB1, BB2 or BB3 as the carryover combination is cleared even if the setting change operation is performed.

According to the gaming machine of this example, when the first special winning combination (BB1) or the second special winning combination (BB3) is won, the game concerned, or the first special permission state (between BB1 flags) or the second winning combination is won. Other internal winning combination has not been determined in the special permission state (between BB3 flags) (so-called, lost) If it is not a game, the combination of the first special symbol (the combination of symbols relating to BB1) or the second special symbol Cannot be displayed (combination of symbols relating to BB3). Further, in the first special permission state, when the first predetermined winning combination (pushing order small winning combination 1, 3, 5) is won, a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game values are given regardless of the pushing order, and the second When the predetermined combination (push order small combination 2, 4, 6) is won, a predetermined number of game values are not given regardless of the push order. On the other hand, in the second special permission state, when the first predetermined combination or the second predetermined combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given if the pushing order is correct, and a predetermined number of games if the pushing order is incorrect. No value is given. Then, at least during the specific period of the second special permission state, it is possible to control to the advantageous state ((G-2) advantageous section) in which the information of the stop operation of the player is notified.

That is, if the first special combination is won, and the combination of the first special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the first special permission state ends thereafter. Since the profits will not change due to the player, and the player can receive a certain amount of profits, the profits will not increase drastically, so even if it becomes advantageous, it shows the amount of increase in the game value. The slope value will be relatively low. On the other hand, if the second special combination is won and the combination of the second special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the second special permission state is finished. As a result, the profit fluctuates, and the player may suffer a disadvantage more than in the first special permission state. However, when the advantageous state is reached, the profit is dramatically increased. The slope value indicating the increase in value is relatively high. Therefore, by making it possible to change the inclination value indicating the increase amount of the game value in the advantageous state, it is possible to make the game property rich in variation.

In the gaming machine of this example, the winning probability of the first special combination is made higher than the winning probability of the second special combination, and the probability that the combination of the first special symbols can be displayed in the first special permission state is the second. In the special permission state, the combination of the second special symbols may be set higher than the displayable probability. That is, the first special permission state may be set to a state in which it is easier to shift than the second special permission state and to be finished, and the second special permission state may be set to be a state in which it is harder to shift than the first special permission state and is hard to finish. In this way, the enjoyment of the game can be maintained while the gambling property is moderate.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present example, the combination of the first special symbol relating to the first special combination and the second special symbol relating to the second special combination cannot be aimed at simultaneously when the player makes a detent. You may comprise so that it may be arrange|positioned at intervals. By doing so, the playability can be further varied and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present example, when the first special winning combination or the second special winning combination is won, the fact that the winning is won is notified to one of them, but the type is not notified (bonus winning notification). In the first special permission state and the second special permission state, the type thereof may be notified (bonus type notification). By doing so, it is possible to notify the information desired by the player while further enhancing the playability.

[Another example of playability (game specifications) (6)]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99, another example (No. 6) of the playability (game specification) that can be mounted in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a diagram conceptually explaining a game flow in another example (six) of the game property (game specification), and FIG. 99 is another example (six) of the game property (game specification). It is the figure which showed an example of the internal lottery table used in.

As shown in FIG. 98 and FIG. 99, in this example, there are roughly classified a gaming state of a normal gaming state (normal gaming state) and a BB state, and in the general gaming state (normal gaming state), either BB1 or BB2. The state in which the bonus combination is not won is defined as (A) general game state (between non-flags), and the state in which BB1 is won (BB1 permitted state in which BB1 is carried over) is 3 pieces. The state in which the medals are bet (multiplied) and the game is played is defined as (B) 3 bet state between BB1 flags, and in the state where BB2 is won (BB2 permission state where BB2 is carried over). Therefore, the state in which three medals are bet and the game is played is defined as (C) three-bet state between BB2 flags. In the BB1 permitted state, two medals are bet and the game is played. The state is defined as a (D) two-bet state between BB1 flags, and the BB2 permitted state where two medals are bet and a game is played is defined as (E) two-bet state between BB2 flags. .. In addition, the bonus state in which the symbol combination related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the activated line is defined as (F)BB1 state, and the symbol combination related to BB2 is stopped and displayed on the activated line to be started. The bonus state is defined as the (G)BB2 state. That is, it is intended to make the game play different according to the type of bonus combination that is won (or won) in the normal game state (normal game state) and the number of bets (multiplying the game value).

In the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 99, for convenience of explanation, each lottery value used in the (A) three-bet state in the normal game state (between non-flags) (see the column “3 bets between non-flags”). , (A) each lottery value used in the two-bet state of the normal game state (between non-flags) (see the column of “two bets between non-flags”), (B) three-bet state between BB1 flags, and (C ) In each lottery value used in the three bet state between the BB2 flags (see the column of “three bet between flags”), and (D) the two bet state between the BB1 flags and the (E) two bet state between the BB2 flags Each lottery value used (see the column of "two bets between flags") is described in each column, but this does not mean that the gaming state (RT state) is different. That is, the RT state can be controlled as a common RT state. However, it can also be controlled as another RT state. In addition, at least the internal winning combination that is the target of the determination of the advantageous section grant, which will be described later, has a common lottery value among the set values.

(A) In the general game state (between non-flags), when three bets are made, BB1 can be won, and BB2 is not made possible (see the column of “3 bets between non-flags” in FIG. 99). On the other hand, in the case of 2 bets, the winning of BB2 is possible and the winning of BB1 is not possible (see the column of "2 bets between non-flags" in FIG. 99). In this example, the player can start the game (perform a start operation) in both cases of betting two medals and betting three medals. There is. The term "bet" means that the player inserts two or three medals into the medal slot 14 for use in the game, and the player operates the bet button to obtain two or three credits. It includes both of playing medals and automatically playing two or three medals by winning a replay.

(A) In the general gaming state (between non-flags), when three bets are won, if BB1 is won (may be a case where a symbol combination related to BB1 is carried over without being displayed in the winning game) Shifts between BB1 flags. (1-1) When a game is played with 3 bets between BB1 flags, (B) 3 bets between BB1 flags are entered (see the column "3 bets between flags" in FIG. 99). On the other hand, when a game is played with two bets between (2) BB1 flags, (D) two bets between BB1 flags is entered (see the column of "two bets between flags" in FIG. 99).

(B) In the three-bet state between BB1 flags, a combination of symbols related to BB1 can be displayed in the game that has "missed", as has already been described in another example (BB1 can be established). . Note that the "miss" probability can be set as appropriate, but is set to about "1/8.5", for example. In addition, the state is a BB1 permission state, and BB1 does not newly win or wins BB2 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win). Further, when the push order bell A (refer to the internal winning combination of No. “20” to “31” in FIG. 99) is won, if the push order is correct (the push order displayed by “abbreviation” respectively), it is 9 If one sheet is paid out, the pressing order is incorrect, and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (“○”), one sheet is paid out, the pressing order is incorrect, and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (“×”). ) 0 cards will be paid out. Further, when the push order bell B (refer to the internal winning combination of No. “21” to “43” in FIG. 99) is won, 9 coins are paid out regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation. That is, (B) BB1 three-bet state between flags, since the pressing order of the pushing order bell B is irrelevant, unless considering the advantageous section, (A) three-bet state in the normal gaming state (between non-flags) The return rate is higher than the state or the three bet state between the (C) BB2 flags, which is a state advantageous to the player.

Further, in the (B) three bet state between the BB1 flags, when the chance (the internal winning combination of No. “7” to “16” in FIG. 99) is won (or the combination of symbols related to the chance is It may be displayed), or when the strong bell (see the internal winning combination of No. “17” and “18” in FIG. 99) is won, the fixed winning combination (No. “19” of FIG. 99) is displayed. When an internal winning combination is won, when a cherry is won (refer to the internal winning combination of No. “44” in FIG. 99), and when a watermelon (See the internal winning combination of No. “45” in FIG. 99) ), the advantageous section grant determination (beneficial section grant lottery) is performed with a probability (100% probability for a fixed winning combination) corresponding to each internal winning combination. When it is determined that the advantageous section is to be provided as a result of the determination of the advantageous section, for example, an advantageous section of one set of 50 games is provided (if there is already an advantageous section, one set of 50 games is extended). It should be noted that the mode of giving the advantageous section is an example, and various modes described in the present embodiment and other examples of game characteristics (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

Further, in the (B) three bet state between BB1 flags, when the symbol combination related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, (1-2) BB1 is established and the state shifts to (F) BB1. (F) The BB1 state is, for example, a gaming state that is configured as a "special bonus state" and has an increasing period in which the gaming value increases, and as in the case already described in another example, an arbitrary prescribed number (for example, , 140 cards), a game value of (1-3) BB1 ends, and the state shifts from (F) BB1 state to (A) general game state (between non-flags).

(D) In the two-bet state between BB1 flags, although it is between BB1 flags, the bet number is different from the game in which BB1 is won. Cannot be displayed (BB1 cannot be established). In addition, the state is a BB1 permission state, and BB1 does not newly win or wins BB2 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win). That is, this state is configured as a gaming state in which neither a winning combination nor a winning combination is won. However, in view of the fact that the flag is between the BB1 flags, it is possible to display a combination of symbols related to BB1 in the game that is "missed".

In the (D) 2 bet state between the BB1 flags, when either the push order bell A or the push order bell B is won, if the push order is correct, 2 pieces are paid out, and the push order is incorrect. If the operation timing is appropriate, 1 sheet is paid out, and if the pressing order is incorrect and the stop operation timing is not appropriate, 0 sheet is paid out. However, either or both of the pushing order bell A and the pushing order bell B can be configured so that two pieces can be paid out regardless of the pushing order, and the expected payout value is (B) three bets between the BB1 flags. The lottery value may be appropriately reduced so as to be the same as the state, and then the same payout as in the (B) BB1 flag three-bet state may be performed. In addition, in the (D) BB1 flag two bet state, the above-described advantageous section grant determination is not performed.

(A) In the general game state (between non-flags), when two bets are won, if BB2 is won (may be a case in which a winning combination is carried over without displaying a combination of symbols related to BB2) Shifts between BB2 flags. (2) When a game is played with three bets between the BB2 flags, the state becomes (C) three bets between the BB2 flags (see the column of "three bets between flags" in FIG. 99). On the other hand, when a game is played with two bets between the (4-1) BB2 flags, the (E) BB2 two flags bet state is set (see the "two bets between flags" column in FIG. 99).

(C) In the three-bet state between BB2 flags, although it is between BB2 flags, the bet number is different from the game in which BB2 is won, so even if the game is "missed", the combination of symbols related to BB2 Cannot be displayed (BB2 cannot be established). In addition, the state is a BB2 permission state, and BB2 does not newly win or wins BB1 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win). That is, this state is configured as a gaming state in which neither a winning combination nor a winning combination is won. However, in view of the fact that it is between the BB2 flags, a combination of symbols related to BB2 can be displayed in the game that is "missed".

Further, in the (C) three-bet state between the BB2 flags, when either the pushing order bell A or the pushing order bell B is won, 9 pieces are paid out if the pushing order is correct and the pushing order is incorrect, and the operation is stopped. If the operation timing is appropriate, one will be paid out, and if the pressing order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, 0 will be paid out. That is, (C) the three-bet state between BB2 flags does not matter in the pressing order of the pushing order bell B, so that the return rate is higher than that of the (B) three-bet state between BB1 flags unless the advantageous section is taken into consideration. It is low and disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the (C) BB2 flag three-bet state, as in the case of (B) BB1 flag three-bet state, the advantageous section grant determination (beneficial section grant lottery) is performed. Here, No. Focusing on “F_REP B” of “4”, in the (B) BB1 flag three-bet state, “normal lip” is won regardless of the mode of the stop operation, and the advantageous section awarding decision is not made. (C) In the three-bet state between the BB2 flags, the "probability of chance" is won regardless of the mode of the stop operation, and the advantageous section award determination is made. That is, in the (C) three bet state between the BB2 flags, the internal winning combination of “F_REP B” is promoted (converted) to the internal winning combination of “chance eye”, so that there are many opportunities to determine the advantageous section award. Since it can be obtained, when the advantageous section is taken into consideration, the probability of giving the advantageous section is higher than in the (B) BB1 flag three-bet state, and the player is in an advantageous state.

(E) In the two-bet state between the BB2 flags, the combination of the symbols related to BB2 can be displayed in the game which has been "missed", as already described in the other example (BB2 can be established). . Note that the "miss" probability can be set as appropriate, but is set to about "1/8.5", for example. In addition, the state is a BB2 permission state, and BB2 does not newly win or wins BB1 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win).

(E) In the two-bet state between the BB2 flags, when either the pushing order bell A or the pushing order bell B is won, two pieces are paid out if the pushing order is correct and the pushing order is incorrect, and the operation is stopped. If the operation timing is appropriate, one will be paid out, and if the pressing order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, 0 will be paid out. However, either or both of the pushing order bell A and the pushing order bell B may be configured to be paid out in two ways regardless of the pushing order, and the expected payout value is (C) 3 bets between BB2 flags. The lottery value may be appropriately reduced so as to be the same as the state, and the same payout as in the (C) BB2 flag three-bet state may be performed. In the two-bet state between (E) BB2 flags, the above-described advantageous section grant determination is not performed.

Further, in the two-bet state between (E)BB2 flags, when the symbol combination related to BB2 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, (4-2)BB2 is established and the state shifts to (G)BB2. (F) The BB2 state is, for example, a gaming state that is configured as a "special bonus state" and has an increasing period in which the gaming value increases, and is an arbitrary prescribed number (for example, the same as already described in another example. , (60 cards), a game value of (4-3) BB1 ends, and the state changes from (G) BB2 state to (A) general game state (between non-flags). It should be noted that the (F)BB2 state may be configured as a no-change period.

In this example, when the (B) three-bet state between the BB1 flags and the (C) three-bet state between the BB2 flags are compared, in the (B) three-bet state between the BB1 flags, the pressing order for the pressing order bell B is In addition, since (F) BB1 state can be transferred, basically the (B) BB1 flag three-bet state is equivalent to the return rate (base value, payout rate). Is good). On the other hand, in the (C) 3 bet state between the BB2 flags, it is possible to obtain many opportunities to determine the advantageous section grant, and the expected value to be awarded when the advantageous section is reached becomes high. By appropriately adjusting the winning probability of the internal winning combination of “”, the probability of determining the advantageous section grant at the time of winning the chance, and the duration of the advantageous section awarded when the determination of the advantage section is made, (C) BB2 flag It is also possible to configure the return rate in the three-bet state for the three-bet state to be about the same as or higher than the return rate in the three-bet state for the (B) BB1 flag.

In this example, when the (E)BB2 flag two-bet state and the (D)BB1 flag two-bet state are compared, the (E)BB2 flag two-bet state changes to the (G)BB2 state. As a result, the return rate is basically higher in the two bet state between the (E)BB2 flags as much as the change is possible. As in the case of (B) three-bet state between BB1 flags, in the (E) two-bet state between BB2 flags, control is performed such that the pressing order of the pressing order bell B is not required, so that the return rate is high. You may make it comprised so that it may become.

For example, when the player starts the game from (A) the general game state (between non-flags), the player can first select whether to make a three bet or a two bet. If you win BB1 as a 3 bet and do not shift to (F) BB1 state in the winning game, (D) BB1 state 2 bet state has no merit, so (B) 3 bet between BB1 flags Advance the game. (B) In the 3-bet state between the BB1 flags, the return rate is relatively high, so the player should shift to the (F)BB1 state to increase the game value without sharply decreasing the game value. Alternatively, it is possible to select whether to increase the game value by obtaining an opportunity to determine the provision of the advantageous section and shifting to the advantageous section (the result of being notified of the pushing order that is the correct answer for the pushing order bell A). It should be noted that, in the (B) BB1 flag three-bet state, as compared with the (C) BB2 flag three-bet state, even if the game shifts to the advantageous section, the game value does not sharply increase.

On the other hand, when the player wins BB2 as a two-bet and does not shift to the (G)BB2 state in the winning game, the player advances the game in the three-bet state between the (C)BB2 flags, or (E)BB2. It is possible to select whether or not to advance the game in the two-bet state between flags. (C) In the three bet state between the BB2 flags, the return rate is relatively low and the bonus state is not entered, so there is a possibility that the game value will suddenly decrease, but there is an opportunity to decide the advantageous section award. The probability of gaining is increasing, and if it is further shifted to the advantageous section (the result of being notified of the correct push order for push order bell A and push order bell B), the game value can be rapidly increased. there is a possibility. Further, in the (2) bet state between the (E)BB2 flag, although the increase in the game value in the small win cannot be expected, the return rate is relatively high, and the game value is shifted to the (G)BB2 state. Can be increased. In this example, it is possible to provide such a game property (game specification).

According to the gaming machine of this example, when the bet game value is the first amount (3 pieces), the first special combination (BB1) can be won, while the second special combination (BB2) is won. Not possible. When the bet game value is the second amount (2 cards), the second special combination can be won, while the first special combination cannot be won. In addition, when a specific winning combination (“F_lip B”) is won, if the first special permission state (between BB1 flags), the combination of specific symbols (the chance eye) cannot be displayed, and the second special permission state (BB2). (Between flags) makes it possible to display a combination of specific symbols. Then, when the game value bet is the first amount, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed, an advantageous state (advantageous section) is given. It is possible to determine whether or not to perform (advantageous section provision determination), and when the bet game value is the second amount, it is not possible to determine whether or not to favor the advantageous state.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, when the bet gaming value is the first amount, the first special symbol combination (the symbol combination relating to BB1) can be displayed, while the second special symbol is displayed. The combination (the combination of symbols relating to BB2) cannot be displayed. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount, the combination of the second special symbols may be displayed, but the combination of the first special symbols may not be displayed.

That is, according to the gaming machine of this example, as a state in which the game is played, for example, a state in which the game value is bet with a first amount of gaming value in the first special permission state ((B) BB1 flag) 3 bet state), a second special permission state in which a first amount of game value is bet and a game is played ((C) BB2 flag 3 bet state), first special permission state There is a second amount of game value bet and the game is played ((D) BB1 flag two bet state), and a second special allowance state where the second amount game value is bet. It is possible to create a plurality of states in which a game is played as a result ((E) BB2 flag two bet state).

Then, according to the gaming machine of the present example, for example, a state in which the game is played by betting the first amount of game value in the second special permission state is a state in which the giving of the advantageous state is favored, A state in which the game value of 2 is bet and the game is played is a state in which the advantageous state is not given. That is, regarding the provision of the advantageous state, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player depending on which amount of game value is bet, which special combination is won, and the like. Therefore, by making it possible to change the inclination value indicating the increase amount of the game value in the advantageous state, it is possible to make the game property rich in variation.

In the gaming machine of this example, when the first predetermined combination (pushing order bell A) is won, regardless of which state, for example, a predetermined number of pressing orders (for example, 9 (2) a game value is given, and a predetermined number of game values are not given if the push order is an incorrect answer. If the second predetermined hand (push order bell B) is won, it is in the first special permission state. In the state where the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played, for example, a predetermined number of game values are given regardless of the pushing order, while in other states, the first predetermined value is given. The same control as that of the winning combination may be performed. In this way, the state in which the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played in the first special permission state can be set to the state where the giving of the game value is preferentially given at the time of the predetermined winning combination. Therefore, the game play can be made more varied.

As described above, with reference to FIG. 92 to FIG. 99, other examples of the playability (game specification) which can be mounted in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment have been described. The description is mainly given, and the points omitted in the description or simply described can be applied by appropriately supplementing the configurations described in the present embodiment, each of the other examples, and the modified examples. . Further, it is possible to combine the present embodiment, each of the other examples, and part or all of the configurations described in the modified examples to form the present invention.

[Another example of an advantageous interval limiter (number of sheets limiter)]
Next, another example of the limiter used for limit processing of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. Up to now, as the limiter of the advantageous period, the limiter using the number of games consumed in the advantageous period (hereinafter, “game number limiter”) has been described, but the type of limiter of the advantageous period is not limited to the number of games limiter. Absent. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform the limit process when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section reaches or exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 2400). The limiter using the number of medals paid out during such an advantageous section will be referred to as a “number limiter” below.

FIG. 100(A) is a diagram showing an outline of the number limiter. In the figure, the vertical axis is the difference number (=payout number-inserted number), which is also called a net increase number. The plus and minus of the difference number are the values seen by the player, and when the number of medals paid out to the player is larger than the number of inserted medals (plus on the player side), plus and reverse In the case of, it becomes negative. Further, the horizontal axis represents the number of games, which means that more games have been consumed from the start of the advantageous section toward the right. The number limiter forcibly ends the advantageous section when a positive difference of 2400 is obtained, starting from the point when the number of medals decreases the most so that the player does not win an extremely large number of medals at one time. It is what makes them.

In the figure, about 100 medals have been reduced after the start of the advantageous section. For example, if the start of the advantageous zone is the start of the normal advantageous zone, the medals are reduced during the game period or in the preparation state during the advantageous zone. The number of medals continues to increase from the start of the advantageous section to -100, and finally the number of medals increases to about +2300. At this point, at least 2400 medals are at hand from the player's point of view. Therefore, the main control board 71 activates the number limiter to forcibly end the advantageous section. Thereby, the gambling property can be appropriately suppressed.

The main control board 71 may perform limit processing of the advantageous section using only the game number limiter, or may perform limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number-of-games limiter. Both the limiter and the limiter may be used for limit processing of the advantageous section. When both limiters are used, it is desirable that the main control board 71 end the advantageous period when either of the limiter activation conditions is satisfied after the advantageous period starts. In the present description, the number of games limiter is set to 1500 games and the number of games limiter is set to 2400. However, this is an example, and a value smaller or larger than this is adopted according to the game specification so that gambling is appropriate. It may be controlled to.

Here, a case where both the game number limiter and the game number limiter are used will be described. More specifically, the gradient value A of the medal increase in the advantageous section (ART, AT, etc.) (a net increase expected value per game, a net increase expected value including an increase due to bonus operation) and the number-of-games limiter activation condition are set. The relationship between the number of games B and the difference number C which is the condition for activating the number limiter will be described.
In the following, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the inclination value A for increasing medals in the advantageous section is "3" and the number of games B which is a condition for activating the number-of-games limiter is "100 games".

In the first specification, the specification in which the inclination value A×the number of games of the number-of-games limiter B=the difference number C of the number of limiters C (example: A (3 pieces)×B (100 games)=C (300 pieces)) is Conceivable. Such a specification is the most basic specification, and the advantageous section can be stably controlled, and the gambling property can be appropriately suppressed.

In the second specification, the specification of the relationship of the inclination value A×the number of games B of the number of games limiter<the difference number C of the number of limiters (eg: A (3 pieces)×B (100 games)<C (400 pieces)) Conceivable. In the case of such a specification, the case where the limiter is activated is as follows.

If more than 400 medals are paid out before 100 games are exhausted, the number limiter is activated, and if 100 games are exhausted before more than 400 medals are paid out, the number of games The limiter is activated. If the bonus is pulled more than the expected value, or if the number of push forwards with a large number of net additions is drastically exceeded than the expected value, the number limiter operates and if the game progresses at a value close to the expected value, the number of games The limiter is more likely to be activated. Since the inclination value is "3", as a result, when the limiter is activated, the number-of-games limiter when 100G is reached is easier to activate than the number-of-games limiter, and the player's consciousness is that the game is more important than the difference number of games. It will be inclined to the number.

That is, since the inclination value is "3", 400 medals will be paid out in 133.3 games on average, and there is a high possibility that the number-of-games limiter will be reached before that. Therefore, the ease of activation is: game number limiter> number of sheets limiter. If you do not want to worry about the activation of the number limiter due to the difference in number of sheets, it is advisable to use this specification. For example, in the case of a type in which the termination condition (not the limiter) is managed by the difference number, such as ending the ART with a net increase of 100 sheets, if such a limiter specification is used, the frequency of activation of the limiter can be suppressed and the player The frequency with which the advantageous section is terminated by the limiter can be reduced, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

In the third specification, the specification of the relationship of the inclination value A×the number of games B of the number of games limiter>the difference number C of the number limiter (eg: A (3 pieces)×B (100 games)>C (200 pieces)) Conceivable. In the case of such a specification, the case where the limiter is activated is as follows.

When more than 200 medals are paid out before 100 games are exhausted, the number limiter is activated, and when 100 games are exhausted before more than 200 medals are paid out, the number of games The limiter is activated. Since the inclination value is "3", 200 medals will be paid out in about 66.6 games on average, and there is a high possibility that the number limiter will be reached before 100 games are exhausted. Therefore, the ease of activation is as follows: game number limiter<number limiter. If you do not want to worry about the activation of the game number limiter due to the consumption of the number of games, it is recommended to use such a specification. For example, if the specification is such that the number of games to be played is relatively low, such as a net increase of 0.1 to 1 per game, but a long number of games continues, the frequency of activation of the limiter can be suppressed and the player can set a limiter frequency. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency at which the advantageous section is discontinued, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Regardless of the specifications, the end condition of the advantageous section other than the limiter is higher than the ratio of the end when the limiter arrives (for example, the continuable period of ART (the number of ART games), the number of sets or the stock becomes zero, etc.) As a result, it is desirable to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the right to consume the advantageous section is erased by the limiter activation, as a payout design in which the ratio of the advantageous section ending is high.

Next, the playability that can be realized when a plurality of limiters are provided will be described.

(Direction at the end of the advantageous section according to the type of limiter)
The sub-control board 72 may be capable of executing different advantageous section end effects by using the display device 11 or the like depending on whether the number-of-images limiter is activated or when the number-of-games limiter is activated. If each of them is a special effect, it will lead to a game motivation to see each effect at least once. Further, the sub control board 72 may change the distribution of the effects performed at the end of the advantageous section depending on the type of the limiter. For example, the number limiter may be more accurate in suggesting the setting than when the number-of-games limiter is activated (the difference between the coefficients for each setting is large, or it is easy to produce an effect in which a specific setting is fixed). By obtaining specific information such as a setting suggestion or by seeing a special effect, it is possible to reduce the discomfort that the advantageous section is cut off by the limiter. Further, the distribution of the effects performed at the end of the advantageous section may be set based on the specifications of the limiter described above. For example, if the limiter that is difficult to activate is activated more easily than the limiter that is easily activated by the specifications, the sub-control board 72 is easier for the player to determine an effect preferable (for example, the accuracy of setting suggestion is high). Good.

(Ending effect according to the type of limiter)
Further, the sub control board 72 uses the ending effect A when the number of limiters is activated, and the ending effect B when the number of games limiter is activated. There is no big difference in the occurrence rate, but when at least one of the occurrences becomes rich, an ending effect C (may be an effect having a branch to the ending effect A or B) is performed. An advantageous period end suggestive production period (ending) may be provided before the limiter is activated so that the player does not suddenly end at the end of the advantageous period and feel uncomfortable. It should be noted that the "situation in which the number limiter is activated" means that, for example, when the ART is managed based on information other than the difference number, the difference number calculated so far and the difference calculated from the remaining ART period. The sum of the number of sheets (for example, “the number of remaining games×inclination value in the case of ART for managing the number of games”) becomes a threshold value (for example, a difference number when the number limiter is activated or a value slightly smaller than the difference number). In addition, when the ART is managed based on the difference number, the sum of the difference number up to now and the remaining number reaches the threshold value. Further, "the situation where the number of games limiter is activated" means, for example, when the ART is managed based on information other than the number of games, it is calculated from the number of games that have passed so far and the remaining ART period. The sum of the number of games to be played (for example, “remaining remaining number/inclination value in the case of ART for difference number management”) is a threshold value (for example, the number of games in which the game number limiter is activated, or slightly less than the number of games. When the ART is managed based on the number of games, for example, when the sum of the number of games that has passed so far and the number of remaining games reaches a threshold value.

(Notification or suggestion of the type of limiter activated on the history screen)
In addition, the sub-control board 72 displays the type of limiter that has been activated or the type of limiter type (such as the type of ending effect) that is generated on the game history screen that the player can view on the menu screen. Is also good. In this case, since a large number of payouts have been obtained in the first place, it is possible to motivate the player to expect a high setting.

(Outputs an external signal according to the limiter type)
Further, the main control board 71 may output an external signal of a type corresponding to the activated limiter so that the hall computer can grasp which one of the number limiter and the game number limiter is activated. At this time, the main control board 71 may output an external signal for activating the limiter from different pins of the external terminal board. For example, if the number of games limiter is mainly activated and the number of games limiter is not activated very much if the original payout specification is used, if the number of games limiter is frequently activated, is there any kind of goto action? The hall clerk can detect the possibility of a connection error between the machine and the hall computer.

In the same game, when the number limiter activation condition and the game number limiter activation condition are satisfied, the main control board 71 may output either one of the predetermined signals, or two types of signals. May be output in a predetermined order. In the case of outputting in order, it is advisable to wait for a predetermined time from the completion of the output of the signal to be output first to the output of the next signal so that the signals can be reliably received. Further, in the same game, when the condition for activating the number limiter and the condition for activating the game number limiter are satisfied, only one of the limit processes is performed and the other process is not performed, and the main (main control board 71) In the above case, unnecessary processing may not be generated. In this case, the main control board 71 outputs an external signal according to the limiter of the type performed.

(Outputs one external signal regardless of the limiter type)
If the capacity of the main (main control board 71) and the number of pins of the terminal board for external signal output have a margin, they may be different as described above, but the same external signal may be used regardless of the type of the limiter. May be output. The capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be saved.

(The same external signal is output at the end of the advantageous section other than the limiter and the end by the limiter)
Further, the main control board 71 may output the same external signal at the end of the advantageous period other than the limiter and the end by the limiter, and may detect that the advantageous period has ended by a hall computer or the like. In this case, the capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be further saved.

(Example of external signal output when the limiter is activated during bonus operation (immediate output))
Further, when the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start the output of the external signal in the game or immediately after the end of the game. By doing this, for example, even if the number of shots acquired in one shot exceeds the number of number limiters, it does not mean that the limiter function was not defective, but by chance the bonus actuated near the number of limiters reached and the ball was won. Can be confirmed on the hall side.

(External signal output when limiter is activated during bonus operation (at end of bonus))
When the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start the output of the external signal at the end of the bonus or immediately after the end of the bonus. When it is desired to accurately grasp the end of the game state in which the number of coins actually increases, such a specification may be adopted.

(Direction when a player drops a small role in a game in which the number limiter may be activated)
For example, in the game of playing three cards with the remaining number of six until the number limiter is activated, the winning order of the pushing order wins 9 medals when the answer is correct, and the notification of the pressing order of the correct answer is given. Regardless, if the player makes a mistake in the pressing order, assuming that the number limiter is activated in the game by looking at the situation at the start of the game, the production at the time the number limiter is activated may be started from the start of the game. .. In such a case, although the number limiter is not activated as a result of the wrong pressing order, the sub-control board 72 produces an effect when the number limiter is activated (for example, activation of the number limiter is scheduled from the start of the game). The effect) may be continuously executed as it is, or the effect may be temporarily terminated or interrupted by determining that the number-of-sheets limiter is not activated.

(Direction when the limiter to be activated is changed by the player's operation)
Also, the type of limiter activated may be different due to a player's operation error or the like. For example, in a situation where the number of remaining games until the number of games limiter is activated is 6 and the number of games remaining until the number of games limiter is activated is 2 games, 9 medals are paid out when the correct answer is given in a game of 3 games. This corresponds to the case where the winning combination is won and the correct pushing order is notified. In such a case, when the player performs the stop operation according to the notification, the number limiter is activated in the game, but when the player makes a mistake in the pushing order without following the notification, the number-of-games limiter is activated in the next game. (Note that the number limiter may be activated in the next game, but here, the number limiter game is activated when a plurality of limiter activation conditions are satisfied).

In such a case, the sub-control board 72 starts the effect when the number limiter is activated in the game in which the winning order is a small win, and the timing when the number limiter is not activated is determined (first stop operation- Of all reels stopped, at any timing after missing or the display of a small number of symbol combinations has been confirmed), switch to the effect when the number of games limiter is activated, or an effect that does not respond to any limiter activation suggestion It is preferable to perform processing for returning once and control so as to avoid a contradiction between the activated limiter and the effect.

(During the bonus operation, delaying the end effect due to the activation of the limiter inside and extending the ending effect)
Regarding the effect and control performed in connection with the limit process described above, if the limit process is performed during the bonus operation described above, the bonus generation ends with the timing of the effect generation according to the end of the advantageous section by the limit process. It is possible to reduce the player's discomfort by using a method of delaying the time or immediately after the end and extending the effect during the advantageous section such as the ending effect until then.

[How to control the number of sheets limiter]
Subsequently, a method of controlling the number of sheets limiter will be described with reference to FIG. In the number-of-sheets limiter, the point where the absolute value of medals has decreased the most from the start of the advantageous zone is used as the lowest point (starting point), and the positive amount from the latest lowest point is used as the difference sheet number that triggers the number of sheets limiter. . The figure shows an example in which the game progresses with the start of the advantageous section as the first game, and the number of medals is repeatedly increased and decreased for 1 to 8 games, and then the medals increase and reach the number limiter (the pushing order. Small roles are written as "Battle Order Bell").

In the figure, since the point at which the absolute value of the medal has decreased most since the start of the advantageous section is "-9", the number limiter is activated at the timing when the difference number becomes "+2391" in the Nth game. ing. The counter for the limiter is reset to 0 with the activation of the number limiter. After that, as a result of the correct answers being pressed in the N+2 game and the bells being aligned, the difference from the starting point exceeds "+2400", but the number limiter has already been activated and the advantage section (ART) has ended. , It's only temporary and there is no problem.

Although the figure shows the absolute difference number from the start of the advantageous section at the end of payout of the game, it is a value for explanation, and the corresponding counter does not need to be mounted on the gaming machine. Of course, a corresponding counter may be mounted and used to show the player the number of coins acquired.

The starting point flag is information indicating that the current game situation is the lowest point after the start of the advantageous section. Although it may be recognized as the lowest point by not having the starting point flag and having the value of the counter (sheet number counter) used for the limiter being 0, it may be recognized as the lowest point, but whether the subtraction of the difference sheet until the sheet number limiter is activated or not is started. In the case of producing on the sub (sub control board 72) side, the main (main control board 72) is produced by referring to the starting point flag that can be determined only by ON/OFF judgment and not transmitting the value of the number counter to the sub side. The processing load of 71) can be reduced. In that case, the sub side receives the information about the number of inserted sheets and the number of paid-out sheets transmitted from the main, performs the same processing as the number counter on the side of the sub, and displays the number of sheets as the status of the number counter (notification of the number of sheets until the number limiter is activated). Etc.) may be performed.

The lowest point (starting point) may be updated with either the same value as the latest lowest point or a smaller value. At the end of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, the absolute difference number becomes "-3" and then increases once, and at the end of the fourth game, the absolute difference number becomes "-3" again. Therefore, the main control board 71 sets the starting point flag again at the end of the fourth game. In reality, since the number of medals has decreased thereafter, the absolute difference number of sheets at the end of the eighth game after the start of the advantageous section is "-9", which is the starting point for the number limiter.

In the figure, the first lowest point is the end of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, but the time before the end of one game at the start of the advantageous section (absolute difference is 0) Set as the first lowest point, the second lowest point at the end of one game, the third lowest point when the number of games becomes -9, and the number limiter is activated when 2400 more points are added from the third lowest point. May be Further, in the figure, the number counter is updated so that the number of inserted coins is 0 and the number of paid out coins is 0 when the replay is won. As a result, it is not necessary to update the difference number during replay, and the processing load can be reduced. On the other hand, the payout number corresponding to the inserted number may be performed at the time of winning the replay, and the number counter may be updated with the inserted number being 3 in the next game. By doing this, it is possible to match the value of the number counter from the time the replay is won until the operation to start the next game is made to match the actual difference behaviour. With reference to FIG.

The sub-control board 72 may notify the value of the number counter on the display device 11 (liquid crystal screen) or the like so that the player can recognize or suggest the remaining number until the number limiter is activated. Further, the sub-control board 72 does not directly display the remaining number of sheets until the number of sheets limiter is activated, and if the remaining number of sheets is 2000 or more until the number of sheets limiter is activated, the first effect stage, if the remaining number of 1000 to 1999 is the second effect stage, the remaining number of 999. If the number of sheets is equal to or less than the number of sheets, the production stage such as the background may be suggested by changing according to the number range until the number of sheets limiter is activated like the third production stage.

Further, the main control board 71 may output the value of the number counter as an external signal so that it can be displayed on a hall computer or a data display for viewing game data installed on the top of a pachi-slot or the like. It is preferable that the main control board 71 maintain the values of the starting point flag and the number of sheets counter without erasing even when the power is cut off. On the other hand, the main control board 71 may erase the values of the starting point flag and the number counter when changing the setting.

[Adjusting the number of sheets limiter]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102(C), an adjustment hitting method of the number limiter will be described. In the specification in which the advantageous period is forcibly ended by using the number limiter, a method in which the number limiter is activated by adjusting the increase/decrease of medals immediately before the number limiter is activated may be considered. For example, when the pressing order small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, "9" medals are paid out, and the stopping operation is performed in the incorrect pressing order. With the specification that the payout of medals is "0", three medals are required for one game, so if the stop operation is performed in the correct push order when the push order wins, the number counter If "+6" is given and the stop operation is performed in the wrong pushing order when the push order is won, the number counter is set to "-3". For this reason, for example, when the player presses the push combination combination three times, if the wrong answer is given twice in the pressing order and the correct answer is given once, the value of the number counter is maintained, and as a result, the number limiter is not activated.

By adjusting the number limiter in this way, it is possible to wait for the bonus winning as an ART (advantageous section) immediately before the number limiter is activated. In the example shown in the figure, such an adjustment batting method starts from the M-th game, and the adjustment batting method is performed until the X-th game which wins a BB (bonus). As a result, in the X+10th game, +2512 medals, which exceeds +2400 for which the number limiter is activated, have been acquired (note that the small win in BB (15) is described as "BB in bell"). ).

In the pachi-slot 1, a hitting method (a stop different from the batting order navigation that stops the batting order navigation) can be performed by performing an effect that suggests or informs that it is advantageous to intentionally oppose the notification of the pushing order. Operation). Note that such an effect may be performed by the sub control board 72 via the display device 11 or the like, or may be performed by the main control board 71.

If there are multiple bonus types, such as a mini bonus with a net increase of about 15 and a relatively high winning probability (15 bonus roles during bonus operation cannot be missed or difficult), a bonus limit of 120 bonus The above-described adjustment batting method may be recommended on a line in which the remaining difference until reaching the maximum bonus is larger than the net increase in the mini bonus. Further, for small wins other than the push forward win, the payout may be adjusted easily (for example, the payout is 3) without increasing the payout to more than 3. In this way, the interest of the game is enhanced by making it possible to improve the payout rate by devising the way of hitting.

In addition, when placing importance on the disadvantages such as the complexity of game play being shunned by beginners, not only the actual net increase in the number counter is added, but only the net increase when the game is played as instructed. It may be done. For example, in a three-player game, if the winning combination of the pushing order in which nine medals are paid out at the time of a correct answer is won, the main control board 71 notifies the operating mode of the player on condition that the pressing order of the correct answer is notified. The number counter is incremented by +6 regardless of the winning result. As such a specification, a specification for closing such an adjustment striking method may be adopted.

[Gameplay with specifications that regulate the adjustment method]
Next, the playability that can be realized with the specifications that enclose such an adjustment hitting method will be described.

(Without bonus)
In the first place, if the internal winning combination is made up of only the small winning combination and the re-play without mounting the bonus combination, the player will not be required to perform the complicated batting method as described above, and the playability will be easy to understand.

(Bonus with no increase or decrease)
As another example of the specification that suppresses the above batting method, the bonus may be a non-increased/decreased bonus that only wins a small winning combination in which the same number of coins as the number of coins inserted during operation is paid. The bonus may be reduced so that only a small role in which a smaller number of coins than the number of coins is paid out is won. In this case, the bonus may be performed during the bonus operation or during the bonus operation, which is advantageous in the lottery of the advantageous section instead of increasing the medals. As long as a normal game is played, the bonus winning may be hindered by the reel control, and the bonus winning may be difficult.

(The number of net additions during bonus operation is 3 or less)
Since there is no payout at the time of bonus winning on the premise of a three-player game, the difference in the bonus winning game is minus three. Assuming that the bonus ends in one game with three cards, the maximum number of prizes that can be generated during the bonus operation is six or less. By doing this, the difference number of sheets from the bonus operation to the end of the bonus does not become a positive value, so that the value of the number counter does not increase due to the bonus operation, and the complicated strike as described above is performed. The player does not have to practice the law.

[Gameplay with specifications that allow adjustment batting]
Next, the playability that can be realized with the specifications that allow such an adjustment batting method will be described.

(Removing the small role during bonus operation or reducing the number of acquisition)
In addition to the above-mentioned batting method specifications, if the number limiter is activated during bonus operation, dare to reduce the number of bonuses acquired and end the bonus. It may be most advantageous to wait for the next bonus while extending the life of the advantage section. Therefore, during the bonus operation, the small winning combination can be missed at the timing of pressing and the order of pressing, or the winning combination with a small number of payouts can be won. In this case, it is desirable that the winning combination with a small number of payouts is smaller than the number of inserted coins during the bonus operation. A certain effect can be obtained even by providing a role that allows fine adjustment, such as reception.

(Only normal replays or combinations with less than the number of cards inserted are available except normal push combination)
For example, assume that the bonus is not activated and the number of coins is three. The number of push-order small wins is 9, but other wins such as so-called watermelon, cherry, and bell without the concept of push-order are configured as re-play wins or payouts of 3 or less. By doing so, even if another small win is drawn in a situation where the number limiter is activated by the net increase of the remaining number, the number limiter does not operate and the difficulty of the strategy is reduced and the game becomes easier to play.

(If you perform a stop operation different from the push-and-play combination navigation, the player can intervene with the frequency of winning a specific number (1 or 2 combinations))
If the stop operation is different from the push-and-play navigation, there is a specification that one piece is paid out or dropped. In this case, there are two types of increase/decrease of the game, that is, minus two and minus three, so it is difficult to calculate and may be confused when playing. Compared to such specifications, when the number of sheets is fixed, such as when 1 to 2 sheets are always aligned when ignoring navigation, the negative value when ignoring navigation when the number of sheets is barely fixed is fixed to, for example, minus 2. Therefore, the calculation is easy, and the careless mistake that the player misses the calculation and hits the place where the navigation should be ignored one more time according to the navigation and takes the batting order bell is reduced.

It should be noted that some effects can be exhibited even if it is generally stabilized, such as one sheet being paid out or being dropped at a high frequency, not necessarily. Further, the payout number may be stable depending on the pattern of ignoring navigation. For example, when the batting order navigation of "1, 2, 3" (correct order for left/middle/right) occurs, the winning ratio for one win is 3 for the relationship of "middle 1st"> "right 1st". If the player wants to reduce the number, the player can select the right first stop, and if the player wants to reduce the number of cards, the middle first stop and the player can select. Also, if you miss the second stop after the correct answer for the first stop in the game, if you stop in the order of "1.3.2", there is a higher probability than the other navigation neglected batting order, or one winning role is always won. It is recommended that the player be able to select the reduction method by the batting method.

(Change navigation mode when navigation should be ignored)
When it is best to play according to the navigation, the sub-control board 72 displays the pushing order in the first mode (blue numbers etc.), and when it is best to play against the navigation, the sub-control board 72 is displayed. Displays the push order in the second mode (red numbers, etc.).

(Navi changes depending on the situation or performance)
The main control board 71 or the sub-control board 72 may be different in a situation in which a mode such as BGM, an image, and a lamp follows the navigation and a situation in which the navigation is countered. It is desirable to be able to know in advance, before the occurrence of navigation, whether or not the navigation should be countered if navigation occurs in the next game.

(Lock and reel freeze when navigation should be ignored)
The main control board 71 may provide a reel rotation start delay (freeze or reel action) immediately after the lever is turned on or after the reel rotation starts, or a stop button temporary operation acceptance invalidation period. As a result, the player can be alerted and a case in which the advantageous section is erroneously ended can be prevented. Further, it is desirable that the main control board 71 or the sub-control board 72 also calls attention to sound or video.

[Another example of an advantageous interval limiter (payout amount limiter)]
Here, in the above-mentioned number limiter, based on a difference number (=payout number-insertion number), that is, a value obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out to the player. The limit process is to be performed, but not limited to this. The main control board 71 may perform limit processing by using the number of medals paid out to the player, and such a limiter is called a payout number limiter. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing for ending the advantageous period when a predetermined number (for example, 2400) of medals are paid out during the advantageous period.

In the above-mentioned number limiter, limit processing is performed based on the difference number obtained by subtracting the inserted number from the paid number, but in the paid number limiter, without subtracting the inserted number from the paid number, the payout number is directly referred to, Limit processing is performed when the number of paid-out sheets reaches the specified value. In such a payout number limiter, the main control board 71 causes the advantageous section (in this case, for example, including the above-mentioned “normal advantage section”) or the increase section (that is, a game section where medals actually increase. In this case, for example, The payout number counter is initialized at the start of the above-mentioned "normal advantageous section", and the payout number counter is updated every time a payout is generated due to winning of a small winning combination. Then, the main control board 71, when the value of the payout number counter reaches a specified value for performing limit processing, ends the advantageous section, and also performs various kinds of processing relating to the advantageous section and limit processing of initializing values.

Even in such a payout number limiter, the method of updating the payout number counter when a winning combination relating to replay is won is arbitrary, and may be counted as three payouts, or may be counted as zero payout. However, it is preferable that the main control board 71 counts as 0 payout when a winning combination related to replay is won. By doing so, for example, in the game of 3BET, a payout number counter depending on whether a three-role combination (a combination in which three medals are paid out when the prize is won) is won or a combination related to replay is won. The change in the value of can be different. In other words, the number of payout number counters does not advance when the winning combination of the replay wins, which makes the player feel more advantageous than when the winning combination of the three wins wins. It is possible to make a difference in the value between the three-card combination which is the value and the combination relating to the replay.

[Another example of an advantageous interval limiter (navigation limiter)]
Further, as the type of limiter used for limit processing of the advantageous section, a navigation number limiter described below can also be used. When the navi-count limiter is used, the main control board 71 triggers a predetermined number of times (for example, 400 times) of notification (navigation) to the player during the advantageous period (that is, the navi-count is a specified value). When it reaches (), limit processing of the advantageous section is performed. Here, in the navigation performed for the player during the advantageous section such as ART, in addition to the navigation for increasing the medals during the advantageous section, maintaining the medals or decreasing the medals during the advantageous section is the normal section. There is a navigation to suppress compared to the inside. The former navi is, for example, in the case of a correct answer stop operation in a 3BET game (for example, when pressing the correct answer), more than three medals (for example, 9) are paid out when the correct answer is won. It means notifying the mode of the stop operation, the latter navigation is, for example, a navigation for maintaining the RT state at a high RT, or 3 pieces in the case of the correct stop operation mode in the 3BET game, or When the number of medals is less than 3 in the case of the correct answer stop operation, but more than in the case of the incorrect answer stop operation (for example, when the pushing order is incorrect) This means notifying the mode. The former target of the navigation can be called an increasing combination that increases medals during the advantageous section (ART) from that role. In the pachi-slot, which one of a plurality of winning combinations is to be increased can be arbitrarily designed from the viewpoint of game specifications.

When using the navigation frequency limiter, the main control board 71 counts the number of times of the navigation performed when the winning combination is won while counting the number of navigation times that is the condition for the limit processing to be generated by the navigation frequency limiter, while not increasing the number. Regarding the number of times of navigation performed at the time of winning of, it may be excluded from the target of counting the number of times of navigation concerned, and the number of times of navigation performed at the time of winning of non-increasing hands is also included in the target of counting of the number of times of navigation. Good. By excluding the number of times of navigation performed when a non-increasing hand was won from counting, the number of medals increased by a large amount, as in the case where a large number of non-increasing roles were established after the start of the advantageous section (ART). If there is not, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from ending due to an event unrelated to the purpose of the limiter of suppressing excessive payout, and not to dissatisfy the player.

In such a navi frequency limiter, the main control board 71 initializes a navi frequency counter (navi frequency counter) that is a condition for the limit process to occur at the start of the advantageous zone or the increased zone, and the navigation to be counted is generated. Each time, the value of the navigation counter is updated. When the value of the navigation counter reaches a specified value for limit processing, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section, and also performs limit processing of initializing various processing and values relating to the advantageous section. In addition, in the various limiters described so far, the method of updating the counter may be an addition method or a subtraction method.

[Another example of limiter period]
Further, in the above description, an example in which the limiters such as the game number limiter, the number limiter, the payout number limiter, and the navigation number limiter are used only during the advantageous section has been described, but such a limiter is not in the advantageous section. It can be adopted in any period. For example, if you continue to hit the advantageous zone by accident, the maximum number of coins will be paid out at most once in the advantageous zone, but as a result of multiple transitions to the advantageous zone, In that case, many medals may be paid out, and there is a risk that the euphoria will be overdriven. Therefore, in addition to the limiter in the advantageous section, a value (for example, a payout rate or the number of remaining coins) indicating an increase situation of a period for the latest predetermined number of games (for example, the latest 6000 games) is a predetermined value set in advance. A special limiter may be provided to end the advantageous section when the number exceeds (for example, 170% or +10,000 as seen from the player). According to such a special limiter, when the special limiter activation condition is satisfied during the advantageous section, the main control board 71 just starts the advantageous section and activates the game number limiter and the number limiter at all. Even if it is not possible, the advantageous section is forcibly ended.

In the control of the advantageous section on the main control board 71, the right regarding the advantageous section obtained at the present time (for example, the duration of ART (the number of ART games), the number of sets, the stock, the number of obtainable differences, etc.) is output. When the special limiter is likely to be activated with reference to the ball rate, the main control board 71 reduces the possibility of activation of the special limiter by lowering the additional incidence before reaching the specified value. It is also possible to control so as to reduce the right of the increase section (ART) to be reduced or to be erased when the special limiter is activated.

In addition, the predetermined period used for determining the activation of the special limiter based on a value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, the payout rate or the number of remaining coins) may be based on a value other than the number of games, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 10 To determine the predetermined period for activating the special limiter by using information such as the time) or a predetermined number of inserted coins (eg, 18,000 inserted coins) that can be used to determine that the player has played the game for a predetermined period. May be

The structure of a pachi-slot using such a special limiter is shown below.
A gaming machine that can be played using a gaming value,
The right to set the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, it may be an advantageous section in a pachi-slot, an increase section (AT, ART), or a probability variation state or a shortened state in a pachinko). AT stock, the number of AT games, etc., and may also be a right to shift to a pachinko machine's probability change state, time saving state, etc.) (eg, main control board 71) When,
Game state control means (for example, main control board 71) for controlling the game state to the advantageous game state until the end condition is satisfied based on the right,
Advantageous game state continuation means for continuing the advantageous game state when there is the right (for example, the main control board 71 (the AT state may be continued when there is the AT stock number in the pachislot, etc., and pachinko It may be a continuation of a sudden change state or a shortened state))),
Increasing status storage means for storing a value indicating the increasing status of the game value until the elapse of a predetermined period from a predetermined unit game (for example, the difference number used by the main control board 71 to determine the activation condition of the special limiter, Counter for monitoring the payout rate),
A gaming machine comprising: a special ending means (special limiter) that ends the advantageous state even when the right is granted when the value of the increase status storage means reaches a predetermined specified value.

Further, the above-mentioned special limiter is not limited to the latest predetermined period, but may be, for example, a limiter for each day, or both may be used in combination. The method by which the main control board 71 grasps the unit of one day is arbitrary. As an example, when the main control board 71 has a power failure for a predetermined time (a time value that can be distinguished from a temporary power failure during business hours, such as 2 hours and 4 hours, and can be estimated to be a power failure during closing due to business closing) , Or a value indicating the increase status of medals from the starting point (that is, resetting the information for the previous day) when the power is turned on after the power is cut off for a predetermined time or longer (starting point) (for example, It controls the special limiter by monitoring the payout rate and the difference in number. Further, the main control board 71 sets the time when a predetermined time (one hour or the like) has elapsed in the power-on state as the start time (starting point) of the day from the starting point (that is, resets the information for the previous day). ), the value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, the payout rate and the number of remaining coins) may be monitored to control the special limiter. In any case, the time measuring method can be realized by mounting a time measuring means such as RTC on the main control board 71.

[Penalty for Navimis]
Further, in the pachi-slot 1, the main control board 71 may give a predetermined penalty when the stop operation is performed without following the notification given to the player during the advantageous section. For example, in the case of waiting for the transition to the high RT such as during the ART preparation (each of the above-mentioned preparation states), if the specification is such that the additional lottery of the ART is performed, the transition to the high RT is avoided and the ART preparation is performed. By extending it, you can receive a lot of lottery during the preparation for ART. Therefore, the main control board 71 may not perform such an additional lottery when the stop operation is performed without following the notification given to the player. Since it is not possible to determine whether it is an accidental mistake or an intentional mistake, for example, the main control board 71 can change the degree of penalty according to the number of times a stop operation is performed not according to the notification. May be

[Other modifications]
As described above, the method of managing the duration of the ART (advantageous section) is arbitrary. For example, the duration may be managed by the number of games, the duration may be managed by the number of sets, and the duration may be managed by the number of medals paid out during ART or the difference. Alternatively, the duration may be managed by the number of times of notifications (number of times of navigation) that influences the payout of medals during ART, and the continuation may be performed by the continuation determination performed at any timing during ART. The period may be managed, or ART may be terminated when a specific symbol combination is displayed during ART.
In this case, the target of addition is appropriately adjusted according to the management method of the duration of the ART, such as the number of games, the number of sets, the number of times of navigation, and the number of differences.

Further, in the pachi-slot 1 described above, the operation of the notification (ART) function is performed under the control of the main (main control board 71) side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub (sub-control board 72) is also possible. ) Side control may be used to operate the notification (ART) function.

Further, the set value may be only one step. At this time, the setting change process may or may not be added. When the setting change processing is left, only the same setting can be reset, so that the RAM is substantially cleared. Even when the setting value is only one stage, a mode for lottery (first hit and/or addition, etc.) in an advantageous state (ART state, etc.) is provided, and the number of times a predetermined winning combination with a predetermined probability is won is counted. However, when the number of times reaches a specified value, by switching this mode, it is possible to cause the ball to be undulated.

In this case, a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of a predetermined probability by a specified value is one wave of payout. If the value is regulated to be switched at the number of games corresponding to one day, even if the set value is one stage, it can be compared with a plurality of gaming machines. For example, if the business hours of one day is 11 hours, then 11h=39600 seconds. Therefore, if the minimum time required for one game is 4.1 seconds according to the rule, the maximum number of games per day is 39600/4. 1=about 9659 times. Since it is not realistic that no break (meal or toilet) is sandwiched, the number of games played per day is considered to be about 8,000. By setting the predetermined probability to 1/32 and the specified value to 256, 32×256=8192, so that the wave of the payout can be switched in about one day.

Furthermore, if the mode that is advantageous to the player and the mode that is unfavorable to the player are alternately switched each time the number of times the predetermined winning combination reaches the specified value, the profit will be stabilized in a two-day cycle, so that the game will be stable. Can contribute to the business of the store. Although the case where the set value is set to one step has been described, the set value is not limited to one step and can be diverted. More specifically, if it is adopted without changing the number of set values, it is possible to make the wave of payout balls more complicated without increasing the number of set values. Further, by reducing the number of set values, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the set values decrease and become monotonous.

If the number of set values can be reduced, the data capacity can be reduced accordingly. If the set value of 6 steps can be changed to the set value of 1 step, the data can be reduced to 1/6. Also, the development cost for designing the desired payout rate at each stage is 1/6. Furthermore, only the gaming machines that are suitable for the test are permitted to be used for sales, and the time required for the test can be shortened.

[Application to other game machines]
Further, in the present embodiment, the pachi-slot 1 is described as an example of the gaming machine, but the gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment is applicable is not limited to this. For example, the features other than the pachi-slot-specific features, such as the features related to reel stop control based on the stop operation, can be applied to a gaming machine called “pachinko”, and similar effects can be obtained. That is, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to any gaming machine capable of playing a game (playing a game control) according to a game operation (operation) by a player.

[Other expandability of gaming machine according to the present embodiment]
In the pachi-slot 1 of this embodiment, the player inserts a medal into the medal (that is, an operation to insert a hand-held medal into the medal insertion slot 14 or a credited medal to the MAX bet button 15a or the 1 bet button 15b). When the game is started by the operation of inserting the medals) and the medals are paid out when the game is finished, the hopper device 51 is driven to pay out the medals from the medal payout opening 24, or the credits are paid out. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the present invention is applied to all modes in which a player inserts a game medium required for a game, a game is performed based on the game medium, and a privilege is given (for example, a medal is paid out) based on the result of the game. be able to. That is, not only the game medium is loaded (hanged) by the physical action of the player and the game medium is paid out, but also the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) itself has the game medium owned by the player. May be managed electromagnetically to enable games without medals. In addition, the game medium managed by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) and managing the game medium. .

In this case, the game medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM), is a device provided in the game machine, and is a two-way communication with an external game medium handling device (not shown) through a predetermined interface. It is connected as much as possible, and wins a role relating to the lending operation of the game medium (that is, the operation of providing the necessary game medium when the player inserts the game medium) or the payout of the game medium ( A payout operation of a game medium (that is, an operation of causing a player to acquire a necessary game medium when paying out the game medium) when the combination is established), or a game medium used for a game. It is sufficient that the recording operation can be performed electromagnetically. In addition, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also holds the number of game media held on the front of the pachi-slot 1 based on the management result of the number of game media, for example. A number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the owned game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media available to the player for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game media to an external game medium handling device, and In addition to the case of operating directly, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and when an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the game machine handling device and an external game media handling device. It is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means that can be operated by the player, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board. (For example, an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money or the like from a portable terminal, various lending operation means, various operation means such as return operation means, and a game medium handling device-side external connection terminal board It may be provided (all are not shown).

As the flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits a valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any one of the above lending operation means. Then, the game media corresponding to the subtracted valuable value from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays the game and repeats the above operation when a game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are obtained as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, one of the return operation means is operated to transmit the number of game media from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device, thereby playing the game. The medium handling device ejects the recording medium in which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored therein when transmitting the number of game media. The player brings the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like in order to exchange the prize, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player on the game machine or the game medium handling device side is transmitted, and the game medium possessed by the player is changed. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is ejected, but cash or cash equivalent may be ejected, or may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured so that a member recording medium of a game store can be inserted and stored in the member recording medium so that the game can be played again later.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, it is possible to execute a lock operation for locking the data communication of the game medium or the valuable value to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown). Good. In that case, information such as a one-time password only known to the player may be set, or the player may be stored by an image pickup means provided in the game machine or the game medium handling device.

As described above, this game medium management device may be capable of playing a game only without medals, or the game medium is loaded (hanged) by a physical player operation, The game may be played in both forms, that is, the form in which is paid out, and the form in which the game can be played without medals. In this case, the game medium management device may employ a method of directly controlling the selector 66 or the hopper device 51 described above, and these are controlled by the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71), Based on the transmission of the control result, the method of recording the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method and performing the control capable of performing the display control is adopted. You can also

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachi-slot 1 has been described. However, in the slot machine or the enclosed game machine that uses the above-mentioned game balls, the game medium management device is similarly provided, and the player It is also possible to manage the game media.

As described above, by providing the above-described game medium management device, it is possible to reduce the selector 66, the hopper device 51, and the like inside the game machine, as compared with the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the game machine. Not only can the cost and manufacturing cost of the game be reduced, but it is also possible to prevent the player from making direct contact with the game medium, improving the game environment, reducing noise, and reducing the number of devices, resulting in a gaming machine. It also reduces power consumption. Further, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium or the game medium insertion port or payout port. That is, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

[Pulling back during the advantageous section is set + winning point management] Modification Example The gaming machine of the above embodiment starts variable display of symbols based on the starting operation of the player, and the internal winning combination and the stopping operation of the player. Based on and, the variable display of symbols is stopped. Further, there is provided an advantageous state control means capable of producing an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by the assist replay time ART which enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player (see FIG. 14). .

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 103, on the program of the main CPU 101, an advantageous state control unit 101a capable of generating an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by ART and an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by ART are provided. A game point giving means for giving a first game point on condition that the game has continued for a predetermined number or more of reaching games, and for giving a second game point under a predetermined condition based on a predetermined winning of an internal winning combination. 101b is provided. Advantageous state control means 101a of the present modification is capable of executing a pullback process to the ART based on the game points given by the game point giving means 101b, and like the advantageous state control means of the above-described embodiment, Various processes shown in 33 to 44 are also made executable.

The advantageous state referred to in this modified example corresponds to an advantageous section due to the AT in an AT machine positioned as a model different from the ART machine, which enables the assist time AT during bonus internal winning (between flags). Including state. Further, the game points in this modification are different in the payout of medals to be given as a result of one game, the operation of a re-game or a bonus, the transition to an advantageous section or the addition, or the lottery mode of the re-game. It is a game privilege that can be accumulated separately from the RT state transition or the like and accumulated across games that bring benefits to the player.

The maximum number of games that can be continued from one advantageous section, that is, the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and the end of the advantageous section is a predetermined number of games, for example, 1500 games, but the number of reaching games to which the first game point is given is It is set within the range of the maximum number of games that can be continued in the advantageous section, and for example, it is set to 500 games in which the player can expect to get a few hundreds to 1,000 medals collected to some extent.

In this modification, the number of medals to be increased per game (payout number-insertion number) is, for example, about 2.0 coins/game including the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the bonus, and ART is about 500 games. If continued, a net increase of hundreds to 1000 medals can be expected. These hundreds to 1,000 medals are considered to be one borderline of whether or not the investment amount of a general player can be recovered or not, and it is thought that this is a phase where it is unclear whether to stop or continue the game. ing.

Therefore, the first game point is awarded when 500 games of the ART game are reached, and the subsequent development can be expected as never before. It should be noted that the arrival of 500 games is achieved when one set of dozens of ARTs is connected for a plurality of sets or when the number of continuous games is accumulated on the way, or from the beginning of 500 games. It is possible to use an ART capable of completing the race and to achieve it by completing the race while avoiding various obstacles that are terminated halfway.

The first game point is the 500th game counting from the start of ART (when playing the first ART game at a predetermined highly reliable replay time with a high replay probability (such as RT2 in FIG. 13)). Is added to the condition. The points to be given are, for example, high points by a lottery process using, for example, a 1-byte random number (possible numerical value 0 to 255, random number denominator 256) that is extracted independently of the internal random number for randomization when the start lever 16 is operated. 99 points and low points of 50 points are distributed at a ratio of 1:1 to be 99 points or 50 points.

The first game point may be awarded based on the fact that the number of games elapsed from the start of ART is 500 games or more, which is a specific reaching game, at the end of ART. In this case, for example, if the ART is finished in the 600th game, the first game point is given to the 600th game.

The number of reaching games to which the first game points are given is not limited to 500 games, but may be 300 games or the like, which is less than this. In addition, it is preferable that the number of reaching games to which the first game points are given is originally set to be equal to or less than 750 games, which is the number of games that can be obtained at least a plurality of times in one advantageous section (1500 games of the maximum sustainable games). , 800 games, etc., which are more than this, may be used. In addition to two types of points, a high point and a low point, three or more types with different values may be given, or 0 points may be given with a low probability, for example, 1/256, or a low probability. For example, 1/256 may be given to 100 points or more, which exceeds 99 points. Further, when the ART continues after the 501st game which exceeds the specific number of games reached, after the first game point is given to the 500th game, after the ART is continued every predetermined number of games, for example, every 300 games. One game point may be added.

After the third release of the stop button operated at the end of the game to which the first game points have been given, the display side 11 on the sub side does not clearly indicate the high point or the low point, but a treasure box or the like. The predetermined item is displayed to notify that points have been given, and the player is expected to have an effect. In this case, select the color of the item from among blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow, etc. according to the given points, and select the red or rainbow selection rate for high points rather than low points. It is also preferable to raise the price and encourage the player's expectation.

Although the notification of the instruction information about the internal winning combination depending on the pushing order is stopped by the end of ART, the advantageous section is internally continued for a predetermined number of latent games, for example, 100 games, and 100 games have passed since the end of ART. If it is not possible to return to ART by the time, the advantageous section is ended after 100 games have elapsed and the normal section is restored. The reason why the advantageous section is hidden is that it is possible to pull back the ART by the game point and keep the fairness of the game strictly as a common process during the advantageous section.

The game point giving means 101b is for giving a second game point under a predetermined condition based on the winning of the internal winning combination determined in advance. For example, one of the bonus combinations BB1, shown in FIG. Based on the winnings of BB2, BB3, and BB4, 1 point or more, for example, is given as the second game point under the condition that the winning is within 100 games where the advantageous section is hidden from the end of ART. I am trying to do it.

More specifically, according to the winning probability of the bonus combination (see setting 1 in FIG. 16),
30 points when winning BB1 (same red color) with a winning probability of 70/65536 ≒ 1/936,
Winning probability 70/65536 ≒ 1/936 BB2 (blue same color) when winning, 30 points,
20 points when BB3 (red different color) with a winning probability of 94/65536≈1/697 is won,
20 points when BB4 (blue different color) with a winning probability of 94/65536 ≈ 1/697 is won,
Is given. The combined probability of BB1 to BB4 is about 1/200 in the setting 1, and there is about a half chance that any bonus combination will be won within 100 games.

When the game points reach a predetermined high point evaluation of, for example, 100 points or more, a special withdrawal lottery in which the re-entry probability (withdrawal probability) to ART is 50% or more, for example, 50%, may be received. It is possible, and by the winning, it is possible to return to the ART that activates the indicating function again. On the other hand, when 100 points, which is a low point evaluation, has not been reached, special pull-back lottery cannot be performed. Therefore, in the case of high point evaluation, it is easier to return to the ART game that activates the instruction function than in the case of low point evaluation. For the special pull-back lottery, for example, a 1-byte random number (possible numerical values 0 to 255, random number denominator 256) may be used and also used as a random number when the first game point is given.

If 99 points are awarded as the first game point by reaching 500 games in the ART game, 1 point or more is awarded as the second game point. When the bonus role is won, the total points will be 100 points or more, and you can receive a special draw-back lottery.

If 50 points are awarded as the first game point when the ART game reaches 500 games, 50 points or more will be awarded as the second game point, and at least one will be the same color as BB. If there is, the total points will be 100 points or more when the second bonus combination is won, and a special pull-back lottery can be taken.

In this way, the first game point is given by the arrival of 500 games of the ART game, the second game point is given based on the winning of the bonus combination, and based on these, if the high point evaluation is obtained, the instruction function is given. Since it is easy to return to the game to be operated, it seems effective for the player who has obtained a net increase of several hundreds to 1,000 medals in the ART game to some extent to continue playing the game. Can be made.

If there is no winning of any bonus combination within 100 games where the advantageous section is hidden from the end of the ART game, the second game point is not awarded and 99 points are awarded as the first game point. However, special pull-back lottery cannot be received. Further, even if the player can receive the special draw-back lottery, if he/she deviates from the special draw-back lottery, the special draw-back lottery cannot be returned to the ART.

However, even during the game between 100 games in which the advantageous section is hidden, the winning of the watermelon 1, which is originally the normal section shown in FIG. 33, is set as the winning of ART on 8/256, and It is also possible to win the ART by 64/256 upon the winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4, that is, to return to the ART with the same difficulty level as that at the time of the first win. When the bonus winning combinations BB1 to BB4 are won, even if the special winning lottery is missed, the 64/256 lottery can be returned to the ART. Advantageous state control means 101a of the present modification makes it possible to execute a special pull-back lottery using the game points given by the game point giving means 101b, and during the game where the advantageous zone is hidden, it is originally the normal zone. The processing shown in FIG. 33 and so on is also made executable.

However, during the 100 games where the advantage section is hidden, if it is not possible to return to ART due to a special draw-back lottery or due to the same difficulty level as at the first win, the advantage section ends after 100 games have passed. After that, it will return to the normal section, and after that, you will expect from ART depending on the difficulty level at the first hit. The advantageous state control means 101a of the present modification is also capable of executing the processing of FIG.

When the advantageous section is hidden and the normal section is returned to the normal section after 100 games have been hidden, all variables affecting the performance related to the instruction function are initialized, and the accumulated game points are cleared to 0. . The number of latent games in the advantageous section may be set to 100 games or less, or 100 games or more.

On the other hand, if it is possible to return to ART within 100 games where the advantageous section is hidden, the advantageous section is continued, so the accumulated game points are carried over and the second game is given when the second ART reaches 500 games. The game point of 1 is added to the carry-over amount. However, when the player has withdrawn after the special withdrawal lottery, the carry-over amount is already 100 points or more. Therefore, the condition for performing the special withdrawal lottery by adding the second game points is changed to 200 points or more. After all, the special draw-back lottery is performed every 100 points, such as 100 points or more for the first time and 200 points or more for the second time at the time of granting the second game points.

However, when the game point has reached a specific value, for example, 256 points defined as a predetermined full point, at the stage when the second game point is given, a special pull-back lottery is performed as compared with the case where the game point is not reached. In the case of winning, the number of games in which the ART game can be continued is set to be longer than that in the first game within a range that does not exceed the maximum number of sustainable games (1500 games) in the advantageous section. Specifically, increase in the number of initial continuous games, increase in additional performance, increase in rush rate to additional special zone, setting of loop stock ratio with high probability, ART that causes disadvantage to the continuation rate of ART game One or a plurality of predetermined incentives such as an increase in game level are attached to the ART game. In this way, the cumulative value of the game points given by the game point giving means 101b under the predetermined conditions such as the first game point and the second game point reaches the full point 256, which is a predetermined high point evaluation. If the full point 256, which is a low point evaluation, is not reached, the number of ART games that can continue the ART game that enables the operation of the instruction function is set to the maximum number of sustainable games (1500 games) in the advantageous section. The expected value to increase within the range that does not exceed is raised.

As a result, if the cumulative value of the game points is a high point evaluation, the number of games that can continue the ART game that enables the operation of the instruction function does not exceed the maximum number of games that can be continued in the advantageous state. Since the expected value to be increased is increased, the player can be more effectively encouraged to increase the accumulated value of the game points, and the game can be continued for a longer time. The number of games that can be continued in the ART game is increased within a range that does not exceed the maximum number of games that can be continued in the advantageous state. Of the 256 points of full points, the first game point 99 points and the second game point 30 points or more are awarded in the first time, and the second game point 99 points and the second game point 30 points are also given in the second time. The hurdle height that can be reached when the above is given is set. However, the full point may be lowered to 238 points or the like, or may be raised to exceed 256 points.

In addition, after the first ART game reaches 500 games or more, the second ART game is played by pulling back within 100 games, and the second ART game reaching 500 games or more, then pulling back within 100 games. Although the third ART game is played by, the maximum number of games that can be continued in one advantageous section is 1500 games, so it is advantageous during each ART game, especially during the third ART game in which the number of times advances. The section may be forced to end. In this case, since the sudden forced termination is confusing to the player, a premium ending effect that cannot be usually seen during the 50 games before the arrival of 1500 games is developed on the sub-side display device 11.

In this modified example, the ART game has a finite number of high-accuracy replay times with a high re-probability that is triggered by the end of operation of a bonus or the like (referred to as high-accuracy replay time of “c opportunity e medium” among those skilled in the art). In the RT state), it is assumed that 500 games can be completed, and a combination of symbols that trigger a fall to a low-probability replay time with a low replay probability on the way (called "d trigger" symbol etc. by those skilled in the art). It is also possible to avoid an obstacle that is ended halfway, such as displaying (symbol combination), and give the first game point by completing 500 games. In this case, it is also preferable that the high setting can achieve the completion of 500 games with a higher probability than the low setting. By doing so, it is possible to expand the difference between the advantage and the disadvantage due to the setting difference. ..

In this modification, after the ART is finished, the advantageous section is internally continued for 100 games, which is the predetermined number of latent games, but instead, the number of latent games is not provided, and immediately after the ART is finished, Alternatively, the advantageous section may be ended and returned to the normal section at the time of a fall to a low-probability replay time with a low replay probability. In this modification, the advantageous state control means 101a and the game point giving means 101b are provided on the program of the main CPU 101, but may be provided on the program of the sub CPU 201.

[Additional lottery system using BB with setting difference and MB without setting difference] Modification Example In this modification example as well, the variable display of symbols is started based on the start operation of the player, and the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player are performed. The variable display of the symbols is stopped based on. Further, on the program of the main CPU 101, there is provided an advantageous state control means capable of producing an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by the assist replay time ART, which enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player. ing. Further, there is provided setting changing means capable of changing the setting for determining the payout rate, which is the ratio of the total number of game media input to the total number of game media input, in a plurality of high and low stages (in FIG. 6, a setting key type switch 54). Etc.).

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 104, instead of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 of FIG. 20, a first bonus combination that performs a predetermined lottery to increase the game that activates the instruction function, and a low setting compared to a high setting. The internal bonus combination includes a second bonus combination in which the number of games that are activated is increased, and each of the internal winning combinations can be won independently, that is, without overlapping with other small combinations and re-game combinations.

The first bonus combination is constituted by, for example, the object continuous operation device MB0 related to the second type special accessory, and its winning probability is several tenths to several hundredths of one without setting difference that does not change depending on the setting. The predetermined probability within the range of, for example, 1311/65536≈1/50.

The combination of operating symbols of the first bonus combination MB0 (“left symbol”-“middle symbol”-“right symbol”) is, for example, “replay”-“bell”-“bell”, and the display probability is 1 (maximum 4 It is possible to pull in the design to the effective line by frame sliding). Therefore, if MB0 is won, a combination of operation symbols can be displayed in the winning game, and MB0 is in operation in the next game. The second class special accessory CB is always activated during the operation of MB0, and during the operation of CB, all the small winning combinations accompanied by the payout of medals are in a winning state.

During the operation of CB while the first bonus combination MB0 is operating, the specified number of inserted coins is changed to 1 (multiplied by 1), the payout number of all small winning combinations is changed to 15, and the maximum number of sliding frames is 1 frame. The reel that is stopped within 75 ms, which is limited to, is, for example, the left reel 3L. The middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R maintain the maximum four-frame sliding, and the effective lines maintain the upper, middle, and lower three lines. When the left first stop is performed to stop the left reel 3L first, any of the small wins of NML01 to NML35 shown in FIG. 22 can be displayed, and 15 medals, which is the upper limit payout number of one game, are paid out.

It should be noted that the prescribed number of coins to be inserted may be maintained at three (multiplying three), and the number of coins to be paid out may be the same as in the normal game. In this case, in order to display the small payout of 8 coins on two lines of the upper, middle, and lower three lines and obtain the maximum payout of 15 coins, it is necessary to additionally define a special small prize during CB operation. preferable.

The operation of the first bonus combination MB0 ends when the number of acquired medals from the start of operation exceeds a predetermined upper limit, for example, 30 tokens, that is, 31 tokens or more, and the operation of CB also ends when the operation of MB0 ends. Therefore, the operation of MB0 is completed in almost 3 games, and 45 medals=3 medals=42 medals can be net increased.

The first bonus combination MB0 does not use the display of the winning or the combination of the operation symbols or the operation end as an opportunity to change the lottery mode of the re-game. Therefore, when the operation of the first bonus MB0 is finished, the original replay time state in which the winning of MB0 is won is restored.

Assist replay time During the occurrence of an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous zone, that is, during the ART game or during the ART preparation during the promotion to the high-accuracy replay time during the ART game, if the first bonus combination MB0 is won, the internal The first probability, for example, 64/256=1 by the lottery process using, for example, a 1-byte random number (possible number 0-255, random number denominator 256), which is extracted independently of the random number for lottery when the start lever 16 is operated. Continuation games of 10 games with a probability of /4, 20 games with a second probability of 128/256=1/2, for example with a third probability of 32/256=1/8, for example, 60 games Add a number. The number of games to be added is set to 0 with the probability of the fourth probability, for example, 32/256=1/8. The average expected number of games to be added when winning MB0 is 20 games.

During the subsequent operation of CB during the operation of MB0, on the condition that the left first stop is performed, by the lottery process using the 1-byte random number, the first probability, for example, 64/256=1/4 The number of continuous games of ART is added to 5 games, the second probability, for example, 128/256=1/2, for example, 10 games, and the third probability, for example, 32/256=1/8, for example, 30 games. The number of games to be added is set to 0 with the probability of the fourth probability, for example, 32/256=1/8. The average expected number of games to be added to each game during CB operation is 10.

Therefore, if you win MB0 during the ART game or during ART preparation, the average number of expected additional games will be 50 games in the first game of CB, the second game of CB, and the third game of CB at the time of winning. , It is possible to effectively increase the game that activates the instruction function.

The condition that the left first stop is performed during the operation of the CB is because it is not good to increase the number of opportunities to add the MB0 for four games or more. On the display device 11 on the sub side, an arrow pointing from left to right is displayed to prompt the first left stop. However, the addition may be performed by lottery every game without the condition that the left first stop is performed, and in this case as well, the addition can be appropriately performed by the common processing that does not refer to the set value. Further, the addition during the CB operation may be performed by other common processing such as assigning the number of additional games according to the winning of the re-gaming combination in which the pull-in priority is lower than the small combination.

If the first bonus combination MB0 is won in the normal section, a predetermined probability, for example, 16/256 is obtained by the lottery process using the 1-byte random number, which is extracted independently of the internal lottery random number when the start lever 16 is operated. =1/16 probability of winning the ART, and allows the ART game for a predetermined number of initial games.

In addition, during the CB operation during the MB operation based on the MB0 that is won during the normal section, if the winning of the ART is determined when the MB0 is won, the processing during the CB operation is performed as a process related to the instruction function during the advantageous section. The average number of games to be added The initial number of games is added by the same addition as described above with the expected number of games being 10 games. On the other hand, if the winning of the ART is not determined when the winning of MB0 is determined, all the small winning combinations are set in the winning state during the CB operation, but the small winning combination is specified as a result of the internal lottery similar to that in the general game. If, for example, the winning of the watermelon 1 is equivalent to the winning of the watermelon 1, a lottery process using the 1-byte random number is used to win the ART with a predetermined probability, for example, 8/256=1/32. If there is a remaining number of games, add the initial number of games.

The second bonus combination is configured by, for example, the thing continuous operation device BB0 related to the first special effect, and the winning probability thereof is such that the lower the setting, the higher the winning probability, and the higher the setting, the lower the winning probability. Predetermined probability within a range of several tenths to several hundredths, for example,
Setting 1 is 3277/65536≈1/20,
Setting 2 is 2979/65536≈1/22,
Setting 3 is 2731/65536≈1/24,
Setting 4 is 2521/65536≈1/26,
Setting 5 is 2341/65536≈1/28,
Setting 6 is 2185/65536≈1/30,
Therefore, the low setting makes the number of games in which BB0 is in operation larger than that of the high setting.

The combination of operating symbols of the second bonus combination BB0 (“left symbol”-“middle symbol”-“right symbol”) is, for example, “red 7”-“BAR”-“red 7”, and the display probability is ≠1. (It may not be possible to pull in the corresponding symbol on the effective line due to a maximum of 4 frame slips). Therefore, if BB0 is won and the winning symbol combination cannot be displayed in the winning game, the winning flag of BB0 is carried over, and from the next game onward, BB0 internal winning is in progress (the state between the BB0 flags) until the operating symbol combination is displayed. Medium).

While the operation of BB0, the first-class special accessory RB is always operated, and during the operation of RB, from the entire range of the numerical values that the internal random number for random determination can take (65536 of 0 to 65535), FIG. 22 and a range that is larger than the value 16881 which is the sum of all the winning ranges in which any small winning combination is won in the general game internal lottery table shown in FIG. All winning combinations NML01 to NML35 shown in the above are set as the winning range of the small winning all that wins the duplication, and the winning range of the re-gaming combination is, for example, 8978 with no setting difference, and any winning combination does not win the re-gaming winning combination. In contrast to the winning range of the small winning all, the lower the setting is, the larger the range is set, and the lottery is performed by the internal lottery table during RB operation during BB0 operation.

During RB operation while the second bonus combination BB0 is operating, the specified number of inserted coins is changed to two (multiplied by two), the payout number of all small winning combinations is changed to two, and the effective line is only one line in the middle row. Has been changed to. When a small winning all is won, any small winning combination of NML01 to NML35 shown in FIG. 22 can be displayed regardless of the pressing order and the pressed position of the stop button, and two medals are paid out per game.

The operation of the second bonus combination BB0 ends when the number of acquired medals from the start of the operation exceeds a predetermined upper limit, for example, 5 or more, that is, 6 or more, and the operation of RB ends when the operation of BB0 ends. Therefore, the operation of BB0 ends in 3 games at the shortest if the small role oar is pulled 3 times in a row, and the lower setting that is easier to pull out is easier to end after 4 games. The number of games until the end of operation is likely to be long.

Even if you win the small role all, the number of paid-out medals is the same as the number of inserted medals, the net increase is 0, and the number of medals held is the current state at the end of the shortest 3 games, the number of games until the end of BB0 operation Will decrease over time. However, instead of this, a slight increase in medals may be expected during the operation of BB0.

When the operation of the second bonus combination BB0 is completed, the process proceeds to RT4 as shown in FIG. If the second bonus combination BB0 is won during the ART game or during the ART preparation, the subtraction of the number of continuous games of the ART after the winning game is stopped, and after the operation of BB0 is finished, the ART preparation during the period from RT4 to RT2 is resumed. After that, the ART game is restarted for the remaining number of continuous games.

The prescribed number of coins inserted during RB operation during the second bonus combination BB0 operation may be maintained at three (multiplied by three), and the number of coins paid out may be the same as in the normal game. In this case, it is preferable to increase the upper limit of the number of acquired medals at which BB0 ends its operation so that three or more games can be continued.

Even if the second bonus combination BB0 is won during the ART game, the ART preparation, or the normal section, neither the additional prize nor the ART win is determined. However, instead of this, if the second bonus combination BB0 is won, it is possible to increase the number of games by a common process, or by a lottery process using the 1-byte random number, with a predetermined low probability, for example, a probability of 1/256. It may be possible to win the ART and enable the ART game for a predetermined number of initial games.

The lottery value (winning range) 1311 of the first bonus combination MB0 and the lottery value (winning range) 3277 (setting 1) of the second bonus combination BB0 are the internal lottery table during the general game of FIG. In (setting value: 1), in the case of RT0 and RT2, No. No. which is not randomly selected in this modification. A lottery value of 1 to 38 and No. The lottery value 5000 of “F_middle stage rip 1” of 56 is secured within the combined numerical range, and RT1, RT3, and RT4 are No. A lottery value of 1 to 38 and No. It is ensured within the numerical value range that includes the lottery value of “out” of 0.

Further, in FIG. 17, RT5 corresponds to the internal winning of the second bonus combination BB0 (in the state between BB0 flags), and RT5 No. 61-No. No. 73 of each lottery value of RT0 to RT4. 61-No. It is the same as each lottery value of 73.

As described above, in the present modified example, the higher the winning probability of the second bonus combination BB0 is, and the lower the number of games in which BB0 is active is, the lower the setting is. The number of games in which the role MB0 is won is increased, and the performance of increasing the number of games that activate the instruction function is reduced. On the other hand, the higher the lower the probability of winning the second bonus combination BB0 and the smaller the number of games in which BB0 is operating, the first bonus combination MB0 that performs a predetermined process of increasing the number of games that activate the instruction function is won. The number of games in which opportunities are taken is reduced, and the performance of increasing the number of games that activate the instruction function is improved. By the way, in this modification, each time the setting is increased by one step, the expected additional value can be increased for about 0.05 games or more per game.

In addition, the first bonus combination MB0 is configured by the accessory continuous operation device related to the second type special accessory, so that the display probability of the combination of the operation symbols can be increased, so that the operation can be started early and the instruction function is operated. Can be made to function properly as an opportunity to increase.

In addition, the second bonus combination BB0 allows the number of games until the end of the operation to be finished more than 4 games rather than 4 games as compared with the high setting, so that it is possible to make it longer. Each time the second bonus combination BB0 is activated, the low setting deprives more chances of winning the first bonus combination MB0 than the high setting, so that the superiority or inferiority due to the setting difference can be effectively exerted.

In this modification, the first bonus combination MB0 ends when the number of earned medals in operation exceeds 30, but the number of earned medals is less than this, or the number of earned medals is more than this. The operation may be terminated when exceeded. The first bonus combination may have a setting difference in which the higher the setting, the higher the winning probability. Further, the first bonus combination may be configured by a first-class special character or a character-member continuous actuation device related to the first-class special character.

Further, the second bonus combination may be such that there is no setting difference in the winning probability itself, and the number of games during one operation is low when the number is high compared to when the number is high. Further, the second bonus combination may be configured by a first-class special character or a character continuous actuating device related to a second-class special character. Further, in the present modification, the first bonus combination MB0 is not provided, and the low setting is provided only with the bonus combination BB0 similar to the second bonus combination in which the number of games in operation is larger than the high setting. When the bonus combination BB0 is in operation and the bonus combination BB0 is not in operation (general game in which the bonus combination BB0 is randomized and/or the state between flags), the bonus combination BB0 is not in operation. The performance of increasing the game for operating the instruction function may be increased. As a result, in the low setting in which the number of games in which the bonus combination BB0 is active increases, the non-operation game of the high-performance bonus combination BB0 that increases the number of games that activate the instruction function will be robbed. , The performance of increasing the game for operating the instruction function is low, and conversely, the performance for increasing the game for operating the instruction function is high in the high setting in which the number of games in which the bonus hand BB0 is operating is small.

The concept of "increasing the number of games in which the instruction function is activated" in the present modification includes adding the number of games and stocking the number of sets of ART which makes one set several tens of games. Further, in addition to the direct addition such as the addition of the number of games and the set stock, the indirect addition to increase the number of times of collecting specific items or points and receiving the continuous lottery of ART is also included. Further, not only the addition, but also the first hit of ART, the pullback of ART, the shift to the chance zone where the first hit or pullback of ART is easy. In this modification, the advantageous state control means is provided on the program of the main CPU 101, but it may be provided on the program of the sub CPU 201.

[Switching the winning rate and the benefit of the advantageous section depending on the RT state at the normal time] Modification Example In this modification example as well, the variable display of symbols is started based on the start operation of the player, and the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player are performed. The variable display of the symbols is stopped based on. Further, on the program of the main CPU 101, there is provided an advantageous state control means capable of producing an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by the assist replay time ART, which enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player. ing.

In this modified example, instead of FIG. 13, as shown in FIG. 105, the lottery mode of the replay (the breakdown of the replay combination and/or the lottery value) is different on the program of the main CPU 101. RT0, RT1 to RT6, and a replay time shifting means for shifting a plurality of replay time states (RT states) including a bonus state. Of the plurality of replay times, at least one replay time, for example RT2, and another replay time, for example RT3 or RT4, are in a non-advantageous state that is not an advantageous state (advantageous section) to an advantageous state. The lottery mode of the advantageous state transition trigger role to be shifted to the (advantageous section) is the same, but the processing relating to the instruction function during the advantageous state (during the advantageous section) that is not executed in the non-advantageous state (the normal section of the non-advantageous section) The lottery mode for execution is different, and there is an advantage and disadvantage difference in the expected value that increases the chance of a game to activate the instruction function.

A) RT0
This RT0 is a state where the lottery mode of the re-game is not changed, and the re-game probability is a low probability (low rep) of 8978/65536≈1/7.3, for example.

B) RT1
This RT1 shifts from RT0 or RT5 by displaying a combination of predetermined shift trigger symbols, and the replay probability is a low probability (low lip) that is not different from RT0. The combination of predetermined transition trigger patterns is No. 17 in FIG. 77-No. At the time of winning any one of the pushing order small wins of 98, the re-play-watermelon-bell bell of FIG.

C) RT2
This RT2 is moved from RT1 by displaying the combination of the first transition opportunity symbols, and the lottery mode of the replay is different from RT0 and RT1, but the replay probability is as low probability (low lip) that is not different from RT0 or RT1. There is. In this modified example, when there is no winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 on the way, when the result of the game is obtained a predetermined number of times, for example, 10 times, that is, the finite replay time of returning to RT0 after 10 games from the rush is set. There is. However, instead of this, RT2 may be an infinite replay time, and the display may shift to RT1 by displaying the bell spill.

The combination of the first transition trigger symbols is, for example, one of the combinations of symbols relating to the operation of the replay, "red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank"-"replay"-"replay". It is the same as the symbol combination of REP08 in FIG. When this symbol combination is displayed in the middle effective line, the "replay" symbols are arranged on the polygonal line connecting the upper stage of the left reel 3L, the middle stage of the middle reel 3C and the middle stage of the right reel 3R.

D) RT3
This RT3 is moved from RT1 by displaying a combination of the second transition trigger symbols, and the lottery mode of the replay is different from RT0 and RT1, but the replay probability is a low probability (low lip) that is not different from RT0 and RT1. There is. In this modified example, when there is no winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 on the way, when the result of the game is obtained a predetermined number of times, for example, 10 times, that is, the finite replay time of returning to RT0 after 10 games from the rush is set. There is. However, instead of this, RT3 may be set to an infinite replay time like RT2, and may be shifted to RT1 by the display of the spilled eye.

The combination of the second transition trigger symbols is, for example, one of the combinations of symbols relating to the operation of the replay, "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-"watermelon". It is the same as the symbol combination of REP09 in FIG. When this symbol combination is displayed on the middle effective line, the symbols relating to cherry are displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C, and "Red 7/Blue 7/BAR" is displayed on the lower stage of the right reel 3R. A pattern including a bonus-corresponding symbol of "/blank" is displayed, and it is treated as a strong cherry in the image held by a general player, which suggests a hot situation in which the interest of the game is expected to be increased in favor of the game.

E) RT4
This RT4 shifts from RT1 by displaying a combination of the third transition timing symbols, and the lottery mode of the replay is different from RT0 and RT1, but the replay probability is low probability (low lip) that is not different from RT0 and RT1. There is. In this modified example, when there is no winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 on the way, when the result of the game is obtained a predetermined number of times, for example, 10 times, that is, the finite replay time of returning to RT0 after 10 games from the rush is set. There is. However, instead of this, RT4 may be set to an infinite replay time like RT2 and RT3, and the display may be shifted to RT1 by displaying the bell spill.

The combination of the third transition trigger symbols is, for example, one of the combinations of symbols relating to the operation of the replay, "bell"-"watermelon"-"red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank". It is the same as the symbol combination of REP07 in FIG. When this symbol combination is displayed in the middle effective line, the "watermelon" symbols are arranged in a small V shape on the upper stage of the left reel 3L, the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, and the upper stage of the right reel 3R, and are held by ordinary players. It is treated as a strong watermelon in the image, and it suggests a hot situation where the interest of the game is expected to grow, which is expected to develop the game advantageously.

F) RT5
This RT5 shifts from RT1 by displaying a combination of predetermined promotion trigger symbols, and the replay probability is set to a high probability (high lip) of, for example, about 1/1.35, and one of the pushing order small wins (of FIG. 17). No. 77-98), the wrong answer is made in the order of pressing and the player falls to RT1 when the spilled eyes are displayed. RT5 of the present modification is a highly reliable replay time for playing the assist replay time ART.

The combination of the predetermined promotion opportunity symbols is, for example, "bell"-"replay"-"bell", which is one of the combinations of symbols relating to the operation of the replay. Although not defined in FIG. 21, this is newly defined as REP10. When this symbol combination is displayed in the middle effective line, the "replay" symbols are lined upward in the lower stage of the left reel 3L, the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, and the upper stage of the right reel 3R.

G) RT6
This RT6 is an operation symbol for preferentially displaying the small winning combination or the re-gaming combination in the winning game, based on the winning of any bonus combination BB1 to BB4 that is randomly selected during the general game of RT0, RT1 to RT5. Since the combination is not displayed, the internal winning of the bonus (in the inter-flag state) has been carried over the winning flag of the bonus combination related to the winning to be transferred to the game subsequent to the winning game. The replay probability is, for example, a medium probability (medium rep) of about 1/2.49.

(H) Bonus state This bonus state is started by displaying a combination of operation symbols of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 related to winning. The bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are configured by the accessory continuous operation device BB related to the first-class special character, and the first-class special character RB is always in operation during the operation of BB, and the RB operation during the BB operation. It becomes the inside game state. The replay probability is 0, and the deviation is 0, and any one of F_JAC1_1 to 6 and F_JAC2 shown in FIG. 18 is won. The operation of BB1 to BB4 ends when the upper limit of the number of medals for each upper limit is exceeded (the RB of the normal operation also ends), and returns to RT0.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT0 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 8966
2) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01-10) is 6
3) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01-10) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT0 is 8978, and the probability is about 1/7.3. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT1 are as follows.
1) F_Batting order 1 and RT3 other than RT3 Rep (REP08+09) is 300
2) F_Batting order 2 RT3 other than RT3 Rep (REP01+08+09) is 300
3) F_Batting order 3 RT3 other than RT3 Rep (REP02+08+09) is 300
4) F_Batting order 4 and RT3 other than RT3 Rep (REP01+02+08+09) is 300
5) F_Batting order 5 and RT2 other than RT3 Rep (REP07-09) is 300
6) F_Batting order 6 RT3 other than RT2 Rep (REP01+07~09) is 300
7) F_Batting order 1 and maintenance for RT4 and others (REP01+05+07) is 85
8) F_Batting order 2 and RT4 and other maintenance rep (REP01+03+05+07) is 85
9) F_Batting order 3 and maintenance rep (REP01+04+05+07) is 85 for RT4 and others.
10) F_Batting order 4 and maintenance rep (RT01+02+07) is 85 for RT4 and others.
11) F_Batting order is 5 and maintenance rep (REP01-04+07) is 85 for RT4 and others.
12) F_Batting order is 6 and RT4 and others are maintenance rep (REP01+02+04+07) is 85
13) F_Batting order 1 and maintenance rip for RT5 and others (REP01+05+10) is 950
14) F_Batting order 2 and maintenance rip for RT5 and others (REP01+03+05+10) is 950
15) F_Batting order 3 and maintenance rip for RT5 and others (REP01+04+05+10) is 950
16) F_Batting order 4 and maintenance rip for RT5 and others (REP01+02+10) is 950
17) F_Batting order 5 and maintenance rips for RT5 and others (REP01-04+10) are 950
18) F_Batting order 6 and maintenance rip for RT5 and others (REP01+02+04+10) is 950
19) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 956
20) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01-10) is 6
21) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01-10) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT1 is 8978, and the probability is about 1/7.3. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

In addition, for example, in 1), “F_Batting order 1 and RT3 other than RT2 rep” means that when the winning operation is performed, when the batting order 1 which is the pressing order of the correct answer, that is, the left middle and right order is stopped, the second transition trigger is generated. Display the combination of symbols "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-"watermelon" (REP09), move to RT3, and perform a stop operation other than left middle right. "Red 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank"-"Replay"-"Replay" (REP08) is displayed and the role is to shift to RT2. The same applies to batting order 2 (center left/right), batting order 3 (center left/right), batting order 4 (center right/left), batting order 5 (center left/right), and batting order 6 (center right/left).

Further, for example, in 7) "F_Batting order 1 with RT4 and other maintenance replies" means that when the winning operation is performed, if the batting order 1 that is the pressing order of the correct answer, that is, the left middle and right order is stopped, the third transition trigger is given. Display "Bell"-"Watermelon"-"Red 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank" (REP07), which is a combination of symbols, move to RT4, and perform stop operation other than left middle right "Replay"- "Replay"-means to display "Replay" (REP01) and maintain RT1. The same applies to batting order 2 (center left/right), batting order 3 (center left/right), batting order 4 (center right/left), batting order 5 (center left/right), and batting order 6 (center right/left).

Furthermore, for example, 13) "F_ batting order 1 and RT5 and other maintenance replies" means that at the time of winning, if the batting order 1 which is the pressing order of the correct answer, that is, the stop operation in the left middle right order, is performed, the promotion trigger pattern Display the combination "Bell"-"Replay"-"Bell" (REP10), move to RT5, and perform a stop operation other than left-center-right, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" (REP01) Is displayed to indicate that RT1 is maintained. The same applies to batting order 2 (center left/right), batting order 3 (center left/right), batting order 4 (center right/left), batting order 5 (center left/right), and batting order 6 (center right/left).

The probability of transition from RT1 to either RT2 or RT3 is equal to the total probability of 1) to 6) above, which is 300×6/65536≈1/36.4. The probability of shifting from RT1 to RT4 is equal to any one of the above 7) to 13), which is 85/65536≈1/771. It is expected that the number of games that can be played with 50 lending medals of approximately 1,000 yen, for example, once in 36 games, will shift to any of RT2 to RT4. In this case, the probability of shifting to RT2 is high, but if the correct answer can be made in the pushing order, the process may shift to RT3, and rarely, the process may shift to RT4.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT2 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 8958
2) F_ Chance Rep 1 (REP04) is 4
3) F_Chance Lip 2 (REP06) is 4
4) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01-10) is 6
5) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01-10) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT2 is 8978, and the probability is about 1/7.3. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set. F_chance rep 1 and F_chance rep 2 are newly defined specific roles.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT3 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 4870
2) 2048 for F_ Chance Lip 1 (REP04)
3) 2048 for F_ Chance Lip 2 (REP06)
4) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01-10) is 6
5) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01-10) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT3 is 8978, and the probability is about 1/7.3. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT4 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 774
2) 4096 for F_Chance Lip 1 (REP04)
3) 4096 for F_Chance Lip 2 (REP06)
4) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01-10) is 6
5) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01-10) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT4 is 8978, and the probability is about 1/7.3. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT5 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 20273
2) F_Upper Lip (REP01+04) is 2450
3) F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+07+08) is 5000
4) F_Middle stage rip 2 (REP01+05) is 4750
5) F_Middle Lip 3 (REP01+06) is 4750
6) F_Lower Lip (REP01+03+04) is 2450
7) F_Bripping Lip (REP03) is 8970
8) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01-10) is 6
9) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01-10) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT5 is 48655, and the probability is about 1/1.35. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT6 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 5053
2) F_Upper Lip (REP01+04) is 60
3) F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+07+08) is 306
4) F_Middle stage rip 2 (REP01+05) is 8992
5) F_Middle stage rip 3 (REP01+06) is 11775
6) F_Lower stage REP (REP01+03+04) is 180
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT6 is 26366, and the probability is about 1/2.49. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

The breakdown and lottery values of the winning combinations of bonus combinations and small combinations of RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4, RT5 and RT6 are shown in No. 16 of FIG. 1-No. No. 38 of FIG. 61-No. Similar to 98. During a general game including RT2 to RT4, the following advantageous state transition triggers for weak rare roles, etc., that shift from a non-advantageous state (normal zone of non-advantageous zone) that is not an advantageous state (advantageous zone) to an advantageous state (advantageous zone) The lottery mode of the winning combination is the same.

The transition from the normal section, which is the non-advantageous section, to the advantageous section is performed according to the aspect shown in FIG. In other words, by winning a weak rare role (“F_weak rare role A”, “F_weak rare role B”), which is one of the advantageous state transition triggers, at least 9 games from the next game, a high-precision 1 state is normally advantageous. Move to section. By winning a chance eye (“F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4”) that does not overlap with the bonus role, which is one of the advantageous state transition trigger roles, From the next game to at least 9 games, the game is shifted to the normal advantageous section of 2 highly accurate states.

Furthermore, by winning the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1”), which is one of the advantageous state transition triggers, for example, ART lottery with a winning probability of 8/256 is performed, and at the time of winning, the omen period is 9 to 16 games. After the lottery period is selected between the signs, it is decided to make it an advantageous section by ART via the normal advantage section called the main sign state, and at the time of non-win, it is the normal advantage section that has the high accuracy 3 state after the signage period lottery. Move to.

Furthermore, a winning combination of bonus combinations (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3”, and “F_BB4”) that does not overlap with the watermelon 2, which is one of the advantageous state transition trigger combinations, makes the winning probability 64/256, for example. ART lottery is performed, and at the time of winning, it is determined that it is an advantageous section by ART that is a line battle state following the line battle preparation state after the bonus state ends, and at the time of non-winning, at least from the next game after the bonus state ends. During the 32 games, the game is shifted to the normal advantageous section of 4 highly accurate states.

In short, it is based on the winning of a predetermined advantageous state transition trigger role that the lottery value does not change in RT0 to RT5 during the general game, that is, a weak rare role, a single chance, a bonus role excluding duplication with watermelon 1 and watermelon 2. Then, it is shifted to the normal advantageous section included in the advantageous section which is not the normal section.

In this modification, after the transition of the advantageous section including the normal advantageous section, the advantageous section by the ART can be determined from the normal advantageous section in accordance with the processing in the game in the normal advantageous section shown in FIG. , RT2, RT3, RT4, each RT state starts independently from the random number for internal lottery, based on the winning of F_chance rep 1 (REP04) or F_chance rep 2 (REP06), which is a predetermined specific combination. By a lottery process using, for example, a 1-byte random number (possible number 0-255, random number denominator 256) that is extracted when the lever 16 is operated, ART with a probability of a predetermined high probability of 256/256=1 (100%), for example. It is possible to determine the advantageous section. Further, when the ART is already decided, the number of ART sets, which is one set in several tens of games, can be stocked based on the winning of the specific winning combination.

At RT2, the lottery values of F_chance rep 1 (REP04) and F_chance rep 2 (REP06), which are specific roles, are 4 respectively, which is the lowest lowest value among RT2-4, which is usually advantageous before the transition to RT2. In the case of moving to the section or to the normal advantageous section after the transition of RT2, the advantageous section by ART may be determined based on the winning of the specific combination, but the probability is relatively low. When ART is already decided, the possibility of stocking the number of sets of ART based on the winning of a specific player is relatively low.

On the other hand, at RT3, the lottery values of F_chance rep 1 (REP04) and F_chance rep 2 (REP06), which are specific roles, are set to 2048, respectively, which are relatively high intermediate values among RT2 to RT4. When the normal advantageous zone is moved to the normal advantageous zone before or the RT3 is changed to the normal advantageous zone, the advantageous zone by the ART is relatively likely to be determined based on the winning of the specific winning combination. There is a relatively high possibility that the number of sets of ART will be stocked based on the winning of a specific combination when the ART has already been determined.

Also, at RT4, the lottery values of F_chance rep 1 (REP04) and F_chance rep 2 (REP06), which are specific roles, are set to 4096 respectively, which is the highest maximum value among RT2 to RT4, and before the transition to RT4. When the game shifts to the normal advantageous zone or after the RT4 shifts to the normal advantageous zone, the advantageous zone by ART is most likely to be determined based on the winning of the specific winning combination. If ART has already been decided, it is most likely to stock the number of sets of ART based on the winning of a specific winning combination.

As described above, one replay time RT2 and another one replay time RT3 or RT4 have different lottery values of F_chance rep 1 (REP04) and F_chance rep 2 (REP06), which are specific roles, which is not advantageous. The lottery mode for executing the process related to the instruction function during the advantageous state (in the advantageous zone) that is not executed in the state (the normal zone of the non-advantageous zone) is different, and the advantageous zone may be determined by ART. There is a difference between high and low, and it is assumed that an advantage and disadvantage will occur in the expected value that increases the chance of a game to activate the indicating function. More specifically, in the order of RT2<RT3<RT4, the performance regarding the operation of the indicating function is increased, RT2 functions as a low expectation RT of ART, RT3 functions as a chance RT of ART, and RT4 functions as a large chance RT of ART. To do. Even in RT2 having a low expectation RT, ART can be determined based on the winning of a specific winning combination, and thus it is more advantageous than RT0 and RT1. Therefore, the game at which replay time of RT0, RT1, RT2 to RT4 is of interest to the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced even before the advantageous state is generated by the ART.

If you move to RT3, which is a chance RT, or RT4, which is a big chance RT, even if you have not transitioned to the normal advantage section at the time of transition, you can play a weak rare role or a single chance between 10 games where RT3 or RT4 can continue. Based on the winning of the watermelon 1, after moving to the normal advantageous section while maintaining RT3 or RT4, if the player can win the specific role F_chance rep 1 (REP04) or F_chance rep 2 (REP06), ART is possible. become.

Further, when the normal advantageous section is moved to at the time of the transition of RT3 or RT4, the special combination F_chance rep 1 (REP04) is made before the normal advantageous section is completed during 10 games in which RT3 or RT4 can be continued. ) Or F_ Chance Rep 2 (REP06) can be won, ART becomes possible.

Therefore, after shifting to RT3 or RT4, the player can hit the start lever with passion and can create a hitting point even in the game state before the ART is determined. Even in RT1 before the transition to RT3 or RT4, expecting the winning of the role that can be expected in the transition to RT3 or RT4, and wishing "Go to chance RT or big chance RT!", you can hit the start lever, You can create hits before the transition of RT3 or RT4.

It should be noted that both the transition to RT3 and the transition to RT4 are made possible when the correct answer is made in the pressing sequence of 6 choices of batting order 1 to 6, so that each stop button 17L, Corresponding to the upper position of 17C and 17R, a slanting production such as "Choose!????" is performed. In this case, if the normal advantageous section has already been shifted to RT0 or RT1, the correct batting order to be transferred to RT3 and the correct batting order to be transferred to RT4 are notified as, for example, "1, 2, 3". May be.

RT3 or RT4 has a higher probability of occurrence of an advantageous state due to ART than RT2, and conversely, RT2 has a lower probability of occurrence of advantageous state due to ART than RT3 or RT4, but is based on the winning of a specific player at RT2. When the ART is determined based on the winning combination of RT3 or RT4, a long-term ART with a larger number of continuous games or set stocks can be generated than when the ART is determined based on the winning of the specific combination.

In this case, the player is not disappointed even when the game shifts to RT2, and if the ART is determined with a low probability, the benefit of the long-term ART may be enjoyed, so that a thrilling game situation or the like can be created. ..

In addition, although there are three RT states RT2, RT3, and RT4 that enable ART based on the winning of the specific winning combination, instead of this, two types may be used, or four or more types may be used. As for the combination of the transition trigger symbols to RT2 to RT4, those relating to the re-play may be used as well as those relating to the small winning combination. Further, when RT2 to RT4 are configured with a finite replay time, the number of sustainable games is 10 games (10 game cycles) in common, but the number of sustainable games may be 10 games or less or more than 10. However, the cycle may be changed depending on the RT state, for example, RT2 has 15 games, RT3 has 20 games, and RT4 has 25 games. Further, the specific combination may be a re-game combination (F_chance rep 1 (REP04), F_chance rep 2 (REP06)), or a small combination or a bonus combination. Furthermore, the trigger for determining the ART during the advantageous state (during the advantageous section) is not limited to the winning of the specific winning combination, and may be the display of the specific winning combination, or the continuous winning or continuous display of a predetermined winning combination, and the game history of a predetermined range. The ART may be determined based on the game history such as the number of times of winning and the number of times of display within.

In addition, when RT2 to RT4 are configured with infinite replay time, a combination of transition timing symbols to RT1 may be added in addition to the bell spilled pattern, and a combination of falling timing symbols defined separately may be added, or RT2 to RT4. Addition of a combination of transition trigger symbols that are separately defined to enable the transition between each other, promotion and/or fall between RT2 of low expectation RT, RT3 of chance RT, and RT4 of large chance RT. May be enabled. Further, a part of RT2 to RT4 may be a finite replay time and the rest may be an infinite replay time. Furthermore, even if all or part of RT2 to RT4 is configured with a finite replay time, or if all or part of RT2 to RT4 is configured with infinite replay time, each replay probability is positively different in height. For example, RT2 has a higher replay probability than RT3 and RT4, but it is also possible to lower the winning probability of ART.

In this modification, after the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 have been operated, the operation is returned to RT0, but the lottery mode of the re-play is different from RT0, RT1 to RT6, and the result of the game of a predetermined number of times, for example, 32 times is obtained. It is also possible to shift to a finite RT state such as RT7 which returns to RT0 at this time, and to win a specific winning combination (F_chance rep 1 (REP04), F_chance rep 2 (REP06), etc.) at this RT7. In this case, during the ART or when the ART is determined, there is a high possibility that one or more sets of ART will be determined during the 32 games after winning the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 and finishing the operation. It is also possible to create a situation of intense heat that can significantly enhance the enjoyment of the game when a specific combination is won at RT7. In this modification, the transition from RT1 to RT2 to 5 is made, but the transition from RT0 to RT2 to 5 may be made. In this modification, the advantageous state control means is provided on the program of the main CPU 101, but it may be provided on the program of the sub CPU 201.

In this modification, the state indicator (section indicator) that clearly indicates the advantageous section is turned on by shifting to the normal advantageous section, but the state indicator may be turned on from the start of the ART game. In any case, according to this modification, it is possible to increase the player's expectation throughout the game without making the lighting state of the status indicator feel like a hindrance.

[Reduction of data by symbol combination management method] Modified Example In the modified example as well, similar to the above embodiment, the variable display of symbols is started based on the player's start operation, and the internal winning combination and the player's stop operation are performed. Based on this, the variable display of the symbols is stopped and the result of one game is derived. Here, as a result of one game, payout of medals, operation of re-play, operation of bonus, lottery mode of re-play (breakdown of re-play combination and/or lottery value) transition to different replay time, It includes the transition between the normal section and the advantageous section, and the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player.

In this modification, in the symbol arrangement table of FIG. 15, the left reel 3L is not changed, but the symbol number 5 "cherry 1" of the middle reel 3C is "cherry 2", and the symbol number 13 of the right reel 3R is " "Cherry 1" is changed to "Cherry 2". “Cherry 1” and “cherry 2” correspond to different symbols A and B having similar appearances.

Further, in the symbol combination table of FIG. 19, a combination of symbols of the RT3 transition (S_RT3 transition) "left symbol"-"middle symbol"-"right symbol",
"Cherry 1"-"Cherry 1/Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1/Cherry 2"
"Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1"-"Cherry 1/Cherry 2",
It has been changed to "cherry 2"-"cherry 2"-"cherry 1".
“Cherry 1/cherry 2” means cherry 1 or cherry 2, in short, either cherry 1 or cherry 2.

Further, in the symbol combination table of FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, "cherry 1" in the middle reel and right reel columns is changed to "cherry 1/cherry 2", and a new replay game is performed in FIG. As a role, S_RT6 plunge lip (REP11) corresponding to the combination of the symbols of "cherry 2"-"cherry 2"-"cherry 2" and S_RT2 return lip (corresponding to "watermelon"-"replay"-"watermelon") REP12) is defined.

As shown in FIG. 106, from the high-accuracy replay time RT2 in which the assist replay time ART is performed, the lottery mode of the replay game is displayed by the display of the combination of the symbols “cherry 2”-“cherry 2”-“cherry 2” of the REP 11. Although it is different from RT2, it is also moved to RT6 which has the same high-accuracy replay time, and at this RT6, BAR 12 is displayed until the combination of symbols of “watermelon”-“replay”-“watermelon” is displayed, and BAR is set up until returning to RT2. By displaying the REP (REP06), the number of continuous games of ART can be added for a plurality of times, and RT6 is added to function as a specialized zone.

In this modified example, in the column of RT2 in FIG. The lottery value of the F_middle tier 1 of 56 is changed to 3000, and the newly defined F_RT6 rush rep (REP01+REP04+REP11) is randomly selected with the lottery value of 2000.

Further, an RT6 lottery table is additionally defined. In this RT6 lottery table, No. 1 in FIG. 0 to 51, 55, 59, 60 are the same as RT2, and No. 52-54 and 56-58 are changed as follows. In the lottery table of RT6, No. 7 in FIG. The lottery values corresponding to 61 to 98 are the same as RT2.

In the lottery table of RT6, No. 6 in FIG. Instead of the F_RT2 replay 1 of 52, the F_RT6 replay 1 (REP02+REP12) is randomly selected with a lottery value of 2500. When winning the replay 1 during F_RT6, if the left first stop that stops the left reel 3L first is displayed, REP02 is displayed and RT6 is maintained. If it is other than the left first stop, REP12 is displayed and RT2 is returned to.

In the lottery table of RT6, No. 6 in FIG. Instead of the F_RT2 replay 2 of 53, the F_RT6 replay 2 (REP02+REP03+REP12) is randomly selected with the lottery value 2500. F_RT6 When the middle replay 2 is won, if the first stop of the middle reel 3C is stopped first, REP02 is displayed and RT6 is maintained; otherwise, REP12 is displayed and the process returns to RT2.

In the lottery table of RT6, No. 6 in FIG. Instead of the F_RT2 replay 3 of 54, the F_RT6 replay 3 (REP02+REP03+REP04+REP12) is randomly selected with a lottery value of 2500. At the time of winning the replay 3 during F_RT6, if the right first stop that stops the right reel 3R first is displayed, REP02 is displayed and RT6 is maintained, otherwise REP12 is displayed and the process returns to RT2.

In the lottery table of RT6, No. 6 in FIG. The lottery value of the F_middle stage rep 1 of 56 (REP01+REP07+REP08) is changed from 5000 to 0, and the F_middle stage rip 1 is not randomly determined. This is to avoid the risk of falling to RT1 due to the display of REP08.

In the lottery table of RT6, No. 6 in FIG. The lottery value of 57 F_middle stage rip 2 (REP01+REP05) is changed from 0 to 2000. When the F_middle stage rip 2 is won, if the right first stop that stops the right reel 3R first is displayed, fake REP05 is displayed, and if it is other than the right first stop, REP01 is displayed. On the display device 11 on the sub side, a navigation of "Aim for BAR!" is issued with an arrow pointing from right to left, and expectations for bar alignment are provided. However, it is not added to the fake lip display.

In the lottery table of RT6, No. 6 in FIG. The lottery value of the F_middle stage rip 3 (REP01+REP06) of 58 is changed from 0 to 9000. When the F_middle stage rip 3 is won, in the case of the right first stop or the middle first stop that stops the right reel 3R or the middle reel 3C first, the bar alignment REP06 is displayed, and if the left first stop is displayed, REP01 is displayed. On the display device 11 on the sub side, a navigation of "Aim for BAR!" is issued with an arrow pointing from right to left, and expectations for bar alignment are provided. Including the case where the BAR symbols are not necessarily aligned, at the time of winning the F_middle rip 3, a predetermined number of games, for example, the number of continuous games of ART for 10 games is determined to be added, and the finger is released from the last operated stop button Third release After that, "+10G" or the like is displayed on the display device 11 on the sub side. The number of games to be added may be randomly selected from 5G, 10G, 20G, 50G, 100G and the like.

From the high-accuracy replay time RT2, when any one of the F_chance eye A1 to F_chance eye A4 and the F_chance eye B1 to F_chance eye B4 is won, a predetermined display probability, for example, a probability of 3/4 at the time of the third stop operation By this, without displaying any chance role (one role) of NML14 to 30, "cherry 1"-"cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1/cherry 2", "cherry 2" of the RT3 transition. Any one of "cherry 1"-"cherry 1/cherry 2", "cherry 2"-"cherry 2"-"cherry 1" is displayed. In this case, there is no payout of medals as a result of one game, and the process proceeds to RT3.

From the high-accuracy replay time RT2, when winning the F_RT6 rush rip, the "cherry 2" is stopped at a timing when the "cherry 2" can be pulled in by up to 4 frames, using the relatively easy-to-see "BAR" symbol on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R as a guide. If you do, display "Cherry 2"-"Cherry 2"-"Cherry 2" (REP11), which is the combination of the triggers for the transition to RT6, and the re-game is activated as a result of one game, The next game moves to RT6. During the ART, when the F_RT6 rush rip is won, a navigation such as "Aim for BAR!" is displayed on the sub display device 11.

By the way, conventionally, in the prize search process or the RT check process after the result of one game in which the reel stop control process is completed in RT2 is derived, the "cherry 1"-"cherry 1/cherry" of the transition to RT3. 2”-“cherry 1/cherry 2”, “cherry 2”-“cherry 1”-“cherry 1/cherry 2”, “cherry 2”-“cherry 2”-“cherry 1”, No medals are paid out, and the game is transferred to RT3, and when the combination of the triggers for the transfer to RT6, "cherry 2"-"cherry 2"-"cherry 2", is determined, the re-game is activated, and the game is transferred to RT6. Processing will be performed.

However, in this conventional determination, a total of four types of determination constants or determination factors, that is, three types that are transferred to RT3 and one type that is transferred to RT6, are required. Data of a predetermined capacity used to distinguish the symbol combination from others, for example, left reel/middle reel/right reel constituting the symbol combination as shown in the column of "data" of the display combination of FIGS. Which is distinguished from the combination of other symbols defined in one storage area by combining each constituent symbol of “/” (or), any of 00000001000000100000000101000000000000000000100001,01000000,10000000 If one byte data is used for identification, it is necessary to allocate four types out of eight types of 00000001 to 10000000, which requires 4 bytes as the data of the determination constant, and the determination process becomes complicated and the processing step The number also increases.

Therefore, in this modified example, the symbols of the first group having a combination of a plurality of symbols for giving a predetermined profit to the player, for example, “no payout of medals, move to RT3”, by the result of one game Combination of "cherry 1"-"cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1/cherry 2", "cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-"cherry 1/cherry 2", "cherry 2"-"cherry 2" -"Cherry 1" and a combination of symbols different from the combination of symbols included in the first group and less than the combination of symbols included in the first group, and the combination of symbols in the first group is displayed A profit different from the profit to be given, for example, a combination of symbols “cherry 2”-“cherry 2”-“cherry 2” of the second group, which gives a profit of “re-game is activated and next game shifts to RT6”. Having a combination of symbols in the virtual group, which is a combination of the symbols in the first group and the symbols in the second group, "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1/" "Cherry 2" is defined by combining the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel with "/" (or), and corresponding to the combination of the symbols of the defined virtual group, From the eight types of 1-byte data of 00000001 to 10000000 that distinguish the symbol combinations in the storage area, one specific 1-byte data is assigned, and the assigned 1-byte data identifies the symbol combination of the virtual group. I have decided. If there is a free space of 1-byte data in one storage area, 1-byte data that identifies the combination of symbols of the virtual group is assigned to that free space, and if there is no free space in the one storage area, a virtual storage area is created in the new storage area. 1-byte data that specifies the combination of the groove patterns will be assigned.

Then, in the process of determining the symbol combination of the first group and the second group, after determining whether or not the symbol combination of the second group is "cherry 2"-"cherry 2"-"cherry 2", the virtual It is possible to determine whether or not the combination of the symbols of the group is "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1/cherry 2".

When it is determined that the combination of the symbols of the second group is "cherry 2"-"cherry 2"-"cherry 2" in the first determination, it is determined that the combination of the symbols of the second group.

After it is determined in the first determination that it is not a combination of symbols in the second group, the combination of symbols in the virtual group is "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1/cherry 2". When judged, "cherry 1"-"cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1/cherry 2", "cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-"cherry 1/cherry 2", "cherry 2"-" It is determined that it is a combination of symbols of the first group of "cherry 2"-"cherry 1".

After it is determined that the combination of the symbols of the second group is not determined in the first determination, if it is determined that it is not the combination of the symbols of the virtual group, it is determined that it is not the combination of the symbols of the first group.

Accordingly, the determination constants are the symbol combination “cherry 2”-“cherry 2”-“cherry 2” of the second group, and the symbol combination “cherry 1/cherry 2”-“cherry 1/cherry 2” of the virtual group. "-"Cherry 1/Cherry 2" is sufficient, and it can be reduced to 2 bytes. Moreover, the number of steps in the determination process can be reduced. Therefore, while the program capacity and/or the data capacity required for the determination process can be reduced, it is possible to determine whether the combination of the symbols of the second group or the combination of the symbols of the first group.

In RT2, when the combination of the symbols of the second group “cherry 2”-“cherry 2”-“cherry 2” is determined, the profit of “the re-game is activated and the next game shifts to RT6” is determined. Therefore, it is not necessary to determine the combination of symbols in the first group. Therefore, when it is determined by the first determination that the combination of symbols in the second group is determined, it is not determined whether or not the combination of symbols in the virtual group. Therefore, the program capacity and/or the data capacity required for the determination process can be further reduced.

In this modified example, the additional specialized zone of RT6 is not provided, and the symbol combination "cherry 2"-"cherry 2"-"cherry 2" of the second group is a symbol combination which is desired to be excluded from the symbol combination of the virtual group. Can be positioned as

Then, a combination of symbols of the first group, which gives a profit of "no medals payout, transfer to RT3" "cherry 1"-"cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1/cherry 2", "cherry 2" In the process of determining "-cherry 1"-"cherry 1/cherry 2", "cherry 2"-"cherry 2"-"cherry 1", it is determined whether the combination of the symbols of the second group is second. After it is determined that it is not a combination of symbols in the group, it may be determined whether or not it is a combination of symbols in the virtual group.

In this case, after it is determined in the first determination that it is not a combination of symbols in the second group, a combination of symbols in the virtual group "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1/cherry 2" If it is determined that "cherry 1"-"cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1/cherry 2", "cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-"cherry 1/cherry 2", "cherry 2" -"Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1" is determined to be a combination of symbols in the first group, and it is determined in the first determination that it is not a combination of symbols in the second group, and then a combination of symbols in the virtual group When it is determined that it is not, it is determined that it is not the combination of the symbols of the first group.

In this case as well, the determination constants are the combination “cherry 2”-“cherry 2”-“cherry 2” of the symbols of the second group to be excluded, and the combination “cherry 1/cherry 2”-“cherry” of the symbols of the virtual group. Two types of "1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1/cherry 2" are sufficient, and can be reduced to 2 bytes. Moreover, the number of steps in the determination process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not it is a combination of symbols of the first group while reducing the program capacity and/or the data capacity required for the determination process.

This modification is applied to a combination of symbols related to the transition of the replay time, but in addition to this, it may be applied to one in which the payout number of medals is different. For example, different first symbol A (bell 1) and second symbol B (bell 2) such as bell 1 and bell 2 are arranged on the left, middle, and right reels, and "left symbol-middle symbol-right" "A-A-A", "A-A-B", "A-B-A", "A-B-B", "B-A-A", "B-A-" as a combination of "designs" "B", "BBA" 9 kinds of payouts of 9 medals corresponding to the combination of the symbols of the 1st group of the 1st group, and the 1st 2nd group of the "BBB" If there is an eight-role combination that pays out eight medals corresponding to the combination of symbols, first determine whether or not it is “BBB”, and then the virtual group “A/B-A/B- A/B” is determined. Also in this case, it is possible to favorably determine whether or not the winning combination is 9 or 8 while the program capacity and/or the data capacity required for the determination process can be reduced.

[Priority Ordering Incorporating New Concept Regarding Symbol Pull-In] Modified Example Also in the modified example, a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols are rotated, and the winning that is won by the internal lottery is carried out. The reel stop control means for stopping the spinning reel based on the combination and the operation of the corresponding stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is provided (see FIGS. 67 and 70 to 72).

As shown in FIG. 67, before the stop operation of one of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is performed, 1-byte attraction-in priority data is assigned to all the symbols on the unstopped reels (S624 to S631). That is, before the first stop operation, the attraction priority data is initially stored for the symbols of all 20 frames of all reels according to the internal winning combination. Before the second stop operation, the drawing priority data is rewritten for the symbols of all 20 frames of the two reels that are rotating in accordance with the outcome of the first stop. Before the third stop operation, the drawing priority order data is rewritten according to the result of the second stop for the symbol of 20 frames of one spinning reel.

The attraction-in priority data is, of the symbol combinations included in the internal winning combination, priority is given to the symbol corresponding to the symbol combination with the largest number of medals to be paid out, or the same game result (payout, re-game). Priority, the number of symbols corresponding to the combination of symbols with the largest number of winning flags that are activated) is given priority, or the winning range that can be won by internal lottery (total lottery value on the internal lottery table) The symbols corresponding to the combination of symbols having the largest value are assigned in accordance with the range priority of preferentially drawing in. For example, 03H is assigned to the symbol with the highest priority, 01H or the like is assigned to the symbol with the lowest priority, and 00H is assigned to the symbol (kicking symbol) that is prohibited from being stopped because the non-winning combination is completed. ..

At the time of pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, for example, the symbol one above the symbol that is passing the stop reference position defined in the middle line is set as the symbol of the 0th frame that can be stopped by sliding less than 1 frame, and this 0 For the data of 5 frames to be searched for 0 to 4 frames including the pattern of the frame, the number of temporary sliding frames set as a starting point is set according to the internal winning combination and the first stop button number pressed. If, for example, the number of temporary sliding frames is 2, the maximum value searching process is performed according to a predetermined order of the second frame, the third frame, the fourth frame, the zero frame, and the first frame. The maximum value of the symbols detected first from the starting point is determined as a stop symbol, one of 0 to 4 frame slides is selected based on the determined stop symbol, and the rotation of the reel is stopped at the selected number of slide symbols ( 72, such as S719). As a result, the determined stop symbol is stopped in the middle stage.

In this modified example, stop control according to the number of sheets priority, stop control according to the number of pieces priority, and stop control according to the range priority are selected and executed according to the gaming state and the internal winning combination. Specifically, during the general game of RT0 to RT4 of FIG. 13, the stop control according to the number of sheets priority and the stop control according to the number of pieces of priority are used properly, and during the inter-flag state of RT5, the stop control according to the number of sheets of priority and the number of pieces of priority are used. And the stop control according to the range priority, and the stop control according to the number of sheets priority is used during the bonus states of BB1 to BB4.

In this modification, the NML 30 is assigned to each of the overlapping winning target combinations of “F_chance eye B1”, “F_chance eye B2”, “F_chance eye B3”, and “F_chance eye B4” in FIGS. 16 and 17. One (S_chance control) combination will be added. That is, for example, in FIG. “F_BB1+F_chance eye B1” of 6 is BB01+NML14+18+26+30.

In the normal game of RT0 to RT4, or in the state between flags of RT5, No. of FIG. If you win a push order small win of any of "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_lower right bell 2" of 77-98, when the correct push order is obtained, 8 medals are given by the stop control according to the priority of the number. "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" of NML01 to be paid out is displayed, and when the pressing order is incorrect, the stop control according to the priority of the number is used to pay out one of the medals to be taken as the overlapping winning symmetry NML02 to 13 Is displayed with a predetermined display probability or is omitted.

During the general game of RT0 to RT4, No. 1 in FIG. The winning combination of one bonus combination and a plurality of re-playing combinations, or one bonus combination and a plurality of small combinations of “F_BB1+F_confirmed rep” to “F_BB4+F_chance B4” of 1 to 38 is won. Then, by the stop control according to the number priority, the re-game combination or the small combination which becomes a plurality of winning flags is displayed.

For example, when “F_BB1+F_chance eyes A1” (BB01+NML14+22+26+30) is won, when the second stop is completed in the order of left, middle, or middle, left, when one of the upper, middle, and lower effective lines is left, "Cherry 1/cherry 2" can be displayed for reels, and "cherry 1" can be displayed for medium reels. For the right reel, when the third stop is performed within the pulling range of the specific symbol "red 7" based on the tempai line in which "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-line up, the specific symbol "red 7" is tempered. Can be displayed on the line. Therefore, the easy-to-understand chance of the NML 14 of "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-specific symbol "red 7" can be displayed on one specific effective line.

When the second stop is completed in the order of middle, right, or right, middle, "cherry 1" can be displayed for the middle reel and for the right reel on any one of the upper, middle, and lower effective lines. "Cherry 1" can be displayed. For the left reel,-"Cherry 1"-"Cherry 1" lined up Tempe line as a reference, when the third stop is performed within the drawing range of the specific symbol "Red 7", the specific symbol "Red 7" is displayed on the Tempe line it can. Therefore, it is possible to display the easy-to-understand chance of the NML 26 of the specific symbol “red 7”-“cherry 1”-“cherry 1” on one specific effective line.

When the second stop is completed in the order of right and left, "Cherry 1" for the right reel and "Red 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank" above it can be displayed on the activated line, and for the left reel "Bell" can be displayed on the same line as "Red 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank" on the right. Regarding the middle reel, if you make a third stop in the pulling range of the specific symbol "red 7" based on the tempe line where "bell"-"red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank" are lined up, the specific symbol "red 7" Can be displayed on the tempai line. Therefore, an incomprehensible chance of the NML 22 of "bell"-specific symbol "red 7"-"red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank" can be displayed on one specific effective line.

When the second stop is completed in the order of left and right, the effective line is "cherry 1/cherry 2" for the left reel and one above it, "red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank" and one of them. "Watermelon" below can be displayed, and "Red 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank" can be displayed on the same line as "Watermelon" on the left symbol for the right reel. When the third stop is performed on the middle reel, "cherry 1" can be displayed on the lower line which is a tempai line in which "watermelon"-"red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank" are arranged. Therefore, it is possible to display a difficult-to-understand chance of the NML 30 of "watermelon"-"cherry 1"-"red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank" on the lower line which is one specific effective line.

When “F_BB1+F_chance A2” (BB01+NML15+23+27+30) is won, the specific symbol “red 7” is replaced with the specific symbol “blue 7”, NML14 is replaced with NML15, NML22 is replaced with NML23, and NML26 is replaced with NML27.

When “F_BB1+F_chance eye A3” (BB01+NML16+24+28+30) is won, the specific symbol “red 7” is replaced with the specific symbol “BAR”, NML14 is replaced with NML16, NML22 is replaced with NML24, and NML26 is replaced with NML28.

When "F_BB1+F_chance eyes A4" (BB01+NML17+25+29+30) is won, the specific symbol "red 7" is replaced with the specific symbol "blank", NML14 is replaced with NML17, NML22 is replaced with NML25, and NML26 is replaced with NML29.

In addition, when the second stop is completed in the order of “F_BB1+F_chance eye B1” (BB01+NML14+18+26+30), in the order of left, middle, or middle, left, when one of the upper, middle, and lower effective lines is left, "Cherry 1/cherry 2" can be displayed for reels, and "cherry 1" can be displayed for medium reels. For the right reel, when the third stop is performed within the pulling range of the specific symbol "red 7" based on the tempai line in which "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-line up, the specific symbol "red 7" is tempered. Can be displayed on the line. Therefore, the easy-to-understand chance of the NML 14 of "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-specific symbol "red 7" can be displayed on one specific effective line.

When the second stop is completed in the order of middle and right, "cherry 1" can be displayed for the middle reel and "cherry 1" for the right reel on any one of the upper, middle, and lower effective lines. it can. For the left reel,-"Cherry 1"-"Cherry 1" lined up Tempe line as a reference, when the third stop is performed within the drawing range of the specific symbol "Red 7", the specific symbol "Red 7" is displayed on the Tempe line it can. Therefore, it is possible to display the easy-to-understand chance of the NML 26 of the specific symbol “red 7”-“cherry 1”-“cherry 1” on one specific effective line.

When the second stop is completed in the order of right and middle, on the effective line, "Cherry 1" for the right reel and "Red 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank" above it and "2 above it" "Watermelon" can be displayed, and "Cherry 1" can be displayed on the same line as "Cherry 1" of the right symbol for the middle reel. For the left reel,-"Cherry 1"-"Cherry 1" lined up Tempe line as a reference, when the third stop is performed within the drawing range of the specific symbol "Red 7", the specific symbol "Red 7" is displayed on the Tempe line it can. Therefore, the easy-to-understand chance of the NML 26 of the specific symbol “red 7”-“cherry 1”-“cherry 1” can be displayed on the lower line which is one specific effective line.

When the second stop is completed in the order of right and left, on the effective line, "cherry 1" for the right reel and "red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank" above and "2 above" "Watermelon" can be displayed, and for the left reel, "Replay" can be displayed on the same line as "Watermelon" on the right symbol. Regarding the middle reel, if the third stop is performed within the pulling range of the specific symbol "red 7" based on the template line in which "Replay"-"watermelon" are lined up, the specific symbol "red 7" can be displayed on the temporary line. Therefore, it is possible to display an incomprehensible chance of the NML 18 of "replay"-specific symbol "red 7"-"watermelon" on the upper line which is one specific effective line.

When the second stop is completed in the order of left and right, the effective line is "cherry 1/cherry 2" for the left reel and one above it, "red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank" and one of them. "Watermelon" below can be displayed, and "Red 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank" can be displayed on the same line as "Watermelon" on the left symbol for the right reel. When the third stop is performed on the middle reel, "cherry 1" can be displayed on the lower line which is a tempai line in which "watermelon"-"red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank" are arranged. Therefore, it is possible to display a difficult-to-understand chance of the NML 30 of "watermelon"-"cherry 1"-"red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank" on the lower line which is one specific effective line.

When “F_BB1+F_chance B2” (BB01+NML15+19+27+30) is won, the specific symbol “red 7” is replaced with the specific symbol “blue 7”, NML14 is replaced with NML15, NML18 is replaced with NML19, and NML26 is replaced with NML27.

When “F_BB1+F_chance B3” (BB01+NML16+20+28+30) is won, the specific symbol “red 7” is replaced with the specific symbol “BAR”, NML14 is replaced with NML16, NML18 is replaced with NML20, and NML26 is replaced with NML28.

When “F_BB1+F_chance B4” (BB01+NML17+21+29+30) is won, the specific symbol “red 7” is replaced with the specific symbol “blank”, NML14 is replaced with NML17, NML18 is replaced with NML21, and NML26 is replaced with NML29.

As described above, during the general game of RT0 to RT4, for example, if “F_BB1+F_chance eye A1” to “F_BB1+F_chance eye B4” is won, an easy-to-understand chance eye such as NML14 or NML26 can be displayed, and the bonus chance BB1 is triggered by the chance eye. The player can be impressed appropriately and effectively as if he or she won.

In addition, during the general game of RT0 to RT4, even if the individual "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye B4" that does not overlap with the bonus combination is won, "F_BB1+F_chance eye A1" that overlaps with the bonus role- The same display result as when "F_BB1+F_chance eye B4" is won. However, when a single "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye B4" is won, it shifts to the normal advantageous section of the highly accurate 2 state as shown in FIG. 33, and moreover, the specific symbol at the time of the third stop. When "Red 7" or the like cannot be drawn in and is missed, the transition to S_RT3 in FIG. 19 is displayed, and the display of the transition to RT3 shifts to RT3 which is advantageous to the player. For this reason, during the general game of RT0 to RT4, even if a single chance is won, it is possible to display the easy-to-understand chance and at the same time, the RT3 transition is made to be easy to understand. Is extremely appropriate at.

On the other hand, during the inter-flag state of RT5, even if the easy-to-understand chance is displayed, the bonus combination relating to carry-over has been won in duplicate, so there is no transition to the high-precision 2 state of FIG. During the internal winning of the bonus combination, the transition to the RT state triggered by the display of a specific symbol combination (d-triggered symbol) cannot be performed, and therefore there is no transition to RT3. Therefore, displaying the easy-to-understand chance eyes or displaying the easy-to-understand chance eyes may rather confuse the player.

Therefore, in the inter-flag state of RT5, any one of the chance eyes of “F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4” is determined as the predetermined specific winning combination. At the time of winning, the display control is to be changed from the general game of RT0 to RT4 by the stop control according to the range priority.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, a combination of symbols corresponding to each of “F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4” is designated by an NML number. Sorting separately, the winning range that can be won by the internal lottery including other winning combinations including the same number as the sorted NML number, that is, the total lottery value on the internal lottery table is calculated. NML14 to NML1341, NML18 21 to 814, NMLs 22 to 25 are 527, NMLs 26 to 29 are 1341, and NML 30 is 2122. Therefore, NML30 is the largest at 2122.

For this reason, in the attraction-in priority data, since the symbol combination of NML30 is "watermelon"-"cherry 1"-"red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank", the symbol "watermelon" is applied to the left reel 3L. Correspondingly, the "watermelon" symbol corresponds to the middle symbol when the upper, middle, or lower effective line is displayed, and the middle reel 3C corresponds to the "cherry 1" symbol and "cherry". 1” symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, or lower effective line, and in the middle symbol, “Red 7”, “Blue 7”, “BAR”, “Blank” for the right reel 3R Corresponding to each symbol, 03H having the highest priority is initially assigned to the symbols in the middle row where these symbols are displayed on the upper, middle, or lower effective line. For other symbols, 01H, which has the lowest uniform priority, is initially assigned.

"Watermelon" design on the left reel 3L, "Cherry 1" design on the middle reel 3C, "Red 7", "Blue 7", "BAR", "Blank" designs on the right reel 3R are caused by a maximum of 4 frame slides. Since the display probability that can be pulled in is 1, regardless of the pressing order, and even if the stop operation is performed at any timing, there is always 03H in the search target 5 frames that result in 0 to 4 frame sliding, and the first stop After that, even after the second stop, at least one 03H initially assigned corresponding to these symbols survives. Since the number of effective lines is three, that is, the upper, middle, and lower lines, some of the initially allocated 03H may be rewritten to 01H after the first stop or the second stop, but at least one 03H remains without being rewritten.

In this way, when any of the "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" is won in the inter-flag state of RT5, the range priority is followed. By the stop control, "watermelon"-"cherry 1"-"red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank" relating to the NML 30 can be displayed on any one of the effective lines of the upper line, the middle line, and the lower line.

As a result, during the inter-flag state of RT5, the easy-to-understand chances of NML14, NML26, etc. are not displayed, so that there is no misunderstanding to the player that the player will shift to the high-precision 2 state, and the easy-to-understand chances. Since the unsuccessful eyes are not displayed, the player is not misunderstood to move to RT3.

In this modification, if there is another NML number that has the same winning range as the winning range 2122 of the NML 30, when the attraction priority data is initially assigned, 03H is assigned to the symbol corresponding to the NML 30, and the same winning range. If the symbol corresponding to the other NML number is assigned a low priority, for example, 01H, and if there are a plurality of winning combinations that can be won in the internal lottery among the combinations of symbols included in the internal winning combination, A symbol corresponding to a predetermined one symbol combination is preferentially stopped. Therefore, even when there are a plurality of winning combinations that can be won by the internal lottery and are large in the winning combination that is won by the internal lottery, the stop control according to the range priority can be performed.

In the present modification, the “F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and the “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4” are selected as the specific roles for performing the stop control according to the range priority. The internal winning combination may be selected as the specific winning combination, and the stop control according to the range priority may be performed. Further, the stop control according to the range priority is performed during the inter-flag state of RT5. However, the stop control according to the range priority is performed during the general game of RT0 to RT4 and the bonus state of BB1 to BB4. Good.

[RT Falling Navi] Modified Example Also in this modified example, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the start operation of the player, and the variable display of the symbol is stopped based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. Further, on the program of the main CPU 101, there is provided an advantageous state control means capable of producing an advantageous state including an advantageous section by the assist replay time ART which enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player. There is.

In this modification, the payout number of NML02 to 13 of FIG. 22 is changed to eight, which is the same as NML01. In addition, in FIG. The push order small wins of 77-98 are changed as follows. To reduce the expected value of the number of medals to be obtained when the wrong press order is won, the probability of displaying the right reel symbol is 1/4, which is one of NML02 to 05 related to the first group. , One from NML06 to 09 according to the second group in which the display probability of the middle reel symbol is 1/4, and one from NML10 to 13 in accordance with the third group in which the display probability of the left reel symbol is 1/4, It has been selected as a winning combination target of NML01 which is displayed at the time of pressing order correct answer.

No. The F_upper left bell 1 of 77 is set to NML01+02+06+10.
No. The F_upper left bell 2 of 78 is set to NML01+04+08+12.
No. The bell 1 in the F_upper row of 79 is set to NML01+02+06+11.
No. The bell 2 in the F_upper row of 80 is set to NML01+03+08+12.
No. The F_upper right/left bell 1 of 81 is set to NML01+02+07+10.
No. The F_upper right/left bell 2 of 82 is set to NML01+03+08+13.
No. The F_upper right middle bell 1 of 83 is set to NML01+02+08+10.
No. The F_upper right middle bell 2 of 84 is set to NML01+04+07+12.
No. The F_middle stage left bell 1 of 85 is set to NML01+02+06+12.
No. The F_middle stage left bell 2 of 86 is set to NML01+04+08+11.
No. The bell 1 in the F_ middle section of 87 is set to NML01+02+06+13.
No. The bell 2 in the F_middle stage of 88 is set to NML01+04+09+11.
No. The F_middle right and left bell 1 of 89 is set to NML01+02+08+12.
No. The F_middle right and left bell 2 of 90 is set to NML01+04+07+11.
No. The F_middle right bell 1 of 91 is set to NML01+02+08+11.
No. The right middle bell 2 of the F_ middle row of 92 is set to NML01+03+07+12.
No. Bell 1 in the F_ lower row of 93 is set to NML01+05+06+10.
No. Bell 2 in the F_ lower row of 94 is set to NML01+03+07+11.
No. The F_lower right and left bell 1 of 95 is set to NML01+05+06+13.
No. The F_lower right and left bell 2 of 96 is set to NML01+04+09+12.
No. F_lower right middle bell 1 of 97 is set to NML01+05+06+12.
No. The right middle bell 2 in the F_ lower row of 98 is set to NML01+04+08+13.

Therefore, when any one of the push order small wins is won, when the push order is correct, NML01 is won and eight medals are paid out, and when the push order is incorrectly answered, one of NML02 to 13 which is the object of duplicate win is selected. Win a prize with a display probability of 1/4 and pay out 8 medals.

During the advantageous section including the advantageous state due to the assist replay time ART that activates the instruction function, eight medals can be easily obtained by displaying the correct answer push order navigation on the sub-side display device 11. On the other hand, during the normal section that is not the advantageous section, since the correct answer push order navigation is not issued in principle, 8 medals can be acquired with a display probability of 1/4, or there is a gap with a display probability of 3/4 (payout). 0). Although the bell spills of "replay"-"watermelon"-"bell" are displayed at the time of disconnection, this modification does not show the transition to RT1.

In this modified example, instead of FIG. 13, as shown in FIG. 108, the lottery mode of the replay (the breakdown of the replay combination and/or the lottery value) is different on the program of the main CPU 101. RT0 to RT5, and replay time shifting means for shifting a plurality of replay time states (RT states) including a bonus state.

A) RT0
This RT0 is a state where the lottery mode of the re-game is not changed, and the re-game probability is a low probability (low rep) of 8978/65536≈1/7.3, for example.

B) RT1
This RT1 shifts from another RT state by displaying the combination of the first transition timing symbols, and the replay probability is, for example, a high probability (high lip) of about 1/1.35. The combination of the first transition trigger symbols is, for example, a combination of symbols of any of NML02 to 13.

C) RT2
This RT2 is shifted from another RT state by displaying the combination of the second transition trigger symbols, and the lottery mode of the replay is different from the RT1, but the replay probability is a high probability (high lip) that is not different from RT1. .. The combination of the second transition trigger symbols is, for example, a combination of symbols of NML01.

D) RT3
This RT3 is shifted from RT1 by displaying a combination of third transition timing symbols, and the lottery mode of the replay is different from RT1 and RT2, but the replay probability is high probability (high lip) that is not different from RT1 or RT2. There is. The combination of the third transition trigger symbols is, for example, one of the combinations of symbols relating to the operation of the replay, "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-"watermelon". It is the same as the combination of REP09 symbols in FIG. 21, but in the present modification, it is used as a combination of transition trigger symbols from RT1 to RT3.

From RT3, it is assumed that the transition to RT0 is made by displaying the combination of the fourth transition trigger symbols. The fourth transition trigger symbol combination is, for example, one of the symbol combinations relating to the operation of the replay, "red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank"-"replay"-"replay". It is the same as the combination of the REP08 symbols in FIG. 21, but in the present modification, it is used as the combination of the transition trigger symbols from RT3 to RT0.

E) RT4
This RT4 is moved from RT2 by displaying a combination of fifth transition trigger symbols, and the lottery mode of the replay is different from RT1 to RT3, but the replay probability is set as a high probability (high lip) that is not different from RT1 to RT3. There is. The fifth transition trigger symbol combination is, for example, one of the symbol combinations relating to the operation of the re-game, “bell”-“watermelon”-“red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank”. It is the same as the combination of the REP07 symbols in FIG. 21, but in this modification, it is used as the combination of the transition trigger symbols from RT2 to RT4.

In this modification, RT4 is mainly positioned as a highly accurate replay time for performing the assist replay time ART.

F) RT5
This RT5 is a combination of operating symbols for preferentially displaying a small winning combination or a re-playing combination subject to a double winning in the winning game, based on the winning of one of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 that is randomly selected during the general game of RT0 to RT4. Is not displayed, the bonus internal winning is carried over (during the inter-flag state) in which the winning flag of the bonus combination related to the winning that is transferred to the game subsequent to the winning game is carried over. The replay probability is, for example, a medium probability (medium rep) of about 1/2.49.

G) Bonus state This bonus state is started by displaying the combination of the operation symbols of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 related to the winning. The bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are configured by the accessory continuous operation device BB related to the first-class special character, and the first-class special character RB is always in operation during the operation of BB, and the RB operation during the BB operation. It becomes the inside game state. The replay probability is 0, and the deviation is 0, and any one of F_JAC1_1 to 6 and F_JAC2 shown in FIG. 18 is won. The operation of BB1 to BB4 ends when the upper limit of the number of medals for each upper limit is exceeded (the RB of the normal operation also ends), and returns to RT0.

The lottery values for each of the replay combinations of RT0 are as follows, for example.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 8966
2) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 09) is 6
3) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 09) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT0 is 8978, and the probability is about 1/7.3. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT1 are as follows, for example.
1) 48643 for F_RT3 transition rep (REP09)
2) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 09) is 6
3) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 09) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT1 is 48655, and the probability is about 1/1.35. The F_RT3 transition rep (REP09) serves as a specific fall trigger opportunity for displaying the combination of the third transition opportunity symbols for transition to RT3. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

The lottery value for each replay combination of RT2 is as follows, for example.
1) 48643 for F_RT4 transition rep (REP07)
2) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 09) is 6
3) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 09) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT2 is 48655, and the probability is about 1/1.35. The F_RT4 transition rep (REP07) serves as a predetermined transition trigger for displaying a combination of fifth transition trigger symbols for transition to RT4, and has the same winning probability as the specific fall trigger. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

The lottery value for each replay combination of RT3 is as follows, for example.
1) 48643 for F_RT0 transition rep (REP08)
2) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 09) is 6
3) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 09) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT2 is 48655, and the probability is about 1/1.35. The winning probability of the F_RT0 transition rep (REP08) is the same as that of the above-described specific fall trigger combination or predetermined transition combination combination, but may not be the same. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

The lottery value for each replay combination of RT4 is as follows, for example.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 16273
2) F_Upper Lip (REP01+04) is 2450
3) F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+07+08) is 5000
4) F_Middle stage rip 2 (REP01+05) is 9000
5) F_Middle stage rip 3 (REP01+06) is 4500
6) F_Lower Lip (REP01+03+04) is 2450
7) F_Bripping Lip (REP03) is 8970
8) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 09) is 6
9) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 09) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT4 is 48655, and the probability is about 1/1.35. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT5 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 5053
2) F_Upper Lip (REP01+04) is 60
3) F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+07+08) is 306
4) F_Middle stage rip 2 (REP01+05) is 8992
5) F_Middle stage rip 3 (REP01+06) is 11775
6) F_Lower stage REP (REP01+03+04) is 180
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT5 is 26366, and the probability is about 1/2.49. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

The breakdown and lottery values of the winning combinations for the bonus combinations and the small combinations of RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4 and RT5 are shown in No. 16 of FIG. 1-No. No. 38 of FIG. 61-No. Similar to 98. However, in this modified example, No. 1 in FIG. Corresponding symbol combinations for the 77-98 push order small winning combinations are changed as described above.

In this modified example, one of the push-order small wins is won during the normal section which is not the advantageous section, and the winning state of NML01 based on this winning makes the transition to the advantageous state of the temporary advantageous section. If you win any one of the pushing order small wins in the normal section, it will be uniformly moved to a temporary advantageous section, and if NML01 corresponding to the correct answer pressing order is won, the temporary advantageous section will be maintained and the incorrect pressing order will be maintained. When any of the corresponding overlapping winning target combinations NML02 to 13 wins or loses the prize, the temporary advantageous section may be immediately ended.

Further, the transition from the non-advanced section including the provisional advantageous section, that is, the normal section to the advantageous section is performed according to the aspect shown in FIG. That is, by winning a weak rare combination (“F_weak rare combination A”, “F_weak rare combination B”), a normal advantageous section of at least 9 games and a high accuracy 1 state is shifted from the next game. By winning the chances (“F_chances A1” to “F_chances A4” and “F_chances B1” to “F_chances B4”) that do not overlap with the bonus combination, high accuracy for at least 9 games from the next game. It shifts to the normal advantageous section of 2 states.

Furthermore, by winning the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1”), for example, ART lottery with a winning probability of 8/256 is performed, and at the time of winning, through a precursory period lottery that selects a predictive period from 9 to 16 games, It is determined that the advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous zone by ART is passed through the normal advantageous zone of the present omen state, and at the time of non-win, the normal advantageous zone of the high accuracy 3 state is made through lottery period omen.

Furthermore, by winning a bonus combination (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3” and “F_BB4”) that does not overlap with the watermelon 2, for example, an ART lottery with a winning probability of 64/256 is performed. After the end of the state, it is decided to set it as an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by the line battle state following the line battle preparation state by ART, and at the time of non-win, after the end of the bonus state, high for at least 32 games from the next game. It shifts to the normal advantageous section of the positive 4 state.

In short, it is usually advantageous from the normal section based on the winning of the predetermined winning combination in which the lottery value does not fluctuate in RT0 to RT4, which is a weak rare combination, a single chance, a bonus combination excluding duplication with watermelon 1 and watermelon 2. It shifts to an advantageous section called a section. However, since the provisional advantageous zone is included in the advantageous zone and is not the normal zone, the transition to the normal advantageous zone based on the winning of such a weak rare role is not made.

Further, after the transition to the normal advantageous zone, the advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous zone by the ART can be determined from the normal advantageous zone according to the game process in the normal advantageous zone shown in FIG. 34. If it is in the special advantageous zone, the advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous zone from the normal advantageous zone is not determined by the ART.

In the normal section, if you win any one of the push order small wins, or if you do not have the push order navigation, and you happen to get the correct answer in the push order, you can win NML01 and move to the temporary advantageous section by winning NML01. , "ML"-"Bell"-"Bell" related to NML01, the process shifts to RT2 in the highly accurate RT state.

This transition to RT2 is an unintended transition to the highly accurate RT state in the situation where ART is not determined. However, at RT2, or at RT4 to be transferred by winning the F_RT4 transfer lip that is randomly selected at RT2 with a high probability, when the player wins any of the pushing order small wins again, it is in the temporary advantageous interval, which is an advantageous interval. Therefore, although the navigation (correct answer navigation) that wins NML01 is not issued, the navigation (recommended navigation) that wins any one of NML02 to 13 that is the target of duplicate winning is to be issued.

The combination of the symbols of NML01 and the combinations of the symbols of NML02 to 13 which are the objects of the overlapping winnings can be displayed in such a relationship that when one is displayed in response to the player's stop operation, the other is not displayed, and the pushing order small win Functions as a specific transfer distribution role that allocates the transfer destination of the RT state. Here, the combination of the symbols of NML01 and the combination of the symbols of NML02 to 13 which are the object of the overlapping winning are only displayable in the relationship that when one is displayed, the other is not displayed, and either one is always displayed. It is not something that will be done. That is, it includes three modes in which only the symbol combination of NML01 is displayed, only the symbol combination of NML02 to 13 is displayed, and neither symbol combination is displayed.

Both the correct navigation that wins NML01 and the recommended navigation that wins any of NML02 to 13 pays out eight medals and shifts to RT1 or RT2 in the high-precision RT state in which both have the same replay probability. The profits given to will be the same.

As shown in the following example, the correct navigation and the recommended navigation for each push order small win correspond to the position of the stop button on the display device 11 on the sub side, "1-x-x" or "3 "Red 7"- 2-1” is displayed. "1-x-x" means that the first stop on the left side and after the second stop does not matter, and "3 "red 7"-2-1" means pressing the stop button in the order of right, middle, left, For the left reel, it means that you should aim for the "red 7" symbol.

F_Upper left bell 1; Correct navigation "1-x-x", Recommended navigation "3 "Red 7"-2-1"
F_upper left bell 2; correct navigation "1-x-x", recommended navigation "3 "BAR"-2-1"
F_upper middle bell 1; correct navigation "x-1-x", recommended navigation "1-2-3 "red 7""
F_upper middle bell 2; correct navigation "x-1-x", recommended navigation "1-3 "BAR"-2"
F_upper right/left bell 1; correct navigation “2-3-1”, recommended navigation “1-2-3 “red 7””
F_upper right/left bell 2; correct navigation “2-3-1”, recommended navigation “1-3 “BAR”-2”
F_upper right middle bell 1; correct answer navigation "3-2-1", recommended navigation "1-2-3 "red 7""
F_upper right middle bell 2; correct navigation "3-2-1", recommended navigation "1-2-3 "BAR""
F_ middle stage bell 1; correct navigation "1-x-x", recommended navigation "3 "BAR"-2-1"
F_ middle stage left bell 2; correct answer navigation "1-x-x", recommended navigation "2-3 "BAR"-1"
F_Middle-stage bell 1; Correct navigation "x-1-x", recommended navigation "1-2-3 "Red 7""
F_Middle-stage bell 2; Correct navigation "x-1-x", recommended navigation "1-2-3 "BAR""
F_ middle stage right/left bell 1; correct navigation “2-3-1”, recommended navigation “1-2-3 “red 7””
F_ middle stage right/left bell 2; correct navigation "2-3-1", recommended navigation "1-3 "BAR"-2"
F_ middle tier right middle bell 1; correct navigation “3-2-1”, recommended navigation “1-2-3 “red 7””
F_ middle stage right middle bell 2; correct answer navigation “3-2-1”, recommended navigation “1-2-3 “blue 7””
F_Lower middle bell 1; Correct answer navigator "x-1-x", Recommended navigator "3 "Red 7"-2-1"
F_lower middle bell 2; correct navigation "x-1-x", recommended navigation "1-2-3 "blue 7""
F_ lower row right left bell 1; correct navigation "2-3-1", recommended navigation "1-3 "red 7"-2"
F_ lower row right left bell 2; correct answer navigation "2-3-1", recommended navigation "1-2-3 "BAR""
F_Lower right middle bell 1; Correct navigation "3-2-1", Recommended navigation "1-3 "Red 7"-2"
F_ lower right bell 2; correct navigation “3-2-1”, recommended navigation “1-2-3 “BAR”

During the normal section, even if you unintentionally shift to RT2 in the high-precision RT state by displaying the combination of symbols of NML01, or shift to RT4 via RT2, the transition is made by winning NML01. In the advantageous zone, when one of the push order wins is won, a recommended navigation is issued, and among the overlapping win targets included in the push order wins related to the win, it is relatively easy to see when the third stop is made. , Or "BAR" or "Blue 7", you can win a specific one of the overlapping winning target combinations NML02 to 13 with a display probability of 1/4, and by displaying the combination of the symbols, RT2 or RT4 From RT to RT1 at an early stage.

The provisional advantageous section is supposed to be terminated on condition that the transition to RT1 has been made, and to return to the normal section. Therefore, if you do not win any of the overlapping winning target combinations NML02 to 13 against the recommended navigation, the provisional advantageous section continues, and the transition from the normal section to the normal advantageous section also starts from the normal advantageous section to ART. Therefore, it cannot be expected to move to the advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to properly encourage the player to follow the recommended navigation. The provisional advantageous section is also ended by winning the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4. This is because it will return to RT0 after the bonus state ends.

At RT1, since the F_RT3 transition rep (REP09) is randomly selected with a high probability, it is possible to make an early transition to RT3. At RT3, because the F_RT0 transition rep (REP08) is randomly selected, the RT0 is selected. It can be moved early. Therefore, even if the user shifts to the high-precision RT state unintentionally, it is possible to return to RT0 in the low-precision RT state within a relatively short period of time.

On the other hand, during ART or when ART has been determined, if you move to RT2 by displaying the combination of symbols related to NML01, at RT2 or RT4, you will get the correct navigation to win NML01, so move to RT1. Instead, RT2 or RT4 in the highly accurate RT state can be maintained.

In addition, during ART or when ART is determined, in RT2 or RT4, due to an operation error or the like, a stop operation is performed in a pressing order different from the correct pressing order by the correct navigation, and one of NML02 to 13 is selected. Even if the player wins the prize and shifts to RT1, it is possible to immediately return to RT2 by winning NML01 according to the correct answer navigation at the time of winning any one of the pushing order small wins at RT1, RT3, or RT0. During the ART or when the ART has been determined, since it is already in the advantageous section, it is not necessary to shift to the temporary advantageous section by winning the NML01.

As described above, in the present modified example, in the RT state in which the lottery mode of the replay is different, RT0 in the low-probability RT state in which the replay probability is relatively low, and RT1 and RT2 in the high-probability RT state in which the replay probability is relatively high. , RT3, RT4.

Then, in RT0 in the low-probability RT state, a combination of symbols of NML02 to 13 that causes the F_RT3 transition lip (REP09) of the specific fall trigger that causes the player to fall to RT0 via RT3 to be transferred to RT1 that is randomly selected, and RT2 The combination of the symbols of NML01 to be transferred to (1) is randomly selected when one is displayed in response to the player's stop operation and the other is not displayed.

Furthermore, RT2 is included in the high-precision RT state, and even in the high-precision RT state including RT2, the push order small role of the specific transition distribution role is randomly selected, and RT2 is set during the normal section before the occurrence of the advantageous state. When it is decided to move, the winning state of NML01 based on the winning of the push order small winning that displays the combination of the symbols of NML01 causes the advantageous state of the temporary advantageous section to be generated, and RT2 of the high-precision RT state including RT2 or When the player wins the push order small winning combination at RT4, the recommended navigation displaying the combination of symbols NML02 to 13 is displayed, and then the temporary advantageous section is ended at the time of shifting to RT1.

Further, when it is decided to shift to RT2 during the occurrence of the advantageous state including the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section by ART, when the push order small winning combination is won, the correct answer navigation for displaying the combination of the symbols of NML01 is issued.

As a result, even if the user shifts to RT2 in the high-precision RT state unintentionally during the normal section before the occurrence of the advantageous state, the advantageous state of the provisional advantageous section is generated, and in the high-precision RT state including RT2. When the player wins the small push order combination, the recommended navigation for shifting to RT1 is issued, and therefore, it is possible to promptly prompt the fall of RT0 from RT1 to RT3 in the inaccurate RT state. After issuing the recommended navigation, the transitional transition to RT1 ends the provisional advantage section, so the advantage section does not become longer than necessary, does not unnecessarily benefit the player, and is unnecessary for the player. There is no disadvantage to.

In addition, when the advantageous state corresponding to the normal advantageous zone or the advantageous zone due to the ART occurs, the shift to the RT2 occurs, and when it is appropriate to maintain the high-precision RT state, the high-precision RT state including the RT2 is pushed. When the normal small winning combination is won, the correct answer navigation is issued, so that it is possible to avoid falling into the low-precision RT state, and by operating the instruction function in the high-precision RT state, it is possible to appropriately benefit the player.

In particular, in the modified example, there is no difference in the profit obtained as a result of one game regardless of whether the symbol combination of NML01 is displayed or the symbol combination of NML02 to 13 is displayed, and the replay probability of RT1 is RT2. Based on the winning of the specific fall trigger F_RT3 transition rip from RT1 to RT3 with a high probability of tumbling to RT0, the same winning probability as RT_F3 transition rip from RT2 Based on the winning of the predetermined transition opportunity combination F_RT4 transition rip that is randomly selected, the process is shifted to RT4, and both RT3 and RT4 are in the highly accurate RT state.

Therefore, there is no difference in the profit obtained as a result of one game, regardless of whether the correct answer navigation is issued or the recommended navigation is issued, based on the winning of the push order small combination that functions as a specific transition distribution combination, and the transition There is no difference in the replay probability between the previous RT1 and RT2, and both the transition destination RT3 from RT1 and the transition destination RT4 from RT2 are both highly accurate RT states, so it is advantageous to issue any instruction. The disadvantage difference can be minimized and the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

Moreover, in the modified example, the specific transition distribution combination is related to the acquisition of the game medium having the same number of medals regardless of whether the combination of the symbols of NML01 is displayed or the combination of the symbols of NML02 to 13 is displayed. It is composed of a small role, Push order.

Therefore, the specific transition distribution combination can be randomly selected in each RT state with a predetermined probability that the probability does not change depending on the RT state. Regardless of the RT state, that is, the replay probability, the lottery value of the specific transition distribution combination is set to a predetermined value. It is easy to secure and it is easy to build an internal lottery table.

In the modified example, it is assumed that the rollers fall from RT1 to RT0 to RT0, but they may directly fall from RT1 to RT0. Further, in the modified example, RT2 and RT4 are separated, but by making the lottery mode of the replay game of RT2 similar to that of RT4, one highly accurate RT state may be set, and RT may be performed at RT2.

Furthermore, although the provisional advantageous section is ended on condition that the transition to RT1 is performed after issuing the recommended navigation, it may be ended immediately after issuing the recommended navigation. In this case, at RT0, RT3, and RT1, it is preferable to take a measure that is not profitable even if you disobey the recommended navigation, such as randomly drawing a chance replay that wins ART with high probability. Further, for the specific transition distribution combination, a small combination other than the push order small combination may be used, and not limited to the small combination, a re-game combination may be used. The advantageous state control means may be provided not only on the program of the main CPU 101 but also on the program of the sub CPU 201.

[System for eliminating ART preparation time] Modified example In this modified example, variable display of symbols is started based on the player's start operation, and variable display of symbols is based on the internal winning combination and the player's stop operation. To stop. Further, on the program of the main CPU 101, there is provided an advantageous state control means capable of producing an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by the assist replay time ART, which enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player. ing.

In this modified example, the effective line is only one line in the middle row, and the special special combination “F_special small combination” (NML41+42+43+44) that additionally wins the new combination of the next symbol combination and the number of payouts is additionally defined, and is generally defined. During the game, a predetermined probability within a range of a few fractions to a few tenths, for example, 10000/65536≈1/6.6 is won.
NML41; "Watermelon"-"Bell"-"Replay" 8 cards payout NML42; "Watermelon"-"Replay"-"Replay" 8 cards payout NML43; "Replay"-"Bell"-"Replay" 8 cards payout NML44; "Blank"-"Blank"-"Blank" 9 payouts

Each of the first roles of NML41, NML42, and NML43 has a relatively high display probability of the combination of the corresponding symbols, and the display probability is 1 so that the corresponding symbol can be pulled in by a maximum of four frame slips. On the other hand, the second role of NML44, the display probability of the combination of corresponding symbols is relatively low, there is only one "blank" of the corresponding symbol on each reel, display probability = 1/4 x 1/4 x 1 /4=1/64, which means that there is a possibility of dropping.

In the reel stop control process performed by the main CPU 101 in which the program is constructed assuming the game by the player, when the special special combination “F_special small combination” is won, the same combination of symbols included in this winning combination The number of winning flags to be the game result (8 payouts) is 3 and the stop control according to the number priority for preferentially drawing in the symbols corresponding to the symbol combinations NML41, NML42, NML43 is performed.

Therefore, in the game by the player, when the specific special combination “F_special small combination” is won, any one of the first combinations NML41, NML42, and NML43 is won, and eight medals are paid out. In this modification, the NML 41 is uniformly won, and "Watermelon"-"Bell"-"Replay" is always displayed. In this case, "bells" are arranged in a small mountain shape connecting the lower stage of the left reel, the middle stage of the middle reel, and the lower stage of the right reel.

On the other hand, in a predetermined simulation test performed under a specific condition that the maximum number of coins can be obtained without omission, unlike the game by the player, it is possible that the combination of symbols related to the second role with a low display probability is not displayed. Will be eliminated, and the NML 44, which has a maximum payout number of medals of 9, will always win. That is, the symbol combination “blank”-“blank”-“blank” is always displayed for the second role NML 41.

In this modified example, instead of FIG. 13, as shown in FIG. 109, the lottery mode of the re-game (the breakdown and/or lottery value of the re-game combination) on the program of the main CPU 101 is different) RT0, RT1, RT2, RT5, and replay time shifting means for shifting a plurality of replay time states (RT states) including a bonus state.

A) RT0
This RT0 is a state in which the lottery mode of the replay is not changed, that is, a non-replay time, and the replay probability is, for example, 8978/65536≈1/7.3, which is a low probability (low lip).

B) RT1
This RT1 is changed from RT0 by displaying a combination of special transition trigger symbols, and the lottery mode of the replay is different from RT0, but the replay probability is a low probability (low lip) that is not different from RT0.

The combination of special transition trigger symbols is "blank"-"blank"-"blank" corresponding to NML44 which is one of the overlapping winning combinations of the above-mentioned specific special combination "F_special small winning combination". Therefore, RT1 shifts only in a predetermined simulation test performed under a specific condition that the maximum number of sheets to be acquired can be obtained without omission.

C) RT2
This RT2 shifts from RT0 by displaying a combination of promotion trigger symbols, and the replay probability is, for example, a high probability (high lip) of about 1/1.7. RT2 of the present modification is a highly reliable replay time for playing the assist replay time ART.

The combination of promotion opportunity symbols is "watermelon"-"bell"-"replay" corresponding to NML41 which is one of the overlapping winning combinations of the above-mentioned specific special combination "F_special small combination". Therefore, RT2 shifts only in the game by the player.

D) RT5
This RT5 is a combination of operation symbols for preferentially displaying a small winning combination or a re-playing combination subject to a double winning in the winning game, based on the winning of one of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 that is randomly selected during the general game of RT0 to RT2. Is not displayed, it is during the bonus internal winning (in the state between the flags) in which the winning flag of the bonus combination related to the winning to be transferred to the game subsequent to the winning game is carried over. The replay probability is, for example, about 1/4 medium probability (medium rep).

E) Bonus state This bonus state is started by displaying the combination of the operation symbols of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 related to the winning. The bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are configured by the accessory continuous operation device BB related to the first-class special character, and the first-class special character RB is always in operation during the operation of BB, and the RB operation during the BB operation. It becomes the inside game state. The replay probability is 0 and the deviation is 0, and any one of F_JAC1_1 to 6 and F_JAC2 shown in FIG. 18 is won. However, in this modified example, “˜40” in FIG. 18 is “˜44”. During the operation of BB, even if NML44 is displayed, it does not shift to RT1. The operation of BB1 to BB4 ends when the upper limit of the number of medals for each upper limit is exceeded (the RB of the normal operation also ends), and returns to RT0.

The lottery values for each of the replay combinations of RT0 are as follows, for example.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 8966
2) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 09) is 6
3) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 09) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT0 is 8978, and the probability is about 1/7.3. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT1 are as follows, for example.
1) F_Maintenance Lip (REP02) is 8967
2) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 09) is 6
3) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 09) is 6
As described above, RT1 has F_maintenance rep (REP02) set to 8967, which is set to 1 larger than RT0, but there is no significant difference, and a special replay that shifts only in a simulation test that is a lottery mode of replay different from RT0 and RT2. Positioned in time. The total lottery value of the replay combination of RT1 is 8979, and the probability is about 1/7.3 which is almost the same as RT0. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT2 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 10273
2) F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+07+08) is 7450
3) F_Middle stage rip 2 (REP01+05) is 5975
4) F_Middle stage rip 3 (REP01+06) is 5975
5) F_Bullet Lip (REP03) is 8970
6) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01-10) is 6
7) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01-10) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT4 is 38655, and the probability is about 1/1.7. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set. In the present modification, the F_ball hit rep (REP03) is used as a trigger for the fall to RT0, and the fall transition is made to RT0 by the display of "Replay"-"Replay"-"Bell".

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT5 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 5053
2) 366 for F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+07+08)
3) F_Middle stage rip 2 (REP01+05) is 8992
4) F_Middle stage rip 3 (REP01+06) is 1955
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT5 is 16366, and the probability is about 1/4. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

The details of the winning combinations and the lottery values for the bonus combinations and the small combinations of RT0, RT1, RT2, and RT5 are shown in No. 16 of FIG. 1-No. No. 38 of FIG. 61-No. It is defined in accordance with 98. However, in this modification, since the effective line is one line in the middle stage, No. 75 and 76 are combined to form an F_common bell (NML01) with a lottery value of 1120, and No. 77 and 85 are combined to be the F_left bell 1 (NML01-03+06+07+10+11) with a lottery value of 1480, and the combined lottery value is assigned by combining the roles that were divided in the upper, middle, and lower stages into one. .. In addition, the new No. As 99, the specific special combination “F_special small combination” is added, and a lottery value of 1000 is assigned.

The transition from the normal section, which is the non-advantageous section, to the advantageous section is performed according to the aspect shown in FIG. That is, by winning a weak rare combination (“F_weak rare combination A”, “F_weak rare combination B”), a normal advantageous section of at least 9 games and a high accuracy 1 state is shifted from the next game. By winning the chances (“F_chances A1” to “F_chances A4” and “F_chances B1” to “F_chances B4”) that do not overlap with the bonus combination, high accuracy for at least 9 games from the next game. It shifts to the normal advantageous section of 2 states.

Furthermore, by winning the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1”), for example, ART lottery with a winning probability of 8/256 is performed, and at the time of winning, through a precursory period lottery that selects a predictive period from 9 to 16 games, It is determined to be an advantageous section by ART via the normal advantageous section of the present omen state, and when not winning, it is transferred to the normal advantageous section of the highly accurate 3 states via lottery period lottery.

Furthermore, by winning a bonus combination (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3” and “F_BB4”) that does not overlap with the watermelon 2, for example, an ART lottery with a winning probability of 64/256 is performed. After the end of the state, it is decided that it will be an advantageous section by ART called the line battle state following the line battle preparation state, and when not winning, after the end of the bonus state, at least 32 games from the next game, high accuracy 4 state normal Move to an advantageous zone.

In short, an advantageous section that is not a normal section, based on the winning of a predetermined combination that does not change the lottery value at RT0 to RT4, which is a weak rare combination, a single chance, a bonus combination excluding duplication with watermelon 1 and watermelon 2. Is shifted to the normal advantage section included in. Further, after the transition of the advantageous zone including the normal advantageous zone, the advantageous zone by ART can be determined from the normal advantageous zone in accordance with the processing in the game in the normal advantageous zone shown in FIG.

In the game by the player, when the special special combination “F_special small combination” is won at RT0, the NML 41 is won, and the display shifts to RT2 by displaying “watermelon”-“bell”-“replay”. In addition, at RT2, when “Replay”-“Replay”-“Bell” is displayed based on the winning of the F_ball hit rep (REP03), it is fallen to RT0. Furthermore, in RT0 and RT2, when the winning combinations BB1 to BB4 are won, the process shifts to RT5, and after the bonus state ends, the process returns to RT0.

Therefore, in the game played by the player, if the special special combination "F_special small combination" with a predetermined probability of 1/6.6 is won from RT0, it is possible to shift to the highly accurate replay time RT2 by winning the NML 41, and the assist replay time ART. The game can be played immediately without passing through the special replay time RT1. Therefore, it is possible to practically eliminate the period during the ART preparation conventionally required, and it is possible to greatly shorten the period from the determination of the winning of the ART to the start of the ART game.

On the other hand, in a predetermined simulation test performed under a specific condition that the maximum number of coins can be obtained without dropping out, when the special special combination "F_special small combination" is won at RT0, the NML44 is won and the "blank"- By displaying "blank"-"blank", the special replay time is shifted to RT1 and the high-accuracy replay time is shifted to RT2. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily perform a predetermined simulation test under a specific condition without considering the highly accurate replay time.

In addition, RT0, which is a low-probability replay time, is a non-replay time in which the lottery mode of the replay is not changed, and is a return destination after the end of the operation of the bonus hands BB1 to BB4, so that the RT game is being played. Even if the winning combinations BB1 to BB4 are won, the period during the ART preparation for returning from RT0, which is the return destination at the end of the operation, to RT2 can be greatly shortened.

In this modification, the specific special winning combination “F_special small winning combination” is composed of a small winning combination having a medal payout, but may be a winning combination of replay. The advantageous state control means may be provided not only on the program of the main CPU 101 but also on the program of the sub CPU 201.

[ART winning probability variation during non-advantageous section] Modified Example In this modified example, the variation display of the symbol is started based on the player's start operation, and the symbol variation based on the internal winning combination and the player's stop operation. Stop the display. Further, on the program of the main CPU 101, there is provided an advantageous state control means capable of producing an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by the assist replay time ART, which enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player. ing.

In this modified example, a predetermined bonus combination MB1 including, for example, a combination continuous operation device for a second-class special accessory is mounted instead of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 in FIG. This bonus combination MB1 does not overlap with other small combinations or re-gaming combinations, for example, with a predetermined probability within the range of several tenths to several hundreds, for example, 328/65536≈1/200. It is possible to win by itself. The winning probability of MB1 is set to have no setting difference that does not change depending on the setting. However, the higher the setting, the higher the winning probability may be.

The combination of operating symbols of this bonus combination MB1 (“left symbol”-“middle symbol”-“right symbol”) is, for example, “replay”-“bell”-“bell”, and the display probability is 1 (maximum 4 frames. It is possible to pull in the relevant pattern to the effective line by sliding). Therefore, when MB1 is won, a combination of operation symbols can be displayed in the winning game, and the next game is in a game state during MB1 operation. It is assumed that the second class special accessory CB is always activated during the operation of MB1, and all the small winning combinations accompanied by the payout of medals are in a winning state during the operation of CB.

During CB operation during MB1 operation, the specified number of inserted coins is changed to one (multiplied by one), the payout number of all small wins is changed to 15, and the maximum number of sliding frames is limited to one frame within 75 ms. The reel to be stopped is, for example, the left reel 3L. The middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R maintain the maximum four-frame sliding, and the effective lines maintain the upper, middle, and lower three lines. When the left first stop is performed to stop the left reel 3L first, any of the small wins of NML01 to NML35 shown in FIG. 22 can be displayed, and 15 medals, which is the upper limit payout number of one game, are paid out.

It should be noted that the prescribed number of coins to be inserted may be maintained at three (multiplying three), and the number of coins to be paid out may be the same as in the normal game. In this case, in order to display the small payout of 8 coins on two lines of the upper, middle, and lower three lines and obtain the maximum payout of 15 coins, it is necessary to additionally define a special small prize during CB operation. preferable.

The operation of the bonus combination MB1 ends when the number of medals acquired from the start of operation exceeds a predetermined upper limit, for example, 210, that is, 211 or more, and the operation of CB ends when the operation of MB1 ends. Therefore, the operation of MB1 is completed in almost 15 games, and 225 medals−15 coins=210 medals can be net-added.

The bonus combination MB1 does not display the combination of the winning and operation symbols as an opportunity to change the lottery mode of the replay game. Therefore, during the operation of the bonus MB1, the lottery mode of the re-play in the original game state in which the winning of MB1 is won is internally taken over. However, during CB operation during MB1 operation, a combination of symbols relating to a small combination accompanied by payout of medals is preferentially displayed, and a combination of symbols relating to a re-play is not displayed.

In this modified example, instead of FIG. 13, as shown in FIG. 110, the lottery mode of the replay (the breakdown of the replay combination and/or the lottery value) is different on the program of the main CPU 101. The replay time shift means for shifting a plurality of replay time states (RT states) including RT0 and RT1 to RT5 shown in FIG. During the bonus state of (k), the lottery mode of the replay game in the original RT state in which the winning of MB1 is won is succeeded, and there is no transition to the RT state except when the operation of MB1 ends.

A) RT0
This RT0 is a state where the lottery mode of the re-game is not changed, and the re-game probability is a low probability (low rep) of 8978/65536≈1/7.3, for example.

B) RT1
This RT1 shifts from RT0 or RT5 by displaying a combination of predetermined shift trigger symbols, and the replay probability is a low probability (low lip) that is not different from RT0. The combination of predetermined transition trigger patterns is No. 17 in FIG. 77-No. At the time of winning any one of the pushing order small wins of 98, the re-play-watermelon-bell bell of FIG.

C) RT2
This RT2 is shifted from RT1 by displaying a combination of the first transition trigger symbols, and the lottery mode of the replay is different from RT0 and RT1, but the replay probability is a low probability (low lip) that is not different from RT0 and RT1. If there is no winning of the bonus combination MB1 on the way, the game is returned to RT0 when the result of the game of a predetermined first number of times, for example, four times is obtained, that is, four games after the rush.

The combination of the first transition trigger symbols is, for example, one of the combinations of symbols relating to the operation of the replay, "red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank"-"replay"-"replay". It is the same as the symbol combination of REP08 in FIG. When this symbol combination is displayed in the middle effective line, the "replay" symbols are arranged on the polygonal line connecting the upper stage of the left reel 3L, the middle stage of the middle reel 3C and the middle stage of the right reel 3R.

D) RT3
This RT3 is moved from RT1 by displaying a combination of the second transition trigger symbols, and the lottery mode of the replay is different from RT0 and RT1, but the replay probability is a low probability (low lip) that is not different from RT0 and RT1. If there is no winning of the bonus combination MB1 on the way, the game is returned to RT0 when the result of the game of a predetermined second number, for example, 50 times is obtained, that is, 50 games after the rush.

The combination of the second transition trigger symbols is, for example, one of the combinations of symbols relating to the operation of the replay, "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-"watermelon". It is the same as the symbol combination of REP09 in FIG. When this symbol combination is displayed on the middle effective line, the symbols relating to cherry are displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C, and "Red 7/Blue 7/BAR" is displayed on the lower stage of the right reel 3R. A pattern including a bonus-corresponding pattern of "/blank" is displayed, and it is treated as a strong cherry in the image held by a general player, and suggests a hot situation that expects the game to develop advantageously.

E) RT4
This RT4 is moved from RT1 by displaying a combination of the third transition opportunity symbols, and the lottery mode of the replay is different from RT0 and RT1, but the replay probability is a low probability (low lip) that is not different from RT0 and RT1. When there is no winning of the bonus combination MB1 on the way, the game is returned to RT0 when the result of the game of a predetermined third number, for example, 20 times is obtained, that is, 20 games after the rush.

The combination of the third transition trigger symbols is, for example, one of the combinations of symbols relating to the operation of the replay, "bell"-"watermelon"-"red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank". It is the same as the symbol combination of REP07 in FIG. When this symbol combination is displayed in the middle effective line, the "watermelon" symbols are arranged in a small V shape on the upper stage of the left reel 3L, the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, and the upper stage of the right reel 3R, and are held by ordinary players. It is treated as a strong watermelon in the image, and suggests a hot situation that expects the game to develop advantageously.

F) RT5
This RT5 shifts after the operation of the bonus combination MB1 is completed, and the replay probability is set to a high probability (high lip) of, for example, about 1/1.35, and one of the push order bell combinations (No. 77 to 98 in FIG. 17). At the time of winning the “pressing order small winning combination”, the answer becomes incorrect in the pressing order, and when the bell spilled eye (S_RT1 transition eye in FIG. 19) is displayed, the player falls to RT1. RT5 of the present modification is a highly accurate replay time for playing the assist replay time ART.

G) Bonus state This bonus state is started by displaying the combination of the operation symbols of the bonus hand MB1, and is ended by exceeding the maximum number of medals to be acquired (the CB of the constant operation is also ended), and after the operation is completed, the process proceeds to RT5. .

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT0 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 8978
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT0 is 8978, and the probability is about 1/7.3. Although there is no setting difference, there may be a setting difference.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT1 are as follows.
1) F_Batting order 1 and RT3 other than RT3 Rep (REP08+09) 900
2) F_Batting order 2 and RT3 other than RT3 Rep (REP01+08+09) 900
3) F_Batting order 3 RT2 other than RT3 Rep (REP02+08+09) 900
4) F_Batting order 4 and RT3 other than RT3 Rep (REP01+02+08+09) is 900
5) F_Batting order 5 and RT3 other than RT3 Rep (REP07-09) 900
6) F_Batting order 6 RT2 other than RT3 Rep (REP01+07~09) 900
7) F_Batting order 1 and maintenance rep (RT01+05+07) is 435 for RT4 and others.
8) F_Batting order 2 and RT4 and other maintenance rep (REP01+03+05+07) is 435
9) F_Batting order 3 and maintenance rep (RT01+04+05+07) is 435 for RT4 and others.
10) F_Batting order 4 and maintenance rep (REP01+02+07) is 435 for RT4 and others.
11) F_Batting order 5 and RT4 other than maintenance REP (REP01-04+07) is 435
12) F_Batting order 6 and RT4 and other maintenance rep (REP01+02+04+07) is 435
13) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 968
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT1 is 8978, and the probability is about 1/7.3. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

In addition, for example, in 1), “F_Batting order 1 and RT3 other than RT2 rep” means that when the winning operation is performed, when the batting order 1 which is the pressing order of the correct answer, that is, the left middle and right order is stopped, the second transition trigger is generated. Display the combination of symbols "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-"watermelon" (REP09), move to RT3, and perform a stop operation other than left middle right. "Red 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank"-"Replay"-"Replay" (REP08) is displayed and the role is to shift to RT2. The same applies to batting order 2 (center left/right), batting order 3 (center left/right), batting order 4 (center right/left), batting order 5 (center left/right), and batting order 6 (center right/left).

Further, for example, in 7) "F_Batting order 1 with RT4 and other maintenance replies" means that when the winning operation is performed, if the batting order 1 that is the pressing order of the correct answer, that is, the left middle and right order is stopped, the third transition trigger is given. Display "Bell"-"Watermelon"-"Red 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank" (REP07), which is a combination of symbols, move to RT4, and perform stop operation other than left middle right "Replay"- "Replay"-means to display "Replay" (REP01) and maintain RT1. The same applies to batting order 2 (center left/right), batting order 3 (center left/right), batting order 4 (center right/left), batting order 5 (center left/right), and batting order 6 (center right/left).

The probability of transitioning from RT1 to RT2 is equal to the probability obtained by multiplying the summed probabilities of 1) to 6) described above by the pushing-order incorrect answer rate of 5/6, which is 4500/65536≈1/14.6. The probability of shifting from RT1 to RT3 is equal to the probability of multiplying the summed probabilities of 1) to 6) described above by the pushing forward correct answer rate ⅙, and becomes 900/65536≅1/72.8. The probability of transitioning from RT1 to RT4 is equal to the probability of multiplying the summed probabilities of 7) to 13) by the pushing correct answer rate 1/6, which is 435/65536≈1/150.7.

It should be noted that both the transition to RT3 and the transition to RT4 are made possible when the correct answer is made in the pressing sequence of 6 choices of batting order 1 to 6, so that each stop button 17L, Corresponding to the upper position of 17C and 17R, a slanting production such as "Choose!????" is performed.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT2 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 5000
2) F_Upper Lip (REP01+04) is 978
3) F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+07+08) is 1000
4) F_Lower stage REP (REP01+03+04) is 2000
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT2 is 8978, and the probability is about 1/7.3. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT3 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 5000
2) F_upper rip (REP01+04) is 1000
3) F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+07+08) is 2000
4) F_Lower stage rep (REP01+03+04) is 978
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT3 is 8978, and the probability is about 1/7.3. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT4 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 5000
2) F_upper rip (REP01+04) is 2000
3) F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+07+08) is 1000
4) F_Lower stage rep (REP01+03+04) is 978
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT4 is 8978, and the probability is about 1/7.3. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT5 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 20285
2) F_Upper Lip (REP01+04) is 2450
3) F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+07+08) is 5000
4) F_Middle stage rip 2 (REP01+05) is 4750
5) F_Middle Lip 3 (REP01+06) is 4750
6) F_Lower Lip (REP01+03+04) is 2450
7) F_Bripping Lip (REP03) is 8970
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT5 is 48655, and the probability is about 1/1.35. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

The details of the winning combinations and the lottery values for the small winning combinations of RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4, and RT5 are shown in Nos. of RT0 to 4 other than RT5 in FIG. 61-No. Similar to 98.

In the present modification, the normal section, which is the non-advantageous section, changes to the advantageous section, instead of the mode shown in FIG. 33, at the time of winning the bonus combination MB1, the operation of the start lever 16 is triggered independently of the internal lottery random number. For example, a lottery process using a 1-byte random number (possible numerical values 0 to 255, a random number denominator 256) to be extracted is performed with a predetermined high probability, for example, 256/256=1 (100%).

In addition, in the present modification, when the bonus combination MB1 is won, the probability of occurrence of an advantageous state due to the assist replay time ART that activates the instruction function at the highly accurate replay time RT4 varies depending on the type of replay time for which the win is won. I am trying to let you.

Specifically, if MB1 is won at RT0 and RT1 to RT5, the winning operation causes the advantage section to shift to the advantage section when it is in the normal section, maintains the advantage section when it is in the advantage section, and operates the CB during MB1 operation. In the first game in the middle, the lottery process using the 1-byte random number extracted independently from the internal random number for random determination, the lottery mode of the replay of the game in the CB operation, that is, the winning of MB1 is obtained. By referring to the RT state and according to a predetermined winning probability according to the RT state, if the ART has not occurred, a predetermined initial number of continuing games, for example, 40 games in one set, is determined as the first hit of the ART which enables the ART game. Then, the predetermined number of additional games, for example, the addition of the number of continuous games of ART for 40 games for one set is determined.

More specifically, the initial win or the addition of ART is determined according to the next winning probability for each of the original RT states that have won the winning of MB1.
a] When the original RT state is RT0, a predetermined first low probability, for example, 13/256≈5%
b] When the original RT state is RT1, the first low probability is, for example, 13/256≈5%.
c] When the original RT state is RT2, a predetermined second low probability, for example, 51/256≈20%
d] When the original RT state is RT3, a predetermined first high probability, for example, 128/256≈50%
e] When the original RT state is RT4, a predetermined second high probability, for example, 256/256≈100%
f] When the original RT state is RT5, a predetermined third high probability, for example, 256/256 ≈ 100%

When the first win or the addition of ART is determined by the winning of the bonus combination MB1, the assist replay time ART which is the assist time AT at the highly accurate replay time RT5 is started or restarted after the operation of MB1 is finished, and continues. The subtraction of the number of games begins. When the number of remaining games to be continued becomes 0, the assist time AT is ended, and when the winning combination of any of the pressing order bells (the small pressing order of Nos. 77 to 98 in FIG. 17) is won, the correct pressing order is not notified. , When the bell spilled eyes (the transition to S_RT1 in FIG. 19) are displayed, the answer is incorrect in the pressing order, and the user falls to RT1. On the condition that the number of remaining ART games in the ART is 0 and the fall of RT1 is a condition, the advantageous section is ended and the normal section is restored.

In this modified example, the probability of occurrence of an advantageous state by the ART, that is, the expectation level of the ART including the initial hit and the addition of the ART changes according to the RT state in which the bonus combination MB1 is won. It is possible to create a high-probability game mode that is advantageous to the player and a low-probability game mode that is disadvantageous.

More specifically, in the order of RT0=RT1<RT2<RT3<RT4=RT5, the performance of operating the instruction function is increased,
A] RT0 has the lowest expectation of ART, for example, in the low-probability A game mode,
B] RT1 has the lowest expectation of ART, also in the game mode called "low accuracy A",
C] RT2 has a low expectation of ART, for example, in a game mode of "low accuracy B",
D] RT3 has a high expectation of ART, for example, in a game mode of "high accuracy",
E] RT4 has the highest expectation of ART, for example, in the game mode of "super high accuracy 1",
F] RT5 has the highest expectation of ART, for example, in the game mode of "super high accuracy 2",
It can correspond to each. Therefore, the transition of the RT state also serves as the transition function of the game mode, and it becomes a player's interest as to which RT state the player is in, and the interest of the game can be enhanced even before the advantageous state is generated by the ART.

On the sub-side display device 11, the background scene (stage), background color, etc. are changed according to the game mode in which the player is currently staying, and the game mode in which the player is staying with a predetermined reliability. The production is made to suggest.

At least one replay time, for example RT2, and another replay time, for example RT3 or RT4, which can be stayed before the occurrence of an advantageous state by ART stays within a predetermined limited number of 4 games, 50 games or 20 games. Since this is possible, the "low probability B" game mode corresponding to one replay time RT2 can be maintained up to a finite number of four games defined for one replay time, and another replay time RT3 or In the game mode corresponding to RT4, it is possible to maintain the finite number of 50 games or 20 games defined for the other one replay time as the upper limit, and expect to win the bonus combination MB1 during each storable period, and each game is expected. You can expect ART depending on the mode.

In addition, the bonus combination MB1 can be shifted to an advantageous state of being an advantageous section which is not the normal section if the winning in the normal section before the occurrence of the advantageous state by ART occurs, and depending on whether the bonus combination MB1 is won or activated, the re-game lottery is performed. The lottery mode of the replay game in the RT state in which the winning of the bonus combination MB1 is won without changing the mode is succeeded. Therefore, the common process of shifting to the advantageous section by the winning of the bonus combination MB1 and referring to the lottery mode of the replay in the RT state in which the winning of the bonus combination MB1 is obtained as the processing relating to the instruction function in the advantageous section Can be appropriately promoted to an advantageous state by ART.

In the present modification, the finite number of RT states to be shifted from RT1 is three types of RT2, RT3, and RT4, but instead of this, it may be two types or four or more types. The number of games that can be continued in RT2 to RT4 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, as for the combination of the transition trigger symbols, those related to the small game may be used in addition to those related to the replay.

In this modification, the transition from RT1 to RT2 to 4 is made, but the transition from RT0 to RT2 to 4 may be made. In this modification, the advantageous state control means is provided on the program of the main CPU 101, but it may be provided on the program of the sub CPU 201.

In addition, in the present modification, the predetermined bonus combination MB1 is configured by the accessory continuous operation device related to the second kind special effect, but the first kind special effect or the combination related to the first kind special effect. It may be configured by an object continuous operation device.

Furthermore, in the present modification, the high-accuracy replay time RT5 is shifted to after the bonus state is ended, but the high-accuracy replay time RT5 may be shifted to during the bonus state. For this, for example, a bonus combination is configured by a bonus type continuous operation device BB related to a shift type first type special bonus item in which a first type special bonus item is randomly drawn in a general game during operation of the bonus action continuous operation device. However, with the winning of the first-class special accessory RB in the general game during BB operation, it is changed to RT5 corresponding to the high-accuracy replay time, and finally, the shift for avoiding the display of the combination of RB operation symbols The operation of the BB is terminated by removing the BB, and RT5 may be continued even after the bonus state.

Further, in the present modification, the RT5 for performing the ART is moved only after the bonus state is finished, but instead of or in addition to this, it is displayed when the correct answer is given from the RT1 in a specific pressing order. It may be possible to shift from RT1 to RT5 based on a combination of specific promotion trigger symbols. From RT5, if you decide to fall to RT1 by displaying the bell spill and return to RT0 after the bonus state ends, if it is decided to win or add to ART, you will be promoted from RT0 to RT1 It is promoted to RT5 by notifying the correct pressing order for displaying the combination of symbols. By doing this, even if the player falls to RT1 due to a mistake in the pushing order during ART, there is an advantage that a route for returning to RT5 can be secured without waiting for the winning of the bonus combination.

[Advantageous zone mounting machine with setting difference in RT transition] Modification This modification also starts variable display of the symbols based on the player's start operation, and the symbols based on the internal winning combination and the player's stop operation. Stop the variable display of. Further, on the program of the main CPU 101, there is provided an advantageous state control means capable of producing an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by the assist replay time ART, which enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player. ing. Further, there is provided setting changing means capable of changing the setting for determining the payout rate, which is the ratio of the total number of game media input to the total number of game media input, in a plurality of high and low stages (in FIG. 6, a setting key type switch 54). Etc.).

The gaming state of this modified example is, as shown in FIG. 111 instead of FIG. 13, a chance of a game in which the instruction function is activated as a state in which the lottery mode (re-game combination breakdown and/or lottery value) of the re-game is different. High expected replay time RTH with relatively high expected value to increase, and transition from this high expected replay time RTH by displaying a combination of predetermined transition trigger symbols, and expected value to increase the chance of a game to operate the instruction function And a low expected replay time RTL that is relatively low.

The high expected replay time RTH does not necessarily have to be a high-probability replay time with a high replay probability, as long as the expected value for increasing the chance of a game to activate the instruction function is relatively high. Then, since the high expected replay time RTH is set to the game state in which the ART game is performed, the high-probability replay time RT2 in which the replay probability is set to 48655/65536≈1/1.35 is set.

On the other hand, the low expectation replay time RTL is, for example, 8979/65536 ≈ 1/7.3 (lottery), which has almost no significant difference from the replay probability 8978/65536 of RT0 in which the lottery mode of the replay is not changed. The low-accuracy replay time RT1 is set to 1).

The combination of the predetermined transition trigger symbols from RTH (RT2) to RTL (RT1) is No. 1 in FIG. At the time of winning any one of the press order small wins corresponding to 77 to 98, the bell spill corresponding to the transition to S_RT1 in FIG. The transition from RT0 to RTL (RT1) also occurs due to the bell spill.

In RT1, a predetermined promotion trigger role related to a re-game combination or the like, which displays a combination of RT2 transition trigger symbols at the time of pressing the correct answer, may be randomly selected so as to be able to shift from RTL (RT1) to RTH (RT2).

In RT0, RT1 and RT2, the transition from the normal section, which is the non-advantageous section in which the indicating function is not activated, to the advantageous section, in which the indicating function can be activated, is performed according to the mode excluding the portion relating to the bonus hand in FIG. That is, by winning a weak rare combination (“F_weak rare combination A” and “F_weak rare combination B” in FIG. 17), the normal advantageous section of at least 9 games and high accuracy 1 state is shifted from the next game. Due to the winning of a single chance item (“F_chance item A1” to “F_chance item A4” and “F_chance item B1” to “F_chance item B4” in FIG. 17), high accuracy is achieved for at least 9 games from the next game. It shifts to the normal advantageous section of 2 states.

Further, by winning the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1” in FIG. 17), for example, ART lottery with a winning probability of 8/256 is performed, and at the time of winning, the precursory period lottery for selecting the precursory period from 9 to 16 games. After that, it is determined that the advantageous zone by ART is passed through the normal advantageous zone of the present omen state, and at the time of non-win, the normal advantageous zone of the high accuracy 3 state is made through lottery period for the omen period.

In short, a weak advantage, a single chance, and a watermelon 1, which is a normal advantage section included in an advantage section that is not a normal section, based on the winning of a predetermined combination in which the lottery value does not change at RT0, RT1, and RT2. Move to section. Further, after the transition of the advantageous section including the normal advantageous section, the advantageous section by ART can be determined from the normal advantageous section by the winning of the watermelon 1 or the like according to the aspect excluding the portion related to the bonus combination in FIG.

Note that the ART of the present modification can be continued at a minimum for a predetermined initial number of games, for example, 40 games for one set, and the subtraction of the number of continuous games is started after the transition of the highly accurate replay time RT2 (RTH). During the game of ART, when the small winning combination of the pushing order of "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_lower right bell 2" of FIG. 17 is won, the corresponding correct pushing order is "1" on the sub-side display device 11.・Bernavi that announces "×・×" or "3.2.1" etc. is issued to enable easy acquisition of 8 medals.

The high expected replay time RTH (RT2) is a predetermined specific role that is not randomly selected in the low expected replay time RTL (RT1), for example, “F_chance rep 1” by REP 04 and “F_chance rep 2” by REP 06. A lottery value larger than 0 of the low expected replay time RTL (RT1), for example, 500 is randomly selected. The total winning probability of the specific winning combination is 1000/65536≈1/6.6. It should be noted that even in the RTL (RT1), the specific winning combination may be randomly selected with a small lottery value.

If one of the specific winning combinations “F_chance rep 1” and “F_chance rep 2” that is randomly selected by RTH (RT2) is won, extraction is triggered by the operation of the start lever 16 independently of the internal random number for random determination, for example, 1 By a 2-step lottery process using byte random numbers (possible numerical values 0 to 255, random number denominator 256), with a predetermined high probability, for example, 256/256=100%, with a predetermined initial number of games, for example, 40 games for one set Increase the chances of playing the instruction function by deciding the initial hit of the ART that can be continued and the stock of the number of ART sets. Therefore, the high expected replay time RTH (RT2) has a relatively high expected value for increasing the chance of a game for activating the instruction function, as compared with the low expected replay time RTL (RT1).

Note that the high expected replay time RTH is a low-probability replay time with a low replay probability, a replay time intermediate between high-probability and low-probability, etc., and is a predetermined promotion trigger role to be randomly selected at the high expected replay time RTH. On the basis of the winning, it is possible to shift to a high-definition replay time, which is defined separately, such as RT3, and to execute the ART game at RT3.

In addition, the high expected replay time RTH is a finite replay time that shifts to RT0 when a game result of a finite number of times, for example, 32 times at maximum, is obtained, and the initial hit or the number of sets of ART determined based on the winning of a specific winning combination. The stock, etc. are hidden, and after the transfer, the RT0 is transferred to the RTL (RT1) by displaying the bell spill, and lottery is performed at this RTL. A high-precision replay that is defined separately based on the winning of a specific promotion trigger. For example, the time may be shifted to RT4 and the RT game may be played at RT4.

In the present modification, instead of the bonus winning combinations BB1 to BB4 in FIG. 20, from the winning, through the display of the combination of the operation symbols, the specific transition trigger determined until the operation completion, for example, when the operation termination is determined as the specific transition trigger, this identification A predetermined bonus combination that can be transferred to the high expected replay time RTH (RT2) is randomly selected based on the transfer opportunity.

The predetermined bonus combination is, for example, configured by the continuous operation device MBa related to the second type special accessory, and is won independently without overlapping with the re-game combination or the small combination, and the winning probability is set high. Has a higher setting than the lower one. Specifically, a predetermined probability within a range of several tenths to several hundredths, for example,
Setting 1 is 328/65536 ≈ 1/200,
Setting 2 is 336/65536≈1/195,
Setting 3 is 345/65536≈1/190,
Setting 4 is 354/65536 ≈ 1/185,
Setting 5 is 364/65536 ≈ 1/180,
Setting 6 is 374/65536≈1/175,
Then, the bonus combination MBa is won.

The combination of operation symbols of the predetermined bonus combination MBa (“left symbol”-“middle symbol”-“right symbol”) is, for example, “replay”-“bell”-“bell”, and the display probability is 1 (maximum 4 It is possible to pull in the design to the effective line by frame sliding). Therefore, when MBa is won, a combination of operation symbols can be displayed in the winning game, and the next game is in operation of MBa. It is assumed that the second class special accessory CB is always activated during the operation of MBa, and during the operation of CB, all the small winning combinations accompanied by the payout of medals are in a winning state.

While the CB is operating while the predetermined bonus combination MBa is operating, the specified number of inserted coins is changed to 1 (multiplied by 1), the payout number of all small winning combinations is changed to 15, and the maximum number of sliding frames is 1 frame. The reel that is stopped within 75 ms, which is limited to, is, for example, the left reel 3L. The middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R maintain the maximum four-frame sliding, and the effective lines maintain the upper, middle, and lower three lines. When the left first stop is performed to stop the left reel 3L first, any of the small wins of NML01 to NML35 shown in FIG. 22 can be displayed, and 15 medals, which is the upper limit payout number of one game, are paid out.

It should be noted that the prescribed number of coins to be inserted may be maintained at three (multiplied by three), and the number of coins to be dispensed may be the same as that during the normal game before the operation of MBa. In this case, in order to display the small payout of 8 coins on two lines of the upper, middle, and lower three lines and obtain the maximum payout of 15 coins, it is necessary to additionally define a special small prize during CB operation. preferable.

The operation of the predetermined bonus combination MBa ends when the number of medals acquired from the start of the operation exceeds a predetermined upper limit, for example, 210 or 211 or more, and the operation of CB ends when the operation of MBa ends. Therefore, the operation of MBa ends in almost 15 games, and 225 medals−15 medals=210 medals can be net increased.

If the bonus combination MBa is won during the normal section of RT0, RT1, RT2, it is set by the two-stage lottery using the 1-byte random number, which is extracted independently of the internal lottery random number when the start lever 16 is operated. The first probability that is common to all settings that does not depend on the value of, for example, 16/256=1/16, is shifted to an advantageous interval that allows one set of ART after the end of the operation of MBa, and the second probability that is also common to all settings is 128. /256=1/2 and after the operation of MBa is completed, No. 1 in FIG. The correct answer pressing order (Bernavi) of the pressing order small winning combination of 77 to 98 is shifted to an advantageous section that functions as a chance zone for a predetermined number of times, for example, 5 times. If there is a probability of 112/256 and the player is out of the two-stage lottery, the normal section is maintained.

When MBa in the normal section is won, if the player goes out of the two-stage lottery, the normal section is maintained, but all the small wins are in the winning state during CB operation during MBa operation, but RT0, RT1 during MBa non-operation. , It is possible to determine the shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the specific winning combination whose winning is specified as a result of the internal lottery similar to that during each general game of RT2.

That is, for example, according to the process performed in the normal section of FIG. 33, in the case of being equivalent to the winning of the F_watermelon 1 of FIG. 17 which is one of the specific winning combinations, by the two-stage lottery process using the 1-byte random number, If the winning of the ART is determined with a predetermined probability, for example, 8/256=1/32, and the winning of the F_weak rare combination A or F_weak rare combination B of FIG. After the operation is completed, No. 1 in FIG. 17 to 98, the correct answer order of the small winning combination of 77 to 98 is navigated a predetermined number of times, for example, once. If the winnings of the F_chance eye A1 to the F_chance eye B4 are equivalent, the correct answer order of the pushing order small winning combination is also navigated for a predetermined number of times, for example, once after the operation of MBa is finished. Determine the transition to the normal advantage section.

On the other hand, if the winning of the ART is determined with the first probability when the MBa is won, the winning is specified as a result of the internal lottery similar to that in the normal game, as the advantageous section is set during the CB operation during the MBa operation. Based on the winning of the winning combination, it is possible to determine the addition of the ART set number stock and the number of initial games by common processing that does not refer to the setting value. The common processing that does not refer to the value makes it possible to determine the addition of the initial number of games.

For example, in the case of being equivalent to the winning of F_Watermelon 1 in FIG. 17, one set stock of ART is determined with a predetermined probability, for example, 8/256=1/32 by the two-stage lottery process using the 1-byte random number, When it is equivalent to the winning of the F_weak rare combination A or the F_weak rare combination B of FIG. 17, it is decided to add the initial number of games for a predetermined value, for example, 10 games, and the F_chance eyes A1 to F_chance of FIG. If it is equivalent to the winning of the eye B4, it is decided to add the initial number of games for a predetermined value, for example, 20 games, and if it is not the winning of the specific small winning combination, the 1-byte random number is used for the two steps. By the lottery process, it is determined that the initial number of games is increased for a predetermined value, for example, 5 games, with a predetermined probability, for example, 1/256, common to all the settings.

Then, in the final stage of the operation of MBa, it is displayed on the display device 11 on the sub side. For example, in the battle production in which the enemy and the ally are confronted with each other, when the ally wins and the winning of the ART is notified, “ART 40 game×2 "Set" and "addition of ART 40 games + 20 games" are clearly indicated.

Also, when the chance zone transition is determined with a second probability when MBa is won, the winning is specified as a result of performing internal lottery similar to that in the normal game, as an advantageous section during CB operation during MBa operation. Based on the winning of the small winning role, it is possible to rewrite from the chance zone to the winning of the ART, and it is possible to determine the number of continued games in the chance zone (number of times of Bernavi) and it is possible to not win the winning of the specific small winning role. By the common processing that does not refer to the setting value, it is possible to determine the addition of the number of continuous games (number of times of Bell navigation) in the chance zone.

For example, in the case of being equivalent to the winning of the F_watermelon 1 of FIG. 17, by the two-step lottery process using the 1-byte random number, the winning of the ART is rewritten with a predetermined probability, for example, 8/256=1/32, and the winning of FIG. If it is equivalent to the winning of the F_weak rare combination A or the F_weak rare combination B, it is decided to add the number of times of Bernavi in the chance zone for a predetermined value, for example, two times, and F_chance eyes A1 to F_chance of FIG. If it is equivalent to the winning of the eye B4, it is decided to add the number of times of Bernavi in the chance zone for a predetermined value, for example, 3 times, and if it is not applicable to the winning of the specific small winning combination, the 1-byte random number is used. By the two-step lottery process, it is determined to add the number of Bell navigations in the chance zone for a predetermined value, for example, once with a predetermined probability common to all settings, for example, 1/256.

Then, in the final stage of the operation of MBa, the battle effect in which the enemy and the ally are confronted, which is developed on the display device 11 on the sub side, is completed by drawing or continuing, and when the entry into the chance zone is notified, “chance zone; "Bernavi 5 times + 4 times" etc. When there is a rewrite of the ART winning, as in the case where the ART winning is determined based on the case where the winning combination of “F_chance rep 1” or “F_chance rep 2” is won in the chance zone, At the end of the chance zone, the continuous battle is completed with the victory of allies, and the winning of ART is notified.

The ART game and the chance zone game will be played at the high expected replay time RTH (RT2) that shifts after the operation of MBa is completed. Since the player stays at the high expected replay time RTH (RT2) until the bell spill is displayed due to the end of Bernavi, the winning of ART is based on the winning of the specific roles “F_chance rep 1” and “F_chance rep 2”. May be determined. When the winning of the ART is determined within a predetermined number of games, for example, within 32 games after the ART game or the chance zone game is finished, the sub display device 11 is informed of "ART return success" or the like. When the winning of ART is determined over 32 games, the sub display device 11 is informed of "ART winning" or the like.

If the bonus combination MBa is won when the RT0, RT1 and RT2 are shifted to the advantageous zone which is more than the normal advantageous zone, the first probability common to all the settings, for example, 16 is obtained by the two-stage lottery process using the 1-byte random number. /256=1/16, it is decided to add one set of ART after the operation of MBa is completed, and the second probability common to all the settings is 128/256=1/2. It is decided to add a chance zone for navigating the correct pressing order of the small winning combinations 77 to 98 a predetermined number of times, for example, 5 times. When ART is already decided before the winning of MBa, two sets of ART and a chance zone after ART are decided. Even if there is a lottery in the advantageous zone lottery with a probability of 112/256, the advantageous zone is maintained.

When MBa in the advantageous zone is won, even if the player loses in the two-stage lottery, the advantageous zone is maintained, and if ART is not decided before MBa is won, the same lottery as in the regular game will be performed. Based on the winning of the specified small winning combination that is specified, for example, when the winning is equivalent to that of the F_watermelon 1 in FIG. 17, a predetermined probability common to all settings, for example, by the two-stage lottery process using the 1-byte random number, When the ART is determined by 8/256=1/32 and the winning is equivalent to the F_weak rare combination A or the F_weak rare combination B of FIG. 17, the No. of FIG. When it is determined that the correct pressing order of the small winning combination of 77 to 98 is a chance zone for navigating a predetermined number of times, for example, twice, and it is equivalent to the winning of the F_chance eye A1 to F_chance eye B4 of FIG. If the correct answer order of the small winning combination is decided to be the chance zone for navigating for a predetermined number of times, for example, three times, and if the winning of the specific small winning combination does not apply, then two steps using the 1-byte random number are used. By the lottery process, it is determined that the correct pressing order of the small press winning combination is a chance zone for navigating a predetermined number of times, for example, once with a certain probability common to all settings, for example, 1/256.

On the other hand, when RT0, RT1 and RT2 have transitioned to an advantageous zone that is equal to or greater than the normal advantageous zone, the bonus combination MBa is won, and it is determined to add one set of ART with the first probability, or two stages. Even if the lottery is missed, if the ART is decided before the winning of MBa, the same internal lottery as in the normal game is performed as in the case of winning MBa during the normal section and winning with the first probability. As a result, it is possible to determine the addition of the set number stock of ART and the number of initial games based on the winning of the specified small winning combination that is specified, and even if it is not applicable to the winning of the specific small winning combination, the set value It is possible to determine the addition of the initial number of games by a common process that does not refer to.

In addition, in the case where RT0, RT1 and RT2 have transitioned to the advantageous section that is equal to or greater than the normal advantageous section, the bonus combination MBa is won, and when it is decided to add the chance zone with the second probability, during the normal section. Similar to the case of winning MBa and winning with the second probability, the chance zone is changed to the winning of ART based on the winning of the specific small combination in which the winning is specified as a result of the internal lottery similar to that in the general game. Also, the number of continuous games in the chance zone can be determined, and the number of continuous games in the chance zone can be determined by a common process that does not refer to the setting value even if the winning of a specific small win does not apply. It is possible to decide the addition of (number of times of Bell Navi).

In addition, the common processing which does not refer to the setting value, which is set during the MBa operation and the CB operation, replaces the two-stage lottery with the winning probability common to all the settings, and wins the re-gaming combination with the winning probability common to all the settings. Alternatively, the number of games to be added may be distributed based on the other common processing.

As described above, in this modified example, the high expected replay time RTH (RT2) in which the expected value for increasing the chance of the game to activate the instruction function is relatively high and the high expected replay time is set in a state where the lottery mode of the replay is different. From the winning to the internal winning combination, including the low expected replay time RTL (RT1) that makes it possible to shift by the display of the bell spill and increases the opportunity of the game to operate the instruction function and the expected value is relatively low Based on the specific transition trigger defined up to, a predetermined bonus combination MBa that enables transition to the high expected replay time RTH (RT2) is included, and the winning probability of this bonus combination MBa is set higher than that of the lower one. ing.

Therefore, in the high setting, which has a high winning probability of the bonus combination MBa, the frequency of transition to the high expected replay time RTH (RT2) is higher based on the specific transition trigger than in the low setting, and the instruction function is activated. The expectation value which increases the opportunity of the game to be made becomes high. For this reason, it is possible to exceed the fluctuation range of the winning probability due to the setting difference of the bonus combination MBa, increase the advantage/disadvantage range due to the setting difference, and improve the superiority or inferiority of the game due to the setting difference.

Further, as a common process that does not refer to the value of the setting between the winning of the bonus combination MBa and the end of the operation, the two-stage lottery process according to the winning probability common to all the settings when the specific small combination is won or not won, Since it is possible to increase the number of game opportunities for activating the instruction function, the higher the easier it is to win the bonus combination MBa, the more chances of a game for activating the instruction function can be provided between the winning and the end of operation. It is possible to further increase the advantage/disadvantage due to the setting difference, and to further enhance the superiority or inferiority of the game due to the setting difference.

Further, the bonus combination MBa is configured by a character continuously operating device related to the second type special character, and while the second type special character CB is operating, all of the small wins related to the acquisition of the game medium are in the winning state. However, the specific small winning combination "F_ watermelon 1", "F_ weak rare combination A", "F_ weak rare combination" in which the winning is specified as a result of the internal lottery similar to the game during the non-operation of the second class special bonus Since it is possible to increase the number of game opportunities for activating the instruction function based on the winning of "B", "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye B4", fairness of the game can be ensured.

By the way, the gaming machine of the present modification is a common process that does not refer to a setting value (for example, a winning process common to all settings) for a process related to a transition from a normal period to an advantageous period and/or an instruction function in the advantageous period. It is a 7U type that is called by those skilled in the art by two-stage lottery processing based on probability, and in the role ratio monitor (see paragraph 0110) provided with a 4-digit 7-segment LED or the like provided inside the gaming machine, the upper two digits are "7U" is displayed, and in the lower two digits, an advantageous section ratio (also referred to as "advantageous section stay ratio") that changes momentarily with the total number of games as the denominator and the total number of advantageous sections as the numerator is, for example, "69". Is displayed so that it is possible to clarify that the advantageous section ratio is less than a predetermined value, for example, less than 70%.

Instead of this, the process related to the instruction function during the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and/or the advantageous section, such as setting a difference in the winning probability of the two-stage lottery, is performed by the processing that refers to the set value. It may be a 7P type referred to by those skilled in the art. In this case, "7P" is displayed in the upper 2 digits of the winning ratio monitor, and in the lower 2 digits, the total number of earned medals by the navigation such as Bell Navi and the bonus role MBa are set with the total number of earned medals as the denominator. The ratio of the instructed accessory role that changes from moment to moment is displayed as, for example, “69” with the sum of the total number of medals obtained by the bonus obtained by the operation as the numerator, and the ratio of the instructed accessory role is less than a predetermined value, for example less than 70% It is only necessary to make it clear.

It should be noted that the 7U type gaming machine does not need to display the ratio of the instructed accessory role, which is required in the 7P type game machine, or to satisfy the ratio of the instructed accessory role of less than 70%. On the other hand, the 7P type gaming machine does not need to display the advantageous section ratio or satisfy the advantageous section ratio less than 70%, which is required in the 7U type gaming machine.

Further, in both the 7U type gaming machine and the 7P type gaming machine, the trigger for shifting to the advantageous section may be that there is no setting difference common to all settings, or that there is a setting difference in which the lottery value changes depending on the setting value. .. It is permissible for any type of 7P or 7U gaming machine that the transition trigger to the advantageous section is set to have a setting difference and that the setting rate is changed as a result.

In general, with a gaming machine that uses both bonus and ART, it is advantageous for a 7U-type gaming machine rather than clearing the condition that the ratio of instructed accessory is required for a 7P-type gaming machine is less than a predetermined ratio (less than 70%). In some cases, it may be easier to satisfy the condition that the section ratio is less than a predetermined value (less than 70%), and flexibility in designing a gaming machine is enhanced.

The present modification is a 7U type gaming machine that does not refer to the set value during the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and during the processing related to the instruction function during the advantageous section, that is, the gaming machine. Although the design flexibility is high, it is possible to effectively increase the range of advantage and disadvantage due to the setting difference, over the fluctuation range of the winning probability due to the setting difference of the bonus hand MBa.

[Addition lottery in shift type bonus during advantageous section] Modified example In this modified example as well, a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols and rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R are individually provided as in the above embodiment. And the operation of a plurality of stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R to be stopped.

In the present modification, instead of all or part of BB1 to BB4 in FIG. 20, a combination of predetermined operation symbols, for example, “red 7”-“BAR”-“red 7”, is used for the winning combination determined by the internal lottery. It includes a first bonus winning combination BB which is configured by an accessory continuously operating device relating to a first-class special accessory that operates according to the display. In addition, in the winning combination determined by the internal lottery during the operation of the first bonus combination BB, three kinds of RB1, RB2, and RB3 configured by the first-class special winning combination that operate by the display of the combination of the predetermined operation symbols are used. Including the second bonus combination.

The first bonus combination BB is a kind of shift type big bonus combination, and in the general game during the BB operation (the type of internal winning combination and the lottery value for the small combination are the same as those in the non-bonus winning state), the second bonus combination The winning combination of any of the bonus combinations RB1, RB2, and RB3 is enabled, and the second bonus combination of the winning combination is enabled by displaying the combination of the operation symbols of the second bonus combination of the winning combination.

During the normal game during BB operation, the specified number of inserted coins 3 (multiplied by 3) is maintained, and the effective lines are also maintained in the upper, middle, and lower three lines. When the small winning combination of 77 to 98 is won, the correct pressing order is not navigated, and the payout is 8 pieces, 1 piece, or 0. However, even if the bell spill is displayed, it does not shift to RT1 because the BB is operating.

During the second bonus role, for example,
The combination of operating symbols of RB1 is "red 7"-"bell"-"bell",
The combination of operating symbols of RB2 is "blue 7"-"bell"-"bell",
The combination of operating symbols of RB3 is "BAR"-"bell"-"bell".
The left reel 3L is a three-choice game in which either "red 7", "blue 7", or "BAR" is selected and aimed.

The winning probability of the first bonus combination BB is set higher for a higher setting than for a low setting, so that there is a setting difference. Specifically, a predetermined probability within a range of several tenths to several hundredths, for example,
Setting 1 is 328/65536 ≈ 1/200,
Setting 2 is 336/65536≈1/195,
Setting 3 is 345/65536≈1/190,
Setting 4 is 354/65536 ≈ 1/185,
Setting 5 is 364/65536 ≈ 1/180,
The setting 6 is 374/65536≈1/175, and the first bonus combination BB is won. Instead of this, the first bonus combination BB may be set to have the same probability of winning about 1/200 regardless of the setting, so as to win.

Each lottery value of the second bonus winning combinations RB1 to RB3 in the general game during the operation of the first bonus winning combination BB is the remaining whole range obtained by subtracting the lottery values of the small winning combination and the re-playing combination from the denominator 65536 of the random number for the internal lottery. Are evenly or almost equally divided into three and assigned. In the normal game during BB operation, the lottery value of the re-game combination is, for example, 8978 (probability ≈ 1/7.3), and the lottery value of the outlier is 0.

In the general game during BB operation, if you do not win the small winning combination or the re-gaming combination, you win any one of RB1 to RB3, and in this winning game, a combination of one kind of operation symbols RB1 to RB3 related to the winning. Can be displayed. However, even if any of RB1 to RB3 is won, "left; red 7?blue 7?BAR?" or the like is displayed on the sub-side display device 11, and "red 7" or "blue 7" for the left reel 3L. "" or "BAR" should be aimed at, but the player is informed which one should be aimed at, and whether or not a combination of operating symbols can be displayed, the desired symbol can be aimed accurately. Even advanced players who are good at pushing down the odds have a one-third chance.

In this way, the combination of the operation symbols of the second bonus combinations RB1 to RB3 is such that the operation mode of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, specifically, the operation mode of the left stop button 17L is aimed at "red 7". Whether to aim at "Blue 7" or "BAR" It is possible to display when it matches one of the three types of candidates. The "bell" symbol can be pulled in for the middle stop button 17C and the right stop button 17R.

When the combination of one kind of winning symbols related to winning cannot be displayed in the winning game of the second bonus combination, one or more winning flags related to winning are carried over from the next game, which is an internal winning state called as between JAC flags. , The lottery values for the three areas of RB1 to RB3 are out of proportion, and if you do not win the small winning combination or the re-gaming combination, you can display only one type of operation symbol combination of RB1 to RB3 related to the winnings carried over. ..

The operation of the first bonus combination BB ends when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied, for example, when the number of acquired medals exceeds a predetermined upper limit number, for example, 300. Also, while the second bonus combinations RB1, RB2, RB3 are in operation, the specified number of inserted coins is changed to two (multiplied by two), the effective line is changed to only one line in the middle stage, and the payout number of all small winning combinations is changed. The number is changed to 9, and all the small winning combinations are in a small state in which all small winning combinations are won in the entire range of the random numbers for the internal lottery. Therefore, 9 medals are paid out in each game, and after 72 medals are paid out by winning eight times, one operation of the second bonus combination is ended. Therefore, the second bonus combinations RB1 to RB3 can be activated a plurality of times (2 to 4 times) by the end of the operation of the first bonus combination BB.

In this modified example, the transition from the normal section, which is the non-advantageous section, to the advantageous section including the normal advantageous section, is performed with the weak rare combination, the chance opportunity, and the winning of the watermelon 1 shown in FIG. 33 and FIG. (Excluding the part triggered by the winning of the bonus part).

Along with this, when the first bonus combination BB is won during the normal section, it is extracted independently of the internal lottery random number when the start lever 16 is operated, for example, a 1-byte random number (possible number 0-255, random number denominator). 256), a two-stage lottery is used to shift to an advantageous section with a predetermined probability, for example, 128/256=1 (50%), and after the operation of the first bonus hand BB is completed, the high-accuracy replay time RT2 (RT4, RT1 in FIG. 13). , RT0), the assist replay time ART that activates the instruction function for a predetermined initial number of games, for example, 40 games for one set is enabled. Further, when the first bonus combination BB is won during the advantageous section including the normal advantageous section, one set of ART is added with a predetermined probability, for example, 128/256=1 (50%) by the same two-stage lottery.

In addition, when the second bonus combinations RB1 to RB3 are activated during the advantageous period that enables ART including the case where the winning of the first bonus combination BB is triggered, each game, two stages using the 1-byte random number By lottery, with a predetermined high probability, for example, 256/256=100%, the number of continuation games of ART is added for every predetermined number of games, for example, 5 games, and the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player is activated. Increase playing opportunities. Note that the number of games to be added may be variable within a predetermined range, for example, 0 to 30 games in the two-stage lottery.

Thus, by the end of the operation of the first bonus combination BB, the more games the second bonus combinations RB1 to RB3 are operating, the more the number of additional games can be increased, and the number of continuous ART games becomes longer. As a result, during the ART, the chance of playing the instruction function for notifying the information about the stop operation of the player is increased, and one of the pushing order small wins (“F_upper left bell 1” to “F_lower row in FIG. 17”. The number of games that issue the correct answer push order navigation (bell navigation) when the right middle bell 2”) is won is increased. Therefore, by displaying the combination of operation symbols of the second bonus combinations RB1 to RB3 with a small number of games during the operation of the first bonus combination BB, the more games the second bonus combinations RB1 to RB3 are operating, the more. , Is advantageous to the player.

During the operation of the second bonus combinations RB1 to RB3, instead of adding each game, a fixed number of games, the flag of the second bonus combination until the combination of the winning symbols from the winning of the second bonus combinations RB1 to RB3 can be displayed. When the number of inter-games is small, the expected value for increasing the chance of a game for activating the instruction function may be set higher than when the number of inter-games is large, even when the number of games in operation of the second bonus combination is the same.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112, the smaller the number of games between the second bonus combination JAC flags, the larger the average number of games to be added in the two-stage lottery in each game during operation of RB1 to RB3. The lottery table is referred to determine the number of games to be added.

For example, in a game in which the number of games between JAC flags is 0, that is, in a winning game in which any one of the second bonuses RB1 to RB3 is won, the symbol to be aimed at the left reel 3L matches the player's prediction, and the winning is related. When the combination of the operation symbols of the second bonus can be displayed, the most advantageous table A is referred to and the addition is performed. In Table A, with the two-stage lottery, 64/256=1/4 has a probability of adding 0, 128/256=1/2 has a probability of adding 20 games, and 64/256 has a probability of 1/4. Add 40 games. The average number of additional games is 20 games.

In addition, in the case where the number of games between JAC flags is one, that is, in the winning game in which any one of the second bonuses RB1 to RB3 is won, the player's prediction does not match, or there is a maximum of four frame slips. Even if the predicted symbol cannot be drawn in, even if the winning combination or the re-gaming combination is not won in the first game between the JAC flags, "left; red 7? If the player's prediction matches and the combination of the operation symbols of the second bonus related to the winning is displayed, referring to the notification of “Blue 7? BAR?”, refer to the next advantageous table B and add. I do. In Table B, by the two-stage lottery, 64/256 = 1/4 probability is added as 0, 128/256 = 1/2 probability is added as 10 games, and 64/256 = 1/4 probability is added. Add 20 games. The average number of additional games is 10.

Furthermore, in the case where the number of JAC flag games is two or more, that is, in the second and subsequent games of the JAC flag game, the small winning combination or the re-gaming combination is not won, and “left; red 7? blue 7” on the display device 11 is displayed. With reference to the notification "?BAR?", if the player's prediction matches this time and the combination of the operation symbols of the second bonus related to the winning is displayed, the most disadvantageous table C is referred to and the addition is performed. In Table C, with the two-stage lottery, 64/256 = 1/4 probability is added as 0, 128/256 = 1/2 probability is added as 5 games, and 64/256 = 1/4 probability is added. Add 10 games. The average number of additional games is 5.

Therefore, for example, when the second bonus combinations RB1 to RB3 are operated three times during the operation of the first bonus combination BB and the game during the operation of the second bonus combination is 24 times, each second bonus combination related to the winning. As the number of games between flags RB1 to RB3 is smaller, the number of additional games can be expected to increase. Therefore, the earlier the combination of the operation symbols of the second bonus combination can be displayed, the more advantageous it is to the player, and the player's sense of accomplishment can be effectively brought out.

Each time the second bonus combination is won, the tables A, B, and C can be selected according to the number of games between the JAC flags of the second bonus combinations RB1 to RB3 related to the winning, and the first and second and subsequent games are advantageous. The table A can be referred to, and the disadvantageous table C can be referred to the first time, and the table A can be referred to from the second time and thereafter. However, it is possible that the table C, which is disadvantageous for the first time, the second time and thereafter, is referred to, and the table A that is advantageous for the first time is referred to, and the table C that is disadvantageous for the second time and thereafter is also referred to. Not limited to this, the same table referred to the first time may be referred to after the second time.

Further, in this modified example, the smaller the number of medals acquired in the game during the general game in which the second bonus combinations RB1 to RB3 are randomly drawn during the operation of the first bonus combination BB, the more the operation of the first bonus combination BB ends. , The number of games in which the second bonus combinations RB1 to RB3 are operating increases. In other words, at the time of winning a small push order winning combination, originally, it is expected to pay out 8 coins, but by intentionally stopping the payout of 1 coin or 0 coins, the second bonus combination RB1 is completed by the end of the operation of the first bonus combination BB. ~ The number of games for operating RB3 can be increased.

As a result, the player himself/herself operates the second bonus combinations RB1 to RB3 by stopping the acquisition of a small number of medals during the general game during the operation of the first bonus combination BB in which the second bonus combinations RB1 to RB3 are randomly selected. It is possible to give the impression that the number of games in the game has been increased, and to increase the player's sense of accomplishment. In this case, it is merely an incorrect answer in the pushing order because the Bell Navi is not issued, but it is possible to confuse the player that the incorrect answer in the pushing order is won. The expected acquisition value of the medal during the general game during the BB operation may be lowered by positively changing the stop control during the general game during the BB operation.

In the above modified example, the first bonus combination is composed of the shift-type one-type big bonus BB (the accessory continuous operation device relating to the first-type special accessory), but the shift-type two-type big bonus MB (second). It may be configured by a continuous accessory operating device for a special special accessory.

In this case, the combination of the operation symbols of the first bonus combination MB is, for example, “blue 7”-“BAR”-“blue 7”, and the second bonus combination that is randomly selected in the general game during MB operation is of three types. The second type special effects CB1, CB2, CB3, for example,
The combination of operation patterns of CB1 is "red 7"-"watermelon"-"watermelon",
The combination of operation patterns of CB2 is "blue 7"-"watermelon"-"watermelon",
The combination of operating symbols of CB3 is "BAR"-"watermelon"-"watermelon".

The winning probability of the first bonus combination MB, the winning probability of the second bonus combinations CB1 to CB3, and the operation ending condition of the first bonus combination MB are the same as those of BB and RB1 to RB3.

In addition, the transition from the normal section that is the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section including the normal advantageous section is performed in the transition mode (bonus combination) triggered by the weak rare combination, the chance eye, and the winning of the watermelon 1 shown in FIGS. 33 and 34. However, when the first bonus combination MB is won during the normal section, it is switched to the advantageous section with a predetermined probability by the two-stage lottery, and the first bonus combination MB of the first bonus combination MB After the operation ends, it is possible to ART for a predetermined number of initial games with a high-precision replay time RT2, and when the first bonus hand MB is won during an advantageous section including a normal advantage section, one set of ART is added with a predetermined probability by two-stage lottery. The procedure is the same as when using a kind of big bonus.

However, if you win CB1 to CB3 during the general game during MB operation, if you succeed in the three choices by relying on "left; red 7? blue 7? BAR?" displayed on the sub-display 11 in the winning game. It is possible to display the combination of the corresponding operation symbols, but if the three selections fail, the combination of the corresponding operation symbols cannot be displayed, and the winning flags of CB1 to CB3 related to the winning are cleared (not carried over to the next game). .. Therefore, unlike the case of RB1 to RB3, there is no state between JAC flags. Also, the operation of CB1 to CB3 ends only in the next one game in which the combination of operation symbols is displayed, and returns to the general game during MB operation.

During the operation of CB1 to CB3, the specified number of thrown coins is changed to one (multiply by one), the payout number of all small wins is changed to 15, and the maximum number of sliding frames is limited to one frame. The reel to be driven is, for example, the left reel 3L. The middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R maintain the maximum four-frame sliding, and the effective lines maintain the upper, middle, and lower three lines. When the left first stop is performed to stop the left reel 3L first, any of the small wins of NML01 to NML35 shown in FIG. 22 can be displayed, and 15 medals, which is the upper limit payout number of one game, are paid out.

In a game in which the second bonus combinations CB1 to CB3 operate during an advantageous period that allows ART, including a case where the winning of the first bonus combination MB is triggered, by a two-stage lottery using the 1-byte random number With a probability of a predetermined high probability of 256/256=100%, the number of continuous games of ART is increased by a predetermined value, for example, every 5 games, and the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player is operated. Increase opportunities. Note that the number of games to be added may be variable within a predetermined range, for example, 0 to 30 games in the two-stage lottery.

Even when using a shift-type two-type big bonus in which MB is used for the first bonus combination and CB1 to CB3 is used for the second bonus combination, the instruction function is increased as the number of games in which CB1 to CB3 are active during MB operation. Opportunities for games to be operated can be increased, and similar operational effects can be achieved except for the part regarding the JAC inter-flag game when a kind of big bonus is used.

In this modification, the left reel 3L is a three-choice game in which one of "red 7", "blue 7", and "BAR" is selected and aimed, but three-choice is aimed at the symbols of the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R. It may be a game or the like. Further, instead of the three-choice game, a two-choice game may be used, or a four-choice or more, for example, a six-choice game may be used. Furthermore, instead of the symbol selection game aiming for a specific symbol, a push order selection game may be used.

In the present modification, the display device 11 on the sub side displays "left; red 7? blue 7? BAR?", and does not notify which symbol is specifically targeted, but the first bonus combination BB. Alternatively, when the number of acquired medals during MB operation is larger than a predetermined value, or conversely, when the number is smaller than a predetermined value, a predetermined payout state or a first bonus hand BB or a general game during MB operation is performed in advance. Based on the winning of the specified winning combination, a section for executing navigation such as "left; aim at red 7", "left; aim at blue 7", "left; aim at BAR", etc. is provided and specialization is added. You may make it function as a zone.

[Additional lottery system during bonus] Modified example The gaming machine of this modified example starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player, and the variation of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. Stop the display. Further, there is provided an advantageous state control means capable of producing an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by the assist replay time ART which enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player (see FIG. 14). . Further, there is provided setting changing means capable of changing the setting for determining the payout rate, which is the ratio of the total number of game media input to the total number of game media input, in a plurality of high and low stages (in FIG. 6, a setting key type switch 54). Etc.).

In the gaming machine of this modification, in addition to the bonus winning combinations BB1 to BB4 of FIG. 20, the first winning combination RB5 of the first-class special winning combination that allows a predetermined number of winnings per operation is continued to the internal winning combination. The second bonus combination BB5 is provided by the accessory continuous operation device related to the first-class special accessory that can be activated. The first operation of RB5 is started by the start of operation of BB5, the next one operation of RB5 is started following the end of one operation of RB5, and the operation of BB5 and RB5 is ended by the end of operation of BB5. Note that BB5 may be provided in combination with BB1 to BB4, or may be provided in place of all or part of BB1 to BB4.

BB5 wins with a winning probability of no setting difference that does not change depending on the setting. Generally, a predetermined probability within the range of a few tenths to a few hundredths is common to the settings 1 to 6, for example, a lottery value of 200, and a probability of 200/65536 ≈1/328. And win the game alone without duplication.

No. "F_BB5" is added as 99, and lottery is performed at RT0 to RT4. The lottery value 200 of BB5 is the same as No. 1 of FIG. The lottery value of 39, the same No. in RT1. Out of lottery value of 0, the same No. in RT2. The lottery value of 39, the same No. 3 at RT3. Out of lottery value of 0, the same No. in RT4. It is ensured by reducing the lottery values out of 0.

The combination of operating symbols of BB5 (“left symbol”-“middle symbol”-“right symbol”) is, for example, “red 7”-“BAR”-“red 7”, and the display probability is ≠1 (maximum 4 frames It may not be possible to pull in the design to the effective line due to slipping). Therefore, when the winning combination is won in BB5 and the winning symbol combination cannot be displayed in the winning game, the winning flag of BB5 is carried over, and from the next game onward, the internal winning of BB5 occurs until the winning symbol combination is displayed and RT5 is set. Transition.

During the operation of BB5 started by the display of the combination of the operation symbols of BB5, RB5 is assumed to operate continuously without the display of the combination of the specific operation symbols, and the first operation of RB5 is started by the start of the operation of BB5. Let it start. The operation of BB5 is supposed to end when a predetermined total number of medals to be acquired, for example, 30 or more medals exceeding 29 are acquired, and when the operation of BB5 ends, the operation of RB5 in operation also ends.

During operation of the RB 5, the prescribed number of inserted sheets is maintained at 3 (multiplying by 3), and the effective lines are also maintained at the upper, middle and lower lines. One operation of the RB5 is temporarily terminated when a predetermined number of games, for example, four times of games or a predetermined number of winnings, for example, two times of winnings, whichever comes first, whichever comes first, and the next one operation continues until the operation of the BB5 is completed. Can be started. During the operation of the RB5, instead of FIG. 18, for example, the lottery is carried out in the RB5 dedicated lottery table having the following winning ranges (a), (b) and (c).

(A) F_JAC2
This F_JAC2 wins NML01 to 40 shown in FIG. 22 in a duplicated manner, wins NML36 that pays out eight pieces of "Replay"-"Replay"-"Watermelon" in the upper line and wins the lower line regardless of the pressing order. You can win 8 medals of "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank"-"cherry 1" with a maximum payout of 15 medals. .. It is a winning range equivalent to a rare role that makes it function as a chance role that can be expected from ART. The lottery value is, for example, 21845 with no setting difference, and the lottery value is won with a probability of 21845/65536≈1/3 which is common to all settings. Here, the chance role that can be expected for ART is a role that has the possibility of winning the ART lottery that determines the ART and the like, and may win the ART. However, the chance role that can be expected for ART may be a high expectation role with a relatively higher probability of winning the ART than one or more other roles, and this high expectation role will be won for the ART. It may be included in the chance role along with the possible roles. Normally, such a chance role that can be expected for ART is considered as a rare role with a relatively low winning probability among players, but here, since it can be expected for ART, it is called a rare role equivalent. The winning range is larger than usual.

(B) F_JAC3
In this F_JAC3, NML01 to 35 and NML37 to 40, except for NML36 shown in FIG. 22, are overlapped, and "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"red 7/blue 7/BAR/" is displayed on the upper line regardless of the pressing order. NML37 which pays out 8 pieces of "Blank"-"Cherry 1" is won, and NML01 which pays out 8 pieces of "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" is put on the lower line and the maximum payout number is 15 pieces. You can get a medal. The winning range is equivalent to that of a Bell role that causes the non-chance combination that cannot be expected from ART. The lottery value is set to have a setting difference that is changed according to the setting, and is set to be larger as the low setting is set and smaller as the high setting is set. For example, in setting 1, the lottery value is 21845, the winning probability is 21845/65536≈1/3.0,
In setting 2, the lottery value is 19275, the winning probability is 19275/65536≈1/3.4,
In setting 3, the lottery value is 17246, and the winning probability is 17246/65536≈1/3.8,
In setting 4, the lottery value is 15604, and the winning probability is 15604/65536≈1/4.2.
In setting 5, the lottery value is 14247, the winning probability is 14247/65536≈1/4.6,
In setting 6, the lottery value is 13107, and the winning probability is 13107/65536≈1/5.0. The non-chance combination that cannot be expected from ART cannot be received the lottery of ART for determining the ART, and the combination has no possibility of winning the ART. However, a non-chance combination that cannot be expected in ART may be a low expectation combination in which the probability of winning an ART is relatively lower than that of one or more other combinations. It may be included in the non-chance part as well as the part that has no possibility to play. Usually, such a non-chance part that cannot be expected in ART is considered as a non-rare part with a relatively high winning probability among players, and here, since the bell symbols are aligned, it is referred to as a bell part. The range may be larger or smaller than usual, or may be smaller than usual.

(C) Departure This defeat does not win any winning combination, and neither payout of medals nor act of re-playing. It has a lottery value obtained by subtracting the lottery values of (A) and (B) from the entire range of the random numbers for internal lottery,
In setting 1, the lottery value is 21846, the outlier probability is 21846/65536≈1/3.0,
In setting 2, the lottery value is 24416, the outage probability is 24416/65536≈1/2.7,
The setting 3 is a lottery value of 26445, a loss probability of 26445/65536≈1/2.5,
The setting 4 is a lottery value of 28087, a loss probability of 28087/65536≈1/2.3,
In setting 5, the lottery value is 29444, the outage probability is 29444/65536≈1/2.2,
In setting 6, the lottery value is 30584 and the wiping probability is 30584/65536≈1/2.1.

The lower the setting, the higher the winning probability of F_JAC3, which is equivalent to the Bell role, which makes it function as a non-chance combination, and the lower the odds of winning. Therefore, at the time of the first operation of RB5, 15 medals x 2 = 30 medals were acquired and promptly It is unlikely that the BB5 will end its operation when the total number of earned medals reaches 30, and the second operation of the RB5 will start, and the third operation of the RB5 will start further. Become. In the case of this example, at the shortest, the operation of BB5 ends at the first operation of RB5, and the operation of RB5 after the second operation does not proceed. By setting the maximum payout number per game at the time of RB5 operation to be less than 15 or by setting the operation end number of BB5 to 45 or the like, at the shortest, during the second operation of RB5, The operation may be terminated and the operation of the RB 5 after the third time may not be advanced. Also, by setting the number of operation ends of BB5 to 45, and setting the end condition of one operation of RB5 to three winnings or four games, the operation of BB5 is the first operation of RB5 at the shortest. May be terminated and the operation of the RB5 after the second time may not be proceeded. In this way, by changing the combination of the maximum payout number per game when the RB5 is activated, the operation termination number of the BB5, and the termination condition of one operation of the RB5, the shortest number of operations of the RB5 or the shortest intermediate termination. The number of times can be changed appropriately. Instead of the fact that the operation of RB5 does not proceed to the predetermined number of times after the shortest or the operation of RB5 ends in the middle of the predetermined number of times at the shortest, from the expected value of the number of payout medals in RB5 in the lowest setting 1 If the average number of times RB5 is to be operated is met, it is unlikely that the RB5 will proceed to a predetermined number of times, such as the second time, or there is a high possibility that the operation of the RB5 will end in the middle of a predetermined number of times, such as the second time. It may be the content.

On the other hand, the higher the setting, the lower the winning probability of the F_JAC3 equivalent to the bell role that functions as a non-chance combination, and the higher the probability of loss, so the possibility of the second operation of RB5 is higher than that of the lower setting. The possibility of a third actuation also increases. That is, the expected value of the number of times the first bonus hand RB5 is activated during the operation of the second bonus hand BB5 is higher as the setting is higher.

As shown in the ART lottery table of FIG. 113, when F_JAC2 that functions as a chance hand during RB5 operation during BB5 operation is won, it is extracted independently of the internal lottery random number when the start lever 16 is operated, for example, 1 By the 2-step lottery using byte random numbers (possible numerical values 0 to 255, random number denominator 256), the more times the RB5 is operated (the number of times the operation is performed), First, the ART is determined based on the winning probability that is higher than the probability of the first time (first operation).

For example,
At the time of the first operation of RB5, there is a probability of about 20% when the chance hand F_JAC2 is won.
At the time of the second operation of RB5, there is a probability of about 30% when the chance hand F_JAC2 is won.
When the RB5 is activated for the third time and thereafter, the ART is determined with a probability of 50% of that when the chance hand F_JAC2 is won.

If the player wins BB5 during the normal state that is not in the advantageous state, the process is shifted to the temporary advantageous state, and as the process related to the instruction function during the advantageous state during the operation of BB5, the higher the number of times of one operation of RB5 is, the higher it is. One set, for example, ART of 40 games is determined by the probability of performing. When ART is determined for a plurality of times triggered by the winning of the chance combination F_JAC2, ART is determined for a plurality of sets. After the operation of the BB5 is completed, the advantageous state is maintained when the ART is determined, and the normal state is restored when the ART is not determined.

On the other hand, if the player wins the BB5 during the advantageous state, the advantageous state is maintained, and during the operation of the BB5, as the process related to the instruction function during the advantageous state, the ART is determined during the ART or when the ART has not been determined, During the ART or when the ART has been determined, the addition of the number of ART sets is determined. After the operation of the BB5 is finished, the advantageous state is continued regardless of whether the ART or the addition is determined or the ART or the addition is not determined.

If the winning combination F_JAC2 is won during the first operation of the RB5, which is the first operation of the BB5, the ART or the addition can be determined with a relatively low probability of 20%, but the expectation is low. If the chance hand F_JAC2 is won during the second operation of the RB5, the ART or the addition can be determined with a higher probability of 30% than the first time. If the chance hand F_JAC2 is won during the third and subsequent actuations of the RB5, the ART or the addition can be determined with a higher probability of 50%. The higher the setting, the higher the possibility of the second operation of the RB5 and the third and subsequent operations of the RB5, and the easier it is to receive the benefit of expecting the ART or the addition with a high probability.

During the operation of BB5, for example, a battle effect video in which an enemy and an ally confront each other is displayed on the display device 11 on the sub side, and at the time of the first operation of RB5, the effect of the first turn that the enemy attacks is performed. , When the RB5 is activated for the second time, the second turn is performed by an ally, and when the RB3 is activated for the third time or later, the effect is performed for the third turn or later where both attacks and defenses compete. , ART, or when the addition is determined, when the player releases the third stop button pressed the third time in the game in which the operation of BB5 ends, the effect is completed on the team victory screen and the ART is completed. Alternatively, if the addition is not determined, when the third release is performed in the game in which the operation of the BB5 ends, the effect is completed on the teammate defeat screen.

As described above, during RB5 operation during BB5 operation, it is possible to increase the game for activating the instruction function by determining the ART or the addition, and the probability of this increase is set higher than the first time as the number of RB5 operation times increases. The higher the set value is, the higher the expected value for the number of times the RB5 is operated during the operation of the BB5 is. Therefore, the higher the set value, the more likely it is that an opportunity to expect the ART or the addition can be expected. Since the probability of ART or addition is increased as the number of operating times of RB5 is increased, it is not necessary to make a great difference in the game period during operation of BB5 between high setting and low setting. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the setting from being detected, and to effectively provide the setting difference to the performance of the indicating function. Each chance of winning the chance F_JAC2 is about 20% when the RB5 is operated for the first time, about 30% when the RB5 is operated for the second time, and 50% when the RB5 is operated for the third time and thereafter. Although the ART was determined in the above, the same probability is assumed when the RB5 is operated for the first time and the second time, for example, about 20%, and a higher probability, for example, 50%, when the RB5 is operated for the third time. Alternatively, the first operation may be about 30%, the second operation may be about 20%, the third and subsequent operations may be about 50%, and so on. It is only necessary that the probability of the third and subsequent operations be high. In addition, it is preferable that the rate of change (increasing rate) of the probability is larger during the third and subsequent actuations than during the second and subsequent actuations, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is proportional to the increase in the RBB5 actuation times. May increase the probability.

Instead of the above BB5, the present modification may be configured by the accessory continuously operating device related to the shift type first type special accessory. That is, the internal winning combination continuously operates the first bonus combination RB6 by the first special combination RB6 that allows winning a predetermined number of times per operation A second bonus combination BB6 by the device is included. Like BB5, for example, the winning probability of BB6 is 200/65536≈1/328 with no setting difference, and it is won independently without overlapping with other small winning combinations and re-gaming combinations.

No. “F_BB6” is added as 99, and lottery is performed at RT0 to RT4. The lottery value 200 of BB6 is the same as No. 1 of FIG. The lottery value of 39, the same No. in RT1. Out of lottery value of 0, the same No. in RT2. The lottery value of 39, the same No. 3 at RT3. Out of lottery value of 0, the same No. in RT4. It is ensured by reducing the lottery values out of 0.

The combination of operating symbols of BB6 (“left symbol”-“middle symbol”-“right symbol”) is, for example, “blue 7”-“BAR”-“blue 7”, and the display probability is ≠1. Therefore, when the winning combination is won in BB6 and the winning symbol combination cannot be displayed in the winning game, the winning flag of BB6 is carried over, and from the next game onward, the internal winning symbol of BB6 is activated until the winning symbol combination is displayed, and RT5 is set. Transition.

After the start of operation of BB6, during the normal game during operation of BB6, which is a non-operational game of RB6, for the small winning combination with the payout of medals, each small winning combination of No. 61 to 98 in FIG. 17 is randomly selected in the RT5 column. The lottery value is the same as the lottery value, and the replay combination is No. 1 in FIG. For example, only the F_maintenance Rip of 39 is lottery with a lottery value 8978, all the other winning ranges are lottery values of RB6, and the lottery value of outliers is 0. During the normal game while BB6 is operating, the specified number of inserted cards is maintained at 3 (multiplying by 3), and the effective line is also maintained at the upper, middle, and lower 3 lines.

During the normal game during operation of BB6, the RB6 is won, and the first operation of RB6 is started by displaying the combination of operation symbols of RB6. After the end of one operation of RB6, it returns to the general game during the operation of BB6, and during the general game during the operation of BB6, the winning of RB6 is obtained again, and the combination of the operation symbols of RB6 is displayed. One operation is started. When the operation of BB6 is completed, the operation of BB6 and the operation of RB6 during operation are ended. The operation of the BB6 is supposed to end when a predetermined total number of medals to be obtained, for example, 121 or more medals exceeding 120 are obtained.

The combination of operation symbols of RB6 is, for example, "BAR"-"BAR"-"blue 7", and the display probability is ≠1. Therefore, when the RB6 is won during the normal game during the operation of the BB6 and the combination of the operation symbols cannot be displayed in the winning game, the winning flag of the RB6 is carried over to the internal winning of the RB6 during the operation, and the next. After the game, in the lottery table during the general game during the operation of BB6, the lottery is performed with the winning range of RB6 being out of correspondence, and the combination of the operating symbols of RB6 can be displayed when the amount of outfall is subtracted.

While the RB6 is operating, the prescribed number of inserted sheets is maintained at 3 (multiplied by 3), and the effective lines are also maintained at the upper, middle, and lower 3 lines. One operation of the RB6 ends when a predetermined number of games such as four times of games or a predetermined number of winnings such as two times of winnings, whichever comes first, is reached, and returns to the normal game during operation of the BB6. During operation of the RB6, instead of FIG. 18, for example, the lottery is carried out in the lottery table dedicated to the RB6 having the same winning ranges (A), (B) and (C) as the above-mentioned RB5.

In the lottery table dedicated to RB6, the winning probability of “F_JAC3” in the winning range (b) that functions as a non-chance combination that does not trigger an increase in the game that activates the instruction function is set to be higher for lower settings and lower for higher settings. There is. While the RB6 is operating, the higher the setting, the harder it is to hit the "F_JAC3" of the winning range (a), and as a result, the winning range that functions as a chance role to increase the number of games that activate the instruction function ( The expected value of the number of times of winning the “F_JAC2” in a) is increased.

When the BB6 is won during the normal state which is not in the advantageous state, the BB6 is shifted to the temporary advantageous state, and during the normal game during the operation of the BB6, No. 1 in FIG. No. 74 F_Special Bell and No. No. 77 to 98 excluding the push order small win. When a small winning combination of 61 to 73, 75, and 76 is won, as a process related to the instruction function in the advantageous state, one set, for example, 40 games of ART with a predetermined low probability of 1/256 by the above-described two-stage lottery It is possible to decide. When determined multiple times, it also allows determination of ART for multiple sets. After the operation of the BB6 is completed, the advantageous state is maintained when the ART is determined, and the normal state is restored when the ART is not determined.

In addition, when the BB6 is won in the advantageous state, the advantageous state is maintained and during the normal game during the operation of the BB6, No. 1 in FIG. When the small winning combination of 61 to 73, 75, and 76 is won, as a process related to the instruction function in the advantageous state, a predetermined low probability of 1/256 is given by the two-stage lottery, and the ART is performed during the ART or when the ART is not determined. It is possible to determine the addition of the set number of ARTs during the ART or when the ART is already determined. When determined multiple times, it also allows determination of ART for multiple sets. After the operation of the BB6 is completed, the advantageous state is continued regardless of whether the ART or the addition is determined or the ART or the addition is not determined.

Therefore, during the general game while BB6 is operating, ART or extra may be determined, so some players may intentionally perform a shift-hash to avoid displaying the combination of operating symbols of RB6 even if they win RB6. Thus, the operation of BB6 may be an option to end the operation of BB6 by exceeding the total number of earned medals while maintaining the game state during RB6 internal winning during BB6 operation. In this case, by increasing the replay probability during the normal game while the BB6 is operating and decreasing the probability of pulling the gap, the expectation of the number of medals to be won against the number of inserted medals when a shift loss occurs during the general game while the BB6 is operating. By raising the value as much as possible, it is possible to expect ART or addition in a situation where the medal is good, and it is possible to enhance the usefulness of the shift loss option. However, this means that the game is slowly digested during operation of the BB6, and the probability that the ART or the addition is determined is not necessarily high, which may reduce the interest of the game.

Therefore, during RB6 operation during BB6 operation, it is possible to expect an increase in the number of games in which an instruction function by ART or an addition is activated with a higher probability than during a general game during operation of BB6. That is, during RB6 operation, internal lottery is performed by the internal lottery table dedicated to RB6, and No. 1 in FIG. When winning the winning combination "F_JAC2" with a winning range that is larger than the total winning range of the small wins of 61 to 73, 75, and 76, the probability of the preferential two-stage lottery is determined, for example, 64/256=25% to determine ART or addition. However, while the RB6 is in operation, it is possible to challenge the ART or the addition with a high probability. In this way, it is possible to widen the choices of the player and prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Moreover, while the RB6 is operating, the winning probability of the non-chance combination "F_JAC3", which does not trigger the increase in the number of games that activate the instruction function, is set to a higher value for the lower setting and a lower value for the higher setting. The higher the expected value of the number of times the winning combination “F_JAC2” is won, the higher the probability that the winning combination “F_JAC2” will be included in the two winnings during one operation of RB6. Therefore, the setting difference can be effectively added to the ART or the addition determination.

As described above, it is possible to increase the game that activates the instruction function by determining the ART or the addition during the operation of the BB6 while the BB6 is operating, and the winning probability of the non-chance combination "F_JAC3" that is not the trigger for increasing this is set higher as the setting is lower. , The expected value of the number of times of winning the chance combination “F_JAC2” that triggers an increase in the game that operates the instruction function is set to be higher as the setting is higher. For this reason, the higher the setting, the greater the number of times of arrival of the chance of determining the ART or the addition. The operation of RB6 is started by displaying the combination of the operation symbols of RB6 in the general game during the operation of BB6, so that it is possible to cause a difference in the number of times RB6 is operated by the selection of the player, and a high setting. There is no need to intentionally make a difference in the game period during the operation of BB6 with the low setting. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the setting from being detected, and to effectively provide the setting difference to the performance of the indicating function.

Also, while RB6 is in operation, while RB6 is in operation, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of pulling out, so the variation range in which the high-set payout rate throughout the game becomes larger than the low-set payout rate can be reduced, It is also possible to obtain the effect of increasing the compliance rate of the prescribed simulation test or test shooting test (IF2 test, etc.).

Instead of the above BB6, this modification may be configured by a first-class special accessory. That is, the internal winning combination includes the bonus combination RB7 by the first-class special combination which is in operation for a plurality of games. Like BB6, for example, the winning probability of RB7 is 200/65536≈1/328 with no setting difference, and the winning is made independently without overlapping with other small wins and re-gaming wins.

No. "F_RB7" is added as 99, and lottery is performed at RT0 to RT4. The lottery value 200 of RB6 is the same as No. 1 of FIG. The lottery value of 39, the same No. in RT1. Out of lottery value of 0, the same No. in RT2. The lottery value of 39, the same No. 3 at RT3. Out of lottery value of 0, the same No. in RT4. It is ensured by reducing the lottery values out of 0.

The combination of operation symbols of RB7 (“left symbol”-“middle symbol”-“right symbol”) is, for example, “BAR”-“BAR”-“red 7”, and the display probability is ≠1. Therefore, if the winning symbol is won in RB7 and the winning symbol combination cannot be displayed in the winning game, the winning flag of RB7 is carried over, and from the next game onward, the internal winning symbol of RB7 is activated until the winning symbol combination is displayed, and RT5 is set. Transition.

During the operation of RB7 which is started by the display of the combination of operation symbols of RB7, the prescribed number of inserted sheets is maintained at 3 (multiplied by 3), and the effective line is also maintained at the upper, middle and lower three lines. The operation of the RB 7 is terminated when a predetermined number of games, for example, four games or a predetermined number of winnings, for example, two winnings, whichever comes first, is reached. During operation of the RB7, instead of FIG. 18, the lottery is carried out, for example, in the lottery table dedicated to the RB7 having the winning ranges of the above (A), (B), and (C) similar to the above RB5 and RB6.

Following the ART lottery table of FIG. 113, if the player wins F_JAC2 that functions as a chance hand during the operation of the RB7, the above-described two-stage lottery causes the start time (the first time) as the number of times the RB7 plays increases. The ART is determined according to the winning probability that is higher than that of the first game). In FIG. 113, “the number of times of one operation of RB5” is “the number of games of RB7”, “first time” is the “first game”, and “second time” is the “first time”. The terms "second game" and "third time and thereafter" are read as "third game and thereafter".

That is,
In the first game of RB7, there is about a 20% chance of winning the chance F_JAC2,
In the second game of RB7, there is about a 30% chance of winning the chance hand F_JAC2.
After the third game of RB7, the ART etc. are determined with a probability of 50% of the time when the winning combination F_JAC2 is won.

If the RB7 is won in the normal state that is not in the advantageous state, the RB7 is moved to the temporary advantageous state, and as the processing related to the instruction function in the advantageous state during the operation of the RB7, the higher the number of times the RB7 is played, the higher the probability. Thus, one set, for example, ART of 40 games is determined. When ART is determined for a plurality of times triggered by the winning of the chance hand F_JAC2, ART is determined for a plurality of sets. After the operation of the RB7 is finished, the advantageous state is maintained when the ART is determined, and the normal state is restored when the ART is not determined.

On the other hand, if the RB7 is won in the advantageous state, the advantageous state is maintained, and during the operation of the RB7, as the process related to the instruction function in the advantageous state, the ART is determined during the ART or when the ART has not been determined, During the ART or when the ART has been determined, the addition of the number of ART sets is determined. After the operation of the RB7 is completed, the advantageous state is continued regardless of whether the ART or the addition is determined or the ART or the addition is not determined.

When the winning combination F_JAC2 is won in the first game which is the starting time when the RB7 is activated, the ART or the addition can be determined with a relatively low probability of 20%, but the expectation is low. If the chance hand F_JAC2 is won in the second game of RB7, it is possible to determine the ART or the addition with a higher probability of 30% than the first time. If the winning combination F_JAC2 is won after the third game of RB7, the ART or the addition can be determined with a higher probability of 50%. The higher the setting, the higher the possibility that the third and subsequent games of RB7 can be performed, and the easier it is to receive the benefit of being able to expect an ART or an addition with high probability.

As described above, it is possible to increase the game in which the instruction function is activated by the determination of ART or the addition during the operation of RB7, and the probability of this increase is set higher than that in the first game as the number of games of RB7 increases. Since the expected value for the number of games of RB7 to progress from the third game onward is higher as the setting is higher, the higher the setting, the more likely it is that the chance of ART or addition is high. Since the probability of determining the ART or the addition is increased as the number of games played by the RB7 is increased, it is not necessary to make a great difference in the game period during operation of the RB7 between the high setting and the low setting. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the setting from being detected, and to effectively provide the setting difference to the performance of the indicating function.

Although the BB5, BB6, and RB7 are individually provided in the above modification, two or more may be provided in combination. In this case, you can make more variations of the game. Further, in the above-described modified example, BB5, BB6, and RB7 have no setting difference, but the higher the setting, the higher the probability of setting difference. In this case, the fluctuation range of the performance of the indicating function due to the setting difference can be expanded.

Further, in the above-described modified example, one operation of RB5 or RB6 or operation of RB7 is finished when the earlier of four games as the predetermined number of games or two times as the predetermined number of winnings, whichever comes first. The predetermined number of games can be changed within a range of 12 times or less, and the predetermined number of winnings can be changed within a range of 8 times or less. For example, in the case of RB7, if the predetermined number of games is 12 and the predetermined number of winnings is 8, the RB7 is divided into the first game to the seventh game, the eighth game, the ninth game and the like, and the ART is performed. Alternatively, the probability of addition is defined as, for example, 20% in the first to seventh games, 30% in the eighth game, and 50% in the ninth and subsequent games. In the case of BB5 and BB6, the total number of earned medals at the end of operation of BB5 and BB6 is also changed according to the change of the predetermined number of games and the predetermined number of winnings of RB6 and RB6.

[Advantageous zone maximum number of lottery games when entering advantageous zone] Modified example The gaming machine of this modified example starts the variable display of symbols based on the start operation of the player, and the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. The variable display of the symbols is stopped based on. Further, there is provided an advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state in which the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player can be activated. The advantageous state includes an advantageous section due to the assist replay time ART that activates the instruction function in RT2 or the like in FIG. 13 where the replay probability is high.

In this modification, instead of the occurrence state of the advantageous state shown in FIGS. Bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 of Nos. 1 to 38, No. 1 of FIG. Nos. 61 to 68 of F_chance eyes A1 to F_chance eyes of B4's single chance eyes, 69 and 70 F_weak rare role A or F_weak rare role B weak rare role, No. 71, 72 F_ watermelon 1 or F_ watermelon 2 single watermelon, the lottery value does not change during the replay time RT0 to RT4 during the general game, the winning of a predetermined selection role including no setting difference and setting difference When the normal state that is not in the advantageous state is present, the transition to the advantageous state is determined, and one advantageous state is generated from the next game.

As shown in FIG. 114A, in the normal state, when a winning combination of any one of BB1 to BB4, a single chance, a weak rare combination, and a single watermelon is won, the internal lottery is performed according to the type of the selecting combination. The one advantageous state is maximized by the two-stage lottery using, for example, a 1-byte random number (possible number 0-255, random number denominator 256) that is extracted independently of the for-use random number when the start lever 16 is operated. The number of possible games (maximum sustainable number of games) is determined by lottery from a plurality of predetermined candidates within a range that does not exceed 1500 G (G; games) which is a predetermined regulation value.

The plurality of predetermined candidates are, for example, 400G, 800G, 1000G, 1200G, 1500G as a relatively long-term game number, and 1G, 8G, 16G, 32G as a relatively short-term game number. Therefore, when the number of long-term games of 400 G or more is determined, it is determined to execute the assist replay time ART in which the predetermined initial number of continuous games is set to, for example, 40 games.

In addition, when the number of short-term games of 1G, 8G, 16G, 32G is determined, it is judged that the ART is not won at the time of this determination, but when the winning combination is won again before the determined number of games is exceeded, As shown in FIG. 114[B], the maximum number of games that can be continued is rewritten without rewriting, rewriting with 400G, rewriting with 800G, rewriting with 1000G, and 1200G by the same two-stage lottery as the above according to the winning winning combination. It will be decided whether to rewrite.

When the rewriting is decided, the maximum resumable game number is rewritten to the rewriting game number, and it is decided to execute the assist replay time ART in which the predetermined initial continuing game number is, for example, one set of 40 games. When it is determined that no rewriting is performed, the initially determined 1G, 8G, 16G, and 32G cannot be rewritten.

When 1G is determined as the maximum number of games that can be continued when the advantageous state occurs, unless No. 1 in FIG. Even if the player wins any one of the pushing order combinations of Nos. 77 to 98, No. 7 in FIG. Even if you win the push order combination that shifts to RT2 such as 40 to 45, the advantageous state is ended in 1G without activating the instruction function even once, that is, without notifying the correct answer order even once. Return to normal state. The section display for notifying the advantageous state provided on the information display 6 (see FIG. 2) on the front of the gaming machine is also kept off.

In addition, when the maximum number of sustainable games to be played is determined to be 8G, 16G, or 32G when the advantageous state occurs, the same applies unless a winning combination is determined and rewriting is determined until the determined maximum number of sustainable games is exceeded. , No. 17 in FIG. Even if the player wins any of the pressing order bells of Nos. 77 to 98, No. 7 in FIG. The maximum number of games that can be continued without activating the instruction function even once, that is, without notifying the correct push order even if the push order combination of 40 to 45 or the like is won. When it exceeds, the advantageous state is ended and the normal state is restored. The section display also remains off.

On the other hand, if the maximum number of sustainable games is determined to be 400G or more when the advantageous section occurs, or even if the number of short-term games is determined when the advantageous section occurs, the maximum number of sustainable games is rewritten to 400G or more by re-winning the selection role. If these are determined or rewritten, for example, between the 9th and 32nd games, the main sign period selected between the games is sandwiched, and after the sign sign period elapses, the correct push order is notified at the time of the winning of the push order bell combination, and RT2 The correct push order to shift to and the correct push order to avoid falling to the low-probability replay time RT1 are notified.

After the passage of the present warning period, the section indicator is switched from off to on so that an advantageous state is displayed. The subtraction of the number of continuous games of ART is started from the time of the transition of RT2, and until the number of continuous games of ART becomes 0, when the winning of the push order bell combination is notified, the correct push order is notified and the low accuracy replay time RT1 is set. Notify the correct push order to avoid falling.

When the number of continuous games of ART becomes 0, the ART is ended, and when it falls to the low accuracy replay time RT1, the advantageous state is ended and the normal state is restored. When the number of continuous games of ART becomes 0, the ART and the advantageous state are ended even before the maximum number of continuous games is exceeded.

If the maximum sustainable game count is determined to be 400 G or more when the advantageous section occurs, or if 400 G or more is rewritten, and if the winning combination is won in the advantageous state of continuing within the range where the maximum sustainable game count is not exceeded, As shown in FIG. 114[C], the maximum number of continuable games is not rewritten by the same two-stage lottery as the above according to the winning winning combination, but the number of continuous games of ART is not added, for example. Add 5G, add 10G, add 20G, or add 40G (1 set).

Therefore, the advantageous state in which the maximum sustainable game number of 400 G or more has been determined or rewritten can be continued beyond 40 games for one set of ART by adding, and the maximum sustainable game number determined or rewritten can be set. ART can be continued until it exceeds the limit. Then, when the maximum number of games that can be continued is exceeded, even if the number of continuous games of ART is not 0, the advantageous state and the ART are forcibly terminated, the normal state is restored, and a new advantageous state is generated from the normal state. To perform.

The maximum number of games that can be continued in the advantageous state for the first time is 1500G, and after the advantageous state and the ART are forced to end due to the excess of 1500G, the maximum number of games that can be continued in the advantageous state for the second time is again set to the maximum number. There is a case where 1500G is decided, but there is also a case where 1500G is not decided (more often in this case), the possibility that an ART of 1500G will be connected in a short period of time is 1500G as the maximum number of sustainable games. It can be reduced compared to the conventional machine that regulates only Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the necessity of lowering the occurrence probability of the advantageous state more than necessary.

In addition, when the maximum number of short-term sustainable games of 1G, 8G, 16G, 32G is determined at the time of occurrence of the advantageous state, the maximum number of sustainable games is won again by winning the selection role before the maximum number of sustainable games is exceeded. Unless the rewriting is decided, the one advantageous state is ended without operating the instruction function even once, so that the advantageous state can be generated as an internal state of the gaming machine which is not explicitly shown to the player, and the payout rate is required. There is no further increase. On the contrary, if the instruction function is activated, it is possible to suggest to the player that a long-term advantageous state associated with ART can be provided, and it is possible to increase the expectation.

Further, the section indicator is turned on only when it is connected to the ART after the warning period has passed, and is not turned on when the advantageous state ends with the maximum number of games that can be continued in a short period that is not connected to the ART and remains off. Therefore, there is no fear of disappointing the player by turning off the section display once and then immediately turning it off. The interval display may be turned on at the time when the ART is actually started at RT2, or may be set at a predetermined time before the ART is started after the maximum number of games that can be continued for 400 G or more is determined. Good.

In the present modification, the selected winning combinations that have triggered the transition to the advantageous state include the setting difference and the setting difference, but it is also possible to set only the setting difference. In this modification, the maximum number of games that can be continued in the advantageous state is set to 1500 G or less on the assumption that the regulation value is 1500 G. However, if the regulation value is 1200 G, the candidates are set to 1200 G or less. Become.

[Gaming machine equipped with an advantageous section where it is easy to make a difference in the ratio] Modified example The gaming machine of this modified example starts the variable display of symbols based on the starting operation of the player, and the internal winning combination and the stopping operation of the player. Based on and, the variable display of the symbols is stopped. Further, there is provided an advantageous state control means capable of producing an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by the assist replay time ART which enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player (see FIG. 14). . Further, there is provided setting changing means capable of changing the setting for determining the payout rate, which is the ratio of the total number of game media input to the total number of game media input, in a plurality of high and low stages (in FIG. 6, a setting key type switch 54). Etc.).

As in the case of FIG. 13, the gaming machine of the present modification has a replay time in which the lottery mode (breakdown and/or lottery value of the re-game combination) of the re-game combination is different, and the re-game probability has a relatively high level difference. It includes probable replay times RT1, RT4 and highly probable replay times RT0, RT2, RT3.

In addition, the internal winning combination, the normal winning combination SBp that functions as a specific ending combination (hereinafter referred to as a specific punk combination) without displaying the combination of winning and operation symbols and ending the operation as a trigger for changing the lottery mode of the re-game combination. The low accuracy replay time RT1 including the specific bonus combination MBz configured by the combination continuous operation device relating to the second type special accessory including the winning of No. in the operation end condition, and the other bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 in FIG. , RT4 and highly accurate replay times RT0, RT2, RT3 are randomly selected. At RT5, which is during the internal winning of BB1 to BB4, neither BB1 to BB4, MBz nor SBp is randomly selected.

The winning probability of the specific bonus combination MBz is set to be the same regardless of the setting. A predetermined probability within the range of several tenths to several hundredths, for example, a lottery value of 1311, 1311/65536 ≈ 1/50, without overlapping with other small wins and re-gaming wins. , Win alone. This winning probability is set to a value that causes an uncertain situation in which, when the number of games in one set of ART is 40, it may or may not be hit once during ART. Instead of this, for example, the winning probability of MBz is determined so that the numerical value of the reciprocal of the winning probability of the specific bonus combination MBz and the number of games during MBz operation has a relationship of the number of games of one set of ART, and the winning probability of ART is determined. The probability that MBz is won once in one set may be increased. Further, instead of determining the winning probability of MBz according to the number of games of one set of ART, the winning probability of MBz may be determined according to the average number of continuing games of ART including addition.

The combination of operation symbols of the specific bonus combination MBz (“left symbol”-“middle symbol”-“right symbol”) is, for example, “replay”-“bell”-“bell”, and the display probability is 1 (maximum 4 frames. It is possible to pull in the relevant pattern to the effective line by sliding). Therefore, when MBz is won, a combination of operation symbols can be displayed in the winning game, and the next game is in operation of MBz. The second class special accessory CB is always activated during the operation of the MBz, and during the operation of the CB, all the small wins accompanied by the payout of medals are in the winning state regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The combination display probability of the operation symbols of MBz may be less than 1 so that there may be a game state inside MBz.

During the operation of CB while the specific bonus combination MBz is operating, the specified number of inserted coins is changed to two (multiplied by two), the number of payouts of all small winning combinations is also changed to two, and the maximum number of sliding frames is one frame. The reel stopped within the limited 75 ms is, for example, the left reel 3L. The middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R maintain a maximum four-frame slip, and the effective line is changed to only one line in the middle stage. During the operation of CB, the combination of the symbols relating to the small winning combination with the payout of medals is preferentially displayed, rather than the combination of the operating symbols of the replay combination and the normal accessory SBp, and the left reel 3L is firstly displayed. When the left first stop is performed, any of the small wins NML01 to NML35 shown in FIG. 22 can be displayed, and two medals are paid out. Instead, during CB operation during MBz operation, the specified number of inserts is maintained at 3 pieces (multiplying 3 pieces), and multiple 3 payout small wins are added as exclusive combinations during CB operation. It is also possible to give priority to three small payouts when a small win is won.

The operation of the specific bonus combination MBz ends when the total number of acquired medals from the start of operation exceeds a predetermined upper limit, for example, 29, that is, 30 or more, and the operation of CB ends when the operation of MBz ends. Therefore, the operation of MBz ends in 15 games when there is no winning of the specific punk combination SB in the middle. During this period, two coins are inserted in each game and two coins are paid out, and medals are neither decreased nor increased. However, it is not necessary for the number of inserted medals and the number of paid-out medals to be the same, and it is not necessary to reduce or increase the number of medals, and it is a net increase obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of paid-out medals during the assist replay time ART. The net increase is less than the number of medals. Conversely, during the assist replay time ART that activates the instruction function during the high-accuracy replay time RT2, etc., the net increase in number obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of medals acquired is larger than that during the operation of the specific bonus hand MBz. Good.

The ordinary bonus object SBp, which is a specific punk role that terminates the operation of the specific bonus combination MBz, has a setting difference in which it wins at a winning probability according to the setting, and the winning probability is a fraction of one to several hundreds. Within one range, the setting is 1<2<3<4<5<6, and the lower setting is lower and the higher setting is higher. If low,
In setting 1, the lottery value is 3000, 3000/65536≈1/21.8,
In setting 2, the lottery value is 3600, 3600/65536≈1/18.2,
In setting 3, the lottery value is 4200, 4200/65536≈1/15.6,
In setting 4, the lottery value is 4800, 4800/65536≈1/13.7,
With setting 5, the lottery value is 5400 and 5400/65536≈1/12.1.
In setting 6, the lottery value is 6000 and 6000/65536≈1/10.9.
These probabilities are such that the number of games in which the operation of MBz does not end prematurely can effectively create a situation in which the lower the setting, the lower the possibility of being terminated, and the higher the setting, the higher the possibility of being terminated, during the 15 games. Stipulated in. Even in the setting 1, for example, the reciprocal number of the number of games during MBz operation when there is no midway end, that is, about 1/15, is secured, setting 2 is about 1/14, setting 3 is about 1/13, Setting 4 may be about 1/12, setting 5 may be about 1/11, setting 6 may be about 1/10, and so on. Further, it is preferable that each time the setting is changed by one step, a difference of one game or more occurs during the period during which the MBz is operating. In this case, if the probability that MBz is expected to win about once in one set of ART, the probability of SBp will be determined so that there is a difference of 1 G or more in the average number of games during the MBz operation including the end of the process. The difference in the probabilities according to the setting of SBp is small when the probability of MBz is high, and is large when the probability of MBz is low.

No. "F_MBz" as No. 99, No. "F_SBp" is added as 100, and the lottery is performed at RT0 to RT4. With respect to the lottery values of the specific bonus combination MBz and the normal accessory SBp, at RT0, the lottery values shown in FIG. The lottery values of 39 to 45, the same No. in RT1. Out of lottery value of 0, the same No. in RT2. The lottery value of 39, the same No. 3 at RT3. Out of lottery value of 0, the same No. in RT4. It is ensured by reducing the lottery values out of 0. In this case, the difference in the lottery value of the normal accessory SBp, which increases the lottery value as the setting is higher, is mainly No. The lottery value that is out of 0 is adjusted to be large by setting it low and set small by setting it high.

The specific bonus combination MBz is not used as a trigger for changing the lottery mode of the re-game combination by displaying and ending the combination of winning and operation symbols, and during operation of MBz, No. in FIG. Nos. 1 to 38 are the winning ranges of the respective re-gaming combinations or small combinations that do not overlap with the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4, and No. 1 in FIG. The internal lottery is performed using the lottery table corresponding to the replay times RT0 to RT4, which are treated as outliers for “F_MBz” added as 98.

Therefore, when the operation of the specific bonus MBz ends, the game is basically continued at the replay time when the winning of MBz is won. However, if MBz is won during RT3 of the finite replay time, it will move to RT0 when the number of games from the rush of RT3 reaches 8, so MBz will be triggered when the result of these 8 games is obtained. The lottery table in operation is replaced with the lottery table of RT0, and when the operation of MBz is completed, the game is continued at RT0.

The combination of operating symbols of the normal accessory SBp is, for example, “blank”-“blank”-“blank”, and the display probability is 5/20×5/20×5/20=1/64, and in many cases, SBp does not operate because the combination of SBp operation symbols cannot be displayed. If a combination of operation symbols can be displayed only for a game that is won in SBp, SBp is in operation for the next game. During operation of SBp, the lottery table corresponding to RT0 to RT4 is used to change the lottery mode of the re-play combination without changing the lottery mode of the re-play combination, and the lottery table is increased by one or more lottery values of the small winning combinations. To do. The prescribed number of coins inserted during SBp operation is the same as that during MBz operation, and the number of coins to be paid out for a prize is limited to two. The number of medals does not increase, and the number of medals decreases when the margin is pulled. If SBp is won while MBz is operating, SBp does not operate because the small winning combination is preferentially displayed, and SBp functions exclusively as a puncturing combination that terminates MBz halfway.

During the non-win replay time RT0 to RT4 of the specific bonus combination MBz, the lottery mode of the re-game combination is not changed even if SBp is activated, and when the operation of SBp ends, basically, the winning of SBp is won. The game will be continued at the replay times RT0 to RT4 obtained. However, if a combination of SBp operation symbols is displayed by winning the SBp in the eighth game from the rush of RT3 of the finite replay time, the game is performed at RT0 from the game while the SBp is operating, and the eighth time from the rush of RT3. When the SBp is in operation in the game, the game is played at RT0 after the operation of SBp is completed.

During the non-winning game of the specific bonus combination MBz in each replay time RT0 to RT4, the transition from the normal state, which is not in the advantageous state, to the advantageous state is performed according to the mode shown in FIG. That is, by winning a weak rare combination (“F_weak rare combination A”, “F_weak rare combination B”), a normal advantageous section of at least 9 games and a high accuracy 1 state is shifted from the next game. By winning the chances (“F_chances A1” to “F_chances A4” and “F_chances B1” to “F_chances B4”) that do not overlap with the bonus combination, high accuracy for at least 9 games from the next game. It shifts to the normal advantageous section of 2 states.

In addition, by winning the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1”), for example, ART lottery with a winning probability of 8/256 is performed. At the time of winning, through the precursory period lottery in which the predictive period is selected from 9 to 16 games, It is determined to be an advantageous section by ART via the normal advantageous section of the present omen state, and when not winning, it is transferred to the normal advantageous section of the highly accurate 3 states via lottery period lottery.

Furthermore, by winning a bonus combination (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3”, and “F_BB4”) that does not overlap with the watermelon 2, for example, an ART lottery with a winning probability of 64/256 is carried out. After the end of the game, it was decided to make it an advantageous section due to ART, such as the line battle preparation state followed by the line battle state. When not winning, after the bonus state, at least 32 games from the next game, high-precision 4 state It shifts to the normal advantageous section.

In short, in the non-winning game of the specific bonus combination MBz, a bonus other than the combination of the watermelon 2 as a bonus combination is triggered by the combination of the weak rare combination, the single chance, and the winning of the watermelon 1. With the winning of the winning combinations BB1 to BB4 as an opportunity, it is possible to increase the chances of a game in which the instruction function is activated, such as a transition to a normal advantageous section and determination of ART.

On the other hand, in the game during the operation of the specific bonus combination MBz in each of the replay times RT0 to RT4, the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are not randomly selected. Therefore, at least the winning function of BB1 to BB4 is used as a trigger to determine the ART and the like. There is no possibility of increasing the chance of playing the game. For this reason, during the normal state before the transition to the advantageous state, the expected value for increasing the chance of a game to activate the instruction function is that in the non-winning game of the specific bonus combination MBz, the specific bonus combination MBz is operating. Will be higher than the game.

As shown in FIG. 113, there is no setting difference in the winning probability of the specific bonus combination MBz, but the lower the setting, the lower the winning probability of the normal accessory SBp that functions as the specific punk combination that ends the operation of the specific bonus combination MBz. Since the higher the setting, the higher the setting, the setting 1 of the low setting tends to have a long operating period of the specific bonus combination MBz, and the setting 6 of the high setting tends to have a short operating period of the specific bonus combination MBz. Therefore, during the ART game or mainly in the low-probability replay time RT1 where the ART has not been determined, the higher the setting, the more advantageous the situation where the ART can be easily determined.

In addition, the higher the setting, the shorter the period during which the specific bonus combination MBz is operating. Therefore, the number of times MBz is won from the non-winning state of MBz is increased, and the number of MBz operation ends is also increased. Therefore, if the specific bonus combination MBz is won while playing the ART game at the high-accuracy replay time RT2 or the like, the common process is performed, for example, as a common process triggered by the winning of MBz and/or the end of operation of MBz. A predetermined number of games, for example, 5 games may be added uniformly only when the winning and/or the operation ends. When such an addition is made, the higher the setting, the more advantageous.

Furthermore, if a specific bonus combination MBz is won while playing an ART game in the high-accuracy replay time RT2 or the like, the number of medals does not increase during the operation of MBz. It is possible to shorten the period in which the net increase rate of the medal due to the operation of is reduced, and it is possible to reduce the impediment of the sense of speed of the payout. Further, when the number of continuous games during ART includes the number of games during which the specific bonus combination MBz is operating, the period during which the specific bonus combination MBz is operating changes according to the setting, and during the ART depending on the setting. It is possible to make a difference in the winning payout of. In this case, the lower the setting, the longer the period during the MBz operation, and the higher the setting, the shorter the period during the MBz operation.

However, in the first place, during the ART game at the high-accuracy replay time RT2 or the like, the game is in the advantageous state, so that the processing relating to the instruction function in the advantageous state is changed from the normal state to the advantageous state. Since a strict requirement for probabilistically managing the internal winning combination is not required, if the specific bonus combination MBz is won, the condition is that it is during ART and during the high-accuracy replay times RT0, RT2, RT3. It may be added during operation to function as a specialized zone, in which case the range of game play can be further expanded.

For example, the period during MBz operation tends to become shorter as the setting becomes higher. Therefore, if the specific punk role SBp is won before the operation of MBz ends with exceeding the upper limit of the acquired number, the enemy is defeated within the time limit, A certain mission such as rescue of an ally or stopping of a bomb may be successful, and a predetermined number of additional games, for example, 50 games may be given. The number of games may be increased so that the specific punk role SBp can be drawn earlier and the specific mission can be completed earlier. This specific mission is performed by notifying the player by means of an effect animation or the like on the display device 11 on the sub side.

Further, while the specific bonus combination MBz is operating, all the small prizes related to the acquisition of the game media are in the winning state regardless of the result of the internal lottery, but the result of the internal lottery similar to the non-winning of the specific bonus combination MBz. Depending on the winning combination, the number of additional games determined by lottery may be given from, for example, 5 to 100 games. This also can widen the range of playability.

When MBz operation during ART is added to make it a specialized zone, it is possible to supplement the demerit that the feeling of payout speed becomes slower and to give extra merit, which can enhance the enjoyment of the game. By stopping the subtraction of the number of continuous games of ART during MBz operation, the number of won medals does not decrease. In addition, since the current state does not decrease or increase while MBz is operating, it is easy to increase the winning probability of MBz, and it is possible to insert the current state maintenance period of the medal during the game period throughout the game, so that the short term or medium period can be inserted. This makes it easier to comply with short-term ball output regulations, which is also preferable from this point.

Further, even in the normal state of non-advantageous state, the winning combination specified as a result of internal lottery similar to the non-winning of the specific bonus combination MBz corresponds to a winning combination transition role. In this case, it may be possible to determine the ART or shift to the normal advantageous section. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being significantly disadvantaged even if MBz is won during the low-probability replay time RT1 or the like during non-ART, and at the same time, an ART display triggered by an unusual display during MBz operation. It is possible to add unexpectedness to decisions. From this point, the range of playability is expanded.

In the above modified example, the specific bonus combination MBz is not used as a trigger for changing the lottery mode of the re-game combination to display and finish the operation of the winning combination and the operation symbol combination, but after the operation of the specific bonus combination MBz is completed, You may move to an existing or newly defined highly accurate replay time with a high probability of replaying, and in this one highly accurate replay time, you will randomly draw the pushing forward role that will trigger a fall to the less accurate replay time, If the player is not in the advantageous state, etc., the correct answer push order for maintaining the highly accurate replay time is not notified, and the fall to the less accurate replay time is easily induced. The order of pressing the correct answer for maintaining the replay time may be notified. Further, the specific bonus combination MBz is set to have no difference, but the higher the setting, the lower the winning probability may be, and the higher the setting, the higher the winning probability may be. Further, the specific punk combination SBp may be replaced with the normal combination by using a first-class special combination that is randomly selected during the operation of the specific bonus combination MBz.

[System that gives a difference in the proportion by the same process regardless of the result of lottery] Modification The gaming machine of this modification starts variable display of symbols based on the start operation of the player, and the internal winning combination and the player. The variable display of the symbols is stopped based on the stop operation of. Further, there is provided an advantageous state control means capable of producing an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by the assist replay time ART which enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player (see FIG. 14). . Further, there is provided setting changing means capable of changing the setting for determining the payout rate, which is the ratio of the total number of game media input to the total number of game media input, in a plurality of high and low stages (in FIG. 6, a setting key type switch 54). Etc.).

As in the case of FIG. 13, the gaming machine of the present modification has a replay time in which the lottery mode (breakdown and/or lottery value of the re-game combination) of the re-game combination is different, and the re-game probability has a relatively high level difference. It includes probable replay times RT1, RT4 and highly probable replay times RT0, RT2, RT3.

In this modified example, the internal winning combination is configured by a continuous operation device for a second-class special accessory that brings all the small winning combinations related to the acquisition of the game medium into a winning state regardless of the result of the internal lottery during the operation. The predetermined bonus combination MBd to be played is included and the lottery is performed at low accuracy replay times RT1 and RT4 and high accuracy replay times RT0, RT2 and RT3 together with the other bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 of FIG. At RT5, which is during the internal winning of BB1 to BB4, neither BB1 to BB4 nor MBd is randomly selected.

MBd is won with a winning probability of no setting difference that does not change depending on the setting. Generally, the probability is common to the settings 1 to 6, which are predetermined within the range of several tenths to several hundredths, for example, the lottery value is 100, and the probability of 100/65536≈1/655 is another small role. And win the game alone without duplication. No. "F_MBd" is added as 99, and lottery is performed at RT0 to RT4.

In this modification, No. 1 in FIG. The lottery value of the F_maintenance lip of 39 is set to be 1000, RT1 is 0, RT2 is 16000, RT3 is 4953, RT4 is 8966, and RT5 is 5053. In addition, in FIG. As for the lottery value out of 0, the winning probability (lottery value) decreases as the set value increases. In setting 1, RT1 is 173, RT1 is 39573, RT2 is 173, RT3 is 10822, and RT4 is 39577, RT5. 22289, and the higher the setting, the higher the winning probability (lottery value). 21, 30 and No. 17 of FIG. The increase in the lottery value (excluding the lottery value 0) of No. 74 is set to No. It is absorbed by reducing the lottery value out of 0.

After all, when the lottery value of the changed portion is specified, it becomes as shown in FIG. In the internal lottery table during the normal game of FIG. 116, the total of the lottery values of each RT0 to RT5 is 65536 for all of the settings 1 to 6 including the addition 100 of “F_MBd” of RT0 to RT4. Here, No. Nos. 21, 30, and 74 are the winning areas of the winning combination with the setting difference in which the lottery value increases as the setting becomes higher. A deviation of 0 is a winning area of a non-winning combination (one which does not correspond to a winning combination) in which the lottery value becomes smaller as the setting becomes higher. FIG. 116 shows an example of the lottery value for each setting for a winning combination having a setting difference, but the lottery value for each setting is not limited to this. In addition, the role of setting difference, No. Although the bonus combination or the small combination of 21, 30, and 74 is used, the re-game combination may be used.

The combination of MBd operation symbols (“left symbol”-“middle symbol”-“right symbol”) is, for example, “replay”-“bell”-“bell”, and the display probability is 1 (effective at a maximum of 4 frame slips). It is always possible to pull in the corresponding pattern on the line). Therefore, if MBd is won, a combination of operating symbols can be displayed in the winning game, and MBd is in operation in the next game. The second class special accessory CB is always activated during the operation of MBd, and during the operation of CB, all the small winning combinations accompanied by the payout of medals are in the winning state regardless of the result of the internal lottery.

During CB operation while MBd is in operation, the specified number of inserted coins is changed to 2 (multiplied by 2), the payout number of all small wins is changed to 10, and the maximum number of sliding frames is limited to 1 frame 75 ms. The reel to be stopped within is, for example, the left reel 3L. The middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R maintain a maximum four-frame slip, and the effective line is changed to only one line in the middle stage. During the operation of the CB, the combination of symbols relating to the small winning combination with the payout of medals is preferentially displayed. When the left first stop is performed to stop the left reel 3L first, the NML01 to the one shown in FIG. Any small win of NML 35 can be displayed and 10 medals will be paid out.

The operation of MBd ends when the total number of earned medals from the start of operation exceeds a predetermined upper limit, for example, 119, that is, 120 or more, and the operation of CB ends when the operation of MBd ends. Therefore, the operation of MBd ends in 12 games. During this period, the medals with a difference of 8 coins can be net-added by inserting 2 coins in each game and paying out 10 coins. That is, the player can net increase the number of medals 8×12=96.

While MBd is operating, the internal lottery is specified as a result of performing internal lottery similar to when MBd is not operating or is not winning. The record of the difference number obtained by subtracting the number of medals is updated. Specifically, No. 1 in FIG. In the case of the first-type winnings belonging to the combined winning area of the winning combination with no setting difference and the non-winning area of the winning combination excluding 21, 30, 74, the difference number record is updated. No. of FIG. In the case of the second type of winnings belonging to the winning area of the winning combination of 21, 30, and 74, the difference number record is not updated. No. When the re-gaming combination is used instead of 21, 30, or 74, the winning belonging to the winning area of the re-gaming combination having the setting difference becomes the second kind of winning, and in the case of the second kind of winning, Do not update the record of the difference.

No. 1 in FIG. The winning area of the winning combination having the setting difference of 21, 30, and 74 is larger as the setting becomes higher in the order of setting 1<2<3<4<5<6. Therefore, there is a possibility that the winning type is the second type belonging to this area. The higher the setting is, the higher the setting is, and the higher the setting is, the higher the possibility that a game in which the record of the difference number between the 12 games during MBd operation is not updated occurs. Therefore, the difference in the number of medals provided to the player is 96 in all of the settings 1 to 6, and the difference as internal information is likely to be 96 in the lower setting, while it is high. The higher the setting, the more likely the number will be less than 96.

Depending on whether the updated value of the difference number as the internal information is less than the predetermined value 96, or when it is greater than or equal to the predetermined value 96 (96), the expected value for increasing the game for operating the instruction function, specifically, There is a height difference in the expected value that determines the ART or the addition.

That is, if MBd is won in the normal state that is not in the advantageous state, the state shifts to the temporary advantageous state, and when the difference number as the internal information when the operation of MBd ends is less than 96 sheets, when the operation of MBd ends, A set of 40 games per lottery by a lottery process using a 1-byte random number extracted independently from the internal lottery random number triggered by the operation of the start lever 16 at the start of the game when the operation of MBd ends Whether the ART is won or not is determined, and if the ART is won, the advantageous section is maintained to allow the ART game, and if the ART is not won, the temporary advantageous state is ended and the normal state is restored. When the difference number as the internal information becomes 96 or more (96 sheets) at the end of the operation of MBd, the lottery for determining the success or failure of the ART cannot be received and the normal state is restored at the end of MBd.

If MBd is won in the advantageous state, the advantageous state is maintained, and when the difference number of the internal information at the end of the operation of MBd is less than 96, the 1-byte random number etc. mentioned above is used at the end of the operation of MBd. Depending on the lottery process that was performed, whether or not the ART or the addition for one set of 40 games is determined, and if it is won, the advantageous state is maintained to allow the ART or the addition, and in the case of non-win, the advantageous state before the MBd winning or Return to normal state. If the difference number of internal information at the end of MBd operation is 96 or more (96 sheets), you cannot take the lottery to decide whether to win the ART or the addition, and at the end of MBd operation, the advantage before winning MBd Return to normal or normal state.

As described above, when MBd is operated, even if the number of medals that can be net increased last time and this time is the same, the winning is specified in advance as a result of performing the internal lottery similar to when MBd is not operated, depending on the type of winning combination. The update value of the difference number as the defined internal information changes, and there is a difference in height between the expected value for ART and the addition depending on whether the update value is less than the predetermined value 96 sheets or more than the predetermined value 96 sheets. For this reason, it is possible to provide the player with unexpected game playability.

In addition, since the lottery value (winning area) of the combination that updates the record of the difference number as internal information is changed between the high setting and the low setting, the expected value for ART or addition is changed according to the setting. It is possible to increase the difference in the payout rate due to the setting difference.

Further, since the winning probability of MBd does not change depending on the setting, not only does the net increase in the number of medals held by the player become the same due to the operation of MBd, but also the player's awareness of the setting can be reduced. It is possible to change the expected value for the ART or the addition according to, and it is possible to more effectively create a surprising gameplay.

In this modification, No. 1 in FIG. In the case of the first type of winning except for the areas 21, 30, and 74, the record of the difference number is updated, and No. 1 in FIG. In the case of the second kind of winning in the area of 21, 30, and 74, the difference number record is not updated, and when the difference number is less than 96, ART or addition is enabled, and the difference number is 96 or more. Although it is not possible to add ART or addition to No. 1, the No. of FIG. In the case of a deviation of 0 (in the case of the first type winning), the record of the difference number is updated, and No. 1 in FIG. If the difference is other than 0 (in the case of the second type of winning), the record of the difference number is not updated, and for example, when the difference number is less than 8, it is possible to add or add, and the difference number is 8 or more. In case of, the ART or the addition may be prohibited.

Further, in the present modification, the winning area of the winning combination having the setting difference is increased as the setting is higher, and the ART or the addition is made possible when the difference number as the internal information is less than the predetermined value (for example, less than 96). However, the higher the setting is, the smaller the winning area of the winning combination having the setting difference may be, and it may be a disadvantageous situation that the ART or the addition is disabled when the difference number as the internal information is less than the predetermined value. Further, in this modification, the type of winning combination in which the winning is specified as a result of the internal lottery similar to that during the non-operating or non-winning of the MBd during the operation of the MBd, with or without the setting difference, is taken into consideration. Although it is divided into two types, it may be divided into three types depending on whether there is a setting difference or not, a re-gaming role or a minor role, and a breakdown of the re-gaming role and/or a breakdown of the minor role. Accordingly, the types may be further divided.

Further, in the present modification, the difference number obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of acquired medals is used as the predetermined internal information, but the number of acquired medals, the number of inserted medals, the number of games, etc. may be simply used. Good.

Further, in this modification, the determination of ART and the determination of the addition can be expected with the same probability while MBd is operating. However, it is possible to increase the ART rush rate, which is the first hit of the ART, and the number of sets in the ART. The ART continuation rate may be combined with different probabilities. Furthermore, a plurality of bonus combinations are used, and for each bonus combination, a mode with a high ART rush rate but a low ART continuation rate, a mode with a low ART rush rate but a high ART continuation rate, both the ART rush rate and the ART continuation rate are normal. The performance of the instruction function may be variously changed, such as the mode.

In this modified example, the predetermined bonus combination MBd is set to have no difference, but the higher the setting, the higher the winning probability is. Further, the predetermined bonus combination may be configured by the second type special accessory CB.

[Morning of machine equipped with advantageous section] Modified example The gaming machine of this modified example starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player, and the variation of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. Stop the display. Further, there is provided an advantageous state control means capable of producing an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by the assist replay time ART which enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player (see FIG. 14). . Further, there is provided setting changing means capable of changing the setting for determining the payout rate, which is the ratio of the total number of game media input to the total number of game media input, in a plurality of high and low stages (in FIG. 6, a setting key type switch 54). Etc.).

In this modified example, instead of FIG. 13, as shown in FIG. 117, the lottery mode of the re-gaming combination (the details of the re-gaming combination and/or the lottery value) (a) to (f) non-RT, RTX, A plurality of replay times including RTY, RTH, RT5 and a bonus state are provided. A finite replay time equivalent to RT3 in FIG. 13 is not provided. The combination of the symbols "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-"cherry 1" is not defined as the combination of the transition trigger symbols for shifting the replay time.

A) Non-RT
This non-RT is an initial replay time which is set on the condition that the lottery mode of the re-gaming combination is not changed and the setting change operation including the setting change and the re-setting to the same setting, that is, the reset is performed. Only in this non-RT, the F_RTX transition lip that causes the symbol combination “bell”-“watermelon”-“red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank” to be displayed as the special transition opportunity symbol combination to be displayed in the REP07 in FIG. 21 is randomly selected. .

The lottery value for each non-RT replay combination by breakdown is as follows.
1) F_RTX migration rep (REP07) is 8966
2) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 06) is 6
3) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 06) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the non-RT re-play combination is 8978, and the probability is set to the low-accuracy replay time of about 1/7.3. The F_confirmed lip is an overlap of REP01 to REP06. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

B) RTX
This RTX is a special replay time to be transferred on the condition that the combination of special transition opportunity symbols (REP07) is displayed based on the winning of the F_RTX transition rep in the non-RT of the initial replay time. This RTX is a finite replay time that returns to non-RT after the result of the game of a predetermined long-term game, for example, 65,535 times is obtained (after 65535G has been exhausted), and the "replay" of the bell spill at RTX- Even if "Watermelon"-"Bell" is displayed, RTX is maintained. In most cases, one of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 is won before the result of a limited number of games is obtained, and the RTX is exited.

The lottery value for each replay combination of RTX is as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 8966
2) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 06) is 6
3) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 06) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RTX is 8978, and the probability is a low-probability replay time of about 1/7.3. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

C) RTY
This RTY is a return replay time that is shifted after the bonus game based on the winning of BB1 to BB4 of FIG. In the non-RT, before the winning of the F_RTX transition rep (REP07), the No. of FIG. If the winning order of 77 to 98 is won and the bell spill is displayed, it is possible to shift from non-RT.

The lottery value for each replay combination of RTY is as follows.
1) F_Batting order 1 and RTH and other maintenance rep (REP01+02+09) is 1400
2) F_Batting order 2 and RTH and other maintenance rep (REP01+03+09) is 1400
3) F_Batting order 3 and RTH and other maintenance rep (REP01+04+09) is 1400
4) F_Batting order 4 and RTH and other maintenance rep (REP01+05+09) is 1400
5) F_Batting order 5 and RTH and other maintenance rep (REP01+06+09) is 1400
6) F_Batting order 6 and RTH and other maintenance rep (REP01+08+09) is 1400
7) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 566
20) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 06) is 6
21) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 06) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RTY is 8978, and the probability is set to the low-accuracy replay time of about 1/7.3. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

In addition, for example, 1) "F_Batting order 1 and RTH and other maintenance replies" means that at the time of winning, if the batting order 1 which is the pressing order of the correct answer, that is, the left middle and right order is stopped, the operation shifts to RTH. Display "Cherry 1/Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1"-"Watermelon" (REP09), which is a combination of trigger patterns, move to RTH, and perform a stop operation other than left middle right, "Replay"-"Replay" "-"Replay" (REP01) is displayed to maintain the RTY. The same applies to batting order 2 (center left/right), batting order 3 (center left/right), batting order 4 (center right/left), batting order 5 (center left/right), and batting order 6 (center right/left).

After shifting to the return replay time RTY, shifting to the non-RT of the initial replay time and the special replay time RTX is prohibited. From RTY to non-RT or RTX, either directly or indirectly via another replay time, there is no definition of a combination of transition trigger patterns that enables transition. Note that in RTY, No. 1 in FIG. Even if the winning order of 77 to 98 is won and the bell spill is displayed, it still stops at RTY.

D) RTH
This RTH shifts from RTY by displaying “Cherry 1/Cherry 2”-“Cherry 1”-“Watermelon” (REP09), which is a combination of the triggers for shifting to RTH at the return replay time RTY, and replays. It is a highly reliable replay time for playing the assist replay time ART that activates the instruction function in a highly probable state.

The lottery values for each of the replay combinations of RTH are as follows.
1) F_Left first stop, RTY and others are maintained Rep (REP02+08) is 4500
2) The maintenance stop (REP02+03+08) for RTY and others at the first stop during F_ is 4500
3) F_Right 1st stop keeps RTY and others maintenance REP (REP02-04+08) 4500
4) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 16273
5) F_Upper Lip (REP01+04) is 2450
6) 5000 for F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+04+05)
7) F_Lower Lip (REP01+03+04) is 2450
8) F_Bullet Lip (REP03) is 8970
9) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 06) is 6
10) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 06) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RTH is 48655, and the probability is about 1/1.35, which is a highly accurate replay time. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

Note that, for example, 1) "F_left first stop and RTY and other maintenance replies" means that when the winning operation is performed, if the stop operation is performed at the left first stop, which is an incorrect pressing order, the transition to RTY is triggered. Display "Red 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank"-"Replay"-"Replay" (REP08), which is a combination of symbols, and make a transition to RTY, and perform a stop operation other than the first stop on the left. 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank”-“Replay”-“Cherry 1” (REP02), which means to maintain RTH. The same applies to 2) middle first stop and 3) right first stop.

E) RT5
This RT5 is based on the winning of one of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 that is randomly drawn during the non-RT, RTX, RTY, and RTH general games, and in the winning game, the small winning combination or the re-gaming combination that is the object of the duplicate winning is preferentially displayed. Since the combination of the operation symbols is not displayed in, the internal winning of the bonus (in the state between the flags) is carried over the winning flag of the bonus combination related to the winning that is transferred to the game subsequent to the winning game. The replay probability is, for example, a medium probability (medium rep) of about 1/2.49.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT5 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 5053
2) F_Upper Lip (REP01+04) is 60
3) F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+07+08) is 306
4) F_Middle stage rip 2 (REP01+05) is 8992
5) F_Middle stage rip 3 (REP01+06) is 11775
6) F_Lower stage REP (REP01+03+04) is 180
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT5 is 26366, and the probability is about 1/2.49. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

In addition, during the non-RT, RTX, RTY, and RTH general games, the breakdown and lottery value of the winning combination regarding the bonus combination and the small combination are as shown in No. 16 of FIG. 1-No. No. 38 of FIG. 61-No. It is the same as the lottery value other than RT5 in 98. In addition, in the state between the flags of RT5, the details of the winning combinations and the lottery values for the small winning combinations are No. 1 in FIG. 61-No. This is similar to the lottery value of RT5 in 98.

F) Bonus state This bonus state is started by displaying the combination of the operation symbols of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 related to the winning. The bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are configured by the accessory continuous operation device BB related to the first-class special character, and the first-class special character RB is always in operation during the operation of BB, and the RB operation during the BB operation. It becomes the inside game state. The replay probability is 0, and the deviation is 0, and any one of F_JAC1_1 to 6 and F_JAC2 shown in FIG. 18 is won. The operation of BB1 to BB4 ends when the upper limit of the number of medals for each upper limit is exceeded (the RB of the normal operation also ends), and returns to RTY.

The transition from the normal state, which is the non-advantageous state, to the advantageous state is performed according to the aspect shown in FIG. In other words, by winning a weak rare role (“F_weak rare role A”, “F_weak rare role B”), which is one of the advantageous state transition triggers, at least 9 games from the next game, a high-precision 1 state is normally advantageous. Move to section. By winning a chance eye (“F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4”) that does not overlap with the bonus role, which is one of the advantageous state transition trigger roles, From the next game to at least 9 games, the game is shifted to the normal advantageous section of 2 highly accurate states.

Furthermore, by winning the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1”), which is one of the advantageous state transition triggers, for example, ART lottery with a winning probability of 8/256 is performed, and at the time of winning, the omen period is 9 to 16 games. After the lottery period is selected between the signs, it is decided to make it an advantageous section by ART via the normal advantage section called the main sign state, and at the time of non-win, it is the normal advantage section that has the high accuracy 3 state after the signage period lottery. Move to.

Furthermore, a winning combination of bonus combinations (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3”, and “F_BB4”) that does not overlap with the watermelon 2, which is one of the advantageous state transition trigger combinations, makes the winning probability 64/256, for example. ART lottery is performed, and at the time of winning, it is determined that it is an advantageous section by ART that is a line battle state following the line battle preparation state after the bonus state ends, and at the time of non-winning, at least from the next game after the bonus state ends. During the 32 games, the game is shifted to the normal advantageous section of 4 highly accurate states.

In short, the advantageous state based on the winning of the predetermined advantageous state transition trigger role that the lottery value does not fluctuate during the general game, that is, a weak rare role, a single chance, a bonus role excluding duplication with watermelon 1 and watermelon 2. It shifts to the normal advantage section included in.

When the operation of setting change is performed after the business of the previous day is finished and the business of the day is started, the game can be played from the non-RT of the initial replay time. In non-RT, before displaying the spilled bell and shifting to the return replay time RTY, the F_RTX shift rip is won with a probability of 8966/65536 ≒ 1/7.3, and a combination of special shift trigger symbols related to REP07 It is possible to shift to the special replay time RTX by displaying "bell"-"watermelon"-"red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank".

In the special replay time RTX, if a bonus combination BB1 to BB4 is won during the advantageous state after the advantageous state beyond the normal advantageous period is generated, the ART of 1 set 40 games is determined before the ART is determined. , If ART has already been determined, add one set of ART. Other than RTX, ART is determined with a probability of 64/256 by a two-stage lottery or the like under the condition that the overlap with watermelon 2 is not included, whereas in RTX, bonus combination BB1 to Only by winning BB4, the ART or the addition is determined with a high probability (100%). That is, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given. Here, the predetermined specific internal winning combination that enables the award to be given is the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4.

After shifting from the special replay time RTX to a time other than RTX, the privilege given when the specific internal winning combination is won in RTX is not given. That is, when the bonus combination BB1 to BB4 is won in the RTX, it shifts to the bonus state through RT5 during the bonus internal winning, shifts to the return replay time RTY after the bonus game ends, and shifts to the non-RT and RTX after that. Therefore, in the case of winning the bonus combination BB1 to BB4 in RTX, the privilege is one-time only. After the start of business, a bonus is given to the player who first started playing the game by winning the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 in the RTX. Therefore, while maintaining the fairness of the game, a morning benefit can be given to the player. , You can increase the operation of the game machine from the first thing in the morning.

In the above description, the non-RT of the initial replay time and the special replay time RTX are provided as the replay time after the setting change that is performed after the operation of changing the setting. However, the replay time after the setting change is configured by one replay time. Good. In this case, only one of the non-RT of the initial replay time and the special replay time RTX may be provided. The one replay time after setting change is configured by an infinite replay time that does not define a finite number of times. In addition, if the replay time after changing the setting is configured as an infinite replay time, the spilling of the bell will be displayed before the benefit is given in the replay time after changing the setting, and the replay time RTY will be immediately entered. In order to prevent it from happening, it is preferable not to define the bell spills in the combination of the triggers for the transition to RTY. Even if the bell spills are displayed in the replay time after changing the settings, After changing the settings, you can stop at the replay time, and you can more surely grant benefits.

In this modified example, the replay time after setting change non-RT or RTX which shifts under the condition that the setting change operation is performed, and the transition after the bonus game based on the winning of the predetermined bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are completed. Including the replay time RTY, after the transition to the RTY, the transition to the replay time after the setting change is disabled, and the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 which are predetermined internal winning combinations in the replay time after the setting change are won. In this case, an advantage is given to the player that the ART or the bonus is determined with a higher probability (100%) than when the bonus combination BB1 to BB4 is won after the setting is changed and the replay time is not changed. After shifting from the replay time to a time other than the replay time after the setting change, the privilege given when the bonus hands BB1 to BB4 are won in the replay time after the setting change may not be given.

In this modification, when the ART is determined, the instruction function is activated at the high-accuracy replay time RTH. No. 1 in FIG. If you win any of the 77-98 press order small wins, you will be notified of the correct press order in which eight medals will be paid out, and "F_Left first stop RTY and other maintenance rep (REP02+08)", " If you win the replay combination of either RTY or other maintenance rep at F_Middle 1st stop (REP02+03+08), or "F_Right 1st stop at RTY or other maintenance REP (REP02-04+08)", RTH is maintained. Notify the correct answer pushing order. Therefore, the player can obtain a certain number of medals without reducing the number of medals in his hand during the duration of the ART.

When the number of continuous games or the number of sets of ART becomes 0, the operation of the instruction function is stopped, and the replay time RTY is dropped by the display of the bell spill or REP08. When the number of continuous games or the number of sets of ART becomes 0 and the fall to the return replay time RTY is a condition, the advantageous state is ended and the normal state is restored.

In this modified example, the predetermined specific internal winning combination that enables the award at the special replay time RTX is the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4, but instead of this, or in combination with it, a weak rare combination, A single chance eye, an advantageous state transition trigger role such as the watermelon 1, and/or a predetermined small win or a re-game role other than the advantageous state transition trigger role may be used. When the RTX is in the advantageous state of the normal advantageous zone or more, the replay time is referred to as RTX as the process related to the instruction function in the advantageous state, and the advantageous state transition trigger and/or the advantageous state transition is performed. With the winning of a predetermined small win or re-gaming role other than the trigger role as an opportunity, the winning probability of the two-stage lottery is, for example, 128/256=50% high You may grant the privilege to determine. Further, the special replay time RTX may be an infinite replay time instead of the finite replay time, and may be allowed to shift to another replay time from the RTX by displaying a combination of predetermined transition trigger symbols. In this modified example, the return replay time RTY and the high-accuracy replay time RTH are provided, but one or more low-accuracy or a transition from the return replay time RTY or the high-accuracy replay time RTH by displaying a combination of predetermined transition trigger patterns or High-accuracy replay time may be added.

[Ceiling of machine with advantageous section] Modification Example The gaming machine of this modification starts the variable display of the symbols based on the start operation of the player, and the variation of the symbols based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. Stop the display. Further, there is provided an advantageous state control means capable of producing an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by the assist replay time ART which enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player (see FIG. 14). . The internal winning combinations include predetermined bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 similar to those in FIG.

In this modified example, instead of FIG. 13, as shown in FIG. 118, the lottery modes of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are the same, but the lottery mode of the re-game combination (breakdown of the re-game combination and/or lottery value) is different. A plurality of replay times including RT1000, non-RT, RT5, and bonus state of the following a) to d) are provided.

A) RT1000
This RT1000 is a finite replay time of staying for a predetermined finite number of times, for example, 1000 games, unless there is a winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 from the game after the transfer by displaying the combination of the specific transition trigger symbols. When there is no winning of BB1 to BB4, it returns to non-RT after digesting 1000 G.

The lottery values for each of the replay combinations of RT1000 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 8966
2) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 09) is 6
3) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 09) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the non-RT re-play combination is 8978, and the probability is set to the low-accuracy replay time of about 1/7.3. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

B) Non-RT
This non-RT is an infinite replay time that enables a game in which the number of payout medals exceeding the number of inserted medals can be easily obtained by the operation of the instruction function. It is set to a highly accurate replay time with a high probability of replay, and the game of the assist replay time ART that activates the instruction function in non-RT is performed.

The lottery value for each non-RT replay combination by breakdown is as follows.
1) F_Left 1st stop, RT1000 and others keep maintenance (REP02+08) is 4500
2) F_Medium first stop keeps RT1000 and other REPs (REP02+03+08) 4500
3) F_Right 1st stop keeps RT1000 and other replies (REP02-04+08) 4500
4) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 16273
5) F_Upper Lip (REP01+04) is 2450
6) 5000 for F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+04+05)
7) F_Lower Lip (REP01+03+04) is 2450
8) F_Bullet Lip (REP03) is 8970
9) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 06) is 6
10) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 06) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the non-RT replay combination is 48655, and the probability is about 1/1.35. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

Note that, for example, 1) “F_left first stop and RT1000 and other maintenance replies” means that at the time of winning, if a stop operation is performed at the left first stop, which is the pressing order of the incorrect answer, the transition to RT1000 is triggered. Display "Red 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank"-"Replay"-"Replay" (REP08) as a combination of symbols, shift to RT1000, and perform a stop operation other than the first stop on the left, "Red 7" /Blue 7/BAR/Blank"-"Replay"-"Cherry 1" (REP02) is displayed to mean a role to maintain non-RT. The same applies to 2) middle first stop and 3) right first stop.

C) RT5
This RT5 is based on the winning of one of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 that is randomly selected during the RT1000, non-RT general game, and in the winning game, a small winning combination or a re-playing combination targeted for overlapping winnings is preferentially displayed. Since the combination is not displayed, the bonus internal winning is carried over (the state between the flags) in which the winning flag of the bonus combination related to the winning to be transferred to the game subsequent to the winning game is carried over. The replay probability is, for example, a medium probability (medium rep) of about 1/2.49.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT5 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 5053
2) F_Upper Lip (REP01+04) is 60
3) F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+07+08) is 306
4) F_Middle stage rip 2 (REP01+05) is 8992
5) F_Middle stage rip 3 (REP01+06) is 11775
6) F_Lower stage REP (REP01+03+04) is 180
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT6 is 26366, and the probability is about 1/2.49. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

In addition, the breakdown and lottery value of the winning combination for the bonus combination and the small combination during the RT1000 and non-RT general games are shown in No. 16 of FIG. 1-No. No. 38 of FIG. 61-No. It is the same as the lottery value other than RT5 in 98. In addition, in the state between the flags of RT5, the details of the winning combinations and the lottery values for the small winning combinations are No. 1 in FIG. 61-No. This is similar to the lottery value of RT5 in 98.

D) Bonus state This bonus state is started by displaying the combination of the operation symbols of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 related to the winning. The bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are configured by the accessory continuous operation device BB related to the first-class special character, and the first-class special character RB is always in operation during the operation of BB, and the RB operation during the BB operation. It becomes the inside game state. The replay probability is 0, and the deviation is 0, and any one of F_JAC1_1 to 6 and F_JAC2 shown in FIG. 18 is won. The operation of BB1 to BB4 ends when the upper limit of the number of medals for each upper limit is exceeded (the RB of the normal operation also ends), and returns to the non-RT.

The transition from the normal state, which is the non-advantageous state, to the advantageous state is performed according to the aspect shown in FIG. In other words, by winning a weak rare role (“F_weak rare role A”, “F_weak rare role B”), which is one of the advantageous state transition triggers, at least 9 games from the next game, a high-precision 1 state is normally advantageous. Move to section. By winning a chance eye (“F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4”) that does not overlap with the bonus role, which is one of the advantageous state transition trigger roles, From the next game to at least 9 games, the game is shifted to the normal advantageous section of 2 highly accurate states.

Furthermore, by winning the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1”), which is one of the advantageous state transition triggers, for example, ART lottery with a winning probability of 8/256 is performed, and at the time of winning, the omen period is 9 to 16 games. After the lottery period is selected between the signs, it is decided to make it an advantageous section by ART via the normal advantage section called the main sign state, and at the time of non-win, it is the normal advantage section that has the high accuracy 3 state after the signage period lottery. Move to.

Furthermore, a winning combination of bonus combinations (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3”, and “F_BB4”) that does not overlap with the watermelon 2, which is one of the advantageous state transition trigger combinations, makes the winning probability 64/256, for example. ART lottery is performed, and at the time of winning, it is determined that it is an advantageous section by ART that is a line battle state following the line battle preparation state after the bonus state ends, and at the time of non-winning, at least from the next game after the bonus state ends. During the 32 games, the game is shifted to the normal advantageous section of 4 highly accurate states.

In short, the advantageous state based on the winning of the predetermined advantageous state transition trigger role that the lottery value does not fluctuate during the general game, that is, a weak rare role, a single chance, a bonus role excluding duplication with watermelon 1 and watermelon 2. It shifts to the normal advantage section included in.

In this modified example, when the advantageous state is generated in the non-RT of the infinite replay time, it is possible to give the player a first advantage which is more advantageous than when the advantageous state is generated in the RT1000 of the finite replay time. ..

Specifically, as the first specification, for example, until each of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 is won in the non-RT, each game is extracted independently of the random number for internal lottery by the operation of the start lever 16, for example, 1 byte. By the two-stage lottery process using random numbers (possible numerical values 0 to 255, random number denominator 256), the advantageous state is continued at a high continuation rate of, for example, 225/256≈88%. Note that the continuation rate may be 100%, and the advantageous state may always be continued until the bonus winning combinations BB1 to BB4 are won.

While the advantageous state in the non-RT is continuing, No. 1 in FIG. If you win any one of the 77-98 press order small wins, you will be notified of the correct press order in which 8 medals will be paid out, and "F_ left first stop keeps RT1000 and others", "F_ middle 1st" When the player wins the re-playing combination of "RT1000 and others keep maintenance rep when stopped" and "RT1000 and others keep maintenance rep at F_right first stop", the correct push order for keeping non-RT is notified. Therefore, the player can win the bonuses BB1 to BB4 without reducing the medals on hand while the advantageous state continues.

However, in non-RT, before the advantageous state is caused, or even after the advantageous state is caused, after the continuation is interrupted by the continuation rate, the normal state is established. If you win either "Maintenance REP", "Maintenance REP for RT1000 etc. with F_Middle 1st stop", or "Maintenance REP for RT1000 etc. with F_Right 1st STOP", do not notify the correct answer order for maintaining non-RT. Therefore, "Red 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank"-"Replay"-"Replay" related to REP08 may be displayed, and the process may shift to RT1000.

In addition, in this modification, when the bonus combination BB1 to BB4 is won in the non-RT of the infinite replay time, the second benefit which is more advantageous to the player than when the bonus combination BB1 to BB4 is won in the RT1000 of the finite replay time. Can be given.

Specifically, as the second identification, for example, the ART for activating the instruction function for one set 40 games in the non-RT returning after the bonus game is settled. After returning to the non-RT after the bonus game, if the bonus combination BB1 to BB4 is in the normal state at the time of winning, the state is shifted to the advantageous state, and if the bonus combination BB1 to BB4 is at the winning state, the advantageous state is set. The ART is maintained and the ART is started from the first game after returning from the non-RT.

When the ART is finished by exhausting the number of continuous games, the free state is finished and the normal state is restored. Therefore, the risk of shifting to RT1000 is high, but if the advantageous state can be generated again before shifting to RT1000, the advantageous state can be continued at a high continuation rate, and the risk of shifting to RT1000 can be avoided. In addition, it is possible to expect to win the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 while suppressing the reduction of the medals on hand.

In addition, the second privilege is used in place of or in combination with ART confirmation, and during the bonus game of bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 won in non-RT, “F_JAC_1” to “F_JAC_6” of FIG. At the time of winning, the instruction function may be activated to obtain 15 medals. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of net-added medals obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of medals acquired during operation of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4.

When the bonus combination BB1 to BB4 is won in the non-RT or RT1000, after the bonus game, the non-RT is performed without passing through the RT1000. In non-RT, it is easy to obtain more medals than the number of inserted medals by keeping the advantageous state with a high continuation rate as the first benefit and/or confirming the ART as the second benefit, so that the number of medals held can be increased. Can increase.

When the operation of the instruction function disappears in the non-RT, it is easy to move to RT1000 by the display of REP08 which is a combination of the specific transition timing symbols, but if the bonus combination BB1 to BB4 is won while the finite number of 1000 games are exhausted, the bonus game Later, you can move to non-RT again and increase the medals you have.

In addition, even if the bonus combination BB1 to BB4 cannot be won during the completion of RT1000, it is possible to shift to the non-RT after 1000 games and increase the number of medals on hand. Therefore, 1000 games of RT1000 function as the number of ceiling games, and effectively relieve a weak player who has a chance to activate the instruction function while maintaining the fairness of the game but could not take the chance. be able to.

In the above modification, only the non-RT of the highly accurate replay time is provided as the infinite replay time, but the infinite replay time may include the following i) to iii).

i) RT0
This RT0 returns after the end of the operation of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 (bonus game) and after the finite number of times have been exhausted from RT1000, and the re-game combination is, for example, only F_maintenance rep, and the re-game probability is about 1/7.3. And the initial replay time of the low accuracy replay time.

ii) RT1
This RT1 shifts from RT0 due to the display of bell spills, etc. It includes a maintenance rep for RT1000 and others for one stop, and a low probability replay time with a replay probability of about 1/7.3.

iii) RT2
This RT2 shifts from RT1 by displaying a combination of predetermined promotion opportunity symbols and falls to RT1 due to the display of bell spills and the like, the details of the re-play combination and the lottery value are the same as the non-RT described above, and the ART game High-accuracy replay time.

In this way, if the infinite replay time is configured by RT0, RT1, and RT2, even if the initial replay time RT0 is set to a low replay probability, the ART game can be performed at the high-accuracy replay time RT2. Can achieve the purpose. Further, there is an advantage that a predetermined simulation test can be simply performed only by the initial replay time RT0 without considering the RT1 and the RT2 and the finite replay time RT1000 that can be transferred from the RT1 and the RT2.

The infinite replay time can be configured by an arbitrary number of replay times of 1 or more in addition to the configuration of RT0, RT1, RT3 when configured by only non-RT. Although the finite replay time is configured only by the RT1000, it may be configured by two or more replay times with different finite numbers of times.

[Cycle chance zone that does not use the advantageous section] Modification Example The gaming machine of this modification starts the variable display of the symbols based on the start operation of the player, and the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. Stop the variable display of. Further, there is provided an advantageous state control means capable of producing an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by the assist replay time ART which enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player (see FIG. 14). .

In this modified example, instead of FIG. 13, as shown in FIG. 119, RTL, RTH, and RT0 of the following (a) to (f) in which the lottery mode of the re-game combination (breakdown and/or lottery value of the re-game combination) is different: , RT1, RT5, and a plurality of replay times including a bonus state.

A) RTL
This RTL is a combination of the first transition trigger symbols, for example, a combination of the symbols of REP08, "red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank"-"replay"-"replay" is entered, and the first finite is entered from the entry. This is the first replay time at which the player can stay for the number of games, for example, 50 games. Replay probability for example

The lottery values for each replay combination of the RTL are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 8966
2) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 09) is 6
3) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 09) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT0 is 8978, and the probability is set to a low probability of about 1/7.3. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

B) RTH
This RTH is rushed by the second transition trigger symbol combination, for example, "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-"watermelon", which is a symbol combination of REP09, and a second finite number of times from the rush, for example, 50. It is a second replay time in which the game can be stayed and the replay probability is higher than the first replay time RTL.

The lottery values for each of the replay combinations of RTH are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Lip (REP02) is 29773
2) F_Upper Lip (REP01+04) is 2450
3) F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+04+05) is 5000
4) F_Lower Lip (REP01+03+04) is 2450
5) F_Bullet Lip (REP03) is 8970
6) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 09) is 6
7) F_BB2+F_confirmed rep (BB02+REP01 to 09) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the non-RT replay combination is 48655, and the probability is about 1/1.35. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

C) RT0
This RT0 is set as a return destination of RTL and RTH while the lottery mode of the re-play is not changed, and also as a return destination after the end of the bonus game related to the operation of the bonus hands BB1 to BB4 (FIG. 20). ing.

The lottery value for each replay combination of RT0 is as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Lip (REP02) is 8967
2) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01-10) is 6
3) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01-10) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT0 is 8979, and the probability is about 1/7.3, which is a low probability. The lottery value of the F_maintenance lip is increased by 1 compared to the RTL. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

D) RT1
The RT1 is the same as the RT. 77-No. It is a general replay time to be shifted by displaying a bell spill of “Replay”-“Watermelon”-“Bell” which can be displayed by an incorrect answer in the pushing order when any of the pushing order small wins of 98 is won. It becomes possible to enter RT1 from the first replay time RTL or the second replay time RTH by a transition after staying for these finite number of times, that is, by displaying the bell spill after returning to RT0. In RT1, in accordance with the stop operation, one of the combination of the first transition trigger symbol REP08 and the combination of the second transition trigger symbol REP09 can be displayed. do.

The lottery value for each replay combination of RT1 is as follows.
1) F_Batting order 1 and RTL other than RTH (REP08+09) is 5460
2) F_Batting order 2 and RTH other than RTH (REP01+08+09) is 5460
3) F_Batting order 3 and RTH other than RTH (REP02+08+09) is 5460
4) F_Batting order 4 and RTH other than RTH (REP01+02+08+09) is 5460.
5) F_Batting order 5 and RTL other than RTH (REP07 to 09) is 5460
6) F_Batting order 6 and RTL other than RTH (REP01+07 to 09) is 5460
7) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 15883
8) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 09) is 6
9) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 09) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT1 is 48655, and the probability is about 1/1.35. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

In addition, for example, 1) "F_Batting order 1 and RTL other than RTL rep" means that at the time of winning, if the batting order 1 that is the pressing order of the correct answer, that is, the left middle and right order is stopped, the second transition trigger occurs. Display the combination of symbols "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-"watermelon" (REP09) and shift to RTH, and if you do a stop operation other than left middle right, the first combination trigger symbol combination "Red 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank"-"Replay"-"Replay" (REP08) is displayed to shift to RTL. The same applies to batting order 2 (center left/right), batting order 3 (center left/right), batting order 4 (center right/left), batting order 5 (center left/right), and batting order 6 (center right/left).

The total probability of the specific transition combination of 1) to 6) is 32760/65536≈1/2, and the specific transition combination can be won with a high probability. However, in the normal state, which is the non-advantageous state in which the instruction function is inoperable, the correct answer pressing order is not notified, and therefore, in many cases, the correct answer cannot be obtained and the REP08 is displayed and the first replay time RTL is entered.

E) RT5
This RT5 is a combination of operating symbols for preferentially displaying a small winning combination or a re-gaming combination subject to a double winning in the winning game, based on the winning of one of the bonus winning combinations BB1 to BB4 that is randomly selected in RT0, RT1, RTL, and RTH. Is not displayed, the bonus internal winning is carried over (during the inter-flag state) in which the winning flag of the bonus combination related to the winning that is transferred to the game subsequent to the winning game is carried over. If BB1 to BB4 are won in the RTL and RTH of the finite replay time, the game will be RT5 from the next game even before the finite number of times is exhausted.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT5 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 5053
2) F_Upper Lip (REP01+04) is 60
3) F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+07+08) is 306
4) F_Middle stage rip 2 (REP01+05) is 8992
5) F_Middle stage rip 3 (REP01+06) is 11775
6) F_Lower stage REP (REP01+03+04) is 180
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT6 is 26366, and the probability is about 1/2.49. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

Note that, during the games RT0, RT1, RTL, and RTH, the details of the winning combinations and the lottery values for the bonus combinations and the small combinations are as shown in No. 16 of FIG. 1-No. No. 38 of FIG. 61-No. It is the same as the lottery value other than RT5 in 98. In addition, in the bonus internal winning of RT5, the details of the winning combinations and the lottery values for the small winning combinations are shown in No. 17 of FIG. 61-No. This is similar to the lottery value of RT5 in 98.

F) Bonus state This bonus state is started by displaying the combination of the operation symbols of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 related to the winning. The bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are configured by the accessory continuous operation device BB related to the first-class special character, and the first-class special character RB is always in operation during the operation of BB, and the RB operation during the BB operation. It becomes the inside game state. The replay probability is 0, and the deviation is 0, and any one of F_JAC1_1 to 6 and F_JAC2 shown in FIG. 18 is won. The operation of BB1 to BB4 ends when the upper limit of the number of medals for each upper limit is exceeded (the RB of the normal operation also ends), and returns to RT0.

In this modification, in RT0, RT1, RTL, and RTH, the transition from the normal state, which is the non-advantageous state, to the advantageous state is replaced by the advantageous state transition trigger of FIG. No. Nos. 61 to 68 of the single chance, the same No. 69 and 70 weak rare roles, same No. When the watermelon 1 of 71 is won, a two-stage lottery process using, for example, a 1-byte random number (possible number 0-255, random number denominator 256) that is extracted independently of the internal lottery random number when the start lever 16 is operated Therefore, the advantageous state is set with a predetermined probability, for example, 25/256≈10%.

In short, in RT0, RT1, RTL, RTH, a weak rare combination, a single chance, a watermelon 1, a lottery value does not change in RT0, RT1, RTL, RTH. Can occur.

Identification of the above-mentioned 1) to 6) during the advantageous state during the general replay time RT1, including the case where the normal state transitions to the advantageous state during the general replay time RT1 or the case where the advantageous state is already present at the transition to RT1. When the winning combination is won, the operation of the instruction function for displaying REP09 which is a combination of the second transition trigger symbols is permitted. That is, the correct pressing order for displaying REP09 is notified on the sub display device 11 or the like. By following this notification, it is possible to easily shift to RTH.

In the advantageous state during the second replay time RTH, including the case where the normal state shifts to the advantageous state during the second replay time RTH or the case where the advantageous state is already present at the time of shifting to RT2, No. 1 in FIG. 77-No. When any one of the pushing order small wins of 98 is won, the operation of the instruction function for facilitating the acquisition of 8 medals exceeding 3 inserted medals is permitted. That is, the correct pressing order for displaying NML01 for paying out eight cards is notified on the sub-side display device 11 or the like. As a result, it becomes possible to play an ART game in which the instruction function is activated with a high replay probability until 50 games of RTH are exhausted, and the player can increase the number of medals he has.

During the advantageous state during the first replay time RTL, including the case where the normal state shifts to the advantageous state during the first replay time RTL or the case where the advantageous state is already present at the time of shifting to RT1, No. 1 in FIG. 77-No. When any one of the 98 pressing order small wins is won, the number of times the correct pressing order for displaying NML01 for paying out eight coins is notified on the sub-side display device 11 or the like is set to, for example, only once, and the second replay time is set. Reduce the number compared to the advantageous state during RTH. In addition, after informing of this one-time correct pushing order, the advantageous section is ended and the normal section is restored.

Note that in the first replay time RTL, the advantageous state of the pushing order small winning combination is not notified even once, and the winning state of the pushing order small winning combination is set, or the advantageous state is set only in the next game in which the advantageous state is entered. It may be terminated and returned to the normal state.

When the normal state continues, the process shifts from RT1 to RTL, and after waiting a first finite number of 50 games in RTL, the process returns to RT1 via RT0. Even if REP09 happens to be displayed at the time of winning a specific combination in RT1 and the game is transferred to RTH, if the second finite number of 50 games is exhausted in RTH, the game returns to RT1 via RT0.

In the general replay time RT1 that returns almost every fixed period according to the first finite number or the second finite number, the number of inserted medals is conditioned on the occurrence of an advantageous state (including the occurrence at RT1, RT0 or RTH). There is an opportunity to expect to enter the second replay time RTH in which the number of times of notification of the correct push order of the push order small hand that facilitates the acquisition of medals over 100 is increased. Therefore, it is possible to form a chance zone at almost regular intervals by adding the number of games displaying the flat eyes that shift from RT0 to RT1 to the first finite number of times or the second finite number of 50 games.

During the advantageous state during the general replay time RT1, the correct push order for displaying the REP09, which is a combination of the second transition timing symbols, is notified, so that the ART game can be performed in the state where the replay probability is high in the RTH, and the player Can get a certain amount of medals. In addition, the advantageous state is triggered by the winning of the internal winning combination, so that the fairness of the game is maintained.

In the modified example, during the advantageous state at the general replay time RT1 and/or during the advantageous state at the second replay time RTH, for example, No. 1 in FIG. Nos. 61 to 68 of the single chance, the same No. 69 and 70 weak rare roles, same No. At the time of winning the watermelon 1 of 71, by the two-step lottery process using the 1-byte random number described above, with a predetermined probability, for example, 25/256 ≈ 10%, at RT1, a combination of the second transition trigger pattern at the time of winning the specific transition combination. It is decided to add one more notification number for displaying REP09.

Then, the determined additional amount is stocked, and the number of times the stocked information is stocked can be changed from RT1 to RTH. Therefore, with respect to the number of times of notification that has been stocked, it is possible to link the ART that operates the instruction function at the second replay time RTH with a high replay probability.

In the modified example, after the bonus winning combinations BB1 to BB4 are finished operating, the bonus winning combinations BB1 to BB4 can be shifted to RT1 via RT0, and when the bonus winning combinations BB1 to BB4 are won during an advantageous state among RT0, RT1, RTL, and RTH. After the operation is completed, the advantageous state is maintained, and the correct answer order for displaying REP09 which is the combination of the second transition trigger symbols at the time of winning the specific transition combination at the general replay time RT1 is notified.

Therefore, even if the bonus combination BB1 to BB4 is won during the ART game at the second replay time RTH with a high replay probability, and the second replay time RTH ends halfway before reaching the finite number of times, When the operation of the bonus hands BB1 to BB4 is completed, the ART can be redone from the beginning in the second replay time RTH.

In the present modification, both the first finite number of times and the second finite number of times are 50 games, but different numbers of games may be used. In addition, the combination of the first transition trigger symbol (REP08) and the combination of the second transition trigger symbol (REP09), when one is displayed, the other is not displayed, but either one is always displayed. Although defined, the transition trigger combination capable of displaying only the combination of the first transition trigger symbols and the transition trigger combination capable of displaying only the combination of the second transition trigger symbols may be defined separately.
In addition, the accuracy rate of the pressing order is set to be high, for example, 5/6 (5 of 6 kinds of pressing order are correct), and the first pressing order combination that easily shifts to the highly accurate second replay time RTH and the pressing order It is also possible to define a second push forward combination in which it is difficult to shift to the highly accurate second replay time RTH, in which the correct answer rate is set to, for example, 1/6 (one of 6 push orders is correct). In this case, by performing an effect on the sub-side display device 11 that suggests whether the winning of the first push combination is the winning of the first push combination or the winning of the second push combination, the interest in selecting the push order can be improved. .
Further, in addition to the first replay time RTL and the second replay time RTH, a plurality of third, fourth, fifth,... Replay times may be provided. In this case, the advantage of multiple replay times with high accuracy is the ease of transition to the advantageous state, the ease of ART or addition, the small number of payout medals during transition, and the payout for the inserted medals after transition. Depending on the combination of the expected value of the number of medals, such as size, the probability of transition to an advantageous state, ART or addition is low, and the expected value of the number of paid-out medals during and/or after the transition is low. "Low profit", high probability of transition to advantageous state, ART or addition, but low expected value of payout medals during and/or after transition "High probability/low profit", transition to advantageous state or ART or addition It is also useful to set the “high probability/high profit” with a high probability such as the above and a high expected value of the number of payout medals during and/or after the transfer.
Further, in this case, it is also preferable to change the difficulty level of the transition to the high-accuracy replay time with a larger total profit, by a combination of the winning probability of the push order combination, the correct answer rate of the push order, and the like, which are triggers for the transition. In addition to 6 choices to choose from among 6 ways, you can choose 3 choices from left 1st stop, middle 1st stop, right 1st stop, left 1st stop, left 1st stop You may choose from two ways other than the above. Further, instead of selecting the pressing order, it is possible to select which of the different color patterns or the like to select.

[Advantageous section difference acquisition zone] Modified example The gaming machine of this modified example starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player, and the variation of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. Stop the display. Further, there is provided an advantageous state control means for causing an advantageous state in which the instruction function can be activated from a normal state in which the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player is inoperable.

The internal winning combination is similar to that of FIGS. 16 to 20, and includes predetermined bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 that can obtain medals exceeding the number of inserted medals. In addition, the transition of the game state is the same as in FIG.

In the present modification, the transition from the normal state, which is the non-advantageous state, to the advantageous state is replaced with the predetermined internal winning combination other than the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4, as shown in FIG. 120, instead of the mode shown in FIG. Specifically, No. 1 in FIG. Nos. 61 to 68 of the single chance, the same No. 69 and 70 weak rare roles, same No. When the watermelon 1 of 71 is won, a two-stage lottery process using, for example, a 1-byte random number (possible number 0-255, random number denominator 256) that is extracted independently of the internal lottery random number when the start lever 16 is operated As a result, with a certain probability, for example, 64/256=25%, it is possible to shift to the first advantageous state in which the execution of the assist replay time ART that activates the instruction function in RT2 or the like with a high replay probability is undecided. ..

The transition trigger role to the first advantageous state can be arbitrarily set as long as the probability does not change regardless of the lottery mode of the re-gaming combination (breakdown of the re-gaming combination and/or the lottery value), and the bonus combination BB1 ~BB4 may be included.

Also, in the first advantageous state, a predetermined internal winning combination, here, the same single chance opportunity as the transition triggering role to the first advantageous state, a weak rare combination, when the watermelon 1 is won, by the two-stage lottery process described above. With a predetermined probability, for example, 128/256=50%, the execution of the ART that defines a predetermined continuation condition is determined. The ART continuation condition is, for example, the difference number management that the difference number obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of acquired medals does not exceed a predetermined upper limit. For example, 100 sheets or the like are given.

Note that the determination of the execution of ART may be performed with the winning of a winning combination different from the winning combination for shifting to the first advantageous state as an opportunity, or the bonus winning combinations BB1 to BB4 may be included in the winning combinations. Further, since the decision to execute the ART is made during the advantageous state of the first advantageous state, the triggering role for making the decision is the probability depending on the lottery mode of the re-gaming combination (breakdown of the re-gaming combination and/or lottery value). You may include the role that changes. Further, since the determination of the execution of the ART is a process related to the instruction function in the advantageous state, it may be performed not necessarily by the lottery process, for example, by consuming a predetermined number of games not triggered by the winning of the internal winning combination. Good.

In the difference sheet management, the number of FIG. At the time of winning the 77-98 push order small win, the difference number is counted down only when the net increase of 8-3=5 is made by the notification of the correct push order in which NML01 that pays out 8 is won. When a winning combination that does not result in the payout of 8 coins is won or when the payout of 8 coins is not obtained due to a mistake in the pushing order, the countdown is excluded. Note that the ART continuation condition may be based on the management of the number of games, or the management of the number of times of navigating the push order, in addition to the management of the number of differences.

Then, in the present modification, according to a predetermined starting point after the transition to the first advantageous state, for example, the number of medals to be won by the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 won from the start game of the first advantageous state to the decision to execute the ART. The initial difference number as the continuation condition of ART is increased to 100 + "the number of medals obtained by BB1 to BB4 (for example, 255 over 240, etc.)", and the number of games to activate the instruction function during ART, that is, the pushing order. It is possible to increase the number of times the correct answer push order is notified when a small winning combination is won.

Even if the operation of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 based on the winning in the first advantageous state is finished, the first advantageous state is maintained, and the single chance, the weak rare combination, and the two-stage lottery process when the watermelon 1 is won. When the execution of ART is decided with a probability of 50%, ART is started after promotion to RT2 after preparation for ART waiting for promotion to RT2. The initial difference is 100+“the number of medals acquired by BB1 to BB4”. When the remaining difference becomes 0 or less due to the difference count down, the ART is ended. On the condition that the ART has ended and the player has fallen to RT1 with a low replay probability, the advantageous state is ended and the normal section is restored.

During the first advantageous state, if the execution of ART is decided before the winning of the bonus winning combinations BB1 to BB4 is decided, the bonus winnings BB1 to BB4 do not increase the number of medals to be acquired, and the initial difference is the minimum guaranteed. Although it is set to 100 sheets, it is possible to add the remaining difference number under the predetermined condition during the ART.

That is, for example, when the chance, weak rare combination, or watermelon 1 is won during the ART, the number of additional sheets is selected from 20 sheets, 50 sheets, 100 sheets, 300 sheets, and the like by a two-stage lottery process. If the bonus combination BB1 to BB4 is won during the ART, the subtraction of the remaining difference number is stopped, the number of medals obtained by BB1 to BB4 is added to the remaining difference number, and the countdown of the difference number is restarted after the return of RT2. .. Therefore, if an opportunity chance, a weak rare combination, a winning of the watermelon 1 and a winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are involved during the ART, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

As described above, the execution of the ART is undecided, but the execution can be decided, with the opportunity of the single internal winning combination other than the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4, the weak rare combination, and the winning of the watermelon 1 as a trigger. After shifting to the advantageous state, the initial difference number is increased according to the number of medals acquired by the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 won from the start of the transition to the first advantageous state to the decision to execute the ART, and the instruction information is given during the ART. Since it is possible to increase the number of times of notifying, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4. Moreover, since the first opportunity to execute the ART is to have a predetermined internal winning combination other than the bonus combination, that is, a single chance eye, a weak rare combination, and a winning of the watermelon 1, the game characteristics are concentrated on the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4. It is also possible to reduce the risk of impairing the game playability of the ART-equipped machine.

Instead of the above, it is possible to shift from the normal state to the first advantageous state with the winning of the predetermined internal winning combination including the single chance eye, the weak rare combination, the watermelon 1, and the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 as a trigger. Depending on the number of medals acquired based on a predetermined starting point after the transition to the advantageous state, for example, from the start to the decision to execute the ART, all the winning combinations including the small winning combinations and the bonus winning combinations BB1 to BB4 or a predetermined winning combination. Then, the initial difference number may be accumulated to increase the number of games in which the instruction function is activated during ART.

In this case, between the predetermined starting point after the transition to the first advantageous state and the decision to execute the ART, more medals can be appropriately reflected in the subsequent game, and the ART can be more favorably performed. , It is also possible to effectively relieve a weak player whose execution of ART is difficult to decide.

In this modified example, as the bonus combination, the ones which are the continuous operation devices for the first-class special character of BB1 to BB4 are used, but the normal character, the first-class special character, and the second-class special character , Those based on the accessory continuously operating device pertaining to the second type special accessory, may be used alone or in combination. In the case of using the accessory continuous operation device related to the second class special accessory, the acquisition of the medals close to the maximum payout number of 15 coins in the first game is stopped and 15 coins are acquired in the second game. It is also effective to use a bonus combination called a net incremental speed type MB, a gap MB, or the like that is increased.

[New game number management type] Modified example The gaming machine of this modified example starts variable display of symbols based on the start operation of the player, and variable display of symbols based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. To stop. Further, there is provided an advantageous state control means capable of producing an advantageous state corresponding to the advantageous section by the assist replay time ART which enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player (see FIG. 14). .

The internal winning combination is the same as in FIGS. 16 to 20, and the transition of the game state is also similar to that in FIG. The transition from the normal state, which is the non-advantageous state in which the operation of the instruction function is disabled, to the advantageous state is similar to that shown in FIGS.

In this modification, any operation performed by the player on the program of the main CPU 101, that is, the maintenance of medals from the medal insertion slot 14, the operation of the MAX bet button 15a, or the operation of the 1 bet button 15b is performed. , The operation of starting the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by operating the start lever 16 and the operation of stopping the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by operating the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R without accepting any player operation There is provided game lock control means including a game lock execution means for executing a game lock for temporarily stopping the progress, and a game lock reservation means for reserving the execution timing of the game lock.

Execution of the game lock by the game lock execution means, in the game for executing the reserved game lock, triggered by the operation of the start lever 16 for a predetermined lock time, for example, a predetermined time within a range of several seconds to several minutes, for example, 10 seconds. , Instead of starting the reels normally, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are irregularly driven by slow reverse rotation or the like, and then a specific combination of symbols, for example, "red 7"-"cherry 1"-"red 7" is temporarily used. Stop. During this time, a predetermined surprise effect such as a blackout appears on the sub display device 11. When the lock time elapses, the random delay start of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed, and then the normal game progress starting from the normal reel start is resumed.

As shown in FIG. 121 [A], based on the end of the special game by the assist replay time ART that enables the operation of the instruction function at RT2 with a high replay probability, the game lock reservation means in the game lock control means causes the game to be played. The lock execution timing is extracted from a plurality of predetermined candidates, for example, 1500G, 1000G, 500G, 100G, and 32G, for example, independently of the random number for internal lottery and triggered by the operation of the start lever 16. By a lottery process using a 2-byte random number (possible numerical values 0 to 65535, random number denominator 65536), one is determined according to a predetermined distribution probability, and it is reserved to execute the game lock after the determined number of games is reached. At the end of the special game by ART, the section display for notifying the advantageous state provided on the information display 6 on the front of the gaming machine is returned from the lighting to the unlit.

As the number of ceiling games, for example, 1000G is determined at about 60.93%, the longest 1500G is 25%, the relatively short 500G is 12.5%, and the short-term 100G is about 1.56%. 32G is determined to be about 0.01%. In many cases 1000G is determined. At the time of factory shipment, after a setting change operation (setting change or re-setting of the same setting) is performed, for example, 500 G is selected as a default value.

Then, the execution of the game lock and the execution of the special game ART are determined on the condition that the reserved execution timing of the game lock has come and the advantageous state has occurred.

Occurrence from the normal state to the advantageous state is performed according to the aspect shown in FIG. That is, by winning a weak rare combination (“F_weak rare combination A”, “F_weak rare combination B”), a normal advantageous section of at least 9 games and a high accuracy 1 state is shifted from the next game. Further, by winning the chance eyes (“F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye A4” and “F_chance eye B1” to “F_chance eye B4”) that do not overlap with the bonus combination, at least nine games from the next game, It shifts to the normal advantageous section of high accuracy 2 state.

In addition, by winning the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1”), for example, ART lottery with a winning probability of 8/256 is performed. At the time of winning, through the precursory period lottery in which the predictive period is selected from 9 to 16 games, It is determined that the ART is to be executed after the normal advantageous interval of the present omen state, and when not winning, the omen period lottery is performed to shift to the normal advantageous period of the highly accurate 3 states.

Furthermore, by winning a bonus combination (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB3”, and “F_BB4”) that does not overlap with the watermelon 2, for example, an ART lottery with a winning probability of 64/256 is carried out. When the execution is determined and the winning is not completed, after the bonus state is ended, the normal advantageous section of at least 32 games and at least 4 highly accurate states is started from the next game.

In the advantageous state of the normal advantage section, the number of continuing games can be extended according to the aspect of FIG. Further, at the time of transition to the advantageous state including the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section in which the ART is determined, the section indicator is changed from off to lit. The advantageous state due to the normal advantage section ends when the number of continuous games has passed without the ART being determined, and the section indicator is turned off after returning to the normal state. When the ART is determined, the advantageous state is maintained and the section indicator is kept lit.

If the advantageous state that the execution of the ART is decided is triggered by the winning of the watermelon 1 or the winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 excluding the duplication with the watermelon 2, further execution of the reserved game lock When the timing comes and the execution of the ART is determined on the condition that the arrival of the execution timing and the occurrence of the advantageous state overlap, the execution of the ART for two sets is determined. That is, if one ART is set for 40 consecutive games, two sets of 40 ARTs can be executed.

In this case, when the reserved game lock execution timing arrives during the advantageous state in which the execution of the ART triggered by the winning of the watermelon 1 is decided, when the timing of execution of the reserved game lock comes Until the elapse of time, the execution timing of the reserved game lock is delayed, and the reserved game lock is executed in response to the operation of the start lever 16 after the advance period. After this, it is promoted to RT2 via the ART preparation state (line battle preparation state), and after promotion of RT2, the first game of the ART game is started.

Further, when the reserved game lock execution timing comes during the advantageous state in which the execution of the ART caused by the winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 excluding the overlap with the watermelon 2 is decided, the bonus combination BB1 is executed. ~ Until the end of the operation of BB4, the execution timing of the reserved game lock is delayed, and the reserved game lock is executed by the operation of the start lever 16 in the game after the end of the operation of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4. Thereafter, similarly, the player is promoted to RT2 via the ART preparation state (line battle preparation state), and after promotion of RT2, the first game of the ART game is started.

Excluding these, the high probability 2 that was created during the advantage state of the normal advantage section, which is the high-accuracy 1 state that was triggered by the winning of the weak rare role, or the winning of a single chance that does not overlap with the bonus role. When the reserved game lock execution timing arrives during the advantageous state of the normal advantageous section, which is the state, or during the advantageous state of the normal advantageous section, which is the high-precision 3 state with the precursory period caused by the winning of the watermelon 1. Executes the reserved game lock triggered by the operation of the start lever 16 in the game when the execution timing has arrived. Thereafter, similarly, the player is promoted to RT2 via the ART preparation state (line battle preparation state), and after promotion of RT2, the first game of the ART game is started.

In the ART game, which is a special game, in the state where the replay probability is high, the correct answer push order of the push order small winning combination and the correct answer push order that does not fall into RT1 having a low replay probability are notified, so that the player has Eight medals can be easily obtained until the number of continuous ART games reaches 0 without reducing the number of medals, and a certain number of medals can be obtained.

The ART ends when the number of continuous games becomes 0, and in the game in which this ART ends, the timing of execution of the next game lock is randomly selected and reserved, and an advantageous state is provided on condition that the ART ends and the player falls to RT1. To return to the normal state. The section display is also turned off by the end of ART.

Bonus hands BB1 to BB4 excluding duplication with weak rare role, single chance, watermelon 1 and watermelon 2 in the normal state expected for the first hit of ART and the first hit of ART after 2nd time When an advantageous state is generated from a non-favorable state triggered by a winning of a predetermined internal winning combination, the number of remaining games until the execution timing of the reserved game lock comes is determined, and this remaining game is set to a predetermined value, for example. When the number of games exceeds 32, a predetermined lottery for ending the generated advantageous state, for example, transition to the advantageous state, is performed to execute the shortened lottery for reducing the number of remaining games.

As shown in FIG. 121[B], in the shortened lottery, for example, from a plurality of predetermined candidates, for example, 0G (without shortening), 50G, 100G, 300G, and 1000G, for example, the random number for internal lottery is started independently. Either is determined according to a predetermined distribution probability by a lottery process using a 2-byte random number that has been extracted with the operation of the lever 16. The number of remaining games until the execution timing of the reserved game lock is reduced by the determined number of shortened games.

As the number of shortened games, for example, 0G is about 60.93%, 50G is 25%, 100G is 12.5%, 300G is about 1.56%, and 1000G is about 0.01%. In many cases no 0G reduction is determined. As a result of subtracting the remaining number of games by the determined number of shortened games, when the number of games becomes 32 or less, including the case where the number of games becomes negative, the reserved game lock is started.

32 games or less, including the case where the number of remaining games becomes negative when the number of remaining games until the execution timing of the reserved game lock arrives is determined or when the remaining games are subtracted after shortening lottery In the case, enter the preparatory stage to execute the reserved game lock, and when the execution timing of the game lock has not arrived, continue the advantageous state until the execution timing arrives and after that, that is, while maintaining the advantageous state , The game lock is executed and the ART is determined by the operation of the start lever 16 in the game when the reserved game lock execution timing comes. If the number of games remaining is 32 or less as a result of the determination or subtraction, and the game lock execution timing has already arrived, the start lever 16 of the next game is operated while maintaining the advantageous state. , Execute game lock and determine ART.

As described above, even if the advantageous state is ended based on the end of ART which is one special game, the internal countdown of the number of games equivalent to the ceiling is replaced with the internal countdown of the execution timing of the reserved game lock. You can do it. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure the advantageous state for a long time even after the end of one ART. Even after the end of one ART, even a weak player who could not execute the ART again before reaching the ceiling could reach the execution timing of the game lock reserved based on the end of the ART and the occurrence of the advantageous state. You can run ART again on the condition. Since the occurrence of the advantageous state is a weighted condition, as a process related to the instruction function during the advantageous state, the execution of the special game can be decided by referring to the internal information that is not related to the lottery process of executing the game lock, and the fairness of the game can also be achieved. I can keep it.

Further, even if a long-term game number such as 1000G or 1500G is initially determined as the execution timing of the game lock, if an advantageous state is generated after that, the number of remaining games until the execution timing of the game lock comes to a predetermined value of 32G. If the number exceeds the limit, the number of remaining games can be reduced by the shortened lottery, which can enhance the enjoyment of the game. In addition, the shortened lottery is carried out during the occurrence of the advantageous state, so that the fairness of the game is maintained.

Furthermore, when the number of games remaining until the execution timing of the reserved game lock arrives is equal to or less than the predetermined value 32G, in order to continue the advantageous state until the game lock is executed, it is appropriately linked to the execution timing of the game lock. Therefore, the execution of ART can be decided.

In this modification, the game lock reservation means reserves the execution timing of the game lock during the one advantageous state caused by the advantage state control means, and the reserved game lock has one advantage before the execution timing comes. It is not canceled by the end of the advantageous state including the state, and since the execution timing can be referred to during the advantageous state that occurs after making this reservation, the countdown of the execution timing of the reserved game lock is an intermittent advantageous state. It can be done over the period from the occurrence to the end of, and by referring to the execution timing during the advantageous state that occurs after making a reservation, it is appropriately used for counting down the number of ceiling games that straddle the intermittent advantageous state, etc. it can.
In this modification, the assist replay time ART is applied as the special game, but the assist time AT in the assist time equipped machine that activates the instruction function during the bonus internal winning may be applied.
In each of the modified examples described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 121, the advantageous state control means is provided on the program of the main CPU 101, but may be provided on the program of the sub CPU 201. The same applies to the advantageous state control means of the following modified examples.

[Base and Advantageous Zone Transition Probability Operation for Each State] Modification Example In this modification example, a plurality of small winning combinations including a small winning combination of pressing order in which a payout (the number of medals to be paid out) differs depending on a pressing order, a plurality of re-playing combinations, and a predetermined bonus. The combination BB6 is included in the internal winning combination, the variable display of symbols is started based on the start operation of the player, and the variable display of symbols is stopped based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player.

As shown in FIG. 122, the gaming state is a bonus non-winning state where the bonus combination BB6 is randomly selected, “normally medium”, and a combination of bonus operation symbols is not displayed in the winning game of the bonus combination BB6. Includes "inside BB6" in the bonus internal winning state in which the winning flag of the winning combination BB6 is carried over, and "in-running BB6" in the bonus operating state started from the next game after the combination of operation symbols of the bonus winning combination BB6 is displayed. .. At "inside BB6" and "inside normal", which includes at least "inside BB6", the assist time AT that enables the instruction function to notify the information regarding the stop operation of the player is executed.

The effective line is only one line in the middle stage, and the specified number is limited to three. It should be noted that the effective lines may be the upper, middle, and lower three lines, or may be five lines obtained by adding an upper right line and a lower right line thereto. Further, the specified number of thrown coins may be arbitrarily selectable from 1 to 3 or may be limited within the range of 1 to 3 depending on the game state.

The predetermined bonus combination BB6 is composed of a continuous accessory operating device relating to the first-class special accessory. In the “normal medium”, the lottery value is 21845, and the winning probability is 21845/65536≈1/3, for example. Here, the same lottery value is used even if the setting is different, but it may be variable according to the setting.

The combination of operation symbols of the bonus combination BB6 is, for example, left symbol "blank"-middle symbol "blank"-right symbol "blank". 0-frame that can draw a "blank" design to the effective line with 0-frame sliding less than 1 frame, 1 or more that can draw a "blank" pattern to the effective line with 1-frame sliding less than 1 or 2 or more 3 The second frame that can draw the "blank" design to the effective line with less than 2 frame slips, the third frame that is 3 or more and less than 4 the third frame that can draw the "blank" pattern to the effective line, 4 or more and less than 5 A combination of BB6 operation symbols can be displayed when a stop operation is performed within a pulling range of a total of 5 frames of the 4th frame in which a "blank" symbol can be drawn into the activated line by sliding 4 frames. The display probability is 5/20×5/20×5/20=1/4×1/4×1/4=1/64.

In this modified example, in the "BB6 inside", when the winning non-win of any winning combination is subtracted (the probability is 21977/65536 ≈ 1/3 excluding the lottery value of the small winning combination and the re-gaming combination). When), as a predetermined specific stop operation, the operation pattern of BB6 on condition that the "blank" pattern for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R can be displayed on the effective line within the drawing range. The combination of can be displayed. In addition, only in "BB6 inside", instead of the principle of the re-gaming role or the minor role> the accessory continuous operation device or the principle of stop control according to the order of the accessory, the re-game role> the accessory continuous operation device or the role. When the stop control is performed in an exceptional priority order according to the order of object>small win, and there is no winning of the re-play combination, the combination of the operation symbols of the BB6 may be displayed on the condition of a specific stop operation.

"BB6 in operation" after displaying the combination of operation symbols of BB6 is the same in the bonus operation general game state in which the lottery mode of the small winning combination that can obtain the medal is the same as "normal general" and "inside BB6". Starting from "general middle during BB6 operation", "general middle during BB6 operation" randomly draws a predetermined shift combination RB6 composed of a first-class special accessory. The lottery value of RB6 is, for example, 21978, and the winning probability is 21978/65536≈1/3.

The combination of operation symbols corresponding to the shift combination that can be displayed by winning the shift combination RB6 is, for example, left symbol "blank"-middle symbol "watermelon"-right symbol "watermelon". This combination of RB6 operation symbols causes a "blank" symbol for the left reel 3L to be displayed on the condition of a stop operation that can be displayed on the effective line within the pull-in range of 0 to 4 frame slides. The display probability is 5/20×1×1=1/4. From the next game in which the combination of operation symbols of RB6 is displayed, shift to the "RB6 in operation of BB6 operation" of the shift combination operation state in which the first-class special accessory in which the lottery mode of the small combination is changed is in operation .. In the winning game of RB6, when there is no display of the combination of the operation symbols of RB6, it shifts from the next game to “inside RB6 in operation of BB6” in the internal winning combination of shift combination.

"In the middle of BB6 operation" and "inside RB6 during operation of BB6", about the left reel 3L "Blank" If the stop operation of the shift hash that does not pull the "blank" symbol into the effective line, display the combination of RB6 operating symbols Therefore, it is possible to avoid the transition to “the RB6 is operating while the BB6 is operating”. The shift hook can be easily succeeded by performing a stop operation of pulling the relatively easy-to-see "BAR" symbol of the left reel 3L to the middle stage of the activated line. As with “BAR”, the shift loss can be successful even if the stop operation of pulling in the “Red 7” or “Blue 7” symbol of the left reel 3L, which is relatively easy to see, to the middle stage. At the time of successful shift buzz, pull in either "BAR" or "red 7" or "blue 7" to the middle stage of the left reel 3L, and shift bar of "BAR/red 7/blue 7"-"watermelon"-"watermelon" Is displayed to inform the player of its success.

"While BB6 is in operation" means that the RB6 is in operation because of the provision of a predetermined operation end condition for RB6, for example, when the result of eight winnings (displaying a small winning combination) or eight games is obtained. , "BB6 is in operation, return to normal". “BB6 is in operation” ends because the predetermined operation end condition of BB6 is satisfied, for example, when the number of medals acquired from the start of operation of BB6 exceeds the predetermined upper limit of 285 coins. Return to. When the operation of BB6 ends, the operation of RB6 that is in operation also ends.

The operation ending condition of RB6 is, for example, when the result of 5 times of winning or 9 times of game is obtained, the number of times of winning is determined by 8 times or less in advance or the result of predetermined game is acquired by 12 times or less. It may be when it is given. Further, the operation ending condition of the BB 6 may be, for example, when the number of sheets exceeds a predetermined upper limit number within a range not exceeding 285 sheets, such as 96 sheets exceeding.

"Inside RB6 during operation of BB6", since the winning flag of RB6 related to carryover overlaps with the winning flag, there are other gaming states, "in normal general", "inside BB6", and "in operation of BB6". If you win the same small winning combination as in "general middle", the winning flags will be different as a result. Therefore, at the time of the winning of the push order small win, in the combination of the symbol with the largest number of winning flags with the same game result as the priority of the number of the symbols corresponding to the combination of the symbols with the largest number of medals paid out. Changed the concrete form of applying the priority of the corresponding symbols and the number priority, and from the 6 choices that originally can display a combination of symbols with a high dividend with a probability of 1/6, a high dividend with a probability of 1/3 Change to 3 choices that can display the combination of symbols, and the expected value of the number of medals to be acquired for "Inside RB6 while BB6 is operating" from "Inside BB6" and "Operating RB6 while BB6 is operating", etc. Is also high.

The re-game combination of this modified example is as follows 1] to 6]. The combination of the symbols of REP01 to 06 is the same as that of FIG. In the brackets at the end of each, in the order of "normal normal", "inside BB6", "in general during BB6 operation", "inside RB6 during BB6 operation", and "in operation of RB6 during BB6" Indicates each lottery value. Here, the same lottery value is used even if the settings are different, but except for the case where it becomes 0, the total replay probability becomes the minimum probability 8978/65536 ≒ 1/7.3 or more, depending on the setting. You may make it variable.

1] Middle lip; REP01 (5000, 5000, 5100, 5100, 0)
2] Right down lip; REP02 (1730, 1731, 1730, 1731, 0)
3] Chance Lip; REP03 (1024, 1024, 1024, 1024, 0)
4] Fake Lip; REP05 (1024, 1024, 1024, 1024, 0)
5] Advantageous section transition Lip A; REP04 (100,100,0,0,0)
6] Advantageous section transition Lip B; REP06 (100, 100, 100, 100, 0)

In the present modification, the advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state enabling the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player is in the normal section in which the operation of the instruction function is disabled (normal state). In the middle), the advantageous section is moved to the advantageous section (advantageous state) which enables the operation of the instruction function, on condition that the winning of the lip A or B is won. Further, by winning the advantageous section transition rep A or B, at the same time as shifting to the advantageous section, the operation of the assist time AT for notifying the correct answer pushing order of the pushing order small winning combination on the sub-side display device 11 is determined.

Therefore, the advantageous interval transition probability and the AT winning probability are (100+100)/65536≈1/328 in “normal medium” or “inside BB6”, “in medium during BB6 operation” or “inside RB6 during BB6 operation” “Medium” is 100/65536≈1/655, and “RB6 is operating while BB6 is operating” is 0. In addition, after the transition of the advantageous zone based on the winning of the advantageous zone transition rep A or B, the AT may determine its operation with a predetermined probability based on the winning of a chance lip or a predetermined specific small winning combination. Good. Further, the winning combination that triggers the transition to the advantageous section may be selected from small winning combinations or the like instead of the re-playing combination or in combination with the re-playing combination.

The assist time AT starts from a judgment game between a number of games that determines the initial continuous game number, for example, and determines the initial continuous game number within the range of, for example, 50 to 1200 games in accordance with the winning combination during the judgment game. While the AT is operating, a navigation is displayed on the sub-side display device 11 to notify the correct push order when the small push order wins. In addition, the number of continuous games to be added is determined based on the winning of a chance lip or a predetermined specific small winning combination, and the AT starting from the judgment game is stocked based on the winning of the advantageous section transition rep A or B. The operation of the AT ends when the number of continuing games or the stock becomes zero, and when the AT ends, the advantageous section ends and the normal section returns.

The small wins of this modification are as described in 1) to 32) below. The number in parentheses at the end of the formula of the combination of each symbol is the lottery value of the setting 1. In the order of setting 1<2<3<4<5<6, the lottery values of the selected small wins other than the push order small wins are increased, but the same lottery value is set even if the settings are different. May be unified. The lottery mode (breakdown and lottery value) of the small role is "normal normal", "inside BB6", "general during BB6 operation" if the setting is specified, and strictly speaking, the setting and the specified number of inputs are specified. "Medium" and "inside RB6 during operation of BB6" are all the same. This is because the probability variation of the small winning combination is prohibited when the accessory RB6 is not activated.

The combination of the symbols NML01 to 33, 35 is the same as that in FIG. 22, but the payout of NML01 is changed to 11 and the payout of NML30 is changed to 5. NML34 (the part where the bell symbols are aligned on the right down line) is changed to the left symbol "Replay"-the middle symbol "Bell"-the right symbol "Replay" and the payout is also changed to 11, and the pushing order is small like NML01. It is used for the high payout display combination when the correct answer is pressed. NML36 (the part where the bell symbols are lined up in the upper line) is left symbol "Replay"-middle symbol "Replay"-right symbol "Watermelon" is maintained, but the dividend is changed to 11 pieces, and the correct answer is also given to the small push order. It is used as a high payout indicator. NML37 (the role where the bell symbols are lined up in the lower line) is changed to the left symbol "watermelon"-middle symbol "watermelon"-right symbol "replay" and the dividend is also changed to 11 cards. It is used as a high payout indicator.

Basically, in the push order small combination (left middle right bell 1 right middle left bell 4), one of left middle right, left right middle, middle left and right, middle right left, right left middle, right middle left is a high payout. There are 6 choices, which is the correct pressing order to obtain 11 medals. At 5/6, the answer order becomes incorrect, and a display probability of 1/2 gives one medal with a low payout. When the correct stop order is the first stop time when the first stop operation is performed and the second stop time when the second stop operation is performed, priority is given to the symbols that will be 11 with high payout due to the stop control according to the number of sheets priority. In the case of pull-in, the first stop or the second stop, in the case of an improper pressing sequence, one symbol with a low payout is preferentially pulled in by the stop control according to the number priority. In the head of each of the following 1) to 24) pressing order small roles, the correct pressing order of 6 choices is also described.

Instead of NML38 to 40 of FIG. 22, each left symbol-middle symbol-right symbol, in NML38 "red 7"-"bell"-"bell", in NML39 "blue 7"-"bell"-"bell". , NML40 is "blank"-"bell"-"bell", and NML41 is "BAR"-"bell"-"bell", and 11-character combination for paying out 11 medals is newly defined. The display probability of each of the 11 bells 1 to 3 of 25) to 27) below is 1/2, but since each NML 41 is won in duplicate, it is possible to avoid missing a small win as much as possible in a game on the market. As a stopping operation, that is, a so-called DDT hitting method, a miss operation can be avoided by performing a stopping operation of stopping the "BAR" symbol on the effective line within the drawing range for the left reel 3L. Further, as long as this DDT striking method is used, the "blank" symbol is not drawn in for the left reel 3L, and the display of the combination of the BB6 operation symbol and the display of the combination of the RB6 operation symbol can be avoided.

1) Left middle right bell 1; NML01+02+03+06+07+10+11 (1098)
2) Bell 1 in the left and right; NML01+04+05+08+09+12+13 (1098)
3) Left middle right bell 2; NML34+02+03+06+07+10+11 (1098)
4) Left and right center bell 2; NML34+04+05+08+09+12+13 (1098)
5) Left middle right bell 3; NML36+02+03+06+07+10+11 (1098)
6) Right and left center bell 3; NML36+04+05+08+09+12+13 (1098)
7) Left middle right bell 4; NML37+02+03+06+07+10+11 (1098)
8) Middle left and right bell 4; NML37+04+05+08+09+12+13 (1098)
9) Center left and right bell 1; NML01+02+04+06+07+10+11 (1098)
10) Middle right left bell 1; NML01+03+05+08+09+12+13 (1098)
11) Center left and right bell 2; NML34+02+04+06+07+10+11 (1098)
12) Middle right left bell 2; NML34+03+05+08+09+12+13 (1098)
13) Center left and right bell 3; NML36+02+04+06+07+10+11 (1098)
14) Middle right left bell 3; NML36+03+05+08+09+12+13 (1098)
15) Middle left and right bell 4; NML37+02+04+06+07+10+11 (1098)
16) Middle right left bell 4; NML37+03+05+08+09+12+13 (1098)
17) Right Left Middle Bell 1; NML01+02+05+06+07+10+11 (1098)
18) Right middle left bell 1; NML01+03+04+08+09+12+13 (1098)
19) Right Left Middle Bell 2; NML34+02+05+06+07+10+11 (1098)
20) Right Middle Left Bell 2; NML34+03+04+08+09+12+13 (1098)
21) Right Left Middle Bell 3; NML36+02+05+06+07+10+11 (1098)
22) Right Middle Left Bell 3; NML36+03+04+08+09+12+13 (1098)
23) Right Left Middle Bell 4; NML37+02+05+06+07+10+11 (1098)
24) Right Middle Left Bell 4; NML37+03+04+08+09+12+13 (1098)
25) 11 sheets Bell 1; NML38+41 (1860)
26) 11 bells 2; NML39+41 (1860)
27) 11 bells 3; NML40+41 (1860)
28) 1 cherry A; NML14-17+22-30 (600)
29) 1 cherry B; NML14-21+26-29 (600)
30) 5 pieces watermelon A; NML35 (720)
31) 5 sheets watermelon B; NML30+35 (720)
32) 5 special characters; NML 31-33 (8)

In the outlying areas where there is no new winning of any of the roles, "normal general middle" is 133, "BB6 inside middle" is 21977, "BB6 working middle middle" is 0, and "BB6 inside RB6 inside" is 21977.

In each gaming state, the lottery value of the small winning combination that can win medals, and the winning amount within the specified time of 190 ms (within the maximum pull-in range of 4 frames) when the stop operation is performed at any time in any order Small winnings constant calculated by multiplying the display probability that a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be displayed on the activated line, and the dividend ratio obtained by dividing the number of medals obtained by the combination of small winning symbols displayed on the activated line by the number of inserted medals S is the total number of small winning combinations of all small winning combinations depending on the game state, r is the lottery value of the re-gaming combination, and M is the numerical range of the random number for the internal lottery unit, and the number of unit medals (1 The expected value e=s/(Mr) of the number of acquired medals for (the number of coins) is calculated as follows.

"Normally in general"
s=1098×24×(1/6×11/3+5/6×1/2×1/3); push order small win +1860×3×1/2×11/3; 11 sheets Bell 1-3
+600 x 2 x 1 x 1/3; 1 cherry A, B
+720×2×1×5/3; 5 sheets Watermelon A, B
+8×1×5/3; 5 special roles ≒32807
Since r=8978,
e=32807/(65536-8978)≈0.58 (about 58%).
Base Base, which is the number of three-player games that can be played with 50 medals worth 1,000 yen,
Base=50/((1-0.58)×3)≈40 games.

"Inside BB6"
Since the BB6 relating to carryover is duplicated, a so-called reach line indicating a winning of a bonus combination may be displayed, but a specific mode of applying the number priority and the number priority in the stop control when displaying the small combination is Since it is the same as “normal normal medium”, s=32807 as in “normal normal medium”, and r=8979 is almost the same as “normal normal medium”.
Therefore, the expected value e is about 0.58 (about 58%) and Base is about 40 games.

"General during BB6 operation"
Since the specific mode of applying the number priority and the number priority in the stop control when the small winning combination is displayed is 6 selections as in the case of “normal general medium” or the like, s=32807. Further, r=8978 is set to be the same as “normally medium”.
Therefore, the expected value e is about 0.58 (about 58%) and Base is about 40 games.

"Inside RB6 during BB6 operation"
Since the RB6s related to carryover overlap, when the winning order of the pushing order small win is correct and the first stop is in the correct pushing order, the second stop and thereafter are not questioned, and the symbols that give a high payout by the stop control according to the number priority When the improper pressing order is confirmed at the time of pull-in and the first stop, the symbols that give a low payout are pulled in by the stop control according to the number priority. Therefore, of the push order small wins, the left middle right bell and the left and right middle bells are the left bells that are correct when the left reel 3L is stopped first, and the middle left and right bells and the middle right left bells are the first reels 3C stopped first. The right bell and the right middle bell are the right bells when the right reel 3R is stopped for the first time, and the push order small wins are three choices.

Therefore, "inside RB6 during operation of BB6", s, e, and Base are as follows.
s=1098×24×(1/3×11/3+2/3×1/2×1/3); push order small win +1860×3×1/2×11/3; 11 sheets Bell 1-3
+600 x 2 x 1 x 1/3; 1 cherry A, B
+720×2×1×5/3; 5 sheets Watermelon A, B
+8×1×5/3; 5 special roles ≒48179
Since r=8979,
e=48179/(65536-8979)≈0.85 (about 85%),
Base=50/((1-0.85)×3)≈111 games, which is twice as many as 40 low-base games such as “Normal Medium”, “BB6 Inside Medium”, and “BB6 Running Medium”. It will be a high base that considerably exceeds 80 games.

"RB6 is operating while BB6 is operating"
In this game state, the total lottery value of NML01, 34, 36, 37 for which the maximum lottery value of the high payout small winning combination exceeding the number of inserted coins is the maximum in other game states, 1098×6=6588 or more, for example, 6589. Lottery value of 27992 obtained by subtracting the lottery value 6589 of the small role all from, for example, 34581 which exceeds the total lottery value 34580 of 1) to 32) and the small winning oars in which all the small winning combinations NML01 to 41 are duplicated. Then, the one-win combination all that makes the one-win combinations NML02 to 29 win in duplicate is randomly selected. When winning a small role all, paying out 11 medals regardless of the pushing order and the pressed position. When winning a small role all, paying only one medal regardless of the pushing order or the pressed position. put out.

Therefore, “RB6 is operating while BB6 is operating”, s, e, and Base are as follows.
s = 6589 x 11/3; small role all +27992 x 1/3; one role all ≒33490
Since r=0,
e=33490/65536≈0.51 (about 51%),
Base=50/((1-0.51)×3)≈34 games, which is the lowest base.

BB6 is supposed to end when the total number of earned medals from the start of operation exceeds 285, and until the condition for ending operation of BB6 is met, the minimum base "RB6 in operation while BB6 is operating" It is possible to suppress the reduction of the number of medals on hand by minimizing the number of medals in the RB6 during operation of the BB6 as high as possible. That is, in the “inside RB6 during BB6 operation” in the internal winning combination of shift combination, the expected value of the number of medals to be acquired is set to “inside BB6 in bonus internal winning state” and “the RB6 operation during BB6 operating in shift operating state”. Since it is higher than “Medium”, even if the state is changed from “Normally Medium” in the bonus non-winning state or “Inside BB6 inside” in the bonus internal winning state to “BB6 in action” in the bonus operating state. By playing the game "inside RB6 while BB6 is operating" during "in operation", it is possible to suppress the reduction of the number of medals held by the player as compared with the conventional case, and prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

In the game on the market, the player does not use the DDT hitting method in which the "BAR" symbol of the left reel 3L can be drawn into the activated line in each of the reels 3L, "normally in the middle" or "inside the BB6". For 3C and 3R, a combination of BB6 operation symbols can be displayed by performing a specific stop operation in which the "blank" symbol can be drawn into the activated line, and it becomes possible to shift to "BB6 in operation". Further, "general middle during BB6 operation" and "inside RB6 during BB6 operation", the player does not perform the stop operation that can draw the "blank" symbol of the left reel 3L into the activated line, and the left reel 3L By performing the stop operation similar to the DDT hitting method in which the "BAR" symbol can be drawn into the activated line, the shift loss can be successful, and it is possible to never shift to "while BB6 is operating and RB6 is operating". That is, it is up to the player to decide whether to shift to "during BB6 operation" or not to shift, or to shift to "during RB6 operation while BB6 is activated" or not.

On the other hand, in the test shooting test in which the stop operation is performed at an arbitrary time in an arbitrary order, unlike the game in the market, regardless of the intention of the player, the BB6 winning game of “normally ordinary” or “BB6 inside In the game in which “” is subtracted, the “blank” symbol of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is drawn into the middle effective line with a display probability of 1/64. Therefore, the combination of the BB6 operation symbols is displayed at a constant rate, and the process moves to "BB6 in operation". Also, in the RB6 winning game of “general middle while BB6 is operating” or the game of “inside RB6 while BB6 is operating” with a deviation, the probability of 1-1/4=3/4 of the left reel 3L "Blank" does not pull in the design. Therefore, at a constant rate, the combination of the RB6 operation symbols is not displayed, and the transition to “during RB6 inside during BB6 operation” or the “inside RB6 during BB6 operation” is maintained.

For this reason, in the test shooting test, a high percentage of the player enters the RB6 inside the BB6, which is a high base, at a certain rate, and pushes up the low expected value of 0.58 for "normal medium" and "inside the BB6". , It becomes possible to exceed the predetermined lower limit of 0.6. In general, if the expected value of the number of medals to be won based on the winning of a small win is increased in order to fully implement the lower limit measures in the test shooting test, there is a high possibility that the predetermined upper limit is exceeded in the simulation test. That is, the lower limit countermeasure in the test shooting test and the upper limit countermeasure in the simulation test have a relationship that if one is perfect, the other becomes dangerous. For this reason, the accelerator AT that can be built in the so-called No. 5 gaming machine to which the old game machine rules before revision with the lower limit of 55% and the upper limit of 120% are applied has a lower limit of 60% and an upper limit of 115%. It is difficult to build with the so-called No. 6 machine to which the revised current game machine rules are applied, and even if you build it forcibly, there is a large difference in the expected value of the number of medals acquired when AT is inactive and AT is operating. There is a high risk that you will fall into a game with no sharpness that cannot be secured. However, in the case of this modification, in the predetermined test shooting test in which the stopping operation is performed at an arbitrary time in an arbitrary order, unlike the game in the market in which the stopping operation is left to the player, the bonus internal winning state "BB6 inside" It becomes possible to shift from the "BB6 in operation" of the bonus operation state to the "BB6 in operation", the bonus operation is in progress, the general gaming state of "BB6 is in operation" to the shift winning internal winning state of "BB6 is in operation" In "Inside RB6 while BB6 is operating", the expected value of the number of medals to be won is "Inside BB6" in the bonus internal winning state and "In BB6 is operating in the shift combination state" in "Inside RB6 in operating BB6". RB6 is in operation”. Therefore, in the test shooting test, the expected value of the number of acquired game media can be increased to an appropriate value exceeding a predetermined lower limit.

In the test shooting test, “normally medium”, the winning probability of BB6 is about 1/3, and therefore, BB6 is won once every three games on average, and in the winning game, the display probability is 1/64 and “BB6 is operating. , And with a probability of 1-1/64=63/64, moves to “inside BB6”. “Inside BB6” shifts to “In operation BB6” with a probability of about 1/192 obtained by multiplying the probability of deviation 21977/65536≈1/3 by the display probability 1/64. Therefore, when BB6 is won once, “inside BB6” is 0 times with a probability of 1/64 and 192 times with a probability of 63/64, which is 189 times on average. Therefore, the number of games with the expected value of 0.58 is 3+189=192 times.

In the test shooting, "general during BB6 operation", since the winning probability of RB6 is about 1/3, the winning of RB6 is done once every 3 games on average, and the combination of RB6 working symbols is displayed in the winning game. The probability 1/4 shifts to "RB6 working while BB6 is working", and the non-display probability 3/4 of RB6 working symbol shifts to "inside RB6 working BB6". "Inside RB6 during BB6 operation" shifts to "In operation of RB6 during BB6" with a probability of 1/12 obtained by multiplying the probability of deviation of about 1/3 by the display probability 1/4. Therefore, when the RB6 is won once, the "inside RB6 during BB6 operation" is 0 times with a probability of 1/4 and 12 times with a probability of 3/4, which is an average of 9 times. Therefore, one cycle of "BB6 is in operation", the expected value 0.58 is 3 games, the expected value 0.85 is 9 games, and the expected value 0.51 is 8 games. The average expected value of “in operation” is (0.58×3+0.85×9+0.51×8)/(3+9+8)≈0.67. Further, the number of games with an expected value of 0.67 is (285+1)/(0.67×3)≈142 times until the operation of BB6 is completed.

After all, in the test shooting test, the game with the expected value of 0.58 was repeated 192 times and the game with the expected value of 0.67 was repeated 142 times, and the expected value was (0.58×192+0.67×142)/(192+142). ).Apprxeq.0.62 (62%), which exceeds the predetermined lower limit of 0.6 (60%).

In a predetermined simulation test assuming that the combination of symbols related to the internal winning is surely displayed and the maximum number of medals to be won is acquired, if the BB6 is won in the "normal normal", the operation pattern of the BB6 in the winning game is In order to display the combination, it moves to "BB6 in operation" without going through "BB6 inside" and wins RB6 in "BB6 in general", and the combination of operation symbols of RB6 is displayed in the winning game. In order to do so, the process shifts to “during RB6 operation during BB6” without passing through “during RB6 operation during BB6”.

Therefore, in the simulation test, the expected value can be calculated without considering "inside BB6" and "inside RB6 during BB6 operation". In the simulation test, the small winning combination is not missed, and the maximum payout is always obtained. Therefore, the expected values e of “normal medium” and “general medium while BB6 is operating” are as follows.
s=1098×24×11/3; push order small win +1860×3×11/3; 11 sheets Bell 1-3
+600 x 2 x 1 x 1/3; 1 cherry A, B
+720×2×1×5/3; 5 sheets Watermelon A, B
+8×1×5/3; 5 special roles ≒1119897
Since r=8978,
e=111989/(65536-8978)≈2.12 (about 212%) is reached. However, this expected value does not reflect that due to the operation of the bonus hand BB6.

In the simulation test, if BB6 is won with a probability of about 1/3 from “normal medium”, the game next to the winning game is changed to “BB6 operating medium”, and “BB6 operating medium medium” is executed. When RB6 is won with a probability of 1/3, the game next to the winning game is shifted to “BB6 is operating and RB6 is operating”. The expected value of "While RB6 is in operation while BB6 is in operation" remains low at 0.51 in the simulation test. Therefore, due to the medal reduction effect of "While RB6 in operation of BB6", "normal normal" It lowers the high expected values of "medium" and "general medium during BB6 operation". That is, in a predetermined simulation test assuming that the combination of symbols related to the internal winning is surely displayed and the maximum number of the game media to be obtained is obtained, the bonus normal winning state is changed from “normally general” in the bonus non-winning state. It shifts to "BB6 in operation" of the bonus operation state without passing through "inside BB6", and "BB6 operation" is a shift winning internal winning state from "general middle of BB6 operation" in the bonus operation general game state. Since it shifts to "shifting RB6 while BB6 is in operation" without passing through "inside RB6 while BB6 is in operation", without increasing the expected value of the number of medals to be acquired like in the test shooting test, It can be set within an appropriate value below a predetermined upper limit.

Since the winning probability of RB6 is about 1/3, the expected value increases to 2.12. ×3 times ≒ wins RB6 every time 19 medals are acquired, and continues for 8 games 0.51 × 3 times × 8 times ≒ 12 sets of 1 set of “RB6 operation during BB6 operation “Medium” is repeated (285+1)/(19+12)≈9 sets, and the game with the expected value 2.12 is 3×9=27 games, and the game with the expected value 0.51 is 8×9=72 games.

Therefore, in the simulation test, the game with the expected value 2.12 was repeated 3+27=30 times, and the game with the expected value 0.51 was repeated 72 times.
Total number of inserted medals=3×(3+27+72)=306
The total number of medals acquired=3×(2.12×(3+27)+0.51×72)=301, and after all, including the ones by the operation of the bonus combination BB6,
The expected value e drops to 301/306≈0.98 (98%), and falls below the predetermined upper limit of 1.15 (115%). The machine discount for setting 1 is about 98%, and the lottery value for small wins is determined so that the machine discount for setting 6 is also less than 115%.

In the simulation test, in the case of playing 17,500 times with a sufficiently large number of games, it is premised that the winning probability of the internal lottery converges to the design value, so that it can be stably suppressed to less than 115% of the upper limit. When the number of games decreases, there may be cases where less than 115% can not be achieved due to probability upper or lower shake, mainly upper shake, but the upper limit in 6000 games is 126%, the upper limit in 1600 games is Since the upper limit for 150% and 400 games is relaxed to 220%, any lower limit can be achieved.

Further, in the test shooting test, when playing 17500 times with a sufficiently large number of games, it is highly expected that the winning probability of the internal lottery will converge to the design value, so that the lower limit of 60% can be stably achieved. When the number of games decreases, there is a case where it is not possible to achieve more than 60% due to the probability of upper or lower shake, mainly lower shake, but the lower limit in 6000 games is 50%, the lower limit in 1600 games is Since the lower limit of 40% and 400 games is relaxed to 33.3%, any lower limit can be achieved.

Unlike the simulation test, the test shooting test does not impose a virtual condition that the maximum payout is always obtained when a winning such as a push order small win is performed. Therefore, in the test shooting test, the upper limit is 115% for 17500 games and 6000 games. The upper limit of 126% in 1600 games, 150% in 600 games, and 220% in 400 games can be achieved with almost no problem.

Furthermore, in this modified example, since the high base game is enabled in "the inside of RB6 during the operation of BB6", the order and/or the pressed position of the stop operation are specified on the assumption of the game having the lowest expected value. "BB6 in operation" is taken into consideration for the IF2 test (IF2 is the meaning of the interface board 2 that outputs the information of the internal winning combination from the gaming machine to the prescribed test device and inputs the stop operation signal from the test device). Without doing so, there is an advantage that it can be simply performed "inside BB6".

As described above, the expected value of "inside BB6" can be set to a low value of 0.58 without being increased more than necessary, and it is possible to comply with the test shooting test and the simulation test. That is, it is possible to secure a large difference between the expected value of the number of medals acquired when the AT is not operated and the expected value of the number of medals acquired when the instruction function is operated, that is, when the AT is operated, and a sharp game play can be achieved. In the above, the expected value of the number of medals to be acquired for “inside RB6 during BB6 operation” in the internal winning combination of shift combination is set to “inside BB6 in bonus internal winning state” and “inside BB6 operation for shift operating state”. RB6 is in operation”, but the expected value of the number of medals to be acquired in “Inside RB6 while BB6 is operating” is the same as when the instruction function is not in operation, that is, in non-AT (the correct answer in the pressing order, the small push order navigation. It is higher than “inside BB6” in the bonus internal winning state in a situation where there is no bonus), and the bonus internal winning state under the operation of the instruction function, that is, under AT (in the situation where there is a correct answer push order navigation of the push order small win) is “ It may be higher than "inside BB6", and in this case also, by playing in "inside RB6 during BB6 operation" in shift internal winning state in "in operation BB6" of bonus operation state, It is possible to suppress the reduction of the game medium as compared with the related art, and prevent the deterioration of the interest of the game.

By the way, the net increase U in AT is
U=(11-3)×1098×24/65536; push order small win +(11-3)×1860×3/65536; 11 sheets Bell 1-3
+ (1-3) x 600 x 2/65536; 1 cherry A, B
+ (5-3) x 720 x 2/65536; 5 sheets Watermelon A, B
+(5-3)×8/65536; 5 cards special combination +(0-3)×21977/65536; out of the BB6 ≈2.9 cards/game.

In the market game, the player expects a high base "inside RB6 while BB6 is operating", and "blank" of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R in "normal medium" and "inside BB6". Perform a stop operation aiming at the symbol and shift to "BB6 in operation", and in "general middle while BB6 is operating" and "inside RB6 while BB6 is operating", on the left reel 3L, a "blank" symbol with no shift aim It is also possible to perform a stop operation. There is no penalty for prohibiting the transition to "BB6 in operation", and there is no disadvantage that "BB6 in operation" is uniformly low base.

In this case, it is possible to gradually reduce the number of medals that the user has by continuing to avoid the entry into "the RB6 is being operated and the RB6 is being operated" which is the lowest base. However, even though it is a high base, the expected value of "Inside RB6 while BB6 is operating" does not exceed 1, so the number of medals on hand is reduced, and the minimum base is "RB6 is operating while BB6 is operating". There is also the risk of plunging. Also, if you are aiming for a "blank" symbol on the left reel 3L in "normal general middle" or "inside BB6", 11 bells 1 to 3 are missed, and in "normal general middle" and "inside BB6" The number of earned medals is reduced.

Moreover, "general middle during BB6 operation" and "inside RB6 during BB6 operation" do not lottery the advantageous section transition rep A, which increases the chance of the game to operate the instruction function, and the advantageous section transition probability and The AT winning probability is reduced to 1/655, which is about half the normal 1/328. Also, the "replay probability" is set to "0" while "BB6 is operating while RB6 is operating", and neither the advantageous section transition rep A nor B is randomly selected. That is, in the bonus operation general game state of "BB6 operating general medium" and/or in the shift combination internal winning state of "BB6 operating RB6 internal", the probability of increasing the chance of a game to activate the instruction function is It is set lower than “inside BB6” in the bonus internal winning state. In addition, the “normal general medium” in the bonus non-winning state and/or the “inside BB6” in the bonus internal winning state is an instruction function triggered by the winning of the advantageous zone transition rep A or B which is a predetermined specific internal winning combination. The lottery is performed to increase the chances of the game to operate, and the bonus operation state “BB6 is operating” is performed to increase the chances of the game to operate the instruction function triggered by the winning of all or part of the specific internal winning combination. I try not to. Specifically, "inside RB6 during operation of BB6" means that "the RB6 is operating while BB6 is operating" without performing lottery to increase the chance of a game to activate the instruction function triggered by the winning of the advantageous zone transition rip A. Does not perform lottery to increase the chance of a game to activate the instruction function triggered by the winning of the advantageous section transition rips A and B. In addition, when changing the lottery mode that increases the opportunity to activate the instruction function triggered by the winning of the specific internal winning combination, in addition to changing the type of the specific internal winning combination, the specific internal winning combination (advanced section transition rep A, B) The lottery value of may be changed.

Therefore, even if the player chooses a high-based "inside RB6 operating BB6" game in the market, the expectation of winning against the AT is higher than "normal medium" or "inside BB6". The expected value of the total number of earned medals including the operation of the instruction function is low, which is not much different from the case where the "BB6 inside" is maintained, which is advantageous to the player by not performing a specific stop operation. The risk of causing disadvantages can be reduced. In addition, in the “normally general” state of the bonus non-winning state and/or the “inside of BB6” state of the bonus internal winning state, the lottery to increase the chance of the game to activate the instruction function triggered by the winning of the predetermined specific internal winning combination. In the "BB6 in operation" of the bonus operation state, since the lottery that increases the opportunity of the game to operate the instruction function triggered by the winning of all or part of the specific internal winning combination is not performed, "BB6 is in operation" In the case of playing the "inside RB6 in operation of BB6" game with a high expected value of the number of medals acquired and in the case of not playing the game in "BB6 operation", the total including the operation of the instruction function It is possible to appropriately adjust the expected value of the acquired game medium in association with the internal winning combination.

In the above modified example, the expected value is increased within the range of not exceeding 1 by changing the push order small win from "6 options" to "3 options" in "inside RB6 during BB6 operation". At the time of winning, regardless of the pressing order, the stop control may be changed uniformly according to the priority of the number of coins so that 11 medals can be surely won. That is, the pressing order may be set to any of the six options. In addition, if it is assumed that there is a small winning combination related to a winning combination of the first small winning combination with a small payout number and the second small winning combination with a large payout number, it is not limited to the pushing order small winning combination. Other than the above, the first small winning combination may be won, and the second small winning combination may be won when “RB6 is operating while BB6 is operating”. However, if the expected value of "Inside RB6 during BB6" exceeds 1, in order to prevent the game of "Inside RB6 during BB6 operating" from becoming uniformly advantageous, "RB6 during BB6 operating" In "inside", neither the advantageous zone transition rip A nor the advantageous zone transition rip B is randomized, and/or the difficulty of the shift loss is increased to increase the risk of shifting to the low base "RB6 in BB6 operation". It is preferable to take measures such as

In the above modified example, 15 pieces of NML01, 34, 36, 37, which are high payouts, are paid out, or an area outside "inside BB6" is randomly selected such as a replay combination or a combination of 1 to 3 copies. By assigning it to a value and reducing it, the net increase in AT can exceed 3.0 sheets/game, for example, 5.0 sheets/game. However, if the AT net increase is increased, the probability of winning the AT and/or the probability of continuing the AT will be increased by other regulations that should keep the ratio of stays in the advantageous section or the ratio of medals acquired by operating the instruction function to 70% or less of the total. There is a fear of declining. Therefore, in this modification, the net increase is set to 2.9 cards/game, the initial hit of the AT is lightened, the possibility that the AT will last for a long time is increased, and the satisfaction of the player is increased.

[AT activation during advantageous section using specified number] Modified example The gaming machine of this modified example starts variable display of symbols based on the start operation of the player, and based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. Stop the variable display of symbols. Further, it is provided with an advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state in which the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player can be activated. The advantageous state includes an assist time AT which is a specific advantageous state in which it is possible to increase the game medium by operating the instruction function.

In the present modification, the gaming state shown in FIG. 123A is included, and the lottery target includes the accessory continuous operation device BB7 related to the first-class special accessory RB7 that is always activated. The combination of operating symbols of BB7 is, for example, left symbol "blank"-middle symbol "blank"-right symbol "blank". When the BB7 is in operation (BB7 is in operation and RB7 is in operation) from the next game in which this combination of operation symbols is displayed, and the total number of medals acquired from the start of operation exceeds the predetermined upper limit number of 285, for example, BB7 and RB7 The operation is ended, and the BB 7 is returned to the "normal general medium" in which the BB7 is randomly selected. If there is no indication of the combination of the operation symbols of BB7 even if the BB7 is won in "normally general", the process is shifted to "inside BB7". AT is enabled in "inside BB7" and "in normal general".

The effective line is limited to only one line in the middle stage. As for the prescribed number of throws, it is possible to select the first throw number of 3 and the second throw number less than the first throw of one, and the first throw number of three-piece game and the second throw number of 1 It enables single-player games. The lottery value of BB7 is, for example, 1365 for both the first input number and the second input number. It should be noted that the effective lines may be the upper, middle, and lower three lines, or may be five lines obtained by adding an upper right line and a lower right line thereto. In addition, the prescribed number of throws may be selected to be two, so that a two-player game can be played, and the second number of throws may be two.

In this modified example, the details of the re-game combination are the following 1] to 4]. The combination of symbols of REP01, 02, 03, 05 is the same as that of FIG. In the parentheses at the end, the lottery values are shown in the order of "normal normal medium", "inside BB7", and "in operation of BB7". Regarding the re-gaming combination, the same lottery value is set for both the first input number and the second input number.
1] Middle stage REP; REP01 (5200,5201,0)
2] Right down lip; REP02 (1730, 1729, 0)
3] Chance Lip; REP03 (1024, 1024, 0)
4] Fake Lip; REP05 (1024, 1024, 0)

In this modified example, the details of the small winning combination are as follows 1) to 38). The combination of symbols of NML01 to 41 and the payout (the number of payouts) are the same as those of the modification in which BB6 shown in FIG. 122 is mounted. The combination of each symbol of NML42-45 "left symbol"-"middle symbol"-"right symbol" is as follows, and each payout is 1 and the display probability is 1x1x1/4=1/4. ing.
NML42; "Red 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank"-"Cherry 1"-"Red 7"
NML43; "Red 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank"-"Cherry 1"-"Blue 7"
NML44; "Red 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank"-"Cherry 1"-"BAR"
NML45; "Red 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank"-"Cherry 1"-"Blank"

In the parentheses at the end of each of the following small wins, the value of the setting 1 is shown in the order of the lottery value in the case of the first input number and the lottery value in the case of the second input number. The lottery value of the second input number is set to 1/3 of the lottery value of the first input number.

1) Left middle right bell 1; NML01+02+03+06+07+10+11 (1098,366)
2) Left and right center bell 1; NML01+04+05+08+09+12+13 (1098,366)
3) Left middle right bell 2; NML34+02+03+06+07+10+11 (1098,366)
4) Left and right center bell 2; NML34+04+05+08+09+12+13 (1098,366)
5) Left middle right bell 3; NML36+02+03+06+07+10+11 (1098,366)
6) Right and left center bell 3; NML36+04+05+08+09+12+13 (1098,366)
7) Left middle right bell 4; NML37+02+03+06+07+10+11 (1098,366)
8) Left and right center bell 4; NML37+04+05+08+09+12+13 (1098,366)
9) Middle left and right bell 1; NML01+02+04+06+07+10+11 (1098,366)
10) Middle right left bell 1; NML01+03+05+08+09+12+13 (1098,366)
11) Middle left and right bell 2; NML34+02+04+06+07+10+11 (1098,366)
12) Middle right left bell 2; NML34+03+05+08+09+12+13 (1098,366)
13) Center left and right bell 3; NML36+02+04+06+07+10+11 (1098,366)
14) Middle right left bell 3; NML36+03+05+08+09+12+13 (1098,366)
15) Middle left and right bell 4; NML37+02+04+06+07+10+11 (1098,366)
16) Middle right left bell 4; NML37+03+05+08+09+12+13 (1098,366)
17) Right Left Middle Bell 1; NML01+02+05+06+07+10+11 (1098,366)
18) Right Middle Left Bell 1; NML01+03+04+08+09+12+13 (1098,366)
19) Right Left Middle Bell 2; NML34+02+05+06+07+10+11 (1098,366)
20) Right Middle Left Bell 2; NML34+03+04+08+09+12+13 (1098,366)
21) Right Left Middle Bell 3; NML36+02+05+06+07+10+11 (1098,366)
22) Right middle left bell 3; NML36+03+04+08+09+12+13 (1098,366)
23) Right Left Middle Bell 4; NML37+02+05+06+07+10+11 (1098,366)
24) Right Middle Left Bell 4; NML37+03+04+08+09+12+13 (1098,366)
25) 11 bells 1; NML 38+41 (1860, 620)
26) 11 bells 2; NML39+41 (1860, 620)
27) 11 sheets Bell 3; NML 40+41 (1860, 620)
28) 1 cherry 1; NML 14-17 (900, 300)
29) 1 cherry 2; NML 26-29 (90, 30)
30) 1 cherry 3; NML42 (4329, 1443)
31) 1 cherry 4; NML43 (4329, 1443)
32) 1 cherry 5; NML44 (4329, 1443)
33) 1 cherry 6; NML45 (4329, 1443)
34) 5 sheets watermelon A; NML35 (1212, 404)
35) 5 sheets watermelon B; NML30+35 (54, 18)
36) 1-chance chance A; NML 18-21 (72, 24)
37) One chance opportunity B; NML22 to 25 (36, 12)
38) 5 sheets special combination; NML 31-33 (15, 5)

The total lottery value of the small wins of 1) to 38) is 51627 when the first throwing number is 3 and the total lottery value of the re-play combination is 8978, which is “normally medium” or “inside BB7”. The out-of-range area obtained by subtracting the lottery value 1365 of BB7 is 3566. The total small hand constant s is 33938, and the expected value e is about 0.60 (60%).

In addition, at the time of playing three cards, "BB7 is in operation", each lottery value of NML01, 34, 36, 37 is 1098×6=6588 or more, for example, all lottery NML01 to 45 are overlapped at a lottery value of 6589. Small win all to be won and a lottery value of 45039 obtained by subtracting the lottery value 6589 of the small win oar from 51628 that exceeds the total lottery value 51627 of 1) to 38), for example, the lottery value of 45039, NML02 to 29, 42 to 45. Randomly draw a one-role combination that wins multiple times. The total small hand constant s=6589×11/3+45039×1/3≈39173, r=0, and the expected value e=39173/65536≈0.60 (60%).

The total lottery value of the small wins of 1) to 38) during the one-player game of the second input number is 17209, and the total lottery value of the re-play combination is 8978 with "normal general" or "inside BB7". The out-of-range area obtained by subtracting the lottery value 1365 of BB7 is 37984. The total small hand constant s is 33938, and the expected value e is about 0.60 (60%). It becomes the same as when playing three cards because each lottery value is set to 1/3 and the payout number of each small win is not changed, so that the payout ratio = payout number/inserted number is tripled. is there.

In addition, at the time of one-player game, "BB7 is operating", each lottery value for NML01, 34, 36, 37 is 366×6=2196 or more, for example, a lottery value of 2197 overlaps all the small winning combinations NML01 to 45. With a lottery value of 15013, which is obtained by subtracting the lottery value of 2197 for small role from 17210 which exceeds the total lottery value 17209 of 1) to 38) and the small winning all to be won, 1-win role NML02-29, 42-45. Randomly draw a one-role combination that wins multiple times. The total small hand constant s=2197×11/1+15013×1/≉39173, r=0, and the expected value e=39173/65536≅0.60 (60%), which is the same as when playing three cards. become.

In a predetermined simulation test assuming that a combination of symbols relating to internal winnings is always displayed and the maximum number of medals to be won is obtained, no small win is missed and the maximum payout is always obtained, so s=(1098 ×24×11+1860×3×11+18414×1+1281×5)×1/3=366×24×11+620×3×11+6138×1+427×5=125357, r=8978, so the expected value e without BB7 operation =125357/(65536-8978)≈2.22 (about 222%) is reached.

In the simulation test, if BB7 is won with a probability of 1365/65536≈1/48 from “normally medium”, the game next to the winning game is changed to “BB7 is in operation”, and a game with an expected value of 0.60 is (285+1). /(0.60×3)≈159 The game is consumed. Therefore, the game with the expected value of 2.22 is repeated 48 times, and the game with the expected value of 0.60 is repeated 159 times.
Total number of inserted medals=3×(48+159)=621
The total number of medals obtained=3×(2.22×48+0.60×158)≈604.

After all, including the bonus action BB7,
The expected value e=604/621≈0.97 (97%), and falls below the predetermined upper limit of 1.15 (115%). The same applies when three pieces are hung and one piece is hung. The machine discount for setting 1 is about 97%, and the lottery value for small wins is set so that the machine discount for setting 6 is also less than 115%.

In this modified example, among the small wins, 29) 1 piece of cherry 2 is won, 35) 5 pieces of watermelon B is won, 37) 1 piece of chance chance B is won, 38) 5 pieces of special At the time of winning the winning combination, the transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section is determined with a probability of 256/256=100% by a two-stage lottery using a 1-byte random number independently defined from the internal lottery random number. Therefore, NML26 to 29 to be displayed based on the winning of 1 cherry 2, 5 NML30 to be displayed based on the winning of watermelon B, 1 NML22 to 25 to be displayed based on the winning of chance B, and 5 special winning combination The NMLs 31 to 33 displayed based on the winning of No. 3 are the reach eyes where the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is confirmed. The reach item here is a result indicating that the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is confirmed, and is displayed based on the winning of the specific internal winning combination, and the internal winning combination other than the specific internal winning combination ( (Including omission) It means a result that is not displayed based on the winning. The reach eye is not limited to the small win display type, and when a small win that may be missed is a specific internal winning combination (determination of the transition from the normal interval to the advantageous interval), the small win is dropped. It may be a loser type or the like. Further, although it is not preferable in that the prescribed number of inputs to the next game cannot be changed, it is also possible to adopt a re-game combination display type.

In addition, at the time of winning 28) 1 cherry 1 win, 34) winning 5 watermelon A, 36) winning 1 chance chance A, a 1-byte random number that is defined separately from the internal random number is used. The two-stage lottery used determines the transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section with a predetermined probability of less than 100%. Therefore, NML14 to 17, which is displayed based on the winning of one cherry 1, NML35 which is displayed based on the winning of five watermelons A, NML18 to 21 which is displayed based on the winning of the chance combination A of one sheet, are advantageous intervals. This is an opportunity to look forward to. The chance opportunity can be expected to shift to the advantageous zone, but it is different from the reach eye in that the transition to the advantageous zone is not always fixed.

As shown in FIG. 123 [B], to the assist time AT to be the specific advantageous state, after the advantageous state is generated based on the internal winning combination capable of displaying the reach as a combination of the first symbols, that is, 29) 1 cherry 2, 35) 5 watermelon B, 37) 1 chance chance B, 38) 5 special winning combination After winning the winning combination that determines the transition to any advantageous zone, the reach is displayed. After the game following the played game, it is possible to enter (activate) on condition that the display of the combination of the second symbols different from the combination of the first symbols is displayed. Even when the combination of the second symbols is displayed during the non-advantageous state in which the advantageous state is not generated (during the normal state), the entry into the AT having the specific advantageous state is prohibited.

Display the reach as the first combination of symbols, 29) 1 cherry 2, 35) 5 watermelons B, 37) 1 chance hand B, 38) 5 special wins (90 + 54 + 36 + 15) / 65536 = 195/65536 ≈ 1/336 when playing a number of 3 pieces, (30 + 18 + 12 + 5) / 65536 = 65/65536 ≈ 1/1100 and 3 pieces when playing a single piece of the second input number It becomes 1/3 of the time of playing games. When playing one game, you can play about three times as many games as when playing three games, and the number of inserted medals until you reach the reach is the same after all, but you need three times as many games. Since it is not time efficient. This bad time efficiency has the effect of suppressing the digestion of the entire game including the game for displaying the reach eye by the one-player game. In order to ensure this deterrent effect, the internal winning probability during the one-player game is set to be less than 1/3 of the three-player game or the one-player game, the advantageous section winning probability in the two-stage lottery It is also preferable to lower the value from the time of playing three cards, or to prevent the lottery from shifting to the advantageous section in the first place when playing one game.

The second combination of symbols is, for example, when the right symbol cannot be drawn in with a display probability of 1/4 when one of the cherries 3 to 6 of 3) to 6 is won and it is a dropout without payout. The cherry eyes to be displayed are, for example, "red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank"-"cherry 1"-"replay". When this cherry grain is displayed on the middle effective line, triple cherries of "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-"cherry 1" are lined up on the upper right line. The cherry spilled eyes that line up three cherries on the line going up to the right are the AT triggered eyes that activate the AT. The AT-triggered item here is the item that informs the activation of the assist time AT, which is in a specific advantageous state, and is displayed based on the winning of a specific internal winning combination (including omission) under the same prescribed number of inputs. , It is a result that is not displayed based on the winning of the internal winning combination other than the specific internal winning combination. The AT-triggered eye may be a small win lost type in which a specific small win is missed, or may be a lose type that merely displays a lost win, or a role that displays a combination of symbols relating to a specific small win or re-game role. It may be a display type or the like.

At the time of the first throwing number of three-player game, the total winning probability of one cherry 3 to 6 is multiplied by 1-1/4=3/4, 4329×4/65536×3/4=12987/65536≈1/ With a probability of 5, it is possible to display the second combination of symbols (cherry grained eyes) to be the AT-activating eye. That is, the AT activation eye can be displayed after the omen of about 5 games on average. Therefore, if the player continues to play a three-player game after checking the reach pattern, which is the first combination of symbols, then three medals×5 games=15 medals need to be inserted.

On the other hand, at the time of the second throwing one-player game, the lottery value of the one-cherry 3-6 is 1/3 of that at the three-player game, so the cherry spill based on the winning of the one-cherry 3-6 Although the display probability of is decreased, the out-of-range area excluding small wins, re-gaming wins, and bonus wins is as large as 37984, and frequent wins are missed. It is supposed that the same combination of symbols as the cherry grain pattern at the time of playing a single game is uniformly displayed on the activated line. The specific internal winning combination for displaying the AT activated eye may be one cherry 3-6 and the one off during the one-hanging game, but here, the one-cherry 3-6 is dropped during the one-hanging game. At the time, a combination of symbols different from the cherry spilled eye when playing three cards, for example, "red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank"-"cherry 1"-"bell" is displayed, and the cherry spilled eye when playing three cards The specific internal winning combination that displays the same AT-triggered item is limited to only the winning combination. At the time of a game of playing three cards, the specific internal winning combination for displaying the AT triggered eye is only one cherry 3 to 6, and the mere misalignment does not display the cherry spilled eyes which are the AT triggered eyes. In this way, at the time of a one-player game, the relatively high probability of deviation of 37984/65536≅1/1.7 can display the second combination of symbols, which is the same AT trigger as the cherry spill at the time of a three-card game. Therefore, in the one-player game, the AT activation eye can be displayed in an average of about 1.7 games, and it is sufficient to insert 1.7 medals=1.7 medals. In addition, when the specific internal winning combination for displaying the AT-triggered item is one cherry 3-6 and the miss in the one-player game, the AT-triggered item can be displayed in an earlier average of about 1.5 games. Further, instead of the above, for example, when the one-piece play game is the same as or nearly the same as the three-piece play game, only the lottery value of the one-piece cherry 3 to 6 in the one-piece play game is multiplied by three pieces. On the contrary, by making it larger than the time, by displaying the same cherry spilled eyes as the three-piece hanging game at the time of dropping one cherry 3-6, the probability of displaying the AT triggered eye is made higher than the three-piece hanging game. Good.

As described above, the probability of occurrence of the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination capable of displaying the reach eye as the combination of the first symbols is about 1/336 (1/336 during the three-player game of the first input number). (×100%), and is higher than about 1/11008 (1/1008×100%) at the time of the one-piece play game of the second insertion number. On the other hand, the probability of displaying the AT-triggered item as the combination of the second symbols is about 1/1.7 when the one-player game of the second insertion number is about 1 and about three-time game of the first insertion number. It is higher than 1/5.

As a result, the player obtains the result of the internal lottery that enables the reach eye that is the first symbol combination to be displayed by the three-player game and confirms the reach eye, and then the next game is the MAX bet button 15a ( Instead of pressing (see FIG. 2), by pressing the 1-bet button 15b, the game is changed to a one-player game, and by one-game, it is possible to display the AT activated eye which is a combination of the second symbols at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to activate the AT in the specific advantageous state early while suppressing the consumption of the number of inserted medals. At the stage of displaying the reach eyes, basically, the display device 11 on the sub side does not give any special notification or suggestion by the effect. This is because the reach eyes are displayed before the AT is activated so that the player can be aware of the precursor of the AT activation. However, it may be possible to rarely suggest a notice effect or the like with a predetermined probability by means of effect lottery or the like on the sub side.

The AT starts, for example, from a judgment game between a number of games that determines the number of initial continuous games, and determines the number of initial continuous games within the range of, for example, 50 to 1200 games according to the winning combination in the judgment game. While the AT is operating, the display device 11 on the sub side informs the correct pushing order when the small pushing order wins, and notifies the right symbol to be aimed at when winning one cherry 3 to 6 and wins in one game. It is possible to obtain a collective number of medals that exceeds the possible number of medals (up to 11 in this modification, and regularly up to 15). In addition, based on a predetermined winning combination such as a re-playing combination or a small combination, the number of continuous games is increased or AT starting from a judgment game is stocked. The operation of the AT ends when the number of continuing games or the stock becomes zero, and when the AT ends, the advantageous section ends and the normal section returns.

In this modified example, when an advantageous state is caused based on an internal winning combination capable of displaying reach eyes which is a combination of the first symbols, the time efficiency at the time of playing one game is lowered as compared with the time of playing three games. , Only during the advantageous state, it is possible to activate the AT (rush into the AT) by displaying the AT activated eye that is the combination of the second symbols, and depending on the display of the AT activated eye in the non-advantageous state, activate the AT. Is disabled. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from playing the one-player game throughout the game, and the one-player game can be played almost exclusively when the AT-triggered item is displayed.

When the chance number is displayed based on the winning of any one of the one-cherry 1, five-watermelon A and the one-chance combination A, the attempt to display the AT-triggered item by the one-card hanging game is useful. This is because the AT can be activated early if the transition to the advantageous zone is internally determined by the two-stage lottery. However, if there is no decision to shift to the advantageous zone internally, and if the normal zone remains, even if the deviation is subtracted and the same second symbol combination as the AT-triggered eye is displayed, AT is not activated. In this case, it is better to return to the three-player game immediately.

The AT trigger, which is the combination of the second symbols, has no payout of medals or operation of re-play, and is displayed when a deviance is obtained that results in a game result with the same effect during a three-player game or a one-player game. I am trying. For this reason, when displaying the AT trigger which is the combination of the second symbols, there is no difference in the game result depending on whether it is a three-piece game or a one-piece game. Can increase.

In this modification, the RB7 is always operated during the operation of the BB7, but the RB7 may be randomly selected from the general contents during the operation of the BB7 as in the example of FIG. 122. In addition, when performing an assist replay time ART in which the AT is operated by promoting from a low-probability game state with a low re-probability probability to a high-probability game state with a high re-probability probability, as in this modified example, a three-player game is used. After activating an advantageous state based on the internal winning combination that can display the reach eye as the combination of the first symbol, the ART invoking eye as the combination of the second symbol by a small number of one-piece games, For example, you may make it display the combination (RT shift appearance) of the promotion opportunity symbols to the high-probability gaming state. The second combination of symbols may be a combination of symbols promoted to a high-probability gaming state, or may be a predetermined combination of specific symbols when the player is notified of the determination of ART, in which case However, the period during the ART preparation during the promotion to the high-probability gaming state cannot be shortened, but it is possible to shorten the main indication production period before the notification of the confirmation of the ART.

[Chance zone advantageous section] Modified example The gaming machine of this modified example starts variable display of symbols based on the start operation of the player, and displays variable display of symbols based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. Stop. On the program of the main CPU 101, an advantageous state control means capable of producing an advantageous state enabling the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player, and for each game in the produced one advantageous state. There is provided limiter means for ending the one advantageous state when the number of acquired medals increases, for example, when the total number of acquired medals exceeds a predetermined limit value.

The internal winning combination includes bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 having a combination of operation symbols similar to those in FIG. The combined probability of BB1 to BB4 is set to about 1/200 in the setting 1. The higher or higher the winning probabilities of all or part of BB1 to BB4, the higher the setting difference. The effective lines are the upper line, the middle line, and the lower line, and the specified number is three. The winning probabilities of BB1 to BB4 may be unified regardless of the setting, without being set constant. The effective line may be 5 lines including the upper right line and the lower right line, or only the middle 1 line. The specified number of sheets may be arbitrarily selected from 1 to 3.

As shown in FIG. 124, the gaming state is a first gaming state in which the bonus hands BB1 to BB4 are in the operating state, and an infinitely high probability that the replay probability to be shifted after the operation of the bonus hands BB1 to BB4 is relatively increased. A second game state of the game state RT2 and a transition from the second game state by displaying a combination of predetermined promotion trigger symbols, the re-play probability is relatively increased, and a predetermined number of games, for example, a finite number of 150 games can be stayed. The third gaming state of the finite high-probability gaming state RT3 advantageous to the player, and the transition from the second gaming state by the display of the combination of the falling opportunity symbols, or the result of a finite number of games from the third gaming state is obtained. The 4th game state of infinitely low certainty game state RT4 which is disadvantageous to the player who relatively lowers the re-game probability to be transferred after, and the winning flag is displayed until a combination of winning symbols is displayed in the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4. It has a carried over bonus internal winning state RT5 and a fifth gaming state.

The first game state starts from the next game of the game that displays the combination of the operation symbols of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 related to the winning. While the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are operating, the first-class special character RB is always activated, and the lottery is performed by the internal lottery table during RB (see FIG. 18), and 15 or 6 medals per game are won. Can be acquired (see FIG. 23).

The transition from the normal section (normal state), which is the non-advantageous section (non-advantageous state) where the operation of the indicating function is disabled, to the advantageous section (advantageous state) where the operation of the indicating function is possible, is shown in FIGS. Instead of the illustrated determination mode, whether or not to win the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 is determined in association with the winning.

The determination of the shift to the advantageous section is made when the bonus winning combinations BB1 to BB4 are won and the two-stage lottery using a 1-byte random number that is independently extracted from the internal random number is used. With a probability of 128/256=50%, there is a probability of 192/256=75% when winning BB2 of the same blue color, and a probability of 64/256=25% when winning BB3 of a different red color, and BB4 of different blue color. At the time of winning, the transition to the advantageous section is determined with a probability of 32/256=12.5%. Other than this, the normal section is maintained. When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the game next to the winning game of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 is shifted to the advantageous section, and the advantageous state is generated. The bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are Nos. In the same way as 1 to 38, since the winning combination of the re-winning combination or the small combination is won, the combination of operating symbols cannot be displayed in the winning game of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4, and the next game enters the bonus internal winning state RT5, It becomes an advantageous section (advantageous state) from the time of entry.

The limit means for restricting the maximum continuation of one advantageous section is set to the number X of medals acquired by the operation of the bonus combination in the first game in which the operation of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 is started on the condition that it is the advantageous section. The limit value is defined as "X+10", which is obtained by adding a certain number, for example, 10 of the number of acquired medals in the second game state which is shifted after the operation of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4. This limit value may be set at the time of the ending process of the game displaying the combination of the bonus operation symbols related to the winning.

Further, in the first game in which the operation of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 is started, the predetermined probability, for example, 231/256 ≈ 90% is obtained by the two-stage lottery executed subsequent to the internal lottery on condition that it is in the advantageous section. With a probability, the indicator function is activated during the operation of the bonus combination so that 15 coins can be paid out easily, and the total number of inserted medals is subtracted from the total number of acquired medals until the maximum total number of acquired medals is exceeded. We are trying to increase the number of net additions. First, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, the section display provided on the information display 6 (see FIG. 2) is started to light. Approximately 10% of the case of the advantageous section does not activate the instruction function even once during the bonus operation, and the section indicator is not turned on, as in the case of the normal section. The distinction between an advantageous section and a normal section is intentionally made ambiguous so that the expectation can be maintained.

The operation of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 is ended when the total number of earned medals is exceeded in the case of BB1 or BB2 and the total number of earned medals is exceeded of 165 in the case of BB3 or BB4. Therefore, the number X of medals acquired by the operation of the bonus combination varies depending on the types of BB1 to BB4, and also the number of medals paid out when the upper limit of the total number of medals to be completed is exceeded even with the same BB1 and the like. become.

Exceeding the limit value is not caused by exceeding the number X of medals acquired at the end of the operating state of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4, which is the first game state in which the advantageous state is generated, and is infinitely high probability in the second game state. This is made possible by accumulating a fixed number of 10 medals to be acquired by the game after the game state is changed to the game state RT2. That is, the limit value is not exceeded depending on the number X of medals acquired at the end of the operation of the bonus hands BB1 to BB4, and a fixed number of 10 is always ensured, and the chance zone is set at RT2 following the end of the operation of the bonus hands BB1 to BB4. It can be effectively secured.

In the infinitely high-probability gaming state RT2 of the second gaming state, the combination of the promotion trigger symbols of the following 1) to 6) that enables the display of the combination of the promotion trigger symbols that shift to RT3 and the combination of the fall trigger trigger symbols that shift to RT4 are displayed. A plurality of re-play combinations including the possible falling combinations of the following 7) to 9) are randomly selected. The combination of symbols such as REP01 is the same as in FIG.

The lottery value for each replay combination of RT2 is as follows.
1) F_Batting Order 1 and RT3 promotion, etc. Maintained Rep (REP01+05+07) is 1495
2) F_Battle order 2 and RT3 promotion, etc. Maintained Rep (REP01+03+05+07) is 1495
3) F_Batting order 3 and RT3 promotion and others are maintained Rep (REP01+04+05+07) is 1495
4) F_Batting order 4 keeps RT3 promotion and others maintained 1REP for Rep(REP01+02+07)
5) F_Batting order is 5 and RT3 promotion and others are maintained Rep(REP01+02+03+04+07) is 1495
6) Maintain F3 in RT_3 with F_ batting order, etc. 1495 for Rep(REP01+02+04+07)
7) F_Left 1st stop and maintain RT4 fall REP (REP02+08) is 9000
8) Maintained at the first stop during F_, and others, RT4 fall rip (REP02+03+08) is 9000
9) F_Right 1st stop and maintain RT4 fall rip (REP02+07+08) is 9000
10) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 12673
11) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 09) is 6
12) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 09) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT2 is 48655, and the probability is set to a high probability of about 1/1.35. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

Note that, for example, 1) "F_Batting order 1 and RT3 promotion and other maintenance rep" means that when the winning is hit, the batting order 1 which is the pressing order of the correct answer, that is, when the stop operation is performed in the order of left middle right, the promotion trigger pattern "Bell"-"Watermelon"-"Red 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank" (REP07; "Watermelon" small V), which is a combination of the above, is promoted to RT3, and when the stop operation is performed other than batting order 1, This means the role of displaying REP01 etc. and maintaining RT2. The same applies to batting order 2 (center left/right), batting order 3 (center left/right), batting order 4 (center right/left), batting order 5 (center left/right), and batting order 6 (center right/left).

In addition, for example, in 7) "F_Left 1st stop, other than maintain and RT4 fall down rip" means that at the time of winning, if you make a stop operation with the left 1st stop, which is the correct pressing order, REP02 will be displayed. When RT2 is maintained and a stop operation is performed other than the first stop on the left side, a combination of fall trigger patterns "red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank"-"replay"-"replay" (REP08) is displayed and RT4 is displayed. It means the role of falling. The same applies to the middle first stop 8) and the right first stop 9).

During RT2, the bonus winning combinations BB1 to BB4 and the small winning combinations are randomly determined with the random determination value shown in the column of RT2 in FIGS. The expected value e=s/(Mr) in RT2 is e=(s; combination of push order small win, 8 wins, 5 wins, 1 win)/(65536-48655)
= (8880 + 4973 + 1493 + 760)/16881
=16106/16881
≈0.95. This expected value is a value in the case where 8 medals may not be paid out and 1 may be paid out or 0 may be paid out when the push order small win is won. The expected value of RT2 greatly exceeds 1 because the number of payouts of 8 medals increases when there is a navigation that informs the correct pressing order when the small pressing combination wins. In the case of no navigation without notifying the order, or when intentionally removing the payout of 8 medals for the pushing order small win and stopping the payout of 1 medal or the payout of 0 medal, the value is less than 1. The expected value of RT2 may be one that exceeds 1 when navigation is present and is less than 1 when a small win whose display probability is not 1 is removed.

When the total number of medals acquired exceeds 10 in RT2 in the advantageous section, the limit value of "X+10" starting from the operation start of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 is exceeded, and the limiter means is activated to operate in the advantageous section. Ends and returns to the normal section. Also turn off the section display that is lit. In order to make the advantageous section longer, during RT2, even if it is an advantageous section, when the winning order of small push-order wins (No. 77 to 98 in FIG. 17) is won, the correct push order to receive the high payout 8 coins is notified. do not do. Even if the bell spilled eyes “replay”-“watermelon”-“bell” that can be displayed when the push-order small role is dropped are displayed, the game state is not changed.

During RT2, if any promotion hand (“F_Batting order 1 and RT3 promotion etc. maintained rep” etc.) is won on condition that the player is in an advantageous zone, the correct pushing order is notified on the display device 11 on the sub side, , You can easily promote to RT3. At the time of this promotion of RT3, immediately after the transition of RT3, in order to enable the generation of a new advantageous section based on the winning of the bonus hands BB1 to BB4, even before the limit value is exceeded, the advantageous section is terminated and returned to the normal section. .. The end of the advantageous zone is due to the provision of an optional condition for ending the advantageous zone after the end of the operation of the bonus combination, and is the end before the operation of the limit means. However, if you move to RT3 before the limit value is exceeded, if you continue the advantageous section and win the push order small win during RT3, you will be notified of the correct answer push order and it will be easier to obtain 8 medals. It may be possible to end the advantageous section by promoting the excess of.

In addition, if one of the falling hands (“RT_falling rib for other than F_left 1st stop, etc. is RT4 falling rib” etc.) is won on condition that it is in an advantageous zone during RT2, the correct pushing order is displayed on the sub-side display device 11. Will be informed. Therefore, the fall to RT4 can be easily avoided. However, if the player makes a mistake in the pushing order while noticing the correct pushing order when the falling hand is won, the player will fall to RT4. Even when the limit value is exceeded when the RT4 falls, the advantageous zone is ended and the normal zone is restored, and the zone indicator that is lit is also turned off.

After the bonus winning combinations BB1 to BB4 have been activated, if there is no advantage zone from the beginning, or if the cumulative number of medals acquired during RT2 exceeds 10 and the limit value "X+10" is exceeded, the limiter means is activated. , The order of pushing the correct answer when winning the promoted role, and the order of pushing the correct answer when winning the falling role are not notified. For this reason, although it may happen to be promoted to RT3, the total probability of falling roles is 27,000/65536 ≒ 1/2.4 multiplied by the forward correct answer rate 1/3, and the total probability of promotion roles is 8970/65536 ≒. Since it is set to be considerably larger than the value obtained by multiplying 1/7.3 by the push-forward correct rate 1/6, in many cases, it falls to RT4.

The finite high-probability gaming state RT3 in the third gaming state stays for a finite number of 150 games unless there is a winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4. The lottery value for each replay combination of RT3 is as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Lip (REP02) is 29773
2) F_Upper Lip (REP01+04) is 2450
3) F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+04+05) is 5000
4) F_Lower Lip (REP01+03+04) is 2450
5) F_Bullet Lip (REP03) is 8970
6) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 09) is 6
7) F_BB2+F_confirmed rep (BB02+REP01 to 09) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the non-RT re-game combination is 48655, and the probability is the same as RT2, which is a high probability of about 1/1.35. Similar to RT2, the expected value during RT3 is about 0.95, and it is possible to expect to win the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 while suppressing the reduction of medals on hand. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

The infinitely low probability gaming state RT4 of the fourth gaming state has a low replay probability, and expects to win the bonus hands BB1 to BB4 while reducing the medals on hand. The lottery values for each replay combination of RT4 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Lip (REP02) is 8967
2) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01-10) is 6
3) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01-10) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT0 is 8979, and the probability is about 1/7.3, which is a low probability.

The bonus internal winning state RT5 in the fifth gaming state is shifted from any of the gaming states RT2, RT3 and RT4. If, in RT2, which is in the advantageous section before the limit value is exceeded, if the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are won, a new advantageous section is not generated because it is already in the advantageous section, and while the RT5 or the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are operating. , When the limit value is exceeded, the normal section is restored and the section display is turned off. Therefore, in RT2, there is a high possibility that a better result will be obtained if the bonus combination BB1 to BB4 is won before the bonus combination BB1 to BB4 is won, and the game in RT2 can be more thrilling.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT5 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 5053
2) F_Upper Lip (REP01+04) is 60
3) F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+07+08) is 306
4) F_Middle stage rip 2 (REP01+05) is 8992
5) F_Middle stage rip 3 (REP01+06) is 11775
6) F_Lower stage REP (REP01+03+04) is 180
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT6 is 26366, and the probability is about 1/2.49. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set. During RT5, the small winning combination is randomly determined with the lottery value shown in the column of RT5 in FIG.

As described above, in the present modified example, the advantageous state (advantageous section) caused by the winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 is the limit value of the limit device depending on the number of acquired medals X at the end of the operation of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4. It does not end without exceeding and the chance zone that can be expected to move to the advantageous RT3 can be secured until a certain number of 10 medals are acquired in RT2 following the end of the operation of the bonus hands BB1 to BB4. In RT2, the slower the increase in the number of earned medals is, the longer the limit value is delayed and the longer the game can be played. Therefore, the player is given the concept of “not winning a winning combination” and “displaying a high payout”. The concept of "get off" can be brought up.

In the chance zone based on the general difference number management, when a small winning combination in a push order is won, and when a correct answer push order is notified, regardless of whether a high payout is obtained or not, a high payout, for example, 8 to 3 There are cases where the subtracted difference number of 5 is added and the upper limit is regulated, but in this case, only the concept of “not winning the winning combination” can be induced. On the other hand, in this modified example, in addition to the concept of "not winning a winning combination," when winning a small push order, "get a lower dividend than a high dividend" and "pay a low dividend" It is also possible to raise the concept of how to remove a small role, such as "payouts should be 0."

Therefore, while widening the range of playability, the playability that can be expected for an advantageous game can be achieved, and in combination with the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 in which the number of earned medals can fluctuate, the chance zone is effective after the operation of the bonus combination is completed. Can be inserted into. In addition, the internal winning combination in RT2 includes a push order small combination in which the number of medals to be acquired varies depending on the mode of the stop operation, and a promotion combination capable of shifting to RT3. In case of winning, in order to notify the correct answer pushing order for displaying the combination of promotion opportunity symbols to be transferred to RT3, at RT2, while expecting the winning of the promotion hand before the limit value is exceeded, the pushing order small win At the time of winning, it is possible to create a thrilling gameplay of how to perform the stop operation to reduce the number of earned medals.

In the above, the number of medals acquired was used as the number that increases as the number of medals acquired for each game in the generated one advantageous state increases, but the difference number obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of acquired medals is used. Good. In this case, it is preferable to increase the lottery value of the small winning combination so that the expected value e of RT2 exceeds 1, so that the difference number tends to increase. Regardless of whether the number of won medals or the number of earned medals is used, the constant number at RT2 is 10, and 5 or less than 10 or 20 or more than 10 may be used, and the fixed number is 1 or more. Can be any number. Further, in the above, the number of medals acquired at the end of the operation state of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 is set as a variable X which does not depend on the type of bonus combination and the variation of the number of medals when the upper limit is exceeded. It may be a fixed number determined in advance. In this case, the minimum number of medals to be obtained at the end of the operation state of the bonus combination is X, and the limit value in the case of the bonus combination is “X+10”, which ends with the minimum number of medals. The limit value for the bonus combination may exceed “X+10”. Even when the number of medals to be acquired can be adjusted by the stop operation mode such as the pressing order during the operation of the bonus combination, the number of medals to be acquired is adjusted to X when the number of medals is not adjusted. In this case, the limit value may exceed “X+10 sheets”.

Also, in the above, the display probability of each small role other than the push order small role was set to 1 and there was no dropout, but the display probability is less than 1, and small wins that may be dropped are added. , RT2, in addition to avoiding the winning of the high payout combination for the small winning combination, the chance zone may be extended until the limit value is exceeded by missing the small combination.

Further, in the above, the occurrence of the advantageous state (advantageous section) is enabled only by the winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4, but is triggered by the winning of the specific small combination and/or the specific re-gaming combination. You may enable it. In this modified example, the winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 is assumed to be obtained by overlapping with the specific re-gaming combination or the specific small combination (see FIG. 16 ), but the single winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 is an opportunity. The advantageous state may be caused to occur, or the advantageous state may be caused to be triggered by the winning of a specific re-game combination or a specific small combination that may overlap with the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4. When the advantageous state is triggered by the winning of a specific re-game combination or a specific small combination that may overlap with the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4, when there is no overlap with the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4, for example, Inspiring the expectation of winning a bonus role During a number of games Expectation during a game During press production, the correct pressing order of small wins is notified to increase the effectiveness of the expectation production, and the advantageous state ends when the expectation production ends It is also preferable to allow it. Also, due to the advantageous state caused by a specific small winning combination and/or a specific re-gaming combination, the instruction function is activated in a high-definition gaming state, etc. according to a new definition with a higher re-gaming probability as in RT2 and RT3. It is also preferable to enable the assist replay time ART.

[Advantageous Zone RT Chance Zone] Modified Example The gaming machine of this modified example starts the variable display of the symbols based on the start operation of the player, and the variable display of the symbols based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. To stop. On the program of the main CPU 101, there is provided an advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state (advantageous section) that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player. During the advantageous state (during the advantageous zone), the specific game is enabled by the assist replay time ART that enables the number of medals to be held by operating the instruction function.

The internal winning combination includes bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 having the same combination of operation symbols as in FIG. 20, and the bonus combination and the re-play combination are duplicated, except for the re-gaming combination in which the bonus combination is won independently without overlapping. The winning combination, the overlapping of the bonus combination and the small combination, and the breakdown of the small combination which is won independently without overlapping with the bonus combination are the same as those in FIGS. However, the game state is different from that of FIG. 13 and is as shown in FIG.

Further, the transition from the normal state (normal section), which is the non-advantageous state, to the advantageous state (advantageous section) follows the determination mode of FIG. 33 and is based on the determination mode of FIG. 33, which is a weak rare combination (F_weak rare combination A, F_weak rare combination B), Based on the winning of the advantageous section transition trigger role of the single chance eyes (F_chance eyes A1 to F_chance eyes B4), watermelon 1 (F_watermelon 1), and bonus roles (F_BB1, F_BB2, F_BB3, F_BB4) that do not overlap with watermelon 2. Determined by a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, the transition to the line battle preparation state based on the ART winning in 64/256 at the time of bonus combination winning not overlapping with the watermelon 2 shown in FIG. 33, and the line battle preparation state in the normal advantageous section shown in FIG. By the normal determination processing including the transition of the above and the transition to the endin preparation state, the execution of the specific game by ART is determined for one set in which the initial continuous game number is, for example, 40 games, according to a predetermined probability.

In a specific game state (RT2, which will be described later), in the advantageous period, for example, the winning of the specific combination by F_chance rep1 (REP04) or F_chance rep2 (REP06) additionally defined as a single re-gaming combination is won. By a special decision process by a two-stage lottery (a lottery using a 1-byte random number that is extracted independently from the internal random number for random determination) performed by the opportunity, it is specified by ART according to a predetermined high probability, for example, 205/256 ≈ 80% probability The execution of the game is determined for one set in which the number of initial continuing games is, for example, 40 games. The special determination process is a process related to the instruction function for setting the advantageous period.

The effective lines are the upper, middle, and lower lines, and the specified number is three. The effective line may be 5 lines including the upper right line and the lower right line, or only the middle 1 line. The specified number of sheets may be arbitrarily selected from 1 to 3.

As shown in FIG. 125, the game state of this modified example has the following 1 to 7.

1. First gaming state; RT1
RT1 is an infinitely low probability game state in which the re-play probability is relatively low, and with the end of the specific game by ART, it becomes difficult to avoid the display due to the operation of the instruction function becoming difficult. Enter by displaying the combination of. In RT1, even if an advantageous section (advantageous state) is generated based on the winning of the advantageous section transition trigger role (weak rare role, single chance opportunity, bonus role that does not overlap with watermelon 1, watermelon 2), specific game by ART Neither the normal determination process nor the special determination process for determining the execution of is executed, and the execution of the specific game by ART is not determined.

The lottery value for each replay combination of RT1 is as follows. Note that the following REP01 and the like are similar to the combination of symbols in FIG.
1) F_Batting order 1 and maintain 2 other than RT2. Rep(REP01+05+07) is 1495.
2) F_Batting order 2 and maintenance RT (REP01+03+05+07) is 1495 except for transition to RT2.
3) F_Batting order 3 to maintain RT2 and others except for maintenance Rep (REP01+04+05+07) is 1495
4) F_Batting order is 4 and RT2 transition and other maintenance rep (REP01+02+07) is 1495
5) F_Batting order is 5 and RT2 transition and other maintenance rep (REP01+02+03+04+07) is 1495
6) F_Batting order 6 keeps RT2 and other transitions (REP01+02+04+07) is 1495
7) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 09) is 6
8) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 09) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT1 is 8982, and the probability is a low probability of about 1/7.3. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

In addition, for example, 1) "F_Batting order 1 and RT2 transition and other maintenance rep" means that when the winning operation is performed, when the batting order 1 which is the pressing order of the correct answer, that is, the left middle and right order is stopped, the specific transition timing is reached. Display "bell"-"watermelon"-"red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank" (REP07; "watermelon" small V), which is a combination of symbols, and move to RT2 described below, and stop except for batting order 1. When operated, it means that REP01 or the like is displayed and RT1 is maintained. The same applies to batting order 2 (center left/right), batting order 3 (center left/right), batting order 4 (center right/left), batting order 5 (center left/right), and batting order 6 (center right/left).

2. Second game state; RT2
RT2 is a low-probability gaming state in which the replay probability is relatively low, although the lottery mode (breakdown and/or lottery value) of the replay combination is different from that of RT1. Transition from RT1 by the display of "bell"-"watermelon"-"red 7/blue 7/BAR/blank", which is a combination of predetermined specific transition trigger patterns, until a finite number of times, for example, 100 times of game results are obtained. It is a finite low-probability game state of 100G that allows staying. In RT2, when an advantageous section (advantageous state) is generated based on winning of an advantageous section transition trigger role (weak rare role, single chance opportunity, bonus combination that does not overlap with watermelon 1, watermelon 2), or RT2 If an advantageous section (advantageous state) is generated in RT1 before the transition to, the execution of the specific game by ART is determined with a relatively high probability by either the normal determination process or the special determination process performed during RT2. To do.

The lottery value for each replay combination of RT2 is as follows.
1) F_Chance REP 1 (REP04) is 655
2) F_Chance Lip 2 (REP06) is 655
3) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 7656
2) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 09) is 6
3) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 09) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT2 is 8978, and the probability is set to a low probability of about 1/7.3. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

In RT2, when the push order small winning combination (No. 77 to 98 in FIG. 17) is won, and when the push order is incorrect, the bell spilled eyes “replay”-“watermelon”-“bell” ( Even if (HZR02) of FIG. 19 is displayed, it does not shift to another game state and stays for a finite number of 100 games as long as there is no winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4. In the meantime, if F_chance rep 1 or F_chance rep 2 of the specific combination is won (combination probability 1310/65536≈1/50), the execution of the specific game by ART is determined with a high probability of 80% for one set and stocked. To do. Multiple sets of decisions and stocks may be made during up to 100 games.

3. Third gaming state; RT3
RT3 is a general low-probability game state in which the replay probability is relatively low, although the lottery mode (breakdown and/or lottery value) of the replay combination is different from RT1 and RT2. With the display of the bell spilled eyes “replay”-“watermelon”-“bell”, the game shifts from the other gaming state in which the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are randomly selected except for RT2.

The lottery value for each replay combination of RT3 is as follows.
1) F_Batting Order 1 and RT4 promotion, etc. Maintained Rep (REP01+05+09) is 1495
2) F_Batting order 2 and RT4 promotion, etc. Maintained Rep (REP01+03+05+09) is 1495
3) F_Batting order 3 and RT4 promotion and others are maintained Rep (REP01+04+05+09) is 1495
4) F_Batting order 4 and RT4 promotion and others are maintained. Rep (REP01+02+09) is 1495.
5) F_Battle order 5 and RT4 promotion and others are maintained Rep(REP01+02+03+04+09) is 1495
6) F_Battle order 6 and RT4 promotion and others are maintained. Rep (REP01+02+04+09) is 1495.
7) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 09) is 6
8) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 09) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT3 is 8982, and the probability is set to a low probability of about 1/7.3. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

Note that, for example, 1) "F_Batting order 1 and RT4 promotion and other maintenance rep" means that at the time of winning, the batting order 1 which is the pressing order of the correct answer, that is, the stop operation in the left middle right order, the promotion trigger pattern "Cherry 1/Cherry 2"-"Cherry 1"-"Watermelon" (REP09), which is a combination of, is displayed and promoted to RT4 described below, and if a stop operation other than batting order 1 is performed, REP01 etc. is displayed. It means that it keeps RT3. The same applies to batting order 2 (center left/right), batting order 3 (center left/right), batting order 4 (center right/left), batting order 5 (center left/right), and batting order 6 (center right/left).

4. Fourth gaming state; RT4
RT4 is an infinitely high probability game state in which the replay probability is relatively high. From RT3, a transition is made by the display of "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-"watermelon" which is a combination of predetermined promotion trigger symbols, and a specific game by ART is executed. When the execution of the specific game by ART is decided in RT2 or the like, the first game of ART is started after the promotion of RT4. During the promotion of RT4, it will be the game period during which ART is being prepared.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT4 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 16273
2) F_Left 1st stop and keep the others RT1 fall rip (REP02+08) is 4500
3) Maintained at the 1st stop in F_, and other than RT1 fall rip (REP02+03+08) is 4500
4) F_Right 1st stop and maintain RT1 fall rip (REP02+07+08) is 4500
5) F_Upper Lip (REP01+04) is 2450
6) 5000 for F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+04+05)
7) F_Lower Lip (REP01+03+04) is 2450
8) F_Bullet Lip (REP03) is 8970
9) F_BB1+F_confirmation rep (BB01+REP01 to 09) is 6
10) F_BB2+F_confirmation rep (BB02+REP01 to 09) is 6
As described above, the total lottery value of the non-RT4 replay combination is 48655, and the probability is about 1/1.35. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set.

In addition, for example, 2) "F_Left 1st stop and keep other than RT1 fall down rip" means that at the time of winning, if the stop operation is performed at the left 1st stop, which is the correct order of pressing, REP02 will be displayed. When RT4 is maintained and the stop operation is performed other than the first stop on the left side, "Red 7/Blue 7/BAR/Blank"-"Replay"-"Replay" (REP08) which is a combination of the falling opportunity symbols is displayed and RT1 is displayed. It means the role of falling. The same applies to 3) middle first stop and 4) right first stop.

During RT4, during a specific game by ART, the correct push order is notified on the sub-side display device 11 when the small push order wins. Therefore, it is possible to easily obtain 8 medals and increase the number of medals on hand. it can. Further, it is possible to easily avoid displaying the spilled bell and to avoid falling to RT3. In addition, when F_Left first stop keeps RT1 fall down lip, F_Middle first stop keeps RT1 fall down lip, F_Right first stop keeps RT1 fall down lip etc. It is possible to easily maintain the RT4 by avoiding the display of the combination of the falling opportunity symbols.

On the other hand, during RT4, when the specific game by ART becomes 0 in both the number of sets and the number of continuous games, the specific game is ended, and thereafter, when the winning of the falling combination is won, the correct answer pushing order is not notified. The display causes a fall to RT1, and at the time of this fall, the advantageous section (advantageous state) ends and the normal section (normal state) is restored. In addition, before falling to RT1 due to a falling combination, if the correct answer pressing order is not notified when the small pressing combination wins and the bell spill is displayed, it will fall to RT3 and an advantageous section (advantageous state) at this falling Is terminated and the normal section (normal state) is restored. In place of these, in RT4 which enables a specific game by ART, after the specific game is over, the correct answer push order in which the combination of the falling opportunity trigger symbols to RT1 is not displayed at the time of the winning of the falling combination that enables the transition to RT1 Although it is not notified, the number of medals acquired varies depending on the mode of the stop operation. When the winning combination of the push order small win is notified, the correct pressing order in which the number of medals acquired is 8 will be notified, and after the combination of the falling opportunity design to RT1 is displayed, RT1 is displayed. The advantageous section may be ended and the section may be returned to the normal section when the player falls in this case. In this case, even if the specific game by RT is finished in RT4, the number of won medals is increased until the player falls to RT1. It also becomes possible and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

5. Fifth gaming state; RT5
RT5 is a bonus internal winning state in which the winning flag is carried over until a combination of operating symbols is displayed after winning the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 that are randomly selected in RT1 to RT4 and RT0. The bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are Nos. Since the winning combination of the bonus winning combinations BB1 to BB4 cannot be displayed because the winning combinations of the bonus winning combinations BB1 to BB4 cannot be displayed in the same manner as 1 to 38, the next game always enters RT5.

The lottery values for each replay combination of RT5 are as follows.
1) F_Maintenance Rep (REP02) is 5053
2) F_Upper Lip (REP01+04) is 60
3) F_Middle stage rip 1 (REP01+07+08) is 306
4) F_Middle stage rip 2 (REP01+05) is 8992
5) F_Middle stage rip 3 (REP01+06) is 11775
6) F_Lower stage REP (REP01+03+04) is 180
As described above, the total lottery value of the replay combination of RT5 is 26366, and the probability is about 1/2.49. Although there is no setting difference, all or part of the setting difference may be set. During RT5, the small winning combination will be randomly determined with the lottery value shown in the column of RT5 in FIG.

6. Sixth gaming state; operating state of bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 The sixth gaming state starts from the next game of the game displaying the combination of operating symbols of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 related to the winning. During the operation of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4, the first-class special character RB is always operated, and the lottery is carried out by the internal lottery table during RB (see FIG. 18), and 15 or 6 medals per game are won. Can be acquired (see FIG. 23).

7. 7th gaming state; RT0
RT0 is an initial low-probability gaming state in which the replay probability is relatively low, although the lottery mode (breakdown and/or lottery value) of the replay combination is different from that of RT1 to RT3. It is set as a return destination after the operation of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 is completed, and is also set as a return destination when a result of a finite number of 100 games is obtained without winning the bonus combination BB1 to BB4.

At RT0, when the execution of the specific game by ART is decided, or when the bonus hands BB1 to BB4 are won and the operation is finished during the execution of the specific game by ART, the display of the bell spill is triggered. Since it becomes appropriate to shift from RT0 to RT3 by means of the instruction function, neither the normal state nor the advantageous state (including the case where the specific game in the advantageous state is being executed or the execution has been decided) is not operated. I am trying.

As described above, in the present modified example, the RT1 that can be moved by ending the ART of the specific game in which the handheld medals can be increased by the operation of the instruction function does not determine the execution of the ART even if the advantageous state occurs, but the advantageous state In addition to the normal decision process, a special decision process based on the winning of a specific combination determines the execution of ART with a relatively high probability of transition to RT2, and when an advantageous state occurs, only the normal decision process This makes it possible to shift to RT3 that determines the execution of ART with a relatively low probability.

As a result, if the RT1 can be moved to the RT2 after the end of the first ART and before the RT3, the execution of the second ART is determined with a relatively high probability. Therefore, the second ART can be executed within a short period from the end of the first ART, and there is expectation for pulling back the ART or for a continuous vacation. Since RT1 does not determine the execution of ART even if an advantageous state occurs, "When the advantageous period ends at RT1, at RT1, when the next advantageous period is reached, the game state is changed to RT2 or RT3 which is another gaming state. Compared to the case where it shifts, the performance related to the instruction function in the advantageous section obviously becomes higher”, and the fairness of the game can be maintained.

In addition, since RT2 can stay for 100 games, which is a predetermined finite number of times, it can be expected to decide the execution of ART for a stable and long period, and the pulling back of ART and the expectation to the condominium can be effectively achieved. You can have it. Furthermore, since it is possible to move from RT4 that enables ART to RT3 in addition to RT1, it is possible to expect an advantageous transition to RT2 by transitioning to RT1 before transitioning to RT3. From the RT to RT1 instead of RT3 can be offered. However, RT2 is not finite and is infinite, and, for example, the bell spill is not a combination of transition timing symbols in the game state, and a combination from a transition timing diagram that is separately defined in RT2 to RT0 and/or RT3. You may make it change by a display.

In the above, RT0 is provided in addition to RT3, but RT0 is omitted, and RT3 is returned to when a finite number of game results of RT2 are obtained, and after the end of the operation of bonus combinations BB1 to BB4. May be returned to. In addition, by displaying the spilled bell, the RT1, RT4, etc. are moved to RT3, but the spilled bell is not the combination of the transition timing symbols in the game state, and the combination of the falling timing symbols is set from RT4. Only when it is displayed, it is possible to shift to RT1 (the transition destination from RT4 is only RT1), and it is also possible to shift from RT1 to RT3 by displaying a combination of transition trigger symbols that are separately defined. Further, in RT1, even if an advantageous section (advantageous state) occurs, neither normal determination processing nor special determination processing for determining execution of a specific game by ART is performed, and execution of a specific game by ART is not determined. , RT1 need not determine the execution of the specific game with a relatively high probability like RT2, and may determine the execution of the specific game with a relatively low probability. In this case, in RT1, the winning probability in the two-stage lottery process or the like in the normal determination process performed in RT3 is further reduced, the number of types of triggers that determine the execution of the specific game is reduced, and other RT3 is included. Although it is preferable to determine the execution of the specific game with a lower probability than the game state, the execution of the specific game may be determined with the same probability as RT3 by the normal determination process similar to RT3.

In the above, even in the normal state, which is not in the advantageous state, when it happens to display the combination of promotion opportunity symbols in RT3, it shifts to RT4, and in RT4, when it happens to display the combination of falling opportunity symbols, it falls to RT1, Occasionally, it is possible to shift to RT2, which is advantageous when a combination of specific shift trigger symbols is displayed on RT1. There is a way to exclude this, but this modification does not exclude it, and rarely allows the transition to RT2 without going through the first ART, and in some cases the first hit of ART can be expected with high probability. I'm trying to get it.

[Ceiling Function in Machine No. 6] Modified Example The gaming machine of this modified example starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player, and the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. To stop. On the program of the main CPU 101, an advantageous state control means capable of producing an advantageous state (advantageous section) enabling the operation of the instruction function for informing the information about the stop operation of the player, and one of the produced advantageous states. Limiter means for terminating the one advantageous state when the number of games exceeds the upper limit number of games, for example, 1500 G (G; games).

This modified example is a machine equipped with various assist replay times (ART machine) including those shown in the transition diagrams of the respective game states such as FIGS. 13, 105, 106, 108 to 111, 117 to 119, and 125. ), and various assist time loading machines (AT machines) including those shown in the transition diagrams of the respective game states such as FIGS. 122 and 123.

The details of the internal winning combination, the effective line, the specified number of inputs, and the like are the same as those described for each ART machine and AT machine.

However, the advantage state control means of the present modified example, when a small winning combination (a winning combination with a medal) is won by an internal lottery during a normal state (normal section) which is not in the advantageous state, the winning combination is classified into a small winning type. Regardless of the number of games in the advantageous state, the advantageous state (advantageous section) is switched to the advantageous state (advantageous section) regardless of the number of games in the advantageous state. I try to make it happen. That is, almost the entire game period is filled with an advantageous state (advantageous section) of 1500 G units, which is the upper limit number of games of the limiter means.

Further, the advantageous state control means of the present modified example allows the push order small winning combination (No. 77 to 98, etc. in FIG. 17) within the period of 1500 G which is the upper limit number of games until one advantageous state is ended by the limiter means. By operating the instruction function according to the first operation mode including the notification of the correct push order at the time of winning, it is possible to execute the game with the assist replay time ART or the assist time AT that can increase the medals held by the player. There is no increase section that is the first section and the operation of the instruction function according to the first operation mode performed in this increase section, that is, there is no notification of the correct answer push order at the time of winning the push order small win, No increase is expected, and a non-increase section that allows execution of a non-ART or non-AT game in which the number of medals in hand is reduced for 1500G minus the number of games in the increase section is generated. In this case, when the increase section is set to a predetermined fixed number of games, the fixed number of games may be constantly in the ART state or in the AT state, or a pause period in which the non-ART or non-AT state is set on the way. It may be intermittently performed during ART or AT. Further, when the ART or AT ends by the expiration of the increase section for the fixed number of games and the rest becomes non-ART or non-AT, or the ART or AT continues beyond the increase section for the fixed number of games. There may be cases.

It should be noted that the non-increasing section of the second section is not required to uniformly notify the correct-push order in the winning of the small-push-order winning combination, as long as there is no operation of the instruction function according to the first operation mode performed in the increasing section of the first section. Instead of using the push order small winning combination, the notification frequency may be lowered, or the pressing order small winning combination shown in FIG. For those who pay out 8 medals by correctly answering the first and second correct answers of 89-92 and 95-98, the first and second correct answer order is notified in the increasing section. In the non-increasing section, the notification accuracy may be lowered by notifying only the first correct answer order. In addition, the non-increasing section of the second section means that it is not the increasing section of the first section, and it does not necessarily guarantee that the medals will decrease in the second section and the medals will increase in the first section. The relative acquisition performance of the second section is inferior to the first section.

As shown in FIG. 126[A], the number of games in the increased section is set to, for example, 500G, which is assumed (assumed) to continue about 10 sets of ART or AT of 50 games per set, and the number of games in the non-increased section. Is 1000 G, which is obtained by subtracting the number of games in the increased section from 1500 G, is counted in each consecutive game period, and a non-increased section is generated after the increased section. The number of times that the advantageous state starts from an increasing section expected to continue 500G, changes to the non-increasing section after the increasing section, and changes from the increasing section to the non-increasing section within a period until the one advantageous state is ended by the limiter means. Is once. Here, the increase section is set to the fixed number of games of 500G, but when the ART or AT cannot meet the planned set number of 10 sets, or when the number of sets or the number of games is not added on the way. In this case, it is possible that the ART or AT ends 500G before and the non-ART or AT does not occur thereafter. In addition, it is possible that ART or AT may continue beyond 500G.

In this case, if the ART or AT ends at exactly 500G due to the exhaustion of the planned number of sets, or if the ART or AT ends at less than 500G, that is, if the ART or AT ends at 500G or less, the limit number of games is reached. When the counter for managing the excess of 1500 G has reached 500 G, the increase section is changed to the non-increase section. Even if ART or AT ends at less than 500G, the change to the non-increasing section is 500G, so the substantial increasing section is less than 500G. On the other hand, when the counter reaches 500 G, if the ART or AT is being executed, the non-incrementing section is changed after the number of sets or the number of games that have not been exhausted or the number of games has been exhausted. Therefore, the increase section has a number of games greater than 500G, and the non-increase section has a number of games less than 1000G. For example, when the counter reaches 450 G, it may be changed to a non-increasing section after the end of ART or AT for only one set being executed. In this case, the increasing section is more than 450 G and 500 G or less, and the non-increasing section Is 1000 G or more and less than 1050 G.

In this example, the generated one advantageous state is ended by the operation of the limiter means in the non-increasing section in the latter half, and the number of games in the non-increasing section (generally 1000 G) is changed to the next advantageous state after the operation of the limiter means. The number of games added to the number of games until the condition is generated is roughly the number of ceiling games. Since the transition from the non-advantageous state to the advantageous state is made when any small winning combination is won, the number of games in the non-advantageous state in the normal state is about several games below 10 games. Therefore, in practice, the number of games in the non-increasing section (approximately 1000 G) functions as the number of ceiling games. If ART or AT ends in less than 500 G of the increase section, even if it is pulled back to ART or AT with a high probability of exceeding 50% per game during the remaining increase period of non-ART or non-AT, for example. Good. Further, when ART or AT ends in less than 500 G, the increasing section may be ended and changed to a non-increasing section at the end point. For example, if it is decided to terminate the increasing section by changing the ART or AT at 300G and change it to a non-increasing section, the non-increasing section may be 1200G until reaching 1500G, or may be 1000G which does not reach 1500G. One advantageous state may be ended by the end of the section. The end of the advantageous state where 1500G is not reached is the end before the limiter is reached.

Further, as shown in FIG. 126B, the number of games in the non-increasing section is, for example, about 1200 G, and the number of games in the increasing section is, for example, about 300 G, which are counted in each consecutive game period, and after the non-increasing section. You may make it produce an increase area. The advantageous state starts from a non-increasing section of about 1200 G, is changed to an increasing section after the non-increasing section, and the number of times of changing from the non-increasing section to the increasing section within the period until one advantageous state is ended by the limiter means. I'm doing it once.

In this case, when the counter for managing the upper limit number of games exceeding 1500 G by the limiter means becomes 1200 G, the non-increasing section is changed to the increasing section to execute ART or AT, but the counter is changed from 1500 G to, for example, one set of ART or When it becomes 1450G, which is the value obtained by subtracting 50G of AT, the increase section is ended and returned to the non-increasing section by the end of one set being executed at 1450G, and the limiter means is activated in the non-increasing section. Therefore, the increase section is substantially more than 250G and 300G or less, and the non-increase section is two sections including 1200G from the start of the advantageous state and the number of games of 1G or more and less than 50G occurring after the increase section. There are many.

In the case of this example, the number of games obtained by adding the number of games in the non-increasing section to the number of games from the non-favorable state to the generation of the current advantageous state is roughly the ceiling game number. Similarly, since the transition from the non-advantageous state to the advantageous state is made when any small winning combination is won, the number of games in the non-advantageous state in the normal state is about several games below 10 games. Therefore, the number of games in the non-increasing section (roughly 1200G) effectively functions as the number of ceiling games. In addition, it is not always necessary to put a non-increasing section after the increasing section, and when the increasing section is ended above 250 G and less than 300 G, one advantageous state is ended at the end of the increasing section and the normal state is restored. Good. Alternatively, when the ART or AT ends at 250 G or less, one advantageous state may be ended at the end of ART or AT to return to the normal state. In these cases, the end of the advantageous state is the end before reaching the limiter. In addition, during a non-increasing section such as 1200G, for example, the winning probability of a specific winning combination that wins with a low probability that the winning probability is about several hundredths to several thousandths is considerably compared to the increasing section. A low probability may cause ART or AT to occur infrequently. In this case, the non-increasing section is changed to the increasing section when the ART or AT occurs, and the non-increasing section is shortened. Also, the shortened portion of the non-increasing section is added to the increasing section.

In this modified example, an increasing section and a non-increasing section are provided during the period of 1500 G, and the number of acquired medals or the difference between the number of medals obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of acquired medals throughout the period of 1500 G is The number of games in the increased section and the net increase performance of ART or AT are set so as not to exceed a predetermined specified value, for example, 2400. By the way, even if the increase section is set to 750 G, which is half of 1500 G, the difference in the number of medals obtained is 1500 when the net increase by ART or AT which is always activated during the increase section is 2.0 pieces/G. When 0 coins/G is set, the number of coins becomes 2250, and the remaining half of the non-increasing section does not have a positive net increase and the number of medals on hand is reduced. Therefore, no limiter is provided to limit one advantageous section by the number of acquired medals or the difference between the acquired medals. However, in addition to the limiter for controlling the number of games, a limiter for limiting the number of acquired medals or the difference between the acquired medals may be provided.

Further, in the present modification, almost the entire game period is filled with the advantageous section of 1500 G units, so the stay ratio of the advantageous section in the entire game period becomes extremely high. Therefore, the total number of medals obtained by the operation of the instruction function in the increased section and the number of medals obtained by the operation of the bonus combination includes the number of medals acquired when the instruction function is not activated in the non-increased section. In addition, the predetermined regulation value is set to be less than 70% with respect to the total number of acquired medals. Therefore, gambling will not be excessive and the game can be kept fair.

In addition, in the present modification, any of the small winning combinations is used as a trigger for transition from the normal state (normal section) to the advantageous state (advantageous section), but in addition to or instead of this, the lottery value changes depending on the gaming state. Not all or a part of the re-play combination may be performed. Further, all the winning combinations including the outliers may be used as the transition triggering combinations, and if the internal lottery is performed once, the normal state may be shifted to the advantageous state with a probability of 100%.

In the above modifications, the specific numbers of the number of games in the increased section and the number of games in the non-increased section are merely examples, and various combinations of numbers may be adopted. Although the number of these games is basically counted in each continuous game period, the total number is counted in the discontinuous game period, and the increase section and/or the non-increase section is 1500G. It may be divided into a plurality of parts during the advantageous state of. Further, the limit value of the limiter means is set to 1500 G, and may be arbitrarily set to 1500 G or less and 1500 G or less.
Also, during one advantageous state, by increasing the number of game media by operating the instruction function in the first operation mode, an increase section that is a first section in which a game by ART or AT or the like can be executed, There is no operation of the instruction function according to the first operation mode in one section, and a non-increase section of the second section in which it is possible to execute a game by non-ART or non-AT, etc. in which an increase in game media cannot be expected compared to the first section. May be caused to occur, and one advantageous state may be ended according to the period of the first section and/or the second section. Specifically, when a predetermined fraction is generated in the number of games in the second section after the first section and/or in the number of games in the first section after the second section, for example, when there is a predetermined upper limit of 1000 G or more, a uniform 1000 G In case of less than 100G, the number of games is set to 0G in the second section and one set of ART or AT in the first section, and fixed to the number of games in the first section and/or the second section. One advantageous state may be terminated based on the number of games associated with. In addition, including the case where the second section is set to 0 G because it is less than 100 G, the upper limit of the increase section that is the first section is set to, for example, 1400 G, which is less than 1500 G of the limiter value, and a non-increase section is always generated after the increase section. You may do it.
Further, one advantageous state is that the first section is an increased section in which the game can be executed by ART or AT or the like, which can be expected to increase the game medium by operating the instruction function in the first operation mode, and the first section. There is no operation of the instruction function according to the first operation mode, and one of the non-increased section of the second section in which the game can be executed by non-ART or AT in which the increase of the game medium cannot be expected compared to the first section It may be started in the section of 1 and ended in the other section. For example, the second section of the non-increasing section is set to, for example, 500G at the maximum. In this case, if the first advantageous state becomes the second section after the first section and the next advantageous state becomes the first section after the second section, in the worst case, if 1000G corresponding to the second section for two times is consumed. In the increased section of the first section, an increase in game media can be expected. Also, if the sections at the start of the first and next consecutive advantageous states are the same, 500G can function as a temporary ceiling.

[ST-type advantageous section continuation method] Modified example The gaming machine of this modified example starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player, and the variation of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player. Stop the display. On the program of the main CPU 101, there is provided an advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state (advantageous section) that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player.

The internal winning combination includes bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 having a combination of operation symbols similar to those in FIG. The combined probability of BB1 to BB4 is set to about 1/200 in the setting 1. The higher or higher the winning probabilities of all or part of BB1 to BB4, the higher the setting difference. The effective lines are the upper line, the middle line, and the lower line, and the specified number is three. The winning probabilities of BB1 to BB4 may be unified regardless of the setting, without being set constant. The effective line may be 5 lines including the upper right line and the lower right line, or only the middle 1 line. The specified number of sheets may be arbitrarily selected from 1 to 3.

The transition from the normal state (normal section) of the non-advantageous state to the advantageous state (advantageous section) is replaced by the determination mode shown in FIG. At the time of the winning of any of the advantageous interval transition triggers of 61 to 72 (internal winning probability 2860/65536), a predetermined probability, for example, 64 by a two-stage lottery using a 1-byte random number or the like which is extracted independently from the internal random number for random determination. It is possible according to /256. That is, the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section with a probability of 2860/65536×64/256≈1/91.7 to enable the advantageous state to occur. The advantageous zone transition trigger combination may use a re-game combination in which the lottery value does not change in the game state in which the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are randomly determined. Further, the winning probability of the two-stage lottery may be changed according to the type of the advantageous section transition trigger combination.

When the winning combinations BB1 to BB4 are won during the occurrence of the advantageous state, the advantageous state can be ended by the provision of a predetermined ending condition after the winning. Specifically, during the operation of BB1 to BB4 started by the display of the combination of the operation symbols of BB1 to BB4, the type I special accessory RB that is supposed to be always operated is referred to in the game during the operation of the first class special accessory RB. When the lottery is performed by the RB internal lottery table and any of “F_JAC1_1” to “F_JAC1_6” other than “F_JAC2” is won, the advantageous state is ended and the normal state is restored. “Since the lottery value of F_JAC2 is set to a small value of 2002, the normal state is almost reached during the operation of BB1 to BB4.

In addition, the end of the advantageous state triggered by the winning of the bonus combination BB1 to BB4 during the occurrence of the advantageous state, the winning combination of the bonus combination BB1 to BB4, or the combination of the operation symbols of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 is displayed. Alternatively, the time may be set at the time of ending the operation of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4, or at the time of shifting to a specific game state (for example, RT3 and RT4 described later) after the operation of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 is completed. Any of these termination conditions can terminate the advantageous state and return to the normal state as a process related to the instruction function during the advantageous state.

As shown in FIG. 127, after the operation of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 is completed, it is possible to shift to a specific game state RT3 in which the player can stay for a predetermined finite number of times, for example, 100 G (G; game), unless there is a winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4. I have to. RT3 is a finite low-probability game state in which the replay probability is about 1/7.3, and during the stay period of RT3, it is about 1/91.7 which is triggered by the winning of the advantage section transition trigger. According to the probability, the lottery that causes the advantageous state to be generated from the non-advantageous state can be received every game, and the advantageous state can be generated with a high probability during 100 games. When the advantageous state is generated in RT3, the advantageous state does not end during the stay of RT3 unless the winning combinations BB1 to BB4 are won.

After the end of the operation of the bonus combination BB1 to BB4, it is transferred to RT3 via the return destination game state RT4 which is transferred after the end of the operation. RT4 is an infinitely high-probability game state in which the re-play probability is, for example, about 1/1.35, and at RT4, a predetermined high probability, for example, a fraction of a fraction of 1/4.9 is selected. Probability of winning, for example, based on the winning of the re-gaming combination related to the single winning of REP07 in FIG. 21, the combination of transition timing symbols to be displayed regardless of the pressing order "bell"-"watermelon"-"red 7/" "Blue 7/BAR/Blank" is displayed to shift from RT4 to RT3.

Since RT3 can stay for a finite number of times after displaying a predetermined combination of transition trigger symbols from RT4, in RT3, a combination of symbols that causes the gaming state to transition in other gaming states, for example, FIG. No. When the winning combination of any of 77 to 98 is selected, it is displayed with a display probability of 1/2 of the incorrect answer when the pressing order is incorrect. The re-play-watermelon-bell of FIG. 19 is displayed. However, since there is no change in the transition mode based on the same trigger of displaying the combination of symbols, the transition of the game state can be avoided and RT3 can be maintained.

In RT4, since the winning probability of the re-game combination relating to the single winning of REP07 is about 1/4.9, before displaying the bell spill, "bell"-"watermelon"-"red 7/" relating to REP07 is displayed. It is highly possible to expect to display a combination of transition timing symbols of "Blue 7/BAR/Blank", and if it is possible to shift from RT4 to RT3, at RT3, the lottery that shifts from the non-favorable state to the advantageous state is stable. Can receive.

From RT3, as long as there is no winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4, after the result of the game of a finite number of times 100 is obtained, the lottery mode (breakdown and/or lottery value) of the re-game combination is different, but the re-game probability is set. Approximately 1/7.3 low inaccuracy and infinite low accuracy game state transition to RT0.

When transitioning from RT3 to RT0, based on the game history of transitioning from RT3 to RT0, as a process related to the instruction function in the advantageous state, provided that the advantageous state has occurred until immediately before the transition, Execution of the specific game by ART is determined for, for example, 40 games per set.

From RT0, the lottery mode (breakdown and/or lottery value) of the re-game combination is different due to the display of "Replay"-"Watermelon"-"Bell", but the re-game probability is about 1/7.3. Infinite low-probability game state RT1 of low precision of.

In RT1, for example, REP09 of FIG. 21 is included in the overlapping winning combination, and when REP09 is correctly answered in one of the six pressing orders of left-middle-right, left-middle-middle, middle-left-right, middle-right-left, right-middle, and right-middle-left, 6 types of 6-option transition lip (re-playing combination) that displays a combination of promotion opportunity symbols "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-"watermelon", for example, each lottery value is 1495, total 8970/ Lottery with a probability of 65536. When the combination of promotion opportunity symbols related to REP09 is displayed in RT1, the lottery mode (breakdown and/or lottery value) of the re-play combination is different from RT4 from the next game, but the re-play probability is approximately 1/1.35 with high accuracy. And shift to the infinitely high certainty gaming state RT2.

RT2 is a game state on the assumption that ART, which is a specific game, is executed. The first ART game is started after promotion to RT2. During the ART, when the replay probability is high, the instruction function of informing the correct push order on the sub-side display device 11 is activated at the time of winning the push order small combination, so that the number of medals on hand can be easily increased.

During the ART, as the processing related to the instruction function in the advantageous state, it is possible to add the number of continuous games or the number of sets based on the winning of the predetermined re-play combination or small combination. When the number of continuous games or the number of sets of the ART becomes 0, the ART is ended, and it is difficult to avoid the display by not notifying the correct pressing order at the time of winning the pressing order small winning combination. Due to the termination of ART and the fall of RT1, the advantageous state is terminated and the normal state is restored.

In any of the game states of RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4, the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are randomly selected, and the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are Nos. Since the winning combination of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 cannot be displayed in the winning game of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4, the winning flag of the winning combination of the winning combination is carried over from the next game in order to win the re-winning combination or the small combination in the same manner as 1 to 38. The bonus internal winning state RT5 is entered. Even if the bonus combination BB1 to BB4 is won even while RT3 is playing a limited number of times, a transition timing different from that at the time of entering RT3 is generated, and therefore the next game is shifted to RT5.

RT5 sets the replay probability to, for example, 1/2.49, which is between the low probability and the high probability. At RT5, the game state in which the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 are operating is started from the next game in which the combination of the operation symbols of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 related to the winning is displayed.

Before the winning of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4, whether the execution of the specific game by the ART is in an advantageous state or the advantageous state of actually executing the specific game by the RT2 is in the advantageous state, the bonus combination BB1 When any of "F_JAC1_1" to "F_JAC1_6" is won during the operation of the BB4, the instruction function that can be received by the payout of 15 sheets is operated once, and then the advantageous state is ended and the normal state is restored.

As described above, the advantageous state can be ended before the operation of the bonus hands BB1 to BB4 is finished, and when the advantageous state is generated in the lottery during the finite number of RT3 or in the RT4 before the transition of RT3, the finite number of times is generated in the RT3. After the result of the game is obtained, at the time of shifting to RT0, the execution of the specific game by the ART in which the medals can be increased by the operation of the instruction function is determined.

Therefore, the advantageous state interrupted by the bonus combination can be generated again across RT3, the finite number of periods of RT3 function as a special time ST, and a plurality of RT3 and the operating state of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4 in operation. By repeating the occurrence of the advantageous state during the ST period by RT3 during the looping back and forth, it is possible to generate a substantial series of ARTs. Along with this, it is possible to insert an interval in a non-advantageous state that is not an advantageous state in the natural flow of the game. Therefore, while facilitating the clearing of the advantageous section ratio and/or the ratio-included accessory ratio, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced. Further, when the advantageous state is generated at RT3, the specific game execution by ART is determined with a high probability of 100% by ending without winning the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4, but other than RT3. When an advantageous state occurs in the game states RT0, RT1, RT2, RT4, RT5, the ART initial hit lottery for determining the execution of the specific game by ART is not performed, and the initial hit probability of ART is set to 0. This allows the RT3 to effectively function as a chance zone in which the determination of execution of the specific game by the ART can be expected with high probability. When an advantageous state is generated in a game state other than RT3, the ART initial winning lottery is, for example, with a predetermined low probability that the winning probability is 100% or less by a two-stage lottery process triggered by the winning of a specific combination. You can go. Further, the advantageous state caused in a game state other than RT3 may end in a short period of time, for example, in several games, and the chance of receiving the ART initial win lottery with a low probability may be reduced.

In the one shown in FIG. 127, the transition to the RT3 is made via the RT4, but the RT4 may be omitted and the RT3 may be set to the return destination game state in which the transition is made after the operation of the bonus hands BB1 to BB4 is completed. .. In this case, at RT3, the 6-option transition lip that is randomly selected at RT1 which is another gaming state is not randomly selected, and the combination of promotion opportunity symbols to be transferred to RT2 is not displayed. In addition, there is no transition of the gaming state by the display of the spilled bell that can be displayed based on the winning of the push-order small winning combination that is randomly selected in the gaming state where the bonus winning combinations BB1 to BB4 including the RT3 are randomized. RT1 is also omitted, and a promotion role is selected by a 6-choice transition lip or 3-choice transition lip that is promoted to RT2 at RT0, and a 6-choice transition lip or a 3-choice transition lip that is dropped by RT2 at RT2 is randomly drawn. I have decided.

Even in this case, RT3 can be maintained for a limited number of times after the end of the operation of the bonus combinations BB1 to BB4, and the lottery from the non-favorable state to the advantageous state can be stably received at RT3.
In the above-described modification, RT3 is set to the gaming state by the finite replay time that can stay for a finite number of times, but it may be set to the gaming state by the infinite replay time in which the number of times is not fixed. In this case, it is preferable that the average number of stay games in RT3 be about 100 G, for example, in which the occurrence of an advantageous state can be expected with high probability during the stay, and the bell spilled eye is a combination of transition timing design symbols in the gaming state. Instead, it is only necessary to set a transition rate to another gaming state by displaying a combination of transition opportunity symbols defined separately.

<Appendix (Summary of the Invention)>
[Game machines having first to fourth configurations]
In the conventional gaming machine, when the advantageous state is not advantageous to the player (for example, the ART state), the lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, and when the advantageous state is set, the advantageous state is set. It is known that lottery can be performed to determine whether or not to continue (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-240017).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is little variation in determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state, and it is required to devise a device for further enhancing the interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in continuing a state advantageous to a player.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following first configuration.

A plurality of symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of columns, and a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) in which a plurality of activated lines are set,
On the basis of a player's start operation, a symbol changing means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101) for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means,
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit for giving a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line (the winning by the main CPU 101) Check/medal payout processing),
Advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won). )When,
In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether to continue the advantageous state,
The advantageous state continuation determination means,
In the advantageous state, a determination line determination means (for example, a main line that can determine whether one or a plurality of the effective lines among the plurality of effective lines is to be the determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the advantageous state Determination of the ally type by the CPU 101),
In the advantageous state, when a combination of specific symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determination means, it is possible to change the continuation degree to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (for example, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101),
When the predetermined time period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state, based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determination means.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A predetermined area of the symbol display means is made visible, and a symbol display area (for example, symbol display area 4) in which one or a plurality of effective lines are set in the predetermined area,
On the basis of a player's start operation, a symbol changing means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101) for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means,
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit for giving a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line (the winning by the main CPU 101) Check/medal payout processing),
Advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won). )When,
In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether to continue the advantageous state,
The advantageous state continuation determination means,
Of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area, a special line setting means capable of setting one or more special lines formed by connecting straight lines or polygonal lines so as to pass through any one symbol in each column. When,
In the advantageous state, a determination line determination means (for example, by the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether one or more of the special lines among the special lines is to be the determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the advantageous state. Determination of ally type)
In the advantageous state, when a combination of specific symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determination means, it is possible to change the continuation degree to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (for example, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101),
When the predetermined time period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state, based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determination means.

The continuation degree determination means changes the continuation degree to a disadvantageous degree to the player when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determination means in the advantageous state. It is possible that the gaming machine described above.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following second configuration.

A plurality of symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of columns, and a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) in which a plurality of activated lines are set,
On the basis of a player's start operation, a symbol changing means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101) for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means,
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line. A prize check/medal payout process by),
Advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won). )When,
In the advantageous state, when a specific advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when it is decided to shift to the right acquisition lottery state in the line battle state and the right acquisition state transition lottery is won in the right acquisition lottery state) A specific state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to a specific state advantageous for the player for a period (for example, a right acquisition state),
In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether to continue the advantageous state,
The advantageous state continuation determination means,
In the advantageous state, a determination line determination means (for example, a main line that can determine whether one or a plurality of the effective lines among the plurality of effective lines is to be the determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the advantageous state Determination of the ally type by the CPU 101),
In the advantageous state, when a combination of specific symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determination means, it is possible to change the continuation degree to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (for example, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101),
When the predetermined period of time has passed, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determination means,
The specific state is a state in which it is possible to determine whether a specific right (for example, a permanent right or a limited right) is granted,
The game machine characterized in that the determination line determination means determines the determination line based on the given specific right.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A predetermined area of the symbol display means is made visible, and a symbol display area (for example, symbol display area 4) in which one or a plurality of effective lines are set in the predetermined area,
On the basis of a player's start operation, a symbol changing means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101) for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means,
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit for giving a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line (the winning by the main CPU 101) Check/medal payout processing),
Advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won). )When,
In the advantageous state, when a specific advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when it is decided to shift to the right acquisition lottery state in the line battle state and the right acquisition state transition lottery is won in the right acquisition lottery state) A specific state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to a specific state advantageous for the player for a period (for example, a right acquisition state),
In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether to continue the advantageous state,
The advantageous state continuation determination means,
Of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area, a special line setting means capable of setting one or more special lines formed by connecting straight lines or polygonal lines so as to pass through any one symbol in each column. When,
In the advantageous state, a determination line determination means (for example, by the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether one or more of the special lines among the special lines is to be the determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the advantageous state. Determination of ally type)
In the advantageous state, when a combination of specific symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determination means, it is possible to change the continuation degree to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (for example, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101),
When the predetermined period of time has passed, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determination means,
The specific state is a state in which it is possible to determine whether a specific right (for example, a permanent right or a limited right) is granted,
The game machine characterized in that the determination line determination means determines the determination line based on the given specific right.

The specific state is a state in which it is possible to grant the specific right in a number exceeding the upper limit number (for example, 2) that can be determined as the determination line by the determination line determination means,
The determination line determination means, when the specific rights of the upper limit number or more that can be determined as the determination line is granted, determines the determination line of the upper limit number by using the specific right of the upper limit number,
The continuation degree determining means, in the advantageous state, when the predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, if the specific right does not remain, the continuation degree is determined. To a degree unfavorable to the player, and if the specific right remains, it is possible not to change the continuation degree to a degree unfavorable to the player. .

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following third configuration.

A plurality of symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of columns, and a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) in which a plurality of activated lines are set,
On the basis of a player's start operation, a symbol changing means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101) for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means,
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line. A prize check/medal payout process by),
Advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won). )When,
In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether to continue the advantageous state,
The advantageous state continuation determination means,
In the advantageous state, a determination line determination means (for example, a main line that can determine whether one or a plurality of the effective lines among the plurality of effective lines is to be the determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the advantageous state Determination of the ally type by the CPU 101),
In the advantageous state, when a combination of specific symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determination means, it is possible to change the continuation degree to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (for example, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101),
When the predetermined period of time has passed, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determination means,
When a special advantageous condition is established (for example, when the permanent right acquisition lottery is won), a special right granting means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can decide to grant the special right (for example, the permanent right) is further provided. Prepare,
The determination line determination means,
When the special right is granted by the special right granting means, any of the plurality of valid lines is necessarily determined as the determination line,
When the special right is not granted by the special right granting means, when determining the determination line, one or a plurality of the valid lines among the plurality of the valid lines are referred to as the determination line. A gaming machine characterized by being able to decide whether or not to play.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A predetermined area of the symbol display means is made visible, and a symbol display area (for example, symbol display area 4) in which one or a plurality of effective lines are set in the predetermined area,
On the basis of a player's start operation, a symbol changing means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101) for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means,
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit for giving a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line (the winning by the main CPU 101) Check/medal payout processing),
Advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won). )When,
In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether to continue the advantageous state,
The advantageous state continuation determination means,
Of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area, a special line setting means capable of setting one or more special lines formed by connecting straight lines or polygonal lines so as to pass through any one symbol in each column. When,
In the advantageous state, a determination line determination means (for example, by the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether one or more of the special lines among the special lines is to be the determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the advantageous state. Determination of ally type)
In the advantageous state, when a combination of specific symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determination means, it is possible to change the continuation degree to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (for example, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101),
When the predetermined period of time has passed, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determination means,
When a special advantageous condition is established (for example, when the permanent right acquisition lottery is won), a special right granting means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can decide to grant the special right (for example, the permanent right) is further provided. Prepare,
The determination line determination means,
When the special right is granted by the special right granting means, any of the plurality of special lines is definitely determined as the determination line,
When the special right is not granted by the special right granting means, when determining the determination line, one or a plurality of the special lines among the plurality of special lines is referred to as the determination line. A gaming machine characterized by being able to decide whether or not to play.

The continuation degree determination means changes the continuation degree to a disadvantageous degree to the player when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determination means in the advantageous state. It is possible that the gaming machine described above.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fourth configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
On the basis of a player's start operation, a symbol changing means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101) for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means,
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit. A prize check/medal payout process by),
Advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won). )When,
In the advantageous state, advantageous state continuation determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state,
Based on the establishment of the predetermined advantageous condition, it is possible to change the game state in the advantageous state to the first game state (for example, RT2 state), and a special symbol combination in the advantageous state ( For example, a game state transition control means (for example, RT check by the main CPU 101) capable of shifting the game state in the advantageous state to a second game state (for example, RT3 state) when the RT3 transition) is displayed. Processing) and
The advantageous state continuation determination means,
When a combination of specific symbols is displayed in the advantageous state, a continuation degree determining means capable of varying the degree of continuation of the advantageous state to a degree advantageous to the player (for example, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101) ) Is included,
A probability that the internal winning combination determination means determines a specific internal winning combination in which the combination of the specific symbols can be displayed is higher in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state. .

The continuation degree determination means can change the continuation degree to a disadvantageous degree to the player when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the advantageous state,
The internal winning combination determination means can determine a predetermined internal winning combination in which the predetermined symbol combination can be displayed in the first gaming state, and can determine the predetermined internal winning combination in the second gaming state. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it does not.

According to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, in the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state of the advantageous section), one or a plurality of lines (regardless of whether it is an effective line) is related to the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. It is possible to decide whether or not to use the judgment line, and in the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the decided judgment line (for example, "replay" or "bell" symbol alignment) is displayed, the degree of continuation of the advantageous state Can be changed to an advantageous degree for the player, and it is possible to decide whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the determined continuation degree.

As a result, the degree of continuation of the advantageous state can be changed according to the determination result of the determination line, so that the interest in continuing the advantageous state for the player can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine configured as described above, in the advantageous state, when a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols of “shot bullets”) is displayed on the determined determination line, the degree of continuation of the advantageous state Can be changed to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, it is possible to increase the sense of tension in the advantageous state, the game in the advantageous state is not monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest in continuing the advantageous state for the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the determination result regarding the determination line regarding the variation of the continuation degree of the advantageous state varies depending on whether or not the right is granted in the specific state (for example, the right acquisition state). ing. That is, it is possible to determine the determination line based on the right granted in the specific state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, when the right of the upper limit number or more of the determination lines is given in the specific state, first, the upper limit number of the determination lines is determined by using the right of the upper limit number. Then, in the advantageous state, when a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols of "ballistic lip") is displayed on the determined determination line, if the granted right does not remain, the advantageous state It is possible to change the degree of continuation of the above to a degree unfavorable to the player, and if the granted right remains, to change the degree of continuation of the advantageous state to a degree unfavorable to the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a special right (for example, a permanent right) is granted, a plurality of determination lines are always determined, and when the special right is not granted, the determination line is determined. When determining, one or a plurality of lines are determined as the determination line.

As a result, the role of each gaming state in the advantageous state can be diversified, and the degree of continuation of the advantageous state can be varied in various ways, so that the interest in continuing the advantageous state for the player can be improved. be able to.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to change the gaming state in the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state of the advantageous section) to the first gaming state (for example, the RT2 state), and a special symbol. When a combination (for example, "RT3 transition eye") is displayed, it is possible to change the gaming state in the advantageous state to the second gaming state (for example, RT3 state), and the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. A specific internal winning combination (for example, “F_middle rep 1” and “F_middle rep”) that can display a specific symbol combination (for example, a “middle rip” symbol combination) that changes the degree to a degree that is advantageous to the player. The probability of determining "2") is higher in the RT3 state than in the RT2 state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the first gaming state, a predetermined symbol combination that changes the degree of continuation of the advantageous state to an advantageous degree for the player (for example, a combination of the symbols of “shot bullets”) It is possible to determine a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, “F_bulleted lip”) that can be displayed, and it is not possible to determine this predetermined internal winning combination in the second game state.

As a result, in the advantageous state, the degree of advantage of the player is further changed depending on which game state, so that the game in the advantageous state can be made more diversified and further advantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest in maintaining the state.

[Gaming machine with fifth configuration]
In the conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined internal winning combination in which the degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation is won, the game control circuit is notified of the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player. In the state, informing information that enables notification of the stop operation procedure is transmitted to the effect control circuit, and in the normal state in which the advantageous stop operation procedure for the player is not notified, the stop operation is performed. It is known that notification information that disables notification of the procedure can be transmitted to the effect control circuit (for example, see JP-A-2016-144568).

However, in the gaming machine shown above, for example, a predetermined internal winning combination, a plurality of internal winning combinations such as different combinations of symbols displayed even if the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is the same. In the case of including it, there is a problem in that although the effect of notifying the procedure of the stop operation can be performed, the effect related to the combination of the displayed symbols cannot be performed.

Here, it is conceivable that the game control circuit transmits the type of internal winning combination in detail to the effect control circuit, but if this is done, the problem that the control load of the game control circuit increases may occur. Become.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can perform more appropriate effects without increasing the control load.

To achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present embodiment can provide a gaming machine having the following fifth configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
On the basis of a player's start operation, a symbol changing means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101) for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means,
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit. Award check/medal payout process)
A gaming machine provided with a performance executing means (for example, the display device 11 controlled by the sub CPU 201) for executing a performance,
An information transmitting unit (for example, a communication data transmitting process by the main CPU 101) capable of transmitting predetermined information (for example, a winning combination number) regarding the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit to the effect executing unit; ,
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when an ART lottery is won), it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) in which the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified for a predetermined period. A state control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
The internal winning combination determination means,
A combination of specific symbols is displayed on the first line (for example, the top line) of the symbol display means when the stopping operation is performed in the first stop operation procedure (for example, "bat order 1"). A first internal winning combination (for example, "F_upper left bell 1")
When a stop operation is performed in the procedure of the first stop operation, a second internal winning combination in which the specific symbol combination is displayed on the second line (for example, the center line) of the symbol display means. A role (for example, "F_Middle-stage left bell 1"),
A third combination in which the specific symbol combination is displayed on the first line of the symbol display means when the stopping operation is performed in the second stopping operation procedure (for example, "batting order 3"). An internal winning combination (for example, "F_upper middle bell 1"),
A fourth internal winning combination (for example, “the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the second line in the symbol display means when the stopping operation is performed in the procedure of the second stopping operation”. F_Middle-stage middle bell 1”) can be determined as an internal winning combination,
The information transmitting means,
In the advantageous state, when the internal winning combination determining means determines the first internal winning combination or the third internal winning combination, the first information as the predetermined information (for example, “23 as the winning combination number”). ))
In the advantageous state, when the internal winning combination determination means determines the second internal winning combination or the fourth internal winning combination, the second information as the predetermined information (for example, “24 as the winning combination number”). ))
The game machine characterized in that the effect executing means can execute different effects depending on when the first information is transmitted and when the second information is transmitted.

In the advantageous state, it is possible to determine whether one or a plurality of lines among a plurality of lines including the first line and the second line are used as the determination line regarding the variation in the continuation degree of the advantageous state. A determination line determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 determines the ally type),
In the advantageous state, when a combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determination means, the continuation degree capable of varying the continuation degree to an advantageous degree for the player. Determining means (for example, determining the enemy status by the main CPU 101),
Advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, continuous lottery by the main CPU 101) that determines whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determining means when the predetermined period elapses. And the gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, for example, when the stop operation is performed at "bat order 1", "F_upper left bell 1" in which the combination of symbols "bell" is displayed on the top line, and "bat order" When the stop operation is performed with "1", the combination of the "Bell" symbol is displayed on the center line, and when the stop operation is performed with "F_Middle-stage left bell 1" and "Batting order 3", When the stop operation is performed in "F_upper bell 1" where "Bell" symbol combination is displayed on the line and "Batting order 3", the "Bell" symbol combination is displayed on the center line "F_Middle-stage bell 1" can be determined as at least an internal winning combination, and in the advantageous state, for example, when "F_upper left bell 1" or "F_upper middle bell 1" is decided, the winning When “23” is transmitted as the winning combination number and “F_middle stage left bell 1” or “F_middle stage bell 1” is determined, “24” is transmitted as the winning combination number. Then, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute different effects depending on the transmitted winning combination number.

Thereby, for example, in the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state of the advantageous section), in the case of having a game property in which the degree of the advantage of the player varies depending on the line on which the symbol is displayed, Since effects related to the combination can be performed, more appropriate effects can be performed without increasing the control load.

[Amusement machine with sixth configuration]
In a conventional gaming machine, during a specific game state that is advantageous to a player, a story production story that is executed according to the number of transitions to a special game state that is advantageous to the player is advanced, that is, it is advantageous to the player. It is known that the effect contents can be changed according to the period in which the state continues (for example, see JP-A-2016-187467).

Here, in the gaming machine as shown above, for example, when a state advantageous to the player continues for a predetermined period, it is possible to perform a special effect (for example, ending effect) that cannot be normally seen. ..

By the way, such a special effect is executed, for example, as giving an additional privilege to the player, but a device for further increasing the player's willingness to play and enhancing the interest of the effect is provided. It seems that there is room to do.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's motivation for a game and can enhance the interest of the production.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present embodiment can provide a gaming machine having the following sixth configuration.

A gaming machine (for example, a pachi-slot 1) that performs a game by variably displaying symbols based on a player's start operation and stopping and displaying symbols based on a player's stop operation,
Advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, advantageous zone) advantageous to the player when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won).
And an effect executing means (for example, the display device 11) for executing an effect,
The effect execution means,
When the period controlled by the advantageous state control unit to the advantageous state becomes a special period (for example, the game period of the advantageous section is “1200” times or more), special effect (for example, ending effect in ending 2 state) ) Is possible,
When the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied and when the predetermined execution condition is satisfied (for example, when it is determined to shift to the ending 1 state), a part of the special effect is executed. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing a special effect (for example, an ending effect in the ending 1 state).

In the advantageous state, advantageous state continuation determination means (for example, continuous lottery by the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state,
Normal termination means for terminating the advantageous state when the advantageous state continuation determining means does not determine to continue the advantageous state,
Even when the advantageous state continuation determination unit determines to continue the advantageous state, the period during which the advantageous state control unit controls the advantageous state exceeds the special period (for example, a specific period). And a specific ending means for ending the advantageous state when the regulation monitoring period becomes "1500" times),
The effect execution means is capable of executing the special effect from when the period controlled by the advantageous state control means to the advantageous state becomes the special period until the specific period. The gaming machine described above.

The effect execution means, every time it is determined by the advantageous state continuation determination means to continue the advantageous state until the period during which the advantageous state control means controls the advantageous state becomes the specific period, The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests a standard of a period during which the advantageous state control means controls the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to perform the special effect when the period controlled in the advantageous state becomes the special period (for example, when the ending 2 state is set), and When it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state and a predetermined execution condition is satisfied (for example, when it is determined to shift to the ending 1 state), a part of the special effect is executed. It is possible to execute special effects.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the special effect, which is a part of the special effect that can be normally executed at the end of the game in the advantageous state for the player, satisfies the predetermined execution condition. In such a case, the game can be executed at the beginning of the game in a state advantageous to the player. As a result, the player comes to play the game while wanting to see all the special effects, so that the player's motivation for the game can be increased and the interest of the effect can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, from the time when the period controlled in the advantageous state becomes the special period to the period when the period controlled in the advantageous state becomes the specific period, until the advantageous state ends , It is possible to execute a special effect. As a result, even when the acquisition of the game medium is restricted, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the player.

In addition, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, until the period during which the advantageous state is controlled becomes the special period, the period during which the advantageous state is controlled is determined each time it is decided to continue the advantageous state. It is possible to execute suggestive production that suggests. This makes it possible for the player to generally understand when the execution of the special effect starts and when the advantageous state ends, so that it is possible to provide the player with appropriate information while enhancing the interest of the game. it can.

[Game machines having seventh to twelfth configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, a continuous effect for notifying whether or not a special winning combination (for example, a bonus winning combination) that enables a player to shift to a more advantageous condition (for example, a bonus winning situation) is determined as an internal winning combination. It is known that the above can be performed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-79697).

However, whether or not the special combination is decided as the internal winning combination can be guessed not only by the effect contents of the continuous effect but also by the combination of the symbols displayed, etc., so it shifts to an advantageous state. It is considered that there is room for further improvement in the notification regarding whether or not to do it, the mode of transition to an advantageous state itself, and the like.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in transition to a state advantageous to a player.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following seventh configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
On the basis of a player's start operation, a symbol changing means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101) for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means,
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit. A prize check/medal payout process by),
When a specific winning combination (for example, a "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to control to a first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous zone) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, and a predetermined advantageous combination When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery is won in the ART lottery), the advantageous state control means (for example, the advantageous period control) capable of controlling the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous zone) more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Main CPU 101),
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition eye") is displayed, it is possible to change the game state to the first normal game state (for example, RT3 state). , When a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, a normal game state transition control unit (for example, a game state transition control unit capable of changing the game state to a second normal game state (for example, RT5 state)) Main CPU 101),
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, it is possible to change the game state to a special game state (for example, bonus state). A state transition control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
And an effect executing means (for example, the display device 11) for executing an effect,
The internal winning combination determination means,
While it is possible to determine a plurality of predetermined winning combinations (for example, small pressing order winning combinations) in which the degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific winning combination, and the special winning combination, as internal winning combinations, When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to carry over the winning of the special combination until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
If the winning of the special combination is not carried over, it is possible to determine the specific combination and the special combination at the same time as an internal winning combination,
The effect execution means,
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state, if any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to inform the player of the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous. In the case of the first advantageous state and the second normal game state, if any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as an internal winning combination, the stop advantageous to the player is performed. A gaming machine characterized by executing an effect capable of notifying an operation procedure.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eighth configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
On the basis of a player's start operation, a symbol changing means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101) for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means,
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit. A prize check/medal payout process by),
When a specific winning combination (for example, a "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to control to a first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous zone) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, and a predetermined advantageous combination When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery is won in the ART lottery), the advantageous state control means (for example, the advantageous period control) capable of controlling the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous zone) more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Main CPU 101),
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition eye") is displayed, it is possible to change the game state to the first normal game state (for example, RT3 state). , When a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, a normal game state transition control unit (for example, a game state transition control unit capable of changing the game state to a second normal game state (for example, RT5 state)) Main CPU 101),
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, it is possible to change the game state to a special game state (for example, bonus state). A state transition control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
And an effect executing means (for example, the display device 11) for executing an effect,
The specific combination, the combination of the specific symbol is displayed when the stop operation is a specific mode, the combination of the specific symbol is not displayed when the stop operation is not the specific mode Internal Is a winning role,
The internal winning combination determination means,
While it is possible to determine a plurality of predetermined winning combinations (for example, small pressing order winning combinations) in which the degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific winning combination, and the special winning combination, as internal winning combinations, When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to carry over the winning of the special combination until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
If the winning of the special combination is not carried over, it is possible to determine the specific combination and the special combination at the same time as an internal winning combination,
The effect execution means,
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal game state, if any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as an internal winning combination, the player is given a game until the first advantageous state ends. It is possible to execute an effect capable of informing the advantageous procedure of the stop operation, and in the case of the first advantageous state and the second normal gaming state, any one of the plurality of predetermined combinations is determined as an internal winning combination. When it is done, until the first advantageous state ends, it is possible to execute an effect that can inform the player of the procedure of the stop operation,
When the first advantageous state is not the gaming state of the first normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state, and one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as an internal winning combination, a predetermined A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect capable of informing the player of the procedure of the stop operation, which is advantageous to the player, only once (for example, once).

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following ninth configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
On the basis of a player's start operation, a symbol changing means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101) for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means,
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit. A prize check/medal payout process by),
When the specific winning combination (for example, the "chance eye") is determined as the internal winning combination, the first advantageous state (for example, high-accuracy 2 of the normal advantageous section) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period (for example, 9 games). State), and when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when winning the lottery ART), a second advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. ) Controllable advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition eye") is displayed, it is possible to change the game state to the first normal game state (for example, RT3 state). , When a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, a normal game state transition control unit (for example, a game state transition control unit capable of changing the game state to a second normal game state (for example, RT5 state)) Main CPU 101),
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, it is possible to change the game state to a special game state (for example, bonus state). A state transition control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
And an effect executing means (for example, the display device 11) for executing an effect,
The internal winning combination determination means,
While it is possible to determine a plurality of predetermined winning combinations (for example, small pressing order winning combinations) in which the degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific winning combination, and the special winning combination, as internal winning combinations, When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to carry over the winning of the special combination until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
If the winning of the special combination is not carried over, it is possible to determine the specific combination and the special combination at the same time as an internal winning combination,
The effect execution means,
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal game state, if any of the predetermined combinations is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to inform the player of the procedure of the stop operation advantageous In the case of the first advantageous state and the second normal game state, any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as an internal winning combination, and the player is advantageous for the player. It is possible to execute an effect that can notify the procedure of the stop operation,
The advantageous state control means, when the special game state is finished,
When the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the second advantageous state is controlled,
When the predetermined advantageous condition is not established, the game is characterized by controlling to a third advantageous state (for example, four highly accurate states of the normal advantageous section) for a specific period (for example, 32 games). Machine.

It is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) for varying the degree of advantage of the player,
The special winning combination includes a first special winning combination having a different winning probability between the plurality of setting values, and a second special winning combination having a same winning probability between the plurality of setting values,
The predetermined advantageous condition is
In the case where any one of the first special combination and the second special combination is determined as an internal winning combination when the first advantageous state or the third advantageous state is one of the advantageous states, Is also determined,
When neither the first advantageous state nor the third advantageous state is an advantageous state, it is not determined whether or not to be established when the first special combination is determined as an internal winning combination. The gaming machine described above.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following tenth configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
On the basis of a player's start operation, a symbol changing means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101) for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means,
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit. A prize check/medal payout process by),
When a specific winning combination (for example, a "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to control to a first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous zone) advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, and a predetermined advantageous combination When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery is won in the ART lottery), the advantageous state control means (for example, the advantageous period control) capable of controlling the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous zone) more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Main CPU 101),
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition eye") is displayed, it is possible to change the game state to the first normal game state (for example, RT3 state). , When a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, a normal game state transition control unit (for example, a game state transition control unit capable of changing the game state to a second normal game state (for example, RT5 state)) Main CPU 101),
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, it is possible to change the game state to a special game state (for example, bonus state). A state transition control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
And an effect executing means (for example, the display device 11) for executing an effect,
The internal winning combination determination means,
While it is possible to determine a plurality of predetermined winning combinations (for example, small pressing order winning combinations) in which the degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific winning combination, and the special winning combination, as internal winning combinations, When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to carry over the winning of the special combination until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
If the winning of the special combination is not carried over, it is possible to determine the specific combination and the special combination at the same time as an internal winning combination,
The advantageous state control means can determine whether or not the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state,
The effect execution means,
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal game state and the second normal game state, if any one of the plurality of predetermined combinations is determined as an internal winning combination, the game is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute an effect that can notify the procedure of the stop operation,
When the special game state is controlled in the second advantageous state, and when any one of the plurality of predetermined combinations is determined as the internal winning combination in the special game state, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player It is possible to execute the production that can inform
When the special game state is controlled in the first advantageous state, and when any one of the plurality of predetermined combinations is determined as an internal winning combination in the special game state, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player A game machine characterized by not being able to execute an effect capable of informing.

According to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, when the specific winning combination (for example, “chance eye”) is determined as the internal winning combination, the gaming machine can be controlled to the first advantageous state (for example, the normal advantageous zone) and the predetermined winning combination can be performed. When the advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery is won in the ART lottery), it is possible to control in the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous zone), and a specific symbol combination (for example, "RT3 transition eye") is displayed. In the case of being played, it is possible to shift the game state to the first normal game state (for example, RT3 state), and when the special combination (for example, bonus combination) is determined as the internal winning combination, the game state Can be changed to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state). In addition, it is possible to simultaneously determine a specific winning combination and a special winning combination as an internal winning combination. Then, in the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal game state and the second normal game state, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified for a predetermined combination (for example, a small pushing order combination). It has become so.

As a result, in the first advantageous state, the possibility of increasing the number of game media to be added is higher than in the normal state, and the expectation of whether or not to transition to the special game state is also increased. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition of the advantageous state to.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the specific combination is displayed in the specific mode when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode (for example, at an appropriate timing), and is not performed in the specific mode. In the case of being an internal winning combination in which a specific symbol combination is not displayed, and in the first advantageous state and in the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the player about the predetermined combination until the first advantageous state ends. When the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to is notified, and the first advantageous state is not the first normal state and the second normal game state, the player is given a predetermined combination only for a predetermined number of times (for example, once). An advantageous stopping operation procedure is notified.

Thereby, when the specific winning combination is won, whether the special winning combination is also determined as the internal winning combination at the same time, and whether or not the combination of the specific symbols is displayed changes the advantage degree and the content of the first advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player regarding the transition to the state advantageous to the player.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, when the special game state (for example, the bonus state) is finished, the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the second advantageous state is shifted to, and the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied. If not, the game is shifted to the third advantageous state (for example, the high-precise four states of the normal advantageous section) for a specific period (for example, 32 games).

Further, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, when the gaming state is one of the first advantageous state and the third advantageous state, the second special combination (eg, “F_BB3+F_watermelon”) having the same winning probability among a plurality of setting values. 2” and an internal winning combination including a bonus combination other than “F_BB4+F_watermelon 2”), and a first special winning combination (eg, “F_BB3+F_watermelon 2” and “F_BB4+F_watermelon 2”) having different winning probabilities among a plurality of setting values. In any case, whether or not to shift to the second advantageous state is determined, but when the game state is neither the first advantageous state nor the third advantageous state, the first special role is given. In the case of winning, it is not decided whether or not to shift to the second advantageous state.

As a result, the transition of the subsequent game state (advantageous state) can be made more diverse depending on the game state when the special combination is won and the type thereof, and therefore the interest regarding the transition of the state more advantageous to the player Can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal gaming state of the first advantageous state in which it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the second advantageous state, it is possible to inform the player of an advantageous stop operation procedure for a predetermined winning combination. Although it is possible to inform the player of the advantageous stop operation procedure for the predetermined combination even when the special game state (for example, the bonus state) is controlled in the second advantageous state, the special game state is set in the first advantageous state. When it is controlled, it is not possible to inform the player of the procedure of the stop operation advantageous for the predetermined combination.

As a result, it is possible to provide the first advantageous state, which is a game section in which the degree of expectation of shifting to the second advantageous state is increased and the possibility that the number of game media to be provided is also increased, so that the player is in an advantageous state. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition of the game, and even when such a game section is provided, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from becoming excessive and to increase the player's aspirations. It is also possible to suppress excessive fanning.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eleventh configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
On the basis of a player's start operation, a symbol changing means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 101) for starting variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means,
An internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the player's stop operation, stop control means for stopping variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101). Control processing),
When the variable display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit (for example, the main CPU 101) that gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit. A prize check/medal payout process by),
When a specific winning combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, an advantageous state control capable of controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to the player for a predetermined period (for example, two highly accurate states of a normal advantageous section) Means (for example, the main CPU 101),
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition eye") is displayed, it is possible to change the game state to the first normal game state (for example, RT3 state). , When a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, a normal game state transition control unit (for example, a game state transition control unit capable of changing the game state to a second normal game state (for example, RT5 state)) Main CPU 101),
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, it is possible to change the game state to a special game state (for example, bonus state). A state transition control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
And an effect executing means (for example, the display device 11) for executing an effect,
The internal winning combination determination means,
While it is possible to determine a plurality of predetermined winning combinations (for example, small pressing order winning combinations) in which the degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific winning combination, and the special winning combination, as internal winning combinations, When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to carry over the winning of the special combination until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
If the winning of the special combination is not carried over, it is possible to determine the specific combination and the special combination at the same time as an internal winning combination,
The effect execution means,
In the advantageous state and the first normal game state, if any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as an internal winning combination, the player can be informed of the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous. And then
In the advantageous state and the second normal game state, if any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to inform the player of the procedure of the stop operation, which is advantageous. And then
The normal game state transition control means, when the specific combination is not determined as the internal winning combination at the same time as the special combination, and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed, a specific period (for example, 8 Between games), the game state is changed to the first normal game state,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined period is set to a period longer than the specific period (for example, 9 games).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a specific winning combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, two highly accurate states of a normal advantageous section). When a combination of specific symbols (for example, "RT3 transition eye") is displayed, it is possible to change the game state to the first normal game state (for example, RT3 state) and a special role (for example, It is possible to change the game state to the second normal game state (for example, the RT5 state) when the bonus combination) is determined as the internal winning combination. In addition, it is possible to simultaneously determine a specific winning combination and a special winning combination as an internal winning combination. Then, in the advantageous state and in the first normal game state and the second normal game state, it is possible to inform the player of an advantageous stop operation procedure for a predetermined winning combination (for example, a small pushing order winning combination). The period during which the advantageous state can be continued (for example, between 9 games) is set to be longer than the period during which the first normal gaming state can be continued (for example, 8 games).

This makes it possible to maintain the player's expectation regardless of whether or not the particular game state (first normal game state) ends, which is of interest to the player in transitioning to a state. It is possible to improve.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following twelfth configuration.

Advantageous state control means capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) advantageous to the player when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when a bonus hand is won),
A display unit capable of displaying an image (for example, the display device 11),
A gaming machine provided with a detection means (for example, a touch sensor 19) capable of detecting a player's operation,
The display means can display a specific image for notifying whether or not the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied,
The specific image is a first specific image (for example, an image that is partially different from the base image) displayed when the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, and the specific image is displayed when the predetermined advantageous condition is not satisfied. A second specific image to be displayed (eg, the same image as the base image),
The first specific image and the second specific image are images that are different in a specific portion and common in other portions than the specific portion,
When the detection means detects that the player has performed an operation of designating the specific portion when the first specific image is displayed, the fact that the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied is notified. A game machine characterized in that a special image (for example, a message of "bonus confirmed!") to be displayed is displayed on the display means.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the second specific image is an image that is the same as or similar to a predetermined image in an original work used as a motif of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is notified whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition (for example, winning a bonus combination) that enables control to an advantageous condition for the player (for example, a bonus state) is established. Therefore, the first specific image (for example, an image partially different from the base image) is displayed when the predetermined advantageous condition is established, and the second specific image is displayed when the predetermined advantageous condition is not established. An image (for example, the same image as the base image) can be displayed, and when the first specific image is displayed, the player performs an operation of designating a part different from the second specific image. In this case, it is possible to display a special image (for example, a message of "bonus confirmed!") for informing that the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied.

With this, it is possible to inform whether or not the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied by the new effect mode in which the predetermined operation of the player is also involved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest regarding the transition to the advantageous state for the player. Can be planned.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, the second specific image is the same or an approximate image as the predetermined image in the original work used as the motif of the gaming machine. This makes it easier for a player who is attached to the original work to recognize whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition has been established, and thus it is possible to increase the motivation for the game and further enhance the interest in the production.

[Game machine with 13th configuration]
In a conventional gaming machine, a game control device side monitors a time (a time counted by an on-edge timer) a specific operation means (for example, a stop button) is pressed, and the time is sent to the effect control circuit side. Therefore, it is known that the effect contents can be changed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-233278).

However, in recent game machines that require a variety of effects, it is necessary to mount many effects, and therefore it is required to devise to reduce the control load of effects.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and a gaming machine capable of reducing the control load related to the effect even when the effect is changed by the operation mode of a specific operation means. The purpose is to provide.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present embodiment can provide a gaming machine having the following thirteenth configuration.

An operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, a stop button),
Operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch) capable of detecting the operation of the operating means,
And a production control means (for example, the sub CPU 201) for controlling the production,
The effect control means,
When the operation detecting unit detects an operation of the operating unit (for example, on-edge), the time measurement is started, and when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the time measurement, the first effect (for example, "Direction 1") is generated,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, control for generating a second effect (for example, “effect 2”) is performed,
A game machine characterized in that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined time period has elapsed from the start of the timekeeping, control for generating the first effect is not performed.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation detecting means detects that the operation of the operating means is completed (for example, when an off edge is detected).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the operation (for example, the on-edge) of the specific operation means is detected, the time counting is started, and when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the time counting, The control for executing the first effect (for example, “effect 1”) is performed, and the control for executing the second effect (for example, “effect 2”) is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an off edge is detected). If the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined time elapses from the start of the timing, it is possible not to perform the control for executing the first effect.

Accordingly, even when the effect is changed depending on the operation mode of the specific operation means, it is possible to reduce the control load related to the effect.

[Gaming machine with fourteenth configuration]
In the conventional gaming machine, it is known that it is possible to perform an effect such as notifying an internal winning combination by a light emitting mode of a specific operating means (for example, a stop button) (for example, 2010-82034). reference).

However, it is considered that there is room for further improvement in such an effect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interests of production and the interests of games.

To achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present embodiment can provide a gaming machine having the following fourteenth configuration.

State control means (for example, the main CPU 101) for generating an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
Prior to the occurrence of the advantageous state, a pre-determination unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether to grant a right to allow the occurrence of the advantageous state (for example, a winning of a bonus combination),
A game machine provided with a performance executing means capable of executing a predetermined performance (for example, a game value display unit (VL)),
The effect execution means, when the pre-determination means determines that the right to permit the occurrence of the advantageous state is granted, a specific notification effect (for example, "number of pages ahead") Display effect") can be executed, and a predetermined value (for example, end of winning combination as a planned acquisition number) related to the game value that can be acquired in the advantageous state generated based on the right granted by the determination in the specific notification effect. A game machine characterized by displaying a value of a number counter).

When the effect execution means displays the predetermined value in the specific notification effect, the display of the predetermined value is continued at least until the occurrence of the advantageous state thereafter, and when the game value is obtained in the advantageous state, The gaming machine described above, wherein the display of the predetermined value is updated based on the value of the acquired game value.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when it is determined that the right to allow the generation of the advantageous state (for example, the bonus state) is granted (for example, the bonus combination is won), the decision is made. It is possible to execute a specific notification effect (for example, “number-of-numbers display effect”) to be notified, and in this specific notification effect, a predetermined value related to a game value that can be acquired in an advantageous state that is generated based on the right decided to be granted. It is possible to display a value (for example, the value of the combination end number counter as the expected acquisition number).

As a result, since it is possible to perform an effect that specifically informs the value of the right (winning content) obtained by the player, it is possible to increase the interest in the effect and the interest in the game.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the predetermined value is displayed in the specific notification effect, the display of the predetermined value is continued at least until the occurrence of the advantageous state thereafter, and when the game value is obtained in the advantageous state, The display of the predetermined value is updated based on the acquired value of the game value.

With this, a series of effects for notifying the value can be appropriately performed before and after the occurrence of the advantageous state, and therefore, interest in the effects can be further enhanced.

[Game machines having 15th to 18th configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, when the player is not in an advantageous state (for example, ART state) which is a game period (advantageous section) advantageous to the player, the lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, and in the advantageous state. In some cases, it is known that lottery can be performed as to whether or not to continue the advantageous state (see, for example, JP 2010-240017 A).

According to such a gaming machine, the game period that is an advantageous section also changes depending on the setting conditions such as the transition probability of the advantageous state and the level of the continuation probability. Therefore, such a setting condition is an event that influences the interest of the game. Is becoming

By the way, in such a gaming machine, in order to keep the amount of game value given within a predetermined payout rate within a predetermined period, the amount of game value given per unit game in the advantageous state (the amount of increase in game value is The slope value shown) is designed to be a constant value.

Therefore, when the amount of game value given per unit game in the advantageous state is set to a relatively high value, if the above setting conditions are also set to be advantageous to the player, the game There is a problem that the gambling property of is too high.

On the other hand, in order to suppress the gambling of the game, it is possible to set the amount of game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a relatively low value, and to make the above setting conditions disadvantageous to the player. It may be set, but in this case, there is a problem that the interest of the game is significantly reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can maintain the interest of a game while maintaining an appropriate gambling property.

To achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present embodiment can provide a gaming machine having the following fifteenth configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of symbols based on a start operation of a player and stops the variable display of symbols based on a stop operation of the player to perform a game,
Advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, advantageous zone) in which information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified,
First expected value control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a first expected value (for example, expected value α),
Second expected value control means capable of controlling the expected expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to the second expected value (for example, expected value β) smaller than the first expected value (for example, And a main CPU 101),
The advantageous state control means,
Advantageous state start determining means capable of determining whether to start the advantageous state when the advantageous state is not present,
In the case of the advantageous state, including an advantageous state continuation determining means capable of determining whether to continue the advantageous state,
The first expected value control means controls the expected expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to be the first expected value at least for a predetermined period after the advantageous state is started,
In the second expected value control means, the expected expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state including the predetermined period for at least the specific period after the advantageous state is continued becomes the second expected value. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled as follows.

The gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous state continuation determining means does not determine to continue the advantageous state for the specific period at least after the advantageous state is continued.

When the advantageous state continuation determining means determines to continue the advantageous state, the advantageous state started based on the advantageous state start determining means having decided to start the advantageous state ends. After a lapse of a predetermined waiting period from the above, the gaming machine is characterized by continuing the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, it becomes possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high for a predetermined period after the advantageous state is started, and a specific period after the advantageous state is continued. Makes it possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the enjoyment of the game while maintaining the appropriate gambling property.

It should be noted that, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, it may not be decided to continue the advantageous state for a specific period after the advantageous state is continued. By doing so, the payout rate can be managed more appropriately.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, even when it is decided to continue the advantageous state during the advantageous state, the advantageous state is temporarily ended and the advantageous state is continued after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed. (Restart) may be performed. With this, not only can the payout rate be managed more appropriately, but also the interest of the game can be improved with respect to whether or not the advantageous state continues.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following sixteenth configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of symbols based on a start operation of a player and stops the variable display of symbols based on a stop operation of the player to perform a game,
Advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, advantageous zone) in which information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified,
Predetermination means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can determine whether or not to permit the display of a combination of special symbols that enables the transition to the special gaming state,
Specific notification execution means (for example, display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification for notifying that the combination of the special symbols is allowed to be displayed by the pre-determination means,
The advantageous state control means,
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is started,
When a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated,
It is possible to end the advantageous state when the combination of the special symbols is displayed before the predetermined end condition is satisfied,
The specific notification executing means, in the advantageous state, if the combination of the special symbols is allowed to be displayed by the pre-determining means, the combination of the special symbols can be displayed in the game. In this case, the gaming machine is characterized in that the specific notification can be executed.

First expected value control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a first expected value (for example, expected value α),
Second expected value control means capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, expected value β) lower than the first expected value (for example, A main CPU 101),
In the first expected value control means, the expected expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value from the start of the advantageous state until a specific variation condition is satisfied. Control as
In the second expected value control means, the expected expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is the second expected value until the advantageous state is ended after the specific variation condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled so that

The predetermined ending condition is established based on that the game is played for a predetermined period after the advantageous state is started, or that the game value provided since the advantageous state is started becomes a predetermined amount. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, the advantageous state ends when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied or when the special game state is entered before the predetermined ending condition is satisfied. Then, in the advantageous state, when it is possible to shift to the special game state, a specific notification indicating that effect is executed. Therefore, the player can continue the advantageous state by avoiding the transition to the special game state if it is within the range of the prescribed predetermined ending condition. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the enjoyment of the game while maintaining the appropriate gambling property.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high from the start of the advantageous state to the establishment of the specific variation condition. It may be possible to allow the game to be played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low from the time the variable condition is satisfied until the advantageous state is ended. In this way, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied, for example, when the game is played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, or the special game. It is possible to shift to the state, end the advantageous state, and try to have the opportunity to play the game again in the state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. The interest of can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the predetermined termination condition may be terminated when a certain privilege is given to the player (or when it is assumed that the privilege is given). With this configuration, the payout rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following seventeenth configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of symbols based on a start operation of a player and stops the variable display of symbols based on a stop operation of the player to perform a game,
Advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, advantageous zone) in which information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified,
First expected value control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a first expected value (for example, expected value α),
Second expected value control means capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, expected value β) lower than the first expected value (for example, And a main CPU 101),
The advantageous state control means,
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is started,
When a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated,
Before the predetermined ending condition is satisfied, it is possible to end the advantageous state when a combination of special symbols that enables a transition to the special game state is displayed.
In the first expected value control means, the expected expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value from the start of the advantageous state until a specific variation condition is satisfied. Control as
In the second expected value control means, the expected expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is the second expected value until the advantageous state is ended after the specific variation condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled so that

Predetermination means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to allow the combination of the special symbols to be displayed,
Specific notification execution means (for example, display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification for notifying that the combination of the special symbols is allowed to be displayed by the pre-determination means,
The specific notification execution means,
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is allowed to be displayed by the pre-determination means from the start of the advantageous state to the satisfaction of the specific variation condition, , The specific notification can be executed when the specific variation condition is satisfied,
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the pre-determination means during the period from the satisfaction of the specific variation condition to the end of the advantageous state, The gaming machine, wherein the specific notification can be executed when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the pre-determination means.

The first expected value control means sets the probability that the information regarding the stop operation of the player in the advantageous state is notified as the first probability, so that the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is given. Is controlled to be the first expected value,
The second expected value control means sets the probability that the information regarding the stop operation of the player in the advantageous state is notified to be the second probability lower than the first probability, so that the unit game in the advantageous state. A gaming machine, characterized in that the expected value of per game value is controlled to be the second expected value.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high from the start of the advantageous state until the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied, From the time the variable condition is satisfied until the advantageous state is ended, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special game state as a trigger even before a predetermined ending condition is satisfied. That is, for example, when playing a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. Thus, it is possible to end the advantageous state and try to get an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the enjoyment of the game while maintaining the appropriate gambling property.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a game is played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, if a special game state can be entered, a specific notification to that effect is given. It may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is an option not to continue the game when the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and it is possible to maintain the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the expected value-added game value in the advantageous state may be adjusted according to the probability of being notified of the information regarding the stop operation of the player in the advantageous state. With this configuration, the payout rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eighteenth configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of symbols based on a start operation of a player and stops the variable display of symbols based on a stop operation of the player to perform a game,
Advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, advantageous zone) in which information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified,
First expected value control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a first expected value (for example, expected value α),
Second expected value control means capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, expected value β) lower than the first expected value (for example, And a main CPU 101),
The advantageous state control means,
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is started,
When a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated,
Before the predetermined ending condition is satisfied, it is possible to end the advantageous state when a combination of special symbols that enables a transition to the special game state is displayed.
In the first expected value control means, the expected expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value from the start of the advantageous state until a specific variation condition is satisfied. Control as
In the second expected value control means, the expected expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is the second expected value until the advantageous state is ended after the specific variation condition is satisfied. Control so that
When the advantageous state ends in response to the combination of the special symbols being displayed, a special privilege granting unit (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of granting a special privilege unrelated to granting a game value is further provided. A gaming machine characterized by.

Predetermination means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to allow the combination of the special symbols to be displayed,
Specific notification execution means (for example, display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification for notifying that the combination of the special symbols is allowed to be displayed by the pre-determination means,
The specific notification execution means,
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is allowed to be displayed by the pre-determination means from the start of the advantageous state to the satisfaction of the specific variation condition, , The specific notification can be executed when the specific variation condition is satisfied,
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the pre-determination means during the period from the satisfaction of the specific variation condition to the end of the advantageous state, The gaming machine, wherein the specific notification can be executed when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the pre-determination means.

The first expected value control means sets the probability that the information regarding the stop operation of the player in the advantageous state is notified as the first probability, so that the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is given. Is controlled to be the first expected value,
The second expected value control means sets the probability that the information regarding the stop operation of the player in the advantageous state is notified to be the second probability lower than the first probability, so that the unit game in the advantageous state. A gaming machine, characterized in that the expected value of per game value is controlled to be the second expected value.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high from the start of the advantageous state until the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied, From the time the variable condition is satisfied until the advantageous state is ended, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special game state as a trigger even before a predetermined ending condition is satisfied. Furthermore, when the advantageous state ends with the transition to the special game state, it is possible to give a special privilege that is not related to the giving of a game value. That is, for example, when playing a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. Thus, it is possible to end the advantageous state and try to get an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. Further, in the case of shifting to the special game state and ending the advantageous state, a special privilege which is not given when the predetermined ending condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is ended is given, so that the advantageous state is given to the player. It is also possible to give an incentive to end the task early. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the enjoyment of the game while maintaining the appropriate gambling property.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a game is played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, if a special game state can be entered, a specific notification to that effect is given. It may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is an option not to continue the game when the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and it is possible to maintain the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the expected value-added game value in the advantageous state may be adjusted according to the probability of being notified of the information regarding the stop operation of the player in the advantageous state. With this configuration, the payout rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

[Game machine with nineteenth configuration]
It is known that a conventional gaming machine is set such that it can be shifted to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, an ART state) every predetermined number of games (that is, every predetermined cycle). (See, for example, JP 2010-167197A).

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation of transition to the advantageous state every predetermined period, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the period until the state shifts to the advantageous state is constant and there is little change in game property.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and by making it possible to change the period until it becomes a state in which it is possible to shift to an advantageous state, it is possible to make the game rich in variety. The purpose is to provide a game machine.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with the following configuration 19th.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A first special combination (for example, BB1 in another example (2) of game property), a second special combination (for example, BB2 in another example (2) of game property), and a predetermined combination (for example, game property) An internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including another example (pushing order small combination in the second).
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping variable display of symbols,
When the variable display of the symbols is stopped by the stop control unit, a privilege providing unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of providing a privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit, and a game including Machine,
When a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols relating to BB1 in another example (2) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, a first special game state (for example, other game property) (BB1 state in the example (2)) is started, and the first special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the first special game state when the first special end condition is satisfied When,
A second special game state (for example, other game property) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to BB2 in another example (2) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means. BB2 state in the example (part 2)) is started, and the second special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the second special game state when the second special end condition is satisfied When,
And a notifying unit (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of notifying operation information regarding the stop operation of the player,
When the first special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of the first special symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit until the combination of the first special symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit. Is allowed to continue the first special permission state (for example, BB1 permission state in another example (2) of game nature),
When the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the second special symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit until the combination of the second special symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit. The second special permission state (for example, the BB2 permission state in another example (2) of game nature) which is permitted is continued,
The internal winning combination determination means,
In the first special permission state, it is not possible to determine the second special combination as an internal winning combination,
In the second special permission state, it is not possible to determine the first special combination as an internal winning combination,
In the normal game state that is neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state (for example, a general game state (CZ state) in another example (2) of playability), the first special role or The second special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination,
The first special end condition is met when a prescribed number (for example, over 285) of game values are given in the first special game state,
In the first special game state, when the predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game values are given. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed in the specific mode, the predetermined number of game values are not given,
At least a period in which the operation information related to the specific mode is not notified by the notification means in the first special game state functions as a decrease period in which the game value decreases,
The second special game state functions as an increasing period in which the game value increases,
When the specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the first special game state can be set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) during which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified by the notification unit. A gaming machine characterized by that.

A gaming machine, wherein a period during which the notification information is notified by the notification means in the first special game state functions as the increase period.

In the first special game state, the first specific game when a combination of first specific symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to RB1 in another example (2) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means. A first specific game state in which control is possible to start a state (for example, RB1 state in another example (2) of game nature) and end the first specific game state when a first specific end condition is satisfied. Control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
In the second special game state, a second specific game when a combination of second specific symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to RB2 in another example (2) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means. A second specific game state in which control is possible to start a state (for example, RB2 state in another example (2) of game nature) and end the second specific game state when the second specific end condition is satisfied. A control unit (for example, the main CPU 101),
The internal winning combination determination means,
In the first special game state, it is possible to determine a first specific winning combination (for example, RB1 in another example (2) of game play) as an internal winning combination,
In the second special game state, it is possible to determine a second specific winning combination (for example, RB2 in another example (2) of game play) as an internal winning combination,
When the first specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the first special game state, the first specific symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit until a combination of the first specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit. The first specific permission state (for example, the RB1 permission state in another example (2) of game nature) in which the combination of is permitted to be displayed is continued,
When the second specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the second special game state, the second specific symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit until a combination of the second specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit. The second specific permission state (for example, the RB2 permission state in another example (2) of game nature) in which the combination of is permitted to be displayed is continued,
In the first special game state, a period in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is not notified by the notification means functions as the decrease period regardless of whether or not the first specific permission state is set,
In the second special game state, a period of the second specific permission state functions as the increase period, the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, in the normal game state, if the second special combination is won before the first special combination is won, the second special game state is entered, and the second special game state is the game value. Function as an increasing period. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, if the first special winning combination is won before the second special winning combination is won, the operation information is shifted to the first special gaming state, and operation information regarding the stop operation is not notified in the first special gaming state. , The first special game state functions as a decreasing period during which the game value decreases.

Therefore, in the normal game state, the player can continue an advantageous game period by repeating the shift to the second special game state without shifting to the first special game state, but the first special game state. When the game state is entered, the player cannot continue the advantageous game period unless the first special game state is ended and the normal game state is entered.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, when the specific notification condition is satisfied, in the first special gaming state, operation information regarding a stop operation in which a predetermined number of game values are awarded when a predetermined winning combination is won is provided. Be notified. Since the first special game state ends when a prescribed number of game values are given, the end timing of the first special game state can be advanced by notifying such information. That is, it is possible to change the period until the normal game state in which the second special game state can be entered is changed depending on whether or not the operation information regarding the stop operation is notified in the first special game state. Therefore, by making it possible to change the period until the state transitions to the advantageous state, it is possible to make the game rich in variety.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, the period in which the operation information regarding the stop operation is notified in the first special game state may also function as the increase period. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game even during the period until the state shifts to the advantageous state.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the first special game state, it is possible to further shift to the first specific permission state, and in the second special game state, it is possible to further shift to the second specific permission state, and the first special game state. Then, regardless of whether it is in the first specific permission state, the period in which the operation information regarding the stop operation is not notified is made to function as a reduction period, and in the second special game state, the period in the second specific permission state is increased. You may make it function as. By doing so, the playability can be further varied and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Amusement machines with 20th to 22nd configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined advantageous condition is established, it shifts to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, while when a predetermined disadvantageous condition is established, it has a certain state in which it shifts to a disadvantageous state that is disadvantageous to the player. It is known that the player can continue the advantageous state by repeating the transition from the predetermined state to the advantageous state without shifting to (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-167197). ).

However, in such a gaming machine, when the state shifts from the predetermined state to the disadvantageous state, the state is not advantageous to the player until the state shifts to the predetermined state again, so that the player's motivation and interest in the disadvantageous state are particularly deteriorated. There was a problem that it would end up.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve a game motivation and interest.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a twentieth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
Internal winning from a plurality of combinations including a special combination (for example, BB in another example (3) of game play) and a specific combination (for example, push order small combination in another example (3) of game play) An internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining a combination,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping variable display of symbols,
When the variable display of the symbols is stopped by the stop control unit, a privilege providing unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of providing a privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit, and a game including Machine,
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state (for example, RT0 state in another example (3) of gaming nature), a special gaming state (for example, BB state in another example (3) of gaming nature) and a specific gaming state ( For example, having another example of playability (RT1 state in Part 3),
The special game state is started when a combination of special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols relating to BB in another example (3) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, and a special end condition is satisfied. Special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state,
The specific game state is started when a combination of specific symbols (for example, a bell-shaped eye in another example (3) of playability) is displayed on the symbol display means, and when a specific end condition is satisfied, Specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the specific game state,
And a notifying unit (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of notifying operation information regarding the stop operation of the player,
When the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a special permission that allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display unit until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit. The state (for example, the BB permission state in another example (3) of playability) is continued,
The specific game state control means, in the normal game state that is not the special permission state, when the combination of the specific symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, start the specific game state,
The specific ending condition is met when a prescribed number of games (for example, 500 games) are played,
The stop control means,
In the specific game state that is the special permission state, it is not possible to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means,
When the specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, it is not possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means when a stop operation is performed in a specific aspect, and in the specific aspect. When the stop operation is not performed, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbol on the symbol display means,
When the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the privilege granting unit enables a specific number of game values to be provided when a stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and stops in the specific mode. If the operation is not performed, it is not possible to give the specified number of game values,
When the specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the normal game state and the specific game state may be set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the notification information is informed of the operation information related to the specific mode. A gaming machine characterized by being possible.

A gaming machine characterized in that at least the period in which the operation information related to the specific mode is notified by the notification means in the specific game state functions as an increase period in which the game value increases.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a special combination is won, the special permission state is entered, and in the normal gaming state, it is possible to display a combination of special symbols and shift to the special gaming state, If it is a specific game state, it is not possible to display a combination of special symbols and shift to the special game state until the specific game state ends. Further, the specific game state, based on the combination of the specific symbol is displayed without a stop operation in a specific mode when the specific combination is won in the normal game state which is not the special permission state. Then, when the specific notification condition is satisfied, in the normal game state and the specific period in the specific game state, operation information regarding a specific mode is notified when a specific winning combination is won, and if a stop operation is performed according to the notification, The combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, in the normal gaming state, when the specific period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified is given, the shift to the special gaming state is performed without shifting to the specific gaming state. Not only can it be repeated (that is, the game period that is advantageous to the player can be continued), but the game value that is awarded when a specific winning combination is won also increases. Also, in the specific game state, when the specific period during which operation information related to a specific mode is notified is given, it is not possible to shift to the special game state unless the specific game state ends, but when a specific winning combination is won. The game value given to the player will increase. In addition, even in a case where the normal game state is not in a specific period in which operation information related to a specific mode is notified, it may be possible to repeat the transition to the special game state without transitioning to the specific game state. .

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, whether the game is in the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state, whether or not it is the specific period during which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or the specific gaming state is specified. It is possible to change the advantage degree of the player in various ways in accordance with whether or not it is a specific period in which the operation information regarding the mode is notified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game motivation and interest.

In the gaming machine with the above configuration, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the specific game state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the game value increases. In this way, the game value may increase even in the specific game state, so that the interest of the game can be maintained even during the specific game state in which the special game state is not entered.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a twenty-first gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
Special combination (for example, BB in another example of playability (4)), special combination (for example, MB in another example of playability (4)), and specific combination (for example, other example of playability ((4)) Internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including (4) the pushing order small combination).
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping variable display of symbols,
When the variable display of the symbols is stopped by the stop control unit, a privilege providing unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of providing a privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit, and a game including Machine,
As a gaming state, a normal gaming state (for example, RT0 state in another example of gaming property (4)), a special gaming state, a special gaming state (for example, BB state in another example of gaming property (4)), Having a first specific game state (for example, RT1 state in another example of playability (4)) and a second specific game state (for example, RT2 state in other example of playability (fourth)),
The special game state is started when a combination of special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols relating to BB in another example (4) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, and a special end condition is satisfied. Special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state,
When a combination of special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols relating to MB in another example (4) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special game state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. Special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case,
In the case where a combination of specific symbols (for example, a bell spill in another example (4) of game nature) is displayed on the symbol display means, the first specific game state is started, and a specific end condition is satisfied. First specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the first specific game state,
A second specific game that can be controlled to start the second specific game state when the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination and end the second specific game state when the special game state is started A state control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
And a notifying unit (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of notifying operation information regarding the stop operation of the player,
When the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a special permission that allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display unit until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit. The state (for example, the BB permission state in another example (4) of playability) is continued,
When the special winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a special permission that allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol displaying unit until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol displaying unit. The state (for example, MB permission state in another example of playability (4)) is continued,
The internal winning combination determination means,
In the special permission state, it is not possible to determine the special winning combination as an internal winning combination,
In the special permission state, it is not possible to determine the special winning combination as an internal winning combination,
In the normal game state and the first specific game state that is neither the special permission state nor the special permission state, the special combination or the special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination,
The first specific game state control means, in the special permission state and the normal game state that is not the special permission state, when the combination of the specific symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, the first specific game state, Let it start,
The stop control means,
In the second specific game state, which is the special permission state, without making it difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means,
In the first specific game state, which is the special permission state, it is difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means,
When the specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, it is not possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means when a stop operation is performed in a specific aspect, and in the specific aspect. When the stop operation is not performed, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbol on the symbol display means,
When the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the privilege granting unit enables a specific number of game values to be provided when a stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and stops in the specific mode. If the operation is not performed, it is not possible to give the specified number of game values,
When the specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the normal game state and the first specific game state is set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified by the notification means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible.

At least a period during which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified by the notification means in the first specific game state functions as an increase period in which a game value increases.

According to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, when a special combination is won, it becomes a special permission state and shifts to a second specific game state, and it is difficult to display a combination of special symbols and shift to a special game state. On the other hand, if you win the special combination, the special permission state will be entered, but the game state will not shift, and if it is the first specific game state, the combination of special symbols will be displayed until the first specific game state ends. Therefore, it is difficult to shift to the special game state, and as a result, it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Further, in the first specific game state, when the special combination is won in the special permission state and the normal game state which is not the special permission state, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed without performing the stop operation in the specific mode. Based on the transition. Then, when the specific notification condition is established, during the specific period in the normal game state and the first specific game state, operation information regarding a specific mode is notified when a specific winning combination is won, and a stop operation is performed according to the notification. For example, a combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, in the normal game state, when a specific combination is won, a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a special combination or a special combination is won before the first specific game state. If the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special combination is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. . On the other hand, in the first specific game state, if the special combination is won and the special permitted state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game in the normal game state again via the special game state.

Under such a game property, in the normal game state, when a specific period during which operation information regarding a specific aspect is notified is given, the special game state (or the special game state) is entered without shifting to the first specific game state. It is possible not only to repeat the shift (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also to increase the game value given when the specific combination is won. Further, in the first specific game state, when the specific period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified is given, for example, in the case of the special permission state, it is not possible to shift to the normal game state via the special game state. Although difficult, the game value given when a specific winning combination is won will increase. Further, even in the normal game state, even when the specific period for notifying the operation information regarding a specific mode is not informed, shift to the special game state (or special game state) without shifting to the first specific game state May be repeated.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, whether the game is in the normal game state or the first specific game state, in what order the special combination, the special combination, or the specific combination is won in the normal game state, the first specific game. In a specific state in which the special combination or special combination is won, whether or not it is a specific period in which operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal game state, or related to a specific mode in the first specific game state It is possible to change the advantage degree of the player in various ways according to whether or not it is a specific period in which the operation information is notified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game motivation and interest.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the first specific game state may be made to function as an increase period in which the game value increases. In this way, since the game value may increase even in the first specific game state, the interest of the game is maintained even during the specific game state in which it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Can be made

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a twenty-second gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
Special combination (for example, BB in another example of playability (4)), special combination (for example, MB in another example of playability (4)), and specific combination (for example, other example of playability ((4)) Internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including (4) the pushing order small combination).
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping variable display of symbols,
When the variable display of the symbols is stopped by the stop control unit, a privilege providing unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of providing a privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit, and a game including Machine,
As a gaming state, a normal gaming state (for example, RT0 state in another example of gaming property (4)), a special gaming state, a special gaming state (for example, BB state in another example of gaming property (4)), Having a first specific game state (for example, RT1 state in another example of playability (4)) and a second specific game state (for example, RT2 state in other example of playability (fourth)),
The special game state is started when a combination of special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols relating to BB in another example (4) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, and a special end condition is satisfied. Special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state,
When a combination of special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols relating to MB in another example (4) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special game state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. Special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case,
In the case where a combination of specific symbols (for example, a bell spill in another example (4) of game nature) is displayed on the symbol display means, the first specific game state is started, and a specific end condition is satisfied. First specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the first specific game state,
A second specific game that can be controlled to start the second specific game state when the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination and end the second specific game state when the special game state is started A state control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
And a notifying unit (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of notifying operation information regarding the stop operation of the player,
When the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a special permission that allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display unit until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit. The state (for example, the BB permission state in another example (4) of playability) is continued,
When the special winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a special permission that allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol displaying unit until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol displaying unit. The state (for example, MB permission state in another example of playability (4)) is continued,
The internal winning combination determination means,
In the special permission state, it is not possible to determine the special winning combination as an internal winning combination,
In the special permission state, it is not possible to determine the special winning combination as an internal winning combination,
In the normal game state and the first specific game state that is neither the special permission state nor the special permission state, the special combination or the special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination,
The first specific game state control means, in the special permission state and the normal game state that is not the special permission state, when the combination of the specific symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, the first specific game state, Let it start,
The specific ending condition is satisfied when a specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) are played, and is not satisfied when the special game state is started,
The stop control means,
In the second specific game state, which is the special permission state, without making it difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means,
In the first specific game state, which is the special permission state, it is difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means,
When the specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, it is not possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means when a stop operation is performed in a specific aspect, and in the specific aspect. When the stop operation is not performed, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbol on the symbol display means,
When the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the privilege granting unit enables a specific number of game values to be provided when a stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and stops in the specific mode. If the operation is not performed, it is not possible to give the specified number of game values,
When the specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the normal game state and the first specific game state is set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified by the notification means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible.

At least a period during which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified by the notification means in the first specific game state functions as an increase period in which a game value increases.

According to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, when a special combination is won, it becomes a special permission state and shifts to a second specific game state, and it is difficult to display a combination of special symbols and shift to a special game state. On the other hand, if the special combination is won, the special permission state is entered, but the game state does not shift, and if the first specific game state, a prescribed number of games are played and the first specific game state ends. It is difficult to display a combination of special symbols until it shifts to the special game state, and as a result, it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Further, in the first specific game state, when the special combination is won in the special permission state and the normal game state which is not the special permission state, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed without performing the stop operation in the specific mode. Based on the transition. Then, when the specific notification condition is established, during the specific period in the normal game state and the first specific game state, operation information regarding a specific mode is notified when a specific winning combination is won, and a stop operation is performed according to the notification. For example, a combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, in the normal game state, when a specific combination is won, a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a special combination or a special combination is won before the first specific game state. If the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special combination is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. . On the other hand, in the first specific game state, if the special combination is won and the special permitted state is achieved, it becomes difficult to play the game in the normal game state again until the specified number of games have been played.

Under such a game property, in the normal game state, when a specific period during which operation information regarding a specific aspect is notified is given, the special game state (or the special game state) is entered without shifting to the first specific game state. It is possible not only to repeat the shift (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also to increase the game value given when the specific combination is won. Further, in the first specific game state, when the specific period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified is given, for example, in the case of the special permission state, it is not possible to shift to the normal game state via the special game state. Although difficult, the game value given when a specific winning combination is won will increase. Further, even in the normal game state, even when the specific period for notifying the operation information regarding a specific mode is not informed, shift to the special game state (or special game state) without shifting to the first specific game state May be repeated.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, whether the game is in the normal game state or the first specific game state, in what order the special combination, the special combination, or the specific combination is won in the normal game state, the first specific game. In a specific state in which the special combination or special combination is won, whether or not it is a specific period in which operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal game state, or related to a specific mode in the first specific game state It is possible to change the advantage degree of the player in various ways according to whether or not it is a specific period in which the operation information is notified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game motivation and interest.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the first specific game state may be made to function as an increase period in which the game value increases. In this way, since the game value may increase even in the first specific game state, the interest of the game is maintained even during the specific game state in which it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Can be made

[Game Machines of 23rd and 24th Configurations]
In a conventional game machine, it is possible to shift to an advantageous state (eg, ART state) advantageous to a player when a specific condition is satisfied while a special combination (eg, bonus role) is being carried over. There are known ones (see, for example, JP-A-2015-73810).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, the amount of game value given per unit game in the advantageous state (gradient value indicating the amount of increase in game value) is designed to be a constant value. For this reason, there is a problem that the change in playability is poor.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and by making it possible to change the inclination value indicating the increase amount of the game value in the advantageous state, it is possible to make the game property rich in change. An object is to provide a game machine that can be used.

To achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present embodiment can provide a twenty-third gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A first special combination (for example, BB1 in another example of playability (5)), a second special combination (for example, BB3 in another example of playability (5)), a first predetermined combination (for example, game) The small push order winning combinations 1, 3, 5 in other examples of sex (5) and the second predetermined winning combination (for example, the small pushing order wins 2, 4, 6 in other examples of gaming (5)) An internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations including
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping variable display of symbols,
When the variable display of the symbols is stopped by the stop control unit, a privilege providing unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of providing a privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit, and a game including Machine,
When a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols relating to BB1 in another example (5) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, a first special game state (for example, other game property) The first special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB1 state in the example (No. 5)
A second special game state (for example, other game property) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to BB3 in another example (5) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means. Of the second special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB3 state in the example (No. 5)
And an advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling in an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous zone) in which information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified
When the first special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of the first special symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit until the combination of the first special symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit. The first special permission state (for example, between BB1 flags in another example (5) of game play) that is permitted is continued,
When the second special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit. The second special permission state (for example, between BB3 flags in another example (5) of game nature) is allowed to continue,
The internal winning combination determining means overlaps each of the first special winning combination and the second special winning combination with another internal winning combination when neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state. It is possible to decide as an internal winning combination without doing
The stop control means,
In the game in which the first special winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and in the game in which no other internal winning combination is determined in the first special permission state, when the timing of the stop operation of the player is appropriate, It is possible to display the combination of the first special symbol on the symbol display means,
In a game in which the second special winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination and in a game in which no other internal winning combination is determined in the second special permission state, when the timing of the stop operation of the player is appropriate, It is possible to display a combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means,
In the first special permission state, when the first predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game values are displayed on the symbol display means regardless of the order of stop operations by the player. Display the combination of predetermined symbols to be given,
In the first special permission state, when the second predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of the predetermined symbols is not displayed on the symbol display means regardless of the order of the stop operation by the player,
In the second special permission state, when the first predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the order of the stop operation of the player is appropriate, the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed on the pattern display means. On the other hand, when the order of the stop operation by the player is not appropriate, the combination of the predetermined symbols is not displayed on the symbol display means,
In the second special permission state, when the second predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the order of the stop operation by the player is appropriate, the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed on the pattern display means. On the other hand, when the order of the stop operation by the player is not appropriate, the combination of the predetermined symbols is not displayed on the symbol display means,
The advantageous state control means can set at least a specific period in the second special permission state to the advantageous state when a specific advantageous condition is satisfied,
In the advantageous state, when any of the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the player's stop operation for displaying the combination of the predetermined symbols on the symbol display means. A gaming machine characterized by being informed of the order.

The internal winning combination determination means,
The first special winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination with a first probability (for example, 1/100),
The second special combination is determined as an internal winning combination with a second probability (for example, 1/450) lower than the first probability,
The probability that no other internal winning combination is determined in the first special permission state (for example, 1/4000) is higher than the probability that no other internal winning combination is determined in the second special permission state (for example, 1/65536). A gaming machine characterized by high price.

The timing of the stop operation of the player capable of displaying the combination of the first special symbols on the symbol display means is of the player capable of displaying the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means. A game machine characterized by not overlapping the timing of the stop operation.

In the game in which the first special combination or the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to inform that either the first special combination or the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination. However, a predetermined notification executing means (for example, the display device 11) capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, bonus winning notification) that does not allow the type to be notified,
In the first special permission state, it is possible to inform that the combination of the first special symbols is permitted to be displayed on the symbol display means, and in the second special permission state, the symbol display means Further, a specific notification executing means (for example, the display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification (for example, bonus type notification) that can notify that the combination of the second special symbols is permitted to be displayed. A gaming machine characterized by having it.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the first special winning combination or the second special winning combination is won, another internal winning combination is determined in the game or in the first special permission state or the second special permission state after winning. Unless the game is not played (so-called, lost), the combination of the first special symbol or the combination of the second special symbol cannot be displayed. In addition, in the first special permission state, when the first predetermined winning combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given regardless of the pushing order, and when the second predetermined winning combination is won, the predetermined number of gaming values is obtained regardless of the pushing order. Not granted. On the other hand, in the second special permission state, when the first predetermined combination or the second predetermined combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given if the pushing order is correct, and a predetermined number of games if the pushing order is incorrect. No value is given. Then, at least during the specific period of the second special permission state, it is possible to control to an advantageous state in which the information of the stop operation of the player is notified.

That is, if the first special combination is won, and the combination of the first special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the first special permission state ends thereafter. Since the profits will not change due to the player, and the player can receive a certain amount of profits, the profits will not increase drastically, so even if it becomes advantageous, it shows the amount of increase in the game value. The slope value will be relatively low. On the other hand, if the second special combination is won and the combination of the second special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the second special permission state is finished. As a result, the profit fluctuates, and the player may suffer a disadvantage more than in the first special permission state. However, when the advantageous state is reached, the profit is dramatically increased. The slope value indicating the increase in value is relatively high. Therefore, by making it possible to change the inclination value indicating the increase amount of the game value in the advantageous state, it is possible to make the game property rich in variation.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, the winning probability of the first special combination is made higher than the winning probability of the second special combination, and the probability that the combination of the first special symbols can be displayed in the first special permission state is the second. In the special permission state, the combination of the second special symbols may be set higher than the displayable probability. That is, the first special permission state may be set to a state in which it is easier to shift than the second special permission state and to be finished, and the second special permission state may be set to be a state in which it is harder to shift than the first special permission state and is hard to finish. In this way, the enjoyment of the game can be maintained while the gambling property is moderate.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the combination of the first special symbol relating to the first special combination and the second special symbol relating to the second special symbol cannot be aimed at the same time when the player makes a push. You may comprise so that it may be arrange|positioned at intervals. By doing so, the playability can be further varied and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the first special winning combination or the second special winning combination is won, the fact that the winning is won is notified to either one, but the type is not notified, and the first special permission state and The type may be notified in the second special permission state. By doing so, it is possible to notify the information desired by the player while further enhancing the playability.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a twenty-fourth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and symbol display area 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
A first special combination (for example, BB1 in another example of playability (6)), a second special combination (for example, BB2 in another example of playability (6)), and a specific combination (for example, playability) An internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including “F_REP B” in another example (6).
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping variable display of symbols,
When the variable display of the symbols is stopped by the stop control unit, a privilege providing unit (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of providing a privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit, and a game including Machine,
When a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to BB1 in another example of game property (6)) is displayed on the symbol display means, a first special game state (for example, other game property) The first special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB1 state in the example (6)
A second special game state (for example, other game property) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols relating to BB2 in another example (6) of game property) is displayed on the symbol display means. Of the second special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to start the BB2 state in the example (6)
And an advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling in an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous zone) in which information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified
When the first special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of the first special symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit until the combination of the first special symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit. The first special permission state (for example, between the BB1 flags in another example (6) of game nature) permitted to be continued,
When the second special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit. The second special permission state (for example, between BB2 flags in another example (6) of game nature) in which is permitted is continued,
The internal winning combination determination means,
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is satisfied and the bet game value is the first amount (for example, 3), the first special combination is internally won. When the bet game value is a second amount (for example, two cards), it is not possible to determine the first special combination as an internal winning combination,
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state, and the bet game value is the second amount, the second special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination. When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination,
The stop control means,
When the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, in the case of the first special permission state, a combination of specific symbols in the symbol display means (for example, chance of another example (6) of game nature) ) Is not possible, and in the case of the second special permission state, it is possible to display a combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means,
The advantageous state control means,
When the bet game value is the first amount, at least when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means, the advantage It is possible to decide whether to give a state,
A gaming machine, wherein when the bet game value is the second amount, it is not possible to decide whether or not to give the advantageous state.

The stop control means,
When the game value bet is the first amount, in the case of the first special permission state, it is possible to display the combination of the first special symbol on the symbol display means, the second In the special permission state, it is not possible to display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means,
When the game value bet is the second amount, in the case of the second special permission state, it is possible to display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means, the first In the special permission state, it is not possible to display the combination of the first special symbol on the symbol display means, a gaming machine.

The internal winning combination determination means further includes a first predetermined combination (for example, the push order bell A in another example of playability (6)) and a second predetermined combination (for example, another example of playability (6)). It is possible to determine the push order bell in B) as an internal winning combination,
The stop control means,
When the first predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and if the mode of the stop operation of the player is appropriate, the symbol display means displays a predetermined symbol combination to which a predetermined number of game values are given. If the mode of the player's stop operation is not appropriate, the symbol display means does not display the combination of the predetermined symbols,
When the second predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, when the bet game value is the first amount and the first special permission state is set, regardless of the mode of the stop operation of the player. Instead, the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed on the symbol display means, when the bet game value is the first amount and the second special permission state, and the bet game value is the second. If the mode of the stop operation of the player is appropriate, while the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed, if the mode of the stop operation of the player is not appropriate, the symbol display means displays Without displaying the combination of predetermined symbols,
In the advantageous state, a game machine characterized in that information indicating a mode of a stop operation of the player for displaying the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed on the symbol display means.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, when the bet game value is the first amount, the first special combination can be won, while the second special combination cannot be won. When the bet game value is the second amount, the second special combination can be won, while the first special combination cannot be won. When the winning combination is won, the combination of the specific symbols cannot be displayed in the first special permission state, and the combination of the specific symbols can be displayed in the second special permission state. Then, when the bet game value is the first amount, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed, whether or not the advantageous state is given When the bet game value is the second amount, it is not possible to decide whether or not to give the advantageous state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, when the bet game value is the first amount, the combination of the first special symbols can be displayed, while the combination of the second special symbols cannot be displayed. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount, the combination of the second special symbols may be displayed, but the combination of the first special symbols may not be displayed.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, as a state in which a game is played, for example, a state in which the game value is bet with a first amount of game value being bet, and a second special permission state. And a state where a first amount of game value is bet and a game is played, a state where a first amount of game value is bet and a game is played, and a second special permission It is possible to create a plurality of states such as a state in which the second amount of game value is bet and the game is played.

According to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, for example, a state in which the game is played by betting the first amount of the game value in the second special permission state is defined as a state in which the giving of the advantageous state is favored, A state in which a game value of 2 is bet and a game is played is a state in which an advantageous state is not given. That is, regarding the provision of the advantageous state, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player depending on which amount of game value is bet, which special combination is won, and the like. Therefore, by making it possible to change the inclination value indicating the increase amount of the game value in the advantageous state, it is possible to make the game property rich in variation.

In the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, when the first predetermined winning combination is won, regardless of which state, for example, if the correct pushing order is given, a predetermined number of gaming values are given, and the pushing order is improper. If the answer is correct, a predetermined number of game values will not be given, and if the second predetermined combination is won, it will be in a state where the first amount of game value is bet and the game is bet. Then, for example, while a predetermined number of game values are given regardless of the pressing order, in other states, the same control as the first predetermined winning combination may be performed. In this way, the state in which the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played in the first special permission state can be set to the state where the giving of the game value is preferentially given at the time of the predetermined winning combination. Therefore, the game play can be made more varied.

[Gaming machine with 25th configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-50862), information on a stop operation that is advantageous to a player with respect to a performance of acquiring a game medal or the like, that is, a correct answer order of a stop button or an appropriate press operation. An advantageous section or an advantageous state in which an instruction function for instructing instruction information for identifying or inferring a winning combination that causes a difference in acquisition performance such as a position can be activated (indication information can be informed), and Setting a normal interval or a normal state that disables the automatic instruction function (not able to notify the instruction information), and does not depend on the setting that gives superiority or inferiority to the expected value of the won medal at the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section. There is known a gaming machine that seeks a requirement to win an initial win by being associated with a winning winning combination without a winning combination (paragraphs 0044 to 0050, etc.).

Then, during the advantageous section by the assist replay time ART (AT in the literature, RT1 is AT), when the correct answer is given in the order of pressing the stop button, the prescribed number of inserts, for example, the push order bell role that pays out more than 8 medals, for example 8 medals When you win, you can easily increase the number of medals you have by notifying the corresponding correct pressing order on the liquid crystal display device etc., and it is possible to acquire medals that have been collected to some extent during the advantageous section by the continuous ART for the predetermined number of games Then, when the number of remaining games in the ART etc. is exhausted, the normal section is restored, and the expectation is again made for the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (paragraph 0070 etc.).

However, with the above gaming machines, when the advantageous section due to ART ends, it is necessary to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section again under the same requirements as for the first hit, so there is a risk of reducing the number of medals in hand in the normal section. However, it is difficult to find the reason why the player continues to play the game, and there is room for improvement in order for the player to continue playing the game for a longer time.

That is, the motivation to continue playing games even after returning from the advantageous section to the normal section often results from regret that the number of medals on hand does not increase more than expected, but revenge always involves risks. In addition, the end of the advantageous section informs the player, who has been able to obtain a sufficient number of medals and is satisfied, when the game is stopped.

Therefore, neither expecting a player who feels frustrated to recover in a more favorable condition than the first time winning or expecting a player who is satisfied to accumulate more medals won will not come true, There was a limit to keep playing longer.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to continue playing a game for a long time. In order to solve this problem, the following is provided. A gaming machine having a twenty-fifth configuration is provided.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Advantageous state control means (for example, advantageous state control means 101a provided in the main CPU 101) capable of causing an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART etc.) that enables the operation of the instruction function for notifying information regarding the stop operation of the player Etc.),
A first game point is provided on condition that the advantageous state continues for a predetermined number of games reached (for example, 500 games or more), and a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, bonus combinations BB1 to BB4) A game point giving means (for example, a game point giving means 101b provided in the main CPU 101) for giving a second game point under a predetermined condition (for example, a winning within 100 games or the like) based on the winning,
Based on the first game points and the second game points, if a predetermined high point evaluation (for example, the total reaches a predetermined value 100, etc.) is low point evaluation (for example, the total is a predetermined value). The game machine is characterized in that it is easier to return to the game in which the instructing function is activated than in the case where 100 is not reached, etc.).

As a result, the first game point is given on the condition that the advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function is continued for the predetermined number of reaching games or more, and the predetermined condition is obtained based on the predetermined winning of the internal winning combination. A second game point is given below, and if a high point evaluation is made based on these points, it is easy to return to the game in which the instruction function is activated. Therefore, if the advantageous state continues to some extent, it is worth continuing to play the game.

In the above gaming machines,
Whether the first game point (eg, 99 points or 50 points) is returned to the game that activates the instruction function when the second game point (eg, 1 point or more) is given. A gaming machine characterized by including a numerical value (for example, 99 points) satisfying a condition (for example, 100 points or more) for receiving the lottery processing (for example, a lottery processing for returning to ART at 50%).

As a result, after expecting to give the first game points, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to continue playing the game, expecting to give the second game points.

Instead of the above gaming machines,
In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Advantageous state control means (for example, advantageous state control means 101a provided in the main CPU 101) capable of causing an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART etc.) that enables the operation of the instruction function for notifying information regarding the stop operation of the player Etc.),
A game point giving unit (for example, a game point giving unit 101b provided in the main CPU 101) for giving a predetermined accumulable game point under a predetermined condition,
If the cumulative value of the game points is a predetermined high point evaluation (for example, reaching a predetermined value 100, reaching a full point 256, etc.), a low point evaluation (for example, not reaching the predetermined value 100, reaching a full point 256). The expected value for increasing the number of games enabling the operation of the instruction function within a range that does not exceed the maximum number of games that can be continued in the advantageous state (for example, 1500 games) A gaming machine characterized by being.

As a result, when the cumulative value of the game points becomes a high point evaluation, the expected value for increasing the number of games that enables the operation of the instruction function within a range that does not exceed the maximum sustainable number of games in the advantageous state increases. .. Therefore, the player can be prompted to increase the cumulative value of the game points, and the game can be continued for a longer time.

According to the twenty-fifth configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to continue playing the game for a long time.

[Amusement machine with 26th configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-50862), information on a stop operation that is advantageous to a player with respect to a performance of acquiring a game medal or the like, that is, a correct answer order of a stop button or an appropriate press operation. An advantageous section or an advantageous state in which an instruction function for instructing instruction information for identifying or inferring a winning combination that causes a difference in acquisition performance such as a position can be activated (indication information can be informed), and Setting a normal interval or a normal state that disables the automatic instruction function (not able to notify the instruction information), and does not depend on the setting that gives superiority or inferiority to the expected value of the won medal at the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section. There is known a gaming machine that seeks a requirement to win an initial win by being associated with a winning winning combination without a winning combination (paragraphs 0044 to 0050, etc.).

In addition, as a method of substantially striking the difference between superiority and inferiority due to the setting in the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the period of the bonus game in which the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section is disabled (the one in the literature is the RBB1 operating period) The longer the setting is, the longer the setting becomes, and the longer the period until the lottery that can shift from the normal section to the advantageous section after the bonus game ends can be received. The easier the setting, the easier it is to move to the advantageous section (paragraphs 0014 to 0016, etc.).

However, with the above gaming machines, even if it is possible to effectively set the superiority or inferiority for the initial hit to the advantageous section, it has already moved to the advantageous section, and the big bonus BB (RBB1) during the advantageous section. If there is a win, there is basically no way of thinking that the advantageous section continues during the operation of the BB and after the operation of the BB, and the advantageous section is uniformly ended by the winning of the big bonus BB (RBB1). Even if it shifts to the normal section or maintains the advantageous section, it is possible to fall to the normal section during BB operation (paragraph 0094 etc.).

Therefore, if the big bonus BB is won during the advantageous section, it is basically necessary to win the first hit from the normal section to the advantageous section again after the operation of the BB, and the big bonus BB is won during the advantageous section. If the winning is won, the interest in playing the game may be deteriorated.

Moreover, if the big bonus BB is won regardless of whether it is in the advantageous section or the normal section, in the game while the BB is operating, neither the transition to the advantageous section nor the addition of the instruction function during the advantageous section is added, so the BB is operating. The game is positioned as a digestive game where you expect only to win medals, and there is a risk that it will be uninteresting.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can effectively achieve superiority or inferiority by setting without deteriorating the attractiveness of the game by taking advantage of a bonus winning. In order to solve this problem, a gaming machine having the following 26th configuration is provided.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Advantageous state control means capable of causing an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART etc.) that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
And a setting changing unit (for example, a setting key type switch 54 or the like) capable of changing the setting for determining the payout rate, which is the ratio of the total number of game media to be inserted to the total number of game media, in a plurality of levels.
For the internal winning combination, the first bonus combination (for example, MB0) that performs a predetermined process to increase the game that activates the instruction function, and the low setting has a larger number of active games than the high setting. And a second bonus combination (for example, BB0)
A gaming machine characterized by causing a difference in performance for increasing a game for operating the instruction function, depending on the number of winnings of the first bonus combination and the second bonus combination.

As a result, in a low setting in which the number of games in which the second bonus combination is active increases, the number of games in which the opportunity to win the first bonus combination that performs a predetermined process for increasing the game that activates the instruction function is deprived As a result, the performance of increasing the number of games for activating the instruction function is reduced. On the other hand, in the high setting in which the number of games in which the second bonus combination is in operation is small, the number of games in which the first bonus combination performing a predetermined process for increasing the number of games to activate the instruction function is won is lessened. Therefore, the performance of increasing the game for operating the instruction function is improved.

In the above gaming machines,
The second bonus combination allows the number of games until the end of the operation to be longer for a low setting than for a high setting.

As a result, each time the second bonus combination is activated, the low setting takes more chances of winning the first bonus combination than the high setting, and thus the superiority or inferiority due to the setting difference can be effectively set.

Instead of the above gaming machines,
In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Advantageous state control means capable of causing an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART etc.) that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
And a setting changing unit (for example, a setting key type switch 54 or the like) capable of changing the setting for determining the payout rate, which is the ratio of the total number of game media to be inserted to the total number of game media, in a plurality of levels.
In the internal winning combination, a low setting includes a bonus combination (for example, BB0) in which the number of active games is larger than that in the high setting,
When the operation of the bonus combination is compared with the non-operation of the bonus combination, the non-operation of the bonus combination has a higher performance of increasing the game for activating the instruction function. And a gaming machine.

As a result, in the low setting in which the number of games in which the bonus combination is in operation increases, the high-performance bonus combination that increases the number of games in which the instruction function is activated deprives more of the inactive game, and the instruction function The ability to increase the number of games that actuate is reduced. On the other hand, in a high setting where the number of games in which the bonus combination is in operation is small, the number of games in which the bonus combination with high performance that increases the game in which the instruction function is activated is reduced and the instruction function is activated. The performance to increase the game becomes higher.

According to the twenty-sixth configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can effectively achieve superiority or inferiority due to setting without deteriorating the gaming interest, triggered by the winning of the bonus.

[Amusement machine with 27th configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-50862), information on a stop operation that is advantageous to a player regarding the ability to obtain a game medal or the like, that is, the correct pressing order of the stop button and an appropriate pressing An advantageous section or an advantageous state in which the instruction function for instructing the instruction information for identifying or inferring the winning combination that causes the difference in the acquisition performance such as the position or the like to be activated (the instruction information can be informed), and the like Setting a normal section or a normal state that disables various instruction functions (not able to notify the instruction information), and does not depend on the setting that gives superiority or inferiority to the expected value of the medal when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section Without, there is known a gaming machine that seeks the requirement to win the first win by being associated with the winning of a specific winning combination, which is generally called a rare winning combination, such as a winning combination with a relatively low winning probability (paragraphs 0044 to 0050, etc.). ).

Then, during the advantageous section by the assist replay time ART (AT in the literature, RT1 is AT), when the correct answer is given in the order of pressing the stop button, the prescribed number of inserts, for example, the push order bell role that pays out more than 8 medals, for example 8 medals When you win, you can easily increase the number of medals you have by notifying the corresponding correct pressing order on the liquid crystal display device etc., and it is possible to acquire medals that have been collected to some extent during the advantageous section by the continuous ART for the predetermined number of games Then, when the number of remaining games in the ART etc. is exhausted, the normal section is restored, and the expectation is again made for the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (paragraph 0070 etc.).

However, in the above gaming machines, when the advantageous section by ART ends, it is necessary to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section again under the same requirements as those at the time of first hit, and the winning of the rare role that can be expected to shift to the advantageous section It is easy to fall into a monotonous game waiting for.

In other words, whether you expect to win the advantageous zone for the first time or expect another advantageous zone after the advantageous zone ends, in the regular zone, you can expect lots of winning for each game and rare role, but it will be a trigger for internal lottery. Only hitting the start lever, there is no such thing as "now is a chance" or "hit at this time", and there is a possibility that the interest of the game will decrease throughout the game.

In the gaming machine described above, a zone display lamp is provided to turn off the light during the normal zone and turn on during the advantageous zone (paragraph 0029). However, such an explicit function makes the player's expectation during the normal zone. There is no function to inform you of hot scenes that especially stir up and scenes that do not, and it is possible to emphasize one-pattern playability rather than just letting you always think "light up" during normal intervals.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the game throughout the game. In order to solve this problem, the following 27th gaming machine is provided. A gaming machine having a configuration is provided.

In a gaming machine that starts the variable display of symbols based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of symbols based on the stop operation of the player,
Advantageous state control means capable of causing an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART etc.) that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
Replay time transfer means for transferring a plurality of replay times different in lottery mode of replay,
At least one replay time (for example, RT1 and the like) and another one replay time (for example, RT2 and RT3 and the like) are advantageous state transition triggers for shifting from the non-advantageous state that is not the advantageous state to the advantageous state. The lottery mode is the same, but the lottery mode for executing the process related to the instruction function in the advantageous state that is not executed in the non-advantageous state is different, and the chance of playing the instruction function is increased. A game machine characterized by having an advantage and disadvantage in the expected value.

As a result, there is an advantage or disadvantage in the expected value for increasing the chance of a game that activates the instruction function, depending on whether the game is being played at one replay time or the other replay time. Therefore, the player's interest is in which replay time the game is played.

In the above gaming machines,
The other one replay time (for example, RT2 or RT3) is an advantageous state caused by the assist replay time for activating the instruction function with higher replay accuracy than the one replay time (for example, RT1). A gaming machine characterized by a high probability.

As a result, in another one replay time, it is possible to create a hot situation or the like in which the player's expectation increases compared to one replay time.

Also, in each of the above gaming machines,
The one replay time (for example, RT1 or the like) is more advantageous than the other one replay time (for example, RT2 or RT3 or the like) due to the assist replay time for operating the instruction function with high replay accuracy. Although the probability is low, a gaming machine characterized by being able to generate a longer assist replay time.

As a result, one replay time can create a thrilling situation and the like compared to another one replay time.

According to the twenty-seventh configuration, it is possible to provide a game machine that can enhance the interest of the game throughout the game.

[28th Configuration Gaming Machine]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-55071), different first symbols A (bell 1) such as bell 1 and bell 2 are provided on the left, middle, and right reels, respectively. And the second symbol B (bell 2) is arranged, and the combination of "left symbol-middle symbol-right symbol" is "AAAA", "AABB", "ABAA". , “A-B-B”, “B-A-A”, “B-A-B”, “B-B-A”, “B-B-B”, and the common payout number, for example. A gaming machine that defines 8 types of small wins (NML4 to 11) for paying out 9 medals, makes a plurality of pairs that do not overlap each other, and is used as a winning combination win when configuring a plurality of push order dependent wins. Are known (FIG. 11, FIG. 12, etc.).

By the way, the above-mentioned eight kinds of small winning combinations can be used when configuring a plurality of push-order dependent winning combinations as separate ones, for example, a prize search to be executed when the result of one game is obtained. In processing, etc., the concept of A/B indicating A or B is used, and a combination of eight types of symbols is combined into one data notation "A/B-A/B-A/B" and compressed to, for example, 1-byte data. Then, when it is determined that "A/B-A/B-A/B" are aligned on the activated line, the process of paying out nine medals is performed, thereby saving the program capacity and/or the data capacity. It is considered possible.

However, in the above gaming machine, for example, when changing the payout number of "B-B-B" from another, or even when the payout number is the same, a transition to an advantageous state such as a chance zone or AT or ART is made. For example, in the case of functioning as a chance role that can be expected to be given, or as a preferential role in which the awarding of game points is preferentially performed, even when processing is performed when the result of one game is obtained, “A/B-A /B-A/B” is not appropriate.

That is, in this case, since "B-B-B" is treated as an exception, at least "A-A/B-A/B", "B-A-A/B", and "B-B-A". , "B-B-B", four types (4 bytes) of data are required.

Therefore, the data compression effect is limited, and the program capacity and/or the data capacity of the ROM/RAM on the main side having a limited capacity cannot be saved as expected.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the effect of saving the program capacity and/or the data capacity of the ROM/RAM on the main side. In order to solve the problem, the following 28th configuration gaming machine is provided.

In the gaming machine that starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the stop operation of the player to derive the result of one game,
A combination of symbols in the first group having a plurality of symbol combinations that give a predetermined profit to the player according to the result of one game (for example, "A-A-A", "A-A-B", ""A-B-A","A-B-B","B-A-A","B-A-B","B-B-A", etc.), and the design included in the first group It has a combination of symbols different from the combination and less than the combination of symbols included in the first group, and the profit of the second group which gives a profit different from the profit given when the combination of the symbols of the first group is displayed. A combination (eg, "B-B-B", etc.),
A combination of the symbols of the virtual group (for example, "A/B-A/B-A/B" etc.) that combines the combination of the symbols of the first group and the combination of the symbols of the second group, the combination of one symbol A predetermined amount of data used for distinguishing from each other (for example, each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel which constitutes a combination of symbols as shown in the column of "data" of the display combination of FIGS. To distinguish from other symbol combinations defined in one storage area by combining the composition symbols with "/" (or), any of 0000000100000010000000010000000100000000100000,0010000,01000000,10000000. It can be identified by 1 byte data, etc.,
In the process of determining the symbol combination of the first group and the second group, after determining whether or not the symbol combination of the second group (for example, "BBB" etc.), the symbol of the virtual group A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to determine whether or not it is a combination (for example, "A/B-A/B-A/B").

As a result, after determining whether or not it is a combination of symbols of the second group having a combination of a small number of symbols, a virtual group that includes the combination of symbols of a first group having a combination of a large number of symbols and can be identified by a predetermined amount of data By determining whether or not the combination of symbols, it is possible to reduce the program capacity and/or the data capacity required for the determination process, and whether or not the combination of the symbols of the second group, or the combination of the symbols of the first group. , Can be determined.

In the above gaming machines,
When the combination of the symbols of the second group (for example, "BBB" etc.) is determined, in the process that does not require the determination of the combination of the symbols of the first group, whether or not it is the combination of the symbols of the second group. When it is determined that the combination of the symbols of the second group is determined by the determination, it is not determined whether or not it is the combination of the symbols of the virtual group (for example, "A/B-A/B-A/B"). A gaming machine characterized by that.

Thereby, when it is determined that it is a combination of symbols of the second group by determining whether it is a combination of symbols of the second group having a small number of combinations of symbols, it is not determined whether it is a combination of symbols of the virtual group. Therefore, the program capacity and/or the data capacity required for the determination process can be further reduced.

Instead of the above gaming machines,
In the gaming machine that starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the stop operation of the player to derive the result of one game,
A combination of symbols in the first group having a plurality of symbol combinations that give a predetermined profit to the player according to the result of one game (for example, "A-A-A", "A-A-B", ""A-B-A","A-B-B","B-A-A","B-A-B","B-B-A", etc.), and the design included in the first group It has a combination of symbols different from the combination and less than the combination of symbols included in the first group, and the profit of the second group which gives a profit different from the profit given when the combination of the symbols of the first group is displayed. A combination (eg, "B-B-B", etc.),
A combination of the symbols of the virtual group (for example, "A/B-A/B-A/B" etc.) that combines the combination of the symbols of the first group and the combination of the symbols of the second group, the combination of one symbol A predetermined amount of data used for distinguishing from each other (for example, each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel which constitutes a combination of symbols as shown in the column of "data" of the display combination of FIGS. To distinguish from other symbol combinations defined in one storage area by combining the composition symbols with "/" (or), any of 0000000100000010000000010000000100000000100000,0010000,01000000,10000000. It can be identified by 1 byte data, etc.,
In the process of determining the symbol combination of the first group, it is determined that it is not the symbol combination of the second group by determining whether it is the symbol combination of the second group (for example, "BBB" or the like). After that, it is determined whether or not it is a combination of symbols in the virtual group (for example, "A/B-A/B-A/B"), and the like.

As a result, after it is determined that it is not the combination of the symbols of the second group by the determination of the combination of the symbols of the second group having the combination of the few symbols, the combination of the symbols of the first group having the combination of the many symbols is determined. Including, by determining whether it is a combination of the symbols of the virtual group that can be identified by the data of a predetermined capacity, while reducing the program capacity and/or the data capacity required for the determination process, whether the combination of the symbols of the first group Can be determined.

According to the twenty-eighth configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of saving the program capacity and/or the data capacity of the ROM/RAM on the main side.

[A game machine having a 29th configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-179100), which symbol is most paid out depends on which symbol is stopped by an internal winning combination and a player's stop operation. The priority is given to the number of symbols to be preferentially drawn, or the number of types of combinations of symbols that can be displayed (the number of winning flags) is the largest, and the number of priority to preferentially attract the symbols is followed. Before one stop operation is performed, 1-byte priority attraction-in order data (stop candidate search data in the literature) is assigned to all the symbols of the unstopped reels, and 0 to 4 based on the stop button press position. By performing maximum value search processing and/or table reference processing, etc., for the data of 5 frames to be searched that become frame slips, the highest priority is given, and in the case of the same rank, non-win It is performed by determining the only symbol that does not have a combination of roles as the stop symbol and stopping the determined symbol at the stop reference position (paragraphs 0045 to 0051, FIG. 5, etc.).

In this way, for example, if one winning combination of one type of 9-card combination and a plurality of types of 1-card combination is won, the first stop bell combination is won. The composition pattern of the winning combination (in the literature, the pattern with 49H allocated with the payout number of 9 added) is given priority over the composition pattern of one winning combination with a low priority (the pattern with 41H allocated with the payout number of 1 added) Stop, and 9 winning combinations can be won, except for the first stop in the incorrect answer, according to the number priority, the composition pattern of one winning combination with a high priority (in the literature, the number of types of combinations of symbols is 4 or 3 44H and 43H which were added are allotted), but priority is given to the composition symbol of the low-ranking 9-card combination (the symbol to which 41H is assigned to which the number 1 of the number of combinations of the symbols is added) is stopped, and 1 It is possible to win a prize.

In the above gaming machine, for example, each reel has one "red 7" symbol, the left reel has "cherry 1 or cherry 2" symbols, and the middle and right reels have "cherry 1" symbols each with a maximum of four-frame sliding. Assuming that a plurality of them are arranged as much as possible, a chance of having a combination of the symbols of "cherry 1/cherry 2"-"cherry 1"-"red 7" and a chance of displaying an easy-to-understand outcome is one role. Opportunity small win 1 including a chance win and a single win for control that displays an unclear outcome, and bonus win BB having a combination of symbols "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" overlap. If you have a winning combination of BB + chance small win 1, and if you win this, if you do a stop operation within the drawing range of "Red 7" on the right reel, in both cases of number priority and number priority, It is possible to display one chance of one chance in the minor chance 1 and make the player appropriately think that the chance chance is a bonus winning opportunity.

However, when the winning small winning combination 1 is won while the bonus flag of the bonus combination is carried over between the BB flags (inside the BB), even if the player does not originally want to display one winning combination, the chance If the small win 1 is displayed with priority over the BB, and if the stop operation is performed within the pulling range of "Red 7" on the right reel, one chance win of the small win 1 will be displayed, and the BB winning game The display result does not change in the game between BB flags, which may rather confuse the player.

Therefore, in the conventional prioritization according to the two principle of number priority and number priority, it is not possible to flexibly change the display result, and there is a limit in providing reel stop control with variety.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of further increasing the variety by reel stop control. A gaming machine having a twenty-ninth configuration as described above is provided.

Based on the operation of a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) and a winning combination that is won by internal lottery and a corresponding stop button (for example, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) In a gaming machine including reel stop control means for stopping the reel that is rotating by
A range in which the reel stop control means preferentially draws a symbol corresponding to a symbol combination having the largest winning range that can be won by the internal lottery, among the symbol combinations included in the winning combination that is won by the internal lottery. A gaming machine characterized by enabling stop control according to priority.

Thereby, among the symbol combinations included in the winning combination, the winning range in which the first symbol combination (for example, NML30 or the like) can be won by the internal lottery is the first numerical value (for example, 2122), The winning range in which the combination of the two symbols (for example, NML14 or the like) can be won by the internal lottery is the second numerical value (for example, 1341), and when the first numerical value is larger than the second numerical value, the first numerical value is set. Since the symbol combination can be stopped with priority over the second symbol combination, the variation of the stop control is widened.

In the above gaming machines,
Of the combinations of symbols included in the winning combination that is won in the internal lottery, if there are a plurality of winning ranges that can be won in the internal lottery, if there are a plurality of winning symbols, the predetermined one of the symbols that has the maximum winning range A gaming machine characterized in that the symbols corresponding to the combinations are preferentially stopped.

This makes it possible to perform stop control according to range priority even when there are a plurality of winning combinations that can be won by the internal lottery and are large in the winning combinations that are won by the internal lottery.

Also, in each of the above gaming machines,
The reel stop control means, the stop control according to the range priority, and the combination of the symbols included in the winning combination won by the internal lottery, the symbols corresponding to the combination of the symbols having the largest number of medals to be paid out are preferentially drawn. The stop control according to the priority of the number of games and the stop control according to the priority of the number of preferentially drawing in the symbol corresponding to the combination of the symbols having the largest number of winning flags that result in the same game result are selectable. .

As a result, by switching three types of stop control, that is, the stop control according to the range priority, the stop control according to the number of sheets priority, and the stop control according to the number of sheets priority, it is possible to abundant variations of the stop appearance.

According to the twenty-ninth configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be made more versatile by reel stop control.

[Gaming machine with 30th configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-68526), a replay time state (RT state) in which a lottery mode of replay (breakdown of replay combination and/or lottery value) is different , A low-probability replay time with low replay probability (non-RT, RT1, RT3) and a high-probability replay time with high replay probability (RT2), and a gaming machine that transitions between RT states according to predetermined transition conditions It has been known. From the non-RT to RT1 or RT2 to RT1, a transition is made by displaying the bell spilled eyes (BLK1 to 4) displayed with a predetermined display probability (3/4) at the time of wrong answer of the push order when the push order bell wins. From RT to RT2, transition is made by displaying a combination of promotion opportunity symbols (REP4) that is displayed when the correct answer is obtained in the pushing order when a specific promotion opportunity combination is won (paragraphs 0059 to 0062, 0067 to 0072, FIG. 5). etc).

Then, during the game, if the winning of the assist time AT for navigating the pushing order of the stop button, which is advantageous to the player according to the internal winning combination, can be won, the player waits for the winning of the specific promotion trigger role at RT1, When the winning combination is promoted when the winning combination is displayed, the correct push order is moved to RT2 by navigating on the liquid crystal display device, etc., and the AT game that activates AT at RT2 in the highly accurate RT state is enabled, and the push order bell is displayed. You can win high dividends (9, etc.) when winning a winning combination. By increasing the number of medals you have by navigating the correct pressing order, when the number of continuous games in ART is exhausted, the pressing order is the correct pressing order when winning a winning combination. By not navigating, the display of the bell spilled eye is triggered and it is caused to fall to RT1 in the low-probability RT state.

However, the high-accuracy replay time RT2 for playing the ART game originally shifts from the low-accuracy replay time RT1 depending on the navigation displaying the combination of promotion opportunity symbols, after winning the AT as described above. It is supposed that, when AT is not won, there is a disadvantage to the player if there is a bias in the pushing order such that certain pushing order is advantageous and others are disadvantageous, or if the stop operation is performed out of a certain pushing order. Since imposing such a charge impairs the fairness of the game, it cannot be adopted. Therefore, even if the navigation for displaying the combination of promotion timing symbols does not appear, it may unintentionally shift to the high-accuracy replay time RT2.

In this case, the bell spill may cause the player to fall to the low-probability replay time RT1 immediately, but at RT2, he or she waits for the winning of the push order bell role, becomes an incorrect answer in the push order, and has a predetermined display probability with the bell spill. It is necessary to display, and if you happen to hit the correct answer in the order of pressing, you may spend a considerable number of games, such as waiting for the next winning, during which the re-play high probability state continues, so it is unnecessary for the player Could be profitable. Also, if the player wins the AT during the game unintentionally transferred to RT2, the period during the ART preparation that is originally inserted before the winning of the specific promotion opportunity combination is displayed at RT1 and the combination of the promotion opportunity patterns is displayed Cannot be secured, and it is not possible to provide preferential benefits or special effects when a specific combination including a bonus combination is won during ART preparation.

Here, in the case of unintentionally shifting to the high-accuracy replay time, it is conceivable to intentionally issue an incorrect push order navigation instead of the original correct push order navigation issued during AT when the push order bell wins. , It may damage the fairness of the game and may confuse the player. It is also possible to randomly draw a part that shifts to a special replay time that falls into a low probability replay time with a small number of games during RT2, but when playing ART in original RT2, this time it is intended No New problems such as the need to take measures not to shift to a special replay time will occur. After all, in the actual situation, there is no effective measure to meet the demand to shift to the low-precision replay time as soon as possible when the high-precision replay time unintentionally shifts to the high-precision replay time.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and in the case of unintentionally shifting to a high-accuracy replay time, a gaming machine capable of properly falling to a low-accuracy replay time as early as possible. In order to solve this problem, a game machine having the following thirtieth configuration is provided.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Equipped with an advantageous state control means capable of causing an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART etc.) that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
The replay time state in which the lottery mode of the replay is different includes a low-probability replay time (for example, RT0 etc.) having a relatively low replay probability and a high-probability replay time (for example, RT1 to 4 etc.) having a relatively high replay probability. ,
In the low-probability replay time, a first transition trigger that shifts to a first replay time (for example, RT1 or the like) that randomly draws a specific fall trigger opportunity (for example, F_RT3 transition rep or the like) that causes a fall to the low-probability replay time. A combination of symbols (for example, a symbol combination of NML02 to 13, etc.) and a second transition trigger symbol combination (for example, a symbol of NML01) for shifting to a second replay time different from the first replay time (for example, RT2). , Etc.), and a specific transition sorting role (for example, a pushing order small role) that can be displayed in a relationship where one is displayed when the other is displayed in response to the player's stop operation,
The second replay time is included in the highly accurate replay time,
Even in the high-accuracy replay time including the second replay time, the specific transition distribution combination is randomly selected,
When it is decided to shift to the second replay time before the occurrence of the advantageous state, the advantageous state is caused based on the winning of the specific transition distribution combination for displaying the combination of the second transition trigger symbols, When the specific transition distribution combination is won at the high-accuracy replay time including the second replay time, the advantageous state is given after issuing an instruction (for example, recommended navigation etc.) to display the combination of the first transition trigger patterns. End
When it is decided to shift to the second replay time during the occurrence of the advantageous state, when the specific shift distribution combination is won at the highly accurate replay time including the second replay time, the second shift trigger A gaming machine characterized by issuing an instruction to display a combination of symbols (for example, correct navigation etc.).

As a result, before the occurrence of the advantageous state, even if the second transition trigger symbol combination is unintentionally displayed and the second replay time included in the high-accuracy replay time is transitioned, the second transition trigger symbol combination is changed. An advantageous state is generated based on the winning of the specific transition distribution combination to be displayed, and when the specific transition distribution combination is won at a high-accuracy replay time including the second replay time, the combination of the first transition trigger symbol Since an instruction to display is issued, it is possible to promptly fall to the low-probability replay time. Since the advantageous state is terminated after issuing this instruction, the advantageous state does not become longer than necessary, and neither does the player benefit unnecessarily, nor does the player unnecessarily suffer disadvantage.
On the other hand, when it is appropriate to shift to the second replay time during the occurrence of the advantageous state and to maintain the high-precision replay time, it is won the specific transition distribution role with the high-precision replay time including the second replay time. At this time, since the instruction to display the second transition trigger symbol combination is issued, it is possible to avoid falling into the low-accuracy replay time, and to operate the instruction function at the high-accuracy replay time, thereby appropriately benefiting the player. You can

In the above gaming machines,
There is no difference in the profit obtained as a result of one game, whether the combination of the first transition trigger symbol is displayed or the combination of the second transition trigger symbol is displayed.
The first replay time is included in the high-accuracy replay time, which is a replay probability that is not different from the replay probability in the second replay time,
Shift from the first replay time to a third replay time (for example, RT3 or the like) that enables a fall to the low-probability replay time based on the winning of the specific fall trigger opportunity that is randomly drawn at the first replay time. Let
A fourth replay time (eg, RT4, etc.) based on the winning of a predetermined transition opportunity combination (eg, F_RT4 transition rip etc.) that is randomly selected from the second replay time, with a winning probability that is not different from the winning probability of the specific falling opportunity combination. ),
A game machine characterized in that the third replay time and the fourth replay time are included in the highly accurate replay time.

Thereby, based on the winning of the specific transition distribution combination, whether to issue an instruction to display the combination of the first transition trigger symbol or to issue an instruction to display the combination of the second transition trigger symbol, the result of one game There is no difference in profit, and there is no difference in replay probability between the first replay time and the second replay time of the transition destination, and the third replay time of the transition destination from the first replay time is also the second replay time. Since the fourth replay time of the transition destination from is also a high-accuracy replay time, the advantage/disadvantage difference can be minimized by issuing any instruction. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the intended purpose while ensuring the fairness of the game.

In each of the above gaming machines,
The specific transition distribution combination relates to acquisition of game media having the same number of game media, whether the combination of the first transition trigger symbols is displayed or the combination of the second transition trigger symbols is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by being composed of a small role (push-order small role).

As a result, since the specific transition distribution combination is made up of the small combinations relating to the acquisition of the game media, the specific transition distribution combination can be randomly selected in each replay time state with a predetermined probability that the probability does not change depending on the replay time state. .. Therefore, regardless of the replay time state, that is, the replay probability, it is easy to secure the lottery value of the specific transfer distribution combination for a predetermined value, and the intended purpose can be achieved while the internal lottery table and the like can be easily constructed.

According to the thirtieth configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately fall to the low-accuracy replay time as soon as possible when the high-accuracy replay time unintentionally shifts.

[Gaming machine with 31st configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-68526), a non-replay state in which a lottery mode of replay (breakdown of replay combination and/or lottery value) is not changed Time (non-RT or RT0) and at least one low-probability replay time (RT state with low replay probability) RT1 for setting the lottery mode of replay to this non-replay time in a varying state, at least A gaming machine is known in which a plurality of RT states (RT1 to 3 etc.) including one highly reliable replay time (RT state with high replay probability) RT2 are provided, and each RT state is transitioned according to a predetermined transition condition. (Paragraphs 0059 to 0062, 0067 to 0072, FIG. 5, etc.).

The non-RT is used as a return destination after the end of the operation of the real bonus (RBB in the literature) or a return destination after the end of the finite RT state (RT3). In addition, the non-RT is also a game state suitable for a predetermined simulation test performed under a specific condition that the maximum acquisition number is obtained without dropping. From the non-RT to RT1 or RT2 to RT1, a transition is made by displaying the bell spilled eyes (BLK1 to 4) displayed with a predetermined display probability (3/4) at the time of wrong answer of the push order when the push order bell wins. From RT to RT2, transition is made by displaying a combination of promotion opportunity symbols (REP4) that is displayed when a correct answer is obtained in the pushing order when a specific promotion opportunity combination is won.

Then, during the game, if the winning of the assist time AT for navigating the pushing order of the stop button, which is advantageous to the player according to the internal winning combination, can be won, the player waits for the winning of the specific promotion trigger role at RT1, When the winning combination is promoted when the winning combination is displayed, the correct push order is moved to RT2 by navigating on the liquid crystal display device, etc., and the AT game that activates AT at RT2 in the highly accurate RT state is enabled, and the push order bell is displayed. You can win high dividends (9, etc.) when winning a winning combination. By increasing the number of medals you have by navigating the correct pressing order, when the number of continuous games in ART is exhausted, the pressing order is the correct pressing order when winning a winning combination. By not navigating, the display of the bell spilled eye is triggered and it is caused to fall to RT1 in the low-probability RT state.

However, in the above gaming machine, when the assist time AT is won in the non-replay time (non-RT or RT0) in which the lottery mode of the re-play is not changed, the push-order bell is won in the non-RT. In any case, it is supposed to display the bell spill by not navigating the correct answer push order and shift to RT1, but wait for the winning of the push order bell as a non-RT and display the bell spill with a predetermined display probability. Since it is necessary, a considerable number of games will be spent even before waiting for the winning of a specific promotion opportunity in RT1. For this reason, the period during the ART preparation, which is positioned during the promotion until the game can be started by moving to RT2, becomes longer, and the period without guarantee that the number of medals on hand increases will become longer, which reduces the interest in the game. There is a risk of

Also, if a real bonus is won during the game of ART, it will return to non-RT after the bonus operation is completed, so it is necessary to go through a long-term ART preparation for returning from non-RT to RT1 to RT2 again. There is a possibility that the medals obtained by the operation of the bonus will be reduced, and this may give stress to the player.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of shortening the ART preparation period until the game of the assist replay time ART becomes possible. In order to solve the above, a gaming machine having the following 31st configuration is provided.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Equipped with an advantageous state control means capable of causing an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART etc.) that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
The replay time state in which the lottery mode of the replay is different includes a low-probability replay time having a relatively low replay probability (for example, RT0 etc.) and a high precision replay time having a relatively high replay probability (for example, RT2 etc.),
During the low probability replay time, the first winning combination (eg NML41-43 etc.) and the relatively lower winning combination (eg NML44 etc.) in which the display probability of the corresponding symbol combination is relatively high are simultaneously won. When a specific special winning combination (for example, “F_special small winning combination”) to be drawn is randomly drawn, and when the specific special winning combination is won, the combination of the symbols related to the second winning combination is not displayed under the game by the player. Under a specific condition in which a combination of symbols related to the first role (for example, “watermelon”-“bell”-“replay”) is displayed and the possibility that the combination of symbols related to the second role is not displayed is excluded, Without displaying the combination of symbols related to the first role, the combination of symbols related to the second role (for example, "blank"-"blank"-"blank") is displayed.
When a combination of symbols relating to the second combination is displayed under the specific condition, a special replay time (for example, RT1 or the like) is set as a lottery mode of a replay different from the low-probability replay time and the high-probability replay time. Transition
A game machine characterized by not passing through the special replay time when enabling a game of an assist replay time that activates the instruction function at the high-accuracy replay time.

As a result, in the game played by the player, the ART game can be performed without passing through the special replay time, so that the period during the ART preparation can be shortened as compared with the conventional game.

In the above gaming machines,
Under the specific condition, a transition to the high-accuracy replay time is prohibited.

This makes it possible to easily perform a predetermined simulation test under a specific condition without considering the highly accurate replay time.

In each of the above gaming machines,
The low-probability replay time is a non-replay time when the lottery mode of the replay is not changed, and is set as a return destination after the end of the operation of the predetermined bonus.

As a result, even if a bonus is won during the ART game, it is possible to shorten the ART preparation time from the replay time state of the return destination at the end of the operation to the return to the ART game.

According to the thirty-first configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of shortening the ART preparation period until the game of the assist replay time ART becomes possible.

[Amusement machine with 32nd configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-50862), information on a stop operation that is advantageous to a player regarding the ability to obtain a game medal or the like, that is, the correct pressing order of the stop button and an appropriate pressing An advantageous section or an advantageous state in which the instruction function for instructing the instruction information for identifying or inferring the winning combination that causes the difference in the acquisition performance such as the position or the like to be activated (the instruction information can be informed), and the like Setting a normal section or a normal state that disables various instruction functions (not able to notify the instruction information), and does not depend on the setting that gives superiority or inferiority to the expected value of the medal when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section Without, there is a requirement to win the first win with a fixed fixed winning probability linked to the winning of a specific role called a rare role with a relatively high winning difficulty such as a chance role with a relatively low winning probability. There is known a gaming machine that seeks (paragraphs 0044 to 0050, etc.).

Then, in the advantageous section by the assist replay time ART (AT in the document is AT at RT1), when the correct answer is given in the order of pressing the stop button, the prescribed number of inserts, for example, a push order bell that pays out more than 8 medals, for example, 8 medals When the player wins, etc., he/she can easily increase the number of medals on hand by notifying the corresponding correct pressing order on the liquid crystal display device, etc., and acquire a certain number of medals in the advantageous section by ART continuing for the predetermined number of games. This is made possible, and when the number of remaining games in ART, etc. is exhausted, the normal section is restored, and a transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is expected again (paragraph 0070, etc.).

However, in the above gaming machines, when the advantageous section by ART ends, it is necessary to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section again under the same requirements as those at the time of first hit, and the winning of the rare role that can be expected to shift to the advantageous section It is easy to fall into a monotonous game waiting for.

In addition, if it is the same rare role, it is required to win with a fixed fixed winning probability, and there is no choice but to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section according to the probability of one pattern, and during the normal section, the advantageous section It is difficult to change the transition difficulty of. It is also difficult to change the background and stage of a moving image to be developed on a liquid crystal display device or the like in accordance with the degree of difficulty of the transition to fuel the player's expectation.

Therefore, in the advantageous section or in the advantageous state, in the normal section or the normal state, there is a possibility that the game during the stay period is not interesting and the interest of the game is deteriorated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of the game even during an advantageous section or a normal section that is not in an advantageous state or a normal state. In order to solve the above, a gaming machine having the following 32nd configuration is provided.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Advantageous state control means capable of causing an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART etc.) that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
And a replay time transfer means for transferring a plurality of types of replay times having different lottery modes for replay,
When a predetermined bonus combination (eg, MB1 etc.) is won, the probability of occurrence of an advantageous state due to the assist replay time that activates the instruction function with the highly accurate replay time is changed according to the type of replay time for which the win is won. A gaming machine characterized by:

As a result, the probability of occurrence of an advantageous state due to the assist replay time fluctuates according to the type of replay time in which the winning of the bonus combination is won, and thus the high-probability game mode that is advantageous to the player depending on the type of replay time. It is possible to create a disadvantageous low-probability game mode. Therefore, the transition of the replay time also serves as the transition function of the game mode, and it becomes a player's interest in which replay time it is, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game even before the occurrence of the advantageous state.

In the above gaming machines,
At least one replay time (for example, RT1 etc.) and the other one replay time (for example, RT2 or RT3) that can be stayed before the occurrence of the advantageous state are allowed to stay up to a finite number of times that is predetermined for each. A gaming machine characterized by being.

As a result, the game mode corresponding to one replay time can be maintained up to the finite number of times defined for one replay time, and the game mode corresponding to another one replay time is about the other one replay time. It becomes possible to maintain the limited number of times that has been set, and it is possible to expect the winning of the bonus combination during the respective maintainable periods, and to expect the assist replay time according to each game mode.

Also, in each of the above gaming machines,
The bonus combination can be shifted to the advantageous state if the winning before the occurrence of the advantageous combination occurs, and depending on the winning and operation of the bonus combination, the replay that has won the bonus combination without changing the lottery mode of the replay. A gaming machine characterized by taking over the lottery mode of re-playing in time.

Thereby, by the common process of shifting to the advantageous state by the winning of the bonus combination, and referring to the lottery mode of the replay at the replay time when the winning of the bonus combination is obtained, as the process relating to the instruction function in the advantageous state, It is possible to appropriately promote to an advantageous state by the assist replay time.

According to the thirty-second configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of the game even during the advantageous section or the normal section that is not in the advantageous state or the normal state.

[Gaming machine with 33rd configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-50862), information on a stop operation that is advantageous to a player regarding the ability to obtain a game medal or the like, that is, the correct pressing order of the stop button and an appropriate pressing An advantageous section or an advantageous state in which the instruction function for instructing the instruction information for identifying or inferring the winning combination that causes the difference in the acquisition performance such as the position or the like to be activated (the instruction information can be informed), and the like Setting a normal section or a normal state that disables various instruction functions (not able to notify the instruction information), and does not depend on the setting that gives superiority or inferiority to the expected value of the medal when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section There is no winning combination, and the lottery mode of the re-game is different. The lottery value does not change regardless of the type of replay time. There is a known gaming machine that requires a requirement to win the first win with a fixed fixed winning probability associated with the winning of a specific winning combination called a rare winning combination (paragraphs 0044 to 0050, etc.). .

In addition, as a method of substantially striking the difference between superiority and inferiority depending on the setting in the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the period of the bonus game in which the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section is disabled (the period in which the RBB1 is operating in the literature) is set. The lower the setting, the longer the time is set, and the lower the setting, the longer the period from the end of the bonus game to the transition to the advantageous section until the lottery can be received.The lower the setting, the more difficult it is to shift to the advantageous section. The higher the setting, the easier the transition to the advantageous section (paragraphs 0014 to 0016, etc.).

However, in the above gaming machines, the transition to the advantageous section is prohibited during the bonus game period, and the bonus game period is set longer as the setting is lower, so that the superiority of the initial setting to the advantageous section is effectively set. Even if it is possible, in order to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section after the bonus game, under the same requirements as those at the time of first win, and after the bonus game, since there is a low replay probability, there is no setting difference and Since it is necessary to wait for a limited number of preselected rare winnings, the game tends to be monotonous.

Moreover, the combination of symbols that triggers the transition of the replay time state, including the transition from the state with a low replay probability to the state with a high replay probability, is basically displayed on the assumption that the winning of the winning combination without setting difference does not depend on the setting. Since it should be, there is no difference in setting whether it is expected to shift to the advantageous section with low accuracy replay time or to shift to the advantageous section with high accuracy replay time, high setting is higher than low setting Does not mean that the instruction function is activated under advantageous replay time conditions.

Therefore, with the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is difficult to effectively set the superiority or inferiority due to the setting, and the game due to the setting difference may not be sharpened, and the interest in the game may be deteriorated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the superiority or inferiority of the game due to the setting difference and can enhance the enjoyment of the game. In order to do so, a gaming machine having the following 33rd configuration is provided.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Advantageous state control means capable of causing an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART etc.) that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
And a setting changing means capable of changing the setting for determining the payout rate, which is the ratio of the total number of game media input to the total number of input game media, in a plurality of high and low stages,
From the high expected replay time, a high expected replay time (for example, RTH (RT2)) in which the expected value for increasing the chance of the game to operate the instruction function is relatively high in a state where the lottery mode of the replay is different Including a low expected replay time (for example, RTL (RT1), etc.) in which the expectation value that makes the transition possible and increases the chance of playing the instruction function is relatively low,
The internal winning combination includes a predetermined bonus combination (for example, MBa, etc.) that can be shifted to the high expected replay time based on a specific transition timing defined from the winning to the end of operation,
The winning probability of the bonus combination is set to be higher in the higher setting than in the lower setting,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

As a result, a higher setting with a higher winning probability of a bonus hand will be easier to shift to a higher expected replay time based on a specific shift trigger, as compared to a lower setting, and the chance of a game to activate the instruction function is increased. Expectations are high. For this reason, it is possible to exceed the fluctuation range of the winning probability due to the setting difference of the bonus combination, increase the range of advantages and disadvantages due to the setting difference, and improve the superiority and inferiority of the game due to the setting difference.

In the above gaming machines,
Between the winning of the bonus combination and the end of the operation, a common process that does not refer to the value of the setting (for example, a two-stage lottery process according to the winning probabilities common to all the settings when winning or non-winning a specific small combination). By this, it is possible to increase the number of opportunities for a game to operate the instruction function.

As a result, the higher the setting for winning the bonus combination, the higher the possibility of increasing the chance of a game to operate the instruction function by common processing that does not refer to the set value between the winning and the end of the operation. Therefore, it is possible to exceed the fluctuation range of the winning probability due to the setting difference of the bonus combination, further increase the range of advantages and disadvantages due to the setting difference, and further enhance the superiority and inferiority of the game due to the setting difference.

In each of the above gaming machines,
The bonus combination is composed of an accessory continuous operation device related to the second type special accessory,
During the operation of the second kind special effect, all the small wins related to the acquisition of the game medium are in a winning state, but as a result of the internal lottery similar to the game during the non-operation of the second kind special effect, the winning is achieved. Based on the winning of the specified small winning combination (for example, “F_watermelon 1”, “F_weak rare role A”, “F_weak rare role B”, “F_chance eye A1” to “F_chance eye B4”, etc.) A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to increase the number of opportunities for a game to activate the instruction function.

As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of a game in which the instruction function is appropriately operated during the operation of the bonus combination, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

According to the thirty-third configuration, the superiority or inferiority of the game due to the setting difference can be emphasized, and the gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the game can be provided.

[Gaming machine with 34th configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-50862), information on a stop operation that is advantageous to a player with respect to a performance of acquiring a game medal or the like, that is, a correct answer order of a stop button or an appropriate press operation. An advantageous section or an advantageous state in which an instruction function for instructing instruction information for identifying or inferring a winning combination that causes a difference in acquisition performance such as a position can be activated (indication information can be informed), and Setting a normal interval or a normal state that disables the automatic instruction function (not able to notify the instruction information), and does not depend on the setting that gives superiority or inferiority to the expected value of the won medal at the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section. There is known a gaming machine that seeks a requirement to win an initial win by being associated with a winning winning combination without a winning combination (paragraphs 0044 to 0050, etc.).

Also, as a method of substantially striking the difference between superiority and inferiority due to the setting in the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, a shift-type big bonus BB (RBB1 in the literature) that does not allow lottery to shift to the advantageous section. The lower the setting, the longer the period is set, and the lower the setting, the longer the period from when the bonus game ends to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section until the lottery can be received. It is difficult, and conversely, the higher the setting, the easier the transition to the advantageous section (paragraphs 0014 to 0016, etc.).

However, with the above gaming machines, even if it is possible to effectively set the superiority or inferiority for the initial hit to the advantageous section, it has already moved to the advantageous section, and the big bonus BB (RBB1) during the advantageous section. If there is a win, there is basically no way of thinking that the advantageous section continues during the operation of the BB and after the operation of the BB, and the advantageous section is uniformly ended by the winning of the big bonus BB (RBB1). Even if it shifts to the normal section or maintains the advantageous section, it is possible to fall to the normal section during BB operation (paragraph 0094 etc.).

Therefore, if the big bonus BB is won during the advantageous section, it is basically necessary to win the first hit from the normal section to the advantageous section again after the operation of the BB, and the big bonus BB is won during the advantageous section. If the winning is won, the interest in playing the game may be deteriorated.

Moreover, if the big bonus BB is won regardless of whether it is in the advantageous section or the normal section, in the game while the BB is operating, neither the transition to the advantageous section nor the addition of the instruction function during the advantageous section is added, so the BB is operating. The game is positioned as a digestive game where you expect only to win medals, and there is a risk that it will be uninteresting.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of a game during a shift-type big bonus operation. A gaming machine having such a thirty-fourth configuration is provided.

A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) for stopping the rotating reels;
The winning combination determined by the internal lottery includes the first bonus (for example, BB, MB, etc.), and the winning combination determined by the internal lottery during the operation of the first bonus is displayed by the combination of the predetermined operation symbols. In a gaming machine including a second bonus that operates (for example, RB1 to RB3, CB1 to CB3),
The operation combination of the second bonus can be displayed when the operation mode of the stop button matches a part of the plurality of candidates,
By the time the operation of the first bonus ends due to the establishment of a predetermined ending condition, the number of games in operation of the second bonus that is started by the display of the combination of operation symbols of the second bonus increases, A gaming machine characterized by increasing the number of opportunities for a game to activate an instruction function for informing information about a stop operation.

Thus, during the operation of the first bonus, by displaying the combination of the operation symbols of the second bonus with a small number of games, by the end of the operation of the first bonus, the number of games during the operation of the second bonus can be increased, Since it is possible to increase the number of opportunities for the game to operate the instruction function, it is possible to effectively enhance the interest of the game during the operation of the first bonus.

In the above games,
When the number of games between the flags of the second bonus from the winning of the second bonus until the combination of operation symbols can be displayed is small, when the number of games during the operation of the second bonus is the same as when the number of games is large. However, the gaming machine is characterized in that the expected value for granting the privilege is high.

With this, as the combination of the operation symbols of the second bonus is displayed earlier, the privilege can be expected, and thus the player's sense of accomplishment can be effectively brought out.

In each of the above gaming machines,
During the operation of the first bonus, the smaller the number of acquired game media in the game in which the second bonus is drawn, the larger the number of games in operation of the second bonus by the end of the operation of the first bonus. A gaming machine characterized by:

As a result, in the game in which the second bonus is randomly drawn, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction that the player has gained the privilege by the game in which the second bonus is increased by intentionally stopping the acquisition of a small amount of game media. The sense of accomplishment can be increased.

According to the thirty-fourth configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine which can enhance the interest of the game during the shift type big bonus operation.

[Gaming machine with 35th configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-110808), the operation of the bonus combination RBB1 that wins with a fixed probability that does not depend on the setting is the total number of won medals (296 ), the number of games during RBB1 operation until it ends is 85.2 games in setting 1 and 97.9 games in setting 6, such that the lower setting is less and the higher setting is more. .. That is, while the RBB1 is in operation, the probability of the small winning all that wins all the small winning combinations including the Bell winning of the 8-card payout is set to be higher for the lower setting and lower for the higher setting, so that the low setting pays out eight cards Is obtained in a short period of time and the total number of medals acquired is exceeded early.

Further, while the RBB1 is operating, it is possible to add an instruction function for notifying the correct pressing order of the push order combination by common processing not depending on the setting of each game lottery, etc., and at the same time, there is a high probability (80%) of the instruction function. Chance winning combinations (Chanrip 1 to 3) that can be expected to be added are randomly selected without any setting difference, and the higher the setting, the greater the number of chances of winning a winning combination. In this way, there is no setting difference in the RBB1 itself, but a setting difference is practically given to the addition performance of the instruction function during the operation of the RBB1 so as to achieve a sharp gameplay (paragraphs 0056 to 0064, FIG. 5, etc.). ).

However, after all, the gaming machine described in the above document simply provides a small difference in the number of times the additional lottery is received, and therefore, to set an effective setting difference, the setting 1 and With the setting 6, it is necessary to secure a large difference of more than 10 games in the number of operating bonus bonus RBB1 games.

For this reason, a player who has experienced the operation of the Bona role RBB1 even one time can easily see whether it is a low setting or a high setting, and a player with a low setting image will stop the game immediately. , There is a strong possibility that the operation of game machines will decline.

Here, it is conceivable to reduce the difference in the number of games in which the bonus hand RBB1 is operating due to the setting difference, but if this is done, the setting difference cannot be effectively given to the performance of the instruction function, and eventually there is no sharpness. It will fall into playability.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and provides a gaming machine that can effectively give a setting difference to the performance of the instruction function during bonus while reducing the possibility of easily detecting the setting. In order to solve this problem, a gaming machine having the following 35th configuration is provided.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Advantageous state control means capable of causing an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART etc.) that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
And a setting changing unit (for example, a setting key type switch 54 or the like) capable of changing the setting for determining the payout rate, which is the ratio of the total number of game media to be inserted to the total number of game media, in a plurality of levels.
The internal winning combination includes a second bonus combination (for example, BB5 etc.) that enables a first bonus combination (for example, RB5, etc.) that allows a predetermined number of winnings per operation to be continuously operated,
The first operation of the first bonus combination is started by the operation start of the second bonus combination, and the next one operation of the first bonus combination is started following the end of the one operation of the first bonus combination, When the operation of the second bonus combination is completed, the operations of the second bonus combination and the first bonus combination are completed.
It is possible to increase the number of games in which the instruction function is activated during the operation of the first bonus combination, and to increase the probability of increasing the game in which the instruction function is activated, depending on the progress of the number of times the first bonus combination is operated. Is high,
The higher the setting, the higher the expected value for the number of times the first bonus combination is operated during the operation of the second bonus combination,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In this way, it is possible to increase the number of games in which the instruction function is activated during the operation of the first bonus combination during the operation of the second bonus combination, and the probability of this increase is higher than that at the first time depending on the progress of the operation times of the first bonus combination. It's high. Since the higher the expected value of the number of times the first bonus combination is operated during the operation of the second bonus combination, the higher the setting, the more likely it is that there is a high probability that the number of games that activate the instruction function will increase with a high probability. Since the probability of increasing the number of games in which the instruction function is activated according to the progress of the number of times the first bonus combination is operated is increased, it is necessary to make a large difference in the game period during the operation of the second bonus combination between the high setting and the low setting. Nor. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the setting from being detected, and to effectively provide the setting difference to the performance of the indicating function.

Instead of the above gaming machines,
In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Advantageous state control means capable of causing an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART etc.) that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
And a setting changing unit (for example, a setting key type switch 54 or the like) capable of changing the setting for determining the payout rate, which is the ratio of the total number of game media to be inserted to the total number of game media, in a plurality of levels.
The internal winning combination includes a second bonus combination (for example, BB6) that allows a first bonus combination (for example, RB6) that allows a predetermined number of winnings per operation to be continuously operated,
Start the first operation of the first bonus combination by displaying the combination of the operation symbols of the first bonus combination in the non-operation game of the first bonus combination after the operation of the second bonus combination is started. , The next one of the first bonus combination by displaying the combination of the operation symbols of the first bonus combination in the non-operating game of the first bonus combination after the end of one operation of the first bonus combination The operation is started, and when the operation of the second bonus combination is completed, the operation of the second bonus combination and the operation of the first bonus combination in operation are completed.
It is possible to increase the number of games that activate the instruction function during the operation of the first bonus combination, and the winning probability of a combination that does not trigger the increase of the game that activates the instruction function (for example, “F_JAC3”) The lower the setting, the higher it is,
The expected value of the number of times of winning a winning combination (for example, “F_JAC2” etc.) that triggers an increase in the game that activates the instruction function during the operation of the first bonus winning combination is set to be higher as the setting is higher.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In this way, it is possible to increase the number of games that activate the instruction function during the operation of the first bonus combination while the second bonus combination is operating, and reduce the winning probability of the combination that does not act as an opportunity to increase the number of games that activate the instruction function. The higher the setting, the higher the expected value of the number of times of winning the winning combination that triggers an increase in the game that operates the instruction function, the higher the setting. For this reason, the higher the setting, the greater the number of times the chance of increasing the number of games for operating the instruction function comes. The operation of the first bonus combination is started by displaying the combination of the operation symbols of the first bonus combination in the non-operating game of the first bonus combination during the operation of the second bonus combination. It is possible to make a difference in the number of times the first bonus combination is activated by the selection, and it is not necessary to intentionally make a difference in the game period during the operation of the second bonus combination between the high setting and the low setting. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the setting from being detected, and to effectively provide the setting difference to the performance of the indicating function.

Instead of the above gaming machines,
In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Advantageous state control means capable of causing an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART etc.) that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
And a setting changing unit (for example, a setting key type switch 54 or the like) capable of changing the setting for determining the payout rate, which is the ratio of the total number of game media to be inserted to the total number of game media, in a plurality of levels.
The internal winning combination includes a bonus combination (for example, RB7 etc.) that is in operation for a plurality of games,
The operation of the bonus combination is started by the display of a combination of predetermined operation symbols, and the operation of the bonus combination is ended by the provision of a predetermined end condition,
It is possible to increase the number of games that activate the instruction function while the bonus combination is operating, and the probability of increasing the game that activates the instruction function is set to be higher than the start number depending on the progress of the game number during the operation of the bonus combination. Is high,
The higher the setting, the higher the expected value that the game times will progress while the bonus combination is operating,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In this way, it is possible to increase the number of games in which the instruction function is activated during the operation of the bonus combination, and the probability of this increase is set higher than the start number in accordance with the progress of the game times during the operation of the bonus combination. Since the higher the expected value that the game times will progress while operating the bonus combination, the higher the setting, the more likely it is that there is a high probability that the number of games that activate the instruction function will increase with a high probability. Since the probability of increasing the number of games that activate the instruction function according to the progress of the game combination while the bonus combination is operating is increased, it is necessary to make a large difference in the game period during the operation of the bonus combination between the high setting and the low setting. Absent. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the setting from being detected, and to effectively provide the setting difference to the performance of the indicating function.

According to the thirty-fifth configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively imparting a setting difference to the performance of the instruction function during the bonus while reducing the possibility of easily detecting the setting.

[Gaming machine with 36th configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-110808), there is an advantageous section or an advantageous state in which an instruction function for informing a correct pressing order of a pushing forward combination can be operated. Set the maximum number of games that can be continued to 1500G (G; game), which is a predetermined regulation value, and add assist replay time ART, etc. that activates the instruction function under a high replay probability state No matter how long it is continued by stacking, if the advantageous section for the ongoing ART etc. exceeds 1500 G from the entry of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and the ART etc. are also normally terminated. The section or the normal state is restored (paragraph 0009, etc.).

1500G, which is the maximum number of games that can be continued for one advantageous section, is equivalent to 3000 medals that can be won in one jackpot when the net number of medals is 2.0/G. To do. This 1500G regulation is because it is considered that the gambling property becomes excessive when one shot ball of 3000 medals or more is allowed.

However, if you are lucky after one advantageous section has been forced to end after exceeding 1500G, you may win the ART again within a short period of time, and it may be forced to end again due to exceeding 1500G. Can happen.

In this way, if the forced termination due to over 1500G is repeated multiple times within a short period of time, the explosive power will be close to 10,000 coins in a day's game, and in some cases more than 10,000 coins will be obtained. Therefore, in order to safely clear the ball output regulation in a predetermined test shooting test when it is put on the market, there is a possibility that the probability of initial hit and/or the probability of addition such as ART is suppressed to be low and a design tends to be performed.

In this way, the gaming machines that are actually put on the market tend to have a low initial hit probability and/or an additional probability of ART, etc., so that many players only have to do a long-term ART etc. that reaches 1500G only once. There is a risk that the player will not be able to even enjoy the game, and he will have to accept the unfamiliar gameplay with a low sense of payout throughout the game.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of overcoming the tendency that the ball output tends to be suppressed and increasing the fun, and to solve this problem. , A gaming machine having the following 36th configuration is provided.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Equipped with an advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
When one advantageous state occurs, the number of games in which the one advantageous state can be continued to the maximum is determined by lottery from a plurality of predetermined candidates within a range not exceeding a predetermined regulation value (for example, 1500G). A gaming machine characterized by:

As a result, when one advantageous state occurs, the longest-term candidate that is determined in advance within the range that does not exceed the predetermined regulation value as the maximum sustainable number of games is determined, and the one advantageous number of the determined number of games is determined. After the state continues, another advantageous state is newly generated, the longest candidate is determined again at the time of the occurrence of this new one advantageous state, and another new advantageous state is determined for the determined number of games. The possibility of continuing the game can be reduced as compared with a conventional machine that defines only a predetermined regulation value as the maximum number of games that can be continued. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the necessity of lowering the occurrence probability of the advantageous state more than necessary.

In the above gaming machines,
The number of predetermined long-term games (for example, 400G, 800G, 1000G, 1200G, 1500G, etc.) and the short-term short-term games (for example, 1G, 8G, 16G, 32G, etc.) are relatively long for the predetermined candidates. And a game machine characterized in that when the number of short-term games is determined when one advantageous state occurs, the one advantageous state can be ended without operating the instruction function.

As a result, an advantageous state can be generated as an internal state of the gaming machine that is not clearly shown to the player, and it is possible to reduce the risk of raising the payout rate more than necessary.

Also, in the gaming machine in this case,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the number of short-term games is determined at the time of occurrence of one advantageous state, the section indicator for informing the player of the advantageous state is not in the advantageous state display mode.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will feel disappointed or the like immediately after the section display is once in the advantageous state display mode, and the section display is eliminated.

According to the thirty-sixth configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of overcoming the tendency that the number of balls thrown out tends to be suppressed and the interest can be enhanced.

[Gaming Machine with 37th Configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-126225), the accessory continuous actuating device CBB1 related to the second type special accessory having no difference in setting and winning with a certain probability irrespective of the setting. If the winning combination is displayed and the combination of the operation symbols is displayed, it is determined that the next game is in the general game while the CBB1 is in operation, each small winning combination with the payout of medals, the second class special winning combination CB1 with no setting difference, and the low setting. There is known a gaming machine in which the probability is low and the higher the setting is, the higher the probability is, that is, the normal character SB having a setting difference and the unjustified content having a setting difference are randomly selected, but the re-gaming combination is not randomly selected (paragraphs 0038 and 0039). , 0048, 0049, FIG. 4, etc.).

In addition, when the combination of the operation symbols is displayed by winning CB1 during the general game while the CBB1 is operating, the next one game is set as the CB1 operating, and all the small winning combinations are in the winning state while the CB1 is operating during the CBB1 operation. The small winning role ALL and the normal accessory SB with a setting difference are randomly selected, but the re-gaming combination is not randomly selected (paragraphs 0038, 0039, 0054, FIG. 4, etc.).

Then, during the CBB1 operation (during a normal game during the CBB1 operation and during the CB1 operation during the CBB1 operation), the insertion and payout specifications are set so that the number of medals does not increase, and an instruction function for informing the correct answer pressing order of the pressing order combination is provided. This is a disadvantageous period in which neither the process of shifting to the advantageous section or the advantageous state to enable the operation nor the process related to the instruction function such as the addition is performed, and the period during which the disadvantageous CBB1 is operating is ended halfway by winning the SB ( Puncture completion) is possible, and the lower the setting that makes it difficult to win the SB, the longer the period during which the CBB1 is operating, and the higher the setting that easily wins the SB, the shorter the period during the CBB1 is operating. I am trying to give it (paragraphs 0060, 0068, etc.).

However, in the above gaming machines, the re-game combination is not randomly selected during the CBB1 operation (during the normal game and the CB1 operation), the re-game probability is changed to 0, and the re-game combination before the change is randomly selected. Regardless of whether it is non-RT or RT1 or RT2 in which a replay combination is randomly selected, the same CBB1 operation with a replay probability of 0 is performed.

Therefore, when the operation of the CBB1 is finished, it is necessary to objectively return to the same game state, and if the return destination is non-RT, RT1 or RT2, the re-play probability is 0. The return destination from the same gaming state that has been changed to changes depending on each game, and is unacceptable because it harms the fairness of the game.

In this case, since it unintentionally benefits the player to uniformly return to RT2 having a high replay probability, another accessory continuous operation device RBB (paragraph 0034) that changes the replay probability to 0 during RB operation. Similarly, non-RT with a low replay probability is uniformly returned.

Therefore, if CBB1 is won in the middle of the assist replay time ART in which the instruction function is operated in RT2 having a high replay probability, after the operation of CBB1, the replay probability is changed to 0 from the objective configuration. There is a possibility that the player may fall into a non-RT, which has a low probability of playing, and the interest in playing the game may deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can effectively give a setting difference to the performance of the instruction function without deteriorating the interest of the game. In order to solve the above, a gaming machine having the following 37th configuration is provided.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Advantageous state control means capable of causing an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART etc.) that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
And a setting changing unit (for example, a setting key type switch 54 or the like) capable of changing the setting for determining the payout rate, which is the ratio of the total number of game media to be inserted to the total number of game media, in a plurality of levels.
The replay time in which the lottery mode of the replay role is different, has a low-accuracy replay time and a high-accuracy replay time with a relatively high difference in replay probability,
The internal winning combination includes a specific bonus combination (for example, MBz, etc.) in which an operation end condition includes a specific end combination (for example, an ordinary winning combination SBp).
After the operation of the specific bonus combination is completed, it is possible to play at the highly accurate replay time,
The winning probability of the specific ending combination is made variable according to the setting,
The expected value for increasing the chance of a game to activate the instruction function is provided with a difference in height between the non-winning game of the specific bonus combination and the game in operation of the specific bonus combination. Amusement machine.

As a result, it is possible to play the game with a high-accuracy replay time after the operation of the specific bonus combination is completed, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. There is a difference in the expected value that increases the chance of a game that activates the instruction function between the non-winning game of the specific bonus combination and the active game, and the winning probability of the specific ending combination is made variable according to the setting. Therefore, the period during which the specific bonus combination is operating can be changed according to the setting, and the performance of the instruction function can be changed according to the setting.

Further, in the above gaming machine, the specific bonus combination is characterized in that the winning combination and the display of the combination of the operation symbols and the end of the operation are not used as an opportunity to change the lottery mode of the re-gaming combination. Thereby, when the specific bonus combination is won during the low-probability replay time, the game can be continued in the low-probability replay time after the operation of the specific bonus combination is completed, and the player is not unintentionally benefited.
Further, in each of the above gaming machines, while the specific bonus combination is in operation, all the small combinations relating to the acquisition of the game media are in the winning state regardless of the result of the internal lottery, but the specific bonus combination is not winning. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to increase the number of games in which the instruction function is activated in accordance with a combination in which a winning is identified as a result of similar internal lottery. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of games in which the instruction function is activated depending on the winning combination that is specified as a result of the internal lottery similar to the non-winning of the specific bonus combination. Can be eliminated, and the range of playability can be expanded.

Further, in each of the above gaming machines, during the assist replay time for activating the instruction function at the high-accuracy replay time, a net increase obtained by subtracting the number of inserted game media from the number of acquired game media is more than that during the operation of the specific bonus hand. A gaming machine characterized by a large number. As a result, if the specific bonus combination is won during the assist replay time, the net increase number decreases while the specific bonus combination is operating, and the period during which the specific bonus combination is operating may change according to the setting. It will also be possible to change the speed of the ball. If the number of ongoing games during the assist replay time includes the number of games during which the specific bonus is operating, the period during which the specific bonus hand is operating may change depending on the setting. It is also possible to make a difference in the winning payout.

According to the thirty-seventh configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can effectively give a setting difference to the performance of the instruction function without deteriorating the interest of the game.

[Gaming Machine with 38th Configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-149107), a shift to an advantageous section or an advantageous state in which an instruction function for informing a correct answer pressing order of a pressing forward combination can be operated Processing and processing related to the instruction function such as the number of times of operating the instruction function is randomly selected with a fixed probability that does not depend on the setting, and the lottery mode of the re-gaming combination (breakdown of the re-gaming combination and/or Or, a winning combination of a specific winning combination with a relatively low winning probability, which is selected from combinations whose probabilities do not change regardless of the lottery value, is used as a trigger, and a winning combination of a winning combination with a different probability depending on the setting is used as a trigger. There is known a gaming machine that does not perform processing for shifting to an advantageous section or processing such as addition (paragraphs 0049 to 0065, FIG. 4, etc.).

Specifically, the specific role with no setting difference that enables transition to the advantageous zone and addition is Freeze Lip, Common Bell, Watermelon, Cherry A, RBB, RBB+Cherry A (paragraphs 0049, 0052 to 0054, 0059, 0061), the role of the setting difference that makes the transition to the advantageous zone and the addition not possible is cherry B, RBB+cherry B, RBB+normal lip (paragraphs 0056, 0063, 0065).

However, with the above gaming machines, the transition to the advantageous zone and the addition are dependent on the winning of a specific winning combination with a low winning probability, and the game is expected only for the winning of a specific winning combination, so the game may become monotonous. There is.

In this case, it is conceivable that the specific winning combination that triggers the transition to the advantageous zone and the additional winning combination may also include a winning combination with a setting difference in which the probability changes according to the setting. Accordingly, the difference in the payout is simply added, and the interest in playing the game is not significantly enhanced.

In the end, it is impossible to break the monotonous gameplay that is focused on the winning of a specific winning combination with a low winning probability, and it is not possible to create a surprising gameplay.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of creating a surprising game playability and preventing a game from becoming monotonous. In order to do so, a gaming machine having the following 38th structure is provided.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Equipped with an advantageous state control means capable of causing an advantageous state (for example, assist replay time ART etc.) that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
The internal winning combination includes a predetermined bonus combination (for example, MBd, etc.) that makes all the small winning combinations related to the acquisition of the game medium in a winning state regardless of the result of the internal lottery during operation.
During the operation of the bonus combination, predetermined internal information (for example, from the number of acquired game media, depending on the type of combination for which the winning is specified as a result of the internal lottery similar to the non-operation of the bonus combination) Update the record of the difference number minus the number of input sheets,
A gaming machine, wherein an expected value for increasing a game that activates the instruction function is provided with a difference in height depending on whether the update value of the internal information is less than a predetermined value or not less than a predetermined value.

As a result, when the bonus combination is activated, even if the number of game media that can be increased in the previous time and this time is the same, the winning is specified as a result of the internal lottery similar to that during the non-operation of the bonus combination. Depending on the type, the update value of the predetermined internal information changes, and depending on whether this update value is less than a predetermined value or more than a predetermined value, there is a difference in the expected value for increasing the game that activates the instruction function. Is attached. For this reason, it is possible to provide the player with unexpected game playability.

In the above gaming machines,
A setting changing means (for example, a setting key-type switch 54 etc.) that can change the setting for determining the payout rate, which is the ratio of the total number of game media to be inserted to the total number of game media to be inserted, is provided.
The lottery value of the winning combination for updating the record of the internal information is changed between the high setting having a high setting and the low setting having a low setting.

As a result, the expected value for increasing the number of games that activate the instruction function can be changed according to the setting.

Also, in the gaming machine in this case,
The gaming machine characterized in that the bonus combination is won with a constant probability that the winning probability does not change regardless of the setting.

As a result, not only the number of game media that can be increased by the operation of the bonus combination becomes the same, but also the winning probability of the bonus combination does not change, and the cumulative number of operations of the bonus combination does not give a hint for setting violation. Therefore, it is possible to change the expectation value that increases the chance of a game that activates the instruction function according to the setting while reducing the player's understanding of the setting, and more effectively and unexpectedly. Can be created.

According to the thirty-eighth configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of creating a surprising game playability and preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

[Gaming Machine with 39th Configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-153756), a game hall attendant operates a setting change switch provided inside a game machine before the start of business, so that a total insertion game medium A gaming machine is known in which the payout rate, which is the ratio of the total number of game media acquired to the number, can be changed in six stages from the most unfavorable setting 1 to the most advantageous setting 6 (paragraphs 0213, 0214, FIG. 14). etc).

Then, when a setting change operation is performed, a ceiling game that forcibly causes an initial hit of an advantageous section or an advantageous state by an assist time AT that enables an instruction function that notifies the correct push order of the push forward combination, etc. The most unfavorable 1480 games are not selected, but the shorter number of 48, 148, 480, 848 games is selected, and it is popular for players who start playing from the first morning of business to morning etc. It is possible to give a certain benefit referred to as (paragraphs 0163 to 0169, 0224, 0225, FIG. 12, etc.).

However, originally, it is preferable that the transition to the advantageous zone is performed in a probabilistically controlled state triggered by the winning of a predetermined internal winning combination, and it is a game that allows the transition only by digesting the number of games. It is not preferable because it may harm the fairness of

Here, with the winning of the internal winning combination as a trigger, a relatively high winning probability is used to temporarily shift to a chance zone-like advantageous section, and in this advantageous section, the number of games consumed up to the ceiling is counted, and the number of digested games reaches the ceiling. It may be possible to promote to assist time AT or assist replay time ART when reaching, but if this is done, the advantageous section becomes too long and the ratio of the advantageous section to the total game period becomes the prescribed upper limit (70%). Will be exceeded and it will be difficult to realize.

It is also possible to count the number of ceiling games across a plurality of advantageous intervals, but at the end of one advantageous interval, it is necessary to initialize all variables that affect the performance of the instruction function. It cannot be realized.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and when a setting change operation is performed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately give a benefit to a player while maintaining fairness of the game. In order to solve this problem, a gaming machine having the following 39th configuration is provided.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
A setting changing means (for example, a setting key-type switch 54 etc.) that can change the setting for determining the payout rate, which is the ratio of the total number of game media to be inserted to the total number of game media to be inserted, is provided.
At the replay time when the lottery mode of the re-game role is different,
An initial replay time (for example, non-RT) that shifts on condition that the setting change operation is performed by the setting change unit,
And a special replay time (for example, RTX) that shifts on condition that a combination of special transition trigger symbols is displayed in the initial replay time,
If the specific internal winning combination predetermined in the special replay time is won, than if the specific internal winning combination is won at a time other than the special replay time, a privilege advantageous to the player is given,
After shifting from the special replay time to a time other than the special replay time, the award provided when the specific internal winning combination is won in the special replay time is not given.

Here, “the operation of changing the setting” includes not only changing the setting to the setting before the change but also making the so-called setting that is the same as the setting before the change. In short, it means that a reset, which is widely recognized among players as a concept including changing the setting and re-setting the same setting, is performed. However, even if the setting before turning on is effectively taken over when the power is simply turned on, such an action does not correspond to re-setting. Therefore, simply turning the power off and on does not mean that the setting change operation is performed here.

As described above, when the setting change operation is performed, the player can start the game from the initial replay time, display the combination of special transition opportunity symbols in the initial replay time, and shift to the special replay time, and then this special replay time In the case where the specific internal winning combination is won, a privilege advantageous to the player is given. After transitioning from special replay time to a time other than special replay time, the bonus granted when a specific internal winning combination is won during the special replay time is not granted, so it is almost limited to the player who first started playing after the start of business. Special benefits can be granted. Therefore, while maintaining the fairness of the game, it is possible to give a morning benefit to the player and to start the operation of the game machine from the first morning.

Instead of the above gaming machines,
In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
A setting changing means (for example, a setting key-type switch 54 etc.) that can change the setting for determining the payout rate, which is the ratio of the total number of game media to be inserted to the total number of game media to be inserted, is provided.
At the replay time when the lottery mode of the re-game role is different,
A post-change replay time (for example, non-RT and/or RTX, etc.) that shifts on condition that the setting change operation is performed by the setting change means,
If the predetermined internal winning combination is won in advance in the replay time after the setting is changed, a more advantageous privilege is given to the player than if the specific internal winning combination is won except the replay time after the setting is changed,
After shifting from the replay time after changing the setting to a time other than the replay time after changing the setting, the privilege that is given when the specific internal winning combination is won in the replay time after changing the setting is not given. Machine.

Even with this, when the setting change operation is performed, it is possible to give a privilege to the player who starts the game first, so while maintaining fairness of the game, it is possible to give a morning benefit to the player. , You can increase the operation of the game machine from the first thing in the morning.

In each of the above gaming machines,
Equipped with an advantageous state control means capable of producing an advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous zone, an advantageous zone, etc.) that enables the operation of the instruction function for notifying the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
The above-mentioned privilege enables a game (for example, a game with an assist replay time ART) that activates the instruction function under a state where the probability of re-play is high.
Thereby, a sufficient privilege can be given to the player, and the game can be effectively promoted from the first thing in the morning.

According to the thirty-ninth configuration, when a setting change operation is performed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately give a benefit to the player while maintaining fairness of the game.

[Gaming machine with 40th configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-108265), there is known a game machine that attempts to provide a ceiling game number between ARTs by using a finite replay time that can stay for a finite number of times. (Fig. 4 etc.). That is, a plurality of replay times RT0 to 4 having different lottery modes (breakdown and/or lottery value of the re-game combination) of the re-game combination are provided, and in the RT0 having a low re-play probability, an advantageous section or a winning section of the middle bonus combination MB is obtained. Decides to carry out the ART by shifting to the advantageous state and by winning the replay 0 that is randomly drawn only at RT0 at about 1/7.3. Then, the player shifts from RT0 to RT1 by dropping the single bonus combination SB, shifts to RT3 with a high replay probability by the display at the time of the correct answer of the push order of Replay 1 that is randomly selected only at RT1 at RT1, and the ART game is performed at RT3. Let

Then, when the ART is finished, the advantageous section is ended and the finite replay time RT2 with a low replay probability of staying for a long-term 999 game is displayed due to the display at the time of incorrect answer of the pushing order of the replay 3 that is randomly selected only at RT3. , 999 games, the game is shifted to RT0, and the ART is determined again by winning the middle bonus combination MB and the replay 0. Furthermore, at each replay time RT0-4, the big bonus combination BB is won, and when the operation of BB is completed, it is shifted to RT4 with a low replay probability, and it is shifted to RT1 from RT4 due to the drop of SB, and replay is performed at RT1. It is arranged to shift to RT2 according to the display at the time of the incorrect pressing order of 1.

However, in the first place, the ceiling between ARTs has the original meaning of relieving a weak player who has a chance to win the ART but cannot take the chance. In the machine, ART is decided only by RT0, and there is no chance that ART is decided at other replay times other than RT0, including the limited replay time RT2 that can be a long stay of 999 games, and the ceiling is rather terrible for the player. You will be forced to play.

That is, if the big bonus combination BB is won in RT2 which can be a long-term stay, it is possible to exit RT2 on the way, but after the operation of BB, it is moved from RT4 to RT1 and to RT0 where ART is determined. , RT1 must be moved to RT2 directly or with RT3 sandwiched between them, and waiting for the completion of the 999 game from the beginning again. Therefore, the ceiling of RT2 ensures at least 999 games for a period in which it never hits ART, which is terrible for the player.

In this case, after the ART is finished, the ART can be determined in the same manner as in the case of the first hit, and the ART is determined when the number of games from the end of the ART is counted and the number of ART is not determined during this period. However, since the ART should be determined in an advantageous section that is stochastically triggered by the winning of a predetermined internal winning combination, the fairness of the game is lacking. On the other hand, in order to keep the game fair, if the advantageous section is continued after the end of ART and the number of ceiling games is reached within the advantageous section, the advantageous section becomes too long and the total playing period becomes longer. The ratio of the advantageous section to occupy exceeds the specified upper limit (70%), making it difficult to realize. It is also possible to cumulatively count the number of digestive games to the ceiling across a plurality of advantageous intervals, but at the end of one advantageous interval, it is necessary to initialize all variables that affect the performance of the instruction function. Therefore, it cannot be realized. In the end, it was difficult to balance the fairness of the game by deciding the ART within the advantageous section to be properly generated and the ceiling that is in line with the original meaning.

The present invention has been made in view of the above point, and is intended to relieve a weak player who has a chance but cannot take the chance while maintaining fairness of the game. An object is to provide a game machine that can provide a ceiling that is meaningful, and in order to solve this problem, a game machine having the following 40th configuration is provided.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Equipped with an advantageous state control means capable of producing an advantageous state in which an instruction function related to the stop operation of the player can be activated,
The internal winning combination includes a predetermined bonus combination (for example, BB1 to BB4),
The lottery mode of the bonus combination is the same, but the replay time of the lottery mode of the re-game combination is different,
A finite replay time (for example, RT1000 etc.) to stay for a predetermined finite number of times as long as there is no winning of the bonus combination from the game after the transfer by the display of the combination of the specific transfer opportunity symbols.
And an infinite replay time (for example, non-RT, etc.) that enables a game in which it is easy to obtain more game media than the number of input game media by the operation of the instruction function,
The combination of the specific transition trigger symbol to be transferred to the finite replay time is easier to be displayed than when there is an operation of the instruction function,
After the finite number of games are finished in the finite replay time, shift to the infinite replay time,
After the operation of the bonus combination is completed, it is possible to shift to the infinite replay time without passing through the finite replay time.

As a result, when the winning combination is won, it is possible to shift to the infinite replay time after the operation of the bonus combination ends without passing through the limited replay time. In the infinite replay time, it becomes possible to increase the number of game media by making it possible to easily obtain the game media exceeding the number of inserted game media by operating the instruction function. When the operation of the instruction function disappears, it will shift to the finite replay time by the display of the combination of the specific transition timing symbols, but if you win the bonus combination while the finite number of times is exhausted, you can shift to the infinite replay time again and increase the game medium. .. In addition, even if the bonus combination cannot be won while the limited replay time is being exhausted, it is possible to shift to the infinite replay time after a limited number of times and increase the game medium. Therefore, a finite number of finite replay times functions as the number of ceiling games, effectively maintaining the fairness of the game, and effectively providing a weak player who has a chance to activate the instruction function but cannot take the chance. Can be rescued.

In the above gaming machines,
When the advantageous state is generated in the infinite replay time, the first privilege which is more advantageous to the player than when the advantageous state is generated in the finite replay time (for example, the advantageous state is continued until the winning combination is won) ) Can be given.

As a result, even if the player is forced to consume a limited number of games in the limited replay time, if the advantageous state is generated in the infinite replay time after the transition, the advantageous first privilege can be given. Therefore, it is possible to effectively remedy a player who has not had a chance for a long time.

In each of the above gaming machines,
When the bonus combination is won in the infinite replay time, the second benefit more advantageous to the player than when the bonus combination is won in the finite replay time (for example, AT or ART that activates the instruction function for a plurality of times). A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to add, such as finalizing and activating the instruction function during the bonus game to increase the number of acquired cards.

As a result, even if a player who has been forced to consume a limited number of games in a limited replay time can win a bonus combination in the infinite replay time after the transition, it is possible to give an advantageous second benefit. Therefore, it is possible to effectively remedy a player who has not had a chance for a long time.

According to the fortieth configuration, while maintaining fairness in the game, it is possible to provide a ceiling in line with the original meaning of relieving a weak player who has a chance but cannot take the chance. A game machine can be provided.

[Gaming Machine with 41st Configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-149107), a normal section or a normal state in which an instruction function such as a correct answer push order notification of a push order combination is disabled, and an instruction function Is provided with an advantageous section or an advantageous state, and the instruction section functions under a state where the replay probability is high and a first advantageous section in which the advantageous section functions as a chance zone CZ for guaranteeing a predetermined number of games (10 games). There is known a gaming machine that is configured with an advantageous section having a different degree of advantage, that is, a second advantageous section that executes an assist replay time ART that makes it possible to operate (paragraphs 0037, 0038, FIG. 4, etc.).

From the normal section, with the transition rate of 25% when winning the watermelon with a probability of 1/64, and with the transition rate of 50% when winning the cherry A of 1/128, transition to the first advantageous section, In the first advantageous zone, it is possible to shift to the second advantageous zone with a higher probability than the probability of directly shifting from the normal zone to the second advantageous zone (paragraphs 0053, 0054, etc.). In this way, if the number of games corresponding to the probability denominator with the numerator as 1 is roughly digested in the total value of the probabilities obtained by multiplying the respective winning probabilities of the rare roles of watermelon and cherry A, which have relatively low winning probabilities, and the corresponding transition rates. It is possible to expect a transition to the chance zone and to create a situation in which it is easy to win the ART at a certain game interval.

However, in the above gaming machine, the transition to the first advantageous section, that is, the chance zone depends on the winning of the rare role of watermelon or cherry A, the uncertainty factor is large, and the chance zone is stable at regular game intervals. There is no guarantee that you can make it.

Here, it is possible to count the number of exhausted games and shift to the chance zone when the predetermined game interval is reached, but the advantageous section should be probabilistically triggered by the winning of the predetermined internal winning combination, Lack of fairness in playing.

However, in order to maintain the fairness of the game, one chance zone is probabilistically generated, and the advantageous section is continued even after the probability zone that was probabilistically generated is finished, and the number of games is consumed during the advantageous section. If it is counted, the advantageous section becomes too long, and the ratio of the advantageous section to the total game period exceeds the specified upper limit (70%), which makes it difficult to realize. In the end, it was difficult to maintain both fairness of the game and stable creation of the cycle chance zone.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of stably creating a cycle chance zone while maintaining the fairness of the game, and to solve this problem. , Provides a gaming machine having a forty-first configuration as described below.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Equipped with an advantageous state control means capable of producing an advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
At the replay time when the lottery mode of the re-game role is different,
A first replay time (for example, RTL) that can be stayed for a first finite number of times (for example, 50 games) from the inrush due to the display of the combination of first transition trigger symbols,
A second replay time (for example, a second replay time in which a replay probability is higher than the first replay time is made possible by entering the second transition timing symbol combination and making it possible to stay for a second limited number of times (for example, 50 games) from the inrush. , RTH, etc.),
One of the combination of the first transition trigger pattern and the combination of the second transition trigger symbol becomes possible due to the transition after staying for a limited number of times in the first replay time or the second replay time, depending on the stop operation. And a general replay time (eg, RT1) in which lottery of a specific transition combination that enables the display of
From the non-advantageous state during the first replay time or the second replay time or the general replay time, it is possible to generate an advantageous state triggered by the winning of the internal winning combination,
During the advantageous state during the general replay time, permitting the operation of the instruction function for displaying the combination of the second transition timing symbols,
In the advantageous state during the second replay time, permitting the operation of an instruction function for facilitating the acquisition of game media exceeding the number of inserted game media,
During the advantageous state during the first replay time, the operation of the instruction function for facilitating the acquisition of game media exceeding the number of input game media is reduced as compared with during the advantageous state during the second replay time (for example, 1 time only or 0 times (none) etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

As a result, in the non-advantageous state in which the instruction function is inoperable, it is uncertain whether to shift to the first replay time or the second replay time, but when the game is played a first finite number of times or a second finite number of times. , Return to general replay time. Therefore, in the general replay time that returns almost every fixed period according to the first finite number or the second finite number, the operation of the instruction function for facilitating the acquisition of the game medium exceeding the number of input game media is increased. 2 Opportunity comes to expect to enter the replay time. In the advantageous state in which the instruction function can be operated, during the general replay time, since the operation of the instruction function for displaying the combination of the second transition opportunity symbols is permitted, it is possible to shift to the advantageous second replay time, and During the two replay times, the operation of the instruction function for facilitating the acquisition of more game media than the input game media is permitted, and the player can increase the number of game media he/she has. Since the advantageous state is triggered by the winning of the internal winning combination, the fairness of the game is also maintained.

In the above gaming machines,
During the advantageous state in the general replay time, and/or during the advantageous state in the second replay time, the number of actuations of the instruction function for displaying the combination of the second transition trigger symbols is randomly determined and stocked,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to rush from the general replay time to the second replay time regarding the number of times of notification of stock.

As a result, the assist replay time ART that activates the instruction function for facilitating the acquisition of game media exceeding the number of input game media in the second replay time with a high replay probability can be linked, which enhances the enjoyment of the game. obtain.

In each of the above gaming machines,
The internal winning combination includes a certain bonus combination,
After the operation of the bonus combination is completed, it is possible to shift to the general replay time,
If the bonus combination is won during the advantageous state, the advantageous state is maintained even after the operation ends, and the instruction information for displaying the combination of the second transition trigger symbols is notified at the general replay time. A gaming machine characterized by.

As a result, during the assist replay time ART that activates the instruction function for facilitating the acquisition of game media exceeding the number of input game media in the second replay time with a high replay probability, the second winning combination is won during the assist replay time ART. Even if the time ends halfway before reaching the finite number of times, when the operation of the bonus combination ends, the ART can be redone from the beginning at the second replay time, which can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

According to the forty-first configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can stably create a cycle chance zone while maintaining the fairness of the game.

[42nd Configuration Gaming Machine]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-149107), a shift to an advantageous section or an advantageous state in which an instruction function for informing a correct answer pressing order of a pressing forward combination can be operated Processing and processing related to the instruction function such as the number of times of operating the instruction function is randomly selected with a fixed probability that does not depend on the setting, and the lottery mode of the re-gaming combination (breakdown of the re-gaming combination and/or Or, a winning combination of a specific winning combination with a relatively low winning probability, which is selected from combinations whose probabilities do not change regardless of the lottery value, is used as a trigger, and a winning combination of a winning combination with a different probability depending on the setting is used as a trigger. There is known a gaming machine that does not perform processing for shifting to an advantageous section or processing such as addition (paragraphs 0049 to 0065, FIG. 4, etc.).

Specifically, the specific role with no setting difference that enables transition to the advantageous zone and addition is added to the freeze-lip, common bell, as the re-gaming role other than the bonus role or the general role related to the small role. , Watermelon and cherry A are selected, and RBB and RBB+cherry A are selected as bonus combinations (paragraphs 0049, 0052 to 0054, 0059, 0061).

In addition, as a winning combination having a setting difference that makes it impossible to shift to and add to the advantageous zone, cherry B is defined as a rare combination, and RBB+cherry B or RBB+normal lip is defined as a bonus combination (paragraphs 0056, 0063, and 0065). ).

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the process of shifting to the advantageous section and the process of addition are carried out by using both the rare combination and the bonus combination, but the playability greatly changes depending on which is more important.

There is a limit to the payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of game media acquired to the total number of game media put in, so it is one of the main factors that increase the payout rate, which is an assist that activates the instruction function under conditions with a high replay probability. If we emphasized the replay time ART as a rare role and made it easier to hit and continue, we had no choice but to make it difficult to hit and continue the ART that was triggered by the bonus part, and we won the bonus part. There is no merit of plus alpha, and there is a possibility that the interest in gaming will not be improved.

However, if the bonus role is emphasized and it is easy to make the ART first win or continue, it will be difficult to make the ART first win or continue triggered by the rare part, and the rare part is expected to be ART. Most of the time, it is at best possible to create a chance zone with a low probability of failing, which is substantially the same as the normal type game machine equipped with only a bonus role, and the playability of the ART machine is impaired. There is a risk that

After all, when making ART possible, a decrease in the interest of the game that occurs even if you win a bonus role when you place a weight on a rare role, and a problem that the playability of the ART machine when you place a weight on a bonus role is impaired Is difficult to solve all at once.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that can solve both the deterioration of the gaming interest even if a bonus combination is won and the problem of impairing the game playability of an ART machine. In order to solve this problem, a gaming machine having the following 42nd configuration is provided.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
From a normal state in which the instruction function for notifying the information regarding the stop operation of the player is inoperable, an advantageous state control means for producing an advantageous state in which the instruction function is operable is provided,
The internal winning combination includes a predetermined bonus combination (for example, BB1 to BB4, etc.) that can obtain more game media than the number of inserted game media.
Transition from the normal state to the first advantageous state in which the execution of the assist replay time for activating the instruction function under the condition of a high replay probability triggered by the winning of a predetermined internal winning combination other than the bonus combination is undecided It is possible to determine the execution of the assist replay time in the first advantageous state,
The instruction function is operated during the assist replay time in accordance with the number of game media acquired by the bonus combination won between the predetermined starting point after the transition to the first advantageous state and the decision to execute the assist replay time. A gaming machine characterized by being able to increase the number of games played.

As a result, triggered by the winning of a predetermined internal winning combination other than the bonus combination, the execution of the assist replay time is undecided, but the execution is shifted to the first advantageous state in which the execution can be decided, and after the transition to the first advantageous state. The number of times the instruction information is notified during the assist replay time can be increased according to the number of game media acquired by the bonus combination won from the predetermined starting point to the decision to execute the assist replay time. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to winning. Moreover, since the first opportunity to execute the assist replay time is the winning of a predetermined internal winning combination other than the bonus combination, it is possible to defeat the gameplay that is devoted to the bonus combination, and the gameplay of the machine equipped with the assist replay time is impaired. The risk of being affected can also be reduced.

Instead of the above gaming machines,
In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
From a normal state in which the instruction function for notifying the information regarding the stop operation of the player is inoperable, an advantageous state control means for producing an advantageous state in which the instruction function is operable is provided,
From the normal state, triggered by the winning of a predetermined internal winning combination, it is possible to shift to the first advantageous state in which the execution of the assist replay time for activating the instruction function under a state where the replay probability is high is undecided. Along with this, it is possible to determine the execution of the assist replay time in the first advantageous state,
It is possible to increase the number of games in which the instruction function is activated during the assist replay time in accordance with the number of acquired game media from the predetermined starting point after the transition to the first advantageous state to the decision to execute the assist replay time. A gaming machine characterized by being.

As a result, the instruction function is activated during the assist replay time according to the number of game media acquired from the predetermined starting point after the transition to the first advantageous state to the decision to execute the assist replay time, and the number of le games can be increased. Therefore, acquiring more game media between the predetermined starting point and the decision to execute the assist replay time can be appropriately reflected in the subsequent game, and the assist replay time can be more advantageously performed.

According to the forty-second configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of solving both the deterioration of the gaming interest even if a bonus combination is won and the problem of impairing the game playability of the ART machine.

[A game machine having a 43rd configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-108265), an advantageous section or an advantageous state in which an instruction function such as a correct answer push order of a push forward combination can be operated is determined by an internal winning combination. The fairness of the game is maintained by satisfying the condition that all the variables that affect the performance of the instruction function are initialized when the winning is triggered and when the game is terminated, and the number of ceiling games is provided between the ARTs. A gaming machine that enables the above is known (FIG. 4, etc.). That is, a plurality of replay times RT0 to 4 having different lottery modes (breakdown and/or lottery value of the re-game combination) of the re-game combination are provided, and in the RT0 having a low re-play probability, an advantageous section or a winning section of the middle bonus combination MB is obtained. Decides to carry out the ART by shifting to the advantageous state and by winning the replay 0 that is randomly drawn only at RT0 at about 1/7.3. Then, the player shifts from RT0 to RT1 by dropping the single bonus combination SB, shifts to RT3 with a high replay probability by the display at the time of the correct answer of the push order of Replay 1 that is randomly selected only at RT1 at RT1, and the ART game is performed at RT3. Let

Then, when the ART is finished, the advantageous section is ended and the finite replay time RT2 with a low replay probability of staying for a long-term 999 game is displayed due to the display at the time of incorrect answer of the pushing order of the replay 3 that is randomly selected only at RT3. , 999 games, the game is shifted to RT0, and the ART is determined again by winning the middle bonus combination MB and the replay 0. Furthermore, at each replay time RT0-4, the big bonus combination BB is won, and when the operation of BB is completed, it is shifted to RT4 with a low replay probability, and it is shifted to RT1 from RT4 due to the drop of SB, and replay is performed at RT1. It is arranged to shift to RT2 according to the display at the time of the incorrect pressing order of 1.

However, in the first place, the ceiling between ARTs has the original meaning of relieving a weak player who has a chance to win the ART but cannot take the chance. In the machine, ART is decided only by RT0, and there is no chance that ART is decided at other replay times other than RT0, including the limited replay time RT2 that can be a long stay of 999 games, and the ceiling is rather terrible for the player. You will be forced to play.

That is, if the big bonus combination BB is won in RT2 which can be a long-term stay, it is possible to exit RT2 on the way, but after the operation of BB, it is moved from RT4 to RT1 and to RT0 where ART is determined. , RT1 must be moved to RT2 directly or with RT3 sandwiched between them, and waiting for the completion of the 999 game from the beginning again. Therefore, the ceiling of RT2 ensures at least 999 games for a period in which it never hits ART, which is terrible for the player.

Here, without using the finite replay time, it is possible to continue the advantageous section after the end of ART and wait until the number of ceiling games is reached within the advantageous section, but the advantageous section becomes too long and the total game period The ratio of the advantageous section to the total exceeds the specified upper limit (70%), making it difficult to realize. Further, even if it can be realized, the maximum number of games that can be continued in one advantageous section should not exceed the predetermined number of games 1500, so from 1500 games, the number of exhausted games from the advantageous section for which the previous ART was determined. Then, only a short-term ART less than 500 games, which is the number of ceiling games of about 1000 games, can be achieved, and the player cannot be satisfied.

The present invention has been made in view of the above point, and while maintaining fairness of the game with respect to an advantageous section or an advantageous state, there is a chance that the opportunity cannot be taken advantage of. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be provided with a ceiling in line with the original meaning of relieving the player, and in order to solve this object, the following 43rd configuration gaming machine is provided.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Advantageous state control means for producing an advantageous state in which the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player can be activated,
And a game lock reservation means for reserving the execution timing of the game lock for temporarily stopping the progress of the game,
Based on the end of a special game (for example, assist replay time ART etc.) that enables the operation of the instruction function in a state where the replay probability is high, the game lock reservation means reserves the execution timing of the game lock,
A gaming machine, characterized in that the execution of the game lock and the execution of the special game are determined on the condition that the reserved execution timing of the game lock comes and the occurrence of the advantageous state.

Thereby, even if the advantageous state is ended based on the end of one special game, the internal countdown of the number of games corresponding to the ceiling can be replaced with the internal countdown of the execution timing of the reserved game lock. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure the advantageous state for a long period of time even after the end of one special game. After the end of one special game, even a weak player who could not execute the special game again before reaching the ceiling reached the execution timing of the game lock reserved based on the end of the special game, and was in an advantageous state. The special game can be executed again on the condition that it occurs. Since the occurrence of the advantageous state is a weighted condition, as a process related to the instruction function during the advantageous state, the execution of the special game can be decided by referring to the internal information that is not related to the lottery process of executing the game lock, and the fairness of the game can also be achieved. I can keep it.

In the above gaming machines,
When the advantageous state is triggered by the winning of the internal winning combination, and the number of games remaining until the execution timing of the reserved game lock exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 32 games), the number of remaining games A gaming machine characterized by performing shortened lottery that can reduce
As a result, even if the number of long-term games is initially determined as the execution timing of the game lock, if an advantageous state is generated after that, if the number of games remaining until the execution timing of the game lock exceeds a predetermined value, the shortened lottery As a result, the number of remaining games can be reduced and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced. In addition, the shortened lottery is performed during the occurrence of the advantageous state, so that the fairness of the game is maintained.

In each of the above gaming machines,
When the advantageous state is triggered by the winning of the internal winning combination, if the number of remaining games until the execution timing of the reserved game lock is less than a predetermined value (for example, 32 games), the game lock is held. A gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous state is continued until it is executed.
Thereby, the execution of the special game can be determined by appropriately linking the execution timing of the game lock.

Instead of the above gaming machines,
In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Advantageous state control means for producing an advantageous state in which the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player can be activated,
And a game lock reservation means for reserving the execution timing of the game lock for temporarily stopping the progress of the game,
During one advantageous state caused by the advantageous state control means, the execution timing of the game lock is reserved by the game lock reservation means,
The reserved game lock is not released by the end of the advantageous state including the one advantageous state before the arrival of the execution timing, and the execution timing can be referred to during the advantageous state generated after the reservation. A gaming machine characterized by.

In this way, the reserved game lock is not released by the end of the advantageous state including the one advantageous state that triggered the reservation before the execution timing comes, and the execution timing is set during the advantageous state that occurs after the reservation. Because it is possible to refer, the countdown of the execution timing of the reserved game lock can be done over the period from the occurrence of the intermittent advantageous state to the end, and the execution timing during the advantageous state that occurs after the reservation With reference to, it can be appropriately used for counting down the number of ceiling games that straddle an intermittent advantageous state.

According to the forty-third configuration, while the fairness of the game can be maintained in the advantageous section or the advantageous state, the original meaning of relieving a weak player who has a chance but cannot take the chance is realized. It is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a ceiling can be provided.

[44th Configuration Gaming Machine]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-99645), the bonus combination RBB by the accessory continuous operation device according to the first-class special accessory, the total number of medals acquired during the operation. It becomes a decrease bonus that becomes less than the total number of inserted medals, and it is possible to operate the assist time AT of about 3.0 coins/game net increase during bonus internal winning (inside RBB) where the winning flag of RBB has been carried over A gaming machine equipped with the so-called accelerator AT is known (FIG. 6, etc.).

The inside of the RBB is a full-hit state in which each game, a re-playing combination, or a small combination or a combination of symbols related to a small winning combination is displayed, and a combination of bonus operation symbols is planned to be displayed from inside the RBB. No, I'm planning to stop inside the RBB forever.

The assist time AT is operated in association with a specific internal winning combination such as a chance combination inside the RBB, and creates an advantageous section where the AT operates and a disadvantageous section where the AT does not operate inside the RBB. In the advantageous section in which is operated, the instruction function for informing the player of the correct pressing order for the small pressing order winning combination in which the payout varies depending on the pressing order is operated to facilitate the acquisition of medals (paragraph 0088 and the like).

However, even in the gaming machine described in the above literature, when a serious error such as a RAM error is recovered, the bonus winning combination returns to the non-winning general gaming state and the general gaming state changes to the bonus winning combination. In the winning game, if the bonus operation symbol combination is not displayed, the game state is entered in the RBB, but if the bonus operation symbol combination is displayed, the game state is entered in the RBB. Paragraph 0061). Therefore, contrary to the intention of the creator side, a player or a game store clerk may enter a game state in which the RBB is operating, and the player may be forced to digest the game while the RBB is operating. is there.

In this way, if the game is forced to be consumed while the RBB is operating, the total number of medals to be acquired is less than the total number of inserted medals while the RBB is operating, which is a decreasing bonus, so the player reduces the number of medals on hand. There is a possibility that the interest in the game will be significantly reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is not significantly deteriorated even if the player plays the bonus operation in the accelerator AT. In order to solve this problem, the following 44th configuration gaming machine is provided.

Start the variable display of the symbol based on the player's start operation, and stop the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the player's stop operation,
As a gaming state, a bonus non-winning state (for example, "normally general") in which a predetermined bonus combination (for example, BB6) is randomly selected, and a bonus internal winning state in which a winning flag of the bonus combination is carried over (for example, "Inside BB6" and the like) and a bonus operation state (for example, "BB6 is in operation") started by displaying a combination of operation symbols of the bonus combination,
At least in the bonus internal winning state, in a gaming machine capable of operating an instruction function for informing information regarding a stop operation of a player,
In the bonus internal winning state, a combination of operation symbols of the bonus combination is provided on condition that a predetermined specific stop operation (for example, a stop operation of aiming a "blank" symbol for each reel within the drawing range) is performed. (For example, "blank"-"blank"-"blank") can be displayed.
The bonus operation state starts from a bonus operation general game state (for example, "general middle during BB6 operation", etc.) in which the lottery mode of the small win relating to the acquisition of the game medium is the same as the bonus non-winning state.
From the bonus operating general game state, a combination of shift combination corresponding symbols that can be displayed based on the winning of a predetermined shift combination (eg, RB6 etc.) that is randomly selected in the bonus operating general game state (for example, "blank"-"Watermelon"-"Watermelon", etc.) is displayed, the shift combination operating state that changes the lottery mode of the small winning combination (for example, "BB6 is operating, RB6 is operating", etc.) is made possible, and By avoiding the display of the combination of the symbols corresponding to the shift combination, it is possible to shift to the internal winning combination state of the shift combination carrying the winning flag of the shift combination (for example, "inside RB6 during BB6 operation").
In the shift winning internal winning state, the expected value of the number of game media to be acquired is set to be higher than those in the bonus internal winning state and the shift winning operating state.

As a result, in the shift winning combination internal winning state, the expected value of the number of game media acquired is set higher than the bonus internal winning winning state and the shift winning combination operating state, so that the bonus non-winning state or the bonus internal winning state changes Even if the game is transferred, in the bonus operation state, by playing the game in the winning combination internal winning state, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the game medium as compared with the conventional case, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Instead of the above gaming machines,
Start the variable display of the symbol based on the player's start operation, and stop the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the player's stop operation,
As a gaming state, a bonus non-winning state (for example, "normally general") in which a predetermined bonus combination (for example, BB6) is randomly selected, and a bonus internal winning state in which a winning flag of the bonus combination is carried over (for example, "Inside BB6" and the like) and a bonus operation state (for example, "BB6 is in operation") started by displaying a combination of operation symbols of the bonus combination,
At least in the bonus internal winning state, in a gaming machine capable of operating an instruction function for informing information regarding a stop operation of a player,
In the bonus internal winning state, a combination of operation symbols of the bonus combination is provided on condition that a predetermined specific stop operation (for example, a stop operation of aiming a "blank" symbol for each reel within the drawing range) is performed. (For example, "blank"-"blank"-"blank") can be displayed.
The bonus operation state starts from a bonus operation general game state (for example, "general middle during BB6 operation", etc.) in which the lottery mode of the small win relating to the acquisition of the game medium is the same as the bonus non-winning state.
From the bonus operating general game state, a combination of shift combination corresponding symbols that can be displayed based on the winning of a predetermined shift combination (eg, RB6 etc.) that is randomly selected in the bonus operating general game state (for example, "blank"-"Watermelon"-"Watermelon", etc.) is displayed, the shift combination operating state that changes the lottery mode of the small winning combination (for example, "BB6 is operating, RB6 is operating", etc.) is made possible, and By avoiding the display of the combination of the symbols corresponding to the shift combination, it is possible to shift to the internal winning combination state of the shift combination carrying the winning flag of the shift combination (for example, "inside RB6 during BB6 operation").
In the shift winning internal winning state, the expected value of the number of acquired game media is set higher than the bonus internal winning state when the instruction function is not activated and lower than the bonus internal winning state when the instruction function is operating. A gaming machine characterized by being.

As a result, in the shift winning internal winning state, the expected value of the number of game media to be acquired is set higher than that in the bonus internal winning state when the instruction function is inactive, so that the bonus operation is started from the bonus non-winning state or the bonus internal winning state. Even if the state is shifted to the state, in the bonus operation state, by playing the game in the winning combination internal winning state, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the game medium as compared with the conventional case, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest of the game.

In the above gaming machines,
In the bonus game general game state and/or the shift combination internal winning state, the probability of increasing the chance of a game to activate the instruction function (for example, the lottery value of the transition trigger role to the advantageous section) is A gaming machine characterized by being set lower than the bonus internal winning state.
As a result, even if the player performs a specific stop operation and shifts from the bonus internal winning state to the bonus operating state in the game in the market, the probability of increasing the opportunity of the game to activate the instruction function is higher than that in the bonus internal winning state. Even if you play a game with a high expected value for the number of game media acquired by shifting to the internal winning state of the shift hand during the bonus operation state, the total number of game media expected including the operation of the instruction function is expected The value can be set to a value that is not much different from that when a specific stop operation is not performed, and it is possible to reduce the possibility of causing a disadvantage to the player by performing/not performing the specific stop operation.

In each of the above gaming machines,
In the bonus non-winning state and/or the bonus internal winning state, a lottery that increases the number of game opportunities to activate the instruction function is triggered by a winning of a predetermined specific internal winning combination, and in the bonus operating state, the specific A gaming machine characterized by not performing lottery, which increases the chances of a game to activate the instruction function triggered by the winning of all or a part of the internal winning combinations.
As a result, the total including the operation of the instruction function is performed between the case of playing the shift winning internal winning state where the expected number of game media is high in the bonus operating state and the case of not playing the bonus operating state. The expected value of the acquired game medium can be adjusted appropriately in association with the internal winning combination.

According to the forty-fourth configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is not significantly deteriorated even if the player plays the game during bonus operation in the accelerator AT.

[Gaming machine with 45th configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-99645), 70 G (G; game) is performed by an assist time AT that operates an instruction function for informing a correct pressing order of a small pressing order winning combination. ) Or 30G as a set, a pseudo bonus (a bonus that is not a real bonus by a character or a character continuous actuating device) is generated, and an opportunity to increase the number of medals by AT called a pseudo bonus can increase the number of medals on hand. Machine is known (paragraph 0088 etc.).

During the game before the AT is activated, the lottery will be triggered by the winning of a specific winning combination, and the 70G AT winning, the 30G AT winning and the AT non-winning will be determined according to a predetermined distribution ratio, and a signing effect for a maximum of 16G After that, when the AT is won, the process proceeds to the bonus preparation which is performed by displaying the message of the promotion effect on the liquid crystal screen. In this bonus preparation game, when the 70G AT is distributed, the white 7 is displayed. "At the time of allocating 30G AT winnings", waiting for the winning of the re-playing combination or the small winning combination of "7", which makes it possible to arrange "Red 7", the display of the three reels left, middle, and right As a result, the pseudo bonus is started after "white 7" or "red 7" is set.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the pseudo bonus is started after the "white 7" or "red 7" are aligned as the reels to be displayed, it is possible to give the player a gaming sensation similar to a real bonus. In particular, in the case of an AT machine that operates the AT during the internal winning of the real bonus, other real bonuses cannot be randomly drawn during the internal winning of the real bonus. Can be said to be appropriate.

However, in the real bonus, the winning of the bonus is swiftly displayed by the display of the simultaneous winning combination by the small winning combination or the re-playing role that is won at the same time as the real bonus, or by the reach eye as the outlier when the real bonus is won. It is possible to detect, and by consuming the minimum number of inserted medals, it is possible to display the combination of working patterns of the real bonus early, and it is possible to perform a strategic game in which the number of medals on hand is not reduced as much as possible. At the time of increasing opportunities, such strategic games cannot be performed, and it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of the game.

That is, in the one described in the above-mentioned document, when the winning of the AT is detected by the display of the specific winning combination which becomes the lottery trigger of the AT, it is necessary to wait for the winning of the 7 winning combinations during the bonus preparation through the precursor effect. If the winning of the role is not easily obtained, the number of medals to be inserted will increase even for an advanced player who wants a strategic game. In this case, if you use the reel irregular operation performed under the game lock or freeze operation, you can show 7 sets without waiting for the winning of 7 sets, but with 7 sets production provided to all players equally. Therefore, the game is far from the strategic game played by the player.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which a player can reduce the number of input gaming media when entering an opportunity to increase the gaming media by operating an instruction function. In order to solve this problem, the following gaming machine having the 45th configuration is provided.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Equipped with an advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
The advantageous state includes a specific advantageous state (for example, an assist time AT or the like) capable of increasing the game medium by operating the instruction function,
In the specific advantageous state, after the advantageous state is caused based on an internal winning combination capable of displaying a first symbol combination (for example, reach eye etc.), a second different from the first symbol combination. It is possible to rush on condition that the combination of symbols (for example, AT invocation) is displayed,
The probability of causing the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination capable of displaying the first symbol combination is less in the game with the first number of inputs (for example, three cards) than the first number of inputs. It is higher than the game with the second input number (for example, 1 piece),
The probability of displaying the combination of the second symbols is higher in the game by the second number of inputs than in the game by the first number of inputs.

As a result, the player creates an advantageous state based on the internal winning combination capable of displaying the first symbol combination by the game of the first input number, and then the game of the second input number smaller than the first input number. By changing to, it is possible to display the combination of the second symbols at an early stage, and it is possible to promptly enter a specific advantageous state in which it is possible to increase the game medium while suppressing the consumption of the game medium.

In the above gaming machines,
A gaming machine characterized in that even when the combination of the second symbols is displayed during a non-advantageous state in which the advantageous state has not occurred, entry into the specific advantageous state is prohibited.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game through the second throw-in number, which is inefficient in time throughout the game, and to limit the game based on the second throw-in number to display a combination of the second symbols. Can be urged.

Also, in each of the above gaming machines,
The combination of the second symbol is displayed when a game result with the same effect is obtained regardless of whether the number of the first throws or the number of the second throw (for example, when a small role spills or when the player loses a prize). A gaming machine characterized by.

Thereby, when displaying the combination of the second symbol by the game of the first insertion number, and when displaying the combination of the second symbol by the game of the second insertion number, the same effect is obtained, so that a specific advantageous state Can increase fairness in the entry into.

According to the forty-fifth configuration, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the number of game media to be inserted can be reduced by the player when plunging into an opportunity to increase game media by operating the instruction function.

[Amusement machine with 46th configuration]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-110808), an advantageous section or an advantageous state in which an instruction function for informing a correct push order and the like of a push order small win can be operated. Sets the maximum number of games that can be continued to a predetermined limit value of 1500 G (G; games), and assist replay time ART etc. that activates the instruction function under a high replay probability state No matter how long it continues by stacking etc., if the advantageous section for the ongoing ART etc. exceeds 1500 G from the entry of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and the ART etc. are also forcedly terminated, A gaming machine having a limiter function for returning to a normal section or a normal state is known (paragraph 0009, etc.).

The limiter function manages not only the number of games, but also the management of the number of games, or instead of managing by the number of games, the number of medals or the number of inserted medals in one advantageous section is subtracted from the number of inserted medals. It is also possible to operate when the one shot ball MY due to the difference number exceeds the predetermined upper limit number, for example, 2400. It is considered that such a limiter function is advantageous in that the number of balls (the number of acquired medals or the number of medals) in one advantageous section is prevented from becoming excessive and the gambling performance is maintained appropriately.

However, since the conventional limiter function including the one described in the above-mentioned document ends the long-term advantageous section which may originally continue for a longer time, it may reduce the player's interest in playing the game.

For this reason, when the limiter function is activated, the player may be notified when the game is stopped, and the willingness to continue playing may be diminished.

Therefore, the limiter function is far from the one that enhances the interest of the game and continuously promotes the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can effectively utilize a limiter function to enhance the enjoyment of a game. In order to solve this problem, the following is provided. Provided is a gaming machine having a 46th configuration.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
Limiter means for terminating the one advantageous state when the cumulative number of numbers that increases as the number of acquired game media for each game in the generated one advantageous state exceeds a predetermined limit value,
Exceeding the limit value is not performed at the end of the first game state in which an advantageous state is generated (for example, the operating state of the bonus combination), and the second game state after the end of the first game state (for example, RT2 It is possible by stacking a certain number (for example, 10 cards) by the game after moving to
In the second game state, before the limit value is exceeded, compared to after the limit value is exceeded, it is easier to shift to the third game state (for example, RT3 etc.) that is advantageous to the player. Characteristic gaming machine.

As a result, in the second game state after the end of the first game state, before the limit value is exceeded, a game period that functions as a chance zone that can be expected to shift to the third game state, which is advantageous to the player, is secured. it can. Since the limiter means operates by accumulating the number that increases as the number of acquired game media for each game increases, the number of games until the limit value is exceeded can be increased as the number of acquired game media decreases, and the game state shifts to the third game state. Expectations can be increased. Therefore, during the second game state, the player is caused to have the concept of “not winning the winning combination of the game medium” and the concept of “get off the display in which the number of acquired game media is large”. While broadening the range of sexuality, it is possible to achieve the gameplay that can be expected for advantageous games.

In the above gaming machines,
For the internal winning combination in the second game state, it is possible to shift to the third game state, and a small combination (for example, a pushing order small combination) in which the number of acquired game media differs depending on the mode of the stop operation. Including the transition trigger role (for example, promotion role)
If the winning combination is won during the advantageous state, the instruction information for displaying the combination of the transition opportunity symbol (for example, the combination of the promotion opportunity symbol) to be transferred to the third gaming state is notified. A gaming machine.

As a result, in the second gaming state, while expecting the winning of the winning combination for the transition to the third gaming state before the limit value is exceeded, the number of gaming media to be acquired varies depending on the mode of the stop operation. At the time of winning, it is possible to create a thrilling game nature of how to perform the stop operation to reduce the number of acquired game media.

In each of the above gaming machines,
The first gaming state is an operating state of a bonus combination (for example, BB1 to BB4, etc.) in which the number of earned gaming media in operation is variable.
As a result, the chance zone can be effectively inserted after the operation of the bonus combination is completed, in combination with the bonus combination in which the number of acquired game media can be changed.

Also, in each of the above gaming machines,
It is possible to shift from the second game state to a fourth game state (for example, RT4) having a lower replay probability than the second game state,
A gaming machine characterized by ending the advantageous state even before the limit value is exceeded when shifting from the second gaming state to the fourth gaming state.
As a result, the player experiences a thrilling game in which the player expects to shift to the third gaming state while noting that the limit value is not exceeded and that the fourth gaming state is not shifted in the second gaming state. it can.

According to the forty-sixth configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the limiter function can be effectively utilized to enhance the interest of the game.

[A game machine having a 47th structure]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-110808), an advantageous section or an advantageous state in which an instruction function for informing a correct pressing order of a pressing order small winning combination is operable. Sets the maximum number of games that can be continued to a predetermined limit value of 1500 G (G; games), and assist replay time ART etc. that activates the instruction function under a high replay probability state No matter how long it continues by stacking etc., if the advantageous section for the ongoing ART etc. exceeds 1500 G from the entry of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and the ART etc. are also forcedly terminated, There is known a game machine that initializes all variables that affect the performance of the instruction function and returns to a normal section or a normal state (paragraph 0009, etc.).

When ending one advantageous interval, it is necessary to initialize all variables that affect the performance of the instruction function, so when the number of games counted over multiple advantageous intervals reaches a predetermined number, It is impossible to improve the performance related to the instruction function, such as determining ART as the benefit of the so-called ceiling when the above is generated for a predetermined number of times.

However, making sure to determine the first ART and the second ART under the same conditions, it is possible to return to ART within a relatively short period such as 32 games or 100 games after the end of the first ART. If it is practically impossible to let the ART run together, the interest in the game will be reduced, and if one advantageous section ends with the end of the ART, the player will be notified when the game is stopped. There is a risk that it will reduce the desire to continue playing.

Here, the transition of the second advantageous zone is performed under the same conditions as the first one, but the game state at the end of the first ART, the game state at the end of the advantageous zone transitioned by the end of the first ART, etc. With reference to this, it is possible to make it easier to enter the ART after the second shift to the advantageous section.

However, in this way, "when the advantageous section ends in a specific game state, in that state, when transitioning to the next advantageous section, compared to when transitioning in other game states It is impossible to realize the performance that the performance related to the instruction function is obviously high because it is understood that the advantageous section is not initialized.”

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be expected to be used for pulling back a specific game such as ART or for a condominium in a short period while maintaining fairness of the game. In order to solve this problem, a gaming machine having the following 47th structure is provided.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Equipped with an advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
The advantageous state is generated in the first game state (for example, RT1) that can be shifted by the end of the specific game (for example, assist replay time ART) during the advantageous state in which the game medium can be increased by the operation of the instruction function. Even though the execution of the specific game is not determined with a relatively high probability, a second game state (for example, RT2 of 100G, etc.) that determines the execution of the specific game with a relatively high probability when an advantageous state occurs. ), and a transition to a third game state (for example, RT3, etc.) that determines the execution of the specific game with a relatively low probability when an advantageous state is generated. A gaming machine to do.

As a result, after the end of the first specific game, in the first game state, if it is possible to shift to the second game state instead of shifting to the third game state, it is possible to identify the second time with a relatively high probability. The execution of the game is decided. Therefore, the execution of the second specific game can be decided within a short period of time from the end of the first specific game, and there can be an expectation for pulling back the specific game or for the continuous play. Since the first gaming state does not determine the execution of the specific game with a relatively high probability even if the advantageous state occurs, "When the advantageous section ends in the first gaming state, the next advantageous state in the first gaming state In the case of shifting to the section, the performance related to the instruction function in the advantageous section is clear as compared with the case of shifting to the second gaming state in which the execution of the specific game is determined with a relatively high probability in other gaming states. It does not correspond to "higher performance" and keeps the game fair.

In the above gaming machines,
A game machine characterized in that the second game state is allowed to stay for a predetermined finite number of times.
As a result, in the second game state, the execution of the specific game can be determined stably for a finite number of times, and it is possible to effectively bring back to the specific game and an expectation for the extended game.

In each of the above gaming machines,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to shift from a fourth gaming state (for example, RT4 or the like) that enables the specific game to the third gaming state in addition to the first gaming state.

As a result, rather than shifting from the fourth gaming state to the third gaming state, by shifting to the first gaming state, it is possible to determine the execution of the specific game with a relatively high probability when the advantageous state is generated. You can expect to shift to the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the game property that the fourth gaming state desires to shift to the first gaming state instead of the third gaming state.

In each of the above gaming machines,
In the fourth game state that enables the specific game, after the specific game is over, the first game state when a transition triggering role (for example, a falling role) that enables the transition to the first game state is won. The combination information of the transition trigger symbol (for example, the combination of the fall trigger symbol) is not notified, but the winning combination in which the number of acquired game media fluctuates depending on the mode of the stop operation (for example, the pushing order winning combination) Etc.) at the time of winning, the instruction information for increasing the number of game media acquired is notified,
A gaming machine characterized by ending the advantageous state after displaying the combination of the triggers for transition to the first gaming state.
As a result, even if the specific game ends in the fourth game state, the number of acquired game media can be increased until the transition to the first game state, which can enhance the interest of the game.

According to the forty-seventh configuration, while maintaining the fairness of the game, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be expected to pull back a specific game such as ART or a long-term resort within a short period of time.

[The 48th configuration game machine]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-110808), an advantageous section or an advantageous state in which an instruction function for informing a correct pressing order of a pressing order small winning combination is operable. Determines the maximum number of games that can be continued to 1500G (G; games), which is the predetermined maximum number of games, and assist replay time ART etc. that activates the instruction function under the high probability of re-playing. No matter how long you continue by stacking additional items, if the advantageous section for the ongoing ART etc. exceeds 1500 G from the entry of the advantageous section, the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated and the ART etc. will also be forcibly terminated. There is known a game machine that initializes all variables that affect the performance of the instruction function and returns to a normal section or a normal state (paragraph 0009, etc.).

When ending one advantageous interval, it is necessary to initialize all variables that affect the performance of the instruction function, so when the number of games counted over multiple advantageous intervals reaches a predetermined number, It is impossible to improve the performance related to the instruction function, such as determining ART as the benefit of the so-called ceiling when the above is generated for a predetermined number of times.

Here, the process of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section needs to be decided in association with the internal winning combination that is randomly selected with a constant probability regardless of the difference in the game state, while once the transition to the advantageous section is performed. The processing related to the instruction function performed during the advantageous section can be added to the instruction function by the common processing including the processing not necessarily related to the lottery such as the game history. As a process related to the instruction function in the advantageous period during filling with the section, it is possible to determine the ART when the ceiling game number is reached without determining the next ART after the end of the previous ART.

However, even in this case, if the period for counting the number of ceiling games exceeds 1500 G, the normal section is inserted after the initialization processing in the middle, and therefore the counting of the number of ceiling games cannot be carried over. It cannot be realized.

Moreover, even if it does not cross 1500G, if the number of ceiling games is reached immediately before reaching 1500G, the period for performing ART is almost eliminated. Therefore, there is a problem that the ceiling function cannot be effectively constructed only by filling the entire gaming period with an advantageous section of 1500G units.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively constructing a ceiling function, and in order to solve this problem, the following 48th structure is provided. Provide a game machine.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
Limiter means for ending the one advantageous state when the number of games generated in the one advantageous state exceeds the upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 G).
The advantageous state control means,
The first operation is performed within a period until the advantageous state is generated so that the number of games in the advantageous state is larger than the number of games in the non-advantageous state, and the one advantageous state ends by the limiter means. A first section (for example, an increase section) in which a game that can be expected to increase the game medium can be executed for a predetermined number of games by operating the instruction function according to the mode, and the first operation mode performed in the first section There is no operation of the instruction function by the second section, and the second section (for example, non-operation) in which the game in which the increase of the game medium cannot be expected compared to the first section can be executed for the number of games obtained by subtracting the predetermined number of games from the upper limit number of games A gaming machine characterized by causing the increase section, etc.).

As a result, the number of games in the advantageous state is larger than the number of games in the non-advantageous state, and it is possible to expect an increase in the number of game media without fail before the end of one advantageous state by the limiter means. The game of the section can be executed for a predetermined number of games. Therefore, if the number of games in which the game is played in the second section and the number of games from the non-favorable state to the generation of the advantageous state are added, it is possible to expect an increase in the game medium. Therefore, the same benefits as those of the ceiling can be effectively given.

In the above gaming machines,
The advantageous state starts from the first section, changes to the second section after the first section, and within the period until the one advantageous state ends by the limiter means, the first section to the second section. A game machine characterized in that the number of changes to is once.
As a result, the number of games in the second section after the first section plus the number of games from the non-advantageous state after the actuation of the limit device to the occurrence of the next advantageous state is approximately the number of ceiling games. Can function as

Instead of this,
The advantageous state starts from the second section, changes to the first section after the second section, and within the period until the one advantageous state ends by the limiter means, the second section to the first section. A game machine characterized in that the number of changes to is once.
Accordingly, the number of games obtained by adding the number of games in the second section to the number of games from the non-favorable state to the generation of the current advantageous state can function as the ceiling game number.

Instead of the above gaming machines,
In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Equipped with an advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
The advantageous state control means,
The advantageous state is generated so that the number of games in the advantageous state is larger than the number of games in the non-advantageous state, and the instruction function is operated in the first operation mode during one advantageous state to play the game. There is no operation of the instruction function according to the first operation mode in the first section in which the game that can be expected to increase in the medium can be executed, and the increase of the game medium is expected compared to the first section. The second section that makes the game that cannot be executed possible is generated,
A gaming machine characterized by ending one advantageous state according to a period of the first section and/or the second section.
As a result, the number of games in the advantageous state is greater than the number of games in the non- advantageous state, and during the one advantageous state, the game in the first section, which is expected to increase the game medium, can be executed without fail. The one advantageous state ends according to the period of the first section and/or the second section, and if the number of games between the end of the one advantageous state and the next occurrence of the first section is consumed, the game is played. We can expect an increase in media. Therefore, the same benefits as those of the ceiling can be effectively given.

Instead of the above gaming machines,
In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Equipped with an advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
The advantageous state control means,
An advantageous state is generated so that the number of games in the advantageous state is larger than the number of games in the non-advantageous state, and one advantageous state is a game medium by operating the instruction function in the first operation mode. There is no operation of the instruction function according to the first operation mode performed in the first section and the first section in which the game that can be expected to be increased can be executed, and the increase of the game medium cannot be expected compared to the first section. A gaming machine characterized by being started in one section of a second section in which a game can be executed and being ended in the other section.
As a result, the number of games in the advantageous state is greater than the number of games in the non- advantageous state, and during the one advantageous state, the game in the first section, which is expected to increase the game medium, can be executed without fail. Since one advantageous state is started in one of the first section and the second section and ended in the other section, even if the second section is started after the end of the second section, the second section If the number of games corresponding to the second section is consumed, an increase in the number of game media can be expected. Therefore, the same benefits as those of the ceiling can be effectively given.

According to the forty-eighth configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the ceiling function can be effectively constructed.

[49th Configuration Gaming Machine]
Conventionally, as described in a patent document (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-110808), an advantageous section or an advantageous state in which an instruction function for informing a correct push order and the like of a push order small win can be operated. Sets the maximum number of games that can be continued to a predetermined maximum number of games of 1500 G (G; games), and assist replay time ART etc. that activates the instruction function under the high replay probability state is added to the number of sets or the number of games. No matter how long it continues by stacking etc., if the advantageous section for the ongoing ART etc. exceeds 1500 G from the entry of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and the ART etc. are also forcedly terminated, A gaming machine having a limiter function for returning to a normal section or a normal state is known (paragraph 0009, etc.).

The limiter function manages not only the number of games, but also the management of the number of games, or instead of managing by the number of games, the number of medals or the number of inserted medals in one advantageous section is subtracted from the number of inserted medals. It is also possible to operate when the one shot ball MY due to the difference number exceeds the predetermined upper limit number, for example, 2400. It is considered that such a limiter function is advantageous in that the number of balls (the number of acquired medals or the number of medals) in one advantageous section is prevented from becoming excessive and the gambling performance is maintained appropriately.

However, if one advantageous section and the next advantageous section are connected in a row, even if the upper limit number of games and the upper limit number of one advantageous section are regulated, the total payout through the whole game will be excessive, eventually. It becomes impossible to maintain a proper gambling property. Therefore, the stay ratio (advantageous section ratio) of the advantageous section occupying the entire game period is set to be less than a predetermined regulation value 70%, or the operation of the instruction function occupying the total number of medals and the operation of the bonus combination. The ratio of the number of medals to be acquired (instruction-winning accessory ratio) must be less than a predetermined regulation value of 70%, or it is necessary to satisfy the ratio requirement for the whole related to either advantageous state.

Here, when the ratio of the instructed winning combination is less than 70%, it is not necessary to set the ratio of the advantageous section to less than 70%. However, in the case of using both the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the bonus combination, the operation of the instruction function is performed. Since the restriction on the total number of medals obtained by the action of the bonus combination and the number of medals obtained by the operation of the bonus combination is difficult, it is difficult to increase both the operation probability of the combination function and the bonus output There is a possibility that the interest in the game may be deteriorated, such as the game play being biased to either the operation of the winning combination.

However, if the advantageous section ratio is less than 70%, it is not necessary to set the instructed bonus product ratio to less than 70%, but if the bonus combination is won in the game in which the instruction function is activated, the instruction function of Since it is a general idea to return to the game in operation, the number of games in which the number of games in operation of the instruction function and the number of games in bonus operation is summed becomes the number of games in the advantageous section, and the advantageous section ratio is set to 70. It is not easy to make it less than %.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and in the case of using the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the bonus combination in combination, while easily clearing the ratio requirement to the whole relating to the advantageous state, the game An object is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance interest, and in order to solve this object, a gaming machine having the following 49th configuration is provided.

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Equipped with an advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
The internal winning combination includes a predetermined bonus combination (for example, BB1 to BB4, etc.),
If the bonus combination is won during the occurrence of the advantageous state, the advantageous state can be ended by the provision of a predetermined ending condition after the winning,
After the end of the operation of the bonus combination, it is possible to shift from a non-advantageous state to a specific gaming state (for example, RT3 or the like) that can receive a lottery that causes an advantageous state for a plurality of times (for example, 100G),
When the specific game state ends other than the end of the bonus combination by winning, a specific game (for example, assist replay time) in which it is possible to increase the game medium by the operation of the instruction function, provided that an advantageous state is generated. A game machine characterized in that execution of ART etc. can be decided.

As a result, the advantageous state can be ended by the provision of a predetermined ending condition after the winning of the bonus combination, and when the advantageous state is generated by the lottery for a plurality of times during the specific game state, the specific game state is determined by the winning of the bonus combination. When the game is ended other than the end, the execution of the specific game in which the game media can be increased by the operation of the instruction function can be determined. For this reason, the advantageous state that was discontinued by the bonus role can be generated again with the specific game state sandwiched between them, and it becomes possible to practically play the advantageous state, and during the game, the interval due to the non-favorable state is not effective. Can be inserted as desired. Therefore, while facilitating the clearing of the advantageous section ratio and/or the ratio-included accessory ratio, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the above gaming machines,
In the specific game state, it is possible to stay until the result of the game for a predetermined limited number of times is obtained when the bonus combination is not won,
A game machine characterized in that a transition is made to the specific game state by displaying a predetermined combination of transition trigger symbols from a return destination game state (for example, RT4) to be transitioned after the operation of the bonus combination is completed.
As a result, the specific game state can stay for a finite number of times after the combination of the predetermined transition trigger symbols is displayed from the return destination game state, so in the specific game state, the game state can be shifted in other game states. Even if a combination of symbols is displayed, the transition of the game state can be avoided. Therefore, in the specific game state, the lottery from the non-advantageous state to the advantageous state can be stably received.

Instead of this,
The specific game state is a return destination game state in which the player can stay until the result of the game for a predetermined limited number of times is obtained when the bonus combination is not won, and is transferred after the operation of the bonus combination is completed. ,
In the specific game state, the combination of symbols for shifting the game state that can be displayed in other game states (for example, 6-option transition lip etc.) is not displayed,
There is no transition of the gaming state based on the winning of the small winning lottery in the gaming state in which the bonus combination including the specific gaming state is drawn (for example, the transition of the bell spilled display based on the winning of the small push winning combination). A gaming machine characterized by being made into something.

As a result, the specific game state can be stayed for a limited number of times after the end of the operation of the bonus combination, so theoretically, there may be a transition of the game state from the display of the combination of symbols from the specific game state. However, in other game states, the combination of symbols for shifting the displayable game state is not displayed, and there is no transition of the game state based on the winning of the small winning combination, so that the specific game state can be maintained. Therefore, in the specific game state, the lottery from the non-advantageous state to the advantageous state can be stably received.

In each of the above gaming machines,
In the case where an advantageous state is generated in a game state other than the specific game state, the probability of determining execution of the specific game is 0 as compared with the case in which the advantageous state is generated in the specific game state A gaming machine characterized by being made low.
As a result, when an advantageous state is generated in the specific game state, the execution of the specific game can be decided by ending without winning the bonus combination, while it is advantageous in the game states other than the specific game state. When the state is generated, the probability of determining the execution of the specific game is relatively low, so the specific game state is effectively functioned as a chance zone in which the determination of the execution of the specific game can be expected with high probability. be able to.

According to the forty-ninth configuration, in a case where the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the bonus combination are used together, a gaming machine which can enhance the interest of the game while easily satisfying the ratio requirement to the whole relating to the advantageous state is provided. be able to.

1... Pachi-slot, 3L, 3C, 3R... Reel, 4... Reel display window, 6... Information display, 11... Display device, 17L, 17C, 17R... Stop button, 18... Sub display device, 71... Main control board, 72... Sub control board, 90... Main control circuit, 91... Microprocessor, 101... Main CPU, 102... Main ROM, 103... Main RAM, 107... Arithmetic circuit, 114... First serial communication circuit, 115... Second serial Communication circuit, 200... Sub control circuit, 201... Sub CPU 201, 301... First interface board, 302... Second interface board

Claims (4)

In the gaming machine which starts the variable display of the symbol based on the start operation of the player and stops the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination and the stop operation of the player,
Equipped with an advantageous state control means capable of generating an advantageous state that enables the operation of the instruction function for informing the information regarding the stop operation of the player,
The first game state that can be shifted by the end of the specific game in the advantageous state in which the game medium can be increased by the operation of the instruction function determines the execution of the specific game with a relatively high probability even if the advantageous state occurs. However, when the advantageous state is generated, the transition to the second game state that determines the execution of the specific game with a relatively high probability is performed, and when the advantageous state is generated, the transition of the specific game is performed with a relatively low probability. A game machine characterized by enabling a transition to a third game state that decides execution. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the second game state is allowed to stay for a predetermined finite number of times. The game machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the fourth game state that enables the specific game can be transferred to the third game state in addition to the first game state. In the fourth game state that enables the specific game, after the completion of the specific game, a combination of transition trigger symbols to the first game state at the time of winning the transition trigger that enables the transition to the first game state. Does not notify the instruction information for not displaying, but notifies the instruction information for increasing the number of acquired game media at the time of winning a small winning combination in which the number of acquired game media varies depending on the mode of the stop operation,
The game machine according to claim 1, 2 or 3, wherein the advantageous state is ended after the combination of the triggers for transition to the first game state is displayed.

Images